User manual

A9155



V6.2.1




3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Edition 01

























Copyright 2004 by ALCATEL SEL AG.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted
without written authorisation from ALCATEL.

ALCATEL SEL AG acknowledges all trademarks mentioned in this document.























Notice
The A9155 software and the program documentation are intended for use by experienced personnel in the fields of transmission engineering and
communication system design. Additional reference material, in particular the referenced CCIR, ETSI, and 3GPP recommendations and reports may be
required for a complete understanding of some aspects of the program.

Restrictions to the License
The software and materials delivered with the A9155 system contain copyrighted material, trade secrets, and other proprietary material and in order to
protect them you may not decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the A9155 software to a human-perceivable form. You may not
modify, network, rent, lease, loan, distribute or create derivative works based upon the software and materials in whole or in part. You may not
electronically transmit the A9155 software from one computer to another or over a network.

Limited Warranty
Use of the A9155 software acknowledges this statement of limited warranty. With respect to the physical disks and physical documentation, ALCATEL SEL
AG warrants these to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of ninety days from the date of delivery. ALCATEL SEL AG disclaims all
other warranties, expressed or implied including the fitness of the program for any purpose. ALCATEL SEL AG assumes no liability for damages, direct or
consequential, loss of profit or other similar claims.




























Table of contents
T
Table of contents


4/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Table of contents


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 5/476


TABLE OF CONTENTS

I GETTING STARTED.............................................................................23
I.1 GENERAL PRESENTATION.............................................................................................23
I.2 WHAT'S NEW IN A9155 V6.2.1.....................................................................................23
I.3 INSTALLING AND REMOVING A9155...............................................................................26
I.3.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................................. 26
I.3.2 WHAT'S INSTALLED WITH A9155 ...................................................................................................................... 26
I.3.3 INSTALLING A9155......................................................................................................................................... 26
I.3.4 REMOVING A9155.......................................................................................................................................... 26
I.3.5 INSTALLING DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING SERVER................................................................................................... 27
I.3.6 REMOVING DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING SERVER.................................................................................................... 27
I.3.7 TROUBLESHOOTINGS AFTER INSTALLATION........................................................................................................ 28
I.4 GETTING HELP ............................................................................................................28
I.4.1 WAYS TO GET ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................................. 28
I.4.2 TECHNICAL SUPPORT ...................................................................................................................................... 29
I.5 RUNNING PROJECT TEMPLATES ....................................................................................29
I.5.1 STARTING A NEW PROJECT .............................................................................................................................. 29
I.5.2 TEMPLATES PROVIDED .................................................................................................................................... 29
I.5.3 CREATING YOUR OWN TEMPLATE...................................................................................................................... 30
I.5.4 BUILDING A PROJECT STEP BY STEP.................................................................................................................. 31
II THE WORKING ENVIRONMENT .........................................................35
II.1 USER INTERFACE BASICS : OVERVIEW ......................................................................35
II.2 WORKING WITH MENUS AND WINDOWS ......................................................................35
II.2.1 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT WINDOW................................................................................................................. 35
II.2.2 WORKING WITH DOCKING OR FLOATING WINDOW................................................................................................ 35
II.2.3 PRINTING THE ACTIVE WINDOW......................................................................................................................... 36
II.3 WORKING WITH MAPS ..............................................................................................36
II.3.1 ZOOMING AND PANNING................................................................................................................................... 36
II.3.2 USING THE PANORAMIC WINDOW ...................................................................................................................... 37
II.3.3 CENTRING THE MAP ........................................................................................................................................ 37
II.3.4 CHOOSING A SCALE ........................................................................................................................................ 38
II.3.5 DEFINING VISIBILITY RANGES ON OBJECTS ......................................................................................................... 38
II.3.6 DISPLAYING RULERS AROUND THE MAP ............................................................................................................. 38
II.3.7 GETTING DISTANCES ON THE MAP..................................................................................................................... 38
II.3.8 DISPLAYED CURSORS...................................................................................................................................... 39
II.3.9 PRINTING A MAP ............................................................................................................................................. 40
II.3.10 EXPORTING MAPS TO EXTERNAL FILES............................................................................................................... 40
II.3.11 EXPORTING MAPS TO OTHER APPLICATIONS....................................................................................................... 41
II.4 WORKING WITH THE EXPLORER.................................................................................41
II.4.1 WORKING WITH THE EXPLORER : OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 41
II.4.2 RENAMING AN OBJECT..................................................................................................................................... 42
II.4.3 DISPLAYING THE OBJECT PROPERTIES............................................................................................................... 42
II.4.4 DELETING AN OBJECT...................................................................................................................................... 42
II.4.5 MANAGING OBJECT VISIBILITY........................................................................................................................... 43
II.5 WORKING WITH DATA TABLES...................................................................................44
II.5.1 ACCESSING DATA TABLE ................................................................................................................................. 44
II.5.2 MANAGING CONTENTS IN TABLES...................................................................................................................... 44
II.5.3 EDITING CONTENTS IN TABLES.......................................................................................................................... 45
II.5.4 OPENING DIALOGS FROM TABLES...................................................................................................................... 45
II.5.5 MANAGING TABLE DISPLAY............................................................................................................................... 46
II.5.6 COPYING AND PASTING IN TABLES..................................................................................................................... 47
II.5.7 PRINTING DATA TABLES................................................................................................................................... 48
II.6 FILTERING/GROUPING/SORTING DATA........................................................................48
II.6.1 SORTING AND FILTERING IN TABLES................................................................................................................... 48
Table of contents


6/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


II.6.2 EXAMPLES OF FILTER IN TABLES ....................................................................................................................... 50
II.6.3 FILTERING RADIO DATA.................................................................................................................................... 50
II.6.4 ADVANCED FILTERING : EXAMPLE..................................................................................................................... 51
II.6.5 ADVANCED FILTERING : COUNTER EXAMPLE 1.................................................................................................... 52
II.6.6 ADVANCED FILTERING : COUNTER EXAMPLE 2.................................................................................................... 52
II.6.7 SORTING A FOLDER......................................................................................................................................... 53
II.6.8 ARRANGING ITEMS IN GROUPS.......................................................................................................................... 53
II.6.9 EXAMPLES OF GROUPING BY ............................................................................................................................ 54
II.6.10 USING A GROUP BY/SORT/FILTER CONFIGURATION.............................................................................................. 55
II.6.11 CREATING SUBFOLDERS .................................................................................................................................. 55
II.6.12 REORGANIZING DATA AFTER MODIFICATIONS...................................................................................................... 55
II.6.13 FILTERING DATA IN A POLYGON......................................................................................................................... 56
II.6.14 REMOVING THE POLYGON FILTER...................................................................................................................... 56
II.7 MANAGING DISPLAY IN A9155..................................................................................56
II.7.1 DEFINING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF ANY ITEM FOLDER................................................................................... 56
II.7.2 MANAGING AND DISPLAYING LEGENDS............................................................................................................... 57
II.7.3 THRESHOLDS, COLOURS AND LEGENDS............................................................................................................. 57
II.7.4 DISPLAYING OBJECT LABELS ON THE MAP .......................................................................................................... 58
II.7.5 USING THE TIPS TOOL TO GET INFORMATION ...................................................................................................... 58
II.8 USING HANDY TOOLS ...............................................................................................59
II.8.1 USING THE UNDO/REDO COMMAND .................................................................................................................. 59
II.8.2 REFRESHING MAPS AND FOLDERS..................................................................................................................... 59
II.8.3 SETTING DOCUMENT PRINTS ............................................................................................................................ 59
II.8.4 LOCATING ANY POINT ON THE MAP .................................................................................................................... 60
II.8.5 LOCATING ANY SITE ON THE MAP ...................................................................................................................... 60
II.8.6 LOCATING ANY VECTOR ON THE MAP ................................................................................................................. 61
II.8.7 SYNCHRONIZING VECTOR SELECTION AND DATA TABLE........................................................................................ 61
II.8.8 USING THE STATUS BAR TO GET INFORMATION ................................................................................................... 61
II.8.9 USING ICONS FROM THE TOOL BAR.................................................................................................................... 62
II.8.10 USING SHORTCUTS IN A9155........................................................................................................................... 63
II.9 TIPS AND TRICKS.....................................................................................................64
II.9.1 HOW TO IMPORT GEO DATA EASILY ................................................................................................................... 64
II.9.2 HOW TO CHANGE GLOBALLY A VALUE FOR ALL THE TRANSMITTER......................................................................... 64
II.9.3 HOW TO FIND EASILY A SITE ON THE MAP ........................................................................................................... 64
II.9.4 HOW TO BE AUTOMATICALLY PLACED IN THE FIND SITE BOX ................................................................................. 64
II.9.5 HOW TO DELETE ALL SITES AND THEIR TRANSMITTERS IN ONE SHOT...................................................................... 64
II.9.6 HOW TO ACCESS THE PROPERTIES OF ANY OBJECT OR GROUP OF OBJECTS .......................................................... 64
II.9.7 HOW TO FILTER DATA RAPIDLY ......................................................................................................................... 65
II.9.8 HOW TO WORK ONLY ON "LIVE" SITES................................................................................................................ 65
II.9.9 HOW TO USE WILDCARD CHARACTERS TO FILTER TEXT-FORMAT FIELDS ................................................................ 65
II.9.10 HOW TO CHANGE GLOBALLY THE NAMES OF ALL THE SITES .................................................................................. 65
II.9.11 HOW TO FIND EASILY AN OBJECT BY ITS NAME IN A FOLDER.................................................................................. 65
II.9.12 HOW TO OPEN OR CLOSE RAPIDLY A FOLDER...................................................................................................... 65
II.9.13 HOW TO FIND EASILY AN OBJECT IN A TABLE....................................................................................................... 66
II.9.14 HOW TO FIND EASILY AN OBJECT ON THE MAP .................................................................................................... 66
II.9.15 HOW TO CUSTOMISE THE COLUMNS DISPLAYED IN A TABLE .................................................................................. 66
II.9.16 HOW TO CUSTOMISE THE TABLE STYLE.............................................................................................................. 66
II.9.17 HOW TO CHANGE GLOBALLY DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF OBJECTS ........................................................................... 66
II.9.18 HOW TO PREDICT SIGNAL LEVEL ON A ROAD....................................................................................................... 66
II.9.19 HOW TO WORK ON A SET OF SITES SELECTED BY A POLYGON............................................................................... 66
II.9.20 HOW TO OBTAIN A LINK BUDGET........................................................................................................................ 67
II.9.21 HOW TO DISPLAY CITY POINTS AND THEIR NAMES ON THE MAP ............................................................................. 67
II.9.22 HOW TO DISPLAY SCRAMBLING CODES ON THE MAP ............................................................................................ 67
II.9.23 HOW TO DEFINE THE DEFAULT SERVER FOR DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING.................................................................. 67
III MANAGING GEOGRAPHIC DATA ......................................................71
III.1 MANAGING GEOGRAPHIC DATA : OVERVIEW..............................................................71
III.2 GEO DATA TYPE SUPPORTED....................................................................................71
III.3 LENGTH/HEIGHT/OFFSET UNITS AND COORDINATE SYSTEMS........................................73
III.3.1 SETTING DEFAULT LENGTH/HEIGHT/OFFSET UNITS .............................................................................................. 73
III.3.2 COORDINATE SYSTEMS : BASIC CONCEPTS ........................................................................................................ 73
III.3.3 DEFINING THE PROJECTION COORDINATE SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 74
III.3.4 DEFINING THE DISPLAY COORDINATE SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 74
Table of contents


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 7/476


III.3.5 CREATING YOUR OWN COORDINATE SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 75
III.4 GEO DATA FORMAT SUPPORTED ...............................................................................76
III.4.1 SUPPORTED GEO DATA FORMATS : OVERVIEW................................................................................................... 76
III.4.2 BIL DATA FORMAT .......................................................................................................................................... 77
III.4.3 TIFF DATA FORMAT ........................................................................................................................................ 77
III.4.4 DXF DATA FORMAT......................................................................................................................................... 78
III.4.5 SHP DATA FORMAT ........................................................................................................................................ 79
III.4.6 MIF DATA FORMAT.......................................................................................................................................... 79
III.4.7 ERDAS IMAGINE DATA FORMAT ......................................................................................................................... 79
III.4.8 OTHER SUPPORTED FORMATS.......................................................................................................................... 79
III.5 MANAGING CLUTTER CLASSES..................................................................................80
III.5.1 IMPORTING A CLUTTER CLASS FILE.................................................................................................................... 80
III.5.2 OPTIMISING THE LOADING OF CLUTTER CLASS FILES ........................................................................................... 80
III.5.3 DESCRIPTION OF MNU FILES........................................................................................................................... 80
III.5.4 MANAGING THE CLUTTER CLASSES ................................................................................................................... 80
III.5.5 ADDING A CLUTTER CLASS ............................................................................................................................... 82
III.5.6 DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON CLUTTER CLASSES .................................................................................................. 82
III.6 MANAGING CLUTTER HEIGHTS ..................................................................................82
III.6.1 IMPORTING A CLUTTER HEIGHT FILE................................................................................................................... 82
III.6.2 MANAGING CLUTTER HEIGHT MAPS ................................................................................................................... 83
III.7 MANAGING DTM MAPS............................................................................................83
III.7.1 IMPORTING A DTM MAP................................................................................................................................... 83
III.7.2 MANAGING DTM MAPS ................................................................................................................................... 84
III.8 MANAGING VECTOR MAPS ........................................................................................84
III.8.1 IMPORTING A VECTOR FILE ............................................................................................................................... 84
III.8.2 MANAGING VECTOR OBJECTS........................................................................................................................... 85
III.8.3 DISPLAYING VECTOR LAYERS OVER PREDICTIONS............................................................................................... 85
III.9 MANAGING SCANNED IMAGES...................................................................................85
III.9.1 IMPORTING SCANNED IMAGES........................................................................................................................... 85
III.9.2 MANAGING SCANNED IMAGES........................................................................................................................... 86
III.10 MANAGING POPULATION MAPS .................................................................................86
III.10.1 IMPORTING A POPULATION MAP......................................................................................................................... 86
III.10.2 MANAGING POPULATION MAPS.......................................................................................................................... 87
III.10.3 DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON POPULATION........................................................................................................... 88
III.10.4 USING POPULATION DATA IN PREDICTION REPORTS............................................................................................. 88
III.11 MANAGING GENERIC MAPS.......................................................................................88
III.11.1 GENERIC MAPS : OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 88
III.11.2 CREATE AN ADVANCED GEO DATA FOLDER......................................................................................................... 89
III.11.3 MANAGING GENERIC MAPS............................................................................................................................... 90
III.11.4 DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON GENERIC DATA........................................................................................................ 90
III.11.5 USING GENERIC MAP DATA IN PREDICTION REPORTS ........................................................................................... 90
III.12 MANAGING GEO DATA FILES AND FOLDERS................................................................91
III.12.1 EMBEDDING - LINKING COMPARISON ................................................................................................................. 91
III.12.2 EMBEDDING GEOGRAPHIC DATA ....................................................................................................................... 91
III.12.3 REPAIRING A BROKEN LINK............................................................................................................................... 92
III.12.4 GROUPING GEO DATA FILES IN DISPLAY FOLDER ................................................................................................. 93
III.12.5 CHECKING THE MAP GEOCODING ...................................................................................................................... 93
III.12.6 SETTING GEO DATA PRIORITY........................................................................................................................... 94
III.13 EDITING GEOGRAPHIC DATA .....................................................................................95
III.13.1 RASTER OBJECTS ........................................................................................................................................... 95
III.13.1.a Creating a clutter or traffic raster polygon........................................................................................ 95
III.13.1.b Editing clutter or traffic raster polygons............................................................................................ 95
III.13.1.c Modifying clutter or traffic raster polygons ....................................................................................... 96
III.13.1.d Deleting clutter or traffic raster polygons.......................................................................................... 96
III.13.1.e Displaying information about raster polygons .................................................................................. 96
III.13.2 VECTOR OBJECTS........................................................................................................................................... 97
III.13.2.a Creating a vector layer..................................................................................................................... 97
III.13.2.b Editing a vector object...................................................................................................................... 97
III.13.2.c Managing vector object shapes ....................................................................................................... 98
III.13.2.d Managing vector object properties................................................................................................... 99
III.14 MANAGING GEOGRAPHIC DATA EXPORT...................................................................100
III.14.1 EXPORTING A CLUTTER CLASS MAP................................................................................................................. 100
III.14.2 SAVING THE EDITED RASTER POLYGONS.......................................................................................................... 101
Table of contents


8/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


III.14.3 EXPORTING A CLUTTER HEIGHT MAP ............................................................................................................... 102
III.14.4 EXPORTING A DTM MAP................................................................................................................................ 102
III.14.5 EXPORTING A VECTOR OBJECT ....................................................................................................................... 103
IV MANAGING RADIO NETWORK DATA..............................................107
IV.1 MANAGING RADIO NETWORK DATA : OVERVIEW.......................................................107
IV.2 SETTING DEFAULT RADIO UNITS ..............................................................................107
IV.3 SITES ...................................................................................................................107
IV.3.1 SITE PROPERTIES ......................................................................................................................................... 107
IV.3.1.a Creating a site................................................................................................................................ 107
IV.3.1.b Naming automatically sites ............................................................................................................ 108
IV.3.1.c Managing site properties................................................................................................................ 108
IV.3.1.d Changing a site position................................................................................................................. 109
IV.3.1.e Managing site altitudes .................................................................................................................. 109
IV.3.1.f Getting distances around sites....................................................................................................... 110
IV.3.1.g Displaying the line of sight area..................................................................................................... 111
IV.3.1.h Setting the display properties of a site........................................................................................... 111
IV.3.1.i Deleting built sites.......................................................................................................................... 111
IV.3.2 SITE LISTS ................................................................................................................................................... 112
IV.3.2.a Creating a site list .......................................................................................................................... 112
IV.3.2.b Managing a site list ........................................................................................................................ 112
IV.3.2.c Exporting a site list......................................................................................................................... 112
IV.3.2.d Importing a site list ......................................................................................................................... 113
IV.3.2.e Displaying site lists......................................................................................................................... 113
IV.3.2.f Filtering site lists ............................................................................................................................ 113
IV.4 ANTENNAS............................................................................................................114
IV.4.1 CREATING AN ANTENNA................................................................................................................................. 114
IV.4.2 MANAGING THE ANTENNA PROPERTIES............................................................................................................ 114
IV.4.3 MODIFYING ANTENNA PARAMETERS IN TABLES ................................................................................................. 115
IV.4.4 COPYING ANTENNA PATTERNS TO THE CLIPBOARD............................................................................................ 116
IV.4.5 IMPORTING ANTENNA PATTERNS ..................................................................................................................... 116
IV.4.6 PRINTING ANTENNA PATTERNS ....................................................................................................................... 117
IV.5 TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................................................117
IV.5.1 TRANSMITTERS : OVERVIEW.......................................................................................................................... 117
IV.5.2 TRANSMITTERS PROPERTIES.......................................................................................................................... 118
IV.5.2.a Creating a transmitter .................................................................................................................... 118
IV.5.2.b Naming automatically transmitters................................................................................................. 118
IV.5.2.c Managing transmitter properties .................................................................................................... 119
IV.5.2.d Moving a transmitter on the map.................................................................................................... 120
IV.5.2.e Adjusting transmitter azimuths....................................................................................................... 120
IV.5.2.f Installing several antennas on a transmitter................................................................................... 121
IV.5.2.g Setting transmitter activity.............................................................................................................. 121
IV.5.2.h Deleting a transmitter..................................................................................................................... 121
IV.5.3 STATION TEMPLATES..................................................................................................................................... 122
IV.5.3.a Creating a station template............................................................................................................ 122
IV.5.3.b Defining station template properties............................................................................................... 122
IV.5.3.c Deleting a station template ............................................................................................................ 123
IV.5.3.d Dropping a station from a template................................................................................................ 123
IV.5.3.e Dropping a station on an existing site............................................................................................ 124
IV.5.3.f Managing a multi-sectored station................................................................................................. 124
IV.5.3.g Merging hexagonal groups of base stations .................................................................................. 124
IV.6 REPEATERS ..........................................................................................................125
IV.6.1 REPEATERS : OVERVIEW............................................................................................................................... 125
IV.6.2 CREATING A REPEATER ................................................................................................................................. 125
IV.6.3 MANAGING REPEATER PROPERTIES ................................................................................................................ 125
IV.6.4 SETTING DONOR PROPERTIES OF A REPEATER ................................................................................................. 126
IV.6.5 SETTING COVERAGE PROPERTIES OF A REPEATER............................................................................................ 126
IV.6.6 UPDATING REPEATER PARAMETERS................................................................................................................ 127
IV.6.7 USING REPEATERS IN CALCULATIONS.............................................................................................................. 127
Table of contents


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 9/476


IV.7 RADIO EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................128
IV.7.1 RADIO EQUIPMENT : OVERVIEW...................................................................................................................... 128
IV.7.2 MANAGING TMA EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................... 128
IV.7.3 MANAGING FEEDER EQUIPMENT...................................................................................................................... 128
IV.7.4 MANAGING BTS EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................................................... 129
IV.7.5 ASSIGNING RADIO EQUIPMENT TO TRANSMITTER............................................................................................... 129
IV.7.6 USING EQUIPMENT TO COMPUTE TRANSMITTER LOSSES .................................................................................... 130
IV.7.7 MANAGING RADIO EQUIPMENT IN A DATABASE STRUCTURE ................................................................................ 130
V MANAGING COMPUTATIONS IN A9155...........................................135
V.1 COMPUTATIONS IN A9155 : OVERVIEW...................................................................135
V.2 COMPUTING IN POLYGONAL AREAS .........................................................................135
V.2.1 COMPUTATION AND FOCUS ZONES : OVERVIEW................................................................................................ 135
V.2.2 COMPUTATION AND FOCUS ZONES : EFFECTS................................................................................................... 136
V.2.3 DRAWING A COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE.......................................................................................................... 137
V.2.4 CREATING A COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE FROM POLYGONS ............................................................................... 137
V.2.5 IMPORTING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE FROM A FILE.................................................................................. 138
V.2.6 EXPORTING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE TO A FILE ..................................................................................... 138
V.2.7 DELETING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE ..................................................................................................... 138
V.2.8 RESIZING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE ...................................................................................................... 139
V.2.9 MOVING A POINT OF THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE ....................................................................................... 139
V.2.10 ADDING A POINT IN THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE......................................................................................... 139
V.2.11 REMOVING A POINT IN THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE..................................................................................... 139
V.2.12 DISPLAYING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE SIZE............................................................................................ 139
V.2.13 DISPLAYING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE COORDINATES ............................................................................. 139
V.3 PROPAGATION MODELS..........................................................................................140
V.3.1 PROPAGATION MODELS : OVERVIEW............................................................................................................... 140
V.3.2 PROPAGATION MODEL GENERAL INFORMATION................................................................................................. 140
V.3.2.a Selecting propagation models........................................................................................................ 140
V.3.2.b Setting propagation model priority ................................................................................................. 141
V.3.2.c Displaying general information on propagation model ................................................................... 142
V.3.2.d Choosing the appropriate propagation model ................................................................................ 142
V.3.2.e Managing propagation model folders............................................................................................. 143
V.3.3 PROPAGATION MODELS AVAILABLE IN A9155................................................................................................... 143
V.3.3.a Working with Longley-Rice model.................................................................................................. 143
V.3.3.b Working with ITU 526-5 model....................................................................................................... 143
V.3.3.c Working with ITU 370-7 model (Vienna 93) ................................................................................... 144
V.3.3.d Working with WLL (Wireless Local Loop) model............................................................................ 144
V.3.3.e Working with Okumura-Hata model ............................................................................................... 145
V.3.3.e.i Working with Okumura-Hata model : Overview........................................................................................... 145
V.3.3.e.ii Considering losses due to diffraction (Okumura-Hata) ................................................................................ 145
V.3.3.e.iii Defining an environment default formula (Okumura-Hata)........................................................................... 145
V.3.3.e.iv Assigning environment formulas to clutter types (Okumura-Hata) ............................................................... 146
V.3.3.e.v Creating/Modifying environment formulas (Okumura-Hata)......................................................................... 146
V.3.3.f Working with Cost-Hata model ...................................................................................................... 146
V.3.3.f.i Working with Cost-Hata model : Overview.................................................................................................. 146
V.3.3.f.ii Considering losses due to diffraction (Cost-Hata)........................................................................................ 147
V.3.3.f.iii Defining an environment default formula (Cost-Hata).................................................................................. 147
V.3.3.f.iv Assigning environment formulas to clutter types (Cost-Hata) ...................................................................... 147
V.3.3.f.v Creating/Modifying environment formulas (Cost-Hata) ................................................................................ 148
V.3.3.g Working with Standard Propagation model .................................................................................... 148
V.3.3.g.i Working with Standard Propagation model : Overview................................................................................ 148
V.3.3.g.ii Accessing Standard Propagation Model properties..................................................................................... 149
V.3.3.g.iii Adjusting Standard Propagation Model parameters .................................................................................... 149
V.3.3.g.iv SPM General tab window............................................................................................................................ 149
V.3.3.g.v SPM Parameters tab window...................................................................................................................... 150
V.3.3.g.v.i Transmitter effective antenna height SPM........................................................................................... 151
V.3.3.g.v.ii Diffraction computation in SPM........................................................................................................... 154
V.3.3.g.v.iii Deygout .............................................................................................................................................. 155
V.3.3.g.v.iv Epstein-Peterson ................................................................................................................................ 156
V.3.3.g.v.v Millington ............................................................................................................................................ 157
V.3.3.g.v.vi Receiver effective antenna height ....................................................................................................... 157
V.3.3.g.v.vii Sample values for SPM formula parameters ....................................................................................... 157
V.3.3.g.v.viii Correction for hilly regions................................................................................................................... 158
Table of contents


10/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


V.3.3.g.vi SPM Clutter tab window.............................................................................................................................. 158
V.3.3.g.vi.i SPM Clutter tab window...................................................................................................................... 158
V.3.3.g.vi.ii Typical values or losses per clutter class (SPM).................................................................................. 159
V.3.3.g.vii SPM Calibration tab window ....................................................................................................................... 160
V.3.3.g.vii.i SPM Calibration tab window ............................................................................................................... 160
V.3.3.g.vii.ii Displaying statistics before calibration (SPM)...................................................................................... 160
V.3.3.g.vii.iii Calibrating the Standard Propagation Model ....................................................................................... 161
V.3.3.g.vii.iv To calibrate one variable..................................................................................................................... 162
V.3.3.g.vii.v To calibrate several variables.............................................................................................................. 163
V.3.3.h Working with WinProp-ProMan model ........................................................................................... 163
V.3.3.h.i Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Overview........................................................................................ 163
V.3.3.h.ii Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Physical background on Urban Propagation Models....................... 163
V.3.3.h.iii Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Required databases ....................................................................... 164
V.3.3.h.iv Working with WinProp-ProMan model: COST 231 Walfisch-Ikegami .......................................................... 164
V.3.3.h.v Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Intelligent Ray Tracing.................................................................... 164
V.3.3.h.v.i Specular reflection .............................................................................................................................. 165
V.3.3.h.v.ii Diffraction............................................................................................................................................ 165
V.3.3.h.v.iii Multiple diffraction............................................................................................................................... 165
V.3.3.h.v.iv Scattering............................................................................................................................................ 165
V.3.3.h.v.v Penetration ......................................................................................................................................... 165
V.3.3.h.v.vi Ray tracing.......................................................................................................................................... 166
V.3.3.h.vi Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Quick Start ..................................................................................... 166
V.3.3.h.vii Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Important hints................................................................................ 170
V.4 TUNING RECEPTION PARAMETERS...........................................................................170
V.4.1 SETTING THE RECEIVER PROPERTIES .............................................................................................................. 170
V.4.2 COMPUTING SHADOWING MARGINS PER CLUTTER CLASS ................................................................................... 171
V.4.3 USING RELIABILITY LEVEL IN PREDICTIONS ....................................................................................................... 172
V.5 COVERAGE STUDIES ..............................................................................................173
V.5.1 COVERAGE STUDIES : OVERVIEW................................................................................................................... 173
V.5.2 COVERAGE PREDICTION GENERAL SETTINGS.................................................................................................... 173
V.5.2.a Setting calculation areas................................................................................................................ 173
V.5.2.b Setting calculation resolutions ....................................................................................................... 174
V.5.2.c Creating coverage calculations...................................................................................................... 175
V.5.2.d Creating coverage studies per group of transmitter ....................................................................... 175
V.5.2.e Accessing coverage prediction properties ..................................................................................... 176
V.5.2.f Setting coverage resolutions.......................................................................................................... 176
V.5.2.g Organising result outputs of a coverage study............................................................................... 177
V.5.2.h Defining the coverage conditions................................................................................................... 177
V.5.2.i Managing prediction display .......................................................................................................... 178
V.5.2.j Running coverage calculations...................................................................................................... 179
V.5.2.k Locking coverage studies .............................................................................................................. 180
V.5.3 PREDICTION STUDY TEMPLATES ..................................................................................................................... 180
V.5.3.a Calculating a coverage by transmitter............................................................................................ 180
V.5.3.b Calculating a coverage by signal level ........................................................................................... 181
V.5.3.c Calculating overlapping areas........................................................................................................ 181
V.5.3.d Creating a coverage study template .............................................................................................. 182
V.5.3.e Deleting a coverage study template............................................................................................... 182
V.5.4 PATH LOSS MANAGEMENT.............................................................................................................................. 182
V.5.4.a Storage of path loss matrices ........................................................................................................ 182
V.5.4.b Locking path loss results................................................................................................................ 183
V.5.4.c Checking path loss results validity ................................................................................................. 184
V.5.4.d Exporting main path loss matrices ................................................................................................. 184
V.5.5 PREDICTION COVERAGE OUTPUTS .................................................................................................................. 185
V.5.5.a Managing prediction results : Overview......................................................................................... 185
V.5.5.b Displaying prediction reports.......................................................................................................... 186
V.5.5.c Exporting prediction reports........................................................................................................... 186
V.5.5.d Printing prediction reports.............................................................................................................. 186
V.5.5.e Exporting prediction coverages...................................................................................................... 186
V.5.5.f Coverage prediction available exports........................................................................................... 187
V.6 POINT ANALYSIS PREDICTIONS................................................................................187
V.6.1 POINT ANALYSIS PREDICTIONS : OVERVIEW..................................................................................................... 187
V.6.2 DISPLAYING POINT ANALYSIS RESULTS ............................................................................................................ 188
V.6.2.a Using the receiver .......................................................................................................................... 188
V.6.2.b Studying the profile from a transmitter ........................................................................................... 188
V.6.2.c Displaying predicted signal levels at a point .................................................................................. 189
Table of contents


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 11/476


V.6.2.d Listing all signal and C/I levels at a point ....................................................................................... 189
V.6.3 MANAGING POINT ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................... 190
V.6.3.a Selecting a transmitter in point analysis......................................................................................... 190
V.6.3.b Selecting the power definition item in point analysis...................................................................... 190
V.6.3.c Adjusting reliability level in a point analysis ................................................................................... 190
V.6.3.d Displaying signal levels or losses in point analysis ........................................................................ 191
V.6.3.e Displaying link budget at a receiver ............................................................................................... 191
V.6.3.f Using a site as a target for point analysis ...................................................................................... 191
V.6.3.g Displaying SPM parameters over a profile analysis....................................................................... 191
V.6.3.h Exporting a point analysis study .................................................................................................... 192
V.6.3.i Printing a point analysis study ....................................................................................................... 192
V.7 CALCULATION TOOLS IN A9155..............................................................................193
V.7.1 A9155 FEATURES FOR COMPUTING................................................................................................................ 193
V.7.2 DISTRIBUTING CALCULATIONS ON SEVERAL PCS............................................................................................... 193
V.7.3 DISPLAYING CALCULATION EVENTS IN A LOG WINDOW ....................................................................................... 194
V.7.4 EXPORTING CALCULATION EVENTS IN A LOG FILE .............................................................................................. 194
VI GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA PROJECT MANAGEMENT ......................197
VI.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE PROJECTS : OVERVIEW...........................................................197
VI.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE PROJECTS PROTOCOL.............................................................198
VI.3 DEFINING GSM/GPRS/EDGE RESOURCES............................................................199
VI.3.1 DEFINING GSM/GPRS/EDGE RESOURCES : OVERVIEW................................................................................. 199
VI.3.2 FREQUENCIES .............................................................................................................................................. 199
VI.3.2.a Frequencies : Overview................................................................................................................. 199
VI.3.2.b Managing frequency bands............................................................................................................ 199
VI.3.2.c Managing frequency domains and groups..................................................................................... 200
VI.3.3 HSNS ......................................................................................................................................................... 201
VI.3.3.a HSNs : Overview............................................................................................................................ 201
VI.3.3.b Managing HSN domains and groups ............................................................................................. 201
VI.3.4 BSICS ........................................................................................................................................................ 202
VI.3.4.a BSICs : Overview........................................................................................................................... 202
VI.3.4.b Defining BSIC format ..................................................................................................................... 202
VI.3.4.c Managing BSIC domains and groups ............................................................................................ 203
VI.4 MANAGING GSM/GPRS/EDGE RADIO DATA..........................................................203
VI.4.1 MANAGING GSM/GPRS/EDGE RADIO DATA : OVERVIEW ............................................................................... 203
VI.4.2 HCS LAYERS ............................................................................................................................................... 204
VI.4.2.a Hierarchical cells : Overview.......................................................................................................... 204
VI.4.2.b Managing HCS layers.................................................................................................................... 204
VI.4.2.c Assigning HCS layers to transmitters............................................................................................. 204
VI.4.3 TIMESLOT CONFIGURATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 205
VI.4.3.a Timeslot configurations : Overview................................................................................................ 205
VI.4.3.b Managing timeslot configurations................................................................................................... 205
VI.4.4 CELL TYPES ................................................................................................................................................. 205
VI.4.4.a Cell types : Overview..................................................................................................................... 205
VI.4.4.b TRX types : definition..................................................................................................................... 205
VI.4.4.c Managing cell types ....................................................................................................................... 206
VI.4.4.d Cell type parameters...................................................................................................................... 206
VI.4.4.e Examples of cell types ................................................................................................................... 208
VI.4.4.f Assigning cell types to transmitters................................................................................................ 210
VI.4.5 SUBCELLS.................................................................................................................................................... 210
VI.4.5.a Managing subcells in transmitters.................................................................................................. 210
VI.4.5.b Displaying the subcell list............................................................................................................... 211
VI.4.5.c Subcell property details.................................................................................................................. 211
VI.4.6 GPRS/EDGE EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................................... 214
VI.4.6.a Creating a GPRS/EDGE equipment .............................................................................................. 214
VI.4.6.b Managing GPRS/EDGE equipment properties .............................................................................. 214
VI.4.6.c Setting coding schemes parameters.............................................................................................. 214
VI.4.6.d Displaying rate graphs ................................................................................................................... 215
VI.4.6.e Setting GPRS/EDGE transmitters.................................................................................................. 215
Table of contents


12/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VI.5 GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT...........................................................216
VI.5.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT : OVERVIEW................................................................................. 216
VI.5.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC DATA......................................................................................... 216
VI.5.2.a GSM/GPRS/EDGE services .......................................................................................................... 216
VI.5.2.a.i Creating GSM/GPRS/EDGE services ......................................................................................................... 216
VI.5.2.a.ii Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE service parameters........................................................................................... 217
VI.5.2.a.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE services .......................................................................................... 217
VI.5.2.b GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility types.................................................................................................. 218
VI.5.2.b.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility type................................................................................................ 218
VI.5.2.b.ii Setting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility type.................................................................................................. 218
VI.5.2.b.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility types.................................................................................. 219
VI.5.2.c GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminals......................................................................................................... 219
VI.5.2.c.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminal....................................................................................................... 219
VI.5.2.c.ii Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminal parameters ......................................................................................... 220
VI.5.2.c.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminals......................................................................................... 220
VI.5.2.d GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profiles.................................................................................................... 220
VI.5.2.d.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile.................................................................................................. 220
VI.5.2.d.ii Adjusting GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile properties................................................................................... 221
VI.5.2.d.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profiles.................................................................................... 221
VI.5.2.e GSM/GPRS/EDGE environments.................................................................................................. 222
VI.5.2.e.i Creating a type of GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment .................................................................................... 222
VI.5.2.e.ii Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment parameters .................................................................................. 222
VI.5.2.e.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment types .......................................................................... 223
VI.5.2.e.iv Subscriber clutter weighting in GSM/GPRS/EDGE environments................................................................ 223
VI.5.3 GSM/GPRS/EDGE MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY........................................................................... 223
VI.5.3.a GSM/GPRS/EDGE multi-service traffic cartography : Overview.................................................... 223
VI.5.3.b GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic maps ................................................................................ 224
VI.5.3.b.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map............................................................................... 224
VI.5.3.b.ii Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map ............................................................................. 224
VI.5.3.b.iii Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic maps.............................................................................. 224
VI.5.3.b.iv Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map............................................................................. 225
VI.5.3.b.v Displaying statistics on GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic maps.......................................................... 226
VI.5.3.c GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic maps .................................................................................. 226
VI.5.3.c.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map................................................................................. 226
VI.5.3.c.ii Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map............................................................................... 226
VI.5.3.c.iii Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic maps................................................................................ 227
VI.5.3.c.iv Examples of GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic data ............................................................................. 228
VI.5.3.c.v Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map............................................................................... 229
VI.5.3.d GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic maps............................................................................................... 229
VI.5.3.d.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map............................................................................................. 229
VI.5.3.d.ii Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map ........................................................................................... 230
VI.5.3.d.iii Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic maps............................................................................................ 230
VI.5.3.d.iv Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map........................................................................................... 231
VI.5.3.e GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic maps................................................................................. 231
VI.5.3.e.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map............................................................................... 231
VI.5.3.e.ii Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map.............................................................................. 232
VI.5.3.e.iii Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic maps.............................................................................. 232
VI.5.3.e.iv Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map ............................................................................. 233
VI.5.3.f GSM/GPRS/EDGE cumulated traffic ............................................................................................. 233
VI.5.3.f.i Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE cumulated traffic.................................................................................... 233
VI.5.3.f.ii Exporting the GSM/GPRS/EDGE cumulated traffic..................................................................................... 233
VI.5.4 GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC ANALYSIS ......................................................................................................... 234
VI.5.4.a GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic analysis : Overview............................................................................... 234
VI.5.4.b Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic capture ................................................................................ 234
VI.5.4.c GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic capture outputs..................................................................................... 235
VI.5.4.d Using a GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic analysis.................................................................................... 235
VI.6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE NETWORK DIMENSIONING........................................................235
VI.6.1 SETTING GSM/GPRS/EDGE DIMENSIONING MODELS..................................................................................... 235
VI.6.2 DIMENSIONING GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRANSMITTERS........................................................................................ 236
VI.6.3 COMMITING DIMENSIONING OUTPUTS IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE............................................................................ 237
VI.7 GSM/GPRS/EDGE RESOURCES ALLOCATION.......................................................238
VI.7.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE RESOURCES ALLOCATION : OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 238
VI.7.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE NEIGHBOURS................................................................................................................. 239
VI.7.2.a Allocating GSM/GPRS/EDGE transmitter neighbours manually.................................................... 239
VI.7.2.b Allocating GSM/GPRS/EDGE transmitter neighbours automatically ............................................. 239
VI.7.2.c Displaying current GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbour list..................................................................... 241
VI.7.2.d Deleting allocated GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours ........................................................................ 241
Table of contents


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 13/476


VI.7.2.e Displaying GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours on the map ................................................................. 241
VI.7.3 ALLOCATING GSM/GPRS/EGPRS RESOURCES MANUALLY IN A9155.............................................................. 242
VI.7.3.a Assigning BSIC domains to transmitters........................................................................................ 242
VI.7.3.b Assigning manually BSICs to transmitters ..................................................................................... 242
VI.7.3.c Allocating manually a BCCH to transmitters .................................................................................. 243
VI.7.3.d Creating TRXs in transmitters........................................................................................................ 243
VI.7.3.e Managing TRXs in transmitters...................................................................................................... 243
VI.7.3.f Displaying the TRX list................................................................................................................... 244
VI.7.3.g TRX property details ...................................................................................................................... 244
VI.7.4 USING AN AFP TO ALLOCATE RESOURCES IN A9155........................................................................................ 245
VI.7.4.a Adjusting AFP parameters from the data model ............................................................................ 245
VI.7.4.b Defining exceptional separations for frequency allocation............................................................. 245
VI.7.4.c Using the generic AFP interface .................................................................................................... 246
VI.7.4.d AFP Step 1 : generic inputs ........................................................................................................... 247
VI.7.4.e AFP Step 2 : loading and checking the network ............................................................................ 248
VI.7.4.f AFP Step 3 : generic AFP settings................................................................................................. 248
VI.7.4.g AFP Step 4 : generic outputs......................................................................................................... 250
VI.7.5 FREQUENCY PLAN ANALYSIS .......................................................................................................................... 251
VI.7.5.a Checking the frequency plan consistency...................................................................................... 251
VI.7.5.b Checking consistency between transmitters and subcells ............................................................. 252
VI.7.5.c Using the channel search tool in GSM/GPRS/EDGE..................................................................... 253
VI.7.5.d Computing KPIs in GSM/GPRS/EDGE.......................................................................................... 253
VI.8 SPECIFIC GSM/GPRS/EDGE PREDICTION STUDIES................................................254
VI.8.1 SETTING SPECIFIC COVERAGE CONDITIONS IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE STUDIES...................................................... 254
VI.8.2 STUDYING INTERFERED ZONE PREDICTIONS..................................................................................................... 256
VI.8.3 COMPUTING A COVERAGE STUDY BY C/I LEVEL ................................................................................................ 257
VI.8.4 STUDYING INTERFERENCES WITH THE POINT ANALYSIS...................................................................................... 257
VI.8.5 CREATING A COVERAGE BY GPRS/EDGE CODING SCHEMES ........................................................................... 259
VI.8.6 COMPUTING A COVERAGE BY GPRS/EDGE RATE PER TIMESLOT...................................................................... 259
VII WCDMA/UMTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT.......................................263
VII.1 UMTS PROJECTS : OVERVIEW...............................................................................263
VII.2 UMTS SPECIFIC CONCEPTS ...................................................................................263
VII.3 UMTS PROJECTS PROTOCOL.................................................................................264
VII.4 MANAGING UMTS RADIO DATA..............................................................................264
VII.4.1 MANAGING UMTS RADIO DATA : OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 264
VII.4.2 UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT................................................................................................................................ 264
VII.4.2.a Creating UMTS site equipment ...................................................................................................... 264
VII.4.2.b Managing UMTS site equipment.................................................................................................... 265
VII.4.2.c Managing channel element consumption per UMTS site equipment ............................................. 265
VII.4.2.d Assigning UMTS site equipment to sites........................................................................................ 266
VII.4.3 TRANSMITTER UMTS SPECIFIC PARAMETERS.................................................................................................. 266
VII.4.3.a Defining the transmitter UMTS global parameters ......................................................................... 266
VII.4.4 UMTS CELLS .............................................................................................................................................. 267
VII.4.4.a UMTS Cells : definition .................................................................................................................. 267
VII.4.4.b Creating a UMTS Cell .................................................................................................................... 267
VII.4.4.c Managing UMTS Cell properties.................................................................................................... 267
VII.4.4.d Power parameters in UMTS........................................................................................................... 268
VII.4.4.e Active set parameters in UMTS ..................................................................................................... 268
VII.5 WCDMA/UMTS TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT ................................................................268
VII.5.1 WCDMA/UMTS TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT : OVERVIEW...................................................................................... 268
VII.5.2 WCDMA/UMTS MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC DATA .............................................................................................. 269
VII.5.2.a UMTS services............................................................................................................................... 269
VII.5.2.a.i Creating UMTS services ............................................................................................................................. 269
VII.5.2.a.ii Setting UMTS service parameters............................................................................................................... 270
VII.5.2.a.iii Managing globally UMTS services .............................................................................................................. 270
VII.5.2.b UMTS mobility types...................................................................................................................... 271
VII.5.2.b.i Creating a UMTS mobility type.................................................................................................................... 271
VII.5.2.b.ii UMTS active set conditions......................................................................................................................... 271
VII.5.2.b.iii Setting a UMTS mobility type...................................................................................................................... 271
Table of contents


14/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VII.5.2.b.iv Managing globally UMTS mobility types...................................................................................................... 271
VII.5.2.c UMTS terminal equipment ............................................................................................................. 272
VII.5.2.c.i Creating a UMTS terminal........................................................................................................................... 272
VII.5.2.c.ii Setting UMTS terminal parameters ............................................................................................................. 272
VII.5.2.c.iii Managing globally UMTS terminals............................................................................................................. 273
VII.5.2.d UMTS user profiles ........................................................................................................................ 273
VII.5.2.d.i Creating a UMTS user profile...................................................................................................................... 273
VII.5.2.d.ii Adjusting UMTS user profile properties....................................................................................................... 274
VII.5.2.d.iii Managing globally UMTS user profiles........................................................................................................ 274
VII.5.2.e UMTS environments ...................................................................................................................... 275
VII.5.2.e.i Creating a type of UMTS environment ........................................................................................................ 275
VII.5.2.e.ii Setting UMTS environment parameters ...................................................................................................... 275
VII.5.2.e.iii Managing globally UMTS environment types .............................................................................................. 276
VII.5.2.e.iv Displaying statistics per UMTS environment type........................................................................................ 276
VII.5.2.e.v Subscriber clutter weighting in UMTS environment ..................................................................................... 277
VII.5.3 WCDMA/UMTS MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY ................................................................................ 277
VII.5.3.a WCDMA/UMTS multi-service traffic cartography : Overview......................................................... 277
VII.5.3.b WCDMA/UMTS environment traffic maps...................................................................................... 277
VII.5.3.b.i Creating a UMTS environment traffic map .................................................................................................. 277
VII.5.3.b.ii Importing a UMTS environment traffic map................................................................................................. 278
VII.5.3.b.iii Managing UMTS environment traffic maps ................................................................................................. 278
VII.5.3.b.iv Exporting a UMTS environment traffic map................................................................................................. 279
VII.5.3.b.v Displaying statistics on UMTS environment traffic maps ............................................................................. 279
VII.5.3.c WCDMA/UMTS user profile traffic maps........................................................................................ 280
VII.5.3.c.i Creating a UMTS user profile traffic map .................................................................................................... 280
VII.5.3.c.ii Importing a UMTS user profile traffic map................................................................................................... 280
VII.5.3.c.iii Managing UMTS user profile traffic maps ................................................................................................... 281
VII.5.3.c.iv Examples of UMTS user profile traffic data ................................................................................................. 281
VII.5.3.c.v Exporting a UMTS user profile traffic map................................................................................................... 282
VII.5.3.d WCDMA/UMTS live traffic maps.................................................................................................... 282
VII.5.3.d.i Creating a UMTS live traffic map................................................................................................................. 282
VII.5.3.d.ii Importing a UMTS live traffic map............................................................................................................... 283
VII.5.3.d.iii Managing UMTS live traffic maps................................................................................................................ 284
VII.5.3.d.iv Exporting a UMTS live traffic map............................................................................................................... 284
VII.6 UMTS SIMULATIONS .............................................................................................284
VII.6.1 UMTS SIMULATIONS : OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. 284
VII.6.2 MANAGING UMTS SIMULATIONS.................................................................................................................... 285
VII.6.2.a Creating UMTS power control simulations..................................................................................... 285
VII.6.2.b Managing UMTS simulation properties.......................................................................................... 285
VII.6.2.c UMTS power control simulation inputs........................................................................................... 286
VII.6.2.d Replaying a UMTS simulation........................................................................................................ 287
VII.6.2.e Generator initialisation - Replay differences (UMTS) ..................................................................... 288
VII.6.2.f Averaging UMTS simulations......................................................................................................... 288
VII.6.2.g Adding a simulation to an existing group of UMTS simulations ..................................................... 288
VII.6.3 UMTS SIMULATION PROCESS........................................................................................................................ 288
VII.6.3.a Power control UMTS simulation concepts ..................................................................................... 288
VII.6.3.b UMTS simulation convergence method ......................................................................................... 290
VII.6.3.c Admission control in UMTS simulations......................................................................................... 291
VII.6.3.d Channel element management in UMTS simulations .................................................................... 291
VII.6.3.e OVSF codes management............................................................................................................. 291
VII.6.3.f OVSF codes availability................................................................................................................. 292
VII.6.3.g Modelling shadowing in UMTS simulations.................................................................................... 292
VII.6.4 UMTS SIMULATION RESULTS SUMMARY.......................................................................................................... 294
VII.6.4.a Displaying UMTS simulation requirements and results.................................................................. 294
VII.6.4.b Displaying input parameters of an existing UMTS simulation ........................................................ 294
VII.6.4.c Summarising results per site (UMTS projects)............................................................................... 295
VII.6.4.d Summarising results per cell (UMTS projects)............................................................................... 296
VII.6.4.e Committing simulated loads to cells (UMTS projects).................................................................... 296
VII.6.4.f Summarising results per mobile (UMTS projects).......................................................................... 297
VII.6.4.g Displaying shadowing values of a UMTS simulation...................................................................... 298
VII.6.4.h Managing UMTS simulation results on the map ............................................................................ 298
VII.6.5 UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................................ 299
VII.6.5.a UMTS Simulation outputs on sites................................................................................................. 299
VII.6.5.b UMTS Simulation outputs on cells ................................................................................................. 300
VII.6.5.c UMTS Average simulation outputs on cells ................................................................................... 300
Table of contents


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 15/476


VII.6.5.d UMTS Standard deviation of simulation outputs on cells............................................................... 300
VII.6.5.e UMTS Simulation outputs on cell components .............................................................................. 300
VII.6.5.f UMTS Simulation outputs on mobiles............................................................................................ 301
VII.6.5.g UMTS Simulation outputs on mobile components ......................................................................... 301
VII.7 SPECIFIC WCDMA/UMTS PREDICTION STUDIES.....................................................302
VII.7.1 UMTS PREDICTION STUDIES : OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 302
VII.7.2 UMTS PREDICTION PROCESS........................................................................................................................ 303
VII.7.2.a Predicting on given UMTS carriers ................................................................................................ 303
VII.7.2.b Modelling shadowing in UMTS predictions .................................................................................... 303
VII.7.3 MANAGING UMTS PREDICTIONS.................................................................................................................... 304
VII.7.3.a Creating predictions from modified UMTS simulations .................................................................. 304
VII.7.3.b Managing UMTS prediction display ............................................................................................... 304
VII.7.4 UMTS PREDICTION STUDIES.......................................................................................................................... 305
VII.7.4.a Analysing pilot reception (UMTS)................................................................................................... 305
VII.7.4.b Studying service area (Eb/Nt) downlink (UMTS)............................................................................ 306
VII.7.4.c Studying service area (Eb/Nt) uplink (UMTS) ................................................................................ 307
VII.7.4.d Studying effective service area (UMTS)......................................................................................... 308
VII.7.4.e Defining handoff status (UMTS)..................................................................................................... 309
VII.7.4.f Studying downlink total noise (UMTS) ........................................................................................... 310
VII.7.4.g Calculating pilot pollution (UMTS).................................................................................................. 311
VII.7.4.h Analysing a scenario at a point in UMTS projects.......................................................................... 312
VII.8 WCDMA/UMTS RESOURCES ALLOCATION............................................................313
VII.8.1 WCDMA/UMTS RESOURCES ALLOCATION : OVERVIEW.................................................................................. 313
VII.8.2 UMTS NEIGHBOURS..................................................................................................................................... 314
VII.8.2.a Allocating UMTS cell neighbours manually.................................................................................... 314
VII.8.2.b Allocating UMTS cell neighbours automatically ............................................................................. 314
VII.8.2.c Displaying current UMTS neighbour list......................................................................................... 315
VII.8.2.d Deleting allocated UMTS neighbours............................................................................................. 315
VII.8.2.e Displaying UMTS neighbours on the map...................................................................................... 316
VII.8.3 SCRAMBLING CODES ..................................................................................................................................... 316
VII.8.3.a Scrambling codes : Overview ........................................................................................................ 316
VII.8.3.b Creating scrambling code domains and groups............................................................................. 317
VII.8.3.c Assigning a scrambling code domain to a cell ............................................................................... 317
VII.8.3.d Allocating scrambling codes to UMTS cells manually.................................................................... 317
VII.8.3.e Defining exceptional pairs for scrambling code allocation.............................................................. 318
VII.8.3.f Allocating scrambling codes to UMTS cells automatically ............................................................. 318
VII.8.3.g Scrambling code allocation process............................................................................................... 319
VII.8.3.h Checking the consistency of the scrambling code assignments .................................................... 320
VIII CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECT MANAGEMENT..................................323
VIII.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS : OVERVIEW...........................................................323
VIII.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 SPECIFIC CONCEPTS...............................................................323
VIII.3 CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS PROTOCOL.............................................................324
VIII.4 MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 RADIO DATA..........................................................324
VIII.4.1 MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 RADIO DATA : OVERVIEW............................................................................ 324
VIII.4.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................ 325
VIII.4.2.a Creating CDMA/CDMA2000 site equipment .................................................................................. 325
VIII.4.2.b Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 site equipment................................................................................ 325
VIII.4.2.c Managing channel element consumption per CDMA/CDMA2000 site equipment ......................... 326
VIII.4.2.d Assigning CDMA/CDMA2000 site equipment to sites.................................................................... 326
VIII.4.3 TRANSMITTER CDMA/CDMA2000 SPECIFIC PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 326
VIII.4.3.a Setting the transmitter CDMA/CDMA2000 global parameters ....................................................... 326
VIII.4.4 CDMA/CDMA2000 CELLS....................................................................................................................... 327
VIII.4.4.a CDMA/CDMA2000 Cells : definition............................................................................................... 327
VIII.4.4.b Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 Cell ................................................................................................ 327
VIII.4.4.c Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 Cell properties................................................................................ 327
VIII.4.4.d Power parameters in CDMA/CDMA2000....................................................................................... 328
VIII.4.4.e Active set parameters in CDMA/CDMA2000 ................................................................................. 328
VIII.5 CDMA/CDMA2000 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT ...........................................................328
Table of contents


16/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VIII.5.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT : OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 328
VIII.5.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC DATA...................................................................................... 329
VIII.5.2.a CDMA/CDMA2000 Services.......................................................................................................... 329
VIII.5.2.a.i Creating CDMA/CDMA2000 Services ......................................................................................................... 329
VIII.5.2.a.ii Data service creation CDMA/CDMA2000.................................................................................................... 330
VIII.5.2.a.iii Setting CDMA/CDMA2000 services parameters ......................................................................................... 330
VIII.5.2.a.iv Managing globally CDMA/CDMA2000 services........................................................................................... 330
VIII.5.2.b CDMA/CDMA2000 Radio Configurations ...................................................................................... 331
VIII.5.2.b.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 Radio Configuration..................................................................................... 331
VIII.5.2.b.ii CDMA/CDMA2000 active set conditions ..................................................................................................... 331
VIII.5.2.b.iii Setting a CDMA/CDMA2000 Radio Configuration....................................................................................... 332
VIII.5.2.b.iv Managing globally CDMA/CDMA2000 Radio Configurations....................................................................... 332
VIII.5.2.c CDMA/CDMA2000 user profiles .................................................................................................... 333
VIII.5.2.c.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile .................................................................................................. 333
VIII.5.2.c.ii Adjusting CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile properties ................................................................................... 333
VIII.5.2.c.iii Managing globally CDMA/CDMA2000 user profiles .................................................................................... 334
VIII.5.2.d CDMA/CDMA2000 environments .................................................................................................. 334
VIII.5.2.d.i Creating a type of CDMA/CDMA2000 environment..................................................................................... 334
VIII.5.2.d.ii Setting CDMA/CDMA2000 environment parameters................................................................................... 335
VIII.5.2.d.iii Managing globally CDMA/CDMA2000 environment types........................................................................... 335
VIII.5.2.d.iv Displaying statistics per CDMA/CDMA2000 environment type .................................................................... 336
VIII.5.2.d.v Subscriber clutter weighting in CDMA/CDMA2000 environment.................................................................. 336
VIII.5.3 CDMA/CDMA2000 MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY........................................................................ 336
VIII.5.3.a CDMA/CDMA2000 multi-service traffic cartography : Overview.................................................... 336
VIII.5.3.b CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic maps................................................................................. 337
VIII.5.3.b.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic map............................................................................... 337
VIII.5.3.b.ii Importing a CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic map.............................................................................. 337
VIII.5.3.b.iii Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic maps.............................................................................. 337
VIII.5.3.b.iv Exporting a CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic map ............................................................................. 338
VIII.5.3.b.v Displaying statistics on CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic maps.......................................................... 339
VIII.5.3.c CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic maps................................................................................... 339
VIII.5.3.c.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic map................................................................................. 339
VIII.5.3.c.ii Importing a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic map................................................................................ 339
VIII.5.3.c.iii Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic maps................................................................................ 340
VIII.5.3.c.iv Examples of CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic data.............................................................................. 341
VIII.5.3.c.v Exporting a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic map ............................................................................... 341
VIII.5.3.d CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic maps............................................................................................... 342
VIII.5.3.d.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic map............................................................................................. 342
VIII.5.3.d.ii Importing a CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic map............................................................................................ 342
VIII.5.3.d.iii Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic maps............................................................................................ 343
VIII.5.3.d.iv Exporting a CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic map ........................................................................................... 343
VIII.6 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS .........................................................................344
VIII.6.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS : OVERVIEW........................................................................................... 344
VIII.6.2 MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS ............................................................................................ 344
VIII.6.2.a Creating CDMA/CDMA2000 power control simulations................................................................. 344
VIII.6.2.b Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation properties ...................................................................... 345
VIII.6.2.c CDMA/CDMA2000 power control simulation inputs....................................................................... 345
VIII.6.2.d Replaying a CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation.................................................................................... 347
VIII.6.2.e Generator initialisation - Replay differences (CDMA/CDMA2000) ................................................. 347
VIII.6.2.f Averaging CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations..................................................................................... 347
VIII.6.2.g Adding a simulation to an existing group of CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations.................................. 348
VIII.6.3 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION PROCESS................................................................................................. 348
VIII.6.3.a Power control CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation concepts.................................................................. 348
VIII.6.3.b CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation convergence method ..................................................................... 350
VIII.6.3.c Admission control in CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations..................................................................... 350
VIII.6.3.d Channel element management in CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations ................................................ 351
VIII.6.3.e Walsh codes management ............................................................................................................ 351
VIII.6.3.f Walsh codes availability................................................................................................................. 352
VIII.6.3.g Modelling shadowing in CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations................................................................ 352
VIII.6.4 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION RESULTS SUMMARY................................................................................... 354
VIII.6.4.a Displaying CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation requirements and results.............................................. 354
VIII.6.4.b Displaying input parameters of an existing CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation .................................... 354
VIII.6.4.c Summarising results per site (CDMA/CDMA2000 projects)........................................................... 355
VIII.6.4.d Summarising results per cell (CDMA/CDMA2000 projects) ........................................................... 355
VIII.6.4.e Committing simulated loads to cells (CDMA/CDMA2000 projects)................................................ 356
VIII.6.4.f Summarising results per mobile (CDMA/CDMA2000 projects)...................................................... 357
Table of contents


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 17/476


VIII.6.4.g Displaying shadowing values of a CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation.................................................. 357
VIII.6.4.h Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation results on the map......................................................... 358
VIII.6.5 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION OUTPUTS................................................................................................. 359
VIII.6.5.a CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulation outputs on sites ............................................................................. 359
VIII.6.5.b CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulation outputs on cells ............................................................................. 359
VIII.6.5.c CDMA/CDMA2000 Average simulation outputs on cells................................................................ 360
VIII.6.5.d CDMA/CDMA2000 Standard deviation of simulation outputs on cells ........................................... 360
VIII.6.5.e CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulation outputs on cell components........................................................... 360
VIII.6.5.f CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulation outputs on mobiles ........................................................................ 361
VIII.6.5.g CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulation outputs on mobile components ..................................................... 361
VIII.7 SPECIFIC CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION STUDIES................................................362
VIII.7.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION STUDIES : OVERVIEW................................................................................ 362
VIII.7.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION PROCESS................................................................................................. 363
VIII.7.2.a Predicting on given CDMA/CDMA2000 carriers ............................................................................ 363
VIII.7.2.b Modelling shadowing in CDMA/CDMA2000 predictions ................................................................ 363
VIII.7.3 MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTIONS............................................................................................. 364
VIII.7.3.a Creating predictions from modified CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations............................................... 364
VIII.7.3.b Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 prediction display ........................................................................... 364
VIII.7.4 CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION STUDIES .................................................................................................. 365
VIII.7.4.a Analysing pilot reception (CDMA/CDMA2000)............................................................................... 365
VIII.7.4.b Studying service area (Eb/Nt) downlink (CDMA/CDMA2000)........................................................ 366
VIII.7.4.c Studying service area (Eb/Nt) uplink (CDMA/CDMA2000) ............................................................ 367
VIII.7.4.d Studying effective service area (CDMA/CDMA2000)..................................................................... 368
VIII.7.4.e Defining handoff status (CDMA/CDMA2000)................................................................................. 369
VIII.7.4.f Studying downlink total noise (CDMA/CDMA2000) ....................................................................... 370
VIII.7.4.g Calculating pilot pollution (CDMA/CDMA2000).............................................................................. 371
VIII.7.4.h Analysing a scenario at a point in CDMA/CDMA2000 projects...................................................... 372
VIII.8 SPECIFIC 1XEV-DO FEATURES ..............................................................................374
VIII.8.1 DEFINING A (EB/NT <-> MAX RATE) LOOK-UP TABLE..................................................................................... 374
VIII.8.2 CREATING 1XEV-DO SPECIFIC PREDICTIONS............................................................................................... 375
VIII.9 CDMA/CDMA2000 RESOURCES ALLOCATION.......................................................376
VIII.9.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 RESOURCES ALLOCATION : OVERVIEW......................................................................... 376
VIII.9.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 NEIGHBOURS ............................................................................................................. 376
VIII.9.2.a Allocating CDMA/CDMA2000 cell neighbours manually................................................................ 376
VIII.9.2.b Allocating CDMA/CDMA2000 cell neighbours automatically ......................................................... 377
VIII.9.2.c Displaying current CDMA/CDMA2000 neighbour list ..................................................................... 378
VIII.9.2.d Deleting allocated CDMA/CDMA2000 neighbours......................................................................... 378
VIII.9.2.e Displaying CDMA/CDMA2000 neighbours on the map.................................................................. 378
VIII.9.3 PN OFFSETS............................................................................................................................................ 379
VIII.9.3.a PN Offsets : Overview.................................................................................................................... 379
VIII.9.3.b Creating PN Offsets domains and groups...................................................................................... 379
VIII.9.3.c Assigning a PN Offset domain to a cell .......................................................................................... 380
VIII.9.3.d Allocating PN offsets to CDMA/CDMA2000 cells manually ........................................................... 380
VIII.9.3.e Defining exceptional pairs for PN Offset allocation........................................................................ 380
VIII.9.3.f Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA/CDMA2000 cells automatically.................................................... 381
VIII.9.3.g PN Offset allocation process.......................................................................................................... 382
VIII.9.3.h Checking the consistency of the PN Offset assignments............................................................... 382
IX MANAGING MEASUREMENTS .........................................................387
IX.1 MANAGING MEASUREMENTS : OVERVIEW................................................................387
IX.2 CW MEASUREMENT DATA PATHS............................................................................387
IX.2.1 CREATION OF A CW MEASUREMENT PATH....................................................................................................... 387
IX.2.1.a Creating a CW measurement session ........................................................................................... 387
IX.2.1.b Pasting a CW measurement path.................................................................................................. 388
IX.2.1.c Drawing a CW measurement path................................................................................................. 388
IX.2.1.d Importing a CW measurement path............................................................................................... 389
IX.2.1.e Importing several CW measurement paths.................................................................................... 390
IX.2.1.f Adding predictions on existing CW measurement paths................................................................ 391
IX.2.1.g Creating an import CW measurement configuration...................................................................... 392
Table of contents


18/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IX.2.1.h Deleting an import CW measurement configuration....................................................................... 392
IX.2.2 MANAGEMENT OF A CW MEASUREMENT PATH ................................................................................................. 393
IX.2.2.a Defining CW measurement path properties................................................................................... 393
IX.2.2.b Opening a CW measurement table................................................................................................ 393
IX.2.2.c Predicting signal levels on a CW measurement path..................................................................... 394
IX.2.2.d Filtering points along CW measurement paths .............................................................................. 394
IX.2.2.e Displaying statistics between CW measurements and predictions ................................................ 395
IX.2.2.f Managing display on a CW measurement path ............................................................................. 395
IX.2.2.g Exporting CW measurement paths ................................................................................................ 396
IX.2.3 USING THE CW MEASUREMENT WINDOW......................................................................................................... 396
IX.2.3.a CW Measurement window : activation........................................................................................... 396
IX.2.3.b Defining the display properties of the CW measurement window.................................................. 397
IX.2.3.c Synchronising display in table/map/CW measurement window..................................................... 397
IX.2.3.d Analysing additional fields along CW measurement paths ............................................................ 397
IX.2.3.e Zooming in the CW measurement window .................................................................................... 398
IX.2.3.f Exporting the CW measurement window....................................................................................... 398
IX.2.3.g Printing the CW measurement window.......................................................................................... 398
IX.2.3.h Combining CW measurement and point analysis windows............................................................ 399
IX.3 TEST MOBILE DATA PATHS......................................................................................399
IX.3.1 CREATION OF A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH......................................................................................................... 399
IX.3.1.a Importing a test mobile data path................................................................................................... 399
IX.3.1.b Importing several test mobile data paths ....................................................................................... 400
IX.3.1.c Creating an import test mobile data path configuration.................................................................. 400
IX.3.1.d Deleting an import test mobile data path configuration.................................................................. 402
IX.3.2 MANAGEMENT OF A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH ................................................................................................... 402
IX.3.2.a Defining test mobile data path properties....................................................................................... 402
IX.3.2.b Opening a test mobile data table ................................................................................................... 403
IX.3.2.c Predicting signal levels on a test mobile data path ........................................................................ 403
IX.3.2.d Filtering points along test mobile data paths.................................................................................. 404
IX.3.2.e Focusing on a specific field along a test mobile data path............................................................. 404
IX.3.2.f Managing display on a test mobile data path................................................................................. 404
IX.3.2.g Exporting test mobile data paths.................................................................................................... 405
IX.3.3 USING THE TEST MOBILE DATA WINDOW........................................................................................................... 406
IX.3.3.a Test mobile data window : activation ............................................................................................. 406
IX.3.3.b Defining the display properties of the test mobile data window...................................................... 406
IX.3.3.c Synchronising display in table/map/Test mobile data window ....................................................... 406
IX.3.3.d Zooming in the test mobile data window........................................................................................ 407
IX.3.3.e Exporting the test mobile data window........................................................................................... 407
IX.3.3.f Printing the test mobile data window.............................................................................................. 407
X CO-PLANNING FEATURES...............................................................411
X.1 CO-PLANNING FEATURES : OVERVIEW....................................................................411
X.2 CO-PLANNING USING A9155..................................................................................411
X.2.1 DISPLAYING EXTERNAL OBJECTS IN A CURRENT A9155 PROJECT....................................................................... 411
X.2.2 ALLOCATING EXTERNAL NEIGHBOURS MANUALLY (CO-PLANNING) ...................................................................... 411
X.2.3 ALLOCATING CDMA NEIGHBOURS TO GSM TRANSMITTERS ............................................................................. 412
X.2.4 ALLOCATING GSM NEIGHBOURS TO CDMA TRANSMITTERS ............................................................................. 413
X.3 CO-PLANNING USING DATABASES...........................................................................414
X.3.1 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A MS ACCESS DATABASE ............................................................................... 414
X.3.2 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A SQL SERVER DATABASE.............................................................................. 414
X.3.3 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH AN ORACLE DATABASE ................................................................................... 414
X.3.4 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A SYBASE DATABASE...................................................................................... 415
XI IMPORT/EXPORT SPECIFIC ALCATEL DATA.................................419
XI.1 IMPORT/EXPORT SPECIFIC ALCATEL DATA : OVERVIEW............................................419
XI.2 MEASUREMENT FILES ............................................................................................419
XI.2.1 IMPORTING ANALOGUE MEASUREMENT FILES.................................................................................................... 419
Table of contents


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 19/476


XI.2.2 IMPORTING DIGITAL MEASUREMENT FILES ........................................................................................................ 419
XI.3 ANTENNA DATA.....................................................................................................420
XI.3.1 IMPORTING NEW ALCATEL ANTENNAS IN AN EXISTING NETWORK......................................................................... 420
XI.4 CAE DATA............................................................................................................420
XI.4.1 CAE DATA : OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................. 420
XI.4.2 IMPORTING CAE DATA IN AN EXISTING PROJECT .............................................................................................. 421
XI.4.3 EXPORTING CAE DATA FROM THE CURRENT PROJECT...................................................................................... 422
XII IMPORT MSI PLANET DATA...........................................................425
XII.1 IMPORT MSI PLANET DATA : OVERVIEW.............................................................425
XII.2 PLANET GEO DATA FILES ...................................................................................425
XII.2.1 PLANET GEO DATA FORMAT ....................................................................................................................... 425
XII.2.2 IMPORTING MSI PLANET GEOGRAPHIC DATA............................................................................................... 428
XII.2.3 IMPORTING MSI PLANET TEXT DATA FILES .................................................................................................. 428
XII.3 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET DATABASE ................................................................429
XII.3.1 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET ANTENNA DATABASE........................................................................................... 429
XII.3.2 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET NETWORK ......................................................................................................... 429
XII.3.3 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET CARRIER DATABASE ........................................................................................... 430
XII.3.4 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET NEIGHBOUR DATABASE....................................................................................... 430
XII.3.5 IMPORTING MSI PLANET PROPAGATION MODEL PARAMETERS ....................................................................... 431
XII.3.6 IMPORTING MSI PLANET PATH LOSS MATRICES ........................................................................................... 431
XII.4 IMPORTING MSI PLANET CW MEASUREMENT DATA.............................................432
XII.4.1 IMPORTING MSI PLANET CW MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................. 432
XIII MULTI-USER FEATURES ..................................................................435
XIII.1 MULTI-USER PROJECTS : OVERVIEW.......................................................................435
XIII.2 CREATING/STARTING DATABASE PROJECTS ............................................................435
XIII.2.1 OPERATING PRINCIPLES............................................................................................................................. 435
XIII.2.2 CREATING A NEW DATABASE FROM A DOCUMENT .......................................................................................... 436
XIII.2.3 CREATING A NEW DOCUMENT FROM A DATABASE .......................................................................................... 436
XIII.2.4 STARTING A9155 FROM THE COMMAND LINE ............................................................................................... 437
XIII.2.5 EXPORTING USER CONFIGURATION TO AN EXTERNAL FILE .............................................................................. 437
XIII.2.6 IMPORTING USER CONFIGURATION FROM AN EXTERNAL FILE........................................................................... 438
XIII.3 SUPPORTED DATABASES........................................................................................439
XIII.3.1 SUPPORTED DATABASES : OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 439
XIII.3.2 EXPORTING A PROJECT IN A MS ACCESS DATABASE..................................................................................... 439
XIII.3.3 EXPORTING A PROJECT IN A MS SQL SERVER DATABASE ............................................................................. 440
XIII.3.4 EXPORTING A PROJECT IN AN ORACLE DATABASE ......................................................................................... 441
XIII.3.5 EXPORTING A PROJECT IN A SYBASE DATABASE............................................................................................ 442
XIII.4 DATA EXCHANGE...................................................................................................443
XIII.4.1 CHECKING DATABASE CONNECTION PROPERTIES .......................................................................................... 443
XIII.4.2 LOADING DATA FROM A DATABASE............................................................................................................... 443
XIII.4.3 ARCHIVING DATA IN A DATABASE ................................................................................................................. 443
XIII.5 DATA CONFLICTS MANAGEMENT .............................................................................444
XIII.5.1 SOLVING A CONFLICT ON A MODIFIED RECORD .............................................................................................. 444
XIII.5.2 SOLVING A CONFLICT ON A DELETED RECORD............................................................................................... 446
XIII.5.3 MANAGEMENT OF MULTI-USERS MATRICES................................................................................................... 446
XIII.5.4 SHARING PATH LOSS MATRICES BETWEEN USERS.......................................................................................... 446
XIII.5.5 COMPUTING PATH LOSS MATRICES ONLY...................................................................................................... 447
XIV MICROWAVE LINKS..........................................................................451
XIV.1 MICROWAVE LINKS : OVERVIEW .............................................................................451
XIV.2 CREATING AND MANAGING A MICROWAVE LINK ........................................................451
XIV.2.1 CREATING A MICROWAVE LINK : OVERVIEW.................................................................................................. 451
XIV.2.2 CREATING A LINK USING THE MOUSE............................................................................................................ 451
Table of contents


20/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XIV.2.3 CREATING A LINK USING THE WIZARD........................................................................................................... 451
XIV.2.4 LISTING ALL MICROWAVE LINKS OF A NETWORK............................................................................................. 452
XIV.2.5 SETTING MICROWAVE LINK PROPERTIES....................................................................................................... 452
XIV.2.6 MANAGING RADIO EQUIPMENT IN MICROWAVE LINKS...................................................................................... 453
XIV.3 ANALYSIS OF A MICROWAVE LINK............................................................................454
XIV.3.1 PATH PROFILE AND LINK RELIABILITY ANALYSIS ............................................................................................. 454
XIV.3.1.a Adjusting computation parameters in link analysis......................................................................... 454
XIV.3.1.b Displaying profile along a microwave link ...................................................................................... 454
XIV.3.1.c Displaying analysis results on a microwave link ............................................................................ 455
XIV.3.1.d Managing the display of a microwave link profile........................................................................... 455
XIV.3.1.e Editing profile values (microwave links) ......................................................................................... 456
XIV.3.2 INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS........................................................................................................................... 456
XIV.3.2.a Interference analysis in microwave links : definitions..................................................................... 456
XIV.3.2.b Finding interferers of a given receiver (microwave links) ............................................................... 456
XIV.3.2.c Finding receivers interfered by a transmitter (microwave links) ..................................................... 457
XIV.3.2.d Calculating interferences in a global microwave network............................................................... 457
XIV.3.2.e Interference analysis on microwave links....................................................................................... 457
XIV.3.2.f Using IRF in microwave links......................................................................................................... 458
XIV.3.2.g Displaying microwave link budgets ................................................................................................ 459
XIV.4 ITU MAPS .............................................................................................................459
XIV.4.1 ITU VAPOUR DENSITY ON EARTH ................................................................................................................ 459
XIV.4.2 ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION : FEBRUARY .............................................................................................. 460
XIV.4.3 ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION : MAY ....................................................................................................... 460
XIV.4.4 ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION : AUGUST.................................................................................................. 461
XIV.4.5 ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION : NOVEMBER ............................................................................................. 461
XIV.4.6 ITU RAIN ZONES : AMERICA....................................................................................................................... 462
XIV.4.7 ITU RAIN ZONES : EUROPE AND AFRICA...................................................................................................... 463
XIV.4.8 ITU RAIN ZONES : ASIA ............................................................................................................................. 464




C H A P T E R 1

























Getting started
1
Getting started


22/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 1


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 23/476


I GETTING STARTED
I.1 GENERAL PRESENTATION
A9155 is a comprehensive Window-based multi-technology and user-friendly radio-planning environment that supports
wireless telecom operators during the whole network lifetime, from initial design to densification and optimisation.

More than an engineering tool, A9155 is an open, scalable and flexible technical information system that integrates
easily with other IT systems, increases productivity and shortens lead times.

A9155 supports a full range of implementation scenarios, from stand-alone to enterprise-wide server-based
configurations using distributed and parallel computing.

The highlights of A9155 are definitely:

Advanced network design features: high-performance propagation calculation engine, multi-layered and hierarchical
networks supported, traffic modelling, automatic frequency/code planning and network optimisation. Full support of
GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA IS-95, WCDMA / UMTS, CDMA2000 technologies. Planning of integrated multi-
technology network (GSM/UMTS, GSM/GPRS, CDMA/CDMA2000...).

Open and flexible architecture: support of multi-user environments through an innovative database architecture that
provides data sharing, data integrity management and easy integration with other IT systems. Integration of 3
rd
party
or proprietary modules (propagation models and AFP) through a set of programming interfaces (API). The integration
of add-ins and macros is also available.

Distributed and parallel computing: A9155 allows for the distribution of calculations over multiple workstations and
supports parallel computing on multi-processor servers, thus dramatically reducing prediction and simulation times
and getting the most out of your hardware.

State-of-the-art GIS features: A9155 supports both multi-format and multi-resolution geographic data and integration
with GIS tools. Large, dense urban and countrywide databases are supported and displayed interactively with
multiple layers including engineering and prediction studies. It features an integrated raster and vector editor.

A9155 is made of a main module to which you can add optional modules such as the UMTS module (allowing
CDMA/CDMA2000 projects) dedicated to WCDMA/UMTS network analysis and planning, the Measurements module
which allows the importation and management of concrete CW measurement or test mobile data paths, the Automatic
Frequency Planning module for the optimisation of GSM/GPRS/EDGE frequency plans and the Microwave planning
module. This module allow the user to plan and analyse microwave links.
I.2 WHAT'S NEW IN A9155 V6.2.1
Several improvements and changes have been made since the previous A9155 version. These new features are divided
into several parts: some general features which are available on the A9155 platform for any project, those dedicated to
GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000 (IS95, 1xRTT) studies. Improvements have also been
performed on microwave links and measurements.


General features

Generic geographic layers
In addition to the standard raster layers (DEM, clutter classes, images...) A9155 V6.2.1 allows users to import and
display additional raster layers (e.g. population files, income density maps...), which are then taken into account in
reports.

Geographic display folder
It is now possible to group any type of geo data within a unique group in order to make them used for display only.

Clutter heights files
A new "Clutter heights" folder has been created. The clutter height can be now defined at the pixel level and taken
into account in calculations (Propagation models, measurements).

Tiff Geo files
For Tiff files, an option has been added to modify the colour palette convention used by A9155.

Getting started


24/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Import of PlaNET text data files
It is now possible to import PlaNET text data in .atl documents.

User configurations
A new option is available during the import of a cfg file with a view to delete all existing maps.
It is now possible to include macro file paths in user configurations

Unit systems
New units are available for lengths, heights and offsets.

Site lists
In addition to the dynamic filtering features already available in A9155 V6.1, the version V6.2.1 allows users to define
static lists of sites names, either graphically or by using analytic criteria. Site lists are stored in the database and can
be imported and exported as ASCII files.

Repeaters
Repeaters are modelled and considered in the prediction studies and interference analysis.

Site and transmitter namings
When changing the name of a site, A9155 automatically renames transmitters and cells related to the site which
names contain the site name.
The sector numbering has changed. It starts from 1 instead of 0 and can be set by the user.

Object search tool
A new dialog is available in order to locate on the map any vector from its attribute, any point or any site.

Enhancement of the neighbour allocation algorithm
An additional option enables the user to force adjacent cells as neighbours (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/UMTS,
CDMA/CDMA2000)

Multi-resolution in predictions
It is now possible to define a main and an extended resolution (for low resolution) linked with main and extended
matrices, main and extended calculation radii

Definition of the resolution at the prediction level
The resolution of the prediction studies are independent from the pathloss calculation resolution

Prediction studies
It is now possible to select the 2nd best server for the service zone definition in prediction studies
A new display type is available in coverage predictions. You can now colour the service zones depending on the best
reliability level and on the reliability level.
It is now possible to calculate path loss matrices independently from any coverage study

Point analysis
A9155 now provides the angle between the profile and the north in the status bar, at the bottom left of the window.
In the Profile window, a green line shows the line of sight (LOS) from the studied transmitter.
In the Profile window, A9155 also displays the angle of the LOS read in the antenna vertical pattern.

CW Measurement
A new filter related to the angle between the reference transmitter and CW measurement points has been introduced
for the statistical comparisons between CW measurements and predictions.

Test mobile analysis (measurement module)
In addition to the CW measurement layer, a new layer allows to import, display and analyse test mobile data.
Measurements points can now be coloured by best server or best signal level
Additional generic and proprietary test mobile/CW survey file formats are supported, including TEMS FICS-Planet
export (.pln) and TEMS Text export (.fmt). Decoding and display of the serving cell ID and neighbour IDs from the
BSIC/BCCH fields (GSM), scrambling codes (UMTS) or PN Offsets (CDMA/CDMA2000).
It is possible to create a specific field related to a fixed attribute all along a single test mobile data path

Co-Planning
A new algorithm based on coverage overlapping allows to automatically calculate and allocate neighbours between
GSM and CDMA (including UMTS) networks. The simple algorithm, based on distance, provided in the previous
versions is still available.

Batch mode
C H A P T E R 1


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 25/476


Calculations can be launched in batch mode.

New 'general interface' in the developer's toolkit
A new programming interface provides a generic access to network data and pathloss matrices in A9155 projects,
and allows developers to add their own functions into A9155 user interface.
It enables the integration of a wide range of applications such as optimisation tools, interface with other applications
and configuration tools. Customisation is performed using external VBA scripting tools or the A9155 Visual C++
Software Development Kit.
It is now possible to access antenna patterns through the propagation model API.
The toolkit enables to run macros from an A9155 session.

Database management
All reserved keywords have been removed from database structure


Features for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects

Data model
All the TRX type parameters have been introduced in the subcells
It is now possible to exclude channels from the allocation at the subcell level
The separations are now imposed between subcells

BSIC notation
It is now possible to manage the BSIC (NCC-BCC) in octal or decimal (as before) format.

Improvements in traffic modelling
New data traffic layer allowing the modelling of the GPRS traffic demand, in addition to the existing voice traffic
layer.
Combined GPRS/voice traffic dimensioning and analysis.

New GPRS features
Enhanced time slot dimensioning.
Calculation of Quality of Service indicators

AFP tool
An Erlang based cost function replaces the pair-wise sum-up of interferences with a more precise modelling of the
interfered traffic.
When the constraints are too important for the planning algorithm, it is possible to access to information giving the list
of cells for which the constraints are not fulfilled.
Predefined MAL are supported (SFH TRX)
Multiple reuse pattern constraints
Grouping constraints may be taken into account in non-hopping TRX
Minimal change optimisation (cost of changing already assigned TRX higher than new assignments)
Staggered MAIO allocation ( MAIO equally spaced for one sector)
Local quality target (ability to improve plan only where minimal quality is not achieved)

Consistency checking tool
The consistency checking tool has been enhanced. Additional tests are automatically provided.


Features for CDMA/WCDMA technologies

Coverage predictions
Two new display types are available for the service area (Eb/Nt) study : Required Power and Required Power margin

Simulations
A comment has been added for simulations (as for prediction studies)


Features for WCDMA/UMTS projects

Global parameters
Two methods are available in order to calculate the total noise NT.

Scrambling code allocation
It is possible to define neighbourhood constraints during the scrambling code allocation. Neighbourhood constraints
can be imposed not only on the current defined neighbours.
Getting started


26/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


The scrambling code allocation is compatible with the bi-thread computation process.

Features for CDMA/CDMA2000 projects

PN Offset allocation
PN offsets are now supported by A9155
An automatic PN Offset allocation tool is available
The PN Offset allocation is compatible with the bi-thread computation process.
I.3 INSTALLING AND REMOVING A9155
I.3.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A9155 application runs on PC work stations under Windows NT 4.0, 2000 or XP. The recommended configuration for the
workstation is as following:

CPU Pentium III (800 Mhz at least)

Memory 256 Mb recommended

Disk 2 Gb free on disk recommended (or more according to the used geographic database)

Operating system Windows NT 4.0, 2000 or XP

Graphics card 1280*1024 64000 colours

Application environment Microsoft Office >95 advised (Excel, Word, Access)

I.3.2 WHAT'S INSTALLED WITH A9155
During A9155 installation, other components may also have been added from the executable files com32upd and
dcom95 (both designed for windows 95 - not recommended). Furthermore, A9155 must be installed with an appropriate
version of Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC - in order to work with databases). The recommended version is
2.7. This one can be downloaded from the support site.

If you choose to install the calculation server, it is installed as a service on your local machine. To make it unavailable,
you will need to stop it in the Services (Administrative tools) dialog of your operating system.

Moreover, from the installation CD, you may find several versions of Adobe Acrobat Reader (German, English, French,
Italian and Spanish versions) as well as the updates (from the last A9155 version) and usermanual pdf files.

I.3.3 INSTALLING A9155

Please refer to the external installation guide


Notes :
Help files are automatically installed during Setup,
The User manual (in pdf format) is on the CD-ROM, and can be downloaded from the support site,
Install the dongle driver only if necessary (not available or old version). It the option is checked, it will be necessary to
reboot after installation.

I.3.4 REMOVING A9155
To remove A9155, proceed as follows :
Quit all programs,
Click the Windows Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel,
Double click the Add/Remove Programs icon,
In the Install/Uninstall tab, select A9155 in the list, and then click Add/Remove,
C H A P T E R 1


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 27/476


Follow the instructions on the screen.

I.3.5 INSTALLING DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING SERVER
A9155 provides a feature on distributed computations of propagation calculations and CDMA/WCDMA simulations. The
A9155 package provides a computing server application (AtollSvr) which can be installed either on workstations or
servers and which can be used by A9155 sessions installed on other stations.

This computing server application (used only for path loss computations) supports dual-processor configuration (2
processors are used on multi-processor stations).

To install the distributed computing server, check the A9155 calculation server option in the Select components box
during the setup process. The application will then be installed as a service on the local machine, i.e. will run as far as
the local pc is on, even with no user connected.

Service management like the distributed computing server application can be accessed from the Administrative tools
icon in the Control Panel. Then choose the Services application.

Notes
Like for A9155 installation, you must be connected with administrative rights when installing the application.
In order to be able to access some potential centralized geo data for computation, check that the account on which is
"installed" the service has enough rights (which is not always the case by default). If not, access the properties of the
Service and assign it to an appropriate account (e.g. in the Log on window for Windows 2000 OS).

I.3.6 REMOVING DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING SERVER
The distributed computing server application is installed as a service on stations, i.e. runs as far as the local PC is on,
even with no user connected.

The first step of uninstalling is to stop the corresponding service. To do that, proceed as follows :

Check that you are connected on an account with rights allowing you to stop Services,

Under Windows NT4 :

Access the Control Panel,
Click on the Services Icon,
Select the A9155 server item,
Click the STOP button.


Under Windows 2000 or XP :

Access the Control Panel,
Open the Administrative Tools,
Click on the Services Icon,
Select the A9155 server item,
Either,
Right click on the item to open the context menu,
Click the STOP command,
Or,
Open its property dialog box,
Click the STOP button in the Service status part.

Once the service is stopped, to uninstall, proceed as follows :

Left click the button of your operating system,
Choose the command in the open menu,
Enter the following syntax :"<A9155 installation path>\AtollSvr.exe" /UnregServer in the open box,
The computing server application is then removed from the station.

Getting started


28/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


I.3.7 TROUBLESHOOTINGS AFTER INSTALLATION
After having installed A9155, you may encounter some running problems that are easy to fix.

Firstly, please be sure to have installed A9155 on an administrator account, to have rebooted your computer and logged
in again on an account with administrator rights in order to complete installation with libraries that were in use during the
first installation step (including mdac - optionally - and the sentinel driver).

Please also check the validity of the folder in which you installed A9155. Because A9155 is installed by default in an
A9155 folder, be sure that you didn't put yours in that way, for example : C:\Program Files\Alcatel\XXX\A9155\..., where
XXX was the name of the main folder in which you wanted to install A9155.

If the MDAC version of your PC is too old, you might install a newer version of mdac (downloadable from the support
site) in order to allow communications with databases. The recommended MDAC version is 2.7.

In case of the message "Protection key error", please check your connection and the key validity. If you use a hardware
Superpro dongle, try first to reboot your computer after installation on an administrator account. Then, install again the
sentinel driver (by using the setupx86.exe file in the setup folder from your current A9155 main folder).

If any problem persists, please contact our technical support at A9155.support@alcatel.de.

Caution:
It is advised to switch off your computer before unplugging or plugging hardware key into it.
Do not change the PC date.
When the Superpro dongle is temporary:
- Do not reprogram it even if you plug it into another computer.
- Do not put the time bomb off without the Alcatel support help.
Nethasp key (Multi-user licence) is supported under Windows 2000 Server only using from Licence manager 8.09.

I.4 GETTING HELP
I.4.1 WAYS TO GET ASSISTANCE
To get help from the Help menu
Just select the Help Topic command in the Help menu. The Help window is then open on the screen.

Several approaches are available to search information:

Click on the Content tab to scroll through a table of content. When you have found in the list the topic you
are interested in, simply double click on it. A window containing the information about the subject will then
be open on your screen. You will notice in the text some words or sentences in green, these are links to
other topics relating to the word or sentence.
or
Click on the Index tab to refer to the index inputs. Choose in the list the input you are interested in, double
click on it. A window containing the information about the subject will be displayed.
or
Click on the Find tab to search for specific words or sentences that might be in a help topic. Type the word
or the sentence you search, choose in the list a subject and then press Display to open the window
containing information.

Note : for any external modules like propagation models, automatic planning tool or any other one developed with the
API, the online help can be reached by clicking the button of each tab. A related topic will be open.


To get an explanation about dialog box options
Just click the What's this button located at the top right corner of teach dialog window and then, click on
the field you want to be informed of. An help window will be displayed.


To see the name of a toolbar button
Rest the pointer on the button until the name appears.


C H A P T E R 1


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 29/476


To get a short explanation about a menu command or a toolbar button
Position the pointer on the command or the button. A short explanation is displayed in the status bar
located at the bottom left of the A9155 window.


To get information about the A9155 application (version number, copyrights)
Click the about tool on the toolbar.
or
Select the About A9155... command in the Help menu.

I.4.2 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
The technical support team is available Monday through Friday, from 9 am to 5 pm CET; you may contact it by sending
an e-mail to A9155.support@alcatel.de.
I.5 RUNNING PROJECT TEMPLATES
I.5.1 STARTING A NEW PROJECT
Several project types based on different technologies are available in : GSM 900, GSM dual band 900-1800, GPRS, and,
by use of an optional module UMTS, CDMA-IS95 and CDMA2000 (1xRTT) . Each project has its own data and folder
structure. For example, tabs in the transmitter properties dialog box and radio parameters change according to the
project. In the same way, availability of some specific objects depends on the chosen project, such as, for example,
UMTS cells (UMTS projects) or TRX (GSM-TDMA projects). Moreover, A9155 modular and scalable architecture
enables the user to match the configuration to customer needs.


To choose a project type
Either
Select in the File menu the New command.
or
Click on the new tool in the toolbar.
In the project type dialog box, choose a project and then, click on OK to validate.


A9155 allows you to define a personal template from any existing project.

I.5.2 TEMPLATES PROVIDED
A9155 supports, in its standard version, the following project types :
GSM900(850) (Global System for Mobile communications) : 2nd generation of numeric telephony norm working
around the 900 (850) MHz band, using the TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) technology. This technology is
supported using the GSM_EGPRS project template.
DCS1800/1900 (Digital Communications System) : 2nd generation of numeric telephony norm working around the
1800/1900 MHz band, using the TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) technology. This technology is supported
using the GSM_EGPRS project template.
GSM dual-band 900-1800 (GSM900 and DCS1800) : 2nd generation of numeric telephony norm working both around
the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz bands, using the TDMA technology. This technology is supported using the
GSM_EGPRS project template.
GPRS (Global Packet Radio Service) and EDGE (Enhanced Data-rates for GSM - or Global - Evolution) : 2.5th
generation of numeric telephony norms working around the 900-1800 MHz bands, using the TDMA (Time Division
Multiple Access) technology. This technology is supported using the GSM_EGPRS project template.

The optional UMTS module permits to build projects for :
UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunication System) : 3rd generation of numeric telephony norm working around the
2 GHz band, using the WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) technology. This technology is supported
using the UMTS project template.
1xRTT (1st eXpansion Radio Telephone Technology) : 2.5th generation of numeric telephony norm working around
the 900 MHz band, using the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) technology. This technology is supported using
the CDMA2000 project template.
Getting started


30/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IS95-CDMA (Interim Standard 95) : 2th generation of numeric telephony norm working around the 800 MHz band,
using the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) technology, also known as CDMAOne. 95 refers to an accepted
industry protocol. This technology is supported using the IS95-CDMA project template.


Moreover, microwave link technology is available in any project type.
I.5.3 CREATING YOUR OWN TEMPLATE
By using the database structure provided by A9155 by default, it is possible to create your personal template with a view
to start each new project with your own tables, parameters, user-defined flags...

There are 2 ways to do so, proceed as follows :
1.
In an open A9155 project, select Database: Export... command in the File menu,
Export the project as a template in the A9155 templates directory (by default C:\Program
Files\Alcatel\A9155\Templates).


File/Database/Export - Export in a database

When this is done, your personal template is available in the Project type dialog box.



2.
Open an A9155 project template (located in C:\Program Files\Alcatel\A9155\Templates by default) in MS
Access as a model,
You can modify the databases as you want in order to obtain your customized template. For example, you
can import your own table of antennas,
Use the Save as... command in the File menu, to save this template in the A9155 template subfolder.
When this is done, your personal template is available in the Project type dialog box.

C H A P T E R 1


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 31/476


I.5.4 BUILDING A PROJECT STEP BY STEP
To build an A9155 basic project, follow the basic steps described below:

Step 1 : Choose a project template

Step 2 : Define the projection and display coordinate systems, the length, reception and transmission units

Step 3 : Import geographic data files (clutter classes and heights, DTM, vector data, population data, generic data...)

Step 4 : Create the network by using station templates or by retrieving the data of an existing one. Adjust the
parameters of sites, transmitters, repeaters, and specific GSM/GPRS or UMTS/CDMA/CDMA2000 radio data

Step 5 : Calibrate propagation models by the use of CW measurements

Step 6 : Define the computation zone and the calculation settings (resolutions, calculation radius, propagation
models, reception properties)

Step 7 : Create and calculate standard coverage studies (per transmitter, by signal level, overlapping zones)


GSM/GPRS projects

Step 8 : Define multi-service traffic parameters (services, mobility types, terminals, user profiles, environments)

Step 9 : Define the traffic through the import or the creation of maps
Traffic maps per environment
Traffic maps per user profile
Live traffic maps
User density traffic maps

Step 10 : Capture the traffic to analyse the demand

Step 11 : Set the dimensioning models

Step 12 : Dimension the network (required number of shared, circuit and packet timeslots, traffic loads)

Step 13 : Define the neighbours manually or automatically

Step 14 : Allocate frequencies, BSIC and frequency hopping parameters, to match the demand (user-defined of
coming from dimensioning part)

Step 15 : Check the allocations through interference studies, the audit tool, KPI calculation

Step 16 : Compute specific GPRS/EDGE studies

Step 17 : Check and validate of the network by the import of test mobile data



UMTS projects

Step 8 : Define multi-service traffic parameters (services, mobility types, terminals, user profiles, environments)

Step 9 : Define the traffic through the import or the creation of maps
Traffic maps per environment
Traffic maps per user profile
Live traffic maps

Step 10 : Define neighbours manually or automatically

Step 11 : Make instant pictures of the network by the use of monte-carlo simulations. This also provides dimensioning
results.

Step 12 : Calculate specific UMTS studies based on network load (user-defined of coming from simulations)

Step 13 : Allocate primary scrambling codes to cells and check the allocation with the audit tool
Getting started


32/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Step 14 : Check and validate the network by the import of test mobile data



CDMA/CDMA2000 projects

Step 8 : Define multi-service traffic parameters (services, mobility types, radio configurations, environments)

Step 9 : Define the traffic through the import or the creation of maps
Traffic maps per environment
Traffic maps per user profile
Live traffic maps

Step 10 : Define neighbours manually or automatically

Step 11 : Make instant pictures of the network by the use of monte-carlo simulations. This provides also dimensioning
results.

Step 12 : Calculate specific CDMA/CDMA2000 studies based on network load (user-defined of coming from
simulations)

Step 13 : Allocate PN Offsets to cells and check the allocation with the audit tool

Step 14 : Check and validate the network by the import of test mobile data



C H A P T E R 2

























The Working environment
2
The working environment


34/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 35/476


II THE WORKING ENVIRONMENT
II.1 USER INTERFACE BASICS : OVERVIEW
The A9155 user interface consists of an integrated set of cursors, windows, tools, menus, toolbars and other elements
that allow you to create, and define your project in one place.

The user interface uses standard Windows interface functionalities along with a few additional features to make your
environment easy to use. Moreover, the drag and drop feature can be commonly used between any folder explorer and
A9155 in order to import or open any objects with a compatible format.

The two common window types are document windows and docking windows. The position and size of document
windows can be changed within the A9155 window. They can be maximized and minimized. Docking windows, however,
can be attached to the borders of the application window, or float anywhere on your screen.

You can have more than one document file open in A9155. Document windows are attached to a single document. You
can have many document windows attached to a single document. Examples of document windows are maps,
datasheets or studies reports. When you close the last document window attached to a document, this document is
closed.

Docking windows are shared among open documents. They reflect the content of the active document. The active
document is the one attached to the active window. Examples of docking windows are the Explorer window, the
Panoramic window, the Legend window, or the Event viewer window.

A9155 provides many features dealing with the use of the map. Hence, you can easily move , zoom in and out, changing
scales, and choosing visibility range for objects displayable on the map. Several ways of exporting the current
environment are also possible.

In A9155, most of the items are organized in folders in the Explorer window. This folders can be displayed in tables in
order to make easy the management of large data in the same time. Hence, filters, groups and sorts are easily made
either in folders, tables and on the map (filtering only), and can be saved in configurations.

This generic organization method is also applied to the display of objects in A9155. A generic display dialog is available
when working on the properties of radio data (sites, transmitters, microwave links), prediction studies, measurements,
simulations and some geo data objects (DTM map or vector objects).

A9155 provides several handy tools, like a Undo/Redo function, Windows classical and specific shortcuts, the use of
icons and several types of cursors related to working processes. Furthermore, A9155 provides different search tools in
order to easily locate either a site, a point, or a vector (even from its attributes only). It is also possible to synchronize a
selected vector and the related displayed data (or any CW measurement or Test mobile data) in the corresponding data
table.

II.2 WORKING WITH MENUS AND WINDOWS
II.2.1 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT WINDOW
To tile the document windows, proceed as follows :
Select in the Window menu the Tile command.


To cascade the document windows, proceed as follows :
Select in the Window menu the Cascade command.

II.2.2 WORKING WITH DOCKING OR FLOATING WINDOW
To show or hide a docking window, proceed as follows :
To show a docking window, click the name of the window on the View menu.
To hide the window, click the Hide button in the corner of the window. This button may be at the top-left
or top-right corner, depending on the position of the window.

The working environment


36/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



To expand or contract a docking window in its docking area, proceed as follows :
Click the Expand or Contract button near the corner of the window. This button may be near the top-
left or top-right corner, depending on the position of the window. This is a dual-purpose button. When the
window is fully expanded, the function of this button is Contract; otherwise, the function is Expand


To change a docked window to a floating window, proceed as follows :
Double click in the window border.


To dock a floating window, proceed as follows :
Double click the window title bar to return the window to its previous docked location, or point to the title bar
and drag the window to a different dock area.


To position a floating window over a dock (without docking it), proceed as follows :
Point to the title bar of the window.
Hold down the CTRL key and drag the window over any dock area of the application window.


Note : The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current project; they remain the same no
matter which project you open.

II.2.3 PRINTING THE ACTIVE WINDOW
A9155 provides powerful features in order to import/export any data. On this consideration, A9155 provides also the
possibility to print any type of active window (table, legend, map, antenna pattern, point analysis window...).

In order to print the active window, once the print is set, select the Print command in the File menu (or use the Ctrl+P
shortcut) in the case of maps or tables.

For other objects like antenna patterns, legend or point analysis windows (for example), just select the Print... command
from the related context menu (right click in the window).

II.3 WORKING WITH MAPS
II.3.1 ZOOMING AND PANNING
A9155 provides powerful tools in order to zoom and to move the currently displayed map.

To zoom in, proceed as follows :
Either
Click the zoom-in tool on the zoom toolbar
or
On the View menu select the Zoom in command
or
Press Ctrl+A

The map is displayed with the previous scale in the scale listbox.


To zoom out, proceed as follows :
Either
Click the zoom-out tool on the zoom toolbar
or
On the View menu select the Zoom out command
or
Press Ctrl+R

C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 37/476


The map is displayed with the next scale in the scale listbox.
To zoom on a specific area of the map, proceed as follows :
Either
Click the zoom area tool on the zoom toolbar
or
On the View menu select the Zoom Area command
On the map press and hold the left mouse button at the north-west corner of the area.
Drag the pointer to the south-east corner.
Release the mouse button


To move the map area, proceed as follows :
Click the Mover tool on the zoom toolbar.
Hold down the left mouse button on the map area and drag the pointer.
Release the mouse button


Note : in case of refresh problems on the map, use the icon from the zoom toolbar (or the F5 shortcut).

II.3.2 USING THE PANORAMIC WINDOW
The Panoramic window offers a whole view of the imported geographic data and allows to locate the map area you want
to display in the workspace. A darker rectangle characterizes the map area selected in the Panoramic window and
displayed in the workspace.

Several operations may be performed from the Panoramic window; they are detailed below.


To zoom on a specific area of the map, proceed as follows :
Position the pointer on the map. The pointer becomes a dotted rectangle.
Press and hold the left mouse button at the north-west corner of the area.
Drag the pointer to the south-east corner.
Release the mouse button.


To move the map area, proceed as follows :
Position the pointer on the zoom area (darker rectangle). The pointer becomes a cross.
Press the left mouse button.
Slide the pointer.
Release the mouse button.


To resize the map area, proceed as follows :
Position the pointer at the corner (or any border) of the zoom area (darker rectangle). The pointer becomes
a double arrow.
Press the left mouse button.
Slide the pointer.
Release the mouse button.

II.3.3 CENTRING THE MAP
The centre map function enables you to display the selected objects like transmitters, sites, hexagonal design... at the
centre of the workspace and the central area of imported geographical data like clutter, DTM, vector data or scanned
images. In both cases, the displayed area is moved conserving the current scale.

To centre an object, proceed as follows :
Right click the object.
Select the Centre map command in the context menu.

The working environment


38/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


II.3.4 CHOOSING A SCALE
To choose a scale, proceed as follows :
Click the arrow next to the scale box on the zoom toolbar.
In the list click the scale value you want.


If the scale value you want is not in the list:
Click in the scale box.
Type the scale value you want.
Press Enter. The value you entered is added to the scale list.


Note : If you drag the icon band containing the scale scrolling box from the toolbar to a side of your environment, you
may find it again by clicking on the zoom area button

Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available

II.3.5 DEFINING VISIBILITY RANGES ON OBJECTS
Since the version V6.1, for any object with settable display (sites, transmitters, coverage studies, CW measurement,
maps), it is possible to specify a visibility range. The object will be visible only if the zoom level defined in the
workspace (in the scale box) is within the object visibility range.

This feature enables you to display in the workspace an object depending on the zoom level.

To define an object visibility range, proceed as follows :
Right click the folder related to the considered object to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Properties command from the open scrolling menu,
In the Display tab, enter minimum and maximum zoom levels.

Notes :
In case of sites and transmitters, the visibility range is globally specified in the folder Properties window.
This feature is an add-on, like visibility boxes or layer order, to manage object visibility in the workspace; the defined
visibility ranges have no influence on the objects taken into account in calculations.
Visibility scales defined for objects are taken into account during printings or print previews. Objects will appear only if
the printing scale is within their respective visibility range.

II.3.6 DISPLAYING RULERS AROUND THE MAP
It is possible to make visible rulers along the displayed map. A distance measurement tool is also available.

To display rulers in the current environment, proceed as follows :
Select in the Tools menu, the Options... command.
In the Options dialog box, click on the Coordinates tab.
In the Display rulers part, check the rulers you want to display in the workspace.
Click OK to validate.

Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window.

II.3.7 GETTING DISTANCES ON THE MAP
A9155 allows the user to get distances on the map easily by the use of the Distance measurement button. This tool
allows you also to determine the azimuth of the current measurement segment.


To display distances on the map, proceed as follows :
Make displayed the map of your current project,
Left click on the Distance measurement button from the toolbar,
Left click once in the map to put the start point,
C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 39/476


Click on the map at each point you want to know the distance from the previous point,
The distance from the first point, the distance from the previous point, and the azimuth angle of the current
measurement segment are displayed in the extreme lower left corner of your current environment,
Double click on the map to finish the current distance measurement session.


Notes :
Selected points are linked to each other by straight lines,
A9155 reads azimuth in a clockwise direction.

II.3.8 DISPLAYED CURSORS
In A9155, cursors will appear in different forms according to the current position or command. The meaning of each
possible shapes is described below :

Appearance Meaning


Wait The hourglass tells you to wait. When it disappears, you can enter another
command.

Arrow Use the arrow mainly to select objects or commands. It will remain as long as a new
command has not been activated



Selection arrow
Use the zone selection arrow to define a selection region. You can use it inside a
map to define a zone to print or copy and in the panoramic view to define the zone to
be displayed on the map. You must define a window on the active map or
panoramic view by left clicking (1st corner of the window top left) and Sliding.

Polygonal selection
arrow
Use the polygonal zone selection arrow to define a non-rectangular selection region.
You can use it inside a map to define a zone to filter either sites or transmitters, to
define computation and focus zones, to draw vector or raster polygons. You must
define a "closed polygonal zone" on the active map by left clicking several times.
Close the polygon by clicking twice.



Hand

Only active on maps, use the hand to move the visible part of the displayed map.

Zoom area The magnifying glass tells you that A9155 is waiting for a zoom window to be
defined on the active map by left clicking (1st corner of the window top left) and
Sliding.


New transmitter
The transmitter symbol tells you that A9155 is waiting for you to place a transmitter
on the active map by left clicking. You can place as many transmitters as you want
by holding down the button while you move the mouse and pressing down the Ctrl
key at the same time.

Sights The sight symbol will appear as soon as you have activated the point analysis tool.
This informs you that A9155 is waiting for you to left click on a point of the active
map.

Sights placed
(Receiver)
The sight placed symbolizes the Receiver and indicate the point on the map used
for calculations displayed in the Measurements or Point analysis window (Profile /
Reception / Interference/Results/AS analysis). You can access menu by right
clicking on the point analysis window.

Pencil The pencil indicates that you can define polygonal zones without the clutter. A9155
is waiting for you to left click on various points on the active map. Double clicking will
close the polygon.

Deletion A9155 is waiting for you to select by left clicking a newly created polygonal zone.


Position indicator A9155 is waiting for you to select an edge of the newly created polygon by left
clicking. When you click, the cursor changes into the Select/create points on
polygons cursor (below). Right clicking will open a context-sensitive dialog box
allowing you to add a point, delete the polygon and centre the map on the polygon.


Select/create
points on polygons
Left clicking followed by dragging one of the polygon edges, will add a new point to
the polygon and modify its contour. Left clicking on a point that already exists on the
polygon, followed by dragging allows you to move the point. Right clicking opens a
context-sensitive dialog box allowing you to delete a point, delete the polygon and
centre the map on the polygon.

Placing a CW
measurement point
A9155 is waiting for you to left click on a point on the active map so it can place a
CW measurement point there.

Placing points in a
CW measurement
path
A9155 is waiting for you to left click on a point on the active map so it can start a CW
measurement path. Once you have made your first click, the cursor will change
shape and A9155 will wait for you to left click on various points on the active map.
The working environment


40/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Double clicking will end the path.


Microwave link
start
End
A9155 is waiting for you to left click on a point on the active map (1
st
point in the
microwave link). Once you have made your first click, the cursor will change shape
and A9155 will wait for you to left click on a second point on the active map to end
the link (2
nd
point in the microwave link)

Measurements on
the map
Use the measurement tool to display projected distances and azimuths in the status
bar .


II.3.9 PRINTING A MAP
To print a map area, proceed as follows :
Click on the select an area tool in the zoom toolbar,
Define the area to be printed: Position the pointer on the map. Press and hold the left mouse button at the
north-west corner of the area, drag the pointer to the south-east corner and then release the mouse button,
Select the Print area: Set command in the File menu. The selected area is lighter,
Select the Page setup command in the File menu to configure your print layout. The Page setup dialog box
is displayed,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Select the appropriate options on the available fields you want for your print,
When your configuration is achieved, press OK to validate.


To visualize your print sheet, proceed as follows :
Select the Print preview command in the File menu to visualize your print sheet.


To remove the selected area, proceed as follows :
Select the Print area: Remove command in the File menu.


Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in windows


Note : Visibility scales defined for objects are taken into account during printings or print previews. Objects will appear
only if the printing scale is within their respective visibility range.

Caution : When using the Fit to page option, it is not possible to know the printing scale in advance.

II.3.10 EXPORTING MAPS TO EXTERNAL FILES
To export a map as an external file, proceed as follows :
Click on the Select an area tool in the zoom toolbar.
Define the area to be exported: Position the pointer on the map. Press and hold the left mouse button at the
north-west corner of the area, drag the pointer to the south-east corner and then, release the mouse button.
Select the Export image... command in the File menu. In the Save as dialog box, define the directory where
you want to locate your file, the file name and the file format. Press OK.
In the Size of created file dialog box, specify either the scale and the resolution (dot/inch) to display the
image with this resolution or the pixel size (m) to use image as a georeferenced raster file. The minimum
resolution is set to 1 metre.
Press OK to validate.

Note : Three file formats, *.tif, *.bil and *.bmp are supported. The *.bmp format is rather dedicated to images and the *.tif
and *.bil format to georeferenced images. Thus, to use the exported map as an image, choose *.bmp format and define a
scale and a resolution; this last one will be written in the file. On the other hand, if you want to use the exported map as
geographic data, prefer the *.tif or *.bil format and specify the pixel size. A georeferencement file will be created. For
additional information see Supported data formats.

Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the dialog box

C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 41/476


II.3.11 EXPORTING MAPS TO OTHER APPLICATIONS
To copy an image to another application as a linked object, proceed as follows :
Click on the Select an area tool in the zoom toolbar.
Define the area to be exported: Position the pointer on the map. Press and hold the left mouse button at the
north-west corner of the area, drag the pointer to the south-east corner and then release the mouse button.
Select the Copy command in the Edit menu,
Open another application.
Select the Paste special... command in the Edit menu. In the Paste special dialog box, choose the Paste
link option and select A9155 document object in the scrolling list box. Press OK to validate. A shortcut to
the source file is created and thus, the image may be updated by left clicking on it and selecting the A9155
linked object: Convert... command.

Note : if the A9155 file is modified and saved, the linked image is automatically updated.


To copy an image to another application as a screen shot, proceed as follows :
Click on the Select an area tool in the zoom toolbar.
Define the area to be exported: Position the pointer on the map. Press and hold the left mouse button at the
north-west corner of the area, drag the pointer to the south-east corner and then release the mouse button.
Select the Copy Image... command in the Edit menu. In the Copy image dialog box, choose the screen
resolution option or define the pixel size (m) and then, press OK to validate.
Open another application.
Select the Paste special... command in the Edit menu. In the Paste special dialog box, choose the Paste
option and select Bitmap in the scrolling list box. Press OK to validate.


To copy the north-west and south-east point coordinates of the image to another application, proceed as follows :
Click on the Select an area tool in the zoom toolbar.
Define the area to be exported: Position the pointer on the map. Press and hold the left mouse button at the
north-west corner of the area, drag the pointer to the south-east corner and then release the mouse button.
Select the Copy Image... command in the Edit menu. In the Copy image dialog box, choose the screen
resolution option or define the pixel size (m) and then, press OK to validate.
Open another application.
Select the Paste command in the Edit menu (or the Unformatted text option when choosing the Paste
Special... command).

Note : The point coordinates vary according to the chosen option (screen resolution or pixel size).

II.4 WORKING WITH THE EXPLORER
II.4.1 WORKING WITH THE EXPLORER : OVERVIEW
The Explorer window has three tabs:

The Data tab allows the radio data and calculation management; it consists of diverse folders depending on the modules
included in the A9155 application:

Sites
Antennas
Transmitters
Predictions
UMTS Parameters, CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters, or GSM/GPRS Parameters
UMTS Simulations or CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations
Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only)
Hexagonal design
Microwave links
CW Measurements and Test mobile data

The working environment


42/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



The Geo tab allows to handle geographical data; it initially contains three folders and more when you import other
geographical data types (vector data, scanned images) such as :

Clutter classes
Clutter heights
Digital Terrain Model
Population data
Any generic geo data map
Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA, WCDMA/UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000)


The Modules tab offers the propagation model management. It contains :

A Propagation models folder where the following propagation models are listed :
Longley-Rice
Okumura-Hata
Costa-Hata
Standard Propagation Model
ITU 526-5
ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93)
WLL

The list of the different AFP models available in your current A9155 version.

Any additional module created via the Api

In each tab, the created or imported objects are listed in corresponding folders using a tree-structure presentation. Each
object and folder offer a context menu available by left clicking on it.

II.4.2 RENAMING AN OBJECT
To rename an object, proceed as follows :
Either
Left click the object.
Press the F2 key.
Or
Right click the object
Select the Rename command in the context menu.

II.4.3 DISPLAYING THE OBJECT PROPERTIES
To Open the property dialog of any object, proceed as follows :

Right click the object to open the associated context menu,
Select the Properties... command in the context menu.

Note : depending on the object type, properties can be accessed by just double clicking on it. Double clicking as the
same function than the one in bold in the associated context menu (left click on the object).

II.4.4 DELETING AN OBJECT
To delete an object, proceed as follows :

Either
Right click the object either in the explorer window or on the map (radio data),
Select the Delete command in the context menu,
or
Click on the object in the explorer window,
Press the Suppr key.
C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 43/476



II.4.5 MANAGING OBJECT VISIBILITY
The and buttons are located in front of folders containing at least one object.

To open or close a folder, proceed as follows :
Click respectively on the or buttons.

In the example below, the Antennas folder is open, and the Sites folder is closed. A check box is displayed next to
each object visible in the workspace.





To show or hide an object in the workspace, proceed as follows :
When a check box is checked, the corresponding object is visible in the workspace. If you want to make the
object invisible, simply uncheck the check box by clicking on it.

The folders with grey check box contain both visible and invisible objects.
In the example, the sites are not displayed in the workspace unlike the transmitters. Moreover, some prediction studies
listed in the Prediction folder are not visible.


The different folders composing any environment can be ordered in layers with a view to manage their display priority on
the map. For example, in the example above, the layer associated with the predictions is displayed over the layer
associated with the UMTS simulations. Indeed, in the tree above, the Predictions folder is located higher than the UMTS
simulations one. This feature is particularly useful for the display managing of geo data objects.

To manage several objects display priority, proceed as follows :
Select the object you want to change the display priority on the map,
Drag it through the Explorer window,
Put it at the location that gives him the display priority order you want to assign to it.

Note : Putting over layers may get invisible under layers. To avoid that, do not forget to adjust the transparency level of
objects located over the others.

The working environment


44/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


II.5 WORKING WITH DATA TABLES
II.5.1 ACCESSING DATA TABLE
In A9155, many radio data objects (sites, transmitters, repeaters, antennas, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 Cells, UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA2000 parameters, microwave links...) can be stored in a table, summarising all their characteristics, and
allowing you to use filters, groups and sorts on contained data. Table can also be used to display prediction reports.


To access a Data table, proceed as follows :
Click on the appropriate tab from the explorer window,
Either
Double click on the data folder (not available for prediction reports),
Or
Right click on the data folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose Open in the scrolling menu.

II.5.2 MANAGING CONTENTS IN TABLES
To check displayed table data, proceed as follows :
Either,
Click the Data tab from the explorer window,
Right click on the data folder in order to display the associated context menu,
Select the data folder properties,
Choose the table tab from the window.
Or,
Open the table you want to manage the contents,
Either,
Right click in any cell of the table,
Choose the Fields... command from the open context menu,
Or
Choose the Fields... command from the Records menu in the main menu bar.


It is possible to check and to manage (addition and deletion of new types) the data stored in the table. In this window, are
displayed the names, types, allocated lengths, and default value (if existing) of the data available. Some objects are
custom objects of A9155 and cannot be removed and other are user-definable.

Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window.

Notes
When creating a new column (Add... button from any table tab window), you can fill a choice list associated with the
new variable (only with text format). Hence, when assigning a value to this variable in the associated cell, you will be
able to choose one of the items from the scrolling choice list. Moreover, the cell can be also edited, and any value can
be assigned to it.
It is possible to define a default value to any user-defined field. This default value is automatically reported to the
choice list box (only in text format).
Even if tables summarise the characteristics of each item, it is possible to edit, individually, most of them by two ways
(See Editing contents in tables)
Even if A9155 is case-sensitive, be aware that this could lead to some troubles when connected to some database
formats (e.g. Access)

C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 45/476


II.5.3 EDITING CONTENTS IN TABLES
Two ways are available in order to edit Data table cells :

either by choosing in a scrolling box (if a choice list has been defined in the field definition):


Data/Table of transmitters

or by editing and changing the value or the text directly in the box :


Data/Table of transmitters

II.5.4 OPENING DIALOGS FROM TABLES
Since most of the tuneable objects can be listed in tables, it is also possible to open the properties dialog box of any site,
antenna, transmitter or cell from the corresponding table.

To do this, proceed as follows :
Open the considered table,
Select the record you want to open the property dialog box
Either
Double click on it,
Or
Right click on the record you want to open the property dialog box,
Select the Record properties... command from the open context menu (or from the Records menu).


Note : sometimes, clicking on narrow cells drives to just editing it. To avoid such a behaviour, and to open the property
dialog for sure, double click on the extreme left part of the table in the appropriate row.

The working environment


46/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


II.5.5 MANAGING TABLE DISPLAY
The table formats can be personalized in order to retain pertinent data, or for a clearer visualization. In that way, it is
possible to manage the titles, styles or fonts, to adjust the dimensions of the cells, and to hide or freeze columns.


Manage table titles
Activate the Table window,
Select the Format Title command from the Format menu in the menu bar,
A 4 tabs (Font, Colour, Borders, Alignment) font dialog box opens,
Select the title format parameters from the available tabs in the open window,
Click either the OK or Apply button to validate.


Manage table columns
Activate the Table window,
Select the Format Columns command from the Format menu in the menu bar,
A 4 tabs (Font, Colour, Borders, Alignment) font dialog box opens,
Select the table content format parameters from the available tabs in the open window,
Click either the OK or Apply button to validate.


Change width or height
Activate the Table window,
Set your cursor on the separation between lines or columns to be modified (in the title bar for widths and in
the 1st shaded column for heights)
Left Click and slide the cursor.


Changing cells widths



Changing cells height

Note : You can define a different width for each column. The height of the cells will be defined for the entire table.

Display the columns
Activate the Table window,
Select the Display columns command from the Format menu. The dialog box allows to select the various
columns which are displayed in the corresponding table.

Freeze/Unfreeze a column
In large tables where the use of scroll bars is necessary, it may be useful to keep some columns visible, by freezing them
on the screen. This feature is always possible except for tables containing reports.

C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 47/476


To do so, proceed as follows :
Activate the Table window,
Select the column to be frozen by left clicking on the corresponding title (to freeze several columns, slide on
the associated titles after the 1
st
click - you can only select several columns if they are adjacent to each
other - ),
Select the Freeze columns command from the Format menu

To unfreeze frozen columns, select the Unfreeze columns command from the Format menu

Hide columns
There are three ways to hide columns :
1
Activate the Table window,
Left click on the title of the column to hide (to hide several columns, hold the Ctrl key when selecting the
other columns to hide),
Select the Hide columns command on the Format menu.
2
Activate the Table window,
Do as the same way as in the resize columns method seen above, and slide the pointer on the title bar in
order to obtain a zero width column.
3
Unselect the concerned column in the Display columns command from the Format menu.

To display again the hidden columns, use the Display columns command from the Format menu.

Moving columns
In large tables it can be practical to group columns of interest, or to read data in a special order. In A9155, the column
order can be managed easily.
To do so, proceed as follows :
Activate the Table window,
Select the column to be moved by left clicking on the corresponding title (to move several columns, slide on
the associated titles after the 1
st
click - you can only move several columns if they are adjacent to each
other - ),
Click again on the selected columns zone and drag it until the required target. When this zone is dragged,
the place where the columns will be displayed is referenced by a red line.
II.5.6 COPYING AND PASTING IN TABLES
A9155 provides some powerful tools in order to use the copy and paste functions in tables. You may either copy any cell
with the copy (Ctrl+C or Copy command from the Edit menu) or cut (Ctrl+X or Cut command from the Edit menu)
functions and paste it in any available cell from any table (Ctrl+V or Paste command from the Edit menu).

Moreover, it is possible to paste several times the same cell in a table. To do so, proceed as follows :
Activate the table window,
Select the cell zone where you want to copy the data,



If you want to copy the top cell in the selected cells, either use the Fill down (Ctrl+D) shortcut or the Fill
The working environment


48/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


down command from the Edit menu,



If you want to copy the bottom cell in the selected cells, either use the Fill up (Ctrl+U) shortcut or the Fill up
command from the Edit menu,



II.5.7 PRINTING DATA TABLES
In A9155, it is as easy to print Data table as maps. To do this, make active your table, and choose the Print... command
from the File menu in the general menu bar.

Like for maps and reports, it is also possible to preview the print to be made on tables.

II.6 FILTERING/GROUPING/SORTING DATA
II.6.1 SORTING AND FILTERING IN TABLES
In A9155, data may be sorted and/or filtered in particular in tables (this is also possible in data folder or on the map).
After filtering, excluded data are not taken into account in calculations. There are many ways to use this feature.

Sorting in Tables
Data may be sorted in ascending (A to Z, 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A, 10 to 1) order. Any field except the antenna
patterns field may be sorted.
To sort data in a table, proceed as follows :
Activate the table window,
Select a title of a column. This column will be the sort reference.
When selected, right click or select the Records menu. Then select the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending
C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 49/476


option from the scrolling menu.


Sorting in several columns
A9155 offers to sort several table columns at the same time.
To do so, proceed as follows :
Activate the table window,
Select the columns to be sorted by selecting them in the title bar,
When selected, right click or select the Records menu. Then select the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending
option from the scrolling menu,
Sorts are successively applied to each selected column, if only these are adjacent to each other.


Filtering in Tables
To filter a type of data in a table, proceed as follows :
Activate the table window,
Select an item, a type of antenna in the transmitters table, for example,
When selected, right click or select the Records menu. Then select the Filter by selection (resp. Filter
excluding selection) option from the scrolling menu to keep only (resp. to reject) data which have the
antenna (for example) as the selected item.

See Examples of filter in tables

Filtering data in several columns is possible in the same way not only if selected items are adjacent to each other. To
select different cells, hold the Ctrl key pressed when left clicking.


Advanced data Filtering in Tables
A9155 enables to make complex filters, by combining several criteria on fields. This can be managed by using criteria
either in the Advanced filter option from the Records menu, or by choosing the general tab from the item properties which
is in consideration.
The authorized filtering criteria are :

Formula Data are kept in the table only if
=X value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<> X value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<5 numerical value is less than 5
>7 numerical value is greater than 7
<=10 numerical value is less than or equal to 10
>=20 numerical value is greater than or equal to 20

Combinations of filters are made firstly horizontally, then vertically.

See Advanced filtering Example and counter-examples(1 2)...


Adding/modifying a data in any filtered/sorted table
When a new item is added to the project (base station, site, transmitter, ...) or when a data is modified, it is possible to
reapply a previous filter/sort configuration.
To do so, proceed as follows :
Activate the table window,
Right click on the item in the data window or select the Records menu.
Select the Apply filter/sort option from the scrolling menu.


Restoring data in Tables
To restore filtered data in tables, select the Show all records option from the Records menu.

Filtering, by any way, applies automatically to maps and data folders. As in tables, A9155 permits to manage easily data
from folders.

The working environment


50/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


II.6.2 EXAMPLES OF FILTER IN TABLES


Filter by selection (Antenna AO9209)


Filter excluding selection (Antenna AO9209)

II.6.3 FILTERING RADIO DATA
In A9155, filters may be applied to items with results displayed simultaneously in tables, in the map and in the data
folders. All data not checking the filters are not taken into account in calculations.

Filter tools are available :
1 - Either in the Advanced Filter option from the Records menu (when the Data table window is on) or from the general
tab window from the item properties (see features in Sorting and filtering in tables)
2 - by using the Filter by selection or Filter excluding selection options from either the Records menu or by right clicking
directly on the object in the table to be used as reference for the filtering (see features in Sorting and filtering in tables).
3 - from the Properties dialog box associated with the current folder.

To filter any folder from its associated Properties dialog box, proceed as follows :
Click on the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder you want to sort to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Select the General tab from the open window,
Click on the button,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open filtering dialog window,
Click the Filter tab and choose the filtering reference variable(s) and the associated filtering way(s).
Select a field you want to use for filtering among the discrete fields. A9155 lists the choice list if the
selected field is a text field with a choice list, or all the values of the selected field in table.
Check/uncheck boxes to keep/exclude values from tables, map and explorer. A9155 displays the defined
filter at the bottom of the dialog.
Click OK to apply filter.

Notes :
C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 51/476


The way the data contained in the current folder are filtered can be saved in a configuration template in order to be
used later.
It is also possible to use wildcard characters when defining advanced filter criteria on fields with the text format.

Filter criteria Function
*string* Filters objects which the chosen field contains the string of characters
string* Filters objects which the chosen field begins with the string of characters

Application: Sites may belong to several groups. In this case, let us assume that each site has an associated field such
as a list of groups (for example gr1 gr3 gr5). Therefore, by entering *gr5* as criterion, you can filter all the sites included
in gr5.

It is possible to select several values at once. To do this, click one or several values using shift and/or Ctrl button at
the same time and then, check/uncheck one of boxes.
Advanced site filters are available using the site list feature.

See Advance filtering : Example
II.6.4 ADVANCED FILTERING : EXAMPLE
Let's consider an A9155 project which contains only antenna of two types : GSMA090-12-6 and AO9209. All transmitters
using A09209 antenna have only 0 azimuth instead of 0, 120 and 240 of azimuth for transmitters using GSMA090-12-
6 antenna



Example : initial table
A goal could be, for example, to extract GSMA090-12-6 antennas whose azimuths are 0 and 240. This can be done by
using the following syntax in the window described just below :



The working environment


52/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


An example of filtering/sorting

- The type of columns to be filtered is chosen from a scrolling menu.
- The second line point out that will be kept GSMA090-12-6 antennas whose azimuth is lower than 120,
- or any type of antenna whose azimuth is greater than 120 (4th line). For this constraint, no AO9209 antenna
is concerned

II.6.5 ADVANCED FILTERING : COUNTER EXAMPLE 1
Here are a typical example which could drive an A9155 user to mistakes in filter and sort syntax. The goal stays the
same than in the example just before. The examples are shown through an advanced filter window and the
corresponding filtered and sorted Data table.



- The type of columns to be filtered is chosen from a scrolling menu.
- The second line point out that will be kept GSMA090-12-6 antennas whose azimuth is greater than 120,
- or any type of antenna whose azimuth is less than 120 (4th line), i.e. both GSMA090-12-6 and AO9209
antennas.

II.6.6 ADVANCED FILTERING : COUNTER EXAMPLE 2
Here are a typical example which could drive an A9155 user to mistakes in filter and sort syntax. The goal stays the
same than in the example just before. The examples are shown through an advanced filter window and the
corresponding filtered and sorted Data table.



- The type of columns to be filtered is chosen from a scrolling menu.
- The second line point out that will be kept any type of antenna whose azimuth is greater than 120,
C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 53/476


- or any type of antenna whose azimuth is less than 120 (4th line).
- GSMA090-12-6 antennas will be kept without any constraint.

The result indicates there have been no filtering. The final table is identical with the initial table.

II.6.7 SORTING A FOLDER
In the data window, items (transmitters, sites, simulations, etc...) are classified in folders. You can unfold them by left
clicking on the button associated with an item. You can fold them by left clicking on the button.

In A9155, every item folder can be sorted in the same way as in tables. Whenever a Data table is sorted, the display of
the corresponding item is automatically modified in the associated folder.

Moreover, you can sort any folder from its associated properties dialog box. To do so, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder you want to sort to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Select the General tab from the open window,
Click on the button,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open sorting dialog window,
Choose the sorting reference variable(s) and the associated sorting way(s),
Click OK to validate.


Note : The way the current folder is sorted can be saved in a configuration template in order to be used later.

II.6.8 ARRANGING ITEMS IN GROUPS
In A9155, it may be very practical to group data by characteristics. This can be done on the data folder or subfolder of
any item. The group corresponds to the Contents in tables. Several levels (limited by the memory of your computer) of
grouping are available.

To arrange any folder or subfolder in group(s) of variables, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder or subfolder you want to arrange in groups to open the associated context menu,
Either,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Select the General tab from the open window,
Click on the button,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open grouping dialog
window,
Choose the grouping reference variable(s) and the associated grouping order,
Click OK to validate,
Or,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Group by,
Choose the property you want to use as a group reference on the appeared menu on the right.


To come back to a standard display, either choose the Group by none option in the scrolling menu or use the grouping
dialog window and put back the grouping reference variables in the Available fields box.

Note : The way the data contained in the current folder are grouped can be saved in a configuration template in order to
be used later.


See examples of grouping by

The working environment


54/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


II.6.9 EXAMPLES OF GROUPING BY
In the following transmitters folder, sites in red are active, sites in white are inactive :


Data/Transmitters/Group by active sites

The obtained transmitters folder is classified in two groups, one for the active sites, one for the inactive sites :


Data/Transmitters - Transmitters grouped by activity

Note : in A9155, activity is a boolean. Active has the true value, whereas inactive has the false value.
C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 55/476


II.6.10 USING A GROUP BY/SORT/FILTER CONFIGURATION
In A9155, the way data contained in any folder are grouped, filtered and sorted can be saved in a configuration template
in order to be used later. Configuration templates are directly embedded to saved .atl projects. Any configuration is
erasable.


To create a configuration template (from an existing data organisation), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder you want to sort to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Select the General tab from the open window,
Click on the button,
Type the configuration name in the open saving configuration dialog window. The configuration created is
listed in the configuration scrolling list in the General tab and is available for any data organisation in the
current folder only,
Click OK to validate.


Note : For transmitters, a default configuration called As Sites folder is available. Using this configuration enables you to
arrange transmitters in the Transmitters folder according to the organisation criteria defined for sites.

You can define several configurations and use them when needed. The configurations youve created are available from
the context menu associated with any folder by using the Configuration command and one of the listed objects in the
scrolling menu. To apply the configuration used to newly created objects, select the Apply current configuration
command in context menus.


Existing configurations are not saved in database. Nevertheless, in order to keep these, and potentially share them
between user, A9155 provides a feature allowing you to save user configurations (including also geo data set and
computation zone) in an external file.

See Exporting user configuration to an external file.

II.6.11 CREATING SUBFOLDERS
In A9155, you can manage your data folders in subfolders in order to display them in different ways. You can, for
example, create a subfolder for each sorting or filtering and compare it with each other.

To do so, proceed as follows :
In the data folder window, right click on the item you want to create a subfolder of,
Choose the Create a folder option from the scrolling menu,
A subfolder containing a copy of the original folder content is created.

You can manage your data in subfolders as in the original folder. Every subfolder is associated with a Data table window.
You can display each subfolder on the map, by checking ( ) or not ( ) the check box associated with each subfolder.
You can manage the visibility of the data as described in the Object visibility topic.

If you delete a subfolder, of course, data are not deleted. If you delete the last remaining subfolder, its data go directly to
the initial folder. due to refresh consideration, it may happen that data disappear. To come back to the display of all
objects of the folder, use the group by none function related to the considered folder.

II.6.12 REORGANIZING DATA AFTER MODIFICATIONS
When some data are either added or modified, their properties may not be consistent with the current folder
configuration. To make this configuration respected, just choose the apply current configuration from either the Records
menu (in case of displayed table) or from its associated context menu.

Note : the configuration is automatically applied to radio data dropped on the map. For example, let's assume that the
current configuration filters transmitters which azimuth is 240. We build a tri-sector station which azimuth are 0,120 and
240. Once dropped, 0 and 120 azimuth transmitters are automatically filtered. Only the 240 azimuth transmitter is
kept.

The working environment


56/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


II.6.13 FILTERING DATA IN A POLYGON
In large projects, it may be useful to work only on a certain number of sites and transmitters, in order to reduce the
computation cost or to make visualisation clearer either on the map, table or in the data folder.

To filter data inside a polygon, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Filter inside a polygon command from the open menu,
Either,
Select the Draw option,
Draw the filtering polygon on the map with the mouse, each left click corresponding to an angle,
Close the zone by double clicking (not displayed when closed ),
Or,
Select the computation zone option,
Only data (Sites and transmitters) contained in the considered polygon filter are kept.


The remaining objects in the polygon are displayed both in the data folders, in the Data tables and on the map.

In this zone, you may use current sorts, filters or groups or create new ones.

Notes :
You may filter sites inside a polygon even if they are grouped. The filter is applied to subfolders,
The polygon filtering can be saved in a Site folder configuration,
This filter is automatically applied to transmitters,
The filter is saved in the .atl document,
The filter is taken into account when defining a configuration,
The current computation or focus zone can also be taken as polygon filter (see their associated context menu)

II.6.14 REMOVING THE POLYGON FILTER
In A9155, radio data can be filtered in a polygon. As other filters, this can be saved in folder configuration.

To cancel the polygon filter, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Remove polygon filter command from the open menu,
All existing data from the current project are then displayed.

II.7 MANAGING DISPLAY IN A9155
II.7.1 DEFINING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF ANY ITEM FOLDER
In A9155, most of the item groups (sites, transmitters, microwave links, predictions, simulations, measurements, DTM
maps,..) are managed in the same way concerning their display. For each of them, an homogenised dialog window is
available allowing you to define the type of field(s) to display, and how. Moreover, from this standard window, it is
possible to display labels related to the displayed object, and to manage the information available using the tip tool when
pointing the object on the workspace. Finally, you will be able to choose or not to display the related legend in the
Legend window.

To access the display property window of any object, proceed as follows:
Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder related to the objects from which you want to manage the display properties,
Left click the Properties command from the open context menu,
Click on the Display tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the display parameters of the current object,
Click OK to validate.


C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 57/476


When working on the display of an item folder (e.g. Site or Transmitter folder), it is possible to choose among several
display types:
single: same representation for any object of the folder.
discrete values: representation according to the value of a discrete field available in the table related to the current
object(s).
values interval: representation according to the value of a numerical field available in the table related to the current
object(s).


Notes :
Whatever is the display type chosen, it is possible to change the displayed colours. To do that, select the threshold to
modify and use the commands contained in the scrolling menu when clicking the button.
You can modify globally thresholds and associated parameters using the values interval display type and the
Shading... command (Actions button).
Each individual display property (e.g. of just one site) is reachable by selecting the display tab from the item
Properties dialog.

II.7.2 MANAGING AND DISPLAYING LEGENDS
Any displayed A9155 object may have its associated legend in the Legend window.

To make displayable legend associated with any object, proceed as follows :
Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder related to the objects from which you want to manage the legend properties,
Left click the Properties command from the open context menu,
Click on the Display tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the Add to legend box,
Click OK to validate,
The associated legend is now displayed in the Legend window.

To open the Legend window, just check the Legend command from the View menu in the menu bar. A new window is
then displayed in the current environment.

Notes :
Only displayed objects can have their legend in the Legend window,
The contents of the legend is given in the threshold window definition and is editable.
The legend window can be printed as any other active window. To do this, right click in it and select the Print..
command in the open context menu.

II.7.3 THRESHOLDS, COLOURS AND LEGENDS
The thresholds associated with colours are so many criteria making up a range of criteria (e.g. below threshold from -
45dBm to -70dBm).

You can use this association to provide a colorimetric representation of received signal levels, path losses, or any other
field displayed in values interval in A9155.

The definition of thresholds can be performed by using the button of A9155 generic display windows. The
several commands are available are listed below :
Select all : A9155 automatically selects all the representations available in the table.
Delete : A9155 removes representations selected in the table.
Insert before : This command is available only if a representation is selected in the table. A9155 adds a new
threshold in the table and places it before the selected one.
Insert after : This command is available only if a representation is selected in the table. A9155 adds a new threshold
in the table and places it after the selected one.
Properties : This command is available only after selecting one or several representations of the table. A9155 opens
the Display window where you may change colour and style.
Shading : A9155 opens the Shading window. You can define the number of value intervals and configure their
displays. Enter the highest (First break) and lowest (Last break) thresholds and an interval between thresholds.
Define the colour shading by choosing beginning and colours. Finally, you can select a coverage interior and a style
of line for coverage contour.
The working environment


58/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



You can set coverage transparency by moving the cursor on the transparency scale and specify a visibility scale.

If available, the legend associated with each threshold allows you to display a text instead of the threshold in the legend.
If no text has been entered, thresholds are displayed with associated colours.


Defining thresholds

In the example above, in the case of the signal level option, the defined thresholds mean :
Signal level >= -65 red (1st colour from top),
-65 > Signal level >= -105 shading from red to blue (9 thresholds),
Signal level < -105 not drawn on coverage.


Notes :
Shading, Insert before and Insert after features are only available in case of a value intervals display type.
When double-clicking on any representation in the table, A9155 opens the associated Display window.

II.7.4 DISPLAYING OBJECT LABELS ON THE MAP
Two solutions are generally available in order to display information related to displayed objects (e.g. sites or
transmitters) on the map within A9155. This information can be either permanently displayed or temporary reachable in
an help popup related to any pointed object on the map.

To make displayed permanently labels related to any object on the map, proceed as follows :
Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder related to the objects you want to display related labels on the map,
Left click the Properties command from the open context menu,
Click on the Display tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the items to be displayed in the Label scrolling menu,
Click OK to validate,
The associated labels are now displayed on the map close to the referring objects.

Note : You can display as many labels than parameters related to the considered object. E.g., even if you add a new
field in the transmitter table, this field will be available to be displayed as a label for all the transmitters.

II.7.5 USING THE TIPS TOOL TO GET INFORMATION
Two solutions are generally available in order to display information related to displayed objects (e.g. sites or
transmitters) on the map within A9155. This information can be either permanently displayed or temporary reachable in
an help popup related to any pointed object on the map.

To make available information related to any pointed object on the map, proceed as follows :
Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder related to the objects you want to display related tables on the map,
Left click the Properties command from the open context menu,
Click on the Display tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the items to be displayed in the Tips text scrolling menu,
Click OK to validate,
The associated information can be now given in help popups when pointing any item on the map with
mouse.

C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 59/476



To make active the tips information, click the from the toolbar. To inactive this function, click it again ( ).

Note : You can display as many information in popups than parameters related to the considered object. E.g., even if you
add a new field in the transmitter table, this field will be potentially available to be displayed in tip balloons.

II.8 USING HANDY TOOLS
II.8.1 USING THE UNDO/REDO COMMAND
Undo/Redo commands are available in A9155. It is a first step to enable users to undo and redo :
Most of modifications performed in workspace as : creating, deleting and moving a site (even moving a site to a high
point), a station or a group of stations, modifying antenna azimuth, moving a transmitter or deleting a transmitter,
Management tasks performed in Explorer window as creating and deleting any object (site, transmitter, repeater,
antenna, link, group of hexagons, measurement path, prediction study, map, propagation model) except
simulations in UMTS projects.,
Management tasks performed in tables (add or delete records, paste in tables, fill down or fill up commands).

The Undo/Redo is reachable from the Edit menu when available.

Note : the last 10 actions can be undone, unless you perform an action which is not supported by the undo feature. In
that case, the undo memory is cancelled.

II.8.2 REFRESHING MAPS AND FOLDERS
A refresh function is available in A9155. This feature allows you to reload currently displayed maps and apply the current
configurations to folders (e.g. after an addition of inconsistent data not respecting a filter).

To do this, use the button from the tool bar or the shortcut key F5.

Note : this feature allows you to cancel some potential refresh problems of the map.

II.8.3 SETTING DOCUMENT PRINTS
In A9155, many windows can be easily printed : maps, tables, legend window, CW measurement window, Test mobile
data window, point analysis window. Concerning maps and tables, a preview feature is available.

To open the print preview of any table or map, proceed as follows :
Make active the window you want to print,
Select the Print Preview command from the File menu in the general menu bar,
A preview window (in which you can zoom in or zoom out) opens,
Use the Print... or the Close command.


The way tables and maps are printed can also be managed easily in order to provide well-organized and customized
printed outputs.

To setup any table or map print, proceed as follows :
Make active the window you want to parameter the print,
Select the Page Setup... command from the File menu in the general menu bar,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
A fit representation of the print document is displayed and some options dealing with customisation are
available.
Click OK to close the dialog.

Note : the selected options (e.g. : erase outside of focus zone) are taken into account in print preview.

The working environment


60/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


II.8.4 LOCATING ANY POINT ON THE MAP
Since the version V6.2.1, A9155 provides a tool which enables you to quickly find existing sites and vectors on the map
and to locate any point on the map. It is possible to search for a site or a vector according to any of its text type
attributes.

The first step consists in opening the Map locating dialog. To open it, in the tool bar, click on the map locating icon .
The Map locating dialog consists of three parts dedicated to:
The search for site,
The search for vector,
The location of any point,
The three find options cannot be used at once. Therefore, select one of them.


To search for any point on the map, proceed as follows :
Select the Point option,
In respective boxes, enter x-coordinate and y-coordinate of the point you want to find on the map,
Keep the Draw point option selected,
Click on OK. A9155 displays a target on the map and centres the map on it.

Note : to hide the target, right click on it and select the Delete command from the context menu.

II.8.5 LOCATING ANY SITE ON THE MAP
In order to locate any site on the map, A9155 provides two different tools.

1 - A search bar is available to find the location of sites on the map. The Search bar can be open or closed by selecting
the Search bar command in the View menu.

This bar becomes a floating window by double clicking on it. In this case, it is possible to resize it.

To search an existing site in a network using the search site tool, proceed as follows :
In the Search bar, type the first characters of the site name in the Find site box. A9155 displays a scrolling
list containing all the sites, which the name begins with this string of characters.
Then, either
Select the site in the list,
Or
Go on typing the site name to reduce the number of sites in the list.
After choosing the site in the list, A9155 automatically centres the map on the selected site.

Notes :
As in advanced filters, it is possible to use the contains (*string*) and begins with (string*) criteria to search for
sites which name contains or begins with the given string. Be careful, *string is unknown.
Use the F3 shortcut to be automatically placed in the Find site box.

2 - Since the version V6.2.1, A9155 provides a tool which enables you to quickly find existing sites and vectors on the
map and to locate any point on the map. It is possible to search for a site or a vector according to any of its text type
attributes.

The first step consists in opening the Map locating dialog. To open it, in the tool bar, click on the map locating icon .
The Map locating dialog consists of three parts dedicated to:
The search for site,
The search for vector,
The location of any point,
The three find options cannot be used at once. Therefore, select one of them.

Then, this tool works like the "Find site" tool (See above). To search for any site on the map, proceed as follows :
Select the Site option,
Open the Field scrolling menu and choose in the list one text field (among the text type attributes of sites),
In the box below, type the first characters for the selected attribute (name or a comment for example).
A9155 displays a scrolling list containing all the values, which begins with this string of characters, and
gives into brackets the name of corresponding sites/vectors.
Either,
C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 61/476


Select a value in the list,
Or,
Go on typing to reduce the number of values,
After choosing the value in the list, click on OK. A9155 automatically centres the map on the site with the
selected value.

Notes :
As in advanced filters, it is possible to use the contains (*string*) and begins with (string*) criteria to search for
sites, which selected field contains or begins with the given string.
Be careful, *string is unknown.

II.8.6 LOCATING ANY VECTOR ON THE MAP
Since the version V6.2.1, A9155 provides a tool which enables you to quickly find existing sites and vectors on the map
and to locate any point on the map. It is possible to search for a site or a vector according to any of its text type
attributes.

The first step consists in opening the Map locating dialog. To open it, in the tool bar, click on the map locating icon .
The Map locating dialog consists of three parts dedicated to:
The search for site,
The search for vector,
The location of any point,
The three find options cannot be used at once. Therefore, select one of them.

To search for any site on the map, proceed as follows :
Select the Vector option,
Open the Field scrolling menu and choose in the list one text field (among the text type attributes of
vectors),
In the box below, type the first characters for the selected attribute. A9155 displays a scrolling list
containing all the values, which begins with this string of characters, and gives into brackets the name of
corresponding sites/vectors.
Either,
Select a value in the list,
Or,
Go on typing to reduce the number of values,
After choosing the value in the list, click on OK. A9155 automatically centres the map on the vector with the
selected value.

Notes :
As in advanced filters, it is possible to use the contains (*string*) and begins with (string*) criteria to search for
sites, which selected field contains or begins with the given string.
Be careful, *string is unknown.

II.8.7 SYNCHRONIZING VECTOR SELECTION AND DATA TABLE
Vectors are made of points containing some attributes/properties. They can be geo data vectors, CW measurement
paths, or test mobile data paths and related to a table in which is displayed the properties of each point. When selecting
a point composing a vector, if the data table is displayed in the same time, A9155 synchronize automatically both.
Indeed, the tool selects in the table the records related to the selected point on the map.

Note : when working on a measurement path, you can use the specific CW measurement window with this feature.
When moving with the pointer along the path, the selection in the table is automatically made.

II.8.8 USING THE STATUS BAR TO GET INFORMATION
The status bar is one of the different objects that can be displayed or not using the View menu. Once checked, the status
bar is located at the extreme bottom part of your A9155 environment. Two parts of the status bar are used in A9155. The
left part provides information related to the used of the measurement tool ( button in the toolbar), i.e. distances
between successive points and azimuths. The right part displays information about the location where points the mouse
on the map : X and Y coordinates (respecting the defined display coordinate system), the altitude (extracted from the
The working environment


62/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


imported DTM file) and the currently concerned clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes property dialog) and
altitude (as defined either in the clutter classes or clutter heights folder).

II.8.9 USING ICONS FROM THE TOOL BAR
A9155 provides a large number of commands that can be accessible using icons located in the tool bar. Some of them
are also linked to shortcut keys.

The different icons located in the toolbar are listed below :

In the Standard toolbar
: Open the new project dialog (like the Ctrl+N shortcut)
: Access the Open file dialog (like the Ctrl+O shortcut)
: Save the current active project (like the Ctrl+S shortcut)
: Cuts the selected data (like the Ctrl+X shortcut)
: Copy the selected data (like the Ctrl+C shortcut)
: Paste the content of the clipboard (like the Ctrl+V shortcut)
: Print the current active window (table or map) (like the Ctrl+P shortcut)
: Open the About A9155 dialog

In the Radio toolbar
: Create a new station based on the currently selected model
: Create a new group of hexagons based on the currently selected station template ( no hexagon radius
defined)
: Station model currently selected
: Create a new repeater related to the currently selected transmitter
: Visible neighbourhood for the selected transmitter
: Activate the point analysis window
: Calculate only invalid matrices, calculate all unlocked coverages and pending simulations (like the F7 shortcut)
: Force the calculation of all the matrices from scratch, calculate all unlocked coverages and pending simulations
(like the Ctrl+F7 shortcut)

In the Map toolbar
: Activate the area selection tool
: Reload map and folders (like the F5 shortcut)
: Move the map window (like the Ctrl+D shortcut)
: Map scale currently used
: Zoom in on the map (like the Ctrl+A shortcut)
: Zoom out on the map (like the Ctrl+R shortcut)
: Define a zoom area on the map (like the Ctrl+W shortcut)
: Activate the tip tool feature (inactivated :
: Get distances on the map
: Activates the map locating tool in order to locate any point, site or vector

In the Microwave link toolbar
: Create a new microwave link.
C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 63/476



In the Search toolbar
: Centre map around the selected site.

In the Vector edition toolbar
: Create a new vector layer (either in the Geo or in the Data tab)
: Select the vector layer being currently edited
: Draw a new vector polygon
: Draw a new vector line
: Draw points
: Allows the user to merge several vector polygons
: Allows the user to make holes in polygons
: Permits to keep only overlapping areas in order to create the resulting polygon
: Allows the user to cut a polygon in several parts

Note : the description of each icon is given in a tip balloon when pointing the mouse on it.

II.8.10 USING SHORTCUTS IN A9155
Like many other applications working under Windows environment, A9155 provides a complete set of shortcuts in order
to make easier and quicker the way to use it.

The different available shortcuts are listed below (some of them are linked with icons of the toolbar):

Using the Ctrl key
Ctrl+A : Select all records in tables (table active) or Zoom in on the map (map active - like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+C : Copy the selected data (like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+D : Fill down selected data in tables (table active) or Move the map window (map active - like icon from the
toolbar)
Ctrl+F : Open the find in tables dialog
Ctrl+N : Open the new project dialog (like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+O : Access the Open file dialog (like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+P : Print the current active window (table or map) (like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+R : Zoom out on the map (like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+S : Save the current active project (like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+U : Fill down selected data in tables (table active)
Ctrl+V : Paste the content of the clipboard (like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+W : Define a zoom area on the map (map active) (like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+X : Cut the selected data (like icon from the toolbar)
Ctrl+Y : Redo the previous undone function
Ctrl+Z : Undo the last function

Using the F keys
F3 : Locate the cursor directly within the search site tool
F5 : Reload map and folders (like icon from the toolbar)
F7 : Calculate only invalid matrices, calculate all unlocked coverages and pending simulations (like icon from the
toolbar)
Ctrl+F7 : Force the calculation of all matrices from scratch, calculate all unlocked coverages and pending simulations
The working environment


64/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


(like icon from the toolbar)


Note : when a letter is underlined in a command (Use the Alt button to make underlines active in Windows 2000), press
Shift+letter to run it.

II.9 TIPS AND TRICKS
II.9.1 HOW TO IMPORT GEO DATA EASILY
Drag and drop feature is available for any geo data object to import in A9155. To do this, just select the accurate geo
data file in your file explorer and drag it to A9155. The format will be automatically detected by the tool.

This can also be made on PlaNET index data file.

II.9.2 HOW TO CHANGE GLOBALLY A VALUE FOR ALL THE TRANSMITTER
The right way to make global changes is to open the Transmitter table, modify the contents in the first cell, select all the
columns and then use the fill-down feature, available in the Edit menu or with the shortcut Ctrl+D.

To select all the cells of the column, the easiest way is to select the first one, then select the last one holding the Shift
button.

II.9.3 HOW TO FIND EASILY A SITE ON THE MAP
A search bar is available to find the location of sites on the map. The Search bar can be open or closed by selecting the
Search bar command in the View menu.

In the Search bar, type the first characters of the site name in the Find site box. A9155 displays a scrolling list containing
all the sites, which the name begins with this string of characters. Then, either select the site in the list, or go on typing
the site name to reduce the number of sites in the list. After choosing the site in the list, A9155 automatically centres the
map on the selected site. As in advanced filters, it is possible to use the contains (*string*) and begins with (string*)
criteria to search for sites which name contains or begins with the given string.

A map locating dialog is also available and provides the location of any site or vector (as function on its attributes) or any
point. To open it, select the icon in the toolbar.

II.9.4 HOW TO BE AUTOMATICALLY PLACED IN THE FIND SITE BOX
Use the F3 shortcut to be automatically placed in the Find site box of the Search bar.

II.9.5 HOW TO DELETE ALL SITES AND THEIR TRANSMITTERS IN ONE SHOT
The right way to delete all sites and their transmitters is to open the Sites table, select the first one and the last one
holding the Shift button and use Suppr keyboard button.

It is recommended to close the Sites and Transmitters folders before deleting a large number of sites and transmitters,
otherwise the refresh of the explorer could take a long time.

II.9.6 HOW TO ACCESS THE PROPERTIES OF ANY OBJECT OR GROUP OF OBJECTS
In A9155, the properties of any object (geo data, sites, transmitters, measurements, etc) can be accessed from the
associated context menu. This is reachable by right-clicking on the considered object/group and choosing the properties
command.

C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 65/476


II.9.7 HOW TO FILTER DATA RAPIDLY
The easiest way is to perform directly filters within the tables (popup menu available by right-clicking in the table). OR
and AND criteria can be easily handled:
Selecting cells in several columns and the option "Filtering by selection" in the popup menu performs a AND filtering
criterion
Example: keeping transmitters with azimuth 120 and pilot power equal to 33 dBm

Selecting cells in several rows and the option "Filtering by selection" in the popup menu performs a OR filtering
criterion
Example: keeping transmitters with pilot power equal to 33 dBm or 35 dBm

To check which kind of dynamic criterion has been used by A9155, you can open Transmitters/Properties/General tab
and look at the advanced filter.

II.9.8 HOW TO WORK ONLY ON "LIVE" SITES
Let's assume there is a flag (user field) in Site table dedicated to the status of the site ("live", "on-built", "planned",).

Filtering sites directly in the table with the popup menu ("Filtering by selection") allows to keep just "live" sites.

Filters on site are automatically performed on transmitters ("As site folder" is the default configuration for Transmitter
folder). Further simulations or predictions will be achieved only on "live" sites.

II.9.9 HOW TO USE WILDCARD CHARACTERS TO FILTER TEXT-FORMAT FIELDS
Wildcard characters such as * can be used when defining advanced filter criteria on fields with text format.
Entering *string* enables you to filter objects which the chosen field contains the string of characters.
Entering string* enables you filter objects which the chosen field begins with the string of characters.


Example: How to display transmitters which are allocated a channel XX?

In the Transmitter table structure, there is a field "Channels" which contains a flat list of the channels allocated to the
transmitter. It is possible to define an advanced filter as follows:

Use the Advanced filter tab of the Filter dialog (Transmitters/Properties.../General/Filter/Advanced filter):
Columns: select "Channels" in the list
Criteria: =* XX * (which means CONTAINS)

Only the transmitters with the channel XX are displayed.

Note : the same filter can be managed at the level of any study by transmitter.

II.9.10 HOW TO CHANGE GLOBALLY THE NAMES OF ALL THE SITES
There is a Find/Replace feature in the Edit menu available when a table is open. To prefix all the sites with your name for
example, select the first cell of the "name" column in the Site table and use the Edit/Replace feature.

II.9.11 HOW TO FIND EASILY AN OBJECT BY ITS NAME IN A FOLDER
Open the folder and type the first letters of the object name.

II.9.12 HOW TO OPEN OR CLOSE RAPIDLY A FOLDER
Shortcuts, available in standard Windows applications are available within A9155 to open or close the selected folder
with shortcuts.
"Right arrow" and "Left arrow" respectively open and close the selected folder just like "+" and "-" on the numeric
keyboard.
"*" on the numeric keyboard opens all the subfolders of the selected folder.
The working environment


66/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


[Alt F4] may be used to quit A9155 rapidly when no modifications were made. If there are modifications, you will be
asked to save them anyway.

II.9.13 HOW TO FIND EASILY AN OBJECT IN A TABLE
A Find feature is available in the Edit menu when a table is open. To find an object in a table, open the table and use the
Find feature.

II.9.14 HOW TO FIND EASILY AN OBJECT ON THE MAP
The Centre map feature allows the user to find on the map any object located into a folder (site, transmitter, etc).
When choosing this command in the associated context menu, the considered object is automatically displayed in the
centre of the current workspace.

II.9.15 HOW TO CUSTOMISE THE COLUMNS DISPLAYED IN A TABLE
When a table is open, you may use the "Display columns" feature available in the Format menu to choose which
columns you want to keep within the table. This is useful to customise reports on transmitters or import Excel-format data
by matching columns on both sides and copying-pasting into the table.

II.9.16 HOW TO CUSTOMISE THE TABLE STYLE
When a table is open, you may use features available in the Format menu in order to customise the table style.
To change the title style, choose the Format title feature.
To modify the column style, select a column and use the Format columns feature. You may also use the Align Left,
Centre, Align Right, Bold and Italic features.

II.9.17 HOW TO CHANGE GLOBALLY DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF OBJECTS
In the Display tab, select the whole table describing the display configuration and click on the Modify button. In the
Display window, you can choose a unique symbol for all the objects.

II.9.18 HOW TO PREDICT SIGNAL LEVEL ON A ROAD
The easiest way consists in using CW measurement features. Lets assume you have previously imported a vector file.
The procedure is divided into three steps:
Right click on a linear object and select the Element properties command. In the Geometry tab, copy the list
of coordinates (Ctrl+C).
Right click on the CW Measurement folder and select the New command. Give a name to the path, specify
CW measurement unit, transmitter and receiver properties and finally click on the Paste button. Then, click
on OK to validate the path creation.
Open the path properties window. Choose a propagation model, click on Actions and choose Calculate
predictions. The signal level calculated on the path is displayed in a related table (P(dBm) column).

You may use the CW Measurement window to visualise the signal level received from the selected transmitter on the
path.

II.9.19 HOW TO WORK ON A SET OF SITES SELECTED BY A POLYGON
Let's assume polygons are available within A9155. Right-clicking on the polygon, you can use it as the computation or
focus zone or as a filtering polygon. Sites, transmitters and future calculations are filtered with this polygon.

You can save the polygon filter as a configuration of the Site folder, and repeat this operation with as many polygons as
you wish.
Then, directly right-clicking on the Site folder, you will get all the available configurations for the folder and be able to
rapidly switch from one to another.

C H A P T E R 2


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 67/476


Configurations are saved in the ATL file but possibly also in an external user configuration file.

II.9.20 HOW TO OBTAIN A LINK BUDGET
Right-click anywhere in the Profile window to open a context menu. This menu allows you to change receiver properties,
gives the choice between signal level, pathloss or total losses display, and offers a link budget.

If the propagation model used by the selected transmitter is a Standard Propagation Model, there is an additional feature,
useful for validation, called "Model details" providing detailed results along the profile.

II.9.21 HOW TO DISPLAY CITY POINTS AND THEIR NAMES ON THE MAP
With a vector format providing for each point an attribute containing the name (e.g. "name").

Import the vector file within A9155 and choose the field "name" as label (you can use any field or list of fields in the same
way).

II.9.22 HOW TO DISPLAY SCRAMBLING CODES ON THE MAP
Scrambling codes are managed at the cell level, e.g. for a given transmitter and a given carrier.

Coverage can be displayed using a colour code based on any cell property (scrambling code, UL load,...) on condition
that:
A UMTS study is created with the choice of a single carrier
The study Display tab is set with the required field (scrambling code, UL load,...)

Note : PN offsets can be displayed in the same way in CDMA/CDMA2000 projects

II.9.23 HOW TO DEFINE THE DEFAULT SERVER FOR DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING
in the Atoll.ini file:
[RemoteCalculation]
Servers=Workstation_1;Workstation_2
If the list is empty, computations are run locally.



C H A P T E R 3

























Managing Geographic Data
3
Managing geographic data


70/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 71/476


III MANAGING GEOGRAPHIC DATA
III.1 MANAGING GEOGRAPHIC DATA : OVERVIEW
A9155 manages several geographic data types: DTM (Digital Terrain Model), clutter classes (land use), clutter heights
(over the DTM), scanned images, vector data, population data, generic data and supports several file formats in relation
to data type.

The first step is to define geographic coordinate systems then import geographic data (DTM, clutter classes and heights,
scanned images, vector data, population data) using an easy and fast procedure. Furthermore, A9155 allows you to
create your own clutter class (and traffic raster - in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects - ) maps
thanks to the cartography editor. A9155 lists the imported DTM, clutter class and height or traffic objects in their
respective folder and creates a separate folder for each imported vector data and scanned image.

Once theses folder are created (Traffic description is linked with radio data - depending on the project type - even if
present in the Geo tab of the A9155 environment) , you may manage them (display, data location managing, clutter class
description...) easily. It is also possible to display vector objects over coverages by importing/transferring these objects
directly in the Data tab.

A9155 also provides some features dealing with data priority like multi-layer management and multi-resolution
management.

Some edition tools for raster or vector objects are also available. Moreover, most of the geo data objects can be exported
in external files (DTM, clutter classes, clutter heights, raster polygons, vector layers). Finally, maps can be exported as
an image in external files, or in other applications.

III.2 GEO DATA TYPE SUPPORTED
Several geographic data types: DTM (Digital Terrain Model), clutter classes (land use), clutter heights (over the DTM),
scanned images, vector data, population data and even generic data maps are supported within A9155. For all of these,
different file formats are supported.


The DTM (Digital Terrain Model)
The DTM (Digital Terrain Model) files describe the ground elevation. The DTM geographic data is a 16 bits/pixel relief
map. A9155 is able to display this raster map in different ways : single value, discrete values, values interval.

DTM/DEM are systematically taken into account in computation by propagation model.

Note : In most documents, Digital elevation model (DEM) and digital terrain model (DTM) are differentiated and do not
have the same meaning. By definition, DEM refers to altitude above sea level including both ground and clutter while
DTM just corresponds to the ground height above sea level.


Clutter classes (or land use)
The clutter class files describe the land cover (dense urban, buildings, residential, forest, open, villages....); the ground is
represented by a grid map where each bin corresponds to a code allocated to a main type of cover (a clutter class).
According to the classification, the clutter is either statistical if the number of clutter classes depends on the housing
density or determinist if the number of clutter classes depends on the cover altitude.

The altitude per class can be defined in the clutter class property dialog. In that case, only one altitude refer to each
clutter class. It is also possible to use a clutter height map (see below).

The clutter class maps are 8 bits/pixel (256 classes-raster maps). They define an image with a colour assigned to each
clutter class (by default, grey shading).

Note : clutter heights are taken into account only using the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model.


Clutter heights
Clutter height maps have been introduced in V6.2.1. They are complementary to clutter classes, in a way that they can
inform more precisely on the clutter altitudes, since it is possible to have different heights for a same class of clutter. Like
in clutter classes, clutter heights indicates, on each bin, the clutter altitude over the DTM.
Managing geographic data


72/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



When clutter altitude is defined both in clutter class and clutter height folders, the information is taken in the second one.
Clutter heights are taken first if they exist (in measurements, computations, display).

The clutter height maps are 16 bits/pixel. They give one altitude per pixel and can be managed like DTM/DEM maps.
A9155 is able to display the clutter height map in different ways : single value, discrete values, values interval.

Note : clutter heights are taken into account only using the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model.


Vector layers
This type of data represent either polygons (regions...), or lines (roads, coastlines...) or points (important locations...).
They are used in display only and have not no effect on computations.

Polygons can be used for filtering purpose or for the creation of computation and focus zones. Whatever their shape is, it
is possible to create a vector layer by using the vector editor.

Any formation/attribute contained in the vector can be used as a display parameter (name, zip code, user profile, etc...)

Vectors can be used to generate CDMA/CDMA2000 or WCDMA/UMTS traffic maps (see below).

Note : since vector maps (like scanned images) have no effect on computation, it is possible to group all maps working
like this within a unique display folder, and to make their management easier.


Scanned images
This type of data (1-24 bits/pixel) regroups the road maps and the satellite images. Scanned images are only used for
display (no effect on computations), and help the user lo locate precisely objects in the real field.

Note : since scanned images (like vector maps) have no effect on computation, it is possible to group all maps working
like this within a unique display folder, and to make their management easier.


Population maps
Population maps are built using 8-32 bits/pixel files for which some density or value (in number of inhabitants)
information is given. It is possible to mix several types of files (8 or 16 bits raster, vectors,...) in order to extract from
them the needed information.

The interest of these maps is to use them in prediction reports with a view to display, for example, the absolute and
relative covered population.

Population maps have no effect on prediction and simulation results.


Generic maps
The generic map feature has been developed in order to import any type of geo data in term of any advanced map. For
example, it is now possible to import any raster/vector file and to use it as a revenue, rainfall or socio-demographics map.

Like for the population map, it is possible to mix several types of files (8 or 16 bits raster, vectors,...) in order to extract
from them the needed information.

It is also potentially possible to use this information in prediction reports. For example, in a revenue map, it is possible to
display the revenue value for a coverage.

Generic maps have no effect on prediction and simulation results.


The traffic data
According to the project type you start, A9155 proposes different kinds of traffic data.

In any project, you can import or create traffic 8 bits/pixel (256 classes-raster maps). For each bin of the map, a code
linked with a particular environment class is assigned (density of user profiles with associated mobility) for UMTS, CDMA
and CDMA2000 projects or a traffic density (Erlang/km2) in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. The raster maps are
macroscopic traffic estimation.

In the UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, you can additionally use traffic vector maps and traffic maps per transmitter
and per service.
C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 73/476


- Vector maps detail traffic estimations (lines or polygons may have a specific traffic). Each polygon or line is related to a
specific user profile with associated mobility and density. They can be built from population density vector maps.
- When traffic is actual information on connections (and no longer subscriber estimation), coming from the network and
dealing with rates per transmitter and service, it is possible to create and use traffic maps based on this network
feedback. They are built from a coverage by transmitter prediction.

III.3 LENGTH/HEIGHT/OFFSET UNITS AND COORDINATE SYSTEMS
III.3.1 SETTING DEFAULT LENGTH/HEIGHT/OFFSET UNITS
In A9155, it is possible to define a default length/height/offset units, like default radio units, that will be used in some
dialog box fields (not in tables).
For example :
Lengths are used for calculation radius in transmitter and station template properties or hexagon radius in station
template properties, and when using the Distance measurement button.
Heights are used when reading the altitudes of sites, transmitters, DTM, etc...
Offset units are used to define transmitter Dx and Dy from the related site location


To define a default length/height/offset units in an already open project, proceed as follows :
Click on the Tools menu from the toolbar,
Choose the Options... command from the open scrolling menu,
Click on the Units tab,
Choose in the scrolling list the default units for the current .atl A9155 project.


Notes : We can distinguish the display unit as described above from the internal unit. The internal unit cannot be
changed by the user. In any case (.atl project connected to a database or not), the internal length unit is the metre.
When environments are connected to a database, display and internal unit systems are stored in the database:
the internal unit is used as the length (height or offset) unit in the database,
the display unit is memorised and taken into account when opening a project from the database.

III.3.2 COORDINATE SYSTEMS : BASIC CONCEPTS
A map or a geospatial database is a flat representation of data located on a curved surface. A projection is a device for
producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet. This projection cannot be done without distortion, thus the
cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance, direction, scale, area or shape) which is to be shown
appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics, or compromise on several characteristics [1]. The projected
zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter, yard...).

Two projection systems are widely used:

The Lambert Conformal-Conic projection: a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone conceptually
secant at one or two standard parallels. This projection type is useful for representing countries or regions that have a
predominant east-west expanse.

The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cylinder
tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). This projection type is useful for mapping
large areas that are oriented north-south.

The geographic system is not a projection, but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic
coordinates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for
NTF system and Greenwich for ED50 system). The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other
projections.

[1] Snyder, John. P., Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey, 2nd Edition, United States Government
Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 313 pages, 1982.

A9155 integrates two databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references, a database based
on the European Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. A9155
distinguishes the cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate
Managing geographic data


74/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


systems for display.


The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced in a particular projection system intrinsic to the imported
geographic data files; thus, the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. By choosing a specific
display system, you may see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system
different from the projection coordinate system. You may also position on the map sites referenced in the display system:
the coordinates are automatically converted in the projection system and the site is displayed on the map.


In the example below, the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. The map shows the French Riviera
projected using the cartographic NTF (Paris) / France II tendue system (coordinates in metres). On the other hand, site
coordinates are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds).




Note : if all the imported geographic files are referenced in the same projection system and if you do not need to convert
coordinates in another system; it is not necessary to define projection and display systems. By default, the two systems
are the same.

III.3.3 DEFINING THE PROJECTION COORDINATE SYSTEM
To define the projection coordinate system, proceed as follows :
Select in the Tools menu, the Options... command.
Click on the Coordinates tab from the open window,
Click on the browse button right to the Projection field.
Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window
Select a catalogue and choose a coordinate system in the related table. Characteristics of the selected
system are described by clicking the Properties button.
Click OK to validate the projection system.

Notes :
You can add the selected coordinate system to a catalogue of favourite systems by using the button.
When exporting an A9155 project in a database, the currently chosen display coordinate system becomes the
internal one.
Default systems cannot be modified.

III.3.4 DEFINING THE DISPLAY COORDINATE SYSTEM
To define the display coordinate system, proceed as follows :
Select in the Tools menu, the Options... command.
Click on the Coordinates tab from the open window,
Click on the browse button right to the Display field.
C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 75/476


Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window
Select a catalogue and choose a coordinate system in the related table. Characteristics of the selected
system are described by clicking the Properties button.
Click OK to validate the display system.


Notes :
If the display coordinate system is cartographic, X and Y respectively correspond to abscissa and ordinate.
If the display coordinate system is geographic, X and Y respectively refer to longitude and latitude.
Cartographic systems are identified by the symbol to the left of the systems, whereas geographic ones are
symbolized by .
You can add the selected coordinate system to a catalogue of favourite systems by using the button.
Default systems cannot be modified.

III.3.5 CREATING YOUR OWN COORDINATE SYSTEM
A9155 provides a large catalogue of default coordinate systems. Nevertheless, it is possible to add the description of
geographic and cartographic coordinate systems. The new coordinate system can be created from scratch or initialised
on the basis of an existing one.

To create a new coordinate system, proceed as follows :
Select in the Tools menu, the Options... command.
Click on the Coordinates tab from the open window,
Click on the browse button right to the Projection or Display field.
Either,
Click on the New button,
Or,
Select a catalogue and choose a coordinate system in the related table,
Click on the New button.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the window,
Choose the catalogue where you want to store the new coordinate system,

Geographic coordinate system (symbolised ) is a latitude and longitude coordinate system. The latitude and longitude
are related to an ellipsoid, a geodetic datum and a prime meridian. The geodetic datum provides the position and
orientation of the ellipsoid relative to the earth.
A cartographic coordinate system (symbolised ) is obtained thanks to a transformation method which converts a
(latitude, longitude) into an (easting, northing). Therefore, to define a projection system, you must specify the geographic
coordinate system supplying longitude and latitude and the transformation method characterised by a set of parameters.
Different methods may require different sets of parameters. For example, the parameters required to define the projected
Transverse Mercator coordinate system are:
- The longitude of the natural origin (Central meridian),
- The latitude of the natural origin,
- The False Easting value,
- The False Northing value,
- A scale factor at the natural origin (on the central meridian),

In the General part, type a name, choose a unit in the scrolling menu (to open it, select the cell and left click
on the arrow), and define the usage.
In the Category part, choose in the Type scrolling menu (to open it, select the cell and left click on the
arrow) either Long/Lat in order to create a geographic coordinate system, or a type of projection and its set
of associated parameters for cartographic coordinate systems.
In the Geo part, specify the meridian and choose an existing datum in the Datum scrolling menu (to open it,
select the cell and left click on the arrow). The associated ellipsoid is automatically selected. You can also
describe a geodetic datum by selecting in the Datum scrolling menu. In this case, you must provide
parameters (Dx, Dy, Dz, Rx, Ry, Rz and s) needed for the transformation of datum into WGS84 and an
ellipsoid.
Click OK to validate the display system.


Notes :
An identification code enables A9155 to differentiate the existing coordinate systems. In case of new created
Managing geographic data


76/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


coordinate systems, assigned codes are integer values strictly higher than 32767.
Management in the coordinate system folder is possible. Use the Technical guide for a the process description.

Caution: For an easier management and to avoid any confusion, take care to give a unique name to the created
coordinate systems.

III.4 GEO DATA FORMAT SUPPORTED
III.4.1 SUPPORTED GEO DATA FORMATS : OVERVIEW
A9155 offers import filters for the most commonly used geographic data formats. You can use these filters to import
DTM, clutter class, traffic, vector files or scanned images.

The different filters are :

File format Can contain Georeferenced

BIL DTM (16 bits), clutter heights (16 bits), clutter classes (8
bits), traffic (8 bits), image (1-24 bits), population (8-32 bits),
Generic (8-32 bits)
Yes via .hdr files
TIFF DTM, clutter height and classes, traffic, Image, population,
generic
Yes via associated .tfw files if they exist
PlaNET DTM, clutter height and classes, traffic, Image, text and
vector data
Yes via index files
BMP DTM, clutter height and classes, traffic, Image, population,
generic
Yes after manually entering northwest
and southwest point coordinates of the
image
DXF Vector data, vector traffic, population, generic Yes
SHP Vector data, Vector traffic, population, generic Yes
MIF/MID Vector data, Vector traffic, population, generic Yes
IST DTM, clutter height and classes, traffic, Image, population,
generic
Yes via .hdr files
Erdas
Imagine
DTM, clutter height and classes, traffic, Image, population,
generic
Yes automatically embedded in the data
file


Thus, you can import:
DTM files with TIFF (16 bit), BIL (16 bit), IST (16 bit), PlaNET, BMP (16 bit) and Erdas Imagine (16 bit) formats,
Clutter heights with TIFF (16 bit), BIL (16 bit), IST (16 bit), PlaNET, BMP (16 bit) and Erdas Imagine (16 bit) formats,
Clutter classes and traffic files with TIFF (8 bit), BIL (8 bit), IST (8 bit), BMP (8 bit), PlaNET, and Erdas Imagine (8
bit) formats,
Vector data files with DXF, PlaNET, SHP and MIF formats,
Vector traffic files with DXF, PlaNET, SHP and MIF formats,
Scanned image files with TIFF (1-24 bit), BIL (1-24 bit), IST (1-24 bit), BMP (1-24 bit), PlaNET and Erdas Imagine
(1-24 bit) formats,
Population with TIFF (16 bit), BIL (16 bit), IST (16 bit), PlaNET, BMP (16 bit), Erdas Imagine (16 bit), DXF, SHP
and MIF formats
Generic data with TIFF (16 bit), BIL (16 bit), IST (16 bit), PlaNET, BMP (16 bit), Erdas Imagine (16 bit), DXF, SHP
and MIF formats


Notes : the use of compressed formats (tiff compressed or Erdas Imagine) on geo data (e.g. DTM or Clutter) can lead to
slow processes because of the decompression in real time. To avoid this effect, it is strongly recommended to inactive
the status bar which can provide geo data information in real time (Untick the Status bar option in the View menu). It is
also possible to save the produced map in a not compressed format.

C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 77/476


III.4.2 BIL DATA FORMAT
Band Interleaved by Line is a method of organizing image data for multiband images. it is a schema for storing the actual
pixel values of an image in a file. The pixel data is typically preceded by a file header that contains ancillary data about
image, such as the number of rows and columns in the image, a colourmap... BIL data stores pixel information band by
band for each line, or row, of the image. Although BIL is a data organization schema, it is treated as an image format. An
image description (number of rows and columns, number of bands, number of bits per pixel, byte order...) has to be
provided to be able to display the BIL file. This information is included in the header HDR file associated with the BIL file.
A HDR file has the same name as the BIL file it references, and should be located in the same directory as the source
file. The HDR structure is simple, it is an ASCII text file that contains eleven lines. You can open a HDR file using any
ASCII text editor. The parameters defined in .hdr files are detailed below:


Keywords Acceptable
values
Default Description

nrows any integer > 0 none number of rows in the image
ncols any integer > 0 none number of columns in the image
nbands any integer > 0 none number of spectral bands in the image
nbits* 1, 4, 8, 16, 32 8 number of bits per pixel per band
byteorder I = Intel same as host
machine
byte order in which image pixel values are stored
M = Motorola
layout bil bil organization of the bands in the image file
skipbytes any integer > 0 0 number of bytes of data in the image file to be skipped in order to
reach the start of the image data
ulxmap any real
number
0 x-axis map coordinate of the centre of the upper-left pixel
ulymap any real
number
nrows - 1 y-axis map coordinate of the centre of the upper-left pixel
xdim any real
number
1 x dimension of a pixel in map units
ydim any real
number
1 y dimension of a pixel in map units


*The nbits value depends on the geographic data type. Indeed, nbits are respectively 16 (16 bits) for DTM and 8 (8 bits)
for clutter or traffic.


Example: clutter.hdr file associated with clutter.bil file.

nrows 1500
ncols 1500
nbands 1
nbits 8
byteorder M
layout bil
skipbytes 0
ulxmap 975000
ulymap 1891000
xdim 20.00
ydim 20.00

III.4.3 TIFF DATA FORMAT
The Tagged Image File Format graphics filter supports all image types (monochrome, greyscale, palette colour, and
RGB full colour images) and pack bit or fax group 3-4 compressions. The TIFF files are not systematically
georeferenced. In this case, you will have to enter spatial references of the image manually during the import procedure
(x and y-axis map coordinates of the centre of the upper-left pixel, pixel size); an associated file with TFW extension will
be simultaneously created with the same name and in the same directory as the TIFF file it references. A9155 will then
use the .tfw file during the import procedure for an automatic georeferencement. TFW file contains the spatial reference
data of an associated TIFF file. The TFW file structure is simple, it is an ASCII text file that contains six lines. You can
open a TFW file using any ASCII text editor. The contents of a TFW file look something like this.
Managing geographic data


78/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01




Line Description

1 x dimension of a pixel in map units
2 amount of translation
3 amount of rotation
4 negative of the y dimension of a pixel in map units
5 x-axis map coordinate of the centre of the upper-left pixel
6 y-axis map coordinate of the centre of the upper-left pixel

Example: clutter.tfw file associated with clutter.tif file.

100.00
0.00
0.00
-100.00
60000.00
2679900.00

It is possible to import a group of tiff images as geo data.

Note : A9155 supports also TIFF files using the Packbit, FAX-CCITT3 and LZW compression modes.

For customers working out the TIFF coverage prediction files exported by A9155 with GIS tools, an option is available in
order to modify the colour palette convention used by A9155.
In the default palette, the first colour indexes represent the useful information and the remaining colour indexes represent
the background.
It is possible to export a TIFF file with a palette containing at the colour index 0, the background colour, and following, the
colour indexes necessary to represent useful information.

To set up the new palette convention, add these lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[TiffExport]
PaletteConvention=Gis

To be taken into account, the file must be located in the A9155 installation directory. This file is read only when A9155 is
started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the A9155 session and to restart it in order to take into account any
modification performed in Atoll.ini.

Notes : the use of compressed formats (tiff compressed or Erdas Imagine) on geo data (e.g. DTM or Clutter) can lead to
slow processes because of the decompression in real time. To avoid this effect, it is strongly recommended to inactive
the status bar which can provide geo data information in real time (Untick the Status bar option in the View menu). It is
also possible to save the produced map in a not compressed format.

III.4.4 DXF DATA FORMAT
The Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) enables the interchange of drawings between AutoCAD and A9155. DXF files
can be either ASCII or binary formats, but only the first type is used in A9155.

Essentially a DXF file is composed of pairs of codes and associated values. The codes, known as group codes, indicate
the type of value that follows. Using these group code and value pairs, a DXF file is organized into sections, which are
composed of records, which in turn are composed of a group code and a data item. Each group code and value are on
their own line in the DXF file.

Each section starts with a group code 0 followed by the string, SECTION. This is followed by a group code 2 and a string
indicating the name of the section (for example, HEADER). Each section is composed of group codes and values that
define its elements. A section ends with a 0 followed by the string ENDSEC.

C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 79/476


III.4.5 SHP DATA FORMAT
ESRI (Environmental Systems Research Institute, Inc.) Arcview GIS (Geographic Information System) Shapefiles are a
simple, non-topological format for storing the geometric location and attribute information of geographic features. A
shapefile is one of the spatial data formats that you can work with in ArcExplorer. shp data file are commonly associated
with two other files with .shx and .dbf extensions.

A quick description of the 3 files are given below :
shp - the file that stores the feature geometry.
shx - the file that stores the index of the feature geometry.
dbf - the dBASE file that stores the attribute information of features. When a shapefile is added as a theme to a view,
this file is displayed as a feature table.

Note : Under A9155, shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.

III.4.6 MIF DATA FORMAT
MIF (MapInfo Interchange Format) is a format allowing generic data to be attached to a variety of graphical items. These
ASCII files are editable, relatively easy to generate, and work on all platforms supported by MapInfo. Vector objects may
be imported in A9155 with a MIF extension.

MapInfo data are contained in two files with .MIF and MID. extensions. Graphics reside in a .MIF file and textual data is
contained in a .MID file. The textual data is delimited data, with one row per record and either Carriage Return, Carriage
Return plus Line Feed, or Line Feed between lines. The MIF file has two areas -- the file header area and the data
section. The MID file is an optional file. When there is no MID file, all fields are blank

More info : http://www.mapinfo.com/community/free/library/interchange_file.pdf

III.4.7 ERDAS IMAGINE DATA FORMAT
A9155 is able to support Erdas Imagine data files in order to import DTM (16 bit/pixel), clutter (8 bit/pixel), traffic (8
bit/pixel) and image (1-24 bit/pixel) files with the .img format. These files use the Erdas Imagine Hierarchical File Format
(HFA) structure. For any type of file, if there are pyramids (storage of different resolution layers), they are used to
enhance performance when decreasing the resolution of the display.

A9155 supports uncompressed as well as compressed (or partially compressed) DTM .img files,
You can create a .mnu file to improve the clutter class map loading,
The association colour-code (raster maps) may be automatically imported from the .img file,
These files are auto-georeferenced, i.e. they do not need any extra file for georeferencement,
For image files, the number of supported bands is either 1 (colour palette is defined separately) or 3 (no colour palette
but direct RGB information for each pixel). In case of 3 bands, only 8 bit per pixel format is supported. Therefore, 8-bit
images, containing RGB information (three bands are provided: the first band is for Blue, the second one is for Green
and the third for Red), can be considered as 24 bit per pixel files. 32 bit per pixel files are not supported.


Notes : the use of compressed formats (tiff compressed or Erdas Imagine) on geo data (e.g. DTM or Clutter) can lead to
slow processes because of the decompression in real time. To avoid this effect, it is strongly recommended to inactive
the status bar which can provide geo data information in real time (Untick the Status bar option in the View menu). It is
also possible to save the produced map in a not compressed format.

III.4.8 OTHER SUPPORTED FORMATS
A9155 supports 3 other formats than the BIL, TIFF, PlaNET, DXF, SHP, MIF, and IMG ones.

The .ist and .dis formats are ASCII files used for Digital Terrain Model only. Ist images come from Istar, whereas dis
images come from IGN (Institut Gographique National). Ist format works exactly like bil format, except for DTM images,
for which ist format uses a decimetric coding for altitudes, whereas bil images uses only a metric coding.

The .bmp format is the standard Windows image format on DOS and Windows-compatible computers. The bmp format
supports RGB, colour-indexed, greyscale, and bitmap colour modes, and does not support alpha channels.
Managing geographic data


80/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


III.5 MANAGING CLUTTER CLASSES
III.5.1 IMPORTING A CLUTTER CLASS FILE
Considering the appropriate format, clutter class type files can be imported as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Specify the path, the name and the format (optional) of the related file in the open dialog box,
Press OK to validate,
Select the Clutter classes option in the Data type scrolling box,
Click the Import button to complete the file import.

The imported clutter class files are listed in their appropriate folder in the Geo tab and can be managed easily
(description, modification, visibility, layer order management, etc...). Geographic data are displayed in the workspace.

Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer application to A9155.
.geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported clutter class file paths
between users.
Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards

III.5.2 OPTIMISING THE LOADING OF CLUTTER CLASS FILES
The loading performance of clutter classes (and raster traffic) with .bil, .tif and .img formats is highly improved when
A9155 does not have to find by itself the list of the classes contained in the file. To benefit from this optimisation, the user
must create a text file named as the clutter classes (or GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 raster traffic
maps) file with .mnu extension, at the same location. This MNU file gives the correspondence between the code and the
class name. This optimisation is already included in the PlaNET format thanks to the menu file.

To do so, check the validity of an associated .mnu file in the map folder before achieving the import geo data procedure.

Practical advice: A9155 can be used to easily create the MNU file. Just import the clutter classes (or traffic) file (slow
loading) in A9155 and paste the class description (Description tab in the Properties window) in a text file.

III.5.3 DESCRIPTION OF MNU FILES
MNU file is useful when importing clutter class or raster traffic files with .tif, .bil and .img formats. It gives the
correspondence between the clutter (or traffic) code and the class name. It is a text file named as the clutter class (or
traffic) file with .mnu extension, which must be stored at the same location.

Field Type Description
Class code Integer > 0 Identification code for the clutter (or traffic) class
Class name String (up to 32 characters in length) Name of the clutter (or traffic) class

Separator is either a blank or a tab.


Sample : Mnu file associated to a clutter file.

0 none
1 open
2 sea
3 inland_water
4 residential
5 meanurban
III.5.4 MANAGING THE CLUTTER CLASSES
Clutter classes represent the land cover of a network. They can be used by propagation models in three ways :
Some of them use their "nature" to associate adapted formulas (Okumura-Hata, Cost-Hata)
Others use these clutter classes to associate some specific parameters such as specific losses or clearances
(Standard Propagation model, WLL),
The definition of clutter heights (either in clutter classes or clutter heights) to compute diffraction both over the DTM
C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 81/476


and the clutter (Standard Propagation model, WLL).

It is also possible to define, per clutter class, a model standard deviation (in order to compute shadowing margins) and
orthogonality factor (for CDMA/CDMA2000 and WCDMA/UMTS projects).


To manage the clutter classes properties, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the clutter classes folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the clutter classes folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs,
Click on the Description tab from the open window,
Assign colour, name and height (m) to each code. To assign a colour to a clutter class, click on the colour
box and choose a colour in the colour table. Then, manually enter name and height for all clutter classes
Optionally enter, for each clutter class, a standard deviation per clutter class (in dB) that will be used to
calculate the shadowing margins,
For CDMA/CDMA2000 and WCDMA/UMTS projects only, an orthogonality factor per clutter class
(Orthogonality factor can be modelled by a value between 0 and 1. A 0 value indicates no orthogonality at
all, instead a 1 value in the case of perfect orthogonality at mobiles).
Click on the Display tab,
Set the transparency level of the clutter class layer,
Press OK to validate.


Other common features related to either a geo data folder (Save as, Centre the map on the object) or an imported geo
data file (Embedding the file in the project afterwards) can be accessed from their related context menu.

Like in other geo data folders, you can also work on the layer order. This will have an effect on the computations taking
into account that What is seen is what is used. Layers to be considered will have to be located on the top of the other
layers.

Notes:
The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V) in a new A9155 project after importing
the clutter file. To select globally the clutter class table, just left click on the top left angle of the clutter table.
If the height column is not filled in, the models using this information (WLL model for example) will consider a zero
clutter height.
The heights defined in the clutter classes are taken into account only if the Clutter height folder is not filled.
The white colour is associated with the transparent colour. Thus, the geographic layer below the clutter will be visible
in the area where the transparent colour is assigned.
Before importing the clutter file, it is important to define a reference class corresponding to zero code, white colour
and no data. Thus, the code "0" is allocated to areas without clutter.
The class names cannot exceed a length of 50 characters.
Clutter classes description (and clutter file path) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.
In CDMA/CDMA2000 and WCDMA/UMTS projects, the default orthogonality factor (transmitter global parameters) is
taken into account only if the related values in the clutter class properties are not filled.
New clutter classes can be created manually.


The button update the resulting clutter class map by deleting all unused classes.

Advice: Use this function to keep consistency between the clutter classes described in the table and in the imported file.

Example: A9155 automatically memorizes the different clutter classes of imported file. Even after deleting the file, the
clutter classes are stored in the description table. Pressing the button will remove them.


See importing a geographic data file

Managing geographic data


82/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


III.5.5 ADDING A CLUTTER CLASS
To add a clutter class to the current geo environment, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the Clutter classes folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Clutter classes folder,
Click the Description tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Describe each new clutter class in the appropriate cells of the bottom line,
Press OK or Apply to validate.


The added clutter class is then available to be used to create new clutter class polygons using the clutter editor.

III.5.6 DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON CLUTTER CLASSES
To display the relative occupancy of each clutter type in the current project computation zone (or focus zone if existing),
proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Clutter classes folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Statistics option from the scrolling menu
The surface (Si in km) of each clutter class (i) included in the computation zone (or focus zone if existing)
and its percentage (% of i) are specified:

100 of % =

k
k
i
S
S
i


Notes :
Since the statistic study is limited to the computation zone (or focus zone if existing), only the clutter area inside the
computation zone is taken into account,
Current statistical results are printable by clicking the button,
Data contained in the statistics window can be copied by selecting them (Ctrl+A) then copying them to the clipboard
(Ctrl+C).

III.6 MANAGING CLUTTER HEIGHTS
III.6.1 IMPORTING A CLUTTER HEIGHT FILE
Considering the appropriate format, clutter height type files can be imported as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Specify the path, the name and the format (optional) of the related file in the open dialog box,
Press OK to validate,
Select the Clutter heights option in the Data type scrolling box,
Click the Import button to complete the file import.

The imported clutter class files are listed in their appropriate folder in the Geo tab and can be managed easily
(properties, visibility, layer order management, etc...). Geographic data are displayed in the workspace.

Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer application to A9155.
.geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported clutter height file
paths between users.
Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards.

C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 83/476


III.6.2 MANAGING CLUTTER HEIGHT MAPS
In A9155, there are two places to define clutter heights. This can be done either in the clutter class properties or in the
clutter height properties. The interest of filling the Clutter height folder is the possibility to define several heights per
clutter class. Nevertheless, the heights defined in the clutter classes are taken into account only if the Clutter height
folder is not filled (applied in display, measurements, propagation models).

Clutter height maps can be managed in the same way as the DTM map. To access the properties of the resulting clutter
height map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the clutter heights folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the clutter heights folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs,
Click the Display tab to manage the appearance of the map,
Press OK to validate the settings.

The Clutter height map uses the generic A9155 display dialog and its standard tools :
Display types : Discrete or Value intervals
Shading command on value intervals
Legend management
Visibility scale

Other common features related to either a geo data folder (Save as, Centre the map on the object) or an imported geo
data file (Embedding the file in the project afterwards) can be accessed from their related context menu.

Like in other geo data folders, you can also work on the layer order. This will have an effect on the computations taking
into account that What is seen is what is used. Layers to be considered will have to be located on the top of the other
layers.

Notes :
If available in the Clutter heights folder, this information is displayed in the status bar relatively to the location of the
pointer.
Clutter height properties (and clutter height path) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.

III.7 MANAGING DTM MAPS
III.7.1 IMPORTING A DTM MAP
Considering the appropriate format, Digital Terrain Model (or DEM) files can be imported as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Specify the path, the name and the format (optional) of the related file in the open dialog box,
Press OK to validate,
Select the Altitude (DTM) option in the Data type scrolling box,
Click the Import button to complete the file import.

The imported DTM files are listed in their appropriate folder in the Geo tab and can be managed easily (properties,
visibility, layer order management, etc...). Geographic data are displayed in the workspace.

Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer application to A9155.
.geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported DTM file paths
between users.
Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards.

Managing geographic data


84/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


III.7.2 MANAGING DTM MAPS
The Digital Terrain Model is a geographic data file representing ground surface elevation. DTM maps can be managed in
the same way than the Clutter height map.

To manage the DTM display, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the DTM folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the DTM folder,
Click on the Display tab from the open window.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the display parameters of the current DTM,
Click OK to validate.


The DTM display uses the generic A9155 display dialog and lets you choose, in the display type scrolling menu:
single: same representation for any bin
discrete values: bin representation according to the value of a discrete field (sea level) describing the DTM object.
values interval: bin representation according to the value of a numerical field (altitude) describing the DTM object.

Whatever the display type you have chosen, you can customize the graphical representation of bins. In the table, for
each line, click on each row.

You can manage the contour line visualisation by using the relief slider.

Other common features related to either a geo data folder (Save as, Centre the map on the object) or an imported geo
data file (Embedding the file in the project afterwards) can be accessed from their related context menu.

Like in other geo data folders, you can also work on the layer order. This will have an effect on the computations taking
into account that What is seen is what is used. Layers to be considered will have to be located on the top of the other
layers.

Note : path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.

III.8 MANAGING VECTOR MAPS
III.8.1 IMPORTING A VECTOR FILE
In A9155, it is possible to create (using the vector editor) or to import vectors as geo data. In that case, vectors are only
used for display purposes, and polygons can be taken as filters, computation or focus zones. Vector files can also be
used for CDMA/CDMA2000 or WCDMA/UMTS traffic maps, population or any generic map.

In addition, it is possible to group any geo data type under a single folder that will be used for display purposes only.

The vector import process does not use the same dialog as the other geo data (clutter classes and heights, DTM,
images)

Considering the appropriate format, vector files can be imported as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Specify the path, the name and the format (optional) of the related file in the open dialog box,
Press OK to validate,
In the Vector Import dialog, select the Geo or Data option in the Import to scrolling list,
Select the appropriate coordinate system (if needed),
Click the Import button to complete the file import.


The imported vector files are automatically listed at the explorer root level in the Geo (or Data) tab and can be managed
easily (properties, visibility, layer order management, etc...). Geographic data are displayed in the workspace.
C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 85/476



Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer application to A9155,
Under A9155, shp filenames are not limited in the number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made up of more than 8 characters,
.geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of imported file paths between users,
Contrary to other data types, it is possible to choose a geographic coordinate system at the import,
Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards,
Vectors can be shifted from one tab to another afterwards for display considerations.

III.8.2 MANAGING VECTOR OBJECTS
Vector geographic objects contain additional characteristics. Their number and their type depend on the file format.
Indeed, when dealing with .dxf or PlaNET files, a single attribute, the height, is available unlike .mif or .shp files which
can include several attributes (name, length, height). Thus, third dimension vector data can be read and additional
information relating to vectors can be used as a display parameter.


To manage the vector objects display, proceed as follows :
Click the tab (Data or Geo) in which the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the vector folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the vector folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs,
Click on the Display tab,
Set the vector display parameters,
Press OK to validate.


Notes :
You may manage the display of each vector individually. To do so, after having expanded the vector folder, choose
the properties option from the considered vector context menu (left click), then set the display parameters. Use the
What's this help to get description of the fields available in the open window.
Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.
Attributes used in the vector display can be modified thanks to the vector edition features.
Vectors can be shifted from one tab to another afterwards for display considerations.

III.8.3 DISPLAYING VECTOR LAYERS OVER PREDICTIONS
It is possible to put vector layers either in the Data tab so as to display them on the top of coverage studies, or in the Geo
tab to keep them in the background, thanks to layer order.

To do so, when importing a vector file, you may select Data tab as the import destination in the Vector import dialog.

In addition, a Transfer command (either in Geo, or in Data) is available in each vector layer context menu (right click on
vector layer to open context menu); it enables you to switch vector layers from Geo to Data tabs or vice versa.

III.9 MANAGING SCANNED IMAGES
III.9.1 IMPORTING SCANNED IMAGES
Considering the appropriate format, scanned image files can be imported as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Specify the path, the name and the format (optional) of the related file in the open dialog box,
Press OK to validate,
Select the Image or scan option in the Data type scrolling box,
Click the Import button to complete the file import.

Managing geographic data


86/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


The imported scanned image files are automatically listed at the explorer root level in the Geo tab and can be managed
easily (properties, visibility, layer order management, etc...). Geographic data are displayed in the workspace.

Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer application to A9155.
.geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported scanned image file
paths between users.
Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards.

It is possible to import scanned image files by groups by using an index file. Once the procedure performed, A9155
creates a folder per imported index file.

The import procedure is the same as for the other geo data images (Import command from the File menu). When
obtaining the classic Open dialog box, select the All supported file or PlaNET geo data (index) format and locate the
appropriate file. When clicking the Open button, a dialog box opens in which you must indicate the image data type.

Note : The drag and drop tool is available to import such a group of Tiff/Bmp files.

Its format is:
- one line per Tiff/Bmp file : Relative name of tiff/bmp file with regard to the index file path XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX 0
(the separator is a blank)

Where :
XMAX = XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width)
YMAX = YMIN + (number of vertical bins x bin height)

Example of a two images index file located in the folder C:\TEMP. These two files are located in the same directory.
nice1.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0
nice2.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0

III.9.2 MANAGING SCANNED IMAGES
Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the real field (road maps, satellite images) and which are
used in order to precisely locate surrounding items or other less precise maps (like statistical raster maps for example).

To manage the display of any scanned image, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the scanned image folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the scanned image folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs,
Click on the Display tab,
Set the scanned image display parameters,
Press OK to validate.


Notes : path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.

III.10 MANAGING POPULATION MAPS
III.10.1 IMPORTING A POPULATION MAP
It is possible to use population maps, in terms of density or value information. Several forms of files can be mixed in
order to compose a resulting population map. This type of map, like other geo data folders (clutter, DTM) works on the
principle What is seen is what is used. Data retained in the folder will be used in clutter statistics and prediction reports.

Several file formats (raster or vector) are supported in order to make their content available for population data.

Depending on the file type (vector or raster), the way to import a file as a population map component can be different.
C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 87/476



To import a population map, proceed as follows
In the File menu, select the Import command,

Vector format (Mif, shp)
In the Vector Import dialog, select the Population item in the Import to scrolling list,
Select the appropriate coordinate system (if needed),
Associate a numeric field/attribute of the vector to the A9155 internal field that will be used as a:


Population density (number of inhabitants/km)


Population values (number of inhabitants per item polygon/road, etc)

Click OK to validate.

Raster/Morpho format
In the File menu, select the Import command,
In the File Import dialog, select the Population density data type,
Click the Import button


A9155 fill the Population folder of the Geo tab with the imported files. Some tabs are added to the Population property
dialog :
Correspondence tab to manage vector items,
Description and Table tabs to manage raster items.

In addition, the Display tab is available for any data type item and uses the generic A9155 display dialog.

Notes:
Population values can only be imported with vector files.
The drag and drop feature is possible to import such a type of map.
.geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported population file paths
between users.
It is possible to create a population vector map using the vector edition tool. To do this, right click on the Population
folder and select the Add vector layer command.
Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards.

III.10.2 MANAGING POPULATION MAPS
To access the properties of the resulting population map, proceed as follows
In the Geo tab, right click the Population folder,
Choose the Properties command in the context menu,
Depending on the imported file type, different tabs are available (see above) :
Description : all identified classes of the raster files are listed here. You can associate here a
different population density for each class,
Table : this tab is dedicated to manage the contents of the class table contained in the Description
tab,
Correspondence : an imported vector file is listed in each line. In the column Field, the vector field
which has to be chosen as population data has to be selected, always with the density check box
(when the relevant data is of type density). The current selection is the one made during the import.
The association can be modified afterwards
Display : A9155 generic display dialog with the possibility to tune the threshold shading. The
displayed information is the number of inhabitants/km.
Managing geographic data


88/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Notes:
The resulting population map is not the addition of all the maps, but the result of what is seen. Maps of interest have
to be put on the top layer. For raster maps, the no data class makes the population information operational which is
below the zones of this type.
The display by value is not permitted is the following cases :
different raster maps with different resolutions
vectors mixing lines and polygons
mix of raster and vector maps
The display by density is not permitted on vectors made of points

III.10.3 DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON POPULATION
It is possible to display the relative and absolute distributions of people depending on the thresholds defined in the
Display tab of the Population folder property dialog. To do this, select the Statistics command from the Population folder
context menu. Like other statistics windows, what is used for the results is provided by what is seen.

Note : Statistics are provided on the focus zone if it exists. Otherwise, the computation zone is considered. With neither
of them, statistics are given for the total geographic zone.

III.10.4 USING POPULATION DATA IN PREDICTION REPORTS
In prediction reports, it is possible to make displayed columns related to covered population densities (as defined in the
Display tab of the Population folder property dialog), the number of covered people, and the percentage of covered
population.

To display information about the covered population by a prediction, proceed as follows :
Right click on the Prediction of interest,
Select the Report command from the context menu,
In the [Format : Display columns] menu, check the boxes related to the information you want to display with
the prediction report..

Note : reports are possible only on displayed studies or sub-items of the studies (transmitters, thresholds, etc).

III.11 MANAGING GENERIC MAPS
III.11.1 GENERIC MAPS : OVERVIEW
This feature has been developed in order to import any type of geo data in term of any advanced map. For example, it is
possible to import any raster/vector file and to use it as a revenue, rainfall or socio-demographics map.

Several forms of files can be mixed in order to compose a resulting generic map. This type of map, like other geo data
folders (clutter, DTM) works on the principle What is seen is what is used. Data retained in the folder will be potentially
used in prediction reports.

Several file formats (raster or vector) are supported in order to make their contents available for generic maps

All types of coding may be mixed in any generic geo data folder : vector files, raster files (8, 16, 32 bits per pixel). Vector
layers can be created using the vector edition tool.

The imported data can then be interpreted in order to produce resulting maps of type :
Morpho file: map of value classes (like clutter) (8 bits integer [0255])
Raster file: map of value densities (16 bits with scaling factor integer [0.65535] or float simple precision, 32 bits
[0.16777216] or float double precision).

The creation of a new map type is made during the import of a geo data file that will be part of the resulting map. Then,
once created, and depending on the supported formats, it will be possible to import/add other data files in order to
complete the new map. Depending on the file type (vector or raster) that will be used for the initialisation of the new map,
the way to import it can be slightly different.

C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 89/476


III.11.2 CREATE AN ADVANCED GEO DATA FOLDER
The creation of a generic map is made via the import of a geo data file.

To do this, proceed as follows :
In the File menu, select the Import command,

Vector format (Mif, shp)
In the Vector Import dialog, select the Advanced button,

Raster/Morpho format
In the File Import dialog, select the Advanced button,


The definition of the new map type is made in the current window (New type),
Enter the name of the new map (e.g. Revenue)
Check the boxes related to the formats that you want this map to be able to support (Vector, Raster 8, 16
and 32 bits),
Indicate the type of map you want to be produced by interpreting the file data (See above)
Morpho file: map of value classes (like clutter) (8 bits integer [0255])
Raster file: map of value densities (16 bits with scaling factor integer [0.65535] or float simple
precision, 32 bits [0.16777216] or float double precision).
Check the Integrable box if you want the relevant data (contained in the files composing the resulting map)
to be potentially used in prediction reports. This data (of type surfacic density only) will be integrated on
each considered item (threshold, transmitter) in predictions to provide statistics.
Click OK to validate the creation of the advanced geo data map,


Vector format (Mif, shp)
Select the appropriate coordinate system (if needed),
In the Vector Import dialog, associate a numeric field/attribute of the vector to the A9155 internal field that
will be used as a:
Value density (number of items/km)
Absolute values (number of items per polygon/road, etc)

Raster/Morpho format
Select to use the content as a value or as a density. Density is not consistent with a data which is not
integrable.


Click the Import button


A new geo data folder is created, filled with the imported file(s). Some tabs are added to the property dialog :
Correspondence tab to manage vector items,
Description and Table tabs to manage raster items.

In addition, the Display tab is available for any data type item.

Once the folder is created, it is possible to easily import any other supported file as a part of the generic map. This is
done as a standard geo data import by selecting the appropriate target map in the import dialog.

Notes:
Value maps can be imported using vector files.
The drag and drop feature is possible to import such kinds of maps.
.geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported population file paths
between users.
It is possible to add a vector map to an existing generic map using the vector edition tool. To do this, right click on the
related folder and select the Add vector layer command.
Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards.


Important : 8 bits maps are only code maps. So, when importing any geo data type file as a 8 bits map, bear in mind that
the values that you are importing are codes and not values like densities, for example. The values related to each pixel
will be defined for each code, each pixel referring to a code.

Managing geographic data


90/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


III.11.3 MANAGING GENERIC MAPS
To access the properties of the resulting generic map, proceed as follows :
In the Geo tab, right click the folder of the considered generic map,
Choose the Properties command in the context menu,
Depending on the imported file type, different tabs are available (see above) :
Description : all identified classes of the raster files are listed here. You must associate here a
different value density for each class,
Table : this tab is dedicated to manage the contents of the class table contained in the Description
tab,
Correspondence : an imported vector file is listed in each line. In the column Field, the vector field
which has to be chosen as relevant data has to be selected, always with the density check box
(when the relevant data is of type density). The current selection is the one made during the import.
The association can be modified afterwards
Display : A9155 generic display dialog with the possibility to tune the threshold shading. Both
discrete value and value interval display types are available.

Notes:
The resulting population map is not the addition of all the maps, but the result of what is seen. Maps of interest have
to be put on the top layer. For raster maps, the no data class makes the population information operational which is
below the zones of this type.
The Integrable/not Integrable aspect is chosen at the creation and cannot be changed afterwards.
The display by value is not permitted is the following cases :
different raster maps with different resolutions
vectors mixing lines and polygons
mix of raster and vector maps
The display by density is not permitted on vectors made of points

III.11.4 DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON GENERIC DATA
It is possible to display the relative and absolute distributions of each item class (class defined by thresholds in the
Display tab of the Generic geo data folder property dialog). To do this, select the Statistics command from the
appropriate folder context menu. Like other statistics windows, what is used for the results is provided by what is seen.

Note : Statistics are provided on the focus zone if it exists. Otherwise, the computation zone is considered. With neither
of them, statistics are given for the total geographic zone.

III.11.5 USING GENERIC MAP DATA IN PREDICTION REPORTS
In prediction reports, it is possible to make displayed columns related to data contained in any generic map. This can be
made for any data, and is even more advanced when the relevant data is of type Integrable.

To display information about the covered classes of any generic data by a prediction, proceed as follows :
Right click on the Prediction of interest,
Select the Report command from the context menu,
In the [Format : Display columns] menu, check the boxes related to the information you want to display with
the prediction report..

Note : reports are possible only on displayed studies or sub-items of the studies (transmitters, thresholds, etc).


Integrable/Not Integrable, Density/Value : examples

Integrable data will be used in prediction reports so they can be summed over the cells characterised by the item of
interest (transmitter, threshold, etc). They can be of type value (Revenue, number of customers, ) or density
(Revenue/km, number of customer/km, ).

For example, in the case of the revenue map, a prediction report will indicate :
The percentage on how is covered each revenue class, globally, and for each single coverage cell (transmitter,
threshold, ),
The revenue of the global coverage and of each single coverage cell,
The percentage of the covered revenue map, globally, and for each single coverage cell.

Non Integrable data means that they are an information for each pixel (or polygon e.g.) which cannot be integrated over
C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 91/476


a coverage cell, like socio-demographic classes, rain zones, etc.

In that case, considering the example of a rain zone map, a prediction report would indicate :
The relative coverage of each rain zone class, by the global study, and for each single coverage cell (transmitter,
threshold, )

Being non Integrable, no other information is given.

III.12 MANAGING GEO DATA FILES AND FOLDERS
III.12.1 EMBEDDING - LINKING COMPARISON
A9155 offers the user the possibility to link or embed any imported geo data file. The main differences between linked
and embedded objects are the location where data are stored and how the imported data are updated after placing them
in the A9155 document.

When you import geographic data without selecting the embed in document option, A9155 just memorizes the location
where the source files are stored (directory path) and creates a link to source files: the objects are linked. If you modify
the source file, information will be automatically taken into account in the document .atl. On the other hand, some
applications as deleting or moving the source file in another directory involve the link break. In this case, A9155 offers
you solutions to repair it.

The embedded geographic files are totally included in the document .atl, they become a part of the document: There is
no longer a link between the document .atl and the source files. Therefore, the A9155 document is not updated if you
modify the source file.

Practical advice: Prefer the linked objects in order to limit the A9155 document size.

Note : the distributed calculations do not work in case of embedded geographic data.

III.12.2 EMBEDDING GEOGRAPHIC DATA
You may embed DTM, clutter class or height, traffic, vector, population, generic and scanned image objects you have
imported in your A9155 document. This can be done either when importing the geo data, or from the properties of an
available object.


To embed geographic data in the current .atl project during the import procedure, just check the 'Embed in document'
box in the object import dialog box.


To embed geographic data in the current .atl project from an existing data item, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,

For a raster, clutter height or DTM file :
Expand the related folder by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the file you want to embed in the current project,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the file you want to embed in the current project,

For a scanned map or a vector file :
Either
Right click on the scanned map/vector file you want to embed in the current project,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the scanned map/vector file you want to embed in the current project,

Click on the General tab from the open window,
Click the button from the open window,
Managing geographic data


92/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Click OK or Apply to validate.

III.12.3 REPAIRING A BROKEN LINK
It may happen that some source files (.atl or geo data files) have moved since the last time the current project was open.
In this case, A9155 cannot find them automatically and will display the following error message :



Click the button if you want to locate the geo data file by yourself. At the same time, A9155
automatically searches for the file with the nearest match based on size, date and type. When it has found
it, it displays the error message below.



If the file corresponds to the source file, press OK.


If the localisation is not successful, you have to link again the geo data file to the project by yourself from the geo item
properties. To do so, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,

For a clutter class, traffic or DTM file :
Expand the Clutter classes, traffic raster or DTM folder by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the Clutter classes, traffic raster or DTM file you want to fix the link problem,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the Clutter classes, traffic raster or DTM file you want to fix the link problem,

For a scanned map or a vector file :
Either
Right click on the scanned map/vector file you want to fix the link problem,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the scanned map/vector file you want to fix the link problem,

Click on the General tab from the open window,
Click the button from the open window,
Locate the appropriate data file
Click OK or Apply to validate.

C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 93/476


III.12.4 GROUPING GEO DATA FILES IN DISPLAY FOLDER
In the standard case, when importing geo data files dedicated only to display (1-24 bits images, vectors), they are listed
at the root of the Geo tab only (or possibly in the Data tab for vectors), contrary to other data files, like clutter ones, for
example, which are listed all together and within a single Clutter class folder. Listed all together, files can be
displayed/hidden or moved.

In A9155, you can also, within a single additional folder, import different types of geo data files and use them for display
only. This folder does not produce a map, like it is the case for the generic import of geo data files in order to produce, for
example, revenue or socio-demographics maps. This folder (which can be called geo display folder) just groups geo data
files and cannot be managed globally. The management (display only) of each single item is made at the item level.

It is possible to import several file formats (raster or vector) in a single folder to make them available for display only. All
types of files may be mixed in a geo display folder : vector or raster files (8, 16, 32 bits per pixel). Their information is
used only for display, i.e. that any raster file will be interpreted as an image (and also set as an image).

The creation of a geo display folder is made during the import of a first geo data file that will be located in it. Then, once
created, it will be possible to import other files within this folder.

To do this, proceed as follows :
In the File menu, select the Import command,

Vector format (Mif, shp)
In the Vector Import dialog, select the New folder in Geo or Data item in the Import to scrolling list,
Select the appropriate coordinate system (if needed),

Raster/Morpho format
In the File Import dialog, select the New folder in Geo or Data item in the Data type scrolling list,

Give a name for the newly created folder,
Click the Import button


A new geo data folder is created, filled with the imported file(s). Once the folder is created, it is easily possible to import
any other geo data file as a member of the created folder. This is made as a standard geo data import by selecting the
appropriate target item in the import dialog.

Notes:
The drag and drop feature is possible to import such a type of map.
Since it is possible to create the geo display folder either in the Geo or in the Data tab, it is as easy to transfer it from
one to another. To do this, right click on the considered folder and select the Transfer to Data/Geo
It is possible to import Packbit, FAX-CCITT3 and LZW compressed TIFF files.
Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards.

III.12.5 CHECKING THE MAP GEOCODING
You can check the file map geocoding (coordinates of north-west point, pixel size and additional coordinates of south
east point for .bmp files).

To check the geocoding of any data object (see above), proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,

For a clutter class, population, generic, traffic or DTM file :
Expand the folder by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the file whose geocoding you want to check,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the file you want to check its geocoding,

For a scanned map :
Either
Right click on the file whose geocoding you want to check,
Managing geographic data


94/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click the file you want to check its geocoding,

Click on the Geocoding tab from the open window,
Check or modify the extreme northwest and southeast points,
Click OK or Apply to validate.
III.12.6 SETTING GEO DATA PRIORITY
A9155 lists the imported DTM, clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folder and creates a separate folder for
each imported vector data and each imported scanned image. Each object corresponds to a layer with a specific size.
Thus, there are as many layers as imported objects. The layers are on top of each other in the order of listed objects.


At the display level
Only the layer on top and the layers beneath area where there is no data will be visible in the workspace.

In the example below, vector data (including highways, coastline, riverlake, majorroads, majorstreets, railways and
airport), clutter classes, DTM and scanned image have been imported and a UMTS environment traffic map has been
edited inside the computation zone. In the workspace, we can see the linear objects (roads, riverlake,...) inside and
beyond the computation zone and the traffic layer (green colour) inside the computation zone. The clutter class layer is
visible in the area where no traffic data has been edited (outside the computation zone). On the other hand, the DTM
layer which is underneath the clutter class layer and the scanned map which is underneath the DTM layer are not visible.



To make a layer visible in the workspace, either uncheck the check box of the other layers (see object visibility), move
the layer on the top of the list, or adjust the transparency level of objects (clutter class, traffic and scanned image) when
available.


To move an object in the Geo tab, proceed as follows :
Click and hold on the layer you want to move,
Drag the layer in the list,
Release the layer.


At the calculation level
DTM, Clutter classes, clutter heights, and Traffic density folders can contain several objects representing different areas
of the map or common parts of the map with identical or different resolutions. A9155 takes into account in calculations,
for each folder, only the data it sees (that is to say the object on top and the objects beneath area where there is no
data). What is used is what is seen. Thus, for each folder, you must locate on top the objects with the smallest size and
the best resolution.

Note : population and generic data maps work in the same way. Their data can be used in prediction reports.

C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 95/476


III.13 EDITING GEOGRAPHIC DATA
III.13.1 RASTER OBJECTS
III.13.1.a CREATING A CLUTTER OR TRAFFIC RASTER POLYGON
A cartography editor is available either to modify imported clutter class (or traffic raster) map or to produce your own
clutter (or traffic) raster maps without initial clutter (or traffic) object. In the same way, it is easy to delete clutter or raster
traffic polygons. All created polygons can be easily saved in external files. These modifications are taken into account in
calculations by propagation models.


To display the editor tool bar, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click the Clutter classes folder (or environment traffic object) to open the associated context menu
Select the Edit command from the available scrolling menu,
The clutter (or traffic) editor window opens.


The editor tool bar consists of a selection box to choose the clutter (or traffic) class you want to edit, a polygon drawing
tool , a polygon deletion tool and a close save button.



Notes :
The clutter (or traffic) class you want to edit must be previously defined in the Description tab of Clutter classes
properties (or in the environment folder in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000) dialog box.
Like for the computation and focus zones, you can copy and paste exact coordinates (consistent with the defined
display coordinate system) of a closed polygon. To do this, select the properties command from the context menu
(right click) related to the selected polygon.

III.13.1.b EDITING CLUTTER OR TRAFFIC RASTER POLYGONS
To edit clutter or traffic (raster map) polygons, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Use either the clutter editor to add clutter data or traffic editor to produce traffic data,
Select the clutter (or traffic - raster map) class you want to edit from the selection box,

Note : to make clutter (or traffic) classes available in the selection box, these have to be previously defined :
In the Description tab of the Clutter classes properties for the clutter editor
In the Environment subfolder of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 parameters folder.

Select the polygonal drawing tool,
Position the pointer on the map area where you want to edit your own data,
Press the mouse left button (a first point is created),
Slide the pointer on the map and press the mouse left button to create another point,
Carry out the two last steps until you draw the polygonal area you want,
Double click to close off the polygonal area,
Press the close button.


The created polygon is displayed with the same colour as the edited clutter class (or traffic class). As long as the
cartography editor is open, the polygonal area is delimited by a thin black line rewiring the created points.

Note : The clutter or traffic layer must be visible (see multi-layer management in Setting geo data priority) if you want the
modifications to appear on the map.

Managing geographic data


96/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


III.13.1.c MODIFYING CLUTTER OR TRAFFIC RASTER POLYGONS
To resize clutter or traffic polygons (raster map), proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Leave the cartography editor open.
Left click on the black line (limits of the polygonal area). The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ),
Press and hold the mouse left button,
Drag the pointer in the area where you want to locate the point,
Release the mouse button,
Press the close button to validate.


To add a point, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Leave the cartography editor open.
Left click on the black line (limits of the polygonal area). The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ),
Right click to open the associated context menu,
Select the Insert point command from the open scrolling menu,
Press the close button to validate.


To delete a point, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Leave the cartography editor open.
Left click on the point you want to delete. The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ),
Right click to open the associated context menu,
Select the Delete point command from the open scrolling menu,
Press the close button to validate.

III.13.1.d DELETING CLUTTER OR TRAFFIC RASTER POLYGONS
To delete clutter or traffic (raster map) polygons, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Leave the cartography editor open.
Either
Left click on the black line (limits of the polygonal area). The pointer becomes the position indicator
( ),
Right click to open the associated context menu,
Select the Delete polygon command from the open scrolling menu,
or
Select the Polygon deletion tool,
Click on the polygonal area you want to delete,
Press the Close button to validate.

III.13.1.e DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT RASTER POLYGONS
By using the tips button , A9155 allows the user to read information about any polygonal area.

To know the surface and the type of edited data, proceed as follows :
Hold the pointer on the polygonal area until the associated information (code, name, etc...) appears. The
surface is given only in the case of closed polygonal areas.

Note : Information will appear only if the tips button is on.


To display the coordinates or points composing a polygonal area, proceed as follows :
Left click on the black line (limits of the polygonal area). The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ),
Right click to open the associated context menu,
Select the Properties command from the open scrolling menu,
C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 97/476



The coordinates (in the display system) of the point composing the polygon are then displayed in a table window.

Note : like for the focus or computation zone, the Copy-Paste feature is available in the polygon coordinates table.

III.13.2 VECTOR OBJECTS
III.13.2.a CREATING A VECTOR LAYER
A toolbar enables you to edit new vector layers and modify the imported ones. This bar can be open or closed by
selecting the Vector edition command in the View menu.

It is possible to create new vector layers containing polygons, lines and points.


To create a new vector layer, proceed as follows :
Click on the New vector layer icon .

A9155 creates a folder called Vectors in explorer, either in the Geo tab, or in the Data tab. In fact, the folder location
depends on the open tab of explorer. So, the folder will be placed in the Geo tab if this one is displayed when creating
the new layer.

The new vector layer is listed in the Vector layer scrolling menu .


Any vector object can be easily edited and modified. It is also very easy to define and modify its fields.

Note : since vectors can be used to produce GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 or WCDMA/UMTS traffic maps, it is
possible to create a vector layer during the creation of the traffic map itself following the same procedure.

III.13.2.b EDITING A VECTOR OBJECT
Once the vector layer is created, it can be easily edited and managed.

To edit vector objects of the layer, proceed as follows :
Either
In the Vector edition bar, click on the arrow to open the Vector layer scrolling menu,
Select the layer to be edited in the list,
Or
In the Explorer, right click on the vector layer to be edited in order to get the context menu,
Select the Edit command from the open scrolling list,
Click on the New polygon icon to create polygons, or on the New line icon to create lines,
or on the New point icon to create points.

Then,
For polygons or lines
Position the pointer on the map,
Press the mouse left button to create the first point of polygon or line,
Move the pointer on the map and press the mouse left button to create another point,
Carry out the two last steps until you draw the polygonal area or the line you want,
Double click to close off polygonal area or to stop the line drawing.

For points
Position the pointer on the map,
Press the mouse left button to create a point,


To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the selected icon.

Managing geographic data


98/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Note : the vector edition can be made on any vector, even working as a CDMA/CDMA2000, WCDMA/UMTS traffic,
population or generic map. The procedure is identical to the one above.

III.13.2.c MANAGING VECTOR OBJECT SHAPES
Some tools available in the Vector edition bar enable you to modify the polygon shape of a vector layer.

Indeed, it is possible:
To merge several polygons thanks to the Combine icon ,
To make a hole in a polygon by using the Erase icon ,
To keep only the overlapping area of two polygons thanks to the Intersection icon ,
To cut a polygon in two or more by using the Split icon .

The vector layer must be in edition mode in order to be able to modify the shape of its polygons.


To put a vector layer in edition mode, proceed as follows :
Either,
In the Vector edition bar, click on the arrow to open the Vector layer scrolling menu,
Select the layer to be edited in the list,
Or
In the Explorer, right click on the vector layer to be edited in order to get the context menu,
Select the Edit command from the open scrolling list.


To combine several polygons, proceed as follows :
Choose the vector layer to be edited,
On the map, select a polygon,
In the Vector edition bar, click the Combine icon ,
Draw one or several polygons on the map,

A9155 considers all the polygons as a group of polygons. If there is overlapping areas between some polygons, A9155
merges them to make a single one.

To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the selected icon.


To erase areas within polygons, proceed as follows :
Choose the vector layer to be edited,
On the map, select a polygon or a group of polygons,
In the Vector edition bar, click the Erase icon ,
Draw one or several polygons on the map,

A9155 removes all the overlapping areas between polygons.

To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the selected icon.


To keep intersection areas between polygons, proceed as follows :
Choose the vector layer to be edited,
On the map, select a polygon or a group of polygons,
In the Vector edition bar, click the Intersection icon ,
Draw one or several polygons on the map,

A9155 only keeps the intersection areas between polygons and erases all the areas outside.

To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the selected icon.


C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 99/476


To split polygons, proceed as follows :
Choose the vector layer to be edited,
On the map, select a polygon or a group of polygons,
In the Vector edition bar, click the Split icon ,
Draw one or several polygons on the map,

A9155 uses each polygon side intersecting the existing polygon(s) to cut them.

To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the selected icon.


Additional management features are available when right clicking on any vector object on the map (polygons, lines or
points).

When a vector layer is in Edition mode, you may select in the vector object context menu:
Delete: To remove vector objects on the map,
Convert to line: To convert a polygon into a closed line,
Convert to polygon: To convert a closed line into a polygon,
Open line: To open a closed line; A9155 removes segment between the last and the first point,
Close line: To close line; A9155 adds a segment between the last and the first point of the line,
Insert point: To add a point into the polygon contour or line; the point is created at the pointer location,
Move: To shift vector objects on the map (place the pointer where you want to locate vector object and left click to
release it),
Quit edition: In order for a vector layer to no longer be editable,
Properties: To access the vector object property dialog. The General tab sums up the vector layer name, the vector
object identification number and vector object attributes. The Geometry tab lists coordinates of points composing the
selected vector object. Coordinates are stated in the coordinate system specified in the vector layer property dialog
(General tab).

III.13.2.d MANAGING VECTOR OBJECT PROPERTIES
Vectors properties can be managed in two ways, either from a table containing all vectors and their attributes or from the
related standard property dialog.

Vector table
All the vectors (polygons, lines, points and groups of polygons) of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the
corresponding table.

To open this table, proceed as follows :
Click the tab (Data or Geo) where the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window,
Right click on the vector folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open.

Standard features for managing table contents (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter, Sort, Fields)
are available in a context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and Records
menus.


Property dialog
As a classical property dialog in A9155, the vector layer property dialog consists of a General tab, a Table tab and a
Display tab.

To open the property dialog related to a vector object, proceed as follows :
Click the tab (Data or Geo) where the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window,
Right click on the vector folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on the Properties command,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs.


In the General tab, A9155 indicates:
- The vector layer name,

- If the vector layer is embedded in the .atl document or just linked. In this case, A9155 displays the directory path used
to access the file,
Managing geographic data


100/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


The Embed button can be used to embed the vector layer in the .atl document when this one is just linked.
The Find button enables you to redefine a new path when the file's location has changed.

- The coordinate system of the vector layer,
When the vector layer is linked, the coordinate system used is the one of the file (system specified when importing the
file). It corresponds to the projection coordinate system when the vector layer is embedded.
The coordinate system can be changed (click on the Convert button to change it). In this case, coordinates of points
composing vector objects of the layer will be converted in the selected coordinate system.

In addition, you can define, in this tab, sort and filter criteria that will be applied to vector objects of the layer contained in
the table.


The Table tab enables you to manage the vector layer table content. Therefore, you may add custom fields in the table in
order to describe vector attributes.


The Display tab enables you to manage the vector layer display; it is possible to display vectors with colour depending on
any attribute.

III.14 MANAGING GEOGRAPHIC DATA EXPORT
III.14.1 EXPORTING A CLUTTER CLASS MAP
Like for DTM, clutter height and traffic raster maps, it is possible to export the current clutter class description in either a
tiff, a bil or a bmp format. You may choose to keep the squared part of the current clutter class map that contains the
defined computation zone.

To export a part or the complete clutter class map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Clutter classes folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported,
Click the Save button when done,
In the Export dialog box, select one of the options and define the resolution (in metres) of the file :
The whole covered region option allows you to save the whole clutter class map in another file. As
soon as the file is saved, the properties (name,...) of the clutters listed in the Clutter classes folder
are updated.
The computation zone option allows you to save the clutter region inside the computation zone in
another file. As soon as the file is saved, an additional clutter object is created and listed in the
Clutter classes folder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone beforehand.
A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for clutter from the following criteria :
If one clutter object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are extracted, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of the
objects.
The resolution value must be an integer
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
Click OK to validate.

Notes :
When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the same folder. The
.hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain geocoding information and resolution.
Clutter classes file path (and clutter description) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.

C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 101/476


III.14.2 SAVING THE EDITED RASTER POLYGONS
Saving the edited polygons consists either in creating a new clutter class (or traffic - raster map) file including your
modifications, or in storing your modifications in the existing clutter class (or traffic) files.


To store modifications in a new file, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Clutter classes folder (or Traffic raster object) to open the associated context menu,
Select the Save as command from the open scrolling menu,
Indicate the path, the name and the format( *.tif, *.bil and *.bmp) for the file to be exported,
Press OK to validate,

Comment: When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the same
folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain geocoding information and
resolution. Saving a file with the BMP format doesn't involve the automatic creation of georeferencement file. Thus, it is
advised to associate with .bmp files a text document including the same information as the .hdr or .tfw files.

Select one of the options and define the resolution (in metres) of file in the open Export dialog box,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialog box,



The whole covered region option allows you to save in the file the whole clutter class map (or traffic map)
including the clutter class (or traffic) modifications made by the user. As soon as the modifications are
saved, the properties of the clutter (or traffic) object listed in the Clutter classes (or Traffic) folder are
updated.
The only pending changes option allows you just to save in the file the created clutter class (or traffic)
polygonal area. As soon as the modifications are saved, an additional clutter class (or traffic) object is
created and listed in the Clutter classes (or Traffic) folder.
The computation zone option allows you to save in the file the rectangular clutter region (or traffic region)
containing the computation zone encompassing the clutter class (or traffic) modifications made by the user.
As soon as the modifications are saved, an additional clutter class (or traffic) object is created and listed in
the Clutter classes (or Traffic) folder.

A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for clutter from the following criteria:
If one clutter object is modified, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are modified, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of the altered
clutter class objects.
If there is no initial clutter class object, the resolution will equal the resolution of DTM object which
the modifications are made on or the smallest resolution of the merged DTM objects if the
modifications are performed on several DTM objects.
If you draw your own clutter data without initial DTM, clutter class or traffic object, a 100 m default
resolution will be suggested.
For any raster object, the resolution value must be an integer.
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
The same criteria are used to define the resolution of traffic objects: firstly, A9155 looks for resolution in the
modified traffic objects, secondly in the clutter class objects if there is no imported traffic objects, then in
DTM objects in case neither traffic nor clutter class data is available and finally give the 100 m default
Managing geographic data


102/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


resolution if there is no traffic, no clutter class and no DTM data.

Click OK to validate.

Caution : once the modifications are saved, the polygon dimensions are fixed and cannot be modified.


To store modifications in an existing file, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Clutter classes folder (or Traffic folder - raster map) to open the associated context menu,
Select the Save command from the open scrolling menu,
A message is displayed warning the user that some current clutter class (or traffic) files will be updated,
Press OK to validate

Note : the existing file is made of a fixed size matrix. Hence, changes made outside this matrix will not be taken into
account.

III.14.3 EXPORTING A CLUTTER HEIGHT MAP
Like for DTM, clutter class and traffic raster maps, it is possible to export the current clutter height map in either a tif or a
bil format. You may choose to keep the squared part of the current clutter height map that contains the defined
computation zone.

To export a part or the complete clutter height map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Clutter height folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported,
Click the Save button when done,
In the Export dialog box, select one of the options and define the resolution (in metres) of the file :
The whole covered region option allows you to save the whole clutter height map in another file. As
soon as the file is saved, the properties (name,...) of clutter height object listed in the Clutter height
folder are updated.
The computation zone option allows you to save the clutter height region inside the computation
zone in another file. As soon as the file is saved, an additional clutter height object is created and
listed in the Clutter height folder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone
beforehand.
A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for clutter height from the following criteria :
If one clutter height object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are extracted, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of the
objects.
The resolution value must be an integer.
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
Click OK to validate.

Notes :
When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the same folder. The
.hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain geocoding information and resolution,
Clutter height file path is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.

III.14.4 EXPORTING A DTM MAP
Like for clutter class, clutter height and traffic raster maps, it is possible to export the current DTM map in either a tif or a
bil format. You may choose to keep the squared part of the current DTM that contains the defined computation zone.

To export a part or the complete DTM map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the DTM folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported,
Click the Save button when done,
In the Export dialog box, select one of the options and define the resolution (in metres) of the file :
C H A P T E R 3


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 103/476


The whole covered region option allows you to save the whole DTM map in another file. As soon as
the file is saved, the properties (name,...) of DTM object listed in the DTM folder are updated.
The computation zone option allows you to save the DTM region inside the computation zone in
another file. As soon as the file is saved, an additional DTM object is created and listed in the DTM
folder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone beforehand.
A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for DTM from the following criteria :
If one DTM object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are extracted, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of the
objects.
The resolution value must be an integer.
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
Click OK to validate.

Notes :
When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the same folder. The
.hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain geocoding information and resolution,
DTM file path is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.

III.14.5 EXPORTING A VECTOR OBJECT
You can save any edited vector layer in a vector format file. In this case, the vector layer is no longer embedded in the
.atl document; it is a linked file. It can be embedded afterwards.

To export a vector layer, proceed as follows :
Click the tab (Data or Geo) where the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Vector layer to be exported in order to open the associated context menu,
Select the Save as command from the open scrolling menu,
Indicate the path, the name and the format for the file to be exported. Possible formats are Arcview (.shp),
MapInfo (.mif) and an A9155 internal format (.agd),
Press OK to validate,

Notes :
Only polygons can be saved in the Arcview (.shp) format. Therefore, a vector layer mixing polygons and lines,
polygons and points, or containing just points or lines can only be saved in MapInfo (.mif) or A9155 internal format
(.agd).
The A9155 internal format (.agd) is a new format only supported by A9155. Reading of .agd files is faster than other
vector files with classical supported formats (MapInfo, Arcview, Autocad).


In addition, in case of a linked file, it is possible to save modifications performed on the vector layer.

To save modifications on a vector layer, proceed as follows :
Click the tab (Data or Geo) where the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Vector layer to be saved in order to open the associated context menu,
Select the Save command from the open scrolling menu,

A9155 displays a warning to inform you that the source file will be modified,

Click OK to update the source file.

Note : the Save command is available only if there are some pending changes on the vector layer.



C H A P T E R 4

























Managing Radio Network Data
4
Managing radio network data


106/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 107/476


IV MANAGING RADIO NETWORK DATA
IV.1 MANAGING RADIO NETWORK DATA : OVERVIEW
As a reference radio planning tool, A9155 is able to work on several technologies. This feature indicates that there may
be a large amount of data in any project. Nevertheless, A9155 has been developed in order to maximize the number of
common features for any type of project, either dealing with geo data management or radio data management. Of
course, several specific items dealing with the management of radio data are introduced depending on the considered
technology (e.g. TRXs and Subcells in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, Cell level in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, etc...).

All the organisation tools (filters, sorts, groups, etc...) described in the user interface basics can be applied on the radio
data, working in the explorer, tables or on the map. That way, working on sites, antennas, transmitters (including multi-
sectored stations and multi-antennas transmitters) and repeaters always remains easy. Moreover, it is also possible to
easily define, and in the same way in any technology, radio equipment, that will be assigned to each transmitter of any
network.

Specific parts dealing with radio data on GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 will be seen next.
Optimisations on networks will also be described on specific parts dealing with each of these project templates.

IV.2 SETTING DEFAULT RADIO UNITS
To build your network, like the projection or display coordinate systems or default length unit used in any A9155 project,
you must define reception and transmission units as they have to be taken into account in the working environment.

A9155 allows you to define the units of measurement for transmission and reception of signal levels, in your working
environment. The options for units are as follows :
Signal transmission units : dBmilliwatts (dBm), Watts or kiloWatts;
Signal reception units : dBmilliwatts (dBm), dBmicroVolts (dBV) or
dBmicroVolts/meter (dBV/m).


To define reception and transmission units in the current project, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, select the options... command in the Tools menu,
Left click on the Units tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available and the way to use them,
Choose in the scrolling lists the default reception/transmission units for the current .atl A9155 project.
Click OK to validate.


The default unit length can be defined in the same dialog box.

IV.3 SITES
IV.3.1 SITE PROPERTIES
IV.3.1.a CREATING A SITE
In A9155, a site is a geographical point where one or several transmitters (multi-sector site or station) equipped with
antennas with particular characteristics are located.

Proceed as follows to create a site :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Left click the New command from the open scrolling menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the new site dialog window.

Notes :
If the new site seems to not appear on the map, expand the Site folder by left clicking on the associated button.
Managing radio network data


108/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Right click on the site you want to see in order to open a menu from which you select the centre map option.
Site is automatically created when dropping a base station on the map.

From the Display tab window, you can display sites with colours depending on their attributes. The attributes of the sites
can be displayed as labels in the workspace or in help popups using the tip tool.

In UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, in addition to the geographic information, the definition of site equipment and
their use has to be tuned.

IV.3.1.b NAMING AUTOMATICALLY SITES
A9155 integrates, by default, a prefix to site names : "Site". In addition to this prefix, a number is added and is
incremented automatically. Nevertheless, you can force A9155 not to use this default prefix and to prefer user-defined
prefixes. You can customise it by adding the syntax described below in an Atoll.ini file. You must create this file and
place it in the A9155 installation directory.

The syntax in order to define a new prefix to site names in the Atoll.ini file is the following :
[Site]
Prefix=newprefix
Each new site will be named newprefixN instead of SiteN.

Notes :
This file is read only when A9155 is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the A9155 session and to restart it in
order to take into account any modification performed in Atoll.ini.
When changing the name of a site, A9155 automatically renames transmitters and cells related to the site which
names contain the site name. In the same way, if you rename a transmitter, the corresponding cells are automatically
renamed.
Naming automatically transmitters is also possible, either from a fixed prefix or based on the site name with which the
considered transmitter refers.

IV.3.1.c MANAGING SITE PROPERTIES
Like for all objects organised in folders (Sites, transmitters, Antennas, Predictions, Simulations, measurements, etc...)
within A9155, sites can be managed either individually or globally. Global setting is applied to all the filtered sites.

Global properties management
In A9155, you may manage globally the properties associated with existing sites of your network :
To do so, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

The displayed window contains 3 tabs (General, Table, Display). The General tab allows you to use the advanced
filter/sort/group by features. The Table tab manages the contents of the Site table. The Display tab is designed to assign
colours, labels and tips to sites. An additional Other Properties tab is possible if some user defined fields are added to
the Site table.


Individual property management
There are two ways to edit properties of each existing site in the current network.
To do so,
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the Sites folder by clicking on the button in front of it
Right click on the site you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the site you want to manage by right clicking on it ( ),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

The displayed window contains at least 2 tabs (General and Display). An additional Other Properties tab is possible if
some user-defined fields are added to the Site table. In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, an additional tab dealing
C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 109/476


with Site equipment is available.


Managing site properties is also possible from the Site table.

IV.3.1.d CHANGING A SITE POSITION
A9155 permits easy management of the site positions. You can proceed in two ways, either by using geographic
coordinates, by integrating the field topology, or by moving sites manually (using the mouse).

A context menu is associated with each created site. This can be obtained identically by right clicking on the site on the
map or in the Sites folder from the Explorer window.

Using the geographic coordinates
To do so, proceed as follows :
Double click on the site (on the map, or in the Sites folder from the Explorer window) you want to move, in
order to obtain the site properties window. You can do the same by selecting the Properties option from the
context menu associated with this site (see above).
Choose the General tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window
Give the site coordinates (X,Y) in the display system you have chosen. The position of the site by default
(just at the creation) corresponds to the centre of your active map.

Note : in the General tab of the site properties window, you can also change the name of the site, add comments for
each site, and lock its position on the map. Locking the site position allows "safety" for manual movements (using the
mouse) for sites on the map. When you move the site, a message will ask you to confirm your action.

Moving sites to a high point
When creating a network, it may be very useful to get sites high enough to propagate signals easily. A9155 enables you
to put sites on the highest point (based on the DTM) around a site on a certain range.

To do so, proceed as follows :
Activate the site context menu (see above),
Select the Move to a high point... option,
Display the radius of highest point test around the current site.

Note : A9155 can use either the DTM or a user-defined height for sites in computations


Moving sites using the mouse
You can move sites manually on the map, by selecting (left click) one and then by dragging it on the map, left button
pressed, wherever you want. A moving confirmation is asked if the site has a locked position (see above).

IV.3.1.e MANAGING SITE ALTITUDES
A9155 computes automatically the altitude from the imported DTM map. Nevertheless, it is possible to define "real"
altitudes that will be the ones taken into account for computations. It is possible to have both altitudes per site, one
altitude read from the DTM map (non editable value) and another one that the user may define in the Real box. Only the
real altitude defined by the user is stored in database (Sites table).

To manually define a site altitude, proceed as follows :
Either,
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the Sites folder by clicking on the button in front of it
Right click on the site you want to manage the altitude,
or,
Select on the map the site whose altitude you want to manage by left clicking on it ( ),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the General tab of the open dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Enter the real altitude in the appropriate field.
Click OK or Apply to validate your choice

Managing radio network data


110/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Notes :
In the Sites table, A9155 displays the real altitude of the site if defined or the DTM altitude in brackets in case the site
has no real altitude.
In calculations, A9155 takes into account the site's real altitudes and the DTM value in case it does not find any real
altitude. You may force A9155 to consider only site altitudes determined from the DTM map by selecting the Compute
with the DTM altitudes option in the Properties window (General tab) of the site folder. In this case, A9155 ignores the
entered real altitudes.
Altitude is global height compared with sea level (Sea is 0 altitude) and depends on the data of the imported DTM file
(which could be DEM, i.e. including clutter height)

IV.3.1.f GETTING DISTANCES AROUND SITES
The radial grid is a graduated grid on the map around the site, with site text colour. This grid enables the user to have a
better distances around site visualisation. You can set its parameters by using the button.


To do so, proceed as follows :
Either,
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the Sites folder by clicking on the button in front of it
Right click on the site you want to get distances around,
or,
Select on the map the site you want to get distances around by left clicking on it ( ),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Display tab of the open dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Left click the button to open the site grid parameter setting dialog box,
Set the maximum radius, the distance between each graduation and the deviation between angular
graduations.

Note : You can access directly to the grid parameters from the Grid option from the site context menu. Clicking ok is
equal to checking the Show radial grid box.


Example :

- Maximum radius of grid : 5 000 m
- Concentric distance between graduations : 500 m
- Distance between angular graduations : 30



Grid display with above parameters

C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 111/476


IV.3.1.g DISPLAYING THE LINE OF SIGHT AREA
The line of sight represents an area within which visible contact can be made, i.e. the visible zone from a site, choosing
either to work on a simple radius or on a more constraining Fresnel ellipsoid.

To display the line of sight area associated with a site, proceed as follows:
Left click on the desired site in the Sites folder (Explorer window) or on the map
Left click to select the Line of sight area option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Enter the desired parameters and left click,
Click on OK to validate. A9155 then displays the line of sight area.
IV.3.1.h SETTING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF A SITE
A9155 always permits the user to manage object displays easily. For the sites, this can be done by selecting the display
tab of the site properties window. The properties window is reached from the site context menu (right click on the site on
the map or in the Sites folder from the Explorer window).

On the site display window, you may :
Define the site display colours (text and symbol). You can display sites with colours depending on their
attributes. The attributes of the sites can be displayed as labels in the workspace,

By left clicking on the symbol button, you may change the symbol font, colour, type, style (bold, italic,
underline) and background (colour and type). Concerning the background, you may choose between :
- , none,
- , halo,
- , opaque.


Display of the site name, or not and define the related font style,
Display of a radial grid around the site, or not.

Note : If you use the Display tab in the Site folder properties dialog box in the Explorer window, you may define globally
the symbol and text sites display, depending potentially on their attributes.
IV.3.1.i DELETING BUILT SITES
In A9155, sites (like transmitters) are organized in folders. Even if these two tables are linked, it is possible to delete
easily, in one shot, sites and transmitters referred to.

To do so, proceed as follows :
Open the Sites table,
Select the Sites you want to delete,
Either,
Press the Del button of your keyboard,
Or,
Choose the Delete record command from the Edit menu.

Note :
When deleting a site where transmitters are positioned, A9155 automatically removes the site and the transmitters
without displaying a warning. Hence, to cancel a deletion, use the undo feature available in the Edit menu.
Sites can be deleted directly on the map, using their context menu.
Managing radio network data


112/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IV.3.2 SITE LISTS
IV.3.2.a CREATING A SITE LIST
In addition to the dynamic filtering features, A9155 also enable users to define static lists of sites. Unlike filter/sort/group
criteria that may be only saved in user configuration files, site lists are stored in the database. Therefore, when creating
an .atl document from the database, it is possible to recover only the sites of a list you can choose. These site lists may
be also used as filter so as to study in predictions only sites of the list(s). In addition, site lists can be imported and
exported as ASCII files.

To create lists of sites, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Choose the [Site list : List management] command from the open scrolling menu,
In the Site lists dialog, you may define one list per row. To validate a list creation, select another row.
Either
Select a list in the table and click on the Properties button.
Or
Select a row and double click on it.
In the List properties dialog, enter the sites belonging to the list (copy/paste is supported).

IV.3.2.b MANAGING A SITE LIST
It is possible to add a site, a group of sites or all the sites in an existing list subsequently.

To add a site in a list, proceed as follows :
Right click on a site in the explorer or on the map,
Choose the Add a site to a list command in the context menu,
In the Addition of sites in a list dialog, open the scrolling menu and select a list.

To add a group of sites in a list, proceed as follows :
Right click on a group of sites in the explorer,
Choose the Add sites to a list command in the context menu,
In the Addition of sites in a list dialog,
Either
Enter the name of a new list,
Or
Open the scrolling menu and select an existing list.

To add all the sites in a list, proceed as follows :
Right click on the Sites folder in the explorer,
In the context menu, choose Site lists and then the Add sites to a list command,
In the Addition of sites in a list dialog,
Either
Enter the name of a new list,
Or
Open the scrolling menu and select an existing list.

IV.3.2.c EXPORTING A SITE LIST
Site lists can be exported in ASCII text files

To export a site list, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Choose the [Site list : List management] command from the open scrolling menu,
In the Site lists dialog, either
Select an existing list in the table,
Or
Type the name of a new list. Then, click on the Properties button (or double click on it).
Click on Export,
C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 113/476


In the Save as dialog, choose a directory to save the file, give a name to the file and click on OK.


The ASCII text file has the following syntax:

Site name 1
Site name 2


It contains only a list of site names; the coordinates and other attributes of sites are not saved. Thus, this file can be
imported only if the sites have been previously created in the .atl document.

IV.3.2.d IMPORTING A SITE LIST
Site lists can be created within A9155. They can also be imported from an external ASCII file.

To import a site list, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Choose the [Site list : List management] command from the open scrolling menu,
In the Site lists dialog, either
Select an existing list in the table,
Or
Type the name of a new list. Then, click on the Properties button (or double click on it).
Click on Import,
In the Open dialog, specify the path to access the file and click on Open to import the file.

A9155 fills in the selected list with sites from the imported file. Sites listed before importing the file are kept. A9155
displays a warning if a site in the list does not exist in the .atl document.

IV.3.2.e DISPLAYING SITE LISTS
Site lists created in the .atl document can be stored in the database. Therefore, when a user opens an .atl document
from a database that contains site lists, he has the possibility to choose the list(s) of sites he wants to recover in his .atl
document.

To choose the site list to be displayed from a database, proceed as follows :
After selecting the database to be open, A9155 displays the Options dialog,
In this window, either
Select the value <ALL> to load all the sites in the .atl document
Or
Check only the box(es) of site lists you want to recover.
Click on OK to validate.

Only the sites from the selected list(s) will be available in the .atl document.

Note : It is possible to select several lists at once. To do this, click one or several lists using shift and/or Ctrl button at the
same time and then, check/uncheck one of the boxes.

IV.3.2.f FILTERING SITE LISTS
To use site lists as filters, proceed as follows :
Right click on the Sites folder and select Properties,
In the General tab, click on the Filter button,
In the filter dialog, open the Site lists tab and check/uncheck box(es) of site lists you want to keep/exclude
in the .atl document.
Click on OK to validate.

A9155 only keeps sites belonging to site lists you have selected. In this case, sites are not definitively removed from the
.atl document. This is only a filter you can cancel (by opening the Sites table and select Show all records in the Records
menu).

Managing radio network data


114/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Notes :
It is possible to select several lists at once. To do this, click one or several lists using shift and/or Ctrl button at the
same time and then, check/uncheck one of the boxes.
All the boxes can be unchecked at once by clicking the Clear all button.
By default, the value <ALL> is selected; it means there is no filter.

IV.4 ANTENNAS
IV.4.1 CREATING AN ANTENNA
An antenna is a device used for radiating or receiving electromagnetic energy. Depending on the type of project (GSM,
UMTS, etc.), A9155 provides antennas well-suited to the studied projects.

Furthermore, A9155 allows you to create antennas and set the parameters for the characteristics of each of them
(Name, manufacturer, gain, horizontal pattern, vertical pattern, and comments). It is also possible to import a specific
Alcatel Antenna.

Note : Creating and setting parameters for different antennas on the basis of manufacturers data is a long and
meticulous operation. To make it easier for you A9155 allows the use of copy and paste functions as easily as in all
office automation tools. You may thus create an antenna from a blank sheet or from an existing one ; the A9155 display
is compatible with most spreadsheets or word processors.


To create an antenna, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Antennas folder to open the context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New to create a new antenna,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open windows,
Fill out the appropriate fields either manually, or by importing existing values,
Click either OK or Apply to validate


Notes :
When performing a calculation along an angle on which no data is available, A9155 computes a linear interpolation
from existing pattern values.
In the other properties tab, there are 3 A9155 custom properties like the Antenna beamwidth, minimum and maximum
frequencies corresponding to the antenna utilization range. The Beamwidth is, in a plane containing the direction of
the maximum lobe of the antenna pattern, the angle between the two directions in which the radiated power is one-
half the maximum value of the lobe. Translated in terms of dB, half power corresponds to -3 dB. In this window, you
may enter this angle in degrees.
An Electrical tilt field is available in the General tab, but is not taken into account for computations. Patterns must
already integrate this parameter in their shape.

IV.4.2 MANAGING THE ANTENNA PROPERTIES
In A9155, you may edit and even modify the current parameters of an antenna. You may do this action either individually
for each antenna, or globally.

Single radiation pattern editing
You may edit horizontal or vertical patterns of each antenna by doing nearly the same as creating an antenna. To do so,
proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Antennas folder by left clicking on the sign left to the directory
Select the antenna from which you want to edit the radiation pattern by left clicking on it,
Activate the antenna properties window either by double clicking or by choosing the properties option from
the scrolling menu.
Choose the pattern tab associated with the pattern you want to edit.

You may change the values by filling new ones directly on the tables. Patterns can be copied to clipboard or printed.


Note : it is possible to display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes. To choose your display system,
C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 115/476


right click in the pattern window and choose the appropriate option from the open scrolling menu. The new shape is
automatically displayed in the pattern window.

Multiple radiation pattern editing
Like for the other parameters (sites, transmitters, etc...), A9155 enables you to manage antennas in table form. To
activate the antenna table, double click on the antenna folder or choose the Open option from the antenna context menu
(right click on the antenna folder). By resizing cell heights and widths, you may obtain all the antenna patterns on a view
in order to make a comparative choice.


Data Tab/Antenna/Open - Antenna Data table


Notes :
By using the copy (Ctrl+C) and paste (Ctrl+V) functions, you may even attribute patterns from one antenna to another
one by working directly on the pattern cells of the antenna table,
The way patterns are displayed (linear or logarithmic) is reported in the antenna table as chosen in any single
antenna properties dialog box.
IV.4.3 MODIFYING ANTENNA PARAMETERS IN TABLES
A9155 can easily manage antenna data with its table form availability. Like for the other items, you may change data
directly in the table (left click on the cell you want to modify), or use the copy and paste (Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V) functions.
This last feature is very useful in that way you may reuse patterns of an antenna to others.

Example :
In the following table, a new antenna called Antenna1, from Martin SA, has been built, with a 12 dBi Gain, and
some patterns. The goal, here, is to export the patterns of a certain antenna to the one of Antenna1.

To do so
Activate the antenna table,
Select the pattern cell from the antenna whose pattern you want to export,
Copy the cell by using the Ctrl+C function,


Managing radio network data


116/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Data Tab/Antenna/Open/Pattern copying - Antenna Data table

Select the pattern cell from the antenna you want to change the pattern,
Paste the patterns by using the Ctrl+V option.



Data Tab/Antenna/Open/Pattern Pasting - Antenna Data table


A9155 replaces the old pattern by the new one both in the antenna table and properties window. You can check that
data have also been adapted in the patterns table of the modified antenna properties window.

IV.4.4 COPYING ANTENNA PATTERNS TO THE CLIPBOARD
To copy the horizontal/vertical pattern of an existing antenna to the clipboard, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Antennas folder by left clicking on the sign left to the directory
Select the antenna from which you want to copy the radiation pattern by left clicking on it,
Activate the antenna properties window either by double clicking or by choosing the properties option from
the scrolling menu.
Choose the pattern tab associated with the pattern you want to edit (horizontal/vertical),
Right click on the pattern window in order to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Copy command from the open menu.


This can be made either on a linear or a logarithmic display

IV.4.5 IMPORTING ANTENNA PATTERNS
Using existing values
If you already have table formatted values for antenna patterns in a file (spreadsheet or word processor), you can
import them directly into the cells of the patterns table by copying and pasting from your application (a spreadsheet in
the following example).

To do so, proceed as follows :
Select from your spreadsheet the columns containing angles and values you want to import,
Copy your selection,

C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 117/476



Horizontal pattern values copying

Switch to A9155,
Click the first top left cell of the corresponding pattern table in the antenna properties window,
Paste the data by using the Ctrl+V shortcut.
Left click on the Apply button


Missing values in selection
If there are some missing values (blank lines) in your data sheet, A9155 is able to interpolate the values in order to
obtain a complete and realistic pattern all around the antenna. To do so, just follow exactly the steps as above. When
pasted, blank lines are compacted in the pattern table when the apply button is pressed.

IV.4.6 PRINTING ANTENNA PATTERNS
To print the horizontal/vertical pattern of an existing antenna, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Antennas folder by left clicking on the sign left to the directory
Select the antenna from which you want to print the radiation pattern by left clicking on it,
Activate the antenna properties window either by double clicking or by choosing the properties option from
the scrolling menu.
Choose the pattern tab associated with the pattern you want to edit (horizontal/vertical),
Right click on the pattern window in order to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Print... command from the open menu.


This can be made either on a linear or a logarithmic display

IV.5 TRANSMITTERS
IV.5.1 TRANSMITTERS : OVERVIEW
A transmitter is the source or generator of any signal on a transmission medium. A transmitter is a piece of equipment
composed of some antennas located on a site. Depending on the type of project, A9155 manages differently the
transmitters parameters. Whatever the project, you may manage globally or individually the transmitter parameters and
their single activity/inactivity. A base station is a group of transmitters on the same site. With A9155, you may work on
several types, from single to multi-sectored stations, by creating new ones from nothing or templates.

Then depending on the project type, transmitters are managed differently. Hence, additional levels are introduced like
subcells and TRXs in TDMA/GSM projects, cells (one carrier on a transmitter) for WCDMA/UMTS and
CDMA/CDMA2000 projects.

So, the items referenced in this part deal with common management of transmitters and station templates. All specific
parts depending on the technology are described in their respective parts. In the coming sections, steps will describe the
Managing radio network data


118/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


creation, deletion, moving and setting of the global properties of the transmitters and station templates.

IV.5.2 TRANSMITTERS PROPERTIES
IV.5.2.a CREATING A TRANSMITTER
In A9155, several antennas can be installed on the same transmitter. The creative steps for one antenna and more
antennas transmitters are identical. The second antenna used is automatically placed at the same height than the first
one.


To create a transmitter, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder,
Choose the New option from the context menu.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open windows,
Fill out the appropriate fields in the several tab windows,
Click OK or Apply to validate the new transmitter.


A9155 opens the "Transmitter new element properties" window containing the main characteristics describing the
transmitter you are building. This window contains at least 2 tabs, additional tabs being linked with the type of project
template you are working on.

The standard tabs are General and Transmitter, and deal with the definition of the transmitter, its location, the
assignment to some specific radio equipment (leading to losses computation), and the antenna(s) used on this
transmitter. The power definition is located in the Transmitter part in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, whereas its definition is
made at the cell level in WCDMA/UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects.

Note : The Other Properties tab window is available for any project if a user-defined field has been added to the
transmitter table.

IV.5.2.b NAMING AUTOMATICALLY TRANSMITTERS
A9155 integrates, by default, a prefix to transmitter names which is the name of the related site. In addition to this prefix,
the sector number corresponding to the considered transmitter is added. Nevertheless, you can force A9155 not to use
this default prefix and to prefer user-defined prefixes. You can customise it by adding the syntax described below in an
Atoll.ini file. You must create this file and place it in the A9155 installation directory.

The syntax in order to define a new prefix to transmitter names in the Atoll.ini file is the following :
[Transmitter]
Prefix=newprefix
Each new transmitter will be named newprefixN instead of TxN.

Another solution is to use an automatic prefix by writing these lines:
[Transmitter]
Prefix=<AUTO>
In this case, each new transmitter is called Site name_n. Site name is the name of the site where the transmitter is
located and n is the transmitter number on this site.

Notes :
This file is read only when A9155 is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the A9155 session and to restart it in
order to take into account any modification performed in Atoll.ini.
When changing the name of a site, A9155 automatically renames transmitters and cells related to the site which
names contain the site name. In the same way, if you rename a transmitter, the corresponding cells are automatically
renamed.
Automatically naming sites is also possible.


The default sector numbering can be set. By default, when creating a tri-sectors station, the numbering of the first sector
starts from 1. Therefore, we will have 3 transmitters named Site_1, Site_2 and Site_3.

To differently initialise the numbering of the first sector, add these lines in the Atoll.ini file:
C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 119/476


[Transmitter]
First=x (x must be an integer)

IV.5.2.c MANAGING TRANSMITTER PROPERTIES
Like for all objects organised in folders (Sites, Transmitters, Antennas, Predictions, Simulations, measurements, etc...)
within A9155, transmitters can be managed either individually or globally. A global setting is applied to all the filtered
transmitters.

Global properties management
In A9155, you may manage globally the properties associated with transmitters of your network :
To do so, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

The 4 standard tab windows are : General, Table, Propagation and Display.
- The General tab deals with folder organisation and associate configurations.
- The Table tab helps you to manage contents in the Transmitter table.
- The Propagation tab makes it possible to assign the same propagation model(s), calculation radius (or radii), path loss
resolution(s) to all filtered transmitters of the folder, and to manage the path loss result storage,
- The Station templates tab allows you to manage (creation, modification, deletion) models of stations.
- The Display tab allows you to manage the display of transmitters depending on their attributes, to manage the legend,
labels on the map, and the contents of help popups using the tip tool .

Notes :
To attribute different colours to the transmitters (used in coverage prediction for example) in the network easily, use
the automatic command from the Display type scrolling box in the Display tab window (and validate by pressing the
Apply button).
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, a BSIC format tab is available. In this one, you can define whether BSICs are in octal
or decimal notations.


Individual property management
There are two ways to edit properties of each transmitter in the current network.
To do so,
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

The displayed window contains at least 4 tabs (General, Transmitter, Propagation, Display). The Other Properties tab is
available if some user defined fields have been added to the Transmitter table :
- The General tab deals with the referring site and the location of the current transmitter
- The Transmitter tab is linked with the definition of power (in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects), assigned losses and
antennas built on this transmitter,
- The Propagation tab makes it possible to assign propagation model(s), calculation radius (or radii), path loss
resolution(s) to the current transmitter, and to manage the path loss result storage,
- The display tab allows you to manage the colour assigned to the current transmitter.

Note :
You can open the property dialog of the Site on which the transmitter is built by clicking the button on the right of
the scrolling site selection box in the General tab.
You can open the property dialog of the Antenna used as main antenna on the transmitter by clicking the button
on the right of the scrolling antenna selection box in the Transmitter tab.

Managing radio network data


120/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IV.5.2.d MOVING A TRANSMITTER ON THE MAP
Even if transmitters are linked with sites, it is possible to shift them from their reference site by adjusting Dx and Dy
contained in each transmitter property dialog box. Dx (resp. Dy) is the distance (in metres) between the considered
transmitter and the basis site X-positive (Y-positive) directed.

Nevertheless, it is possible to move a transmitter by using your mouse. To do so, proceed as follows :
Select the transmitter you want to move on the map by left clicking on it and maintaining it, a specific
second pointer appears close to the mouse pointer,

Drag the transmitter to the desired location,

Release the mouse button when reached.



Dx and Dy values are automatically modified in the transmitter properties.

IV.5.2.e ADJUSTING TRANSMITTER AZIMUTHS
In A9155, it is possible to modify the azimuth of the antenna(s) of any transmitter by accessing its property dialog box.
Azimuth values are defined in degrees, 0 indicating north, and are ordered in a clockwise direction.

It is also possible to modify the azimuth of the first antenna of any transmitter by using your mouse. To do so, proceed as
follows :
Select the transmitter you want to move on the map by left clicking on it and release the mouse
button,
Move the pointer to the arrow extremity of the selected transmitter, a specific rotation pointer
appears close to the mouse pointer,

Left click on the green dot and maintain the mouse button pressed,
Drag the pointer in order to execute a rotation around the original location,

The value of the azimuth is displayed in real time in the extreme left part of the status bar
,
Release the mouse button when the desired angle is reached.



The azimuth value for the first antenna of the considered transmitter is automatically modified in the transmitter
properties.

C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 121/476


IV.5.2.f INSTALLING SEVERAL ANTENNAS ON A TRANSMITTER
In A9155, it is possible to assign several antennas on the same transmitter in order to compose the several associated
patterns of each of them.

To build several antennas on the same transmitter, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Transmitter tab of the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog,
In the Other antennas part, define additional antennas. Click on the first cell in the Antenna column, open
the scrolling menu (by clicking on the arrow) and choose an antenna in the scrolling menu. Then, enter its
characteristics: azimuth (Azimuth column), down tilt (Tilt column) and the percentage of power dedicated to
this antenna (Percent_power column). Select another row to validate the new antenna installation,
Click OK or Apply to validate the antenna building.


Notes :
Entering 0% in the Percent_power column means that only the first antenna will be considered.
The other antennas used are automatically placed at the same height as the first one.
The characteristics of additional antennas are no longer described in the Transmitters table.

IV.5.2.g SETTING TRANSMITTER ACTIVITY
When transmitters are built in a network, you may decide to activate them or not. Predictions, simulations and associated
reports/statistics take into account only active transmitters (and not filtered transmitters). In the Explorer window, active
transmitters are displayed in red ( symbol) in the transmitter folder, unlike inactive ones which are displayed in white
( symbol).

To set the activity of a transmitter,
Either,
Select the Transmitter tab from the transmitter properties
or
Activate the transmitter table window
(Un)check the active box in order to make the transmitter (un)active in the network

You may also manage the transmitters activity from the context menu associated with each transmitter individually (right
click on the transmitter subfolder in the geo tab from the explorer window) or globally (right click on the transmitters folder
in the geo tab from the explorer window)

IV.5.2.h DELETING A TRANSMITTER
To delete an existing transmitter, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it
Right click on the transmitter you want to delete,
or
Select on the map the transmitter ( )you want to delete by left clicking on the appropriate Tx
symbol (arrow),
Choose the Delete option from the context menu.

Another alternative is to delete the line associated with the transmitter you want to delete in the Transmitters table.


Managing radio network data


122/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Note : When selecting a transmitter, be careful to reach the selection. is different. In that case, that is the
site which is selected. Since the deletion action is possible on sites on which transmitters are built, be sure of your
selection.

IV.5.3 STATION TEMPLATES
IV.5.3.a CREATING A STATION TEMPLATE
A station is one transmitter or a group of transmitters on a same site sharing the same properties. With A9155, you may
create, modify or delete station templates and build your network from stations instead of single transmitters.

To create a new station template, proceed as follows :
Either
From the toolbar, left click on the template scrolling box

Select the Manage Templates... tool

Or
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Station templates tab,
Click the button to create a new station template,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Enter the parameters of the station being currently built,
Click OK to validate.

The new station template is then available in the station scrolling menu.

Note : In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000, the station template must integrate the site equipment properties related to the
site on which it will be dropped.

IV.5.3.b DEFINING STATION TEMPLATE PROPERTIES
A station is one transmitter or a group of transmitters on a same site sharing the same properties. With A9155, you may
create, modify or delete station templates and build your network from stations instead of single transmitters.

To manage a station template, proceed as follows :
Either,
From the toolbar, left click on the template scrolling box

Select the Manage Template... tool

Or
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 123/476


Click the Station templates tab,
Select the template you want to manage in the Available templates box,
Click the button to open the station template properties dialog box,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current station,
Click OK to validate.


Note : the properties you can adjust are similar to the transmitter properties ones.

IV.5.3.c DELETING A STATION TEMPLATE
A station is one transmitter or a group of transmitters on a same site sharing the same properties. With A9155, you may
create, modify or delete station templates and build your network from stations instead of single transmitters.

To delete a station template, proceed as follows :
Either
From the toolbar, left click on the template scrolling box

Select the Manage Template... tool

Or
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Station templates tab,
Select the template you want to delete in the Available templates box,
Click the button,
Click either OK or Cancel to close the dialog box.

IV.5.3.d DROPPING A STATION FROM A TEMPLATE
In A9155, as for (site, transmitter) pairs, you can easily build station from available templates.

Proceed as follows to create a station :
Select in the station template scrolling box (located in the toolbar) the template to use,
Left click on the New station button, left to the scrolling box,
Put the station on the appropriate location on your map,

You may also build several identical stations from a template in A9155. To do so, you must have previously defined a
hexagonal cell radius for the corresponding template in its properties dialog window. Once this is done, proceed as
follows to create groups of stations :
Select in the station template scrolling box (located in the toolbar) the template to use,
Left click on the Hexagonal design
1
button, left of the scrolling box,
Draw the zone in which you want to build the stations on the map as a computation or focus zone,
Stations with associated hexagonal shapes around are built as best possible in the drawn zone.


Once built, stations objects (sites and transmitters) are put in the corresponding folders, and you may work on them as if
they were sites and transmitters. Hence, you may add additional antennas on each created transmitter.


1
An hexagonal design is a group of stations created from the same station template

Managing radio network data


124/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Notes :
When you select a specific template, if the Hexagonal design button is not available ( ), please define a hexagonal
cell radius for this template in its properties dialog window, used as the hexagonal shape radius.
In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000, the site on which is dropped the station has UMTS equipment properties which are
defined in the station template dialog.
It is also possible to drop a station on an existing site.

IV.5.3.e DROPPING A STATION ON AN EXISTING SITE
In A9155, the standard way in dropping stations is at the same time the creation of related site and corresponding
properties (e.g. site equipment in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000). Nevertheless, it is easily possible to drop a station from
a template on existing site.

Once the reference site is available, to drop a station from a template on it, proceed as follows :
Select in the station template scrolling box (located in the toolbar) the template to use,
Uncheck the visibility flag in front of the hexagonal design folder,
Left click on the New station button, left of the scrolling box,
Move your pointer to the reference site on your map,
When the pointer sticks on it, put the station on the site by left clicking.

IV.5.3.f MANAGING A MULTI-SECTORED STATION
Even if you can select only one transmitter at a time, it is possible to group together all the transmitters composing a
same base station (defined in the station templates properties).

To do so, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitter folder to open the context menu
Choose the group by sites option
Transmitters are then displayed under sites subfolders in the transmitters folder.

IV.5.3.g MERGING HEXAGONAL GROUPS OF BASE STATIONS
When you build several hexagonal groups of different station templates, some hexagons may overlap. These
overlapping zones can overestimate the number of needed sites regarding the number of transmitters. To avoid that,
A9155 provides a tool that helps you to merge sites of different hexagon groups.

To merge sites of different hexagonal groups located within a certain distance, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Display the several hexagon groups by checking the box ( ) in front of the Hexagonal design folder,
Right click on the Hexagonal design folder to open the context menu,
Choose the Merge sites... command from the open menu,
Enter the distance within which you want to merge sites,
Click OK to start the merging process.


Example : let's imagine that two base bi-sector stations of different hexagon groups are located within a radius of 200
metres, and their respective hexagon cell radius is 500 m and 1000m. With this feature, you can merge sites located
within a distance of e.g. 300 metres. At the end of the process, there will be only one site on which 4 transmitters will be
built.

C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 125/476


IV.6 REPEATERS
IV.6.1 REPEATERS : OVERVIEW
A simple modelling of repeaters is available in the A9155 V6.2.1 version. The modelling focuses on the impact of
repeaters and the additional coverage they provide to transmitters.

Broad-band repeaters are not modelled. A repeater is similarly modelled for 2G and 3G networks, except that on the 2G
side, A9155 deals with EIRP and on the 3G side with a global amplification gain. We assume that all the TRXs from the
2G donor transmitter, as well as all the carriers from the 3G donor transmitter are amplified.
IV.6.2 CREATING A REPEATER
It is possible to model a repeater for which there is a donor transmitter.

To create a repeater, proceed as follows :
Select a transmitter on the map or in the Transmitters folder of explorer ; it will be the donor transmitter,
In the toolbar, click on the icon (active only if a transmitter has been previously selected),
Place the repeater on the map.

A repeater can be added on an existing site or can itself generate a new site. A9155 creates a repeater linked to the
selected donor transmitter. In the explorer, the new site is listed in the Sites folder and the repeater under its donor
transmitter.

The repeater is represented on the map by the symbol . The repeater has the colour of the donor transmitter and by
default, the same azimuth. When clicking on it, A9155 displays a link to the donor transmitter.

IV.6.3 MANAGING REPEATER PROPERTIES
The repeater property dialog can be open either by double-clicking on the repeater on the map or in the explorer, or by
selecting Properties in the repeater context menu. It consists of four parts, the General part, the Donor part, the
Coverage part and the Propagation part.

Standard properties are available in the General tab. This tab contains general information on the repeater :
The name of the repeater. By default, repeaters are called RepeaterN.
The donor transmitter name that cannot be changed after the repeater creation,
The site which it is located on,
The distance offset on x (Dx) and y (Dy) axis,
The amplifier gain (amplification gain),
It will be used in the link budget to evaluate the repeater total gain.
The delay offset (Internal delay) of the repeater,
Delay offset is an informative field in this version.
Comments.

All the created repeaters and donor side properties are listed in the Repeaters table. To open this table, right click on the
Transmitters folder and then, select Repeaters and Open.

Note : the table cannot be used to create repeaters since only properties of the donor side may be specified. On the
other hand, it allows you to delete repeaters or modify their characteristics ; standard features for managing table content
(Fill down/up, Delete, Display columns, Filter, Sort, Fields) are available in a context menu (when right clicking on
column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and Records menu.

Managing radio network data


126/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IV.6.4 SETTING DONOR PROPERTIES OF A REPEATER
Donor properties can be accessed from the donor tab of any repeater property dialog. Parameters of this tab model the
repeater donor side facing the donor transmitter.

The different settings are listed below :
The repeater donor side antenna has to be selected in the model scrolling menu. By default, if no antenna is installed
on the repeater, A9155 takes into account an omni antenna with 0 dBi gain.
Enter the repeater antenna height. A9155 evaluates the repeater azimuth and downtilt considering that the donor side
antenna of the repeater is pointed to the antenna of the donor transmitter.
Azimuth and downtilt can also be user-defined.
The Calculate button enables you to update azimuth and downtilt values after changing the repeater donor side
antenna height or the repeater location. If you choose another site or change site coordinates in the General tab, click
on Apply before using the Calculate button.
Finally, you may model the feeder equipment used. Choose a type of feeder in the Feeders scrolling menu and enter
its length.

IV.6.5 SETTING COVERAGE PROPERTIES OF A REPEATER
Coverage properties can be accessed from the Coverage side tab of any repeater property dialog. This tab enables you
to model the repeater coverage side.

The different settings are listed below :
The repeater activity status has to be chosen. Only active repeaters (displayed with red colour in the explorer) are
calculated.
Choose the repeater coverage side antenna in the model scrolling menu. By default, if no antenna is installed on the
repeater, A9155 takes into account an omni antenna with 0 dBi gain.
Enter the height, azimuth and downtilt of the repeater coverage side antenna.
Additional antennas can be specified.

Note : by default, characteristics (antenna, azimuth, height,) of the repeater coverage side correspond to the donor
transmitter characteristics.

Finally, you may model the feeder equipment used. Choose a type of feeder in the Feeders scrolling menu and enter
its length.
You may define EIRP in case of GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks or total gain in UMTS/CDMA/CDMA2000 networks.
A9155 will use this value (EIRP or total gain) to calculate the signal level received from the repeater. Either directly
enter a value, or click on the Calculate button in order for A9155 to deduce the value from the link budget. The
Calculate button enables you to update the value after changing any characteristic in the Coverage tab. If you modify
other characteristics in the General and Donor side tabs, click on Apply before using the Calculate button.

Note : default EIRP takes into account donor transmitter EIRP, propagation loss between the donor transmitter and the
repeater, donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, feeder losses), amplifier gain and coverage part characteristics
(coverage antenna gain and feeder losses). The default gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power,) and
takes into account the same information about donor transmitter, donor and coverage parts of the repeater.

Assumptions :
The link between the donor transmitter and the repeater has the same frequency as the network,
Propagation loss between donor transmitter and repeater is calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model.


Since repeaters will be involved in computations, propagation parameters have to be set like in transmitters. They can be
accessed from the Propagation side tab of any repeater property dialog.

As for the transmitter, you may specify:
A propagation model, a calculation radius and a resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix,
A propagation model, a calculation radius and a resolution taken into account to calculate the extended path loss
matrix.

Notes :
By default, A9155 assigns to the repeater calculation settings (propagation model, calculation radius, grid
resolution,) defined for the donor transmitter,
The definition of the calculation radius in the repeater property dialog has an effect on the related transmitters that will
be taken into account or not because of the use of a computation zone.
C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 127/476


IV.6.6 UPDATING REPEATER PARAMETERS
As for transmitters, it is possible to select a repeater on the map, to change its azimuth and its position relating to its site.
Angle calculation

In addition, it is possible to globally update calculated azimuths and downtilts of repeater donor side antennas by
selecting Repeaters and Calculate angles in the Transmitters context menu.

Finally, it is possible to globally update calculated total gains (or calculated EIRP) of all the repeaters by selecting
Repeaters and Calculate gain (or Calculate EIRP) in the Transmitters context menu.

IV.6.7 USING REPEATERS IN CALCULATIONS
Repeaters have an impact on the donor transmitter coverage.

Path loss matrices
A9155 calculates a main path loss matrix and potentially an extended one for each active repeater:
Which satisfies the filter criteria defined,
Which has a calculation area (intersection between the calculation radius and rectangle including the computation
zone).
Computations are performed with the standard validity management carried out for any transmitter.

Features such as export of repeater path loss matrices, the possibility to evaluate the number of transmitters/repeaters to
recalculate, the list of transmitters/repeaters calculated and their invalidity reasons, are available in the Result storage
dialog and in the Propagation tab of the Transmitters property dialog.


Coverage predictions
The calculation area is the union between calculation areas of the donor transmitter and the repeater. A9155 displays a
composite coverage ; on each pixel, it takes the sum of both signals, the signal level received from the donor transmitter
and the signal level from the repeater.

The desynchronisation, which would lead to constructive or destructive operation on signals, is not modelled.


Point analysis
In the Profile tab, it is possible to study the profile between a repeater and a target receiver. In this case, A9155 gives the
signal level from the repeater.

In the Reception and Results tabs, it provides the composite signal, the signal level received from the donor transmitter
plus the signal level from the repeater.


GSM/GPRS/EDGE specific calculations
Repeaters have no direct impact on:
TRX dimensioning,
The donor transmitter (which has an extended coverage) is supposed to deal with more traffic and so naturally needs
more TRXs.
Neighbour allocation,
The donor transmitter would naturally have more neighbours as its coverage is extended.
Frequency allocation,
The donor transmitter (which has an extended coverage) is supposed to create more interference so allocation will
naturally be more constrained.

UMTS, CDMA2000 and CDMA/ IS 95 specific calculations
Repeaters have no direct impact on:
Power control simulation,
Neighbour allocation,
The donor transmitter would naturally have more neighbours as its coverage is extended.
Scrambling code allocation.

Managing radio network data


128/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IV.7 RADIO EQUIPMENT
IV.7.1 RADIO EQUIPMENT : OVERVIEW
Radio equipment is related to several devices producing losses on transmitters. In A9155, it is possible to calculate such
losses for each type of equipment regarding their specific characteristics. The calculated values may then be used to
either determine total loss on transmitters or indicate their order of magnitude for each of them. Furthermore, for UMTS
or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, assigning equipment to transmitter helps in the determination of the Total noise figure
using the Friis equation.


A9155 enables you to model transmitter equipment in any project. Radio equipment consists of three main parts:
Tower Mounted Amplifier (also called Mast Head Amplifier): it is used to reduce the composite noise figure of the
base station. TMAs are connected between the antenna and the feeder cable,
Feeders,
BTS.

All the components, tower mounted amplifiers, feeders and BTS, are described in three associated tables. In addition,
some characteristics, which may be different for transmitters using the same equipment, are specified in each transmitter
properties.

Equipment can also be managed in a database structure.

IV.7.2 MANAGING TMA EQUIPMENT
TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) are used in the equipment specifications linked with each transmitter. When defined,
TMA are available and can be assigned individually to each transmitter of the network.


To create/manage tower mounted amplifiers equipment, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Equipment : TMA equipment... option from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialog window,
Click on the Records tab to open the TMA definition table,
Create TMA equipment (give an equipment name to each newly created one), and, for each of them,
specify noise figure (noise figure TMA, dB), uplink gain (reception gain TMA, dB) and downlink loss
(transmission losses TMA, dB),
Click the Close button to validate.


Notes :
Losses and gains must be positive values.
The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.

IV.7.3 MANAGING FEEDER EQUIPMENT
Feeders are used in the equipment specifications linked with each transmitter. When defined, feeder types are available
and can be assigned individually to each transmitter of the network.


To create/manage feeder equipment, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Equipment : Feeder equipment... option from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialog window,
Click on the Records tab to open the Feeder definition table,
Create Feeder equipment (give an equipment name to each newly created one), and, for each of them,
specify losses per metre (feeder losses per metre, dB/m) and the connector transmission and reception
losses (dB),
Click the Close button to validate.
C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 129/476




Notes :
Losses must be positive values.
The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.
In CDMA/CDMA2000 or WCDMA/UMTS projects, feeder and connector losses are not included in the transmitter
uplink total losses since they are already taken into account in the noise figure evaluation.

IV.7.4 MANAGING BTS EQUIPMENT
BTS equipment is used in the equipment specifications linked with each transmitter. When defined, BTS types are
available and can be assigned individually to each transmitter of the network.


To create/manage BTS equipment, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Equipment : BTS equipment... option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialog window,
Click on the Records tab to open the BTS definition table,
Create BTS equipment (give an equipment name to each newly created one), and, for each of them,
specify noise figure (BTS noise figure, dB),
Click the Close button to validate.


Notes :
Noise figures must be positive values.
The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.

IV.7.5 ASSIGNING RADIO EQUIPMENT TO TRANSMITTER
Once defined, TMA, feeder and BTS equipment can be assigned to transmitters taking part of a network in order to
determine corresponding total losses. For example, in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, losses due to equipment will be
available only when the Power and Losses option is chosen to define the efficient power of transmitters instead of EIRP.


To define transmitter radio equipment, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either,
Right click on the transmitter you want to parameter radio equipment to open the associated context
menu,
Choose the Properties command from the open menu,
Or
Double click on the transmitter you want to parameter radio equipment,
Click on the Transmitter tab from the open window,
Click the button to open the associated dialog box,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to validate.


Notes :
Losses and gains must be positive values.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.

Managing radio network data


130/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IV.7.6 USING EQUIPMENT TO COMPUTE TRANSMITTER LOSSES
TMA, feeder and BTS equipment allows you to calculate losses on transmitters. Once their characteristics defined for
each transmitter, A9155 calculates downlink losses for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, and downlink and uplink losses for
CDMA projects, including the total noise figure, using the Friis equation.

To display calculated loss regarding to equipment specifications for each transmitters, open the properties dialog
associated with the considered transmitter, and choose the Transmitter tab window. Calculated values are indicated in
brackets on the right of the boxes linked with the different types of losses. This fields are editable and can be user
modified.

Notes :
When loss information is lacking, the following default values are considered: Gain=0dB and Noise figure=0dB.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.
Since they are already taken into account in the noise figure evaluation, feeder and connector losses are not included
in the transmitter uplink total losses (CDMA/CDMA2000 or WCDMA/UMTS projects).

A9155 does not automatically recalculate total losses and total noise figure when modifying equipment characteristics in
their respective tables, in each transmitter Equipment specifications window or in the Transmitters table. It keeps initial
values and displays updated values in parentheses.

For automatic total losses and total noise figure update from equipment characteristics, proceed as follows :
Either,
Right click on the Transmitters folder, choose Equipment : Apply to transmitters.
Or
Open the Transmitters table,
Select the whole column(s) you want to calculate
Empty it (them) using the Delete key on your keyboard.

Note : The first way enables you to update total losses and total noise figure of all the transmitters while the second one
can be used on a group of transmitters.

IV.7.7 MANAGING RADIO EQUIPMENT IN A DATABASE STRUCTURE
In A9155, TMA, feeder and BTS equipment are related to some objects from a database. These are available when
creating a new environment .atl or when opening an existing one not connected to a database.

To enable the equipment modelling in existing projects connected to a central database, a specific procedure must be
achieved. This is given below :
Let several users be connected with a central database. The database administrator is one of them,
In the database, the administrator must create three tables, called TMAEquipments, FeederEquipments,
and BTSEquipments, respectively dedicated to TMA, feeder and BTS equipment. Tables are described
hereafter. In each table, assign a primary key to the field NAME,

Field Label Length Description
NAME Text 255 Name of Tower Mounted Amplifier
DL_LOSSES Float 4 Downlink losses of Tower Mounted Amplifier
NOISE_FIGURE Float 4 Noise figure of Tower Mounted Amplifier
UL_GAIN Float 4 Uplink gain of Tower Mounted Amplifier
TMAEquipments table

Field Label Length Description
NAME Text 255 Name of Feeder
LOSS_PER_METER Float 4 Feeder loss per meter
FeederEquipments table

Field Label Length Description
NAME Text 255 Name of base station
NOISE_FIGURE Float 4 Noise figure of base station
BTSEquipments table

The administrator must also define fields, listed below, in the existing Transmitters and TplTransmitters
tables,
C H A P T E R 4


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 131/476



Field Label Length Description
TMA_NAME Text 255 Name of the TMA equipment
FEEDER_NAME Text 255 Name of the feeder equipment
BTS_NAME Text 255 Name of the BTS equipment
FEEDERLENGTH_DL Float 4 Length of DL feeder
FEEDERLENGTH_UL Float 4 Length of UL feeder
ANTDIVGAIN Float 4 Antenna gain diversity
MISCDLL Float 4 Miscellaneous DL loss
MISCULL Float 4 Miscellaneous UL loss
Fields to add in the Transmitters and TplTransmitters tables





C H A P T E R 5

























Managing Computations in A9155
5
Managing computations in A9155


134/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 135/476


V MANAGING COMPUTATIONS IN A9155
V.1 COMPUTATIONS IN A9155 : OVERVIEW
Once the network has been built, A9155 allows you to create some general studies. To make this easier, A9155
provides calculation tools like multithread and distributed computing features. Moreover, the several processes can be
either displayed in an event viewer window or inside a log file.

A9155 provides also the possibility to limit the calculation loading and time by introducing polygonal zones. These help
you to restrict the computation to a certain set of transmitters, and to clip related computations, coverages and other
outputs. This is made by using two type of polygonal zones : the computation zone and the focus zone. The first one is
the one on which are made the computations, the second one on which are made the statistical outputs.

Depending on the project type on which you are working on, you may choose between the different propagation models
available in A9155. Selecting the most appropriate one, you may even decide to attribute different ones to the different
transmitters composing the network.

Predictions may be featured in two ways :
by using the point analysis tool in order to predict, at any point of the current map, the reception profile between a
reference transmitter (in real time) and the value of the several signal levels of the surrounding transmitters at a given
point (using existing path loss matrices).
by computing different types of standard coverage predictions : coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping zones. Many customisation features on coverage studies are available in order to make their analysis
easier.

All of these are easily manageable. Furthermore, A9155 allows you to export coverage and path loss results with a view
to use them elsewhere in another application.

Notes :
For CDMA technology projects (UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000), A9155 provides also an active set analysis based on
a particular scenario (given terminal, mobility and terminal) for an existing simulation at a given point.
Other specific studies like interference studies (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects) or handover, service availability, etc...
(UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000) are also possible.

V.2 COMPUTING IN POLYGONAL AREAS
V.2.1 COMPUTATION AND FOCUS ZONES : OVERVIEW
The computation and focus zones are user-definable polygonal areas based on the map cutting. Drawing such polygonal
zones allows the user to reduce calculation area and calculation times, and to permit a more precise analysis on
computation results.

The computation zone had several functions :
Determining transmitters geographically involved in computations. The transmitters that will be taken into account are
the ones which have at least one calculation radius (main and/or secondary, at the transmitter or repeater level)
intersecting the rectangle around the computation zone.
Determining the validity of path loss matrices (i.e. Increasing the computation zone size invalidates path loss results),
Clipping traffic maps (during Monte-Carlo simulations, mobiles are dropped within the computation zone).,
Clipping all the coverage areas.

In other words, path loss matrices are computed within the rectangle around the computation zone and coverages are
displayed within the computation zone itself.


The focus zone help you in :
Clipping all reports and statistics,
Clipping the graphic display with lighter colours around the polygon (and optionally when printing).


To sum up, computation zone is the area where A9155 works out path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte-Carlo and
power control simulations while focus zone is the area where you want the results. These features provide a practical
way of analysing sub-areas once the main area is fully calculated. Furthermore, they enable you to analyse simulation
Managing computations in A9155


136/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


results and coverage without border effect.

Like other polygonal objects (e.g. clutter or traffic), computation and focus zone are easy to manage in A9155. Hence,
this zones can created either by drawing, or importing from an external file. Several drawing tools are available, e.g.
resizing, adding points to the zones, removing a point. Moreover, these can be saved in external files. Information on
these zones are also very easy to reach (size and coordinates).

Note : You may perform propagation calculations without geographic data (free space propagation). Nevertheless, it is
necessary to define a computation zone.

V.2.2 COMPUTATION AND FOCUS ZONES : EFFECTS
Computation and focus zones helps you to reduce calculation area and calculation times. They are applied on several
items listed below.

Clutter classes or traffic statistics
Clutter classes, traffic, UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000 environment statistics refer to the focus zone if there is one. Only
areas inside the focus zone are taken into account.

Note : If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone.

Clutter classes
A9155 calculates the surface of each clutter class contained in the focus zone and its percentage.

Traffic
In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, statistics are available only in case of traffic raster maps (traffic maps based on
environments). A9155 works out surface of each traffic class (environment) contained in the focus zone. For each of
them, it provides surface of each clutter class covered by the traffic class and its percentage.

In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, A9155 evaluates the surface of each traffic class contained in the working zone and its
percentage.

UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 environments statistics
For each user profile described in the environment, A9155 calculates density of users and the number of users on a
clutter class. The density of users remains the same. On the other hand, the number of users is related to the focus
zone.


Path loss matrices
A9155 works out a path loss matrix for each active and filtered transmitter (or related repeater) which at least a
calculation radius intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Only contents of the matrices inside the
rectangle around the computation zone are calculated.


Coverage studies

Calculation and display
Coverage calculations are achieved by taking into account the computation zone. A9155 checks coverage conditions on
the areas inside the computation zone. Therefore only bins contained in the computation zone will be covered.

Tip information on coverage is related to the computation zone. The focus zone has no effect on tip contents.

Statistics on UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 studies
To be taken into account, the focus zone must be defined before accessing study statistics. It is not necessary to define it
before computing coverage. When accessing the Statistics tab (in the study Properties window), A9155 considers only
covered areas inside the focus zone. For each threshold value defined in the Display tab, it works out the covered
surface and its percentage. These data are evaluated for each environment class, when using maps based environments
as traffic cartography.

Note : If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone.

Study reports
To be taken into account, the focus zone must be defined before accessing reports. Reports are dynamically updated to
take into account the focus zone without requiring a coverage re-calculation. A9155 considers only covered surfaces
inside the focus zone. Therefore, in case of coverage by transmitter, only transmitters which coverage intersects the
focus zone can be considered in the report.
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 137/476



Note : If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone.


UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations

Calculation
A9155 drops mobiles on the traffic area contained in the computation zone. During power control, A9155 considers all
the active and filtered transmitters which the calculation radius intersects rectangle containing the computation zone.

Simulation reports
To be taken into account, the focus zone must be defined before checking simulation results (UMTS,
CDMA/CDMA2000). It is not necessary to define it before calculating simulation. When accessing the results of the
simulation, only sites, transmitters and mobiles located inside the focus zone are considered. The global output statistics
are based on these mobiles.

Notes :
- If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone. The computation zone is not used as filter. Therefore, all the
transmitters with a calculation area, even those located outside the computation zone, and all the created mobiles are
analysed in the simulation results.
- If the focus and computation zones are the same, only sites and transmitters located inside the focus zone are dealt
with in the simulation results.

Display
All the mobiles even those outside the focus zone are represented on the map. A9155 provides information for any of
them, in tips and by left clicking on them.


Other calculation algorithms
Other calculation algorithms for allocating primary scrambling codes or PN Offsets, neighbours, frequencies, BSIC or
working out the number of requested TRXs take into account all the active and filtered transmitters which the calculation
radius intersects rectangle containing the computation zone.


Printing
You may print either the whole selected area or only the area inside the focus zone when selecting the Erase outside of
the focus zone option [File : Page setup command].

Note : If the focus zone is not defined, A9155 will consider the computation zone instead of focus zone.

V.2.3 DRAWING A COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE
To draw a computation or a focus zone, proceed as follows :
Select the Draw command from the Tools : computation (resp. focus) zone menu in the menu bar,
Position the pointer (polygonal selection arrow) on the map,
Press the mouse left button (a first point is created),
Slide the pointer on the map and press the mouse left button to create another point,
Carry out the two last steps until you draw the polygonal area you want,
Double click to close off the polygonal area.

The selected computation zone is delimited by a red line. The focus zone is delimited by a green line and the background
is lighter.

Note : If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone.

V.2.4 CREATING A COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE FROM POLYGONS
You can create a computation (resp. focus) zone from any polygon contained in a vector object (created or imported). To
do so, proceed as follows :
Right click on the polygon you want to become the computation (resp. focus) zone to open the associated
context menu,
Select the Use as computation (resp. focus) zone command from the available scrolling menu.

Managing computations in A9155


138/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


V.2.5 IMPORTING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE FROM A FILE
As many other geo data objects, A9155 allows you to import the computation (resp. focus) zone from a file with either an
Autocad (.dxf), Arcview (.shp), MapInfo (.Mif), Agd or PlaNET format. The imported computation (resp. focus) zone
takes the place of an already existing one.


To import a computation (resp. focus) zone file, proceed as follows :
Either,
Select the Import... command from the Tools : computation (resp. focus) zone menu in the menu
bar,
Or,
Select the Import... command from the File menu in the menu bar,
Specify the directory where the file to be imported is located, the file name and the file type in the open
dialog box,
Press the OPEN button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Select the computation (resp. focus) zone option from the Import to scrolling menu,
If necessary, precise the coordinate system associated with the file being currently imported,
Click the Import button to achieve the procedure.


Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer application to A9155 to import the computation (resp.
focus) zone,
Any computation (resp. focus) zone must be a polygon,
The Tools: computation (resp. focus) zone menu is available only if the map of the project is currently displayed.
Under A9155, shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.

V.2.6 EXPORTING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE TO A FILE
In A9155, it is possible to export the computation (resp. focus) zone in order to make it available in other
applications/projects. This can be made in the Arcview (.shp), MapInfo (.Mif) or Agd formats.


To export the current computation (resp. focus) zone to a file, proceed as follows :
Select the Save as... command from the Tools : computation (resp. focus) zone menu in the menu bar,
Specify the path, the name and the format of the file to be exported,
Press the SAVE button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
If necessary, precise the coordinate system associated with the file being currently exported,
Click the Export button to achieve the procedure.


Notes :
The Tools: computation (resp. focus) zone menu is available only if the map of the project is currently displayed.
Under A9155, shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.

V.2.7 DELETING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE
To delete the computation (resp. focus) zone, proceed as follows :
Either,
Left click on the red (resp. green) line (limit of the computation/focus zone). The pointer becomes
position indicator ( ),
Right click on this limit to open the associated context menu,
Select the Delete zone command from the open scrolling menu,
Or,
Choose the computation (resp. focus) zone : Delete command from the Tools menu when the
workspace is displayed on top.

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 139/476


V.2.8 RESIZING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE
To resize the computation (resp. focus) zone, proceed as follows :
Left click on the red (resp. green) line (limit of the computation/focus zone). The pointer becomes position
indicator ( ),
Press and hold the mouse left button,
Drag the pointer until its target location,
Release the mouse button.

V.2.9 MOVING A POINT OF THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE
To move an existing point of the computation (resp. focus) zone, proceed as follows :
Left click on the point of the computation zone limit (red line) you want to move. The pointer becomes
position indicator ( ),
Press and hold the mouse left button,
Drag the pointer until the target location,
Release the mouse button.

V.2.10 ADDING A POINT IN THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE
To add a point to the computation (resp. focus) zone, proceed as follows :
Left click on the location on the computation zone limit (red line) you want to add a point. The pointer
becomes position indicator ( ),
Right click on this limit to open the associated context menu,
Select the Insert point command from the open scrolling menu.

V.2.11 REMOVING A POINT IN THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE
To remove a point from the computation (resp. focus) zone, proceed as follows :
Left click on the point from the computation zone limit (red line) you want to delete. The pointer becomes
position indicator ( ),
Right click on this limit to open the associated context menu,
Select the Delete point command from the open scrolling menu.

V.2.12 DISPLAYING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE SIZE
By using the tips button , A9155 allows the user to read several information about any object. Thus, it is possible to
display information (here : area size) on the current computation (resp. focus) zone.

To do so, proceed as follows :
Rest the pointer on the red (resp. green) line (limit of the computation/focus zone) except on the main
points making up the computation zone until the information appears.

Note : Information about surface will appear only if the tips button is on.

V.2.13 DISPLAYING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE COORDINATES
To display the coordinates of points composing the computation (resp. focus) zone, proceed as follows :
Either,
Left click on the red (resp. green) line (limit of the computation/focus zone). The pointer becomes
position indicator ( ),
Right click on this limit to open the associated context menu,
Select the Properties command from the open scrolling menu,
The coordinates (in the defined display system) of the point composing the computation (resp. focus)
zone are then displayed in a table window,
Or,
Managing computations in A9155


140/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Choose the computation (resp. focus) zone : Properties... command from the Tools menu when the
workspace is displayed on top.


Advice: To draw an appropriate computation/focus zone, you can copy a list of point coordinates from a spreadsheet and
paste it in the computation zone properties window. The format of the data contained in the table is the following :
X_coordinate TAB Y_coordinate on each line. Inside this interface, TAB and Return commands are available by using
simultaneously the Ctrl key and the appropriate key. Coordinates are displayed as defined previously.

V.3 PROPAGATION MODELS
V.3.1 PROPAGATION MODELS : OVERVIEW
By computing losses along transmitter-receiver paths, propagation models permit to predict the received signal level at a
given point and take into account :
the Radio data,
the Geo data like DTM and/or clutter classes, according to the model.


The mechanisms involved in electromagnetic propagation are :
Free space propagation,
Reflections,
Diffraction,
Scattering.


All these mechanisms can be more or less taken into account by propagation models depending on their complexity.
A9155 provides, by default, some model based on empirical approaches. For any type of project, you must find the best
suited one. Nevertheless, A9155 allows you to manage any project with several propagation models. These can be
assigned either globally or at the transmitter level. Each transmitter may have a main propagation model (high resolution
and short calculation radius) and a secondary one, with a lower resolution, and an extended calculation radius.

Some propagation models (Okumura-Hata and Cost-Hata) are based on a model type principle. On the base of the
formulae they offer, you can use these models to develop customized models by duplicating the existing base model
(Okumura-Hata and Cost-Hata).

The Okumura-Hata, Cost-Hata, Longley-Rice, Standard propagation model and WLL models available in A9155 are
based on formulae whose parameters can be set. Okumura-Hata and Cost-Hata in particular are based on one formula
for each clutter class.

The ITU 526-5 and ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) models are deterministic and therefore their parameters cannot be set.

Like other A9155 objects, propagation models can be easily managed.


Notes : When performing consecutive calculations with different thresholds :
If no calculation radius has been defined, A9155 recalculates the complete coverage for each prediction.
If a relatively large calculation radius has been defined, A9155 "stores in memory" the calculations for the defined
area and only calculates the difference between the two predictions.

V.3.2 PROPAGATION MODEL GENERAL INFORMATION
V.3.2.a SELECTING PROPAGATION MODELS
In A9155, propagation models can be chosen at different levels. For this reason, you must be very careful with the
propagation models priority order given to the different places where these models are defined.

A9155 is able to calculate two path loss matrices per transmitter, a first matrix over a near radius computed with a high
resolution and a propagation model, and a second matrix over a far radius computed with a low resolution and another
propagation model.

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 141/476


Note : in addition, it is possible to differentiate resolution of path loss matrices from plot resolution.


To define propagation model(s) simultaneously to all transmitters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Click on the Propagation tab from the open window,
In the main matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a calculation radius and a
resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix),
Optionally, in the extended matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a
calculation radius and a resolution taken into account to calculate the extended path loss matrix),
Click OK to validate.

To define propagation model(s) to one transmitter at a time, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Transmitters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either :
Right click on the transmitter to which you want to assign a specific propagation model,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Or
Double click on the transmitter to which you want to assign a specific propagation model,
Click on the Propagation tab from the open window,
In the main matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a calculation radius and a
resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix),
Optionally, in the extended matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a
calculation radius and a resolution taken into account to calculate the extended path loss matrix),
Click OK to validate.

You can also define these parameters in the Transmitters table.

Notes :
The calculation radius limits the scope of the calculations to the radius that has been defined. The calculation radius
prevents the system from calculating over too long distances (e.g. in an urban area). In the case of very large
environments, the calculation radius allows you to improve the calculation time. If no main calculation radius has been
defined (and no secondary propagation model), A9155 takes into account automatically the prediction minimum
threshold to define the calculation radius for each transmitter. Nevertheless, this could drive to long calculation times
Since it is a matrix (or 2 in case of extended calculation radius) which is computed for each transmitter, the
calculation radius represents the half side length of the potential matrix located around the considered transmitter.
A9155 computes an extended matrix only if the three parameters, propagation model, calculation radius and
resolution, are specified. Therefore, an extended matrix will not be worked out if its resolution is null.
A9155 computes at the same time the main and extended matrices of a transmitter with a global management.
Therefore, it will recalculate both matrices even if only one is invalid.

To select a default propagation model on predictions, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Click on the Propagation tab from the open window,
Choose from the scrolling list a propagation model,
Enter the grid resolution,
Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the current dialog window,
Click OK to validate.

Note : this selected model is taken into account only if the value of the main propagation model (transmitter property) is
(Default model).
V.3.2.b SETTING PROPAGATION MODEL PRIORITY
Even if it is possible to choose a propagation model in the Predictions folder, priority is given firstly to model(s) defined at
the transmitter level (in any case, for either coverage studies or point analysis predictions). In that next case, you can
choose a propagation model (and potentially a secondary one) for each transmitter. What is then displayed as
propagation model in the Transmitters folder properties is the summary of what has been chosen for each independent
transmitter.

Managing computations in A9155


142/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


For example, if you chose the same main propagation model X for each single transmitter, X will be displayed as main
propagation model in the Transmitters folder properties. If you assign a main propagation model X to some transmitters
and Y to others, no main propagation model will be displayed in the Transmitters folder properties.

Because of the priority given to the transmitters in term of propagation models, the one displayed in the Predictions folder
will be kept as reference for the complete project if the (default model) value has been selected for all the transmitters in
the network.
V.3.2.c DISPLAYING GENERAL INFORMATION ON PROPAGATION MODEL
Under A9155, the user interface is homogeneous for the different available propagation models. Indeed, for all of them, a
common General tab window is available. In this tab, you may enter the model name, add some descriptions and check
the model signature. The model signature is used for validity purpose. A unique model signature is assigned to each
propagation model and its settings. When modifying model parameters, the associated model signature is changed. This
enables A9155 to detect potential path loss matrix invalidity. In the same way, two identical propagation models in
different projects do not have the same model signature.

Notes : Model signature corresponds to the MODEL_ID field you can find in .par files when externalising path loss
matrices. Nevertheless, the real name of the used propagation model is also explicitly written in .par files
(TX_MODEL_NAME field).
V.3.2.d CHOOSING THE APPROPRIATE PROPAGATION MODEL
The different propagation models are more or less suited depending on the type of project, radio and geographic data in
use in the .atl current project. A summarized description is given in the following table.

Model Frequency
band
Take into account Required settings Recommended
use

Longley-Rice
(theoretical)
~ 40 MHz - Terrain profile
- Reflection
- Calibration - Flat areas
- Very low frequencies

ITU 370-7 Vienna
93
100 - 400 MHz - Terrain profile - Percentage time while
real field > calculated field
- Long distances
(d>10km)
- Low frequencies

ITU 526-5
(theoretical)
30 - 10.000 MHz - Terrain profile
- Diffraction (3 knife-
edge Deygout method)
Fixed receivers

WLL 30 - 10.000 MHz - Terrain profile
- Deterministic clutter
- Diffraction (3 knife-
edge Deygout method)
- Free space loss
- Receiver height and
clearance per clutter
Fixed receivers
> Microwave links

Okumura-Hata 150 - 1.000 MHz - Terrain profile
- Statistical clutter (at
the receiver)
- 1 formula per clutter
- Reflection
- With diffraction or not
- Urban loss + correction
a(Hr)
1 < d < 20 km
> GSM 900
> CDMA/CDMA2000

Cost-Hata 1.500 - 2.000
MHz
- Terrain profile
- Statistical clutter (at
the receiver)
- 1 formula per clutter
- Reflection
- With diffraction or not
- Urban loss + correction
a(Hr)
1 < d < 20 km
> GSM 1800
> UMTS

Standard
Propagation
Model
150 - 2.000 MHz - Terrain profile
- Statistical clutter
- Effective antenna
height
- With diffraction weight
- K1, ..., K6 (single
formula)
- LOS or NLOS
differentiation
- Loss per clutter with
clutter weighting
- Receiver clearance
1 < d < 20 km
> GSM 900
> GSM 1800
> UMTS
> CDMA/CDMA2000
(Automatic calibration
available)
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 143/476


V.3.2.e MANAGING PROPAGATION MODEL FOLDERS
In the Modules tab, propagation models are organized in folders. That way, these items are easy to manage like other
objects. Hence it is easily possible to delete, duplicate, copy and rename each of them.

To access the different managing properties of any propagation model, right click on the model you want to manage to
open the related context menu. Then choose among the several available commands : delete, duplicate, copy, rename.

All newly created propagation models will then be available in the propagation model selection boxes (Prediction or
Transmitter properties).

The copy function can be useful to copy and paste a specifically tuned model in an atl project to another one (considering
the name does not already exist).

V.3.3 PROPAGATION MODELS AVAILABLE IN A9155
V.3.3.a WORKING WITH LONGLEY-RICE MODEL
The Longley-Rice is a theoretical model particularly suitable for predictions in the 40 MHz band in flat areas. This model
uses the terrain profile to calculate propagation. However, the Longley-Rice model parameters can be set in the form of a
calibration involving the distance and an additional loss value.

To manage the Longley-Rice model, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the Longley-Rice subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Longley-Rice subfolder,
Click on the Parameters tab,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Define the loss parameters to be added to the model (in constant terrain, 0 values means a signal linear
decreasing as function of distance). dkm is the distance (in kilometres) from the transmitter,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.

V.3.3.b WORKING WITH ITU 526-5 MODEL
The ITU 526-5 model is particularly suitable for predictions in the 30-10000 MHz band at fixed receivers. It uses the
terrain profile and the diffraction mechanism (3 knife-edge Deygout method) to calculate path loss.

The ITU 526-5 recommendation considers that :
If there are no obstacles, propagation will take place in free space ;
If there is an obstacle, attenuation will be taken into account.

If there is an obstacle, an attenuation will be caused on contact with the relief with diffraction on the main peak
(represented by a red line in the Profile tab of the point analysis window). The main peak taken into account is the one
that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. Any attenuation that occurs is then calculated between the station and
the main peak and between the main peak and the receiver. The result may then show up to two new attenuation peaks
in addition to the main peak. The various peaks are identified by red lines. The attenuation generated by all the peaks is
displayed above the main peak.

To access the ITU 526-5 model properties box, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the ITU526 subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the ITU526 subfolder,
Click on the Parameters tab,
Managing computations in A9155


144/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
A dialog window opens in which you may choose or not to apply an empirical tuneable corrective formula
on the Deygout method,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.

V.3.3.c WORKING WITH ITU 370-7 MODEL (VIENNA 93)
The ITU 370-7 model follows the recommendations of the Vienna 1993 international conference on telecommunications
network coordination. This model is particularly suitable for predictions in the 100-400 MHz band over long distances
(d>10 km), such as in Broadcast studies. It uses the terrain profile to calculate propagation.

Vienna 93 model parameter setting is limited to defining the percentage of time during which the real field is higher than
the signal level calculated by the model (1%, 10% or 50% of the time). The 50% value is usually used for coverage
predictions, and 1% is usually used for interference studies.

To access the ITU 370-7 model properties box, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the ITU370 subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the ITU370 subfolder,
Click on the Parameters tab,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Choose the appropriate time percentage for the current study,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.


Notes : when using this model, take care not to define reliability level different from 50%, or will be considered twice.

V.3.3.d WORKING WITH WLL (WIRELESS LOCAL LOOP) MODEL
The WLL model is specially intended for "Radio Local Loop" applications in the 30-10000 MHz band. It is derived from
the ITU 526-5 model from which it takes the prediction algorithms while applying specific changes :

The possibility of setting loss parameters dealing with free space propagation and loss within the line of sight area
only or not,

If the option Line of sight only is not selected, A9155 computes the path loss on each calculation bin, using formula
defined in the dialog box.

If the option Line of sight only is used, A9155 checks for each calculation bin if the receiver is in the transmitter line of
sight. Receiver is in the transmitter line of sight if 100% of the Fresnel half ellipsoid is cleared (no obstacle along the
transmitter-receiver profile).
If the receiver is in the transmitter line of sight, A9155 computes the path loss on each calculation bin, using formula
defined in the dialog.
When the receiver is not in the transmitter line of sight, A9155 considers that the path loss tends towards infinite.

The use of an altimeter clutter whose heights for different items (trees, buildings, etc.) will be added to those for
DTM,

The possibility of defining a height and a receiver clearance associated with each clutter class; (e.g.. receiver on a
building, etc.). These heights will be added to the heights of the clutter,

Adding notions of transmitter clearance.

The WLL model uses the terrain profile but also takes into account the height of clutter components. These components
(houses, trees, buildings, etc.) will be added to the DTM altitudes to predict propagation and path loss.
You can define a clearance space around transmitters and receivers (20 metres by default).This feature permits in
particular to simulate holes in clutter areas.

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 145/476


Example : the clearance can be used to simulate streets in an area of buildings where the clutter class file used does not
show street detail.

To access the WLL model properties box, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the WLL subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the WLL subfolder,
Click on the Parameters tab,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Set the free space path loss prediction parameters,
Define an overall clearance for all the transmitters,
Define a default clearance for each receiver,
Define a height and clearance specific to the receiver for each clutter class. If, for a given class, you have
not defined any value, the default height will be used. This land use part will be available only if the
document contains a Land use folder,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.

V.3.3.e WORKING WITH OKUMURA-HATA MODEL
V.3.3.e.i Working with Okumura-Hata model : Overview
The Okumura-Hata is a model particularly suitable for predictions in the 150-1000 MHz band over long distances (1 < d <
20km) and is very adapted to GSM 900, IS95 and 1xRTT technologies. This model uses the terrain profile, diffraction
and reflection mechanisms in order to calculate propagation.

Hata models are well adapted to urban environment. Nevertheless, in order to make them available in a wide range of
environments, It is possible to define several corrective formulas, and to associate each one to each clutter class
available in the project. Furthermore, it is also possible to define a default formula used when no land use data is
available.

V.3.3.e.ii Considering losses due to diffraction (Okumura-Hata)
Okumura-Hata is able to take into account or not diffraction mechanisms by using a 1-knife edge Deygout method.

To compute losses due to diffraction in the total path loss, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the Okumura-Hata subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Okumura-Hata subfolder,
Click on the Configuration tab,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Choose from the dedicated scrolling menu to take into account (1) or not (0) losses due to diffraction,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.

V.3.3.e.iii Defining an environment default formula (Okumura-Hata)
A9155 takes into account that even if you do not have a clutter file or clutter data missing, it is possible to use the
Okumura-Hata model. To achieve this, you may define a default type formula to be assigned to the undefined zones.

To select the environment default formula, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Managing computations in A9155


146/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Right click on the Okumura-Hata subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Okumura-Hata subfolder,
Click on the Configuration tab,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Choose from the dedicated scrolling menu one of the available formulas (tuneable by accessing the
Formulas dialog box) to assign to undefined zones,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.

V.3.3.e.iv Assigning environment formulas to clutter types (Okumura-Hata)
When environment formulae and clutter data are available for the current project, you need to assign to each detected
clutter class a type of formula, in order to make this model valid for a wide range of media.

To configure clutter types with available formulae, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the Okumura-Hata subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Okumura-Hata subfolder,
Click on the Configuration tab,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Select in the scrolling lists cells from the Formula column the clutter-formula associations,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.


Comment : Without this association, the Okumura-Hata model, which uses the clutter classes, will be unable to correctly
perform prediction calculations. The default formula will be used on all clutter classes.

V.3.3.e.v Creating/Modifying environment formulas (Okumura-Hata)
To create/modify an environment formula :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the Okumura-Hata subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Okumura-Hata subfolder,
Click on the Configuration tab,
Click on the button to open the associated dialog box,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Adjust formula types and coefficients depending on the considered environment type,
Validate by clicking on OK.

V.3.3.f WORKING WITH COST-HATA MODEL
V.3.3.f.i Working with Cost-Hata model : Overview
The Cost-Hata is a model particularly suitable for predictions in the 1500-2000 MHz band over long distances (1 < d <
20km) and is very adapted to DCS 1800 and UMTS technologies. This model uses the terrain profile, diffraction and
reflection mechanisms in order to calculate propagation.

Hata models are well adapted to urban environment. Nevertheless, in order to make them available in a wide range of
environments, It is possible to define several corrective formulas, and to associate each one to each clutter class
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 147/476


available in the open project. Furthermore, it is also possible to define a default formula used when no land use data will
be available.

V.3.3.f.ii Considering losses due to diffraction (Cost-Hata)
Cost-Hata is able to take into account or not diffraction mechanisms by using a 1-knife edge Deygout method.

To compute losses due to diffraction in the total path loss, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the Cost-Hata subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Cost-Hata subfolder,
Click on the Configuration tab,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Choose from the dedicated scrolling menu to take into account (1) or not (0) losses due to diffraction,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.

V.3.3.f.iii Defining an environment default formula (Cost-Hata)
A9155 takes into account that even if you do not have a clutter file or clutter data missing, it is possible to use the Cost-
Hata model. To achieve this, you may define a default type formula to be assigned to the undefined zones.

To select the environment default formula, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the Cost-Hata subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Cost-Hata subfolder,
Click on the Configuration tab,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Choose from the dedicated scrolling menu one of the available formulas (tuneable by accessing the
Formulas dialog box) to assign to undefined zones,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.

V.3.3.f.iv Assigning environment formulas to clutter types (Cost-Hata)
When environment formulae and clutter data are available for the current project, you need to assign to each detected
clutter class a type of formula, in order to make this model valid for a wide range of media.

To configure clutter types with available formulae, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the Cost-Hata subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Cost-Hata subfolder,
Click on the Configuration tab,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Select in the scrolling lists cells from the Formula column the clutter-formula associations,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.


Comment : Without this association, the Cost-Hata model, which use the clutter classes, will be unable to correctly
perform prediction calculations. The default formula will be used on all clutter classes.
Managing computations in A9155


148/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



V.3.3.f.v Creating/Modifying environment formulas (Cost-Hata)
To create/modify an environment formula :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the Cost-Hata subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Cost-Hata subfolder,
Click on the Configuration tab,
Click on the button to open the associated dialog box,
Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window,
Adjust formula types and coefficients depending on the considered environment type,
Validate by clicking on OK.

V.3.3.g WORKING WITH STANDARD PROPAGATION MODEL
V.3.3.g.i Working with Standard Propagation model : Overview
The Standard Propagation Model is a model (deduced from the Hata formulae) particularly suitable for predictions in the
150-2000 MHz band over long distances (1 < d < 20km) and is very adapted to GSM 900/1800, UMTS and
CDMA/CDMA2000 technologies. This model uses the terrain profile, diffraction mechanisms (calculated in several ways)
and takes into account clutter classes and effective antenna heights in order to calculate path loss. An automatic
calibration tool is available.

The model may be used for any technology. It is based on the following formula :

( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
|
|
.
|

\
|
+ +
+ + + +
=
LOS hill clutter Rx
Tx
Tx R
K clutter f K H d K
n Diffractio K H K d K K
P P
eff
eff
, 5
4 3 2 1
log log
log log


with :

PR: received power (dBm).
PTx: transmitted power (EIRP) (dBm)
K1: constant offset (dB).
K2 : multiplying factor for log(d).
d : distance between the receiver and the transmitter (m).
K3 : multiplying factor for log(HTxeff).
eff
Tx
H : effective height of the transmitter antenna (m).
K4 : multiplying factor for diffraction calculation. K4 has to be a positive number.
Diffraction loss : loss due to diffraction over an obstructed path (dB).
K5: multiplying factor for log(HTxeff)log(d).
K6: multiplying factor for
Rxeff
H .
eff
Rx
H : effective mobile antenna height (m).
Kclutter: multiplying factor for f(clutter).
f(clutter): average of weighted losses due to clutter.
LOS hill
K
,
: corrective factor for hilly regions (=0 in case of NLOS)

All of these parameters are user-definable in the Standard Propagation Model Properties window consisting in 4 tabs
(General, Parameters, Clutter, Calibration).

See Typical values for Standard Propagation Model formula parameters.

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 149/476


V.3.3.g.ii Accessing Standard Propagation Model properties
Users cannot access the internal formula of the Standard Propagation Model. Nevertheless, you may set all its
parameters in the Parameters and Clutter tab windows from the SPM properties dialog box.

To access the Standard Propagation Model properties box, proceed as follows :
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the SPM subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the SPM subfolder,
A dialog window opens,
Select the tab according the way you want to adjust model parameters.

See Typical values for Standard Propagation Model formula parameters.
V.3.3.g.iii Adjusting Standard Propagation Model parameters
You may adjust the parameters contained in the SPM base formula by using both the General and the Clutter tab
windows from the SPM properties box. Excepting for the loss and clearance per clutter class (defined in the Clutter tab
window), all parameters (including the Diffraction terms) are user-definable in the Parameters tab window.

Moreover, in 5 cases, user have to select his choice in scrolling menus :
Effective antenna height determination method,
Diffraction calculation method (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction, Millington).
The Profiles cell : if you select the radial option, A9155 establishes a profile between each transmitter and each point
located on its calculation perimeter (user-defined by the calculation radius) and then, uses the nearest profile to make
a prediction on a point inside the calculation perimeter (radial optimisation). When choosing the systematic option,
A9155 systematically determines a profile between each transmitter and any points in its calculation area. To avoid
longer calculation times, it is recommended to choose the radial option.
Corrective term for hilly regions,
The Grid calculation method. You can perform the calculations either at the centre (centred option) or in the bottom
left corner (bottom left option) of each grid.

For all the other parameters, user may enter directly the appropriate values directly in the associated boxes.

See typical values for Standard Propagation Model formula parameters.
V.3.3.g.iv SPM General tab window


When open, use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.
Managing computations in A9155


150/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


V.3.3.g.v SPM Parameters tab window


When open, use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.

This tab manage parameters from the Standard Propagation model base formula.


In the Near transmitter and Far from transmitter parts, specify the maximum distance, max distance, and four (K1,K2) sets
(two sets per part).
Max distance is a maximum distance from transmitter. When d (distance between receiver and transmitter) is inferior to
this distance, the receiver is considered near transmitter. On the other hand, if d is greater than the maximum distance,
the receiver is considered far from transmitter.
Two (K1,K2) sets, (K1,K2)los and (K1,K2)nlos, are defined in each part. They enable to differentiate the case where the
receiver is in the transmitter line of sight path (los index) or is not (nlos index).
Therefore, the (K1,K2) sets taken into account in prediction calculations will depend on d and visibility.


In the Effective antenna height part, define the
eff
Tx
H calculation method, the minimum and maximum distances (distance
min and distance max) and K3 factor.
eff
Tx
H may be calculated with six different methods.

Note : distance min and distance max are set to 3000 and 15000 m according to ITU recommendations and to 0 and
15000 m according Okumura recommendations.
These values are only used in two methods of effective antenna height calculation and have different meanings
according to the method.


In the Diffraction part, specify which method you want to use for calculating the Diffraction term and K4 factor.

These diffraction calculation methods are based on the General method for one or more obstacles described in ITU 526-
5 recommendations. The calculations take earth curvature into account via the effective Earth radius concept.

Four different methods (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction and Millington) are available.


In the Other parameters part, specify the values for K5, K6, Kclutter and hilly terrain corrective factor.. Enter 1 or 0 to
respectively take it into account or not. In the calculation profile, if you select the radial option, A9155 establishes a
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 151/476


profile between each transmitter and each point located on its calculation perimeter (user-defined by the calculation
radius) and then, uses the nearest profile to make a prediction on a point inside the calculation perimeter (radial
optimisation). On the other hand, when choosing the systematic option, A9155 systematically determines a profile
between each transmitter and any points in its calculation area.

Comment: To avoid longer calculation times, choose the radial option.


Finally, you can perform the calculations at the centre (centred option) or in the bottom left corner (bottom left option) of
each grid.

To select a method (in Effective antenna height and Diffraction parts)
Right click on the method line and then, on the arrow on the extreme right side.
Choose a method in the list.

Note : Default values have been assigned to multiplying factors. The default values correspond to the quasi-open
Okumura-Hata formula valid for a 935 MHz frequency. (See Sample values for SPM formula parameters).

V.3.3.g.v.i Transmitter effective antenna height SPM
eff
Tx
H may be calculated with five different methods.

Height above ground: transmitter antenna height above the ground (
Tx Tx
H H
eff
= in m).
Tx Tx
H H
eff
=

Height above average profile: The transmitter antenna height is determined relative to an average ground height
calculated along the profile between a transmitter and a receiver. The profile length depends on distance min and
distance max values and is limited by the transmitter and receiver locations. Distance min and Distance max are
minimum and maximum distances from the transmitter respectively.
( )
0 0
H H H H
Tx Tx Txeff
+ =
where,
Tx
H
0
is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at transmitter (m).
0
H is the average ground height above sea level along the profile (m).

Note : If the profile is not located between the transmitter and the receiver, HTxeff equals HTx.


Slope at receiver between 0 and distance min: the transmitter antenna height is calculated using the ground slope at
receiver.

( ) ( ) d K H H H H H
Rx Rx Tx Tx Txeff
+ + + =
0 0

where,
Rx
H is the receiver antenna height above the ground (m).
Rx
H
0
is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at receiver (m).

K is the ground slope calculated over a user-defined distance (Distance min). In this case, Distance min is a distance
from receiver.

Notes:
1. If m H
Txeff
20 < then, A9155 uses 20m in calculations.
2. If m H
Txeff
200 > then, A9155 takes 200m.


Managing computations in A9155


152/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Spot Ht :

If
Rx Tx
H H
0 0
> then,
( )
Rx Tx Tx Txeff
H H H H
0 0
+ =
If
Rx Tx
H H
0 0
then,
Tx Txeff
H H =

Abs Spot Ht :
Rx Tx Tx Txeff
H H H H
0 0
+ =

Note : distance min and distance max are set to 3000 and 15000 m according to ITU recommendations and to 0 and
15000 m according Okumura recommendations.

These values are only used in the two last methods and have different meanings according to the method.


Enhanced slope at receiver :



Let x-axis and y-axis respectively represent positions and heights. We assume that x-axis is oriented from transmitter
(origin) to receiver.

This calculation is achieved in several steps:

1
st
step: A9155 determines line of sight between transmitter and receiver.

The LOS line equation is:

( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) i s
d
H H H H
H H i Los
Rx Rx Tx Tx
Tx Tx
Re
0 0
0
+ +
+ =

where,

Tx
H
0
is the ground height above sea level at transmitter (m).

Tx
H is the transmitter antenna height above the ground (m).

Rx
H
0
is the ground height above sea level at receiver (m).

Rx
H is the receiver antenna height above the ground (m).
d is the distance between transmitter and receiver (m).
i is the point index.
Res is the profile resolution (distance between two points).

2
nd
step: A9155 extracts the transmitter-receiver terrain profile.

3
rd
step: Hills and mountains are already taken into account in diffraction calculations. Therefore, in order
for them not to unfavourably influence the regression line calculation, A9155 filters the terrain profile.

A9155 calculates two filtered terrain profiles; one established from the transmitter and another from the receiver. It
determines filtered height of every profile point. Profile points are evenly spaced on the basis of profile resolution. To
determine filtered terrain height at a point, A9155 evaluates ground slope between two points and compares it with a
threshold set to 0.05; where three cases are possible.
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 153/476



Some notations defined hereafter are used in next part.
filt
H is the filtered height.
orig
H is the corrected original height. Original terrain height is determined from extracted ground profile and corrected by
considering Earth curvature.

- Filter starting from transmitter
Let us assume that ( ) ( ) Tx H Tx H
orig Tx filt
=

For each point, we have three different cases:
1
st
case: If ( ) ( ) 1 > i H i H
orig orig
and
( ) ( )
05 . 0
Re
1

s
i H i H
orig orig
,
Then, ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 1 1 + =

i H i H i H i H
orig orig Tx filt Tx filt


2
nd
case: If ( ) ( ) 1 > i H i H
orig orig
and
( ) ( )
05 . 0
Re
1
>

s
i H i H
orig orig

Then, ( ) ( ) 1 =

i H i H
Tx filt Tx filt


3
rd
case: If ( ) ( ) 1 i H i H
orig orig

Then, ( ) ( ) 1 =

i H i H
Tx filt Tx filt

If ( ) ( ) i H i H
orig filt
> additionally
Then, ( ) ( ) i H i H
orig Tx filt
=

- Filter starting from receiver
Let us assume that ( ) ( ) Rx H Rx H
orig filt
=

For each point, we have three different cases:
1
st
case: If ( ) ( ) 1 + > i H i H
orig orig
and
( ) ( )
05 . 0
Re
1

+
s
i H i H
orig orig
,
Then, ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 1 1 + + + =

i H i H i H i H
orig orig Rx filt Rx filt

2
nd
case: If ( ) ( ) 1 + > i H i H
orig orig
and
( ) ( )
05 . 0
Re
1
>

s
i H i H
orig orig

Then, ( ) ( ) 1 + =

i H i H
Rx filt Rx filt

3
rd
case: If ( ) ( ) 1 + i H i H
orig orig

Then, ( ) ( ) 1 + =

i H i H
Rx filt Rx filt

If ( ) ( ) i H i H
orig filt
> additionally
Then, ( ) ( ) i H i H
orig Rx filt
=

Then, for every point of profile, A9155 compares the two filtered heights and chooses the higher one.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) i
H
i
H
i
H Rx filt Tx filt filt
= , max ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) i H i H i H
Rx filt Tx filt filt
= , max

4
th
step: A9155 determines the influence area, R. It corresponds to the distance from receiver at which the
original terrain profile plus 30 metres intersects the LOS line for the first time (when beginning from
transmitter).

The influence area must satisfy additional conditions:
m R 3000 ,
d R 01 . 0 ,
R must contain at least three bins.

Notes:
1. When several influence areas are possible, A9155 chooses the highest one.
2. If d < 3000m, R = d.

5
th
step: A9155 performs a linear regression on the filtered profile within R in order to determine a regression line.

Managing computations in A9155


154/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


The regression line equation is:

b ax y + =

( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( )

=
i
m
i
m filt m
d i d
H i H d i d
a
2
and
m m
ad H b =

where,
( )

=
i
filt m
i H
n
H
1

i is the point index. Only points within R are taken into account.
2
R
d d
m
=
d(i) is the distance between i and the transmitter (m).

Then, A9155 extends the regression line to the transmitter location. Therefore, its equation is:

( ) ( ) b s i a i regr + = Re

6
th
step: Then, A9155 calculates effective transmitter antenna height,
Txeff
H (m).

a
b
H H
H
Tx Tx
Txeff
2
0
1+
+
=

If HTxeff is lower than 20m, A9155 recalculates it with a new influence area, which begins at transmitter.

Notes:
1. In case m H
Txeff
1000 > , 1000m will be used in calculations.
2. If
Txeff
H is still lower than 20m, an additional correction is taken into account (7
th
step).

7
th
step: If
Txeff
H is still lower than 20m (even negative), A9155 evaluates path loss using m H
Txeff
20 = and applies a
correction factor.

Therefore, if m H
Txeff
20 < ,
( )
K
f d m
H L L lowant Txeff el el
+ = = , , 20
mod mod

where,
( )
( ) ( )
|
.
|

\
|
+ |
.
|

\
|
+

=
1000
93 . 6
1000
63 . 9
20 1 20
20 3 . 0
10
5
d d
H
H
d
K
Txeff
Txeff lowant

f is the frequency (MHz).

V.3.3.g.v.ii Diffraction computation in SPM
This feature is available in the General tab window from the SPM properties box.

In the Diffraction part, user has to define calculations method for the Diffraction term and K4 factor. These diffraction
calculation methods are based on the General method for one or more obstacles described in ITU 526-5
recommendations. The calculations take earth curvature into account via the effective Earth radius concept.

Four different methods (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction and Millington) are available.


In order to define precisely the diffraction profile, a clearance per clutter class must be defined. To do so, enter the
appropriate values in the Clutter tab window from the SPM properties box in cells just left to the clutter classes ones.

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 155/476


V.3.3.g.v.iii Deygout
The Deygout construction, limited to a maximum of three edges, is applied to the entire profile from transmitter to
receiver.
This method is used to evaluate path loss induced by multiple knife-edges. Deygout method is based on a hierarchical
knife-edge sorting, so as to distinguish the main edges, which induce the strongest losses, and secondary edges, which
have a lower effect. The edge hierarchy depends on the obstruction parameter () value.

1 obstacle
A straight line between transmitter and receiver is drawn and the heights of obstacles above the Tx-Rx axis, hi, are
calculated. The obstruction positions, di, are also recorded. From these data, i are evaluated. The point with the highest
value is termed the principal edge, p, and the corresponding loss is J(p).

Point p
Rx
Tx
h
p
Sea level

Deygout construction 1 obstacle
Therefore, we have ( )
p
J loss n Diffractio =

3 obstacles
Then, the main edge (point p) is considered as a secondary transmitter or receiver. Therefore, the profile is divided in two
parts: one half profile, between the transmitter and the knife-edge section, another half, constituted by the knife-edge-
receiver section.
The same procedure is repeated on each half profile to determine the edge with the higher . The two obstacles found,
(points t and r), are called secondary edges.
Losses induced by the secondary edges, J(t) and J(r), are then calculated.
Once the edge hierarchy is determined, the total loss is evaluated by adding all the intermediary losses obtained.

Point t
Point r
Point p
Rx
Tx
hp
hr
ht
Sea level

Deygout construction 3 obstacles
Therefore,

If 0 >
p
, we have ( ) ( ) ( )
r t p
J J J loss n Diffractio + + =
Else ( )
p
J loss n Diffractio =

Note : In case of ITU 526-5 and WLL propagation models, Diffraction loss term is determined
as follows:
Managing computations in A9155


156/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


If 78 . 0 >
p
, we have ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
r t p
J J t J loss n Diffractio + + =
Where,
( )
|
|
.
|

\
|
= 1 ,
6
min
p
J
t
Else 0 = loss n Diffractio

Deygout with correction
The Deygout with correction (ITU 526-5) method is based on the Deygout construction (3 obstacles) plus an empirical
correction, C.

Therefore,
If 0 >

p
, we have ( ) ( ) ( )
r t p
J J J loss n Diffractio + + = +C
Else ( ) C J loss n Diffractio
p
+ =

Note : In case of ITU 526-5 propagation model, Diffraction loss term is determined as follows:
If 78 . 0 >
p
, we have ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) C J J t J loss n Diffractio
r t P
+ + + =


Where,
( )
|
|
.
|

\
|
= 1 ,
6
min
p
J
t
d C 04 . 0 0 . 8 + = (d: distance stated in Km between the transmitter and the receiver).
Else 0 = loss n Diffractio

V.3.3.g.v.iv Epstein-Peterson
The Epstein-Peterson construction is limited to a maximum of three edges. First of all, the Deygout construction is
applied to determine the three main edges over the whole profile as described above. Then, the main edge height, hp, is
recalculated; according to the Epstein-Peterson construction, hp is the height above a straight line connecting t and r
points. The main edge position dp is recorded and hence, from these data, p and J(p) are evaluated.

Point t
Point r
Point p
Rx
Tx
hp
hr
ht
Sea level

Epstein-Peterson construction

Therefore, we have ( ) ( ) ( )
r t p
J J J loss n Diffractio + + =

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 157/476


V.3.3.g.v.v Millington
The Millington construction, limited to a single edge, is applied over the whole profile. Two horizon lines are drawn at the
transmitter and at the receiver. A straight line between the transmitter and the receiver is defined and the height of the
intersection point between the two horizon lines above the straight line , hh, is calculated. The position dh is recorded and
then, from these values, h and J(h) are evaluated using the same previous formulas.

Point h
Rx
Tx
hh
Sea level

Millington construction

Therefore, we have ( )
h
J loss n Diffractio =

Note : If you select no diffraction, the Diffraction term equals zero and is not taken into account in calculations.
V.3.3.g.v.vi Receiver effective antenna height
( )
Tx Rx Rx Rxeff
H H H H
0 0
+ =
where,
Rx
H is the receiver antenna height above the ground (m).
Rx
H
0
is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at the receiver (m).
Tx
H
0
is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at the transmitter (m).

Note : The calculation of effective antenna heights (
Rxeff
H and
Txeff
H ) is based on extracted DTM profiles. They are not
properly performed if you have not imported heights (DTM file) beforehand.

V.3.3.g.v.vii Sample values for SPM formula parameters
Here are some orders of magnitudes for the different parameters composing the Standard Propagation Model formula

Min Typical Max
K1 Variable Variable Variable
K2 20 44.9 70
K3 -20 5.83 20
K4 0 0.5 0.8
K5 -10 -6.55 0
K6 -1 0 0

Concerning the parameter K1, this really depends on the frequency, and so, on the technology type. Here are some
examples :

Project type Frequency (MHz) K1
GSM 900 935 12.5
GSM 1800 1805 22
GSM 1900 1930 23
UMTS 2110 23.8
1xRTT 900 12

Since K1 is a constant, its value is strongly dependant on the values given to losses per clutter class (if needed)

Managing computations in A9155


158/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


V.3.3.g.v.viii Correction for hilly regions
An optional corrective term
LOS hill
K
,
is proposed in the SPM Parameters tab to correct path loss for hilly regions when
transmitter and receiver are in LOS.
LOS hill
K
,
is determined in three steps. Influence area, R, and regression line are
supposed available.

1
st
step: For every profile point within influence area, A9155 calculates height deviation between the original terrain
profile (with Earth curvature correction) and regression line. Then, it sorts points according to the deviation and draws
two lines (parallel to the regression line), one which is exceeded by 10% of the profile points and the other one by 90%.

2
nd
step: A9155 evaluates the terrain roughness, h; it is the distance between the two lines.

3
rd
step: A9155 calculates
K LOS hill ,
.

We have
K K K hf h LOS hill
+ =
,


If m h 20 0 < , 0 =
Kh

Else ( ) ( ) 746 . 6 log 29 . 15 log 73 . 7
2
+ = h h
Kh


If m h 10 0 < , ( ) ( )
i
regr
H H K Rx Rx Rx hf
+ =
0
1924 . 0 2
Else ( ) ( ) ( )
( )
h
i
regr
H H
h h
K
Rx Rx Rx
hf

+
+ =
0 2
21 . 11 log 75 . 14 log 616 . 1 2

iRx is the point index at receiver.

V.3.3.g.vi SPM Clutter tab window
V.3.3.g.vi.i SPM Clutter tab window


When open, use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 159/476


In this tab, you may define the average of weighted losses due to clutter, f(clutter) in the case of statistical clutter class
maps only.

( )

=
=
n
i
i i
w L clutter f
1

where

L: loss due to clutter defined in the Clutter tab by the user (in dB).
w: weight determined through the weighting function.
n: number of points taken into account over the profile. Points are evenly spaced depending on the profile
resolution.

The losses due to clutter are evaluated over a maximum distance from receiver, Max distance. Each clutter class is
assigned specific loss, Loss per clutter class. The losses are calculated from ground and clutter heights. The weighting
function enables to give a weight to each point.

Uniform weighting function:
n
w
i
1
=
Logarithmic weighting function:

=
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
|
.
|

\
|
+
=
n
j
j
i
i
D
d
D
d
w
1
1 log
1 log

Exponential weighting function:

=
n
j
D
d
D
d
i
j
i
e
e
w
1
1
1

Triangular weighting function:

=
=
n
j
j
i
i
d
d
w
1

'
i i
d D d = where di is the distance between the receiver and the i point.


To select the weighting function
Right click on the weighting function line and then, on the arrow.
Choose a function type in the list.

In the case of semi-deterministic clutter class maps only, you may define a clearance (m) around the receiver for each
clutter class .

In the case of deterministic clutter class maps only, all information related to the evaluation of losses per clutter class are
given directly by the data contained in the maps Clearance and heights can be determined, and there is no need to
define them again in this dialog.

V.3.3.g.vi.ii Typical values or losses per clutter class (SPM)

Losses per clutter class
Dense urban from 4 to 5
Woodland from 2 to 3
Urban 0
Suburban from -5 to -3
Industrial from -5 to -3
Open in urban from -6 to -4
Open from -12 to -10
Water from -14 to -12

These values have to be entered only when considering statistical clutter class maps only.

Note : the Standard Propagation Model is deduced from the Hata formulae, valid in the case of a urban environment.
The values above are consistent since 0 dB is indicated from a urban clutter class, positive values for more dense clutter
classes, and negative values for less dense clutter classes.

Managing computations in A9155


160/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


V.3.3.g.vii SPM Calibration tab window
V.3.3.g.vii.i SPM Calibration tab window


When open, use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.

In this tab, you may statistically analyse difference between predictions and CW measurements (Click on the Statistics....
button) and perform an automatic model calibration (Click on the Calibrate... button) from CW measurement survey.

Choose in the list the CW measurement paths you want to use. In the Filter part, you may select the CW measurement
points to be taken into account in statistics and for the model calibration by specifying distance and CW measurement
intervals, los (CW measurement points in the transmitter line of sight) and nlos (CW measurement points which are not in
the transmitter line of sight) options.

Note : Statistical analysis and calibration cannot be performed without CW measurement survey.

V.3.3.g.vii.ii Displaying statistics before calibration (SPM)
This feature is available in the Calibration tab window from the SPM properties box.

With this, you may statistically analyse difference between predictions and an existing CW measurement survey.

To statistically compare CW measurements with prediction results, left click on the Statistics button. The study is
carried out on the CW measurement points which check filter criteria. The report window is displayed:

All parameters defined in General and Clutter tabs are summarized in the Model parameter part: the formulas used for
calculations depending on visibility and distance from transmitter, the algorithms for evaluating Diffraction and
eff
Tx
H terms and the losses per clutter classes.

In the Global statistics part, the number of CW measurement points which check filter criteria (Num points), the average
value (Mean), the standard deviation (Std deviation), minimum (Min) and maximum (Max) values are evaluated for data
like error, error (LOS), error (NLOS), log(d), log(
eff
Tx
H ), Diff, log(d)log(
eff
Tx
H ) and
eff
Rx
H .

The difference between experimental (CW measurement) and theoretical (prediction) values (named Error), is calculated
on the whole path. On the other hand, Error (LOS) is only calculated from points in transmitter line of sight path and Error
(NLOS) takes into account points which are not in transmitter line of sight path. Other data (log(d), log(
eff
Tx
H ), Diff,
log(d)log(
eff
Tx
H ) and
eff
Rx
H ) are calculated on the whole path.

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 161/476


In the Statistics per clutter classes part, Num points, Mean and Std deviation on error are detailed per clutter classes.

Finally, the correlation matrix is specified.

V.3.3.g.vii.iii Calibrating the Standard Propagation Model
This feature is available in the Calibration tab window from the SPM properties box.

With this, you may perform an automatic model calibration from an existing measurement survey.

Choose in the list the measurement paths you want to use. In the Filter part, you may select the measurement points to
be taken into account in statistics and for the model calibration by specifying distance and measurement intervals, los
(measurement points in the transmitter line of sight) and nlos (measurement points which are not in the transmitter line of
sight) options.

Note : Statistical analysis and calibration cannot be performed without measurement survey.


From a selected measurement session, you may either display statistics on comparison with the current propagation
model or choose to calibrate this model in order to stick its results to the measurements.


To calibrate the model, press the Calibrate... button. The Calibration window is open.

The calibration is carried out on the measurement points which check filter criteria using the linear regression method.

The variables (cste, clutter, log(d), log(Heff), Diff, log(d)log(Heff), Hmeff) to be calibrated, the corresponding correlation
coefficients (except for cste and clutter which are constant) and the corrections to be made on Ki initial factors to take
into account the calibration are listed in a table.

You may compare the average error (Mean) and the error standard deviation (Std deviation) before (initial statistics) and
after (current statistics) calibrating the model.


To achieve the model calibration, right click one or several variables (using shift and/or Ctrl button at the same time) and
then, press Identify button. The calibration will be achieved when the current Mean and Std deviation values and hence,
all correlation coefficients are as close to zero as possible.

When selecting a specific variable, you may see, in the right small window, the correlation between error and this
variable. When the correlation coefficient is close to one, a straight line can be drawn from the points: the error is strongly
dependent on the variable. On the other hand, when the correlation coefficient is close to zero, the points are scattered
around the straight line: there is no correlation between the error and the variable.

When all the variables are selected, identification is processed for each variable from the most correlated to the less
correlated to error.

To recover the initial data before calibration, press Reinitialise button.
To validate the calibration, press OK. The corrections will be added to Ki factor values.

Note : K1 and K2 factors are the same for near and far options.

Important :
Model automatic calibration solution is a mathematical solution. Before committing results, ensure of their relevance
towards a physical and realistic solution. See Typical values for Standard Propagation Model formula parameters
We remind you that model calibration and its result (standard deviation) strongly depend on the measurement
samples you use. A calibrated model must restore the behaviour of measurements depending on their configuration
on a large scale, not totally stick to a few number of measurements. The calibrated model has to give correct results
for every new measurement point performed in the same geographical zone, without having been calibrated on these
measurements.

See also (to calibrate 1 variable - to calibrate several variables)
Managing computations in A9155


162/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


V.3.3.g.vii.iv To calibrate one variable
Let us consider the scatter of measurement points depending on their calculation values for a given variable.


calculated
values for the
variable
ERROR (measurement prediction)
Regression line


If the regression line (where the sum of square differences is minimised) is :

b ax y + =

It is easy to prove that :

=
2
X
XY
a where x x X
i
= and y y Y
i
= with y x a b + =

When a variable is calibrated, the new value of the coefficient Ki is equal to a and the constant value is equal to b. The
coefficients are effectively affected to the model by clicking on OK. b is generally not null, thats why Cste is often set
when identifying a variable.

Caution: The Correction column means the difference between the new value and the current value of the model for
each coefficient.

The correlation equals to:

=
Y X
XY
r

A correlation is considered satisfying when its absolute value is closed to 1. When it is not the case, the resulting
correction may be unstable and so not reliable.

Once the variable has been calibrated (after pushing the Identify button), a correction is suggested and the correlation is
then set to zero because the differences between measurements and predictions are no longer dependent on the
calculated values.

Once the identification is processed, the correlation graphic becomes:

calculated values
for the variable
ERROR (measurement prediction)
Regression line


C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 163/476


V.3.3.g.vii.v To calibrate several variables
We can generalise the regression line for a set of N coefficients :

[ ]
(
(
(

=
N
N
x
x
a a y
0
0


We can prove by the same mean :

(
(
(
(
(

=
(
(
(
(
(

(
(
(
(
(

Y X
Y X
Y X
a
a
a
X X X
X X X
X X X X X
N N N N
N

1
0
1
0
2
0
2
1 1 0
0 1 0
2
0


with
( )
0 0 0
x x X
i
= , ( )
1 1 1
x x X
i
= and ( ) ( ) ( ) y y Y
i
=

By inverting the matrix, we can get the coefficients ai.


CONCLUSION:
It is important to notice that the matrix may be not inverted (or nearly not) in some cases.
When the correlation is wrong (When
( )
i N
X
is nearly a constant (for example log(Heff) when Heff is unique) and more
generally variables whose correlation is wrong (its absolute value near to zero). When the variable is actually a
constant, the correlation is 0 and no calibration is offered (in this case the chart is empty).
When two variables depend on each other (2 lines are proportional in the matrix: for example log(d) and
log(d)*log(Heff) when Heff is nearly a constant), the process works wrongly and may diverge.

So, it is advised to process identification for several variables at a time but only for those which are well correlated and
do not depend on another one already involved.
V.3.3.h WORKING WITH WINPROP-PROMAN MODEL
V.3.3.h.i Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Overview
WinProp-ProMan is an urban propagation model developed by AWE. The plug-in module is fully integrated in A9155
performing predictions based mainly on building databases generated by the building database management tool
WinProp-WallMan. The urban propagation model can be used for these different applications:
Microcellular coverage in urban environments with antenna heights below the rooftops and cell ranges of
typically a few hundreds of meters;
Minicells coverage in urban environments with antenna heights above medium rooftop level (surrounding
buildings higher and lower) and with cell ranges up to 2-3 kilometres ;
Macrocellular coverage in urban environments with antennas mounted on top of buildings higher than surrounding
buildings and on masts with cell ranges of tens of kilometres ;

In macro- and minicells the base station antenna is generally installed above the medium rooftop level of the surrounding
buildings. Therefore the path loss is determined mainly by diffraction at rooftops, i.e. the main rays propagate above the
buildings. In contrary to this for micro cells the base station antennas are mounted below the rooftop level of the
surrounding buildings. In this case wave propagation is determined by diffraction around and reflection at buildings what
leads to wave guiding effects in street canyons.
V.3.3.h.ii Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Physical background on Urban
Propagation Models

Radio transmission in urban environments is subject to strong multipath propagation. Dominant characteristics in these
scenarios are reflection, diffraction, shadowing by discrete obstacles and the wave guiding in street canyons. To consider
these effects in a propagation model, it is necessary to gain knowledge of all dominant propagation paths. These paths
depend primarily on the base station antenna height with respect to the building heights around.

For simplification of propagation modelling several two-dimensional empirical models have been developed under the
assumption of over-rooftop propagation as main propagation mechanism. The model according to Walfisch-Ikegami with
Managing computations in A9155


164/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


extensions from the European research cooperation COST 231 is such an analytical approach with empirically based
equations and correction factors.

The second group of micro-cellular prediction models is deterministic and they use ray optical methods. They allow a
very site-specific, three dimensional path loss and signal spread prediction including impulse response for base station
heights below as well as above rooftop level. Hence, a three dimensional description for the propagation environment
including building shape and building heights has to be incorporated. Of course, due to the three dimensional ray optical
methods these models require a higher computation effort than the simplified approaches mentioned above. However, a
method to accelerate this ray optical approach by an intelligent pre-processing of the building database was developed
which leads to computation times in the range of empirical models.

The described models are generally valid only for flat urban area, what means that the standard deviation of the terrain
heights is small in comparison to the standard deviation of the building heights in the considered area. If this is not the
case the influence of terrain should be taken into account by adequate extensions of the above mentioned methods.
V.3.3.h.iii Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Required databases

The basis for any propagation model is a building database, which describes the propagation environment. Urban
propagation modelling possess the best reliance on high resolution geographical information. High resolution databases
of the building structures in the urban area with an accuracy in the range of 1-2m derived from aerial photography
measurements are now normally being used. For urban propagation, it is essential to have accurate information at least
about the average height of individual buildings, especially when base stations are operating close to rooftop height.

As micro-cells are planned to increase the network capacity in urban areas, it is obvious to use building oriented
databases. In order to get a more accurate description of wave propagation, the building data are stored in a vector
format. Every building is modelled as a vertical object with polygonal ground plane and a uniform height above street
level. With this approach only vertical walls and horizontal flat roofs are considered. Additionally, the material properties
(thickness, permeability, conductivity) of the building surfaces can be taken into account, which is important for the
calculation of the reflection and diffraction coefficients and also for the penetration into buildings.

Considering the influence of database information on prediction accuracy it is noted that prediction errors in micro-cells of
up to 15 dB were attributed to database inaccuracies arising from poor resolution of the building data. Recalling that the
field estimation may be quite sensitive to the surface additionally the terrain profile should be considered for the
propagation modelling if the considered area is not flat. Therefore terrain databases in pixel format are required with
resolutions about 20-30 m.

Creation, modification, simplification and pre-processing of building databases have to be performed with the building
management tool WinProp-WallMan.
V.3.3.h.iv Working with WinProp-ProMan model: COST 231 Walfisch-Ikegami

The so-called empirical models (e.g. models according to Walfisch/Ikegami) consider only the propagation in a vertical
plane, which contains transmitter and receiver. For the field strength prediction significant parameters have to be
extracted from this vertical section (e.g. average building height).

Finally equations containing these parameters have to be optimised and fitted to numerous measurements in order to get
a prediction model which is applicable in different propagation environments. The main advantage of empirical models is
their short computation time.

However, their prediction accuracy is limited due to the fact that only a small number of parameters are taken into
account and the influence of the distance from the transmitter is over-emphasized. Additionally, wave-guiding effects in
streets cannot be considered with an empirical approach.

The empirical model implemented in ProMan was developed in the course of the European COST 231 project by a
combination of the Walfisch and Ikegami models. However this model is still statistical and not deterministic because
only characteristic values are taken into account for the prediction.

Because of the calibration with measurements from European cities no parameters have to be adjusted when using this
model. However with this empirical approach it is not possible to predict the wideband properties of the mobile radio
channel as e.g. the delay spread or impulse response.
V.3.3.h.v Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Intelligent Ray Tracing

The mobile radio channel in urban environments is characterized by strong multi-path propagation. Dominant
propagation mechanisms in these scenarios are reflection, diffraction, shadowing by discrete obstacles, and wave
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 165/476


guiding in street canyons. With a ray optical approach it is possible to consider these effects in a propagation model.

As smaller wavelengths, i.e. higher frequencies, are considered, the wave propagation becomes similar to the
propagation of light. A radio ray is assumed to propagate along a straight line influenced only by refraction, reflection,
diffraction or scattering. These are the concepts of Geometrical Optics (GO). The criterion taken into account for this
modelling approach is that the wavelength should be much smaller in comparison to the extension of the considered
obstacles, i.e. the buildings for urban environments. At the frequencies used for mobile communication networks this
criterion is sufficiently fulfilled.
V.3.3.h.v.i Specular reflection
The specular reflection phenomenon is the mechanism by which a ray is reflected at an angle equal to the incidence
angle. The reflected wave fields are related to the incident wave fields through a reflection coefficient, which is a matrix
when the full polarimetric description of the wave field is taken into account. The most common expression for the
reflection is the Fresnel reflection coefficient, which is valid for an infinite boundary between two mediums, for example
air and concrete. The Fresnel reflection coefficient depends on the incident wave field and upon the permeability and
conductivity of each medium. The application of the Fresnel reflection coefficient formulas is very popular and these
equations are also applied in ProMan.

In order to calibrate the prediction model with measurements some ray optical software tools consider an empirical
reflection coefficient varying with the incidence angle to simplify the calculations. Such an empirical approach is also
available in ProMan.
V.3.3.h.v.ii Diffraction
The diffraction process in ray theory is the propagation phenomenon, which explains the transition from the lit region to
the shadow regions behind the corner or over the rooftops. Diffraction by a single wedge can be solved in various ways:
empirical formulas, perfectly absorbing wedge, Geometrical Theory of Diffraction (GTD) or Uniform Theory of Diffraction
(UTD). The advantages and disadvantages of using either one formulation is difficult to address, since it may not be
independent on the environments under investigation. Indeed, reasonable results are possible with each formulation. The
various expressions differ mainly from the approximations being made on the surface boundaries of the wedge
considered. One major difficulty is to express and use the proper boundaries in the derivation of the diffraction formulas.
Another problem is the existence of wedges in real environments: the complexity of a real building corner or of the
buildings roof illustrates the modelling difficulties.

Despite these difficulties, however, diffraction around a corner or over rooftop are commonly modelled using the heuristic
UTD formulas since they are well behaved in the lit/shadow transition region, and account for the polarization as well as
for the wedge material. Therefore these formulas are also used in ProMan to calculate the diffraction coefficient.
V.3.3.h.v.iii Multiple diffraction
For the case of multiple diffraction the complexity increases dramatically. In the case of propagation over rooftops the
result of Walfisch and Ikegami has been used to produce the COST-Walfisch-Ikegami model. One method frequently
applied to multiple diffraction problems is the UTD. The main problem with straightforward applications of the UTD is that
in many cases one edge is in the transition zones of the previous edges. Strictly speaking this forbids the application of
ray techniques, but in the spirit of the UTD the principle of local illumination of an edge should be valid. At least within
some approximate degrees, a solution can be obtained which is quite accurate in most cases of practical interest.

The key point in the theory is to include slope diffraction, which is usually neglected as a higher order term in an
asymptotic expansion, but in the transition zone the diffraction term is of the same order as the ordinary amplitude
diffraction terms. ProMan utilizes the UTD including slope diffraction for over rooftop propagation for the calculation of
multiple diffraction processes. Additionally there is an empirical diffraction model available, which can easily be calibrated
with measurements.
V.3.3.h.v.iv Scattering
Rough surfaces and finite surfaces (i.e. surfaces with small extension in comparison to the wavelength) scatter the
incident energy in all directions with a radiation diagram, which depends on the roughness and size of the surface or
volume. The dispersion of energy through scattering means a decrease of the energy reflected in specular direction.

This simple view leads to account for the scattering process only by decreasing the reflection coefficient and thus, only
by multiplying the reflection coefficient with a factor smaller than one which depends exponentially on the standard
deviation of the surface roughness according to the Rayleigh theory. This description does not take into account the true
dispersion of radio energy in various directions, but accounts for the reduction of energy in the specular direction due to
the diffuse components scattered in all other directions.
V.3.3.h.v.v Penetration

Managing computations in A9155


166/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


In order to predict indoor coverage, penetration losses due to building walls have been considered by material
parameters for different building types.
V.3.3.h.v.vi Ray tracing

Ray optical propagation models are very often used for the prediction of the field strength in urban scenarios. They are
very accurate, because they consider wave-guiding effects in street canyons and they include diffraction at wedges.
There are two different approaches to determine the ray optical propagation paths between transmitter and receiver: Ray
tracing and ray launching.

Ray tracing computes all rays for each receiver point individually and guarantees the consideration of each ray wall as
well as a constant resolution. In the ray launching approach, the rays are launched from the transmitter with a constant
angular increment. Thus the ray launching might neglect a wall because it is very small and located between two rays.
Different approaches to a better resolution with the ray launching were presented in the last years, but the ray- launching
has still kept the disadvantage of a variable resolution depending on the distance to the transmitter. The only advantage
of ray launching is the shorter computation time compared to standard ray tracing algorithms. However, the ray tracing
algorithm within ProMan, which is called IRT (Intelligent Ray Tracing), is much faster than ray launching. IRT includes
several accelerations concerning computation effort without considerable loss of accuracy.
V.3.3.h.vi Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Quick Start

1) Getting a WinProp license

For running WinProp a separate computer dependent license file is required.

Run the program LicenseCustomer.exe on target computer.
A file called License.DAT.<hostname> is generated.
Please send a license request including the DAT-file to the A9155 Support Team.
After receiving the license file named License.AWE.<hostname> rename it to License.AWE and store it on the target
computer, e.g. in the A9155 Program directory.
Set the system and/or user variable WINPROP_LICENSE_FILE in System Properties, tab Environment according to
the path where the license file is located.

The WinProp DLL is already automatically registered during installation of A9155.
In case of a manual installation please perform the following:
Register the WinProp DLL with the RUN option in the START menu of the computer according to the program installation
path.
Example: regsvr32 "C:\Program Files\Alcatel SEL AG\A9155 V6.1\winprop.dll"

2) Loading the building database

Load the vector-format building database via MIF- or DXF-Import in the Geo tab (for display purposes only).

3) Setting propagation parameters

To manage the WinProp-ProMan model, proceed as follows:
Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Propagation models by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the WinProp-ProMan subfolder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double-click on the WinProp-ProMan subfolder,
Click on the different parameter tabs for adjusting the model parameters,
Define the model parameters (see descriptions below),
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.


C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 167/476


Output tab

Received power results are calculated by default. An offset can be set manually on demand.
Channel impulse response results and propagation paths can be also calculated and redirected to the output filename. A
graphical output for these results is foreseen for one of the next releases.



Database tab

The name of the pre-processed building database has to be specified. An IRT- (Intelligent Ray Tracing) or a COST-
database has to be chosen.
Several offsets for material properties of buildings can be set in addition to the default values which are already set
during pre-processing of building database in WallMan.
Caution: The database type must fit to the selected prediction type on the Prediction tab!




Prediction tab

Managing computations in A9155


168/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


The prediction model used within the building database area has to be selected.
Empirical Model COST231: Extended Walfisch-Ikegami-Model can be chosen in case of a corresponding pre-processed
building database being available.
IRT (Intelligent Ray Tracing) can only be used if pre-processing was performed either for full 3D, real 2x2D or empirical
2x2D computation.
For IRT, some parameters can be influenced: the maximum number of considered paths and the computation type of the
contribution of the rays can be chosen. Also some parameters about the so-called breakpoint can be modified.
Caution: The prediction type must fit to the selected database type on the Database tab!




C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 169/476


Post-processing tab

After the IRT or COST prediction several post-processing steps can be triggered.
Indoor pixels covered from outdoor transmitters can be computed in addition to the outdoor prediction.
A COST prediction for all pixels, which were not predicted with the IRT model can be performed.
The transition between IRT and COST for all pixels predicted with IRT can be influenced by several control parameters.
In case of a pre-processed IRT area which is smaller than the whole building database area for a smooth transition
between the IRT and the COST area a linear transition can be used.
In order to produce presentation plots a filter function for smoothing results is available.




Managing computations in A9155


170/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Hybrid model tab

The Standard Propagation Model is used for predictions outside the building database area.
For a smooth transition at the building database border, a linear transition can be used.



V.3.3.h.vii Working with WinProp-ProMan model: Important hints

The urban propagation module WinProp consists out of the ProMan prediction model integrated in A9155 and the
WallMan building database management tool. Use WallMan for creation, modification, simplification, and pre-processing
of building databases before prediction.

The pre-processed prediction type must fit to the selected prediction type in A9155.

Several prediction types are available:
COST 231 Walfisch-Ikegami: empirical model for first estimations
Empirical 2x2D: 2D ray tracing in horizontal plane and COST prediction in vertical plane (best trade-off between
accuracy and computation speed)
Real 2x2D: 2D ray tracing in both horizontal and vertical plane
Full 3D: 3D ray tracing for detailed analysis, delay spread and propagation path investigations
Hybrid: IRT and/or COST within building database area and Standard Propagation Model outside building database
area

The pre-processed mobile station height must fit to the selected height on the Receiver tab in the Prediction properties
dialog page.

The calculation resolution need not necessarily fit to the pre-processing resolution. In that case the result is over-
sampled automatically. The recommended resolution for urban predictions is 10 meters.

The computation zone or the calculation radius can be larger than the pre-processed area. In that case the hybrid model
is called which uses the Standard Propagation Model for the regions outside the building database area.

Warnings while computing are not displayed on screen but written into a log file called logfile.log.

For further information about the WinProp package, please refer to:

A9155 V6.1 ProMan User Manual ref. 3DF 01955 6181 PCZZA
A9155 V6.1 ProMan Reference Manual ref. 3DF 01955 6181 RKZZA
A9155 V6.1 WallMan User Manual ref. 3DF 01955 6182 PCZZA

V.4 TUNING RECEPTION PARAMETERS
V.4.1 SETTING THE RECEIVER PROPERTIES
In A9155, the calculation of signal levels at any point, for point analysis or coverage purpose, is linked with the definition
of a receiver. Depending on the considered project type, different properties might be set.
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 171/476



To set receiver properties, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Either,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the context menu,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu.
Or
Double click on the Predictions folder
Left click on the Receiver tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about receiver fields,
Enter its height and, for GSM/GPRS/EDGE studies, associated antenna, losses, and the adjacent channel
protection level.


Notes :
By default, the antenna is set to an omni one with a 0 dB gain,
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, its is possible to set the adjacent channel protection level. This parameter is used in
interference computations in order to simulate the signal level offset due to an adjacent channel contribution on the
considered channel. For example, if the value is set to 18 dB (default value), this means that the signal level coming
from an adjacent channel will be decreased by 18 dB on the total noise computation on the considered channel.

For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 studies, the point analysis tool is used for a particular scenario. Depending on the type
of mobility, service or terminal (or Radio configuration in CDMA/CDMA2000) chosen, radio parameters are not the same
for the receiver. Consequently, to manage receiver parameters used in the point analysis, you must set the
characteristics of each used UMTS parameters (type of service, mobility, terminal) or CDMA/CDMA2000 (type of service,
Radio Configurations) in the corresponding properties dialog window.

In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, A9155 has also an option which limits the representation for coverages around stations,
in order to consider synchronisation problems. This feature is a graphic representation for coverages and is not taken
into account in calculations.

To define the maximum range value limiting the coverage display (GSM/GPRS/EDGE studies only) around stations,
proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Either,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the context menu,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu.
Or
Double click on the Predictions folder
Left click on the System tab (if available) from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window,
Set maximum range value,
Click OK or Apply to validate.

V.4.2 COMPUTING SHADOWING MARGINS PER CLUTTER CLASS
Propagation models are mathematical tools used for the prediction of losses along a path with the better accuracy
possible. In reality, if we were to stay on a same location measuring a signal level, we would observe some variations of
results due to slow fading/shadowing, i.e. surrounding environment. We would observe that real results are spread on a
gaussian curve, around an average value, and with a specific standard deviation. If we consider the model correctly
calibrated, its result should check to this average value. So, in that case, we assume that the model gives a result which
is at least correct in an average case, that is to say, in 50% of the measured cases. 50% means that 50% of the
measurements will be better that the predicted value, the other values, being worst.

This can be taken into account by considering a model standard deviation per clutter class. The considered clutter is the
one on which you compute a signal level. These standard deviations, linked with a certain needed reliability level on
results (point analysis or coverages) lead to additional losses per clutter class called shadowing margins. These are
margins from a result given by propagation model (in dB) for which the probability of error is 50%. They indicate that, on
the real field, results will at least the value computed by A9155 with the defined reliability level (this means maybe better
but not worst).

For example, let's consider the model (correctly calibrated) gives a loss that should lead to a signal level of -70 dBm. The
user wants a reliability level of 85 %. Let's imagine A9155 provides a shadowing margin of 7 dB for the considered
location. All of this lead to the fact that the real signal will be equal or better than -77 dBm in 85% of cases.
Managing computations in A9155


172/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Of course, the same reliability level provides the same shadowing margins to all the receivers located on the same clutter
type. Different reliability levels will impose different values of shadowing margins even if considering the same clutter
type.


To display the computed shadowing margins per clutter class as a function of reliability level, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Shadowing margins... option from the scrolling menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window,
Set the reliability level,
Click the button to start computation,
Click OK to close the dialog.


Notes :
When the reliability level is greater than 50%, shadowing margin values are not null only if standard deviations are
defined for clutters.
In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, uplink soft handover gains due to multipath (2 and 3 links) are also indicated
in this window,
If no clutter data is available, shadowing margin will be set to 0dB, and UL soft handover gain will be set to the default
global value (defined in the Transmitter global parameters in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000),
When the reliability level is 50%, even if UL SHO gains (2 and 3 links) are computed in this window, the value taken
into account is the default global value (defined in the Transmitter global parameters) for coverage studies and point
analysis.
In UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations, these losses are evaluated by computing random shadowing errors
and are added to the model path loss.

V.4.3 USING RELIABILITY LEVEL IN PREDICTIONS
A9155 models the probability of error on the predicted path loss; errors on calculations depend on the transmitter-
receiver path and the receiver position. They are due to some obstacles, which are not taken into account by the
propagation model (in case geographic data are not up-to-date or appropriate enough, or when there are point
obstacles). This phenomenon is called shadowing or slow fading; variation occurs over distances comparable to the
width of obstacles (buildings, hills ) along the path.

From a user-defined standard deviation corresponding to the clutter class where the receiver is located and a reliability
level, A9155 evaluates a shadowing margin and adds it to the path loss predicted by the model. In order for A9155 to
take into account a defined reliability level in calculations, you must define model standard deviation per clutter class. All
coverage studies integrate the possibility to enter a reliability level (in their property dialog box).


Notes :
In case of a correctly calibrated propagation model, typical standard deviations should be around 6 dB to 9 dB.
We remind you that model calibration and its result (standard deviation) strongly depend on the CW measurement
samples you use. A calibrated model must restore the behaviour of CW measurements depending on their
configuration on a large scale, not totally check to a few number of CW measurements. The calibrated model has to
give correct results for every new CW measurement point performed in the same geographical zone, without having
been calibrated on these CW measurements.
In Interference computation (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000), Shadowing margins (depending on the
entered reliability level and the standard deviation per clutter class) are applied only on signal level values. These are
not taken into account in noise determinations.


When calculating coverage with a x% reliability level, A9155 displays the areas where the measured field exceeds the
predicted signal during x% of time. When increasing the reliability level, the predicted signal deviates from average and
hence, the shadowing margin raises.


Notes :
When using the ITU 370 model, take care not to define reliability level, the reliability level being already included as a
parameter.
The possibility to make soft handover in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 make available the computation of UL SHO
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 173/476


gains for 2 and 3 links in predictions or simulations (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000).

V.5 COVERAGE STUDIES
V.5.1 COVERAGE STUDIES : OVERVIEW
A coverage is a set of covered pixels. The coverage is a result of path loss matrix computations depending on the choice
of propagation models, calculation areas and computation and coverage resolutions. Coverage areas defined by
coverage conditions in order to select the transmitters that must be taken into account for the study. Then, according to
this selection, any pixel will be covered as depending on the display type chosen, either by transmitter, by signal level, by
overlapping zones in the standard case (for all projects). So, a coverage is a graphic representation of points for which a
coverage condition is satisfied.

Depending on the type of project considered, some specific studies (treated in their specific parts) are also available :
- Interference studies in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects
- Specific GPRS/EDGE studies dealing with coding schemes or rates colouring,
- Specific UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 studies based either on simulations or user-defined traffic loads.

Like for many other A9155 objects, the management of coverage studies is both easy and powerful. The generic A9155
display dialog (including legend, label et tip management) is used and allows you to display your study on several
attributes related to transmitters. Furthermore, some organization features (filter, sort and groups) are also available on
the displayed result.

Many features help in the management of coverage in A9155. Indeed, it is possible to lock/unlock either complete
studies or individual matrices, to display, print or export exhaustive coverage reports, to export matrices or coverage
zones, to check the validity of current results regarding to the current radio configurations, and other tools always with a
view to make handy coverage studies in A9155.

It is also possible to calculate path loss matrices independently from any coverage study.

V.5.2 COVERAGE PREDICTION GENERAL SETTINGS
V.5.2.a SETTING CALCULATION AREAS
In A9155, calculation areas are defined at the transmitter level. A9155 is able to calculate two path loss matrices per
transmitter, a first matrix over a near radius computed with a high resolution and a propagation model, and a second
matrix over a far radius computed with a low resolution and another propagation model.

In addition, the calculation areas of each transmitter occur only within the computation zone.


To define calculation area(s) simultaneously to all transmitters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Click on the Propagation tab from the open window,
In the main matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a resolution used to
compute the main path loss matrix),
Optionally, in the extended matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a
resolution used to compute the extended path loss matrix),
Click OK to validate.


To define calculation area(s) to one transmitter at a time, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Transmitters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either :
Right click on the transmitter to which you want to define a specific calculation area,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Or
Managing computations in A9155


174/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Double click on the transmitter to which you want to assign a specific calculation area,
Click on the Propagation tab from the open window,
In the main matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a resolution used to
compute the main path loss matrix),
Optionally, in the extended matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a
resolution used to compute the extended path loss matrix),
Click OK to validate.

You can also define these parameters in the Transmitters table.

Notes :
The calculation radius limits the scope of the calculations to the radius that has been defined. The calculation radius
prevents the system from calculating over too long distances (e.g. in an urban area). In the case of very large
environments, the calculation radius allows you to improve the calculation time. If no main calculation radius has been
defined (and no secondary propagation model), A9155 takes into account automatically the prediction minimum
threshold to define the calculation radius for each transmitter. Nevertheless, this could drive to long calculation times
Since it is a matrix (or 2 in case of extended calculation radius) which is computed for each transmitter, the
calculation radius represents the half side length of the potential matrix located around the considered transmitter.
A9155 computes an extended matrix only if the three parameters, propagation model, calculation radius and
resolution, are specified. Therefore, an extended matrix will not be worked out if its resolution is null.
A9155 computes at the same time the main and extended matrices of a transmitter with a global management.
Therefore, it will recalculate both matrices even if only one is invalid.
The main calculation radius (and the related propagation model) can be also set at the station template level.
When modifying a computation zone (e.g. reduction of the area) in which some predictions studies have already been
made, it is strongly recommended to run again predictions in order to ensure validity of results with current
computation zone.

V.5.2.b SETTING CALCULATION RESOLUTIONS
In A9155, it is possible to calculate two path loss matrices per transmitter, a first matrix over a near radius computed with
a high resolution and a propagation model, and a second matrix over a far radius computed with a low resolution and
another propagation model. The resolution of matrices is not a global parameter since it can be managed for each
transmitter depending on its location.

In addition, it is possible to differentiate resolution of path loss matrices from plot resolution. Prediction plot resolution can
be actually defined on a per study basis. Thus, you can calculate several coverage studies with different resolutions
without invalidating and recalculating path loss matrices.


To define calculation resolution(s) simultaneously to all transmitters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Click on the Propagation tab from the open window,
In the main matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a calculation radius
used to compute the main path loss matrix),
Optionally, in the extended matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a
resolution used to compute the extended path loss matrix),
Click OK to validate.


To define calculation resolution(s) to one transmitter at a time, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Transmitters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either :
Right click on the transmitter to which you want to define a specific calculation resolution,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Or
Double click on the transmitter to which you want to assign a specific calculation resolution,
Click on the Propagation tab from the open window,
In the main matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a calculation radius
used to compute the main path loss matrix),
Optionally, in the extended matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a
calculation radius used to compute the extended path loss matrix),
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 175/476


Click OK to validate.

You can also define these parameters in the Transmitters table.

Notes :
The calculation radius limits the scope of the calculations to the radius that has been defined. The calculation radius
prevents the system from calculating over too long distances (e.g. in an urban area). In the case of very large
environments, the calculation radius allows you to improve the calculation time. If no main calculation radius has been
defined (and no secondary propagation model), A9155 takes into account automatically the prediction minimum
threshold to define the calculation radius for each transmitter. Nevertheless, this could drive to long calculation times
A9155 computes an extended matrix only if the three parameters, propagation model, calculation radius and
resolution, are specified. Therefore, an extended matrix will not be worked out if its resolution is null.
A9155 computes at the same time the main and extended matrices of a transmitter with a global management.
Therefore, it will recalculate both matrices even if only one is invalid.


In addition to the default propagation model, a default grid resolution can be specified in the property dialog of the
Predictions folder.

A9155 takes into account the default grid resolution when no value or zero is defined for the main resolution in the
transmitter properties. In this case, the main path loss matrix of the transmitter will be worked out with the default grid
resolution.

To define a default calculation resolution, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Click on the Propagation tab from the open window,
Enter the default calculation resolution,
Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the current dialog window,
Click OK to validate.

V.5.2.c CREATING COVERAGE CALCULATIONS
Whatever the project type is, all existing predictions are listed in the Predictions folder (Data tab). When starting a new
project, no prediction is available.

To create any prediction, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New...,
Choose from the list a prediction template in the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the associated prediction window,
Set prediction parameters,
Click OK to validate your choice.

At this step, no calculation is made. The prediction with the parameters is just ready to b run.

Notes : User interface of each prediction study Properties is standardised. For any common study, the Properties
window consists of three tabs:
The General tab where you may rename the study, define the coverage resolution, add some comments, define
group, sort and filter criteria, on the coverage display only (not on the results),
The Condition tab where you can specify the study parameters,
The Display tab to define coverage display settings.

V.5.2.d CREATING COVERAGE STUDIES PER GROUP OF TRANSMITTER
In A9155, it is possible to automatically create prediction studies restricted to a given transmitter or group of transmitters.


To create a coverage study by transmitter or by group of transmitters :
Either,
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Managing computations in A9155


176/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it
Right click on the transmitter/transmitter subfolder you want to manage,
Or,
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Predictions... option from the context menu,
Choose a prediction study in the open window and press OK,
Click on the Calculate button to run calculations. The created study is listed in the Predictions folder.

Notes :
The general tab of the prediction dialog can be also used to restrict the results display identically,
Coverages per transmitter or group of transmitters work like when filtering transmitters in coverage studies, i.e., the
filter is made on display only, and not on computations.

V.5.2.e ACCESSING COVERAGE PREDICTION PROPERTIES
Coverage predictions are manageable identically as point analysis prediction. Firstly, because propagation models may
be specified either in the Predictions folder or in the Transmitters folder, you must be very careful to its priority order. The
main propagation model defined with transmitters is taken first before the one defined with Predictions (See Selecting
and managing propagation models). Then take care about the fact that reception is modelled as if it was made using a
specific receiver and its associated parameters.

Predictions are organised as the other A9155 objects, i.e. in a folder form. The Predictions folder is the parent item for all
the performed coverage predictions. So, it is possible to access the properties either of the Predictions folder or of any
prediction.

To access predictions global properties, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
either
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
or
Double click on the Predictions folder
Click either the Predictions, Receiver or the System tab (if available),
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in each dialog,
Set predictions global parameters,
Click OK to validate your choice.

To access the properties of any single existing prediction, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Predictions folder by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the prediction study of which you want to access properties,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the prediction study of which you want to access properties,
Click on the available tabs to display the different windows,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in each window,
Check or adjust prediction parameters,
Click OK to validate your choice.
V.5.2.f SETTING COVERAGE RESOLUTIONS
In the property dialog of each prediction study (General tab), it is possible to specify the plot resolution. Prediction plots
are generated from multi-resolution path loss matrices. Nevertheless, the plot resolution is independent from matrix
resolutions and can be defined on a per study basis.

Therefore, in A9155, you can:
Change the plot resolution without making multi-resolution path loss matrices invalid. This enables you to save
calculation and recalculation times.
Display prediction plots with a resolution different from path loss matrix resolutions.
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 177/476


V.5.2.g ORGANISING RESULT OUTPUTS OF A COVERAGE STUDY
In A9155, it is possible to filter the results of a coverage study by excluding some zones involved in the initial result.
These filters only deals with display. Of course, during calculation, A9155 takes into account all the active and filtered
transmitters (at the transmitter folder level) to calculate the prediction and displays only coverage related to this
transmitter.

Practical example: the network consists of 4 stations (Tx0, Tx1, Tx2 and Tx3).
Coverage by transmitter study: with best server, no margin and filter on Tx0.
A9155 displays the areas where the signal level from Tx0 is higher than the specified threshold and Tx0 is the best
server.

Interfered areas study: any calculation option and filter on Tx0.
Tx1, Tx2 and Tx3 are possible interferers; they are taken into account in calculations. The covered areas are the areas
where Tx0 is interfered by one of these items.

To make a filter on any study, open its associated properties, and use the standard filter tools by clicking the
button.

Notes :
Filters defined in the Transmitters folder and filters inside a polygon have priority over the prediction filters.
Transmitters, which do not check these filter criteria, are considered as inactive in predictions.
In the General tab, Group and Sort features enable you to organise study result in the Explorer. You can group or sort
a study according to any transmitter attribute. These commands are always available except when selecting display
of best signal level, best server path loss, best server total losses or number of servers.
It is also possible to set the plot resolution in the General tab of any coverage study.
V.5.2.h DEFINING THE COVERAGE CONDITIONS
In A9155, all the common coverage studies use the same dialog made of 3 tabs (General, Condition, Display). The
condition tab of any coverage study property dialog allows you to filter the active transmitters (with calculation area) that
will be part of the computation.

So, in this tab, you must specify (using the What's this help to get information about available fields in the condition tab
window):
The study criterion you want A9155 to calculate: you can choose to evaluate the signal level at the receiver (Signal
level), the path loss (Path loss) or the total losses (Total losses), as in point analysis,
Minimum and maximum thresholds: a bin of the map will be covered only if the calculated criterion for each
considered transmitter on the bin is between minimum and maximum thresholds.
Servers you want to study from the evaluation of their service area. You may choose to keep, on each pixel All the
servers, the one with the Highest signal level or the one with the Second highest signal level, as far as they check the
other conditions (e.g. minimum reception threshold)
A margin in case of a best signal study.

- In case of all the servers are considered (All), the coverage area of Txi is the zone where:

( ) threshold Maximum or or threshold Minimum

<
Losses Total L P
Txi Txi
tot
Txi
rec



- In case of best signal level (Best signal level) and a margin, the service area of Txi corresponds to the bins where:

( ) ( ) threshold Maximum or or threshold Minimum <

Losses Total L
ic
P
Txi Txi
tot
Txi
rec

and
( ) ( ) ( ) M ic P Best ic P
Txj
rec
i j
Txi
rec

where
M is the specified margin (dB).
Best function : considers the highest value.

Notes
If the margin equals 0 dB (best signal level and no margin), A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is the highest one.
If the margin is set to 2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is either the highest one
or 2dB lower than the highest one.
Managing computations in A9155


178/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


If the margin is set to -2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is 2dB higher than the
signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best servers.

- In case of second best signal level and a margin, the service area of Txi corresponds to the bins where:

( ) ( ) threshold Maximum or or threshold Minimum <

Losses Total L
ic
P
Txi Txi
tot
Txi
rec

and
( ) ( ) ( ) M ic P Best ic P
Txj
rec
i j
nd Txi
rec

2


where
M is the specified margin (dB).
2nd Best function : considers the second highest value.

Notes
If the margin equals 0 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is the second highest
one.
If the margin is set to 2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is either the second
highest one or 2dB lower than the second highest one.
If the margin is set to -2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is 2dB higher than the
signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best servers.

In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, some specific server conditions related with the potential use of HCS layers are available
for the service area determination.

The last parameters to define in the Condition tab, whatever the project type is, are :
The study reliability level. Entering 60% as reliability level means that the measured criterion exceeds the predicted
one, 60% of the time.
The selection of an item defining power in transmitters (TRX types in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, carrier in UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA2000)

Note : this tab deals with the determination of covering transmitter only. The way they cover the bin is managed in the
Display tab.

V.5.2.i MANAGING PREDICTION DISPLAY
Like for the other A9155 objects classified under folders, prediction results can be either displayed (by checking the
box just left to each prediction) or not (by unchecking the box just left to each prediction) on the map. You may even
display all the calculated predictions by checking the box just left to the Predictions folder (See Managing object
visibility). Coverages are organised as layers. The layer order can be modified in order to make some of them displayed
on the top.

Concerning the coverage itself, A9155 uses the generic display dialog in order to make easy and complete its
management. So, when creating a prediction study, once the filter on the transmitters to take into account in
computations and coverage (and interference) condition are set (condition tab), the display tab allows you to colour the
defined zones depending on selected attributes (using the What's this help to get information about available fields in the
display tab window). Attributes can be chosen in order to realize either common studies (coverage by transmitter, by
signal level, overlapping zones), or specific studies (e.g. interference studies in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, handover
status, pilot pollution, etc.., in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects), or studies depending on any other attributes (zone,
manufacturer, site status, any user-defined flag).

These attributes can be, for example :

Signal level (in dBm, dBV, dBV/m)
On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, A9155 calculates signal level received from the transmitter. A bin of a
coverage area is coloured if signal level exceeds (=) entered minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on signal level).
Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as
many layers as transmitter coverage areas. Each layer shows the different signal levels available in the transmitter
coverage area.

Best signal level (in dBm, dBV, dBV/m)
On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, A9155 calculates signal levels received from transmitters, which
coverage areas overlap the studied one, and chooses the highest value. A bin of a coverage area is coloured if the signal
level exceeds (=) entered thresholds (the bin colour depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several
independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as defined
thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined minimum
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 179/476


threshold.

Path loss (dB)
On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, A9155 calculates path loss from the transmitter. A bin of a coverage area
is coloured if path loss exceeds (=) entered minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on path loss). Coverage consists of
several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as coverage
areas. Each layer shows the different path loss levels in the transmitter coverage area.

Total losses (dB)
On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, A9155 calculates total losses from the transmitter. A bin of a coverage
area is coloured if total losses exceed (=) entered minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on total losses). Coverage
consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers
as coverage areas. Each layer shows the different total losses levels in the coverage area.

Best server path loss (dB)
On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, A9155 calculates signal levels received from transmitters, which
coverage areas overlap the studied one, determines the best transmitter and evaluates path loss from the best
transmitter. A bin of a coverage area is coloured if the path loss exceeds (=) entered thresholds (bin colour depends on
path loss). Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There
are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the path loss from the best server
exceeds a defined minimum threshold.

Best server total losses (dB)
On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, A9155 calculates signal levels received from transmitters, which
coverage areas overlap the studied one, determines the best transmitter and evaluates total losses from the best
transmitter. A bin of a coverage area is coloured if the total losses exceed (=) entered thresholds (bin colour depends on
total losses). Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace.
There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the total losses from the best
server exceed a defined minimum threshold.

Number of servers
A9155 evaluates how many coverage areas cover a bin in order to determine the number of servers. The bin colour
depends on the number of servers. Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility
in the workspace. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the number
of servers exceeds (=) a defined minimum threshold.

Reliability level (%)
On each bin of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the signal level from this
transmitter fulfils signal conditions (defined in Conditions tab) with different reliability levels. In the explorer, there is one
coverage area per transmitter.

Best reliability level (%)
On each bin of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the best signal level received
fulfils signal conditions (defined in Conditions tab). In the explorer, there is one coverage area per reliability level.

Caution: In case of a signal level, path loss or total losses display, the lowest defined threshold must be equal to the
minimum threshold entered in the Condition tab.

Notes :
A9155 provides default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies (coverage by
signal level, coverage by transmitter and overlapping), but it is possible to cover by signal level even if choosing a
coverage by transmitter study.
The definition of a study (coverage condition and display parameters) can be chosen for a study template.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction
study in order to update coverage.

V.5.2.j RUNNING COVERAGE CALCULATIONS
In A9155, coverage studies can be firstly created and tuned, and then calculated. So, it is possible to prepare a complete
set of coverage studies, and let them work all together only when necessary.

To run calculations on created predictions, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Calculations will be made only on unlocked predictions (symbolized ),
Either,
Managing computations in A9155


180/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


From the menu bar, click either the Calculate button
2
or the Force calculation button
3
,
Or,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose either the Calculate or Force calculation command from the open scrolling menu,
The event viewer opens showing the calculations progress in the Tasks tab (you may stop calculations
even by clicking the Stop button or pressing the Esc key),
When finished, results are then displayed on the current map (if the visibility flag is checked).

Notes : The calculate and Force calculation features can be also accessed either :
by using respectively the F7 and Ctrl+F7 keys,
from the Tools menu in the menu bar,
from the Predictions folder context menu.

V.5.2.k LOCKING COVERAGE STUDIES
A9155 allows you to lock some coverage predictions (and to freeze their result display) whereas you desire to commit
calculations on other studies. So, this feature enables the user to easily compare prediction results made with different
parameters individually. This can be made either globally or for each single prediction.

To lock/unlock any single prediction study :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Predictions folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the prediction study you want to lock/unlock the calculations,
Select/Unselect the Locked study option from the open scrolling menu,


To lock/unlock all the existing prediction studies :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Select either the Lock studies or Unlock studies from the open scrolling menu.


Locked predictions are displayed with the icon, whereas unlocked predictions are given by the icon.

Note : Be careful not to mix up locking predictions with locking path loss results from the Result storage. Even if some
predictions are locked and other unlocked, path loss matrices may stay unchanged if either they are locked in the Result
storage window or if the user does not use the Force calculation button.


Caution : when calculations have to be completed, be sure to have already defined the coordinate system used in the
current project.

V.5.3 PREDICTION STUDY TEMPLATES
V.5.3.a CALCULATING A COVERAGE BY TRANSMITTER
In A9155, all studies are classified in a study types box, referencing standard and customized studies. Standard studies
are divided into two parts, common studies and studies which are specific to the current project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE,
UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000). Common studies for any projects are : coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping zones.

The coverage by transmitter study enables the user to predict coverage zones by transmitter depending either on their
signal level, their path loss or total losses defined within a user-defined range.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the coverage by transmitter option from the study

2
In this case, locked path loss result matrices (in the Result storage window from the Predictions context menu) are not calculated again. Only invalid
path loss matrices (compared to the current radio parameters) will be computed again. If locked, even invalid matrices are not recalculated

3
In this case, even locked matrices are all deleted and totally calculated from scratch. If there are some valid matrices, A9155 warns you about the
potential destruction of existing data

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 181/476


types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use
the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows (See also Defining the coverage condition
and Manage prediction display).

The coverage by transmitter study is a template for which the field 'Transmitter' is selected by default in the display tab.
In that case, coverage zones will be displayed with the same colours than the ones defined for each transmitter.

Notes :
A9155 offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies but it is possible to
cover by signal level even if choosing a coverage by transmitter study just by setting this in the display tab.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction
study in order to update coverage.

V.5.3.b CALCULATING A COVERAGE BY SIGNAL LEVEL
In A9155, all studies are classified in a study types box, referencing standard and customized studies. Standard studies
are divided into two parts, common studies and studies which are specific to the current project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE,
UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000). Common studies for any projects are : coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping zones.

The coverage by signal level study enables the user to predict coverage zones by field strength from transmitter
depending either on their signal level, their path loss or total losses defined within a user-defined range.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the coverage by signal level option from the study
types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use
the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows (See also Defining the coverage condition
and Manage prediction display).

The coverage by signal level study is a template for which the field 'Best signal level' is selected by default in the display
tab. In that case, each layer corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined
minimum threshold. Numerous option related to signal level coverage are available in the Display tab.

Notes :
A9155 offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies but it is possible to
cover by transmitter even if choosing a coverage by signal level study just by setting this in the display tab.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction
study in order to update coverage.
Choosing a display per best signal level creates a study item made of threshold items whereas choosing a display per
signal level let the folder be made of transmitter items. On each of these items, it is possible to check/uncheck the
visibility flag.

V.5.3.c CALCULATING OVERLAPPING AREAS
In A9155, all studies are classified in a study types box, referencing standard and customized studies. Standard studies
are divided into two parts, common studies and studies which are specific to the current project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE,
UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000). Common studies for any projects are : coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping zones.

Overlapping is a coverage whose points correspond, for a defined condition, to the common points of areas covered by
the signal of, at least, two transmitters. Therefore, A9155 displays the areas where the signal level from at least two
transmitters (signal level option), the path loss of the signal received from at least two transmitters (path loss option), or
total losses along two paths between the considered point and transmitters (total losses option), is between minimum
and maximum user-defined thresholds.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Overlapping option from the study types
window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows (See also Defining the coverage condition
and Manage prediction display).

The coverage by overlapping area study is a template for which the field 'Number of servers' is selected by default in the
display tab. In that case, each layer corresponds to an area where the number of servers exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.

Notes :
A9155 offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies but it is possible to
Managing computations in A9155


182/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


cover by transmitter even if choosing an overlapping study just by adjusting display.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction
study in order to update coverage.

V.5.3.d CREATING A COVERAGE STUDY TEMPLATE
A9155 provides a feature allowing you to save the definition of a coverage study (General, condition and display tab
properties) in a study template.

To save the settings of any study in a template, proceed as follows :
Right click the coverage study you want to save as a template,
Choose the "Save as a template" command from the open context menu,
A9155 saves the study parameters in a Studies.xml file stored in the A9155 installation directory.


All the study templates saved in this file are available when creating new prediction studies. In the Study types window,
A9155 lists all the classical studies available for a type of project in the standard studies part and the study templates
you have created in the customised studies part.

Note : the name given to the reference study is kept as template name.

It is possible to remove a study template from the file. In the Study types window, select a customised study and click on
the Delete button.
V.5.3.e DELETING A COVERAGE STUDY TEMPLATE
In A9155, coverage study templates are saved in a Studies.xml file stored in the A9155 installation directory. These
templates contain settings of reference studies set in their General, condition and display tab properties.

To delete an existing study template proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New...,
Select from the list the study template (customized studies) you want to delete,
Click the button,
Click OK to close the dialog.


Note : you can also delete globally all the customized studies by deleting the Studies.xml file in the A9155 directory.

V.5.4 PATH LOSS MANAGEMENT
V.5.4.a STORAGE OF PATH LOSS MATRICES
The first step of coverage predictions consist in the determination of the path loss matrices associated with each active
and filtered transmitter in the network. This is automatically made for the first coverage prediction. Results (path loss
matrices) may be stored either directly in the current atl project or can be externalised either in the same directory than
the .atl project or in any directory you can specify.


To set the location of the path loss matrices of an .atl A9155 project, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Properties... option from the scrolling menu,
In the Predictions tab, click on the button and choose a location to store multi-resolution path loss
matrices:
Embedded: matrices are included in the .atl document.
\<ATL_name>.losses: Multi-resolution matrices are stored in an external folder located in the same
directory as the .atl document. A9155 memorises a relative path to access path loss matrices. By
default, this folder is called <ATL_name>.losses (<ATL_name> is the name of the .atl document).
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 183/476


Nevertheless, it is possible to change the folder name afterwards; all the names are supported.
When using the Save as command, A9155 creates a new folder associated to the new .atl document
in the same directory; this folder contains path loss matrices and has the same name as the .atl
document. No recalculation occurs if you move the .atl document and its related path loss matrix
folder in another directory.
Browse: In this case, specify the directory where you want to save path loss matrices and click on
OK. A9155 memorises the whole path to access path loss matrices. The path can be manually typed
or modified. In that case, A9155 works differently than in the previous option when using the Save
as command. It only creates the new .atl document.
Use the What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window,
Click OK to validate.


When externalising path loss results, A9155 creates an external folder containing :
One .los file per transmitter ; it corresponds to its main path loss matrix.
A .dbf file giving validity information for all the main matrices.
A folder called LowRes dedicated to extended path loss matrices.
This folder contains one .los file per transmitter, which has an extended path loss matrix, and a .dbf file giving validity
information for all the extended matrices.

Using this option, calculations are no longer stored in the .atl file. This feature enables the user to store bigger
calculations in external files without storage size limitation (2 Gbytes for a file).

Caution : the external files are updated without saving the A9155 environment as soon as calculations are performed.
To keep consistency with the stored calculations, the corresponding A9155 environment must be saved before closing.

Notes :
Since the dbf file has a standard format, its contents can be checked by opening it in Access.
This feature allows you to create matrices that will sharable between several users.
In the case of a project in which some matrices were initially embedded, A9155 provides a feature that compresses
.atl files when getting out

V.5.4.b LOCKING PATH LOSS RESULTS
This feature enables you to let freeze any path loss matrix, even if invalid when using the Calculate button.
Nevertheless, all existing (even locked) matrices are recalculated if you use the Force calculation button during
calculations.


There are two ways to lock path loss matrices, either from the Predictions global properties in a table form, or from any
transmitter properties.


To lock/unlock propagation results (one transmitter at a time), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Transmitters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the transmitter you want to lock the associated path loss matrix,
Choose the Properties option from the open scrolling menu,
Or
Double click on the transmitter you want to lock the associated path loss matrix
Click on the Propagation tab,
Check/Uncheck the Locked box,
Use the What's this get description about other fields available in the current window,
Click OK to validate.


To lock/unlock propagation results (possibly on several transmitters), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Result storage... option from the open scrolling menu,
Either
Check/Uncheck the Locked box associated with the transmitters you want to lock/unlock the
Managing computations in A9155


184/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


associated path loss matrix,
Or
Select the transmitters you want to lock path loss matrix,
Choose the Lock/Unlock option from the Action button,
Use the What's this get description about other fields available in the current window,
Click OK to validate.


Notes :
Be careful not to mix up locking matrices with locking calculations.
It is possible to lock/unlock matrices from the context menu of the Propagation tab of the Transmitter global
properties.

V.5.4.c CHECKING PATH LOSS RESULTS VALIDITY
This feature enables you to check if current path loss results are consistent with the current radio parameters. There are
two ways to check path loss matrices validity, either from the Predictions global properties in a table form, or from any
transmitter properties. If validity is not ok, you may calculate path loss matrices again in order to keep consistency.
Reasons of invalidity are displayed for each transmitter.


To check propagation results validity (one transmitter at a time), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Transmitters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the transmitter you want to check the associated path loss matrix validity,
Choose the Properties option from the open scrolling menu,
Or
Double click on the transmitter you want to check the associated path loss matrices validity,
Click on the Propagation tab,
Check the label displayed in the Validity line. If the label is "No", the invalidity reason is given just below,
Use the What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window,
Click OK to validate.


To check propagation results validity (possibly on several transmitters), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Properties... option from the open scrolling menu,
Click on the Propagation tab,
Check the label displayed in the Validity column. If the label is "No", the invalidity reason is given on the
same line,
Use the What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window,
Click OK to validate.

From this dialog box, it is possible to know how many transmitter path loss data must be recalculated in order to be
consistent with the current radio configuration before starting calculations. Only matrices dealing with active transmitters
are taken into account in that case. To do so, click on the button. The number is automatically given in the
dialog. The number of transmitters available in the current network is also indicated.

Notes :
It is possible to check the validity of existing path loss matrices from the [Predictions: Result storage...] command.
A9155 manages path loss matrix validity, transmitter by transmitter, even in case transmitters have main and
extended path loss matrices. Therefore, even if only one path loss matrix of the transmitter is invalid, A9155 will
recalculate both of them.
In the Results storage dialog and in the Propagation tab of the Transmitters property dialog, A9155 lists calculated
transmitters (transmitters with main and extended matrices) without distinguishing main path loss matrices from
extended ones.

V.5.4.d EXPORTING MAIN PATH LOSS MATRICES
Existing main path loss matrices may be exported in external files in order to be used in external applications. For the
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 185/476


export, the user must select the type of value to export (Path loss or Signal levels). If Signal level is selected, units have
to be chosen.
Furthermore, A9155 enables the user to select the storage file format (binary, text or table).


To export one or several path loss matrices, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Result storage... option from the open scrolling menu,
Select the transmitter(s) from which you want to export the existing main matrix,
Use the What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window,
Choose the Export... option from the Action button,
Choose the directory, the format, and the field to export,
Click OK to validate.

Two files are created by exported matrix. One is the exported field, the other, the georeferencement file related to the
involved transmitter and its related calculation area.

Possible exports are :
Attenuations in dB ;
Signal levels in dBm, dBV or dBV/m.

Possible file formats to export values are :
Binary format : .bil ;
Text : .txt with tab as separating character ;
Table : .csv with semicolon as separating character.

Caution : take care not to mix-up with externalising path loss matrices (where each matrix is "made" of a .par and .los
file)

Note : Secondary matrices, linked with extended calculation radius, cannot be exported.

V.5.5 PREDICTION COVERAGE OUTPUTS
V.5.5.a MANAGING PREDICTION RESULTS : OVERVIEW
A9155 contains several features in order to manage prediction results. Prediction results concern both coverages or
matrices.

From available results, it is possible to display associated statistical reports on the coverage zones associated with each
prediction study, and to easily export or print them.

When a coverage display is satisfactory, it is possible to lock it in order to create further comparative coverage with
different parameters.

Depending on their type, coverage results may be exported in vector or raster formats. Exported data are covered areas
and related threshold definition.

Another A9155 feature allows you a complete management of path loss matrices related to transmitters. Firstly, it is
possible to lock only some path loss matrices (even if invalid), while calculating path loss matrices from other transmitters
of the network. Then, it is possible to check the validity of current matrices regarding the current radio parameters. Then,
these path loss matrices my also be exported in order to be used in external applications.

Results (path loss matrix for each transmitter) may be either directly embedded to any current project, or outsourced to
an external folder, in order to let them available from other users. Indeed, A9155 permits to share propagation results
stored in an external folder between several users. Therefore, this special results storage permits to use in the same
project, both external results for some transmitters and private results for others. This part is treated in the specific multi-
users chapter.


Note : even if several cells can be defined per transmitter in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000, only one path loss matrix is
computed per transmitter, powers not being parameters of interest for matrix computation.

Managing computations in A9155


186/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


V.5.5.b DISPLAYING PREDICTION REPORTS
A9155 provides a report editing feature on all available prediction for any project type. These can be done either for each
single prediction or for all displayed prediction ( box checked for predictions in the Predictions folder from which you
want a report). Reports are displayed in a table form and their content can be managed like in any other table.

When a report table is active, columns can be managed by using the columns to display option from the Format menu.
On first opening, the report will only display the name and coverage areas columns.

To edit a report about any displayed coverage, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Predictions folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Prediction from which you want a report to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Report option from the scrolling menu,
The associated report is then displayed as a new window,
Choose the Display columns... option from the Format menu,
Check the boxes associated with the related information to display as columns is the current report.

Notes :
You may display simultaneously report on all displayed coverages by using the Report option from the Predictions
folder context menu. The obtained report concerns all displayed predictions, and is organised in the same order than
the one defined in the Explorer window Data tab.
Columns to display are either related to the global coverage or to each transmitter taking part into the coverage.
In GSM/GPRS projects, reports dealing with traffic data are base on the default traffic analysis

V.5.5.c EXPORTING PREDICTION REPORTS
The report on any coverage prediction can be exported to any other Office-like application. To do so, like for any other
table in A9155, perform a copy and paste action for the entire report, then reformat the text if required (change into a
table, modify, etc...).

You may also export the displayed map (including currently displayed results) and the results from the point analysis
window to any other application program supporting image data format.

V.5.5.d PRINTING PREDICTION REPORTS
You can use A9155 to print both characteristics tables and reports as well as maps with their coverage.

To print a prediction report, proceed as follows :
Make active a report window,
Choose the Print... option from the File menu in the menu bar,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Adjust the printing parameters (We assume that your printer is correctly configured for your Windows
applications. If this is not the case, first use the Print configuration... option),
Click OK to validate and activate the printing.

Print reports can be centred on the sheet and possibly spread over a number of sheets for large-scale tables. Cell sizes
are then displayed on the screen.

Comment : When printing a report, a footnote is created automatically in order to indicate the date (in month/day/year
format) and the time of printing as well as the page numbering.

V.5.5.e EXPORTING PREDICTION COVERAGES
With A9155, it is possible to export the coverage areas resulting from any coverage prediction in Bmp or Tiff raster
formats or in ArcView, MapInfo or Agd vector formats. Of course, it is possible to only export predictions that have
been calculated beforehand. Exporting coverage predictions allows the user to generate data file easy to import as
vector or raster objects within A9155 or within other applications. For each exported prediction (total or for a transmitter),
the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage. All coverage type can be exported.


To export any prediction coverage zone, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 187/476


Expand the Predictions folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Prediction from which you want to export the coverage zones,
Choose the Export... option from the scrolling menu,
Choose the name, the format and the path for the file to be exported,
Click on the Save button to validate,
Check or modify the reference coordinate system for the file to be exported (if needed - vector format),
Click the Export button to achieve the prediction export.


Notes :
Be very careful about the accuracy of the coordinate system format to export. Indeed, when selecting a different
coordinate system than the one initially defined within A9155, the file is converted thanks to this other coordinate
system.
Under A9155, shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.
Raster format export is not possible when the coverage is made per transmitter (coverage studies with display type
per transmitter, per any transmitter attribute, per signal level, per path loss, per total losses). In this case, only
coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in BMP or TIFF raster format.

See Coverage prediction available exports

V.5.5.f COVERAGE PREDICTION AVAILABLE EXPORTS
Depending on the type of prediction, the following exports are possible :

Prediction Possible export

Overlapping
Coverage by signal level
Coverage by C/I level
Pilot pollution
Downlink total noise The total coverage
handover status
GPRS/EDGE max rate per timeslot
GPRS/EDGE coding scheme


Coverage by transmitter
Interfered zones
Service area (Eb/Nt) uplink The total coverage
Service area (Eb/Nt) downlink Coverage of each transmitter
Effective service area
Pilot reception analysis Ec/Io


For each exported prediction (global or for a single transmitter), the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle
encompassing the coverage

Note : exporting coverage zones by transmitter is possible only when the coverage study item is made of transmitter
sub-items.

V.6 POINT ANALYSIS PREDICTIONS
V.6.1 POINT ANALYSIS PREDICTIONS : OVERVIEW
A9155 contains several propagation models for specific needs. Once the choice has been made, the associated
parameters have been set and the receiver has been tuned, you are able to make radiowave propagation predictions.
Moreover, A9155 provides a point analysis tool allowing you, in the standard case (for all types of projects),
to study reception along a profile between from a reference transmitter in real time (no matrix needed),
to evaluate the signal levels coming from the surrounding transmitters at a given point (using existing path loss
matrices).

Managing computations in A9155


188/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Furthermore, this tool is very helpful in the analysis of cases related to specific technologies. With this, you can :
evaluate interferences on a selected transmitter at a given point, and determine the interferers and associated noise
levels in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects,
make a complete active set analysis at a given point for a probe UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 user moving in the
network with a particular behaviour. This tool will help you to study also, at a point, the pilot reception and the
connection status.
These specific studies are available in their specific parts.

Of course due to the fact that several powers can be defined on an identical transmitter (at the subcell level in
GSM/GPRS/EDGE or at the cell level in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000), point analysis window provides the possibility to
select either the TRX type or the carrier of the study.

Using the Standard Propagation Model, it is possible to obtain further data along a terrain profile with the point analysis.
Other tools like export ease, link budget, the possibility to adjust in real time reliability level, etc...are also available


Note : like for coverage predictions, and because propagation models may be defined either in the Predictions folder or
in the Transmitters folder, you must be very careful to its priority order. The propagation model defined with transmitters
is taken first compared to the one defined with Predictions (See Selecting and managing propagation models).

V.6.2 DISPLAYING POINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
V.6.2.a USING THE RECEIVER
To make the point analysis active, just click on the icon (or check the Point analysis in the View menu). When this is
made, you can move on the active map, and have displayed in Point analysis window the profile analysis between a
given transmitter and the current location, the predictions from all the surrounding transmitters, and specific
GSM/GPRS/EDGE or CDMA/UMTS studies.

If you click on the map, the receiver is fixed on a particular point. To move it again, just click the icon, and drag it
over the map.

V.6.2.b STUDYING THE PROFILE FROM A TRANSMITTER
With the point analysis tool, A9155 is able to display a view of the terrain profile between a given station and the point
defined by the receiver on the map using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect). Results
are given in real time (no need for path loss matrices).

To make active the reception profile window :
From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu,
The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment,
Left click on the Profile tab,
Select the transmitter on which you want to base the prediction from the associated scrolling list,
Either
Click the button in the Point analysis window,
Or
Click the button from the toolbar,
The data appearing on the profiles (ellipses, clutter, etc.) will be function of the considered model (See
below).


In this profile tab window, A9155 indicates the propagation model associated with the selected transmitter; this model is
used for analysis. You may choose to display either the signal or several losses at any point. You can also choose the
item level at which the power(s) of each transmitter are defined (TRX type or carrier).


The altitude (expressed in metres) is reported on the vertical scale. A green line shows the line of sight (LOS) from the
studied transmitter and A9155 displays the angle of the LOS read in the antenna vertical pattern. Along the profile, if the
signal meets an obstacle, this causes an attenuation with diffraction symbolized by a red vertical line (if the model used
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 189/476


takes into account diffraction mechanisms). The main peak taken into account is the one that intersects the most the
Fresnel ellipsoid. Any attenuation that occurs is then calculated in one hand, between the station and the main peak, in
the other hand, between the main peak and the receiver. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout
diffraction method, the result may then show up two new attenuations peaks in addition to the main peak. The various
peaks are identified by red lines. The attenuation generated by all the peaks is displayed above the main peak.


Profile with ITU 526-5, Okumura-Hata or Cost-Hata model
When you use the ITU 526-5, Okumura-Hata or Cost-Hata models, Fresnel ellipsoids (blue) will appear on the profile and
possible diffraction peaks will be represented by a red line. The attenuation generated by these peaks will be displayed
above the main peak.

Profile with WLL model
When you use the WLL model, clutters will also appear on the profile in addition to DTM.
As for the previous models, the Fresnel ellipsoids (in blue) and possible diffraction peaks due to the DTM and/or clutters
symbolized by red lines with attenuation calculated for all these peaks are displayed above the main peak.

Profile with the Longley-Rice and Vienna 93 models
Only the first Fresnel ellipsoid and the terrain profile appear for these two models.

Profile with the Standard Propagation model
Peaks of diffraction are displayed regarding to the selected method (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction
and Millington). Both the terrain profile and the clutter (and its height, if defined) appear using this model. A report
containing information on transmitter-receiver profile can be displayed.

V.6.2.c DISPLAYING PREDICTED SIGNAL LEVELS AT A POINT
With the point analysis tool, A9155 is able to display the signal from active transmitters in a network at the point defined
by the receiver on the map by using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect).

To make active the reception window :
From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu,
The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment,
Left click on the Reception tab,
Click the button from the toolbar,
Move over the current map to the places where you want to make your analysis.


The value of the different signal levels coming from different transmitters is reported in the Reception window in bar form,
from top to bottom from the highest predicted signal level to the lowest one. Displayed bars have the same colours as
defined for each transmitter.

Notes :
Displaying the predicted signal level at a point is possible only if path loss matrices have been already determined. To
do this, you must have previously executed any coverage prediction or simulations (CDMA/CDMA2000, UMTS)
before using the point analysis tool.
You can choose the item level at which the power(s) of each transmitter are defined (TRX type or Carrier),
IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, it is possible to select the HCS layer on which you want to study signal levels.
For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 studies, that is the pilot power which is displayed in this window whereas it is the
Ec/Io which is given in the AS analysis window.

V.6.2.d LISTING ALL SIGNAL AND C/I LEVELS AT A POINT
In addition to the studies with point analysis of the profile from a transmitter, predicted signals from surrounding
transmitters, and, potentially interferences in case of GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, A9155 provides an additional tab in
the point analysis window allowing you to display, in the same window, general information at the receiver.

So, A9155 provides in the Results tab of the Point analysis window:
General information on the receiver: its coordinates (stated in the Display coordinate system) and the clutter class
which it is located on,
The signal level received from each transmitter containing the receiver in its calculation area, (Transmitters are sorted
in a descending signal level order),
C/I levels due to surrounding transmitters, first both in co-channel and adjacent cases, then in adjacent channel case
only (studying always the most interfered TRX) in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects.
Managing computations in A9155


190/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Notes :
Displaying interference levels at a point is possible only if path loss matrices have been already determined. To do
this, you must have previously executed any coverage prediction or simulations (CDMA/CDMA2000, UMTS) before
using the point analysis tool.
Interferences are possible only if some channels have been allocated to TRXs.
You can choose the item level at which the power(s) of each transmitter are defined (TRX type or Carrier),
IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, it is possible to select the HCS layer on which you want to study signal levels.
For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 studies, that is the pilot power which is displayed in this window whereas it is the
Ec/Io which is given in the AS analysis window.
V.6.3 MANAGING POINT ANALYSIS
V.6.3.a SELECTING A TRANSMITTER IN POINT ANALYSIS
When studying reception profile and interferences using the point analysis tool, it is possible to display results at an
identical point for several transmitters.

To do so, when using the point analysis icon over the map as a moving receiver, click on the map at the location
you want to study different transmitters. Then, the receiver is fixed on the map. In the Point analysis window (Profile or
Interference tab), select the transmitter to study then. Results are automatically displayed in the Point analysis window.

V.6.3.b SELECTING THE POWER DEFINITION ITEM IN POINT ANALYSIS
Depending on the considered technology, power can be defined with different values within the same transmitters. The
point analysis window allows you to select the level at which several powers can be defined for the same transmitter.
Hence, you can select :
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the TRX type (BCCH, TCH or TCH_INNER) over which to study the profile. Choosing the (All)
option takes the TRX type with the highest signal level
In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000, the carrier, assuming that several cells can be assigned to a transmitter, each cell
characterising a carrier on a transmitter. Choosing the (All) option takes the carrier where the related cell has the
highest signal level.

This feature is available both when working in the Profile, Reception, Interference, Results and AS Analysis tabs in
UMTS/CDMA. Nevertheless, concerning the last one, the (all) option (for cells) works regarding the carrier selection
mode as defined in the site equipment (UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000)

V.6.3.c ADJUSTING RELIABILITY LEVEL IN A POINT ANALYSIS
A9155 allows the user to display the properties of a probe receiver used in a point analysis window. Depending on the
tab in use (reception profile, predicted signal, interference analysis, Results, and AS Analysis tabs in UMTS/CDMA, it is
possible to display different pieces of information.

The reliability level can be set at the receiver level, in order to calculate shadowing margins (using standard deviation
defined per clutter class) to apply to computed path loss (made by the model).

In any tab window of the point analysis window, to access the reliability setting box, proceed as follows :
Right click in the current Point analysis window,
Choose the Properties... option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the value of the reliability level (and UL SHO gains in UMTS/CDMA),
The related shadowing margin value is automatically displayed,
Click OK to close the dialog.


Notes :
When the reliability level is greater than 50%, shadowing margin values are not null only if standard deviations are
defined for clutter classes.
If no clutter data is available, shadowing margin will be set to 0dB, and UL soft handover gain will be set to the default
global value (defined in the Transmitter global parameters in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000),
In UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations, these losses are evaluated by computing random shadowing errors
and are added to the model path loss.
C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 191/476


V.6.3.d DISPLAYING SIGNAL LEVELS OR LOSSES IN POINT ANALYSIS
A9155 allows the user to display the properties of a probe receiver used in a point analysis window. Depending on the
tab in use (reception profile, predicted signal, interference analysis, Results, and AS Analysis tabs in UMTS/CDMA, it is
possible to display different pieces of information.

Hence, you can choose to display results at a given point in term of path loss, total losses or signal level in the Profile tab
of the point analysis window. This can also be made as a coverage condition.

In the Profile tab window, to access the result type box, proceed as follows :
Right click in the current Point analysis window,
Choose the Properties... option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Choose to display either the signal level, path loss or total losses in the Result type scrolling box,
Click OK to close the dialog and validate your choice.


The available study criteria are detailed in the table below.

Study criteria Formulas
Signal level (
rec
P
)
( )
Rx ant Shadowing path rec
L
G
M L EIRP P
Rx
+ =

Path loss (
path
L
)
L
L L
ant path
Tx
+ =
model

Total losses (Total-Losses)
( ) ( )
G G
L L M L Losses Total
ant ant Rx Tx Shadowing path
Rx Tx
+ + + + =


Note : In case of coverage studies, it is possible to calculate the signal level at the receiver in dBm, dBV or dBV/m.

V.6.3.e DISPLAYING LINK BUDGET AT A RECEIVER
A9155 allows the user to display the link budget at a receiver along a path profile. The link budget is made of powers,
gains and losses composing the resulting signal level.


To display the link budget box at any point, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu,
Left click on the Profile tab,
Right click in the current Point analysis window,
Choose the Link budget... option from the context menu.

V.6.3.f USING A SITE AS A TARGET FOR POINT ANALYSIS
A9155 provides a feature in order to drop the receiver used for point analysis on the exact location of an existing site,
using any tab (reception profile, predicted signal, interference analysis, Results, or AS Analysis tabs in UMTS/CDMA of
the point analysis window.

To put the point analysis tool on an existing site, proceed as follows :
Make active the point analysis,
Right click on the receiver to open the associated context menu,
Select the Target site command from the open scrolling menu,
In the Target site dialog, choose one existing site from the scrolling list,
Click OK to close the dialog.

V.6.3.g DISPLAYING SPM PARAMETERS OVER A PROFILE ANALYSIS
When using Standard Propagation model, you may display a report containing information on transmitter-receiver profile.

To get it, proceed as follows :
Right click on the profile part of the current window in order to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Model details command from the displayed menu.


The default text editor. In this report, A9155 gives the number of points taken into account along the transmitter-receiver
Managing computations in A9155


192/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


path and details for every point:
The distance between the point and the transmitter (Dist) in m,
The ground height (Alt) in m,
The ground height with earth curvature consideration (Gr H) in m,
The total height (Tot H) in m: Tot H = Gr H + clutter height.

Note : At the transmitter (first point in the list) or at the receiver (last point in the list), we respectively have: Tot H = Gr H
+ Clutter height + HTx and Tot H = Gr H + Clutter height + HRx, where, HTx and HRx are respectively transmitter and
receiver antenna heights above the ground (m).

The clutter class,
The filtered total height (Flt H) in m. A9155 determines this parameter only when the Enhanced slope at
receiver method is selected.

Then, it recapitulates effective transmitter antenna height (Tx effective height), K1 and K2 parameters used in
calculations (Far or Near, LOS or NLOS) and detailed propagation results. Correction for low Tx effective height, are
different from zero.

V.6.3.h EXPORTING A POINT ANALYSIS STUDY
Whatever the point analysis on which you are working (reception profile, predicted signal level, interference analysis, and
AS Analysis - UMTS/CDMA - tabs) is, A9155 allows the user to export a result as displayed in the Point analysis window
as in image in any application.

To do so, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu,
The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment,
Choose the tab associated with your current study,
Make your results displayed,
Right click in the Point analysis window,
Choose the Copy option from the context menu,
Switch to another application supporting any format image,
Paste the current content of your clipboard by :
Either
by using the Ctrl+V shortcut,
Or
by choosing the Paste command from the Edit menu.

V.6.3.i PRINTING A POINT ANALYSIS STUDY
Whatever the point analysis on which you are working (reception profile, predicted signal level, interference analysis, and
AS Analysis - UMTS/CDMA - tabs) is, A9155 allows the user to print a result as displayed in the Point analysis window :

To do so, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu,
The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment,
Choose the tab associated with your current study,
Make your results displayed,
Right click on the Point analysis window,
Choose the Print... option from the context menu,
The Print dialog window opens,
Choose the appropriate printing parameters,
Click OK to start printing.

C H A P T E R 5


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 193/476


V.7 CALCULATION TOOLS IN A9155
V.7.1 A9155 FEATURES FOR COMPUTING
A9155 provides a multi-thread feature allowing you to spread the some computations on several processors. Hence,
A9155 can use two processors of the local machine for propagation computations, UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000
simulations and coverage studies (standard or specific GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000) and automatic
scrambling code allocation.

This feature is automatic. That means that, on a dual-processor pc, each processor works out one path loss matrix, one
prediction study or one simulation. Therefore, calculation times are divided in two.

It is also possible to distribute path loss calculation using several Pcs on the same time.

V.7.2 DISTRIBUTING CALCULATIONS ON SEVERAL PCS
A9155 provides you the possibility to share computations using two processors of a multi-processors PC. Moreover,
another feature enables you to distribute path loss calculations on several workstations. The A9155 package provides a
computing server application; it can be installed either on workstations or servers and used by A9155 sessions installed
on other stations. Once the computing server application is installed on a workstation, this one is considered as a
potential calculation server for other workstations with computing server application. Therefore, a user can distribute
calculations of path loss matrices on another workstation if the computing server application is installed on his
workstation and the other one.

This application (working only on path loss matrix computations) supports dual-processor configurations. Once the
computing server application is installed on some computation servers, the distributed computation feature is possible for
other computers of the network.

To activate the distributed calculation on a local workstation, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, select the Distributed calculation... command in the Tools menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Check the Activate the distributed calculation option,
Either,
Type the name of calculation servers, which you want to distribute computations on (use semicolon
as separator). A9155 automatically saves the list of calculation servers to be used in an Atoll.ini file
located in the A9155 installation directory. The file has the following syntax:

[RemoteCalculation]
Servers=Workstation_1;Workstation_2

If the list is empty, A9155 considers that the distributed calculation option is inactive. Then, computations are run on the
local workstation.

Or,
When clicking on the Detect button, A9155 searches and displays all the potential calculation
servers you can use.
Or,
When clicking on the All button, A9155 displays the symbol * in the Use servers dialog. In this case,
it will scan all the potential calculation servers when starting calculations. A9155 will use all the
found calculation servers.
Click OK to validate your choice.

When starting propagation computations, A9155 searches the calculation servers of the list and distributes calculations
on the found servers. It displays in the Events tab the found calculation servers.


Notes :
If calculation servers entered in the list are not available (workstation is off), computations are run on the local
workstation.
The distributed calculations do not work in case of embedded geographic data and ISTAR format maps (*.ist).
Several users can distribute their computations on the same calculation server. Path loss matrices are not
simultaneously calculated but one at a time (e.g. 1
st
matrix from user1, 1
st
matrix from user2 and so on)
Managing computations in A9155


194/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


An Atoll.ini file can be prepared by an administrator in order to specify the computing servers, and marked as read
only.
This calculation server(s) uses 1 A9155 licence per pair of processors. Of course, each pair of processors of each
client uses also a licence.
Floating licence are not mandatory using the A9155 calculation server feature.

V.7.3 DISPLAYING CALCULATION EVENTS IN A LOG WINDOW
An event viewer window is available in A9155. To make it open, use the View menu. This window consists of two tabs,
the Events and Tasks tabs.

Events tab
A9155 lists some events and provides for each of them, the type, the hour the event occurred and a description. Events
detailed in the Events tab concern PlaNET imports and calculations (path loss matrices and coverage studies). You may
encounter three types of events, displayed with a specific symbol:
- Errors occurred during PlaNET import or calculations: A9155 does not stop the import or calculation process; it
automatically opens the Events tab to warn you,
- Warnings about minor problems happened during calculations. Be careful, A9155 does not open the Events tab to
inform you,
- Information on time a calculation or PlaNET import process is started and ended.

Some features in order to manage events are available. To access them, right click on the window in order to open the
related context menu. Then you will be able to :
- Delete the selected event(s) (Clear command),
- Delete all the events (Clear all command),
- Copy the event description in the clipboard (Copy command),
- Display the entire event description (Properties command).

Tasks tab
The Tasks tab enables you to visualise progress of path loss matrix, prediction study, UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000
simulation calculations and neighbour allocation.

As calculation progress is managed in the Tasks tab, it is possible to work with A9155 while calculations start.

The Tasks tab is automatically open as soon as calculations are started.

To interrupt calculations, click on the button, available in the Tasks tab.

Notes :
Messages listed in the events tab can be saved in a log file.
The log window is automatically magnetised within the other set of A9155 windows. To break this magnetism, and
freely move this window, use the CTRL key when dragging it.

V.7.4 EXPORTING CALCULATION EVENTS IN A LOG FILE
The Event viewer window contains two tabs : Events and Tasks. The events tab displays details about processes and
potential errors, information and warnings.

Messages listed in this tab can be saved in a .log file. To do that, add an option when starting A9155 from a command
line, with the syntax above :
C:\Program Files\Alcatel\A9155\Atoll.exe -log C:\.\events.log



C H A P T E R 6

























GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management
6
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


196/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 197/476


VI GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA PROJECT MANAGEMENT
VI.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE PROJECTS : OVERVIEW
GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) and DCS ((Digital Communications System) are radio technologies
using TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) principles, each on a different frequency band.

In TDMA technologies, users are spread over frequency bands made of physical channels. Each of these physical
channels is divided into a certain number of logical channels called timeslots. The norm in standard TDMA is 8 timeslots
per channel. This means that a channel can carry simultaneously 8 speaking users.

Even if users on a same physical channel do not interferer each other (spread on time), every data carried on a physical
channel can be potentially interfered by other communications occurring on co-channel or on adjacent channel. The goal
of planning such a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network will be to provide a sufficient coverage to cover a maximum area, to
assign to transmitters enough channels in order to absorb the traffic demand by limiting interferences in the network.

GPRS (Global Packet Radio Service) and EDGE (Enhanced Data-rates for GSM - or Global - Evolution) are 2.5th
numeric telephony norms working around the 900-1800 MHz band, using the also TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access)
technology as classical GSM norm. Contrary to GSM working in circuit switched mode, EDGE and GPRS use timeslot
working on packet switched mode, but can be mixed with GSM timeslots on transmitters.

GSM and GPRS/EDGE projects share the same template. A station will be able to allow both GSM and GPRS services
depending on its properties. This will be set at the subcell level with timeslot either dedicated to circuit, packet or
composite services.

Each transmitter dealing with GPRS/EDGE must have a piece of GPRS/EDGE equipment. A9155 allows the user to
either create or modify easily these equipment. These are linked with so-called coding schemes functions of C or C/I
thresholds. GPRS technology provides 4 coding schemes whereas EDGE can offer 9. With A9155, you can set these
coding schemes and display their effects in graphs.

Since GPRS/EDGE technology is based on GSM norm, it is possible to define or not, in the same network, transmitters
as GPRS/EDGE stations.

Compared to GSM norm, GPRS/EDGE provides the support of larger amounts of data services. Moreover, this
technology permits to carry more data per timeslot. Depending on the radio data and the number of timeslots dedicated
to packet service transmissions for the transmitters part of the current network, A9155 can determine the average
capacity per timeslot per transmitter.

Geo data are easily manageable as in the other projects. You may either create or import any of these data. Sites,
antennas, station templates, transmitters, measurements, and propagation models work in the same way for
GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects than for the other technology types. Nevertheless, the complexity of such a modelling has
led to the introduction of several specific radio data for GSM/GPRS/EDGE in order to optimise the management of radio
resources. As many objects in A9155, these data are easy to manage and use generic dialogs.

Multi-service traffic can be fully managed in A9155 through the settings of GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters (services,
mobility types, terminals, user profiles, environments), multi-service cartography (maps per environment, per user profile,
live traffic, user density). Mixing the network and all these multi-service data, traffic is spread using the traffic capture
feature.

Thanks to it, and by the use of a dimensioning model, it is possible to determine the requested number of TRXs to
absorb the traffic with regard to quality requirements. The resource allocation can be made either manually or by using
an Automatic Frequency Planning.

Even if all common studies are available (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level, overlapping) with some
specific conditions due to GSM/GPRS/EDGE, A9155 provides also some other specific coverage studies dealing with
interferences : interfered zones and coverage by C/I level and specific GPRS/EDGE coverages : coding schemes and
throughput per timeslot.

The resulting network can be analysed thanks to the availability of different tools dealing with frequency plan check,
channel location search and KPI calculation.

The What's this context tool allows the user to understand the specific GSM/GPRS/EDGE fields and features available in
the several dialog boxes.

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


198/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VI.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE PROJECTS PROTOCOL
A classical GSM/GPRS/EDGE project protocol, within A9155, is described below :

Project initialisation
Choice of a project template
Definition projection and display coordinate systems
Definition of length, reception and transmission units

Definition of geographic data through the import or the creation of maps
Clutter classes
Clutter heights
DTM
Vector data
Population data
Generic data
...

Common coverage studies (by transmitter, by signal level, HCS layers, etc...)

Network design : Setting radio data
Determination of domains and groups (frequencies, BSICs, HSNs)
Setup of cell types
Definition and tuning of transmitters and subcells
Coding scheme definitions
Setup of GPRS/EDGE equipment

Definition of multi-service traffic parameters
Services
Mobility types
Terminals
User profiles
Environments

Definition of the traffic through the import or the creation of maps
Traffic maps per environment
Traffic maps per user profile
Live traffic maps
User density traffic maps

Capture of the traffic to analyse the demand

Dimensioning of the network
Dimensioning model settings
Required number of TRXs per transmitter to absorb the input traffic
Determination of the traffic load per transmitter

Definition of the neighbours manually or automatically

Resource manual allocation
Manual allocation of frequencies
Manual allocation of BCCH
Manual allocation of BSICs
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Automatic Frequency Planning

Checking of the network allocations
Frequency plan checking
Channel search tool
KPI calculation

GSM/GPRS/EDGE oriented prediction studies
Interference areas
Coverage by C/I level
Coverage by coding schemes
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 199/476


Coverage by rates per timeslot
VI.3 DEFINING GSM/GPRS/EDGE RESOURCES
VI.3.1 DEFINING GSM/GPRS/EDGE RESOURCES : OVERVIEW
In A9155, radio network modelling needs the management of specific radio resources data in GSM/GPRS/EDGE
projects :
Frequencies
HSNs (Hopping Sequence Number)
BSICs (NCC-BCC pairs)

As many other objects in A9155, these parameters have been integrated to the tool with a will to make their
management and their use easy. These parameters are used as inputs for cell types, subcells and TRXs in stations.

The resources are organised in domains, each domain being potentially made of several groups. During the resource
allocation, only items belonging to the defined domains will be allowed to be chosen.

Note : for frequencies, the top layer is the frequency band. A frequency domain (made of several groups) will be a part of
a frequency band.

VI.3.2 FREQUENCIES
VI.3.2.a FREQUENCIES : OVERVIEW
In A9155, for a complete exploitation of frequencies, it is possible to define frequency domains and groups based on
standard frequency bands.

A domain is a set of groups; it consists of one or several groups. A frequency domain belongs to a frequency band; it
is a subset of the frequency band.
A group is a set of channels. A frequency group belongs to one or several frequency domains; it is a subset of
frequency domains.

Manual and automatic frequency planning is based on frequency domains assigned to the TRX types in cell types.

The creation and the management of frequency domains and groups, like for many other objects in A9155 is always
easy and clear.

VI.3.2.b MANAGING FREQUENCY BANDS
Frequency bands represent the reference frequency set that frequency groups and domains (which include specific
rules, steps and exclusions) refer to. Frequency bands can be seen as a fixed item, whereas groups and domains are
the frequency subsets that can be managed in order to scheck to available frequency lists.


Frequency band properties can be accessed in two ways, either from a frequency band table, either from a frequency
band dialog.

To open the frequency band dialog, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the Properties option from the open menu,
Click on the Frequencies tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about available fields in the open window,
Either
Select the frequency band you want to manage,
Click the modify button to open the associated dialog,
Or,
Double click the frequency band you want to manage.
Click the General tab,
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


200/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Define the frequency band parameters,
Click OK to validate your choice,
Click again OK to close the transmitters properties dialog box.


Notes :
The Frequency domains tab lists the domains related to the current frequency band,
Addition, deletion of frequency bands are made using respectively the and buttons,
The button helps you to manage the content of the frequency band table (See below).


To open the frequency band table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Network settings : Frequency bands...] command from the open menu,
Define the parameters of each frequency band.


Notes :
The dialog of each frequency band (see above) is reachable by either double clicking the related record in the table,
or by using the button once a record is selected,
The button helps you to manage the content of the frequency band table.
An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the Frequency band table.

VI.3.2.c MANAGING FREQUENCY DOMAINS AND GROUPS
For an easier resource management, frequency domain and group tables are available. Frequency domains are linked to
types of TRXs. When defining a cell type, you must assign a frequency domain to each TRX type.

To define domains and groups of frequencies, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Network settings : Domains : Frequencies] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Domains dialog, enter a domain per line and specify the related frequency band. To validate a
domain creation, select another line.
Either
Select a domain in the table and click on the Properties button.
Or
Select the line relating to a domain and double click on it.
In the domain properties dialog, specify the name of group(s) that you want to associate to this domain and
define for each of them:
- The lowest available frequency (Min channel number),
- The highest available frequency (Max channel number),
- The value interval between the frequencies (Step between channels),
- Frequency (frequencies) you do not want to use (Excluded channel numbers). You can paste a list of
channels; separator must be a blank character,
- Additional frequency (frequencies) you want to consider during allocation (Extra channel numbers).
You can paste a list of channels; separator must be a blank character.


You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of frequencies window.

To do so, proceed as follows :
After defining all the domains, close the Domains dialog,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Network settings : Groups : Frequencies] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Group of frequencies window, select a domain and associate one or several groups of frequencies to
each of them. Define the groups as explained above.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 201/476



The defined domains can be now assigned to TRX types of each cell type in order then to be used as constraints in the
automatic allocation of frequencies.

VI.3.3 HSNS
VI.3.3.a HSNS : OVERVIEW
In A9155, modelling of base frequency hopping and synthesised frequency hopping are supported. So, some parameters
such as MAL (Mobile Allocation List), HSN (Hopping Sequence Number), MAIO (Mobile Allocation Index Offset) are
managed.

HSN (Hopping Sequence Number) parameter is used to describe frequency hopping sequence; this is one of 4 input
parameters for GSM hopping sequence generator algorithm. HSN may take 64 different values; they are numbered from
0 to 63. Frequency sequences are pseudo-random, except for the special case of HSN = 0, where frequencies are used
one after the other (cyclic hopping).

In A9155, for a complete exploitation of HSNs, it is possible to define HSN domains and groups.

A domain is a set of groups; it consists of one or several groups.
A group is a set of HSNs. A HSN group belongs to one or several HSN domains; it is a subset of HSN domains.

Manual and automatic HSN planning are based on the HSN domains assigned to TRX types in cell types.

Creation and management of HSN domains and groups, like for many other objects in A9155 always stays easy and
clear.

VI.3.3.b MANAGING HSN DOMAINS AND GROUPS
For an easier resource management, HSN domain and group tables are available. HSN domains are linked to types of
TRXs. When defining a cell type, you must assign a HSN domain to each TRX type.

To define domains and groups of HSNs, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Network settings : Domains : HSNs] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Domains dialog, you can enter a domain per line. To validate a domain creation, select another line.
Either
Select a domain in the table and click on the Properties button.
Or
Select the line relating to a domain and double click on it.
In the domain properties dialog, specify the name of group(s) included in this domain and define for each of
them:
- The lowest available HSN (Min),
- The highest available HSN (Max),
- The value interval between the HSNs (Step),
- HSN(s) you do not want to use (Excluded). You can paste a list of HSNs; separator must be a blank
character,
- Additional HSN(s) you want to consider during allocation (Extra). You can paste a list of HSNs;
separator must be a blank character.

Note : A default domain called ALL HSNs exists; it contains the 64 HSNs.


You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of HSNs window.

To do so, proceed as follows :
After defining all the domains, close the Domains dialog,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Network settings : Groups : HSNs] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


202/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


In the Group of HSNs window, select a domain and associate one or several groups of HSNs to each of
them. Define the groups as explained above.


The defined domains can be now assigned to TRX types of each cell type in order then to be used as constraints in the
automatic allocation of HSNs.

VI.3.4 BSICS
VI.3.4.a BSICS : OVERVIEW
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the BSIC (Base Station Identity Code) colour code is associated with a BCCH in order for a
mobile to distinguish the base station to which both are assigned from the other surrounding ones. The BSIC is
composed of a NCC (Network Colour Code) and BCC (BTS Colour Code). NCC and BCC are integers between 0 and 7.

Hence, the BSIC is a result of a (NCC-BCC) couple and can be noted using two types of notation : octal or decimal.
A9155 supports both syntaxes and will make its allocation depending on the chosen format.

As available BSICs depend on the country and on the area; it is sometimes necessary to distinguish borders from other
zones. To model this, domain and group tables have been created.

A domain is a set of groups; it consists of one or several groups.
A group is a set of BSICs. A BSIC group belongs to one or several BSIC domains.

Therefore, a BSIC domain can contain more or less than 8 BSICs.

Manual or automatic BSIC planning is based on the BSIC domain assigned to transmitter.

Creation and management of BSIC domains and groups, like for many other objects in A9155 always stays easy and
clear.

VI.3.4.b DEFINING BSIC FORMAT
The BSIC colour code is the result of two digits : NCC (Network Colour Code) and BCC (BTS Colour Code). NCC and
BCC are integers between 0 and 7. 64 BSICs are available. They are distributed in 8 groups (one group per possible
NCC) of 8 BSICs. For each pair, it is possible to define a BSIC number, following either the octal or the decimal notation.


Decimal format
By considering NCC (Network Colour Code [0..7]) and BCC (Base station Colour Code [0..7]), it is possible to build a
BSIC number with the rule : NCCx8 + BCC. For example, the (3-2) pair leads to a BSIC value of 26.

Octal format
The octal rule is identical to the decimal rule, except the fact that 8 is replaced by 10 (NCCx10 + BCC). For the case
above, the (3-2) pair drives to a value of 32 in octal format.


To choose the BSIC format globally for a project, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the BSIC format tab,
Select either the Octal or Decimal option in the Display format scrolling box
Click OK or Apply to validate,


Notes:
When defined, the selected BSIC format will be taken into account by the BSIC manual allocation (i.e. only values
consistent when the selected choice are available in the BSIC scrolling box TRX tab of transmitter property dialog),
the AFP and consistency checking tool.
Take care about the definition of the BSIC domain, in order to be consistent with the chosen BSIC notation.
It is still possible to enter the BSIC in NCC-BCC format in the TRX tab of the transmitter dialog. Depending on the
BSIC format, A9155 will translate the NCC-BCC pair in BSIC number.
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 203/476


The BSIC format has to be defined correctly prior to the Test mobile data imports.

VI.3.4.c MANAGING BSIC DOMAINS AND GROUPS
For an easier resource management, BSIC domain and group tables are available. You must assign a BSIC domain to
each transmitter.

To define domains and groups of BSICs, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Network settings : Domains : BSICs] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Domains dialog, you can enter a domain per line. To validate a domain creation, select another line.
Either
Select a domain in the table and click on the Properties button.
Or
Select the line relating to a domain and double click on it.
In the domain properties dialog, specify the name of group(s) that you want to associate to this domain and
define for each of them:
- The lowest available BSIC (Min),
- The highest available BSIC (Max),
- The value interval between the BSICs (Step),
- The BSIC(s) you do not want to use (Excluded). You can paste a list of BSICs; separator must be a
blank character,
- Additional BSIC (s) you want to consider during allocation (Extra). You can paste a list of BSICs;
separator must be a blank character.

Note : A default domain called ALL BSICs exists; it contains the 64 BSICs in 8 groups (NCC = 0, ..., 7).


You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of BSICs window.

To do so, proceed as follows :
After defining all the domains, close the Domains dialog,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Network settings : Groups : BSICs] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Group of BSICs window, select a domain and associate one or several groups of BSICs to each of
them. Define the groups as explained above.


The defined domains can be now assigned to each transmitter in order then to be used as constraints in the automatic
allocation of BSICs.

VI.4 MANAGING GSM/GPRS/EDGE RADIO DATA
VI.4.1 MANAGING GSM/GPRS/EDGE RADIO DATA : OVERVIEW
In A9155, radio network modelling and radio resource management has lead to the introduction of specific radio data for
GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects :
HCS layers
Timeslot configurations
TRX types and Cell types
Subcells
GPRS/EDGE Equipment

As many other objects in A9155, these parameters have been integrated to the tool with a will to make their
management and their use easy. By their use, it is possible to define subcells and TRXs of stations.

Thanks to this advanced description level, concentric cells are supported. In addition, modelling of several hopping
modes are supported : no hopping, Base Band Hopping and Synthesised Frequency Hopping. Some parameters such
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


204/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


as MAL (Mobile Allocation List), HSN (Hopping Sequence Number), MAIO (Mobile Allocation Index Offset) are managed.

VI.4.2 HCS LAYERS
VI.4.2.a HIERARCHICAL CELLS : OVERVIEW
In A9155, It is possible to model hierarchical networks. Indeed, you may define several types of layers, a given priority
and a threshold speed on each of them, and then, assign one of them to transmitters.

Hierarchical cells are taken into account (including priority) in any prediction study (e.g. coverage by transmitter,
interfered zones and coverage by C/I levels) based on search for best server for coverage conditions. The threshold
speed is used for the traffic distribution as a filter criterion on the mobility. Only mobiles with a mobility lower than the
maximum speed will be considered eligible to reside on the layer.

VI.4.2.b MANAGING HCS LAYERS
In A9155, HCS layers are listed in a table form. Hence, their management (creation, deletion or modification) is identical
to standard management of data in tables.

To manage HCS layers that will be available to assign to transmitters, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Network settings : HCS Layers...] command from the open menu,
Define and modify each HCS layer with its name, and its related priority, by editing cells.

The priority of each HCS layer is taken into account in coverage predictions, when considering, on each pixel, the server
which has the highest signal level on the highest priority layer.

You can also assign a threshold speed to each HCS layer. This speed threshold is used to distribute traffic over different
network layers using the mobility criterion. Mobiles with a mobility of less than the threshold speed for a layer can reside
on that layer.

Note : priority is organised in ascending order, i.e. 1 has higher priority than 0 (lowest priority).

VI.4.2.c ASSIGNING HCS LAYERS TO TRANSMITTERS
To assign a HCS layer among existing ones to a transmitter, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it
Right click on the transmitter which you want to assign a HCS layer to,
or
Select on the map the transmitter which you want to assign a HCS layer to by left clicking on the
appropriate Tx symbol (arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the General tab,
Choose the HCS layer to assign to the current transmitter in the associated scrolling menu,
Click OK or Apply to validate.


Notes :
Layer priority is automatically assigned to transmitter. This parameter maybe taken into account in
GSM/GPRS/EDGE coverage conditions in prediction studies,
The threshold speed is used for the traffic distribution as a filter criterion on the mobility. Only mobiles with a mobility
lower than the maximum speed will be considered eligible to reside on the layer.
Assigning HCS layers to transmitters is optional.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 205/476


VI.4.3 TIMESLOT CONFIGURATIONS
VI.4.3.a TIMESLOT CONFIGURATIONS : OVERVIEW
It is possible to define timeslot configurations that can be used in allocating different timeslot types to TRXs. A timeslot
configuration defines the distribution method for circuit, packet and shared timeslots on a TRX. Timeslot configurations
influence the network dimensioning results (evaluation of the number of TRXs required to fulfil the traffic demand) and
calculation of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs).

Note : Shared timeslots are used for both, circuit-switched and packet-switched calls, circuit-switched timeslots for
circuit-switched / GSM calls and packet-switched timeslots in case of packet-switched / EGPRS calls.

VI.4.3.b MANAGING TIMESLOT CONFIGURATIONS
To create and describe a timeslot configuration, proceed as follows :
Right click on the Transmitters folder,
In the context menu, choose Network settings and Timeslot configurations command,
In the List of timeslot configurations dialog, type the name of a new configuration in the table,
In the table, select the row including the configuration and then, either click on Properties or double click,
In the configuration property dialog, indicate the distribution of circuit, packet and shared timeslots for each
TRX.
A TRX per row is described in the table: enter the TRX number and specify the corresponding number of
circuit, packet and shared timeslots. When there is not enough number of TRXs, A9155 uses the timeslot
distribution assigned to the last TRX.
Click OK to validate the timeslot configuration description,
Click on Close.

Notes
Three default timeslot configurations (one per TRX type: BCCH, TCH and TCH_INNER) are available.
The fields defined at the subcell level "Number of packet (circuit or shared) timeslots" are used when no timeslot
configuration is defined
VI.4.4 CELL TYPES
VI.4.4.a CELL TYPES : OVERVIEW
In A9155, a cell type describes the types of TRXs that a cell can use and their parameters, which can be different.

Examples: Default cell types are available in the tool:
The cell type GSM900_N_NORMAL (a non concentric GSM900 normal cell) contains BCCH and TCH TRXs.
The cell type DUALBAND_CC_MINI (a concentric dual band cell) contains BCCH, TCH and TCH_INNER TRXs.

Cell types are linked to station templates or transmitters. Indeed, when defining a station template or transmitter
properties, you must specify the cell type which the station or transmitter refers to.

Creation and management of cell types, like for many other objects in A9155 always stays easy and clear.

VI.4.4.b TRX TYPES : DEFINITION
By default, three types of TRXs are modelled in A9155:
The BCCH TRX type: this TRX type is the BCCH carrier,
The TCH TRX type which is the default traffic carrier,
The TCH_INNER TRX type: this TRX type is the inner traffic carrier.

Note : you can define additional TRX types directly from the GSM_EGPRS.mdb document template.

The cell type definition must include a TRX type, which is the BCCH carrier (BCCH TRX type), and a TRX type, which is
the default traffic carrier (TCH TRX type). Only one TRX type carrying the broadcast and only one TRX type carrying the
default TCH are supported.

TRX types are the standard elements which compose cell types.
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


206/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



VI.4.4.c MANAGING CELL TYPES
Cell types are linked to station templates or transmitters. Indeed, when defining a station template or transmitter
properties, you must specify the cell type which the station or transmitter refers to.

Cell type properties can be accessed in two ways, either from a Cell type table, either from a Cell type dialog.

To open the cell type dialog, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the Properties option from the open menu,
Click on the Cell types tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about available fields in the open window,
Either
Select the cell type you want to manage,
Click the modify button to open the associated dialog,
Or,
Double click the cell type you want to manage.
Click the General tab,
Define the cell type parameters,
Click OK to validate your choice,
Click again OK to close the transmitters properties dialog box.


Notes :
Addition, deletion of cell types are made using respectively the and buttons,
The button helps you to manage the content of the cell type table (See below).


To open the cell type table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Network settings : Cell types...] command from the open menu,
Either
Select the cell type you want to manage,
Click the modify button to open the associated dialog,
Or,
Double click the cell type you want to manage.
Define the parameters of each cell type.


Notes :
The dialog of each cell type (see above) is reachable by either double clicking the related record in the table, or by
using the button once a record is selected,
The button helps you to manage the content of the cell type table.
An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the Cell type table.

VI.4.4.d CELL TYPE PARAMETERS
In the cell type properties window, you can rename it, enter the types of TRXs (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) used by this
cell type and specify for each of them:

The assigned frequency domain,
Only channels belonging to this frequency domain will be allocated to TRXs during automatic or manual frequency
planning.

Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation List) length,
This is the maximum size of the MAL. In other words, it corresponds to the maximum number of channels allocated to
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 207/476


TRXs of a subcell during automatic frequency planning in case SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base
Band Hopping) is supported and allocation mode is free.

Allocation mode,
It refers to the allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. Two allocation strategies are
offered:
- Free allocation: all the channels of the frequency domain can be assigned to TRXs.
- Grouped allocation: Only channels belonging to a same group of the frequency domain can be chosen.

Min C/I,
This is a quality condition; you can enter specific quality requirements for each TRX type. It can be used as reference
value in interference studies and in AFP.

% max interference,
This is the maximum percentage of interfered area or interfered traffic that A9155 must not exceed during automatic
frequency planning.

Default DL power offset,
This is a reduction of power relative to the transmitter power. It enables you to model power control of TCH TRXs and
concentric cells (TCH_INNER TRXs that transmit a power lower than BCCH TRX and TCH TRXs).

Default hopping mode,
Here, you can specify if frequency hopping technology is supported for this TRX type. If frequency hopping is supported,
choose either the Base Band Hopping mode (BBH), or the Synthesized Hopping mode (SFH). Else, select Non Hopping.

Default reception threshold,
This is the reception condition for this TRX type. You can enter a specific reception condition for each TRX type.

AFP weight,
This is a cost factor used to increase or decrease the importance of a TRX type during automatic frequency planning.
The cost factor must be a positive real. The higher the AFP weight is, the higher the constraint on the TRX type is.

HSN domain,
Only HSNs belonging to this HSN domain will be allocated to subcells during automatic or manual frequency planning.
Allocation of HSN is performed in case of BBH or SFH.

Freeze HSN,
Selecting this option enables you to keep the current HSN allocation of subcells related to this TRX type when starting a
new AFP session.

DTX support (default),
Here, you can specify if DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) technology is supported for this TRX type.

Number of circuit TS (default),
This is the number of time slots per TRX dedicated to circuit traffic (voice) (
N
circuit
TS
).

Number of packet TS (default),
This is the number of time slots per TRX supporting packet traffic (
N
packet
TS
).

Number of composite TS (default),
This is the number of time slots per TRX supporting both voice and packet traffic (
N
composite
TS
).

Note : These time slots are exclusively dedicated to traffic channels; they are not used for BCCH and CCCH (Control
Common Channels).

In case of BCCH TRX type, at least one time slot is used for BCCH. So, we have:

1 + +
F N N N ng multiplexi
composite
TS
packet
TS
circuit
TS



In case of TCH or TCH_INNER TRX types, we have:

F N N N ng multiplexi
composite
TS
packet
TS
circuit
TS
= + +


GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


208/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


F ng multiplexi
is the multiplexing factor of the frequency band, which the frequency domain assigned to this TRX type belongs
to.

The number of requested TRXs for voice traffic depends on these values. In case of GPRS/EDGE stations, A9155
considers only time slots available for voice traffic (
N N
composite
TS
circuit
TS
+
). If the GPRS/EDGE option is not selected (GSM
station), A9155 considers all the time slots (
N N N
composite
TS
packet
TS
circuit
TS
+ +
).

Important:
The fields Number of shared timeslots per TRX, Number of circuit timeslots per TRX and Number of packet timeslots
per TRX are available in the cell type description but are used in calculations only if no timeslot configuration is defined
(described below).

Default hysteresis,
This parameter is not used in this A9155 version.
This is a default value of a subcell specific parameter. It denotes the handover hysteresis margin (when going below min
reception level). It concerns intra-cell handovers only.

Priority,
This parameter is not used in this A9155 version.
If a probe mobile can be served by more than one subcell of a transmitter, the subcell that has a higher service priority
will serve it.

Half-rate traffic ratio,
It is the percentage of Half-Rate voice traffic in the subcell. This parameter is taken into account to calculate the required
number of timeslots to satisfy the voice traffic demand.

Traffic overflow target,
This parameter is used during the traffic analysis to distribute the traffic between subcells and layers. For a given
subcell, this parameter is the percentage of candidate traffic considered to overflow to another subcell with a lower
priority. It impacts the traffic capture between Inner and Outer subcells, as well as between micro and macro layers. In
other words, it is a kind of anticipation of the percentage of traffic rejected from higher priority subcells/layers to lower
ones.

Note : If the traffic overflow target is set to a value lower than the Grade of Service, it implies that the traffic rejected
(according to the dimensioning model, Erlang B or Erlang C) will be considered lost and will not overflow to other
subcells.

Timeslot configuration name,
Name of the timeslot configuration describing the distribution of circuit, packet and shared timeslots on TRXs of a
subcell.

When a cell type is assigned to a transmitter, its parameters are used to initialise the properties of the transmitter
subcells. If you modify the values in the TRX types of the cell types afterwards, these are not updated automatically in
the subcells which were already set with the previous values.

VI.4.4.e EXAMPLES OF CELL TYPES
Two examples of cell types provided by default in A9155 are explained below :

Normal cell type
A normal cell type consists of two TRX types:
- BCCH TRX type
- TCH TRX type

The table below described parameters to be specified for any selected hopping mode.

Characteristics Used in A9155 Hopping mode
Non
hopping
BBH SFH
Frequency domain Automatic or manual frequency
planning
x x x
Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation List)
length
Automatic frequency planning Not used x x
Allocation mode Automatic or manual frequency
planning
x x x
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 209/476


Min C/I Interference studies,
Automatic frequency planning
x x x
% max interference Automatic frequency planning x x x
Default DL power offset Signal level studies = 0 for
BCCH
= 0 for TCH
= 0 for BCCH
= 0 for TCH
= 0 for BCCH
= 0 for TCH
Default hopping mode Interference studies Non
Hopping
Base Band
Hopping
Synthesized
Hopping
Default reception threshold Signal level studies x x x
AFP weight Automatic frequency planning x x x
HSN domain Automatic frequency planning Not used x x
Freeze HSN Automatic frequency planning x x x
DTX support (default) Automatic frequency planning,
Interference studies
x x x
Number of composite TS (default) Number of requested TRXs,
GPRS-like studies
x x x
Number of packet TS (default) Number of requested TRXs,
GPRS-like studies
x x x
Number of circuit TS (default) Number of requested TRXs,
GPRS-like studies
x x x
Default hysteresis Not used Not used Not used Not used
Priority Not used Not used Not used Not used
Half-rate traffic ratio Traffic analysis x x x
Target rate of traffic overflow Traffic analysis x x x
Timeslot configuration Dimensioning x x x


Concentric cell type
A concentric cell type consists of three TRX types:
- BCCH TRX type
- TCH TRX type
- TCH_INNER

The table below described parameters to be specified for any selected hopping mode.

Characteristics Used in A9155 Hopping mode
Non hopping BBH SFH
Frequency domain Automatic or manual frequency
planning
x x x
Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation
List) length
Automatic frequency planning Not used
x
x
Allocation mode Automatic or manual frequency
planning
x x x
Min C/I Interference studies,
Automatic frequency planning
x x x
% max interference Automatic frequency planning x x x
Default DL power offset
Signal level studies
= 0 for BCCH
=> 0 for TCH
<> 0 for
TCH_INNER
= 0 for BCCH
=> 0 for TCH
<> 0 for
TCH_INNER
= 0 for BCCH
=> 0 for TCH
<> 0 for
TCH_INNER
Default hopping mode Interference studies Non Hopping Base Band
Hopping
Synthesized
Hopping
Default reception threshold Signal level studies x x x
AFP weight Automatic frequency planning x x x
HSN domain Automatic frequency planning Not used x x
Freeze HSN Automatic frequency planning x x x
DTX support (default) Automatic frequency planning,
Interference studies
x x x
Number of composite TS (default) Number of requested TRXs,
GPRS-like studies
x x x
Number of packet TS (default) Number of requested TRXs,
GPRS-like studies
x x x
Number of circuit TS (default) Number of requested TRXs,
GPRS-like studies
x x x
Default hysteresis Not used Not used Not used Not used
Priority Not used Not used Not used Not used
Half-rate traffic ratio Traffic analysis x x x
Target rate of traffic overflow Traffic analysis x x x
Timeslot configuration Dimensioning x x x

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


210/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VI.4.4.f ASSIGNING CELL TYPES TO TRANSMITTERS
A cell type consists in TRX types (BCCH, TCH or TCH inner). Assigning a cell type to a transmitter enables you to define
its subcells (TRX type properties become subcell properties). A subcell corresponds to the transmitter-TRX type pair.

To assign a cell type to a transmitter, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the TRXs tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Click on the scrolling menu and choose a cell type in the list,
Click OK to close the dialog


Notes :
If you modify the settings of a Cell type which is already assigned to a transmitter, A9155 does not update transmitter
subcell characteristics automatically.
Once selected, cell type property dialog can be open by clicking on the button,
A9155 indicates the main frequency band of the transmitter. This is the frequency band, which the frequency domain
assigned to BCCH TRX type belongs to. A9155 takes into account this frequency band in path loss matrix evaluation.

VI.4.5 SUBCELLS
VI.4.5.a MANAGING SUBCELLS IN TRANSMITTERS
The subcells of transmitter and their settings are defined in this part. A subcell is a group of TRXs sharing the same radio
characteristics, the same quality (C/I) requirements, and common settings. A subcell is defined by the transmitter-TRX
type pair.

Subcells of transmitter and their settings depend on the cell type selected for the transmitter. The cell type predefines the
TRX type of each subcell since the properties of each TRX type initialise the ones of each subcell. The default values
reported for subcells can be modified without changing reference for the cell type. On the other hand, A9155 updates
subcell characteristics when selecting another cell type.

Except their TRX type (coming from the selected cell type), all subcell properties are editable and can be modified in the
subcell part of any transmitter property.

To access the subcell table from the transmitter properties, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the TRXs tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Define the Subcell settings in the subcell part,
Click OK to close the dialog.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 211/476


VI.4.5.b DISPLAYING THE SUBCELL LIST
Even if subcells are linked to transmitters, it is possible to display all existing subcells of a network in an editable form.

To open the subcell general table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Subcells : Subcell list] command from the open menu,
Define the Subcell settings.


The button helps you to manage the content of the subcell table.
VI.4.5.c SUBCELL PROPERTY DETAILS

Whatever is the way to reach subcell properties (from transmitter properties or from the subcell table), for any of them,
A9155 details:

Requested TRXs
This is the number of TRXs requested for a subcell. In case of BCCH TRX type, the number of requested TRXs is 1 by
default. In case of TCH or TCH_INNER TRX type, this is a network dimensioning result, which depends on the traffic
density in the subcell and on the blocked call percentage.

Traffic load,
It indicates the usage rate of TRXs; its value is between 0 and 1. This parameter may be, either user-defined, or
automatically reported after calculating the number of requested TRXs. In this case, traffic load (
traffic
L
) is a dimensioning
result; this is a global traffic load for all the subcells of each transmitter. We have:

TRX
traffic
N
Traffic
L =

Traffic
is the traffic request (Erlang) on the transmitter coverage area,
TRX
N
is the total number of TRXs requested by a transmitter.

It is taken into account in interference calculation and automatic frequency planning.

HSN
This is the hopping sequence number of subcell. All the TRXs of the subcell have the same HSN. HSN can be manually
entered or automatically allocated. Only HSN belonging to the HSN domain assigned to this TRX type (in the selected
cell type property dialog) can be allocated. This parameter is taken into account in interference calculation in case of
SFH or BBH.

Synchronisation
Type the same string of character in order for the TRXs of several subcells are synchronized during frequency hopping.
By default, synchronization is performed at the site level; TRXs of subcells on a same site are synchronized. You may
also define synchronization at the subcell level (different values for each subcell) or group of transmitters level (unique
value for subcells of this group).

Notes
1. Any string of character can be entered.
2. This field is case sensitive.

This parameter is taken into account in interference calculation in case of frequency hopping (BBH or SFH).

DL power offset
This is a reduction of power relative to the transmitter power. Entering 3 dB means that the subcell power will be 3 dB
lower than the transmitter power defined in the Transmitter tab.

Hopping mode
If frequency hopping is supported, choose either the Base Band Hopping mode (BBH), or the Synthesized Hopping
mode (SFH). Else, select Non Hopping.

Reception threshold
This is the reception condition for the subcell. This value can be used as reference value in signal level coverage
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


212/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


predictions (lowest received signal level in order for receiver to be covered by the subcell).

Hysteresis
This parameter is not used in this A9155 version.

DTX supported
Select this option if DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) technology is supported for the subcell.

Number of circuit TS (default)
This is the number of time slots per TRX dedicated to circuit traffic (voice) (
N
circuit
TS
).

Number of packet TS (default)
This is the number of time slots per TRX supporting packet traffic (
N
packet
TS
).

Number of composite TS (default)
This is the number of time slots per TRX supporting both voice and packet traffic (
N
composite
TS
).

Note : These time slots are exclusively dedicated to traffic channels; they are not used for BCCH and CCCH (Control
Common Channels).

In case of BCCH TRX type, at least one time slot is used for BCCH. So, we have:
1 + +
F N N N ng multiplexi
composite
TS
packet
TS
circuit
TS


In case of TCH or TCH_INNER TRX types, we have:
F N N N ng multiplexi
composite
TS
packet
TS
circuit
TS
= + +


F ng multiplexi
is the multiplexing factor of the frequency band, which the frequency domain assigned to this TRX type belongs
to.

The number of requested TRXs for voice traffic depends on these values. In case of GPRS/EDGE stations, A9155
considers only time slots available for voice traffic (
N N
composite
TS
circuit
TS
+
). If the GPRS/EDGE option is not selected (GSM
station), A9155 considers all the time slots (
N N N
composite
TS
packet
TS
circuit
TS
+ +
).

Important:
The fields Number of shared timeslots per TRX, Number of circuit timeslots per TRX and Number of packet timeslots
per TRX are available in the cell type description but are used in calculations only if no timeslot configuration is defined
(described below).

Excluded
When defining frequency domains, you have to choose the range of channels, the step, exceptional and excluded
channels. Excluded channels are channels that are in the defined range that you do not want to make allocatable.
Excluded channels can be set first in the frequency domain definition. In addition, you can also define less constraining
domains (with less excluded channels) and define excluded channels at the subcell level. All subcells related to this
domain must not have access to these excluded channels for the allocation.

Notes:
1. Channels must be separated by a blank character.
2. When defined, the excluded channels (per subcell) will be taken into account by the frequency manual allocation (i.e.
only consistent values are available in the TRX channel scrolling box TRX tab of transmitter property dialog), the AFP
and consistency checking tool.
3a. In Non Hopping mode or Base Band Hopping, in Free or Group Constrained strategy, excluded channels are not
visible in their related domains. So, subcells are allocated with consistency within their defined domain.
3b. In Synthesized Frequency Hopping, in Free strategy, excluded channels are not visible any more in their related
domains.
3c. In Synthesized Frequency Hopping, in Group Constrained strategy, since the allocation is made per exact group, as
soon as a group has a defined excluded channel, the complete group is excluded from the domain. The allocation (and
what is visible in frequencies scrolling boxes) is then possible only over groups with initially no excluded channel.
These 3 rules are checked by the consistency checking tool.

Assigned frequency domain,
Only channels belonging to this frequency domain will be allocated to TRXs during automatic or manual frequency
planning.
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 213/476



Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation List) length,
This is the maximum size of the MAL. In other words, it corresponds to the maximum number of channels allocated to
TRXs of a subcell during automatic frequency planning in case SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base
Band Hopping) is supported and allocation mode is free.

Allocation mode,
It refers to the allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. Two allocation strategies are
offered:
- Free allocation: all the channels of the frequency domain can be assigned to TRXs.
- Grouped allocation: Only channels belonging to a same group of the frequency domain can be chosen.

Min C/I,
This is a quality condition; you can enter specific quality requirements for each subcell. It can be used as reference value
in interference studies.

% max interference,
This is the maximum percentage of interfered area or traffic (defined during the interference histogram determination)
that A9155 must not exceed during automatic frequency planning.

AFP weight,
This is a cost factor used to increase or decrease the importance of a subcell during automatic frequency planning. The
cost factor must be a positive real. The higher the AFP weight the greater the constraint on the subcell.

HSN domain,
Only HSNs belonging to this HSN domain can be allocated to subcells during manual frequency planning. Allocation of
HSN must be performed in case of SFH or BBH.

Freeze HSN,
Selecting this option enables you to keep the current HSN allocation of subcells related to this TRX type when running a
new AFP.

Half-rate traffic ratio,
It is the percentage of Half-Rate voice traffic in the subcell. This parameter is taken into account in the traffic analysis and
to calculate the required number of timeslots to match the voice traffic demand.

Traffic overflow target,
This parameter is used during the traffic analysis to distribute the traffic between subcells and layers. For a given
subcell, it is the percentage of candidate traffic considered to overflow to another subcell with a lower priority. It impacts
the traffic capture between Inner and Outer subcells, as well as between micro and macro layers. In other words, it is a
kind of anticipation of the percentage of traffic rejected by higher priority subcells/layers to lower ones.

Important:
The traffic overflow target and the Half-Rate traffic ratio must be the same for BCCH and TCH subcells. If you enter
different values for BCCH and TCH subcells, A9155 will take the BCCH subcell values.

Timeslot configuration name,
Name of the timeslot configuration describing the distribution of circuit, packet and shared timeslots on TRXs of a
subcell.

Required number of shared timeslots,
This is the number of shared timeslots required for all the TRXs of a subcell.

Required number of circuit timeslots,
This is the number of circuit switched timeslots required for all the TRXs of a subcell.

Required number of packet timeslots,
This is the number of packet switched timeslots required for all the TRXs of a subcell.

Effective rate of traffic overflow,
This is the percentage of traffic overflowing from a subcell.

Note : The last four fields contain results from the dimensioning process.

With this data model, all data contained in cell types become default ones, i.e. they are used to initialise subcell
properties when creating a transmitter; they can be modified in the transmitter property dialog without modifying the
default values defined for the cell type, which the transmitter refers to. If you modify one of these data in cell types,
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


214/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


transmitters already dealing with these cell types will not have their default parameters modified.

VI.4.6 GPRS/EDGE EQUIPMENT
VI.4.6.a CREATING A GPRS/EDGE EQUIPMENT
A folder called GPRS/EDGE equipment is available in the Explorer window Data tab. It enables you to manage specific
equipment for GPRS and EDGE networks. Thresholds associated with coding schemes are defined in these equipment.
Any transmitter dealing with GPRS or EDGE technology have to be assigned an existing piece of equipment.


To create a new GPRS/EDGE equipment, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Equipment : GPRS/EDGE Equipment] command from the open menu,
Fill the empty table line in order to create the new piece of equipment,
Click the button to open the related complete dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the GPRS/EDGE equipment settings,
Click OK or Apply to achieve the creation,


Notes :
The button helps you to manage content of the GPRS/EDGE Equipment table.
An Other Properties tab is available if some user defined fields have been added to the GPRS/EDGE Equipment
table.

VI.4.6.b MANAGING GPRS/EDGE EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES
In A9155, it is possible to modify properties (name, number of coding schemes, thresholds and associated graphs) of
any existing equipment. These equipment have to be defined for each transmitter taking part in specific GPRS/EDGE
coverage predictions (Coding schemes and Max rate per timeslot). The user can define the technology supported by this
equipment (whether GPRS or EGPRS).


To manage an GPRS/EDGE equipment, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Equipment : GPRS/EDGE Equipment] command from the open menu,
The associated Data table opens,
Define the parameters of each GPRS/EDGE Equipment.


Notes :
The dialog of each GPRS/EDGE Equipment is reachable either by double clicking the related record in the table, or
by using the button once a record is selected,
The button helps you to manage content of the GPRS/EDGE Equipment table.
An Other Properties tab is available if some user defined fields have been added to the GPRS/EDGE Equipment
table.

VI.4.6.c SETTING CODING SCHEMES PARAMETERS
In GPRS or EDGE technology, the coding scheme is a coding algorithm used to introduce more or less redundancy (rate
multiplier) and improve packet transmission. Four and nine coding schemes are respectively available for GPRS and
EDGE networks. The more important the coding scheme is, the less redundancy there is. Therefore, in GPRS networks,
using a coding scheme 4 means that there will be no redundancy.


C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 215/476


To adjust the parameters associated with coding schemes from any equipment, proceed as follow :
Access the property dialog of the equipment you want to adjust the associated coding schemes,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the General tab to check or modify, for the current equipment :
The name and/or the maximum number of coding schemes available for the current equipment,
If the equipment supports only GPRS or both GPRS and EDGE.
Click on the Thresholds tab to define, for each coding scheme :
Power threshold and Signal noise ratio threshold : They are respectively the minimum power (C) and
the minimum signal noise ratio (C/I) required at the receiver in order for the coding scheme to be
used,
Max rate (kbps): It is the maximum rate (kbps) obtained when there is no data transmission error,
Rates depending on C (kbps) and rates depending on C/I (kbps): These columns contain values
used to represent Rate=f(C ) and Rate=f(C/I) graphs.
8PSK modulation used or not (EDGE only).
Click OK or Apply to validate.


The and buttons allows to display graphs associated with the currently selected coding
scheme.

Note : In the case of GPRS/EDGE, two sets of charts (C and C/I) can be given : one is related to the GPRS mode and
another one related to the EDGE mode. If the option Edge is not checked, A9155 considers that the charts (C and C/I)
are related to the GPRS mode, else it uses them as charts related to the EDGE mode.

VI.4.6.d DISPLAYING RATE GRAPHS
In GPRS/EDGE technology, coding schemes are linked with data transmission redundancy level. The least redundancy
deals with riskier data transmissions with potentially higher transmission rates. The most redundancy deals with safer
data transmissions but with lower rates. Coding schemes are hence defined in order to obtain the best compromise
between enough transmission speed and safety of data packet transmission. That is why each coding scheme has an
optimum working range depending on either C or C/I values. This can be pointed out through graphs attached with the
definition of each coding scheme linked to GPRS/EDGE equipment.


To display the rate graph as function of C or C/I values for a given coding scheme, proceed as follows :
Access properties dialog box of the equipment you want to adjust the associated coding schemes,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the Thresholds tab,
Either,
Click on the C or C/I cell you want to display the associated rate graph,
Or,
Select the line of the coding scheme you want to display a rate graph,
Click either the or button to open the graph (as function respectively of
C or C/I) dialog window,
The Rate graph window opens. It consists of a table where you can define C (or C/I) and rate values
(copying and pasting a set of values, adding and deleting values is possible) and a part where the graph is
displayed,
Click OK or close the window.


Note : these graphs show the rate evolution depending on radio conditions (C and C/I) by considering block error rates.
Therefore, from these graphs, you can choose a coding scheme suitable to radio conditions.

VI.4.6.e SETTING GPRS/EDGE TRANSMITTERS
In A9155, transmitters part of network dealing either with GPRS or EDGE can be or not considered as GPRS/EDGE
sectors by default. If not, they are taken as classical GSM stations.


To assign GPRS/EDGE properties to any transmitter, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Either,
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


216/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Double click the Transmitters folder to open the associated table,
Check the boxes associated with such transmitters in the GPRS/EDGE column,
Assign the associated GPRS/EDGE to cells,
Or
Access the properties dialog box of the transmitter you want to define as an GPRS/EDGE station,
Click on the GPRS/EDGE tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window,
Check the GPRS/EDGE Station box and complete the GPRS/EDGE equipment field,
Click OK or Apply to validate.


Notes :
When choosing the equipment, all pieces of equipment previously described in the GPRS/EDGE equipment folder
are available in the GPRS/EDGE equipment scrolling menu. If none is chosen, A9155 does not consider the
associated transmitter in the GPRS/EDGE specific studies,
The number of coding schemes limits the number of coding schemes of the associated equipment that the E/GPRS
station can use.
Example: Let a GPRS station use an equipment with four coding schemes. The number of supported coding schemes
has been set to 2. It means that the station will use only the first two coding schemes (1 and 2).
The average 8PSK Power Backoff is the average power reduction for E/GPRS transmitters due to 8PSK modulation
in EDGE.
All these inputs are also available in the station template description.

VI.5 GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
VI.5.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT : OVERVIEW
The A9155 GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic model is flexible, versatile and comprehensive. This traffic model introduces the
notion of service in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents allowing the user to completely model the multi-service 2G/2.5G
network traffic. The salient parameters in this regard are the settings of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters folder
containing :
Services,
Terminal types,
Mobility types,
User profiles,
Environment classes

All of these items are classified into subfolders. In addition to these, the folder also contains a GPRS dimensioning model
subfolder.

Finally, A9155 provides the possibility to create various types of traffic maps : per environment, per user profile (vector),
per user density, or by using live traffic data.

Furthermore, the traffic analysis feature allows the user to manipulate the created traffic maps in order to use them in
prediction studies and in the dimensioning procedure.

A user profile can be considered to be the principal data for the traffic maps. It describes the behaviour of a certain type
of users in terms of terminal type, service and mobility. This data can then be used to generate traffic environments that
contain a certain type of users with a certain density. Traffic maps can then be based on environments, user profiles,
throughput per sector (Live traffic) and densities.

VI.5.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC DATA
VI.5.2.a GSM/GPRS/EDGE SERVICES
VI.5.2.a.i Creating GSM/GPRS/EDGE services
The traffic model allows the user to define not only voice but also data services in GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents.
Services are divided into two categories: circuit switched and packet switched. Currently, the circuit switched service
includes only GSM voice services that use a single timeslot.
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 217/476



To create a service, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Services folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the created service,
Validate by clicking on OK.

VI.5.2.a.ii Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE service parameters
Similar to the other A9155 object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE services are easily manageable. Creation steps and display
management are standard.

To manage the GSM/EGPRS services parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Services folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the service of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated context
menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the service of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current service,
Validate by clicking on OK.


- For a circuit switched service the user can specify the maximum blocking rate (stated in term of Erlang B or C).

- For each packet switched service the user can enter, apart from a maximum permissible blocking rate, a maximum
permissible delay, a minimum required throughput with a percentage of coverage that should at least be provided with
this throughput, and minimum/maximum number of timeslots allowed to be multiplexed per user for that particular
service.

- The maximum blocking rate defines the call blocking or call queuing rate for the GSM voice services and the probability
of delayed packet arrivals for EGPRS data services.

- The field minimum throughput per user defines the lower threshold on the user throughput and is one of the inputs for
the dimensioning process for EGPRS networks. The dimensioning takes into account the availability percentage of this
minimum throughput as well. These two criteria tell A9155 dimensioning engine that the defined minimum user
throughput should be available for at least that percentage of cell coverage.

- Maximum allowable delay for a certain type of service is another input to the dimensioning process. This is the user
level delay perceived accessing a given service, i.e. web, ftp, e-mail, etc.

- The user can also define the minimum number of timeslots reserved for packet communication to ensure a minimum
quality level. The maximum can be specified to limit the allocation at the dimensioning within a practical/feasible range
for the network operator.

VI.5.2.a.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE services
A9155 allows the user to simultaneously display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal type, user profiles,
environment) in a table window.


To open the services table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Services folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


218/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Or,
Double click on the Services folder,
The services table opens.
Click on to close the table.


The services table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste
functions are available.

Notes :
The advanced grouping/filtering/sorting feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the Services folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the services table. Use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any service by
simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VI.5.2.b GSM/GPRS/EDGE MOBILITY TYPES
VI.5.2.b.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility type
With the knowledge of user mobility, i.e. speed, A9155 can analyse multi-layer traffic. In a multi-layer GSM/GPRS/EDGE
network, a user speed is one of the main criteria that is taken into account at the moment of connection establishment
when there are more than 1 possible servers available. A fast moving mobile is usually allocated a channel from the
macro/umbrella layer rather than from the micro layer to minimize signalling and hence computational load on the
system.

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility type, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Mobility type folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the currently created mobility,
Validate by clicking on OK.

Note : A maximum speed for each HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure) layer is defined in the Network settings that allows
each HCS layer to capture a certain type of traffic within defined mobility limitations.

VI.5.2.b.ii Setting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility type
Like for the other A9155 object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility types are easily manageable. Creation steps and the
display management are standard.

To manage the mobility types parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Mobility type folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the mobility of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the mobility of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current mobility,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : When the Mobility type table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any
mobility by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 219/476


VI.5.2.b.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility types
A9155 allows the user to simultaneously display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal type, user profiles,
environment) in a table window.


To open the mobility types table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Mobility types folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Mobility types folder,
The mobility types table opens.
Click on to close the table.


The mobility types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and
copy/paste functions are available.

Notes :
The advanced grouping/filtering/sorting feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the mobility types folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the mobility types
table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Mobility type table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any mobility
by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VI.5.2.c GSM/GPRS/EDGE TERMINALS
VI.5.2.c.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminal
A terminal defines the capabilities of a mobile terminal in terms of the number of timeslots it can multiplex in downlink (if it
is defined as GPRS/EDGE compatible), the frequency bands, and the technology it is compatible with.

During traffic analysis (capture), packet switched service can only work with GPRS or GPRS/EDGE technology
compatible mobile terminals. On the other hand, circuit switched service can be associated to GSM technology
compatible mobile terminals as well as GPRS and GPRS/EDGE technology compatible mobile terminals. Therefore,
A9155 will distribute:

Circuit switched service users in the service areas of GSM and GPRS/EDGE stations,
Packet switched service users with GPRS technology compatible mobile terminals in the service areas of
GPRS/EDGE stations with GPRS/EDGE equipments supporting either only GPRS, or both GPRS and EDGE
technologies,
Packet switched service users with GPRS/EDGE technology compatible mobile terminals in the service areas of
GPRS/EDGE stations with GPRS/EDGE equipments supporting both GPRS and EDGE technologies.

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminal, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Terminals folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the currently created terminal,
Specify the compliant technology type(s) with the current terminal
Since a GPRS or GPRS/EDGE technology compatible mobile terminal can consume/communicate
over multiple timeslots simultaneously, in that case indicate the number of downlink timeslots.
Specify the frequency band(s) the mobile terminal is compatible with. The definition of compatible
frequency bands again allows the software to allocate the mobile to a certain network layer in the
multilayer scenario with multiple bands (GSM900 and DCS1800 layers, for example).
Validate by clicking on OK.



GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


220/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VI.5.2.c.ii Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminal parameters
Like for the other A9155 object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminals are easily manageable. Creation steps and the
display management are standard.

To manage the terminal parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Terminals folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the terminal of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the terminal of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current terminal,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : When the Terminal table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any terminal
by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VI.5.2.c.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminals
A9155 allows the user to simultaneously display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles,
environment) in a table window.


To open the terminals table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Terminals folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Terminals folder,
The terminals table opens.
Click on to close the table.


The terminals table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste
functions are available.

Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the Terminals folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the terminals table. Use
the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Terminal table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any terminal by
simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VI.5.2.d GSM/GPRS/EDGE USER PROFILES
VI.5.2.d.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile
User profiles model the behaviour of the different subscriber categories. Each user profile is constituted by a list of
services and their associated usage parameters such as used terminal, call or session frequency (calls/hour) and
duration or data volume to be transferred.

Parameters for circuit switched services are:
Average number of calls per hour,
Average duration of a call in seconds,
Used terminal (equipment used for the service (from the Terminals table)).
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 221/476



Parameters for packet switched services are:
Average number of sessions per hour,
Volume in Kbytes which is transferred on the downlink during a session,
Used terminal (equipment used for the service (from the Terminals table)).

These parameters are used in traffic distribution to assign a certain traffic type to a certain layer and station that can
manage the said traffic.

Notes :
For circuit switched services, entering a one-hour call during 1000s corresponds to define 2 calls per hour during
500sthe activity probability is the same in both cases.
You can model temporal variations of user behaviour by creating different profiles for different hours (busy hour, ...).


To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the User profiles folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the currently created user profile,
Validate by clicking on OK.


VI.5.2.d.ii Adjusting GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile properties
Like for the other A9155 object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profiles are easily manageable. Creation steps and the
display management are standard.


To manage the user profile parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the User profiles folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the user profile of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the user profile of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current user profile,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any user
type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VI.5.2.d.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profiles
A9155 allows the user to display simultaneously all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles,
environment) in a table window.


To open the user profiles table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the User profiles folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the User profiles folder,
The user profiles table opens.
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


222/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Click on to close the table.


The user profiles table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste
functions are available.

Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the User profiles folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the user profiles table.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any user
type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VI.5.2.e GSM/GPRS/EDGE ENVIRONMENTS
VI.5.2.e.i Creating a type of GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment
Environment classes may be used to describe subscriber spatial distribution on a map; they are the available classes for
traffic cartography design. An environment class represents an economic and social concept, which defines the
characteristics of user profiles. Each environment class contains a set of three data (user profile, mobility, density) where
density is a number of subscribers with the same profile per km. There is no restriction on the number of data sets
constituting an environment.

To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each environment class.

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment type, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Environments folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the currently created environment,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Particular case: When no multi-service geo-marketing data are available, you may supply A9155 with usual traffic data
like user densities per service (for example, values coming from adapted GSM Erlang maps).Traffic distribution will only
depend on densities per service.

VI.5.2.e.ii Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment parameters
Like for the other A9155 object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE environments are easily manageable. Creation steps and the
display management are standard.

To manage the environments parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Environments folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the environment type of which you want to manage the properties to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the environment type of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current environment,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Notes :
To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each environment class in the
Clutter weighting tab.
When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 223/476


environment type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.
VI.5.2.e.iii Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment types
A9155 allows the user to simultaneously display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profile,
environment) in a table window.

To open the environment types table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Environments folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Environments folder,
The Environment type table opens.


The environment types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and
copy/paste functions are available.

Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the Environments folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the environment types
table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any
environment type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VI.5.2.e.iv Subscriber clutter weighting in GSM/GPRS/EDGE environments
Enter a weight for each clutter class in order to get an appropriate user distribution
The following formula is used for calculations:

=
j
j j
k k
class k
S w
S w
N N

where :
k
N

Number of users in the k clutter
class
N

Number of users in an environment class
k
w

k clutter weight at fixed surface
k
S

k clutter surface (stated in km)

VI.5.3 GSM/GPRS/EDGE MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY
VI.5.3.a GSM/GPRS/EDGE MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY : OVERVIEW
A9155 provides 4 types of traffic maps for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects :

Traffic raster maps based on environments: each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class.
Traffic vector maps based on user profiles: each polygon or line contains a density of subscribers with given user
profile and mobility type.
Traffic maps per transmitter and per service: live traffic is spread over a best server coverage plot.
Traffic raster maps based on user densities: actual user density per pixel can be used to create a map of this type.

Whatever the type of map is, this one can be either created or modified manually, imported from an external file and
exported to an external file.

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


224/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VI.5.3.b GSM/GPRS/EDGE ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAPS
VI.5.3.b.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map
There are two solutions to define an environment traffic map, either by creating environment polygons or by directly
importing a raster map in your project as an environment traffic map.

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on environments (raster) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the cartography editor (selecting one of the available environment classes as defined in the
environment folder) to draw environment polygons,
Click the button to close the editor.

Notes :
Like other raster maps, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.
You can only choose among existing environment classes in the cartography editor. To make available additional
classes, do it in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters.

VI.5.3.b.ii Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map
There are two solutions to define an environment traffic map, either by creating environment polygons or by directly
importing a raster map (with the appropriate format) in your project as an environment traffic map.

To import a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map from an external file, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on environments (raster) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the name column, left click cells in order to replace class (codes or clutter) names by existing
environment classes,
Press OK or Apply to validate.


Notes :
Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the environment traffic type
in the appropriate scrolling menu),
Clutter files can be imported as traffic files,
In order to manage traffic on the entire map, this operation must be carried out for all classes.
The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+V and Ctrl+C) in a new A9155 project after importing
the raster file. To select globally the environment class table, just left click on the top left angle of the environment
table.
Like other raster maps, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.

VI.5.3.b.iii Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic maps
On an existing environment traffic map, you can access properties and it is possible to modify the class association and
its display settings.

To access the properties of an existing environment traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 225/476


Either
Right click on the related environment map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related environment map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the description tab to re-associate environment classes,
Click the display tab to set the transparency level, the visibility scale and to add the map information to the
legend,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

It is also possible to access the properties of a single file composing the resulting map (properties command in the
related context menu) to embed it into the atl project or to check the map geocoding.

Notes :
Absolute and relative statistics can be provided for this type of map.
A9155 provides the possibility to display the cumulated traffic when working on several traffic map(s), whatever there
types are.

VI.5.3.b.iv Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map
Like the other GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic map types (user profile, live traffic or user density), it is possible to export a
environment traffic map in either a 8 bits/pixel raster tiff, bil or bmp format. It is possible to export a part or the complete
environment traffic map.

To export a part or the complete environment traffic map in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the Environment map folder in order to get the related context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported,
Click the Save button when this is made,
In the Export dialog box, select one of the options and define the resolution (in metres) of file :
The whole covered region option allows you to save the whole traffic map in another file. As soon as
the file is saved, the properties (name,...) of the traffic maps listed in the Environment Traffic
subfolder are updated.
The only pending changes option allows just to save in the file the created traffic polygonal area. As
soon as the modifications are saved, an additional traffic item is created and listed in the
Environment Traffic subfolder.
The computation zone option allows you to save only traffic map region inside the computation zone
in another file. As soon as the file is saved, an additional traffic object is created and listed in the
Environment Traffic subfolder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone
beforehand.
A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for raster traffic from the following criteria :
If one traffic object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are modified, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of the
altered items.
If there is no initial traffic item, the resolution will equal the resolution of DTM object which the
modifications are made on or the smallest resolution of the merged DTM objects if the
modifications are performed on several DTM objects.
If you draw your own traffic data without initial DTM, clutter or traffic object, a 100 m default
resolution will be suggested.
The resolution value must be an integer.
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
Click OK to validate.

Comment: When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the same
folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain geocoding information and
resolution.

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


226/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VI.5.3.b.v Displaying statistics on GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic maps
It is possible to display statistics on an existing GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map. Statistics are given globally
and relatively as functions of environment traffic classes. Traffic density statistics indicates the proportion of each traffic
class. Traffic statistics refer to the focus zone is existing.


To display traffic statistics of the map in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the Environment Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Statistics option from the scrolling menu
The surface (Si in km) of imported or edited traffic class (i) included in the focus (if existing) zone and its
percentage (% of i) are specified:

100 of % =

k
k
i
S
S
i


Notes :
If no focus zone is defined, statistics are given over the computation zone.
Current statistics are printable by clicking the button.

VI.5.3.c GSM/GPRS/EDGE USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAPS
VI.5.3.c.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map
In A9155, user profile traffic maps can be defined in any type of project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA2000). The vector data (points, lines, polygonal shapes) are expected to directly link a dedicated user
profile, mobility and traffic density. The way to get user profile traffic maps consists in either importing vector files
(MapInfo(MIF,MID), Arcview (SHP), Autocad(DXF)) and using them as traffic maps or creating vectors with the vector
editor and assign them some traffic information.

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on user profiles (vector) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs,
Potentially define traffic information (user profile, mobility type, density) in the Table tab, assign them to
A9155 internal traffic fields in the Traffic tab, and use the vector editor to draw environment polygons, lines
or points,
Click the button to close the editor.

Notes :
Like other vector layers, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.
Points can be seen as traffic hotspots

See Examples of vector traffic data

VI.5.3.c.ii Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map
In A9155, user profile traffic maps can be defined in any type of project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA2000). The vector data (points, lines, polygonal shapes) are expected to directly link a dedicated user
profile, mobility and traffic density. The way to get user profile traffic maps consists in either importing vector files
(MapInfo(MIF,MID), Arcview (SHP), Autocad(DXF)) and using them as traffic maps or creating vectors with the vector
editor and assign them some traffic information.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 227/476


To import a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on user profiles (vector) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Press the button to validate,

A dialog box is displayed in order to configure traffic vector data.
Click the Traffic tab,
In the Traffic fields part, specify the user profiles to be considered on the traffic vector map, their mobility
types (km/h) and their densities (number of users/km2 for polygons and number of user/km for lines). You
can decide the type of information that you want to use to define the traffic characteristics, either a field
described in the file (by field option in the Defined column) or a value directly user-definable in A9155 (by
value option in the Defined column).
The first method can be used only if the file you are importing contains attributes providing
information about the user profile, mobility or density. In this case, select in the Choice column a
suitable field for each data (user profile, mobility and density); A9155 lists all the attributes described
in the file. The attributes of the source file cannot be modified. Using this method, each traffic
polygon or linear is assigned specific characteristics (user profile, mobility or density).
Note : Take care to define in A9155 user profiles and mobility types described in traffic file with exact
spelling.

The second way is useful when traffic files contain no attribute. Therefore, you may assign manually
user profiles, mobility types and densities created in A9155. Select in the Choice column user profile
and mobility listed in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder and specify manually a global density for
all the polygons. Beforehand, just make sure to define in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters the internal
data like user profile and mobility you want to allocate. Here, all the polygons are described by global
characteristics (user profile, mobility or density).

In the Clutter weighting part, assign a weight to each clutter class. Thus, A9155 allows you to spread traffic
inside the polygons according to the clutter weighting defined for the whole subfolder. The spreading
operation (using a raster step) will be carried out during the simulation process.
Then, press OK to validate the properties setting.


Notes :
Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the Traffic type in the
appropriate scrolling menu),
During the import procedure, if the imported user profiles or mobility types are not currently part of the existing user
profiles or mobility types, A9155 warns you about the fact that these may not be correctly taken into account as traffic
data.
Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.

See Examples of vector traffic data

VI.5.3.c.iii Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic maps
To access the properties of an existing user profile traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the related user profile traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related user profile traffic map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of
the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organisation or filters on the vector
display,
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


228/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Click on the Table tab to manage the content of the vector,
Click on the Traffic tab to re-associate vector fields and A9155 internal traffic fields, and to impose
subscriber clutter weighting using this map for the traffic analysis,
Click on the Display tab to open the A9155 generic display dialog,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

Note : A9155 provides the possibility to display the cumulated traffic when working on several traffic map(s), whatever
there types are.

VI.5.3.c.iv Examples of GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic data
Structure of two vector traffic files is described hereafter. Niceregion.mif consists of eleven polygons representing the
Nice region. Each polygon is characterised by a user profile, the services offered to subscribers, their mobility types and
densities. Densities are stated in number of subscribers per km
2
. Highway.mif represents a highway (linear) where
density corresponds to a number of subscribers per km.


Niceregion.mif

Name Userprofile Services used MobilityA DensityA MobilityB DensityB
Hinterland rural user Speech 90 km/h 8 pedestrian 2
Village rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 5
Corniche rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 20
Rural rural user Speech 90 km/h 8 pedestrian 2
Villages rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 10
Nice urban user Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video
conferencing
pedestrian 700 50 km/h 100
Nice airport urban user Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video
conferencing
pedestrian 700 50 km/h 100
Nice
surroundings
rural user Speech 50 km/h 100 90 km/h 100
Rural rural user Speech 90 km/h 5 pedestrian 5
Villages rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 5
Nice center urban user Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video
conferencing
pedestrian 4000 pedestrian 0

Using the user profile traffic import procedure, it is possible to associate (Traffic tab of the properties dialog) :
To user profile : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Userprofile field of the vector (by field), with
a different definition for each polygon,
To mobility : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the MobilityA (resp. MobilityB) field of the vector
(by field), with a different detention for each polygon,
To density : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the DensityA (resp. Density B) field of the vector
(by field), with a different definition for each polygon.


Highway.mif

ID User_profile Service used Density Mobility
highway driver Speech 400 120 km/h


Using the user profile traffic import procedure, it is possible to associate (Traffic tab of the properties dialog) :
To user profile : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the User_profile field of the vector (by field),
with a different definition for each polygon,
To mobility : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Mobility field of the vector (by field), with a
different detention for each polygon,
To density : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Density field of the vector (by field), with a
different definition for each polygon.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 229/476


VI.5.3.c.v Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map
Like the other GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic map types (environment, live traffic or user density), it is possible to export user
profile traffic maps.

To export a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the user profile traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible formats are
Arcview (.shp), MapInfo (.mif) and the A9155 internal format (.agd),
Click the Save button to complete the export procedure.

VI.5.3.d GSM/GPRS/EDGE LIVE TRAFFIC MAPS
VI.5.3.d.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map
This kind of traffic map requires a coverage by transmitter prediction study. Then, A9155 expects on each transmitter
service area, a number of Erlangs in case of speech service and rate values (kbps) for packet-switched services.

Note : It is possible to define either one map per service or one map with all services.

Then, the traffic cartography is built without connection with the initial coverage prediction. This map consists of polygons
provided with the same features as the user profile traffic polygons.

The definition of GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation on the basis of a
coverage by transmitter study previously calculated or by importing a file.

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on transmitters and services option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Select the prediction study to be considered for traffic distribution. Only coverage per transmitter studies
can be used. A table where you can indicate the live traffic spread over the transmitter service areas is
available. It consists of a column dedicated to transmitters and several columns for the different services
previously defined in the GSM/EGPRS parameters folder. In the TX_ID column, select each line, click on
the arrow and choose a transmitter in the list. You may also use the copy and paste commands
(respectively Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V) from an Excel file already containing the expected columns.
Enter Erlangs for speech service and rate values (kbits/s) for packet-switched services for each transmitter.
Press OK to continue the map creation.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs,
A9155 displays the property dialog of the map. Click the Traffic tab of the opened property dialog and
define terminal and mobility ratios by entering percentage values for each terminal and each mobility type
(they will be used in the traffic scenario). You may also specify a weight per clutter class to spread traffic
over each coverage area. The spreading operation will be performed during the traffic distribution.
Click OK to validate.


A9155 creates an object called Traffic map per transmitter in the Traffic folder of the Geo tab.

Notes
The map only contains the service areas of transmitters listed in the table. Then, the traffic map shape is fixed and
cannot be modified; it is not possible to add new transmitters.
On the other hand, it is possible to modify traffic values (Erlangs, throughputs) afterwards in the Table related to the
map.

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


230/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VI.5.3.d.ii Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map
The definition of GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation on the basis of a
coverage by transmitter study previously calculated or by importing a file.

You may import files with AGD format. This is the A9155 geographic data internal format. This kind of file must be
created from A9155 (export of a coverage by transmitter study in the AGD format).

To import a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on transmitters and services option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Select the option embed in the document to include the file in the .atl document. When this option is not
selected, A9155 just memorizes the file directory path.

In the coordinate systems part, A9155 summarises the projection coordinate system you have defined in
the .atl project. In the box just below, specify the coordinate system of the file you are importing (click on
Change to choose another coordinate system).
Press the button to validate,
A9155 displays the property dialog of the map. Click the Traffic tab of the opened property dialog and
define terminal and mobility ratios by entering percentage values for each terminal and each mobility type
(they will be used in the traffic scenario). You may also specify a weight per clutter class to spread traffic
over each coverage area. The spreading operation will be performed during the traffic distribution.
Click OK to validate.

Note : It is also possible to import a traffic map per transmitter using the standard import procedure (Import command in
the File menu). In this case, you must specify in the import dialog that you want to import the file in the Traffic folder.

VI.5.3.d.iii Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic maps
Management features of vector maps are available for traffic maps per transmitter: standard graphical features are
available in the Display tab of the map property dialog and each map has a corresponding table. This table contains the
transmitters used to build the map and traffic information for each of them.


To access the properties of an existing live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the related live traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related live traffic map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of
the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organisation or filters on the vector
display,
Click on the Table tab to manage the content of the vector,
Click on the Traffic tab to re-define terminal and mobility ratios and to impose subscriber clutter weighting
using this map for the traffic analysis,
Click on the Display tab to open the A9155 generic display dialog,
Press OK or Apply to validate.


To open the table related to an existing live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 231/476


Right click on the related live traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open

The management of the table is generic and can be accessed from the Table tab of the properties dialog or from the
Table context menu (Fields command). Sorts and Filters features on the display are also available.

Note : A9155 provides the possibility to display the cumulated traffic when working on several traffic map(s), whatever
there types are.

VI.5.3.d.iv Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map
Like the other GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic map types (environment, user profile or user density), it is possible to export live
traffic maps.

To export a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the live traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible format is the
A9155 internal format (.agd),
Click the Save button to complete the export procedure.

VI.5.3.e GSM/GPRS/EDGE USER DENSITY TRAFFIC MAPS
VI.5.3.e.i Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map
This type of traffic maps allows the user to express the traffic density directly in the form of a map using graphical vector
layers. The user can add vector layers and draw the regions with different traffic densities. The user can also specify the
distribution of Terminal types, Mobility types, and Services for the map based on traffic density.

Note : It is possible to create multiple maps based on traffic density with different distribution of Terminal types, Mobility
types and Services.

The definition of GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation by drawing or by
importing a raster (32-bit format) file.

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on densities option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,

After clicking on Create map, A9155 adds a subfolder in the Traffic folder.

Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs,
A9155 displays the property dialog of the map. In the Traffic tab, you can describe the distribution of
different types of traffic. Specify the percentages of the distribution of different Terminal types, Mobility
types and Services in the map (they will be used in the traffic scenario). You can also manage the Display
properties of the map from the Display tab.

Notes:
The map contains traffic density per pixel directly entered by the user. So, if the user has entered a traffic density of
100 users per km2, A9155 will allocate x users per pixel (depending on the pixel size) and these x users will be
distributed according to the percentages given in the Traffic tab of the maps properties window.
It is possible to modify traffic distribution (Terminal types, Mobility types and Services) afterwards in the properties of
the map.

A9155 creates an object called Traffic density map in the Traffic folder of the Geo tab. A vector layer is
automatically created in this subfolder,
Edit this vector layer to define geographical areas with a certain traffic density. To change the traffic
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


232/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


density, you have to open the vector layer table and enter values in the Traffic density(Density) column.
Close the table to validate.


Notes:
You can turn the vector editor ON and OFF either through the Edit menu in the Traffic density Maps context menu
or through the Edit menu in the vector layers context menu.
In this type of traffic maps, you are not asked to specify a clutter weighting as it is already the traffic density per pixel
that is stored in the map.

VI.5.3.e.ii Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map
The definition of GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation by drawing or by
importing a raster (32-bit format) file. The supported formats are BIL (only 32 bit), BMP, PlaNET, TIFF, ISTAR, Erdas
Imagine formats

To import a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on densities option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic density option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs,
A9155 displays the property dialog of the map. In the Traffic tab, you can describe the distribution of
different types of traffic. Specify the percentages of the distribution of different Terminal types, Mobility
types and Services in the map (they will be used in the traffic scenario). You can also manage the Display
properties of the map from the Display tab.
Click OK to close the dialog.

Notes:
Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the Traffic density type in
the appropriate scrolling menu),
The map contains traffic density per pixel directly entered by the user. So, if the user has entered a traffic density of
100 users per km2, A9155 will allocate x users per pixel (depending on the pixel size) and these x users will be
distributed according to the percentages given in the Traffic tab of the maps properties window,
It is possible to modify traffic distribution (Terminal types, Mobility types and Services) afterwards in the properties of
the map.
In this type of traffic maps, you are not asked to specify a clutter weighting as it is already the traffic density per pixel
that is stored in the map.

VI.5.3.e.iii Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic maps
Management features of vector maps are available for traffic density maps: limited set of graphical features are available
in the Display tab of the map property dialog and each map has a corresponding table. This table contains the traffic
density values used.

To access the properties of an existing user density traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the related user density traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related live traffic map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the Traffic tab to re-define Terminal, Mobility and Services ratios using this map for the traffic
analysis,
Click on the Display tab to open the A9155 generic display dialog,
Press OK or Apply to validate.
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 233/476


To open the table related to an existing user density traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Expand the User density Traffic subfolder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the vector layer to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open

The management of the table is generic and can be accessed from the Table tab of the vector properties dialog or from
the Table context menu (Fields command). Sorts and Filters features on the display are also available.

Note : A9155 provides the possibility to display the cumulated traffic when working on several traffic map(s), whatever
there types are.

VI.5.3.e.iv Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map
Like the other GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic map types (environment, user profile or live traffic), it is possible to export user
density traffic maps.

To export a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the user density traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible format are BIL
(only 32 bit) and BMP formats,
Click the Save button to complete the export procedure.

VI.5.3.f GSM/GPRS/EDGE CUMULATED TRAFFIC
VI.5.3.f.i Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE cumulated traffic
In A9155, there are different possibilities for displaying the traffic maps in a GSM/EGPRS document:
Either the user can display all the traffic maps in form of different items. In this case, A9155 displays the maps in
layers laid one over the other. This is the default method of displaying traffic maps.
Or the user can choose to display the cumulated traffic.

Traffic from all the map layers is cumulated over the map display window and the resulting traffic is displayed and
coloured according to the traffic density per pixel.

To display the GSM/GPRS/EDGE cumulated traffic, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Click the Display tab. The A9155 generic display dialog opens,
Select the Value intervals display and the appropriate field,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

A9155 can display the cumulated circuit-switched and the cumulated packet-switched traffic densities in Erlangs/km2
and kbps/km2 respectively. The cumulated traffic takes into account the clutter weighting if used for traffic maps other
than traffic density maps. This type of display is useful to view the different traffic density areas as a result of all the
different traffic maps. Different colour shades are used to depict different values of cumulated traffic density per pixel
resulting from the initial traffic maps.

Note : to come back to the standard display, select the 'None' display type.

VI.5.3.f.ii Exporting the GSM/GPRS/EDGE cumulated traffic
A9155 allows the user to export the cumulated traffic generated with all the traffic maps in the environment. The
cumulated traffic can be exported in BIL (only 32 bit) and BMP formats. These exported files can later be imported and
used as traffic density maps in A9155.

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


234/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


To export a raster file containing the cumulated traffic density, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on the Export cumulated traffic command,
Specify the directory where you want to save the exported file, the file name and the file type in the opened
dialog box,
Press OK to validate

VI.5.4 GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC ANALYSIS
VI.5.4.a GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC ANALYSIS : OVERVIEW
Traffic analysis allows the user to analyse the traffic from maps at the transmitter level. This feature, in general,
distributes the traffic from the maps to all the transmitters in each layer according to the compatibility criteria defined in
the transmitter, services, mobility, terminal items. More specifically, this feature allows A9155 to allocate the traffic to
each transmitter of each layer (micro/macro, multiband, ) taking into account the criteria defined in the user profiles
and the transmitters.

For example, an EGPRS enabled transmitter will be allocated the data user traffic while a transmitter not having the
EGPRS functionality will only carry the GSM voice traffic.

Similarly, a user using a GSM900 band mobile phone will not be allocated to a transmitter that only functions on the
DCS1800 band, and so on and so forth.

This feature allows the user to create multiple traffic distributions with different criteria and to later analyse the network
according to any of them.

Important: the traffic analysis is a mandatory step before dimensioning. The outputs of a traffic analysis can be used for
dimensioning and KPI calculation, and the determination of coverage study reports and neighbour allocation is based on
a default capture.

VI.5.4.b CREATING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC CAPTURE
To perform a traffic analysis, proceed as follows:
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic analysis folder and choose New in the associated context menu,
The property dialog opens. Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the currently created traffic
distribution,

The General tab: Here, you may type the name of the traffic analysis, add some comments and filter
the transmitters which you want to spread the traffic over.

The Source traffic tab: A9155 lists in this tab all the traffic maps available in the .atl document. Select
this (or these) to be considered in the traffic analysis. It is possible to globally scale the traffic maps
with a certain multiplying factor; this factor enables you to increase the traffic request of the map
without changing the traffic map description.

The Condition tab: Parameters available in the Condition part are used to determine each transmitter
service area which A9155 will distribute traffic and then, the traffic demand. Service areas of subcells
are determined using the option Best signal level per HCS layer , a 0dB margin and the subcell
reception threshold as lower threshold.

In case of data traffic, you may base analysis on C/I. In this case, A9155 uses the charts rate=f(C)
and rate=f(C/I) to evaluate the number of timeslots used for the traffic demand and the minimum rate
reduction factor.

Then, either confirm by clicking on Calculate in the Condition tab, or
Click on OK to close the dialog and choose OK in the A9155 dialog in order to calculate the traffic capture.

After completing calculations, A9155 adds two new tabs named Results per transmitter and Results per subcell in the
property dialog producing the outputs of the traffic analysis.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 235/476


VI.5.4.c GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC CAPTURE OUTPUTS
After completing calculations, A9155 adds two new tabs named Results per transmitter and Results per subcell in the
property dialog.


In the Results per transmitter tab, A9155 indicates the traffic distributed to each transmitter. It provides, for each
transmitter:

The circuit traffic demand (in Erlangs) and the average demand of circuit timeslots,

The number of timeslots to be used to match the circuit traffic demand depends whether the transmitter subcells support
full or half rate.

The packet traffic demand (in kbps) and the average demand of packet timeslots,

The number of timeslots to be used to match the packet traffic demand depends on the maximum throughput that a
packet timeslot can support. This parameter is predefined by radio conditions at the mobile terminal (C and optionally
C/I).

The average packet timeslot capacity (in kbps).


In the Results per subcell tab, A9155 details the distributed traffic per subcell, service, terminal and mobility. For each
subcell of each transmitter (except BCCH subcell, which is supposed to capture the same traffic than TCH subcell),
A9155 indicates the type(s) of traffic assigned to it (service, mobility, terminal). Then, for each set (subcell, service,
mobility, terminal), it displays:

The traffic demand: circuit traffic demand is stated in Erlangs and packet traffic demand in kbits/s,

The number of timeslots to be used to match the traffic demand.

In case of voice service, it depends whether the subcell supports full or half rate. If the % of half rate traffic ratio of the
subcell is set to 0, the subcell needs as many timeslots as Erlangs and the number of used timeslots equals the traffic
demand. In case of half rate, the number of used timeslots depends on the % of traffic using half rate.

In case of a packet switched service, the demand in packet timeslots depends on the maximum throughput that a
timeslot can support. This parameter is predefined by radio conditions at the mobile terminal (C and optionally C/I).

Formulas and calculation details of results are available in the technical reference guide.

VI.5.4.d USING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC ANALYSIS
Different tools are available on an existing GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic analysis. From its context menu (right click), you
may :
Use standard management features (Delete, Rename),
Open the property dialog of the traffic analysis to check analysis parameters and results (Properties),
Recalculate the traffic analysis (Recalculate),
Select the traffic analysis as the default traffic distribution to be taken into account in coverage study reports and
neighbour allocation (Default). This particular captured traffic is assigned a little icon describing it as the default
distribution for studies (not default : ).
Perform dimensioning of network based on a traffic analysis (Dimensioning),
Calculate KPIs of a real network based on the traffic analysis (KPI calculation),

VI.6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE NETWORK DIMENSIONING
VI.6.1 SETTING GSM/GPRS/EDGE DIMENSIONING MODELS
Dimensioning models are provided at the GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters level. This item is the basis of
GSM/GPRS/EDGE dimensioning and quality analysis process. A user can define a dimensioning model by providing the
simple parameters in the properties window.

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


236/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


To set parameters of a dimensioning model, proceed as follows :
Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters folder by clicking on the button,
Expand the Dimensioning models subfolder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on a dimensioning model and select Properties in the context menu.

Notably, these parameters define the system level conditions to be taken into account when dimensioning the system or
when analysing the quality of service (QoS) of the system.

Open the General tab and indicate dimensioning directives:

The upper limit on the number of TRXs that can be placed in a transmitter,

The queuing model for GSM voice calls (Erlang B or Erlang C),

The lower limit on the number of dedicated packet switched timeslots that can be used by the
transmitter, the upper limit on the number of TRXs that can be added in order for the subcell to fulfil
the packet traffic demand and the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) to be taken into account when
performing the dimensioning process.

Open the Quality charts tab including the curves of throughput reduction factor, delay, and blocking
probability used for the dimensioning process of packet switching traffic. All these three curves are against
the system load, which is defined as the ratio of used packet timeslots to the number of timeslots available
to perform data communication (packet calls). A9155 provides a basic set of curves by default for these
parameters, but a user can always use his own quality curves generated through some other software
package using simulations.

Notes:
The quality model curves should not be modified haphazardly, as it may cause the dimensioning and quality analysis
feature to malfunction.
The curve for delay against network load is left to be entered by the user for the moment.
The curve of blocking probability against network load is for a user multiplexing factor of 8 (default value). The user
multiplexing factor corresponds to the number of GPRS/EDGE users that can be multiplexed on a timeslot. This field
has been added in the database structure of the document template GSM_EGPRS (EGPRSDimensioningModel
table) but it is not used for the moment. This feature will be completely implemented in a later release.

Click OK to close the property dialog.

KPIs are the minimal throughput, the blocking probability and the delay. They are described below.

Throughput for a EGPRS user is the average maximum throughput perceived at the mobile terminal during a data call. If
there are more than one user multiplexed on the same timeslot, which occurs as the system starts being loaded with
many users, each multiplexed user perceives a reduction in his throughput per timeslot due to this multiplexing. This
reduction in throughput is depicted by the Reduction Factor. A Reduction Factor of 1, or nearly 1, means that each user
is communicating at the maximum throughput that a timeslot can offer in a given environment (the maximum throughput
per timeslot depends, in its turn, on the C/I ratio at a given location). As the system starts being loaded with users, the
reduction factor starts decreasing depicting the lessening of throughput per user.

Each user communicating over a packet switching protocol experiences a delay that is due to the buffering of packets,
the resource allocation, and transmission delay. This delay can be restricted to a maximum allowable limit within the
properties of a service. This delay and the blocking probability in the EGPRS system are closely related, meaning that a
user starts to experience more delay in service when the system is near saturation and the incoming packets are placed
in a waiting queue as there are no resources available for immediate transfer. This buffering of packets is related to the
load of the system.

Note : The term system load refers to the ratio of the number of used packet timeslots to the number of packet switching
(shared + dedicated) timeslots available in the system. Hence, it has roughly the same concept as traffic load in the
GSM.
VI.6.2 DIMENSIONING GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRANSMITTERS
A9155 allows the user to dimension a GSM/EGPRS network fully and thoroughly. The user can work with multiple traffic
maps, whose traffic has been distributed over the transmitters and network layers, to dimension the transmitters
according to GSM voice and EGPRS data traffic carried. Only one traffic capture can be used for dimensioning
computations at a time.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 237/476


To run a dimensioning calculation, proceed as follows:
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic analysis folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on a Traffic capture item, according to which you want to dimension the network, to open the
context menu,
Select the Dimensioning command in the opened scrolling menu,
In the Dimensioning dialog, choose the dimensioning model to be used for computations,

You can select the columns you want to display in the table. To do this, click on the Displayed columns button and select
information you wish to display.

Click on Calculate button to perform the dimensioning.

A9155 sums up dimensioning inputs and outputs in the table. A9155 displays rows of the table in red when the number
of required TRXs for a transmitter exceeds the maximum number of TRXs per transmitter.

Note : Dimensioning is based on a traffic capture. Modifications of traffic map(s), traffic parameters and transmitter
properties (e.g. calculation area, GPRS/EDGE equipment,) have an influence on the traffic capture. Therefore, if you
modify some of these data, you must recalculate the traffic capture before performing dimensioning.

VI.6.3 COMMITING DIMENSIONING OUTPUTS IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE
After a dimensioning procedure, for each subcell of each transmitter, A9155 gives:
Main dimensioning results such as the number of required TRXs, the number of required packet, shared and circuit
timeslots and the traffic load (circuit and packet),

We assume we have a subcell with circuit and packet traffic. A9155 evaluates a number of TRXs so as to have
enough circuit timeslots (shared and dedicated) to match the circuit traffic demand with the effective blocking rate.
Then, it calculates how many TRXs it must add to match the packet traffic demand. This value is determined for a
given packet load from quality charts used by the dimensioning model. If the dimensioning model takes into
account the three KPIs (minimum throughput reduction factor, maximum delay and maximum blocking rate), the
number of TRXs to add for packet service is calculated so as to comply with the following conditions: the
throughput reduction factor must exceed the minimum throughput reduction factor, the delay and the blocking rate
must be respectively lower than the maximum delay and maximum blocking rate.

Network settings such as the maximum number of TRXs that can be placed in the transmitter (this value is indicated
in the dimensioning model properties), the maximum rate of traffic overflow (%) (specified in the subcell properties)
and the half rate traffic ratio (%) (defined in the subcell properties).

Note : When the maximum rate of traffic overflow and the Half-Rate traffic ratio values are different for BCCH and
TCH subcells, A9155 takes the BCCH subcell values.

Traffic capture results such as the packet traffic demand (kbps), the average demand in packet timeslots, the average
number of timeslots per connection (packet) and the circuit traffic demand (Erlangs), the average demand in circuit
timeslots and the average number of timeslots per connection (circuit),

Note : In case of concentric cells, the traffic demand on TCH subcells is different from the one evaluated during
the traffic capture. It is calculated from the traffic demand of the capture and the effective rate of traffic overflow
(instead of the maximum rate used in traffic analysis).

For packet services, the average number of timeslots per connection corresponds to the average number of
downlink timeslots, which mobile terminals can simultaneously communicate over. For circuit switched services,
the number of timeslots per connection is 1 in case of full rate; else it depends on the half rate ratio.

Additional dimensioning results,

- For a circuit switched service, you will find the served circuit traffic (Erlangs), the effective rate of traffic overflow
and the effective blocking rate.

The served circuit traffic corresponds to the circuit traffic demand less the effective overflowed circuit traffic.
In case of Erlang B, the effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the effective blocking rate; this value is
deduced from the required number of circuit timeslots (shared + dedicated) and the circuit traffic demand in
Erlang B tables.
In case of Erlang C, the effective rate of traffic overflow is zero except if the maximum number of TRXs is
exceeded; the effective blocking rate is inferred from the required number of circuit timeslots (shared + dedicated)
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


238/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang C tables.


- For a packet switched service, results are the served packet traffic (kbps), the effective rate of traffic overflow,
the minimum throughput reduction factor and KPIs such as the throughput reduction factor, the delay and the
blocking rate.

The served packet traffic corresponds to the packet traffic demand less the effective overflowed packet traffic.
The effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the rejected packet traffic due to missing packet timeslots.
The minimum throughput reduction factor is stated in percentage; it corresponds to the highest reduction (lowest
percentage) that can be applied to the maximum rate in order to supply service with the minimum permissible rate
(defined for the service).


After a computation, click on Commit to assign the results to transmitters (the required number of TRXs)
and subcells (the required number of TRXs, the load, the required number of shared, circuit and packet
timeslots and the effective rate of traffic overflow).

A9155 displays rows of the table in red when the number of required TRXs for a transmitter exceeds the maximum
number of TRXs per transmitter.

Notes
Dimensioning is based on a traffic capture. Modifications of traffic map(s), traffic parameters and transmitter
properties (e.g. calculation area, E/GPRS equipment,) have an influence on the traffic capture. Therefore, if you
modify some of these data, you must recalculate the traffic capture before performing dimensioning.
Formulas and calculation details of parameters listed in the table are available in the technical reference guide.

VI.7 GSM/GPRS/EDGE RESOURCES ALLOCATION
VI.7.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE RESOURCES ALLOCATION : OVERVIEW
At this step, a GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters, traffic maps have been defined. A traffic analysis has been performed with
a view to dimension the network. The number of needed resources (TRXs) is known.

The next step is to define transmitters neighbours. This can be made manually, but A9155 proposes an algorithm which
allows you to perform it automatically. Allocating transmitter neighbours manually can also be made for external
transmitters from a linked network in co-planning. Neighbour definition helps in the Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP)
in order to impose frequency separation constraints on neighbours.

Once the neighbours are known, the resource allocation can be made either manually or by using an automatic
allocation tool. The constraints on it come from the data model itself, from the user which can impose separation
constraints on :
- Neighbours
- Within transmitters,
- On transmitters located on unique sites
- Defined exceptional pairs of subcells,
and from the different dialogs composing the procedure of the AFP.

Concerning the AFP features, A9155 provides a generic AFP interface which is compliant for the use of a specific AFP
model. General constraints are imposed in the generic parts and the strategy directives can be set in the specific model
itself.

This automatic tool will try to reach a best solution respecting also the number of requested resources. Furthermore, this
tool can help you for the determination of HSNs, MAIOs, BSICs, SFHs.

After the resource allocation, the network can be analysed thanks to the use of the following tools :
A tool to check the frequency plan consistency,
A tool to check the consistency between transmitters and subcells,
A channel search tool working on channels, BCCHs and BSICs,
The possibility to compute Key Performance Indicators (KPI) on the basis of a traffic capture and a resource
allocation.

The network is the ready for the study of interfered zones, C/I predictions, and specific E/GPRS studies (coding schemes
and throughputs).
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 239/476


VI.7.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE NEIGHBOURS
VI.7.2.a ALLOCATING GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRANSMITTER NEIGHBOURS MANUALLY
When defined, cell neighbours are a way to optimise the search of possible cells aiming to perform handover from the
current coverage area. Allocating neighbours in a network is optional. Defining neighbours helps in imposing constraints
for frequency automatic allocation.

Note : neighbours are not a filter for transmitters being part of interferers. All transmitters in a network take part in
interferences on each transmitter. Neighbours of any linked project in co-planning can also be listed and chosen
manually.


Manual allocation of GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours must be performed for each transmitter, one at a time. To do this,
proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Either,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either,
Right click on the transmitter from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Choose the properties option from the context menu,
Or
Double click on the transmitter from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
Use the What's this help to get information about fields available in the current window,
In the displayed window, in the top table, click on cell to choose from the scrolling box the desired
cell as a transmitter for the current one. In the scrolling box are displayed all the transmitters located
within a radius of 30 km around the reference transmitter,
Click either another table cell, or the button to validate and add a new line to the
table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
or
Choose the [Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the open menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, click on a table cell to determine either base transmitters or associated
neighbours in the network,
Click another table cell to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.

Notes :
Neighbours manual allocation tools are also ways to check currently allocated neighbourhoods,
Due to the organisation of neighbourhoods in tables, the copy-paste feature can be used in order to generate the
neighbour table of a global network (or per transmitter).
This feature deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.

An automatic allocation tool is also available.
VI.7.2.b ALLOCATING GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRANSMITTER NEIGHBOURS AUTOMATICALLY
Allocating automatically permits to allocate neighbours globally in the current network by imposing constraints on active
transmitters that must be satisfied. Force neighbour reciprocity, adjacency and within co-site is possible.

To automatically allocate GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours in a network, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Neighbours:Automatic allocation...] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters for the current Auto Neighbours allocation study,

Two fields, handover start and handover end have to be defined. These margins enable A9155 to restrict the
reference transmitter coverage area taken into account to determine overlapping area. We assume we have a reference
transmitter A and a transmitter B candidate for entering the neighbour list of A. The overlapping area between SA and SB
is defined as follows:
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


240/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


SA is the reference transmitter A coverage area restricted between two boundaries. The first boundary represents the
start of the handover area (best server area of A more the handover margin named handover start) and the second
boundary shows the end of the handover area (best server area of A more the margin called handover end).
SB is coverage area where the candidate transmitter B is the best server.

refA
Best server area of refA
SASB
canB
Best server area of canB
Handover end
Handover start
Minimum signal level



Notes
The margin handover end must exceed the margin handover start.
The higher the margin handover end is, the bigger the list of candidate neighbours is.

You can force neighbour adjacency. When selecting the Force adjacent cells as neighbours option, adjacent cells are top
ranked in the neighbour list just after co-site cells. If there is not enough space in neighbour list, A9155 displays a
warning in the Events viewer indicating that the adjacent cell constraint cannot be respected.

Click the button to start calculations,

In the Results part, A9155 lists all the transmitters fulfilling the specified neighbourhood criteria. Then, it orders them so
as to eliminate some of them from the list if the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each transmitter is
exceeded. Thus, among n transmitters (n > max number of neighbours), which fulfil the criteria described above, only
those with the highest overlap area between SA and SB will be kept as neighbours.

When selecting the Reset option, A9155 deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour allocation. If
not selected, the existing neighbours are kept. Therefore, if you add a new transmitter i and start a new allocation without
selecting the Reset option:
A9155 determines the neighbour list of the transmitter i,
It examines the neighbour list of other transmitters. If there is space in neighbour list of another transmitter j:
- The transmitter i enters the transmitter j neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. The transmitter i will be
the first one in the neighbour list.
- The transmitter i does not enter the transmitter j neighbour list if allocation criteria are not satisfied.
If the transmitter j belongs to the transmitter i neighbour list and the force symmetry option is selected:
- The transmitter i will enter the transmitter j neighbour list if there is space in the transmitter j neighbour list.
- If the transmitter j neighbour list is full, A9155 removes the transmitter j from the transmitter i neighbour list in
order to preserve the link symmetry
Once calculations are achieved, click the button to attribute neighbours to transmitters as
displayed in the current table. Neighbours are then listed in the Neighbours tab of each transmitter
properties window.
Click the Close button to achieve the procedure.

Notes :
This feature deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.
No prediction study is needed to perform the automatic neighbour allocation. When starting an automatic neighbour
allocation, A9155
A9155 does not take into account the specified margin handover start when using the adjacency option. It considers
a fixed value of 0 dB.
In case of HCS layers, neighbours between macros and micros in HCS are not currently allocated even if the macro
and micro are physically adjacent.
You can carry out neighbour allocation globally on all the transmitters or only on a group of transmitters. In this case,
A9155 will consider all the transmitters contained in the group of transmitters, the symmetric neighbours of these
transmitters and all the other ones, which have an intersection area with the transmitters of the group.
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 241/476


Neighbours are not a filter for transmitters being part of interferers. All transmitters in a network take part in
interferences on each transmitter.
VI.7.2.c DISPLAYING CURRENT GSM/GPRS/EDGE NEIGHBOUR LIST
A9155 provides the possibility to open an editable table referencing all the GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours of the current
network.

To access the GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbour table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the open menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, left column lists reference transmitters, right column, the related neighbours.

This table can be used to allocate neighbours manually.
VI.7.2.d DELETING ALLOCATED GSM/GPRS/EDGE NEIGHBOURS
To do this, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Either
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter from which you want to exclude some neighbours,
Choose the properties option from the context menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
Or
Right click on the transmitters folder,
Choose the [Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] option from the context menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, select the target neighbour line,
Press the keyboard Del (or Suppr.) key
Click on OK to validate and close the dialog box.

Note : this can also be made for external neighbours from a linked project in co-planning.
VI.7.2.e DISPLAYING GSM/GPRS/EDGE NEIGHBOURS ON THE MAP
Once the GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours have been allocated, you can display a given neighbourhood on the map.

To display the neighbours of any transmitter, proceed as follows :
Click on the visible neighbourhood icon from the toolbar,
Left click on the desired transmitter to select it on the map,
The neighbours are displayed (colour of the reference transmitter) on the map such as :

for the transmitter Site4_0 located on Site 4
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


242/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Note : This feature only deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.
VI.7.3 ALLOCATING GSM/GPRS/EGPRS RESOURCES MANUALLY IN A9155
VI.7.3.a ASSIGNING BSIC DOMAINS TO TRANSMITTERS
Once defined, a BSIC domain have to be assigned to a transmitter. Only BSICs included in the assigned BSIC domain
can be manually or automatically allocated to a transmitter.

To assign a BSIC domain to a transmitter, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the TRXs tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
In the Identification part, click on the scrolling menu and choose a BSIC domain in the list,
Click OK to close the dialog


Notes :
The BSIC domain must be consistent with the defined BSIC format. When choosing a format, A9155 adapts
automatically the related domain in order not to consider inconsistent values.
BSIC domain associated to the transmitter can be changed afterwards,
Once selected, BSIC domain dialog can be open by clicking on the button,
The BSIC domain is an input required for manual or automatic BSIC allocation,
When running the AFP, you can also select the BSIC allocation.
VI.7.3.b ASSIGNING MANUALLY BSICS TO TRANSMITTERS
The colour code BSIC (Base Station Identity Code) for a transmitter is made up of the NCC (Network Colour Code) and
the BCC (BTS Colour Code). The NCC code is, for example, 0 or 4 for France. The BCC code (respectively NCC) is a
digit between 0 and 7.
The BCCH-BSIC pair permits, on a given territory, to identify precisely a cell. At a higher level, it may exist identical
BCCH-BSIC pairs characterising very distant zones. In A9155, you can either allocate it manually to each transmitter or
automatically to all transmitters in the network.

Once a BSIC domain has been allocated to a transmitter, it is possible either to manually or automatically choose a BSIC
among available ones for any transmitter.

To manually allocate a BSIC to a transmitter, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the TRXs tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Click on the scrolling menu and choose a BSIC in the list,
Click OK to close the dialog


Notes :
The BSIC value must be consistent with the defined BSIC format. Only consistent values are available in the BSIC
scrolling menu.
BSIC associated to the transmitter can be changed afterwards.
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 243/476


The selected BSIC must be part of the chosen BSIC domain.
Once chosen in single digit format, the related NCC-BCC format is automatically displayed above the scrolling box.
It is possible to edit the BSIC scrolling box. Furthermore, you can enter the BSIC value with a NCC-BCC format in the
scrolling box, and click the Apply button. A9155 will convert it in the single digit format consistent with the related
BSIC domain.

VI.7.3.c ALLOCATING MANUALLY A BCCH TO TRANSMITTERS
BCCH (Broadcast Control CHannel) permits the diffusion of the cell characteristic data, including the steady diffusion of
several types data systems. This channel must be part both of the main frequency band (coming from the selected cell
type) and allocated channels in TRXs. The BCCH is defined on the timeslot 0 of a selected frequency.

To allocate manually a BCCH to a transmitter, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the TRXs tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Either,
In Non Hopping or Base Band Hopping, Create a new TRX of type BCCH and enter the related
channel,
Or,
In Synthesised Frequency Hopping, Create a new TRX of type BCCH, fill the related MAL in the
TRX part, and enter the channel on which will be located the timeslot 0 dedicated to the steady
diffusion of BCCH information,
Click OK to close the dialog


Note : You can also automatically a TRX of type BCCH by entering the related frequency in the BCCH columns from the
transmitter global table.
VI.7.3.d CREATING TRXS IN TRANSMITTERS
In A9155, for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, channels are defined at the TRX level. The manual allocation of frequencies is
made by the management of TRXs in transmitters.

The allocation can be also made by filling the Channels column from the transmitter table. When entering channel values
in the table, TRXs of type TCH are automatically created in the related transmitters.

BCCH can be assigned identically.

Automatic frequency allocation can also be made using the optional AFP module.

By using the advanced filter feature on transmitters, it is possible, for example, to display only transmitters linked to a
frequency and their adjacent ones. Using the filter feature in the study display tab, it is also possible to display all cells
with a specific frequency (f), and also all cells with frequencies (f+1) and (f-1) in different colours.
VI.7.3.e MANAGING TRXS IN TRANSMITTERS
From transmitter properties, it is possible to list TRXs of transmitter and channels allocated to TRXs. This TRX table can
be automatically filled after an automatic frequency planning. You may also fill it manually. It contains a TRX per line.

TRX is the transmitter level at which channels are defined.

To access the TRX table from the transmitter properties, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


244/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the TRXs tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Define the TRX settings in the TRXs part,
Click OK to close the dialog.

VI.7.3.f DISPLAYING THE TRX LIST
Even if TRXs are linked to transmitters, it is possible to display all existing TRXs of a network in an editable form.

To open the TRX general table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Subcells : TRX list] command from the open menu,
Define the TRX settings.


The button helps you to manage the content of the TRX table.

VI.7.3.g TRX PROPERTY DETAILS
Whatever is the way to reach TRX properties (from transmitter properties or from the TRX table), for any of them, A9155
details:

Index
This is identification number of TRX. This number (integer) may be user-defined or automatically given by A9155 (after
closing the dialog).

TRX type

Channels
Specify channel(s) allocated to TRX: 1 channel per TRX if the hopping mode for the TRX type is Non Hopping or Base
Band Hopping, several channels per TRX if the hopping mode for the TRX type is Synthesized Hopping.
Channel(s) can be either copied, or manually selected one by one in the scrolling menu (select the box and click on the
arrow to open the scrolling menu). The scrolling menu offers you channels of the frequency domain assigned to this TRX
type (Cell type property dialog).

Note : When pasting a list of channels, separator must be a blank character.

MAIO (Mobile Allocation Index Offset),
The MAIO is selectable for each TRX separately. It is used in case of frequency hopping (BBH or SFH) to avoid intra-site
collisions due to co or adjacent channel consumption. This is an integer; its range of value is between 0 and N-1 (N is the
number of channels used in the hopping sequence). MAIO can be manually entered or automatically allocated.

Freeze Channels
Select this option to keep the current channel allocation at the TRX level when starting a new AFP.

Note : the Freeze channels option can be also imposed at the transmitter level only.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 245/476


VI.7.4 USING AN AFP TO ALLOCATE RESOURCES IN A9155
VI.7.4.a ADJUSTING AFP PARAMETERS FROM THE DATA MODEL
In A9155, it is possible to adjust AFP parameters per transmitter and not only as global constraints.

In the TRXs tab of the transmitter property dialog, it is possible to force :
Subcell part :
The main frequency band used by propagation model when assigning cell types to transmitters,
The frequency domains (including the excluded channels) for each subcell in which the automatic tool chooses
frequencies as defined,
The allocation mode (Free or Group constrained) for the AFP to allocate frequencies to TRX,
The allowed C/I and max percentage of interference per subcell,
The minimum reception threshold for each subcell,
The max MAL length allowed per subcell,
The hopping mode, for each subcell of each transmitter,
The site synchronisation at the subcell level,
The support of DTX per subcell (or not),
The timeslot configurations,

Furthermore, A9155 is able to compute automatically the requested number of TRXs (at the subcell level) for all
transmitters of the network. When computed, values are automatically reported in the subcell part of the transmitter
property dialog boxes.


TRX part :
In the transmitter property dialog (TRXs tab), you can choose manually the frequencies related to each TRX. The MAIO
can also be manually specified. Concerning the AFP itself, it is possible to freeze channels of each TRX at this level. This
way, existing channels will not be overwritten by any new automatic allocation.


In the AFP tab of the transmitter property dialog, it is possible to impose :
A weight on cost function used for convergence on this specific transmitter. For example, entering a value of 2 for a
specific transmitter whereas the value for other transmitters is 1 means that we will consider convergence when the
reached cost function on this transmitter will be half the one of the other transmitters.
To avoid recalculation by AFP of parameters as frequencies, HSNs and BSICs at the transmitter level, it is possible to
freeze them. Frequencies can be also frozen at the subcell level (see above).
Exceptional channel separations with other (transmitter, subcell) pairs that are neither co-site nor neighbours of the
currently considered (transmitter, subcell) pair.

VI.7.4.b DEFINING EXCEPTIONAL SEPARATIONS FOR FREQUENCY ALLOCATION
In A9155, the Separation table, in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, allows you to impose/relax some channel separations
between items which are neither co-cell, nor co-site, nor part of neighbour transmitters during an automatic allocation of
frequencies. Standard separations are defined in the generic AFP dialog.

For example, if we take Tx1 and Tx2, which are neither neighbours nor co-site, we can impose in the separation table a
value of 3. This will mean that if we assign f1 to Tx1 and f2 to Tx2, the AFP has to respect :
3
2 1
f f
. This constraint is
also checked by the consistency checking tool.

The separations are defined per couple of (Transmitter, TRX type) pairs, and they deal with imposing or relaxing
constraints. Relaxing constraints means that the defined separation in the Separation table has priority on the imposed
separation between co-site, co-cell or neighbour items. It is even possible to define intra-cell separations, e.g. between
BCCH and TCH subcells of a same transmitter.

Examples :
Tx1 and Tx2 are neither neighbours or co-site. We impose in the separation table the following rules :

Separation of 3 channels between (Tx1, BCCH) and (Tx2, BCCH)
Separation of 2 channels between (Tx1, TCH) and (Tx2, TCH)

If we assign respectively f11 and f12 to the BCCH and the TCH of Tx1, and respectively f21 and f22 to the BCCH and
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


246/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


the TCH of Tx2, we must have :
3
21 11
f f
,
2
22 11
f f
. Nevertheless, we could have
11 21
f f =
and
12 21
f f =
.

We impose a co-cell minimum separation of 3. We defined also in the transmitter table a separation of 2 for the (Tx1,
BCCH) and (Tx1, TCH) pairs. So, if we assign f11 to the BCCH and f12 to the TCH, it may be possible to have
2
12 11
= f f
, even if there is a co-cell configuration.


For any transmitter, to define channel separations with any other transmitter, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol
(arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the AFP tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
In the displayed table window, enter the (Transmitter, TRX type) couples and their related imposed
separation,
Click either another table cell, or the button to validate and add a new line to the table.
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.


To access the exceptional pair table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Frequency plan : Exceptional pairs] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
In the displayed table, enter the (Transmitter, TRX type) couples and their related imposed separation,
Click another table cell to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.


The button helps you to manage the content of the Exceptional separation table.
Other constraints are imposed in transmitter properties.
The separation table can also be completed from the AFP generic dialog.
The consistency checking tool takes into account the defined separation table with priority compared to co-cell, co-
site or neighbour separation constraints.
It is possible to Copy and Paste (Ctrl-C Ctrl-V) the separation list in the tables.
In the TRX type column, it is possible to select the All value in order to force the separation for all the subcells of the
considered transmitter

VI.7.4.c USING THE GENERIC AFP INTERFACE
The role of an Automatic Frequency Planning tool (AFP) is the assignment of frequencies within a GSM network, in order
to match the traffic demand (number of requested TRXs) with respect to the quality (e.g. limitation of interferences).

A certain number of inputs are defined in the data model (transmitter properties and exceptional pairs of subcells) of from
the generic AFP Graphic User Interface. In addition, depending on the selected AFP model, specific parameters may be
set.

The Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) module of A9155 is an option that allows users to automatically generate
frequency plans for GSM and TDMA networks. The following parameters may be allocated:
Frequencies
Frequency hopping groups (MAL)
HSN, MAIO
BSIC

The AFP aims to generate optimal allocations, i.e. allocations that minimise interference over the network and comply
with a set of constraints defined by the user. The two main types of constraints are the separation constraints and the
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 247/476


spectrum limitations. The AFP uses a cost function to evaluate frequency plans, and the aim of the algorithm is to find
frequency plans with minimal costs.

In A9155, the GSM/GPRS/EDGE data model has been adapted to be consistent with any AFP model. A9155 provides
generic options and parameters, which can be taken into account during the automatic frequency plan.

A9155 provides a set of generic dialogs available for any AFP model implemented by various vendors. The different AFP
models are activated in the same way.

For any AFP model, the convergence criterion is based on a cost function taking into account all the requirements given
by the network inputs. The goal of the model is to try to minimize the value of the cost function involved in the process.
The cost function mainly consists of two components. The first component is related to interferences, the second one
considers separation constraint violations. Both components are normally added in order to get global cost.
Nevertheless, the user will be able to consider only the separation cost component.

Before starting an AFP session, you have to insure that the number of required TRXs per transmitter has been already
defined. The related traffic loads have an effect on the cost function used in the AFP.

As separation constraints may be set on neighbours, this allocation should also be performed before starting an AFP
session.
Starting AFP

You may perform an automatic frequency planning on all the transmitters or only on a group of transmitters.

To start an AFP session, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder or on a group of transmitters,
Choose the [Frequency plan: Automatic allocation] option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.


The first step consists in setting AFP inputs such as the resources to allocate, the choice of the subcells to be
considered, and the separation requirements. During the second step, A9155 loads and checks the network. The third
step consists in optionally computing the theoretical level of interference that the AFP model will have to minimize. If you
choose not to make this calculation, the mathematical model will work with respect to separation constraints only. This
dialog will allow you also to set the AFP model and to run it. Finally, A9155 provides AFP results in the last step.

Notes :
An audit on the computed frequency plan is available.
A channel search tool working on channels, BCCHs and BSICs allows you, for example, to display the transmitters
cells with a specific frequency (f) the ones with frequencies (f+1) and (f-1) in different colours.

VI.7.4.d AFP STEP 1 : GENERIC INPUTS
After having started an AFP session, the 1st step consists in the AFP generic inputs.

In this first dialog, you can :
In the General tab, check the boxes related to the resources you wish to allocate during this AFP session. If
the AFP model you are using supports this, it is possible to allocate several resource types: channels (for
NH or BBH subcells), MAL and MAIO (for SFH subcells), HSN (for BBH and SFH subcells) and BSIC.

Note : A9155 avoids creating TRXs without channels. Therefore, if the user does not ask for MAL-MAIO assignment, all
the SFH subcells are considered as frozen, and no TRXs will be created for them. The same happens in case only a
MAL-MAIO assignment is selected. In this case, all NH and BBH subcells will be seen as frozen and no TRXs will be
created.

Then, indicate if you want all the potential interferers to be taken into account by the AFP model.
Check/uncheck the Load all the potential interferers box. If this box is unchecked, the cost function will
only consist of the separation violation cost.
In the Separations tab, click on the Exceptional pairs button in order to check/add separations within
exceptional pairs of transmitters and subcells. These separation constraints have priority on other
separations (co-cell and co-site separations as well as separations between neighbours) you may specify.
Then, define the channel separations within subcells of a same cell, within subcells of co-site transmitters
and between subcells of neighbours. You may specify separations between BCCH subcells, traffic subcells
and between BCCH and traffic subcells.
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


248/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Click Validate to run the loading of the selected network and its checking.

VI.7.4.e AFP STEP 2 : LOADING AND CHECKING THE NETWORK
After the AFP generic inputs, A9155 loads and check the involved items in the 2nd step

A9155 loads :
The transmitters to be considered: they are all the active and filtered transmitters which calculation radius intersects
the rectangle containing the computation zone. We will call them TBC transmitters.
The potential interferers with TBC transmitters if the option Load all the potential interferers is selected.
The transmitters involved in the specified separation conditions with the TBC transmitters: the neighbours, co-site
transmitters, transmitters or subcells of exceptional pairs and neighbours of neighbours in case of BSIC allocation.

Note : In case of the BSIC allocation, neighbours of neighbours are systematically loaded.

The calculated cost takes into account all the loaded transmitters. On the other hand, resources are not assigned to all
the TBC transmitters. Therefore, it is important to know the transmitters to be allocated (we will call them TBA
transmitters): they are the active and filtered transmitters located inside the computation zone, which belong to the folder
from which the AFP has been started. Only TBA transmitters may be assigned the resources selected in the previous
dialog. Other loaded transmitters are considered as frozen for all the types of assignments: BSIC, HSN, MAL, MAIO
and channels.

Once loaded, A9155 checks the network consistency. It reports mainly non-blocking warnings in an additional event
viewer. These warnings deal with, for example, values out of their range or inconsistencies of the existing allocation.

For example, A9155 can report the fact that a list of frequencies is assigned to a TRX supporting a non-hopping or base
band hopping mode. In this case, AFP will fix it if frequencies are not frozen.

In case of inconsistent values (e.g. a value of 100 for the traffic load), these will be replaced by A9155 in order to avoid
blocking the AFP process. Nevertheless, in some cases, like an empty HSN (resp. BSIC) domain when the HSN
allocation is requested, the AFP process is stopped and an error message is reported to the user in order to fill the
domains.

Caution : Information given by the event viewer have to be read carefully before going further.

After having checked the messages in the event viewer, click the Close button to go on.

A9155 then opens a new dialog dealing with other AFP settings.

VI.7.4.f AFP STEP 3 : GENERIC AFP SETTINGS
After having loaded and checked the involved network, A9155 opens a dialog made of three parts.

The first part reports the validated network conditions :
Resources to be allocated,
Separation constraints,
Type of the loading
Full : both potential interferers (interferences taken into account) and transmitters/subcells considered in
separation requirements have been loaded and checked.
Partial : only transmitters/subcells involved in separation requirements have been loaded and checked.
State of the network loading : number of loaded subcells, number of subcells selected for the AFP process, warnings
during the consistency checking, etc

At this step, the status box in the part Step 3 indicates that the allocation will be based on separation constraints only.


The second part of the dialog enables user to calculate/import interference histograms interferences are taken into
account in AFP (not only separation requirements). Interference histograms can be computed only if the user has
previously selected the option Take into account interferences (leading to the loading of all the potential interferers) in
the previous dialog. Else, buttons are greyed.

In the first case, for each pair (interfered subcell, interferer subcell), A9155 calculates a C/I value on each bin of the
interfered subcell service area (determined by the min reception threshold defined at the subcell level); all the subcells
are supposed to share the same channel. Then, A9155 integrates C/I values calculated over the service area of the
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 249/476


interfered subcell and determines an interference histogram. Histogram shows the different interference probabilities.
Interference probability is the probability that users of the interfered subcell receive a C/I higher than a C/I value;
interference probability is stated either in percentage of interfered area or in percentage of interfered traffic.

Example: Let (Tx1, BCCH) and (Tx2, BCCH) be the victim and interferer subcells. The service areas have been defined
using best server with 0 dB margin. The interference probability is stated in percentage of interfered area.


Representation of the probability to have at least C/I levels for a couple of subcells

In that case, we observe that the probability for C/I (BCCH of Tx2 on the BCCH of Tx1) to be greater than 0 is 100%
(which is normal because Tx1 is best server). The probability to have a C/I value at least equal to 31 is 31.1%. If we
introduce the fact that the required C/I level on the BCCH of Tx1 is 12, we consider in that case that, since the probability
that C/I is at least equal to 12 is 93.5%, the percentage of interfered areas in the service area of the BCCH of Tx1
caused by the BCCH of TX2 is 6.5%.

To calculate interference histograms, proceed as follows :
Click on Calculate to compute interference histogram for each pair of subcells,
In the Interference calculation dialog, specify the servers to study (All, best signal level per HCS layer), a
margin in case of a best signal level study and choose how to define the interference probability, either in
percentage of interfered area or in percentage of interfered traffic.
Then, click on OK to run the interference histogram calculations.

Caution: Changing some transmitter or subcell properties such as power offset, reception threshold and transmitter
power or EIRP makes invalid interference histograms. In this case, you must recalculate them.

Note : It is possible to export the computed interference histograms (by clicking the Export button). When exporting
interference histograms, A9155 creates two ASCII text files in the specified directory: xxx.dct and xxx.clc (xxx is the user
specified name). The .dct file contains the name of transmitters taken into account in AFP and their associated
identification numbers; the .clc file details interference histogram of each pair (interfered subcell, interferer subcell). For
further information about the storage format, please refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

To import an existing interference histogram, proceed as follows :
Click on Import and specify the .clc file to be imported. A9155 looks for the associated .dct file in the
same directory and uses it to decode transmitter identifiers. When this file is unavailable, A9155 assumes
that the transmitter identifiers are the transmitter names.

Notes:
No validity control is performed when importing an interference histogram file. Be sure that imported histograms are
consistent with the current configuration.
A9155 only imports interference histograms related to active transmitters with a calculation area.
The histogram interference computation needs path loss results. If matrices are invalid, they will be updated during
the computation process.

After computing or importing interference histograms, the status box in the part Step 3 indicates that the allocation will
be based on separation constraints and interferences.

Caution : If the interferences were supposed to be taken into account, but no histogram has been determined, the AFP
process will be based on separation constraints only.


GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


250/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Finally, the third part of the dialog enables you to:
Choose the AFP model,
Adjust its parameters by clicking the properties button,

Note : All the AFP models listed in the Modules tab will be available in the scrolling list.

Indicate a target time (in minutes) on which the AFP will base its method in order to lower its cost function
and converge to a solution,

Note : This target time is used only by the model to select the best suited method. This means that you will not be able to
consider the result reliable as far as the target time is not reached. The model will be able to stop by itself before this
target time, but if after this elapsed time the model considers that the result is not satisfying enough, it will go on
improving the frequency plan.

In case interferences are taken into account, you may select the DTX option and enter an activity factor to
consider discontinuous transmission mode on subcells, which support DTX,
Once these parameters are set, click on Run to start the automatic frequency planning.

VI.7.4.g AFP STEP 4 : GENERIC OUTPUTS
After starting AFP, A9155 displays a new dialog providing information about the AFP progress. It indicates :
The cost of the best solution (best cost),
The elapsed time since the session has been started,
The value of the cost component related to separations only.

In addition, in the general AFP display space, some general information about the current solution is given in real time
(depending on the selected AFP model).

As said in step 3, the target computation time provides to the model an indication about the method to take in order to
find a suitable solution. Nevertheless, computations can be stopped any time by clicking the Stop button and confirming
it. Best results (related to the best solution lower cost value) will be then displayed as they are.



C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 251/476


When calculations are completed or stopped, A9155 displays the frequency plan proposed by the AFP tool. All the
results/violations are listed in a dialog. The first tab (Frequency plan) shows a table listing the assigned resources.
Resources can be coloured in different ways in the table for different reasons such as :
Artic blue : frozen resource,
Red : resource modified since the previous allocation but with separation constraint violation,
Green : resource modified since the previous allocation with respect to separation constraints,
Black : resource not modified,
Blue : resource assigned with separation constraints respected,
Purple : resource assigned but with separation violation,
Grey : Transmitters and subcells involved in computations.

You may choose the results you want to display. It is actually possible to list the results related only to :
Cells (BSICs)
Subcells (HSNs)
TRXs (Channels/MAL, MAIO and related separation violations)

Use the boxes Cells, Subcells and TRXs to do this. Of course, all of them can be displayed at the same time.

In addition, you may choose to display the resources assigned during the current AFP session to the TBA transmitters
(option Studied transmitters only) and in addition, the existing frequency plan of potential interferers and transmitters
involved in separation requirements (option Transmitters involved in computations).

In the table, when pointing the resources, a tip balloon gives the meaning of the colouring. In case of separation
violations, a button is available at the right side of the table. Its name indicates the type of violation. When clicking on it,
A9155 opens a message box detailing the reason.



When there are separation violations, it is interesting to open the Separation constraint violations tab. Click on the
Compute and Display button in order for A9155 to summarise all the separation violations of the current AFP session.

Note : the bottom part of the Frequency plan tab displays the messages related to the last solution (maybe not the best
one) and potential related allocation problems.

Before closing this dialog, use the Commit button to assign the allocated resources.

Notes : an audit on the computed frequency plan is available.
VI.7.5 FREQUENCY PLAN ANALYSIS
VI.7.5.a CHECKING THE FREQUENCY PLAN CONSISTENCY
Once frequencies have been assigned to TRXs (manually, automatically), A9155 provides a tool in order to check the
consistency of the current frequency plan.

This tool enables you to check the consistency and the validity of several parameters involved in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE
network. A9155 performs the consistency checking on:
All the active and filtered transmitters which calculation radius intersects the rectangle containing the computation
zone. We will call them TBC transmitters.
The transmitters involved in the specified separation conditions with the TBC transmitters: the neighbours, co-site
transmitters, transmitters or subcells of exceptional pairs and neighbours of neighbours.
The potential interferers with TBC transmitters if the option Load all the potential interferers is selected.

Some audits are automatic; other ones are user-defined.

First, this tool automatically checks the following points:
Definition of a unique BCCH TRX per transmitter,
Consistency between TRXs and related cell types,
No empty domain,
Frequency domains included in reference frequency bands (if Frequencies box is ticked).
In case of Non Hopping or Base Band Hopping: definition of one unique frequency per TRX,
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


252/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


In case of Synthesized Frequency Hopping: definition of a frequency list per TRX,
In case of Synthesized Frequency Hopping: respect of max MAL lengths,
In case of Synthesized Frequency Hopping: MAIO less than the number of MAL frequencies
Optionally, it was also checking the consistency of the current frequency plan, HSN and BSIC allocation (compliance
with assigned domains, the allocation strategy and separation constraints).
The number of timeslots per subcell must be lower than or equal to the multiplexing factor (-1 for the BCCH subcell),
The number of timeslots per subcell cannot be null,

Furthermore, you can parameter some additional checking on Frequencies, HSN and/or BSIC elements :
Check of the compliance of the current frequency plan with the allocation strategy (Free or Group constrained) at the
TRX type level (subcells in transmitters),
Check of the respect of domains for allocated resources of type frequency, HSN or BSIC. These domains are tested
in order to check that they are not empty. Concerning frequencies, the tool is able to check compliance of frequency
domains within related frequency bands,
Consistency between the defined BSIC format and the assigned BSICs (BSIC domain option checked),
Consistency between the excluded channels (at the subcell level) and the assigned ones (Frequency
domain option checked),
In case of Synthesized Frequency Hopping and Group constrained strategy, respect of exactly a group of a
domain for the allocated TRXs (Frequencies and Allocation strategy options checked),
Respect of the exceptional separation constraints (between subcells) prior to co-cell, co-site or neighbour separations
(relaxation).
A transmitter and its neighbours must not have the same (BSIC-BCCH) pair ((BSIC, BCCH) pair option checked).
Two neighbours must not have the same (BSIC-BCCH) pair ((BSIC, BCCH) pair option checked).


To run the checking algorithm, proceed as follows :
In the General tab of the dialog, select the parameters you want to check,
In the Separations tab, click on the Exceptional pairs button in order to check/add separations within
exceptional pairs of transmitters and subcells. Then, define the channel separations within subcells of a
same cell, within subcells of co-site transmitters and between subcells of neighbours. You may specify
separations between BCCH subcells, traffic subcells and between BCCH and traffic subcells,
In the Detailed results tab, specify the detail level you wish to display in the Event viewer. When no option
is selected, A9155 displays global warnings or/and error messages according to the problems. It will
display an error message per transmitter/subcell/TRX/pair of transmitters if you choose Error messages.
When selecting Warning related to separations, it displays a warning for each separation constraint
violation. If Additional warnings is checked, it will give a detailed list of all the warnings.
Click on OK to start the consistency checking.


Checking results about consistency are displayed in the tasks tab of the event viewer. This can be also stored in an
external log file.

VI.7.5.b CHECKING CONSISTENCY BETWEEN TRANSMITTERS AND SUBCELLS
An additional tool is available to check consistency of some subcell and TRX characteristics which can be duplicated at
the transmitter level which can occurs after incorrect use of the archive function in database connection.

A9155 checks for each transmitter that:
The number of TRXs indicated in the Transmitters table corresponds to the number of TRXs listed for this transmitter
in the TRXs table,
The list of channels used by the transmitter consists of all the channels assigned to TRXs of the transmitter,
The BCCH of the transmitter is the same than the channel assigned to BCCH TRX of the transmitter,
The number of required TRXs indicated in the Transmitters table is equal to the sum of required TRXs of the
transmitter subcells,
The hopping mode of the transmitter corresponds to the one of its TCH subcell.


To start the consistency checking tool, proceed as follows :
Right click on the Transmitters folder and select the Subcells: Check consistency command,
In the Subcell consistency dialog, two options are available: you may display a report in the events viewer
(A9155 provides a list of problems grouped by transmitters) and solve the detected problems (A9155
updates characteristics of transmitters inconsistent with their subcells and TRXS).
Click on OK to start the checking tool.

C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 253/476


VI.7.5.c USING THE CHANNEL SEARCH TOOL IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE
A9155 provides a tool which allows you to search for BCCH and/or non BCCH channels and BSIC. This is an additional
tool to analyse a frequency plan; you may use it in order to quickly visualise channel and BSIC reuse on the map.

To display the Search window, select the "Channel search window" in the View general menu. A9155 opens a floating
window that you can keep at any location on your screen, or dock at the bottom of the map, like the Point analysis
window.

The user defines a channel or a BSIC, A9155 finds and highlights (by allocating significant colours) the transmitters
which are assigned that channel or BSIC.

Three tabs are available to help the user find transmitters which are assigned a given channel, BSIC or BCCH-BSIC.
A9155 changes the colours of the transmitter arrows on the map. To obtain a 2D graphic display, it is necessary to have
preliminary defined and calculated a study "Coverage by transmitter" (with a colour display by transmitter). The colours of
the coverage cells will then follow the colours of the transmitters.

Search for channels
The user defines a channel, which can be searched within the control channels ("BCCH"), within the other channels
("non BCCH"), or indifferently within all the channels ("All") of the network, without differentiating subcells. A9155 runs
through the channel list of each transmitter and gives the colour RED to co-channel transmitters, BLUE (+1) and GREEN
(-1) to adjacent channel transmitters and GREY to the others. If it happens that a transmitter meets several criteria, the
co-channel criterion has priority meaning that RED colour always overrides the others.

Search for BSIC
The user defines a BSIC value. A9155 runs through all the BSIC within the network and gives the colour RED to
transmitters with that BSIC and GREY to the others.

Search for BCCH-BSIC
The user defines a pair of BCCH-BSIC values. A9155 runs through all the BCCH-BSIC pairs within the network and
gives the colour RED to transmitters with that BCCH-BSIC and GREY to the others.

Notes:
To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the button in the bottom of the map.
A useful feature is to display as label on the map the BCCH, BSIC and channel list of each transmitter, using the
Display tab of the Transmitters folder properties.

VI.7.5.d COMPUTING KPIS IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE
A9155 allows the user to calculate and analyse the Key Performance Indicators, such as the reduction factor, the
blocking probability, and delay that are currently set in the network. This can be thought of as an analysis tool that
enables the user to observe how much the network satisfies basic criteria of performance.

To run a KPI calculation, proceed as follows:
Left click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic analysis folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on a Traffic capture item, according to which you want to dimension the network, to open the
context menu,
Select KPI calculation,
In the KPI calculation dialog, choose the dimensioning model to be used for computations,

You can select the columns you want to display in the table. To do this, click on the Displayed columns button and select
information you wish to display.

Click on Calculate.

For each subcell of each transmitter, A9155 gives:

Network settings such as the number of TRXs, the number of packet, shared and circuit timeslots and the traffic load,
the maximum number of TRXs that can be placed in the transmitter (this value is indicated in the dimensioning model
properties), the maximum rate of traffic overflow (%) (specified in the subcell properties) and the half rate traffic ratio
(%) (defined in the subcell properties).

Note : When the maximum rate of traffic overflow and the Half-Rate traffic ratio values are different for BCCH and
TCH subcells, A9155 takes the BCCH subcell values.
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


254/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Traffic capture results such as the packet traffic demand (kbps), the average demand in packet timeslots, the average
number of timeslots per connection (packet) and the circuit traffic demand (Erlangs), the average demand in circuit
timeslots and the average number of timeslots per connection (circuit),

Note : In case of concentric cells, the traffic demand on TCH subcells is different from the one evaluated during
the traffic capture. It is calculated from the traffic demand of the capture and the effective rate of traffic overflow
(instead of the maximum rate used in traffic analysis).

For packet services, the average number of timeslots per connection corresponds to the average number of
downlink timeslots, which mobile terminals can simultaneously communicate over. For circuit switched services,
the number of timeslots per connection is 1 in case of full rate; else it depends on the half rate ratio.

For a circuit switched service, you will find the served circuit traffic (Erlangs), the effective rate of traffic overflow and
the effective blocking rate.
The served circuit traffic corresponds to the circuit traffic demand less the effective overflowed circuit traffic.
In case of Erlang B, the effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the effective blocking rate; this value is
deduced from the required number of circuit timeslots (shared + dedicated) and the circuit traffic demand in
Erlang B tables.
In case of Erlang C, the effective rate of traffic overflow is zero except if the maximum number of TRXs is
exceeded; the effective blocking rate is inferred from the number of circuit timeslots (shared + dedicated) and the
circuit traffic demand in Erlang C tables.

For a packet switched service, results are the served packet traffic (kbps), the effective rate of traffic overflow, the
minimum throughput reduction factor and KPIs such as the throughput reduction factor, the delay and the blocking
rate.

The served packet traffic corresponds to the packet traffic demand less the effective overflowed packet traffic.
The effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the rejected packet traffic due to missing packet timeslots.
The minimum throughput reduction factor is stated in percentage; it corresponds to the highest reduction (lowest
percentage) that can be applied to the maximum rate in order to supply service with the minimum permissible rate
(defined for the service).
KPIs are deduced from the packet load and the number of available connections by using quality charts defined in
the dimensioning model properties.

After a computation, click on Commit to assign the results to subcells (the load and the effective rate of
traffic overflow).


Note : KPI calculation is based on a traffic capture. Modifications of traffic map(s), traffic parameters and transmitter
properties (e.g. calculation area, E/GPRS equipment,) have an influence on the traffic capture. Therefore, if you modify
some of these data, you must recalculate the traffic capture before calculating KPIs.

VI.8 SPECIFIC GSM/GPRS/EDGE PREDICTION STUDIES
VI.8.1 SETTING SPECIFIC COVERAGE CONDITIONS IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE STUDIES
Whatever the project type is, the way to create or to manage coverage studies is identical. Only study parameters are
different.

Hence, in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, even if coverage study dialogs are composed of the three classical tabs :
The General tab where you may rename the study, define the coverage resolution, add some comments, define
group, sort and filter criteria, on the coverage display only (not on the results),
The Condition tab where you can specify the study parameters,
The Display tab to define coverage display settings,
coverage conditions are managed with some specifics related to GSM/GPRS/EDGE technology.


GSM/GPRS/EDGE specific settings in predictions are described below :

1- Indeed, coverage conditions include the possibility to choose between two options for the definition of reception
thresholds. You can either manually enter a lower threshold for the transmitters to be part of a coverage, or you can
choose the lower threshold defined in subcells (taking into account the power offset) for this. To do this, select the
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 255/476


button next to the threshold boxes. In each pixel, A9155 will then take into account all subcells respecting its minimum
signal level at that point for the coverage. The best server notion (+ margin) and the reliability level options are then
considered.

2 - Concerning the best (or second best) server option, A9155 provides the possibility to consider or not HCS layers and
associated priorities.

Let us assume that:
Each transmitter, Txi, belongs to a Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) layer, k, with a defined priority.
The maximum range option (available in the System tab of the Predictions property dialog) is inactive.

- In case of all the servers are considered (All), for each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the bins
where:

( ) ( ) threshold Maximum or or threshold Minimum <

Losses Total L
tt
P
Txi Txi
tot
Txi
rec


- In case of the best signal level per HCS layer and a margin, for each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds
to the bins where:

( ) ( ) threshold Maximum or or threshold Minimum <

Losses Total L
tt
P
Txi Txi
tot
Txi
rec

and
( ) ( ) ( ) M BCCH P Best BCCH P
Txj
rec
i j
Txi
rec

where
M is the specified margin (dB).
Best function : considers the highest value.

Notes:
If the margin equals 0 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is the highest one.
If the margin is set to 2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is either the highest one
or 2dB lower than the highest one.
If the margin is set to -2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is 2dB higher than the
signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best servers.

- In case of the best signal level on the highest priority layer and a margin, the service area of Txi corresponds to the bins
where:

( ) ( ) threshold Maximum or or threshold Minimum <

Losses Total L
tt
P
Txi Txi
tot
Txi
rec

and
( ) ( ) ( ) M BCCH P Best BCCH P
Txj
rec
i j
Txi
rec

and
Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority

where
M is the specified margin (dB).
Best function : considers the highest value.

Notes
If the margin equals 0 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is the highest one.
If the margin is set to 2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is either the highest one
or 2dB lower than the highest one.
If the margin is set to -2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is 2dB higher than the
signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best servers.

- In case of the second best signal level per HCS layer and a margin, for each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi
corresponds to the bins where:

( ) ( ) threshold Maximum or or threshold Minimum <

Losses Total L
tt
P
Txi Txi
tot
Txi
rec

and
( ) ( ) ( ) M BCCH P Best BCCH P
Txj
rec
i j
nd Txi
rec

2


where
M is the specified margin (dB).
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


256/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


2nd Best function : considers the second highest value.

Notes
If the margin equals 0 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is the second highest
one.
If the margin is set to 2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is either the second
highest one or 2dB lower than the second highest one.
If the margin is set to -2 dB, A9155 will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is 2dB higher than the
signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best servers.

Note : choosing the Best signal level per HCS layer makes A9155 consider the best server of each HCS layer on the
considered pixel. Overlapping best server zones are enable.

3 - Furthermore, it is possible to restrict the reception on certain TRX types using the appropriate scrolling box. It is
possible to select the All option in interference studies.

4 - In interference studies, it is possible also to use the button in order to consider the min C/I threshold defined per
subcell as lower or upper ratio signal to noise for interference definition.

5 - As for the TRX type filter at reception on a pixel (See above 3 - ), you can also restrict the study to potentially
interfered TRX type using the appropriate scrolling box. Selecting the (All) option makes A9155 study C/I over each TRX
type.

6 - Other specific options are relative to interference studies or GPRS/EDGE studies and are described in the
corresponding context sensitive help.

Note : since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (e.g. : adjacent channel protection
level).

VI.8.2 STUDYING INTERFERED ZONE PREDICTIONS
The determination of interference zones is possible as soon as channels have been allocated to the transmitters
composing the current network, exactly like for interferences study using the point analysis tool. This study is closely
based on the principle of common prediction studies from which it takes the definition mode and to which it adds an
interference condition. Nevertheless, specific coverage GSM/GPRS/EDGE conditions are available. Prediction
parameters are also standard.

The interfered zones study enables the user to predict areas where transmitters are interfered (taken into account
depending on signal level) by other transmitters sharing either an identical channel or an adjacent channel as function of
signal to noise ratio. A9155 computes C/I level on each calculation bin where conditions on signal reception are satisfied.
Then, it considers in coverage the bins where the calculated C/I is lower than an upper threshold and colours the bin
depending on an interfered transmitter attribute. The interference definition is proper to each study.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the interfered zone option from the study types
window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.

The interfered zone study is a template for which the field 'Transmitter' is selected by default in the display tab. In that
case, interfered zones will be displayed with the same colours than the ones defined for each transmitter.

Notes :
Shadowing margins (depending on the entered reliability level and the standard deviation per clutter class) are
applied only on the C values. These are not taken into account in I determinations.
A9155 offers default calculation and display parameters when creating interference area prediction studies but it is
possible to colour by any other consistent attribute just by adjusting display.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction
study in order to update coverage.
The study depends on the hopping mode, and the study will be made on :
The most interfered channel (this one with the lowest C/I) of TRXs belonging to the selected TRX type
(BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered channel of all the TRX types (All), in case of a non
hopping mode,
The MAL of the selected subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered MAL of all the subcells
(All), in case of base band hopping,
The most interfered MAL-MAIO of the selected subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or all the subcells (All),
in case of synthesised frequency hopping.
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 257/476


on each pixel
Check the detailed results option if you want to display details on interference :
per TRX (one channel) in Non Hopping mode,
per MAL (indicating the related TRX type) in Base Band Hopping mode,
per MAL-MAIO (indicating the related TRX type) in Synthesised Frequency Hopping mode,
per transmitter in the current prediction folder.
Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (e.g. : adjacent channel protection
level).

VI.8.3 COMPUTING A COVERAGE STUDY BY C/I LEVEL
The determination of zones by C/I level is possible as soon as channels have been allocated to the transmitters
composing the current network, exactly like for interferences study using the point analysis tool. This study is closely
based on the principle of common prediction studies from which it takes the definition mode and to which it adds an
interference condition. Nevertheless, specific coverage GSM/GPRS/EDGE conditions are available. Prediction
parameters are also standard.

The coverage by C/I level study enables the user to predict C/I levels involving transmitters (taken into account
depending on signal level) sharing either an identical channel or an adjacent channel with other transmitters as function
of signal to noise ratio. The interference definition is proper to each study.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Coverage by C/I level option from the study
types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use
the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.

The coverage by C/I level study is a template for which the field 'C/I level' is selected by default in the display tab. In that
case, each layer corresponds to an area where the C/I level exceeds a defined minimum threshold. Numerous option
related to signal level coverage are available in the Display tab.

Notes :
Shadowing margins (depending on the entered reliability level and the standard deviation per clutter class) are
applied only to the C values. These are not taken into account in I determinations.
A9155 offers default calculation and display parameters when creating coverage by interference level but it is
possible to colour by any other consistent attribute just by adjusting display.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction
study in order to update coverage.
When selecting a "highest signal level" option with a margin or the "All" option, you may have areas where several
transmitters are interfered. On these bins, several C/I values are calculated. Therefore, you may choose to display
either the lowest one of these values (Min C/I option) or the highest one (Max C/I option) in the Field scrolling box of
the display tab.
The study depends on the hopping mode, and the study will be made on :
The most interfered channel (this one with the lowest C/I) of TRXs belonging to the selected TRX type
(BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered channel of all the TRX types (All), in case of a non
hopping mode,
The MAL of the selected subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered MAL of all the subcells
(All), in case of base band hopping,
The most interfered MAL-MAIO of the selected subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or all the subcells (All),
in case of synthesised frequency hopping.
on each pixel
Check the detailed results option if you want to display details on interference :
per TRX (one channel) in Non Hopping mode,
per MAL (indicating the related TRX type) in Base Band Hopping mode,
per MAL-MAIO (indicating the related TRX type) in Synthesised Frequency Hopping mode,
per transmitter in the current prediction folder.
Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (e.g. : adjacent channel protection
level).

VI.8.4 STUDYING INTERFERENCES WITH THE POINT ANALYSIS
With the point analysis tool, A9155 is able to display interferers for a given transmitter, at the receiver location on the
map using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect). To permit interferences, user must not
have forgotten to attribute frequencies to transmitters. Furthermore, since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its
related properties have to be set.
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


258/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



To make active the Interference analysis window (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only):
From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu,
The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment,
Left click on the Interference tab,
Select the transmitter you want the receiver to be currently connected from the associated scrolling list,
Click the button from the toolbar,
Move over the map to display the transmitter interferers at any point,
The data appearing in the Point analysis window on receiver interference at the point clicked on will be as
follows :


You can study a TRX type or all the TRX types. A9155 displays the signal level and interference received on:
The most interfered channel of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered of
all the transmitter subcells (All), in case of a non hopping mode.
The MAL of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered MAL of all the
transmitter subcells (All), in case of base band hopping.
The most interfered MAL-MAIO of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered
MAL-MAIO of all the transmitter subcells (All), in case of synthesised frequency hopping.

In this tab, A9155 provides for a given receiver:
The signal level received from the interfered subcell.
The overall interference received from interferer transmitters,
The interference level received from each interferer. Interferers are sorted in a descending signal level order.

A9155 informs you when reduction factors of signal level and interference level are taken into account; reception bars
consist of two parts, a full part, which shows the received signal or interference level, and an empty part corresponding to
signal or interference level reduction. In case of the interfered subcell reception bar, signal level reduction can be due to
the subcell power offset. For each interferer transmitter reception bar, interference level reduction can be due to power
offsets of subcells, adjacent channel protection and fractional load.




Let's imagine the following scenario :
Site 1_0 is a transmitter made of two subcells, one is TRX type BCCH (no power offset), the other is TRX type TCH
(power offset 3dB). The channel 520 is assigned to TRX BCCH
Site 3_2 is a transmitters made of two subcells, one is TRX type BCCH (power offset 3dB), the other is TRX type
TCH (power offset 3dB). The channel 520 is assigned to TRX BCCH
Site 3_1 is a transmitters made of two subcells, one is TRX type BCCH (no power offset), the other is TRX type TCH
(power offset 3dB). The channel 520 is assigned to TRX BCCH
Site 1_1 is a transmitters made of two subcells, one is TRX type BCCH (no power offset), the other is TRX type TCH
(power offset 3dB). The channel 519 is assigned to TRX BCCH
No channel is assigned to any TRX TCH for these transmitters.
The Non hopping mode is assigned to TRX of types BCCH for these transmitter.

The studied transmitter is Site1_0, we observe potential interferences on all its TRX types, i.e. we study the worst case.
The asked reliability level is 75 % (some standard deviations per clutter class have been defined). Like for interfered
zones and coverage by C/I levels, the study is made on the most interfered channel per subcell in case of non hopping
mode.

Point analysis drives to the following results :
- The 1st bar in red indicates the signal level from the transmitter Site1_0 at the receiver point (- 123.34 dBm) ; Initially,
its value would have been -118.62 dBm, but its signal level value is decreased by 4.72 dB due to the shadowing margin.
- The 2nd bar indicates the overall interference for interfering stations (- 103.09 dBm) ;
- The following bars indicate, respectively, in descending order, signal levels caused by each interferer subcell on the
station studied
(Site3_2 : -103.31 dBm, Site3_1 : -188.81 dBm and Site1_1 : - 119.44 dBm).
C H A P T E R 6


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 259/476



You can see that interferences on Site1_0 are due to the fact that overall interferences are greater that the Site1_0 signal
level itself. Overall interferences are made of the signal level contributions of several transmitters. Nevertheless, we can
observe partly or fully filled bars for each them coming from different reasons :
The partly filled purple bar comes from the power offset on the TRX BCCH (3 dB) of the transmitter Site3_2.
The fully filled blue bar is due that no power offset is defined on the TRX BCCH of the transmitter Site3_1.
The partly filled green bar is due to the fact that the TRX BCCH of the transmitter Site1_1 is made of the channel 519.
Since the adjacent channel protection level is set to 18 dB, its contribution is -119.44 dB, instead of -111.44 dB
initially. If a supplementary power offset would have been defined for this subcell, the related bar would have been
cleared from 3dB more.

If the bar representing interference of the station is full, this means that this station interference on the interfered station
is not attenuated by one of the factors described above.

Notes :
Only signal level (C) is downgraded by the shadowing margin (depending on the entered reliability level and the
standard deviation per clutter class). The interference level (I) is not altered by the shadowing margin.
Neither DTX, nor traffic load of TRXs are taken into account to evaluate the interference levels (A9155 calculates
interference level by considering 100% as voice activity factor and traffic load).
Determining interferers at a point is possible only if an interference coverage study has already been performed,
If a MAL is defined on the most interfered subcell, you can obtain, for example, the following result :
Interference on : TCH M.A.L. 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525

VI.8.5 CREATING A COVERAGE BY GPRS/EDGE CODING SCHEMES
This study displays areas according to the used coding schemes. The coverage colour depends on the assigned coding
scheme. The coding scheme choice is determined from radio conditions (C or/and C/I). Therefore, the strongest C and
C/I values are, the higher the coding scheme will be. When both graphs are used, A9155 uses the lowest one.

As this study can be based on C/I, some parameters are similar to the ones found in interference predictions.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the GPRS/EDGE option from the study types
window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.

In the condition tab, specific coverage GSM/GPRS/EDGE conditions are available. Moreover, if you check the
'Calculations based on C/I option, both conditions on signal (C ) and signal noise ratio (C/I) must be satisfied to be able
to use a given coding scheme.

The coverage by coding scheme is a template for which the field 'Coding Schemes' is selected by default in the display
tab. In that case, each layer shows the coding schemes to be used in the transmitter coverage area. You can also
choose to display your coverage in term of Best coding schemes. The resulting coverage shows the best coding scheme
that can be used on each pixel. Other options related to GPRS/EDGE coverage are available in the Display tab.

Note :
A9155 offers default calculation and display parameters when creating GPRS/EDGE prediction studies.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction
study in order to update coverage.
Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (e.g. : adjacent channel protection
level).

VI.8.6 COMPUTING A COVERAGE BY GPRS/EDGE RATE PER TIMESLOT
This study displays the areas where the rate carried by transmitter on one packet timeslot exceeds the user-defined
thresholds. The rate is determined from rate=f(C ) or/and rate=f(C/I) graphs defined for each coding scheme. When both
graphs are used, A9155 chooses the less favourable rate.

As this study can be based on C/I, some parameters are similar to the ones found in interference predictions.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the GPRS/EDGE option from the study types
window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.

In the condition tab, specific coverage GSM/GPRS/EDGE conditions are available. Moreover, if you check the
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects management


260/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


'Calculations based on C/I option, both conditions on signal (C ) and signal noise ratio (C/I) must be satisfied to be able
to use a given coding scheme.

To calculate the coverage per rate/timeslot, two coverage display options are available. Firstly, you can choose the
Rate/timeslot. In that case, each layer shows the rates that a transmitter can carry one timeslot. You can also choose to
display your coverage in term of Best rate/timeslot. The resulting coverage gives the best rate/timeslot per pixel from the
previous display. Other options related to GPRS/EDGE coverage are available in the Display tab.

Notes :
A9155 offers default calculation and display parameters when creating GPRS/EDGE prediction studies.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction
study in order to update coverage.
Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (e.g. : adjacent channel protection
level).



C H A P T E R 7

























WCDMA/UMTS Projects Management
7
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


262/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 263/476


VII WCDMA/UMTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT
VII.1 UMTS PROJECTS : OVERVIEW
UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunication System) is a radio technology using WCDMA (Wideband Code Division
Multiple Access) principles. UMTS is based on Wideband CDMA air interface whereas CDMA/CDMA2000 (1xRTT and
IS95) on Narrowband CDMA. WCDMA/UMTS is available in A9155 with the optional UMTS module.

In UMTS, everybody works at the same frequency, signals are spread over a band of 3.84 MHz (on each carrier) and
distinguished by the use of OVSF codes on them. Nevertheless, this induces potentially high levels of noise which can
be defeated by sophisticated power controls on uplink (from terminals) and on downlink (from transmitters) traffic
channels.

Because of power control, there is not a single solution to model a UMTS network, and results depend totally on network
parameters such as traffic and user behaviours. Hence, these parameters have to be modelled before starting
calculations via user distributions. Simulation results provide a snapshot of the UMTS network at a certain time.

In order to simulate user distributions and associated behaviours, some parameters have to be set. These are services,
mobility types, terminal, user profiles and environment types. Each of these is easy to manage like any other folder-like
object within A9155. All these parameters go together with traffic maps, based on environments, on user profiles (with no
required definition for environment parameters) or on Transmitters and Services (in term of rates or number of users -
with no required definition for environment and user profile parameters).

UMTS power control simulations and UMTS specific coverage predictions need the definition of the previous parameters.
Classical coverage predictions are also available to study cell pilots. The point analysis tool allows a specific analysis of
any active set at any given point on the map, for a particular scenario (service, terminal, and speed of a probe mobile
which current status is provided by network simulation results).

Geo data are easily manageable like for other projects. You may either create or import geographic objects. Sites,
antennas, station templates, transmitters, measurements, and propagation models work in the same way for UMTS and
the other technology projects. Nevertheless, due to an enhanced resource management to consider at site level, site
equipment and resource management per service have been introduced. Furthermore, since UMTS support several
carrier networks, a new item characterising each carrier per transmitter has been introduced : UMTS cells. Hence, many
properties are defined at the cell level (e.g. powers).

Like for the other types of technologies, neighbours may be manually defined by the user or with the help of the
neighbour automatic allocation tool, but at the cell level. UMTS Downlink primary scrambling codes enable the user to
distinctly identify cells (transmitters and carriers). They can also be defined manually or automatically imposing a large
number of constraints.


The What's this context tool allows the user to understand the specific UMTS fields and features available in dialog
boxes.

VII.2 UMTS SPECIFIC CONCEPTS
In a WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) network, a code is allocated to each link transmitter-terminal.
This code allows the terminal to identify the useful signal spread over the whole bandwidth as mobiles use the same
frequency band simultaneously. Consequently, each mobile is indirectly interfered by all the others. It is thus essential for
UMTS to perform reliable power control especially on the uplink, in order to limit network interference level.

To achieve power control simulation and coverage calculation, UMTS planning requires traffic snapshots unlike GSM
planning, which only needs traffic data when dimensioning a network for a certain grade of service.

UMTS coverage directly depends on offered traffic : the more the traffic is, the smaller the coverage zones are. This
phenomenon is called cell breathing. As Traffic is dynamic, coverage calculation is necessarily statistical.

A9155 achieves coverage predictions in two steps :
First, it simulates power control)for realistic user distributions to obtain network parameters and interference level
(simulation part).
Then, it generates bin-based coverage probability predictions (prediction part).

See UMTS projects protocol
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


264/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01




A9155 enables WCDMA/UMTS network planning, 3G network based on Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
technique (WCDMA) and multi-service management. These major concepts and new technologies require new network
and data modelling, with appropriate needs for traffic modelling. A wide range of different UMTS services (speech, web,
video-conferencing,...), available to consumers, generates a more complex traffic than standard voice transmissions.
Appropriate traffic data model and relevant localisation on a map, i.e. traffic cartography represents a major input for
UMTS planning. Specific UMTS objects are available when creating a new project with A9155. The UMTS project is
designed to provide specific UMTS radio and traffic data structures, UMTS simulations and predictions folders.
VII.3 UMTS PROJECTS PROTOCOL
A classical UMTS project protocol, within A9155, is described below :

Network design : Setting radio data

Pilot studies based only on signal reception

Traffic input
Traffic description : activity probabilities
Traffic map design : number of subscribers or users (depending on the type of map)

Simulations (Evaluation of interference level)
Realistic user distribution generation
Power control simulation

UMTS oriented prediction studies
Point predictions
Coverage predictions

Network optimisation
Neighbour allocation
Primary scrambling code allocation

VII.4 MANAGING UMTS RADIO DATA
VII.4.1 MANAGING UMTS RADIO DATA : OVERVIEW
Due to their complexity, UMTS networks, in A9155 have been modelled by the introduction of specific radio items.

Firstly, due to the fact that the number of channel elements is limited by site, these are set from the Site folder. Hence, in
A9155, you can model several pieces of equipment with different radio resource management parameters and describe
channel element consumption for each equipment type/service couple. Then, you can assign a piece of equipment to
each site.

Some features have been introduced in order to adjust the global specific parameters of UMTS networks.

UMTS supports multi-carrier networks, i.e. a transmitter can work on several carriers on the same time, each carrier
being set with different properties. Hence, to take it into account, a new level has been introduced in order to simulate the
carrier level on each transmitters : UMTS cells. Like many other objects in A9155, these are easily manageable and
provide several tools in order to make their use easy.

VII.4.2 UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT
VII.4.2.a CREATING UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT
In UMTS, site equipment allows the user to define some equipment related to channel elements and some other specific
UMTS parameters and calculation options (MUD factor, Rake efficiency factor, Carrier selection, Overhead CEs, AS
restricted to neighbours) .

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 265/476


To create a UMTS site equipment, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Equipment : Open] command from the open scrolling menu,
In the Equipment window, describe a piece of equipment per line. Type its name, the manufacturer name
and define:

MUD factor
Multi-User Detection is a technology used to decrease intra-cellular interference on uplink. MUD is modelled by a
coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation. In case MUD is not supported by
equipment, enter 0 as value.

Rake receiver efficiency factor
This factor enables A9155 to model macro-diversity on uplink. A9155 uses it to calculate the uplink macro-diversity gains
and uplink signal quality in simulations, point-to-point handover analysis and coverage studies. This parameter is
considered on uplink for softer and softer-softer handovers; it is applied to the sum of signals received on the same site.
The factor value can be between 0 and 1. It models losses due to the signal recombination imperfection.

Carrier selection
It refers to carrier selection mode used during the transmitter admission control in mobile active set. Three methods are
available:
- UL min noise: The least loaded carrier (carrier with the lowest UL load factor) is selected,
- DL min power: The carrier with lowest used total DL power is selected,
- Random: The carrier is randomly chosen.

Overhead CEs uplink and downlink: number of channel elements that a cell uses for common channels on uplink and
downlink.

AS restricted to neighbours
This option is used to manage mobile active set. If you select this option, the other transmitters in active set must belong
to the neighbour list of the best server.

Click on to close the table.


Note : Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in downlink has to be set in terminals.

VII.4.2.b MANAGING UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT
Site equipment are listed in a table in A9155. So, as many other objects, they are easy to manage both in term of
contents or handy tools.

To access to the UMTS site equipment table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Equipment : Open] command from the open scrolling menu,
The table displays each piece of equipment in each line.
Click on to close the table.


Notes :
Standard features for managing table content (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter, Sort,
Fields) are available in context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and
Records menus.
Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in downlink has to be set in terminals.

VII.4.2.c MANAGING CHANNEL ELEMENT CONSUMPTION PER UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT
UL and DL channel elements are independently dealt with in power control simulation. Furthermore, the number of
channel element required by a site depends on site equipment, user service and link direction (up or down).


To describe channel element consumption during UMTS simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


266/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Equipment : Channel Element consumption] command from the open scrolling menu,
In the CE consumption window, enter for each equipment-service pair the number of UL and DL channel
elements that A9155 will consume during power control simulation,
Click on to close the table.

VII.4.2.d ASSIGNING UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT TO SITES
Once equipment related to channel element are defined, it is possible to assign a piece of equipment to each site.

To assign a piece of equipment to a site proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the Sites folder by clicking on the button in front of it
Right click on the site you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the site you want to manage by right clicking on it ( ),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Equipment tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.
Enter the maximum number of uplink and downlink channel elements available for the site; then, click on
the Equipment scrolling menu and choose a piece of equipment in the list,
Click on OK to validate.


Notes :
In case you have defined neither equipment nor channel element consumption, A9155 considers the following default
values, Rake efficiency factor = 1, MUD factor = 0, Carrier selection = UL minimum noise, Overhead CEs downlink
and uplink = 0, AS restricted to neighbours option not selected, and uses one channel element per link (up or down)
for any service, during power control simulation.
Equipment can be also assigned by accessing site table.

VII.4.3 TRANSMITTER UMTS SPECIFIC PARAMETERS
VII.4.3.a DEFINING THE TRANSMITTER UMTS GLOBAL PARAMETERS
In A9155, some parameters which are globally related to the UMTS technology can be accessed easily and applied to all
the items of a network; these are called global parameters.

Some of them are used as global values, other as default values. All of these are essential in UMTS power control
simulations.

To access the global parameters of a UMTS network, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Global parameters tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Click OK to close the dialog.


Note : users may choose the way to calculate the total noise Nt taken into account in downlink and uplink Eb/Nt. Select
in the Nt scrolling menu, either the option Without useful signal to deduct the signal of the studied cell from the total
noise, or the option Total noise to take into account the noise generated by all the cells.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 267/476


VII.4.4 UMTS CELLS
VII.4.4.a UMTS CELLS : DEFINITION
Because A9155 supports multi-carriers networks, and also since it is possible to define some rules about carrier
selection for a mobile when defining its active set, a new level has been introduced, the cell level. A cell defines a carrier
on a transmitter. Data of interest like transmission powers (Pilot, Synchronisation, Other common channels, Maximum
power), total power, UL load percentage, primary scrambling codes, active set thresholds are defined at the cell level.
Hence, neighbours are also defined at the cell level.

The number of cells per transmitter is limited by the number of carriers available for a network as defined in the global
parameter dialog. Cells can be listed either by transmitter, in a specific dialog, or in a table form, as other radio data
(sites and transmitters). So, here again, the management of cells stays easy and comfortable.

VII.4.4.b CREATING A UMTS CELL
The cell concept is fully supported in A9155. Cell is characterised by the transmitter-carrier couple. Therefore, you can
define several cells per transmitter (as many cells as carriers associated to transmitter).

To define UMTS transmitter cells, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Cells : Open] command from the open scrolling menu,

The Cells table contains all the identifiers of a cell, its name, transmitter and carrier which the cell refers to, cell primary
scrambling code, scrambling code domain to which the allocated scrambling code belongs, all the values defining
transmitted signal level, pilot power, synchronisation power, other common channels power, maximum power, total
power used, information about the cell uplink load and an active set management parameter, AS threshold.

Click on to close the table.


Notes :
Cells are automatically created and described in the table when you drag and drop a station. On the other hand, you
must define them manually after adding a new transmitter (New command when right clicking on the Transmitters
folder) or copying a list of transmitters in the Transmitters table.
Cell default name is: Transmitter name(carrier). If you change transmitter name or carrier, A9155 does not update the
cell name.
You cannot create two cells related to the same transmitter-carrier couple.

VII.4.4.c MANAGING UMTS CELL PROPERTIES
In UMTS, cells are defined per transmitter. Nevertheless, their associated properties can be reached by several ways.
Like many other objects (Sites, Transmitters, Antennas, Predictions, Simulations, measurements, etc...) within A9155,
cells can be managed either individually (per transmitter or in a single dialog) or globally.

Global properties management
In A9155, you may manage globally the cell properties of your network by accessing the cell table :
To do so, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Cells : Open] command from the open scrolling menu,
Click on to close the table.


Individual property management
There are two ways to edit cell properties of each transmitter in the current network.
To do so,
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter which cell properties you want to access,
or
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


268/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Select on the map the transmitter which cell properties you want to access by left clicking on the
appropriate Tx symbol (arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Cell tab from the open dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.


It is also possible to open a single dialog for each cell. To do so, proceed as follows :
Open the cell table (see above)
Either
Double click the record which property dialog you want to open,
Or
Right click on the record which property dialog you want to open to get its associated context menu,
Select the Record Properties command from the open scrolling menu (or the Record Properties
command from the Records menu),
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.


Notes :
Cell Properties dialog consists of three tabs: cell characteristics entered in the cells table are grouped in the General
and Transmission/Reception tabs, Internal and external neighbours may be allocated to the cell in the Neighbours
tab.
It is possible to define additional fields in the cell table by using the Fields command in its related context menu (or
from the Records menu). If it is the case, this new field will then be available in the Other properties tab of any cell
property dialog.

VII.4.4.d POWER PARAMETERS IN UMTS
Because powers can be defined differently within a same transmitter depending on carriers, these are defined at the cell
level in A9155.

To define the different powers related to UMTS technology, access the cell properties (either from the table or from
dialogs) and fill the following fields (Transmission/Reception tab) :
Max power
Pilot power
SCH power
Other CCH power

The total power used and UL load used in specific UMTS coverages are also defined in the cell properties. The active set
threshold (default value : 5dB) used for active set determination has also to be set there.

VII.4.4.e ACTIVE SET PARAMETERS IN UMTS
For a given terminal allowed to perform handover, the active set contains the transmitters with which it is connected. The
main parameter to be measured for transmitters in the active set is the pilot quality (Ec/Io). Once the best server, in term
of pilot quality, is defined, other transmitters are selected using an active set threshold. This threshold is defined at the
cell level, considering the cell which pilot quality is the best for a given active set.

To define the active set threshold of any cell, access the cell properties (either from the table or from dialogs) and fill the
field AS threshold (Transmission/Reception tab).

VII.5 WCDMA/UMTS TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
VII.5.1 WCDMA/UMTS TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT : OVERVIEW
The aim of UMTS network planning in A9155 is to provide some specific coverage predictions based on power control
simulations. These simulations use the data available from the current network. In UMTS projects, the multi-service
ability allows the definition of specific traffic maps. Hence, you may use maps based on either environment types, rates
or number of users per service and per transmitter, or on user profiles.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 269/476


To achieve power control simulation, A9155 use the other classical geo data (clutter class maps, DTM or DEM maps),
the radio configuration (sites, antennas, transmitters, cells) and the specific UMTS parameters. These topics are
organised in folders and are easily manageable. They deal with :
services,
mobility types,
terminals,
user profiles,
environment classes.


UMTS traffic data structure describes multi-service traffic on the network. The central data is the user profile, which
describes a type of subscriber by listing his communication behaviours:
which terminal(s) does he use ?
for which service(s)?
with which usage characteristics (frequency, duration, volume,)?

The mobility concept has been added to take into account strong Ec/Io and Eb/Nt dependence on mobile speed. When
defining a mobility type, you have to give Ec/Io requirements, which will determine mobile terminal active set. When
creating a new circuit or packet switched service, in addition to basic characteristics (nominal rate,) you have to
provide Eb/Nt targets in uplink and downlink for each mobility type previously defined. You may define different receiver
types, called terminals and containing power characteristics and mobile active set size.

Environments just associate a list of user profiles with a specific mobility to a subscriber density. Environment classes or
user profiles can be used to geographically define multi-traffic areas.


As with any Data table in A9155, these tables are automatically stored in a database if the user works with a connected
document.

A9155 powerful data management features are available on traffic tables. For example, you may group terminals by their
active set size.

A9155 manages multi-carrier networks. It allows the user to choose the way carriers are selected by transmitters.
Moreover, any specific CDMA study may deal with several carriers depending on the user or on the radio parameters of
the network.

VII.5.2 WCDMA/UMTS MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC DATA
VII.5.2.a UMTS SERVICES
VII.5.2.a.i Creating UMTS services
UMTS allows the user to carry not only voice but also data for web, or video conferencing for example.

In UMTS, Services are divided into two categories: circuit switched and packet switched. Usually, circuit switched
services support soft handover unlike packet switched services.

A9155 provides a function to enable or disable soft handover for a given service.


To create a service, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Services folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the created service,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : In the Eb/Nt tab window, (Eb/Nt)DL and (Eb/Nt)UL targets are the thresholds (in dB) that must be achieved to
provide users with the service. These parameters depend on user speed and must be defined for all mobility types.

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


270/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VII.5.2.a.ii Setting UMTS service parameters
Similar to the other A9155 object folders, UMTS services are easily manageable. Creation steps and display
management are standard.


To manage the UMTS services parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Services folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the service of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated context
menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the service of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current service,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any service
by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

The coding factors, which penalize UL and DL service rates, may be supplied in two ways. For each service, you may :
Either enter high UL and DL coding factors and then, set a low enough UL and DL Eb/Nt threshold so that the
advantage of high coding can be simulated (higher error correction rate means smaller bit error rate and thus a
smaller required Eb/Nt),
Or enter low UL and DL coding factors value and take into account the coding to define the required UL and DL Eb/Nt
values, i.e. a high enough Eb/Nt threshold to simulate the disadvantage of little coding.

VII.5.2.a.iii Managing globally UMTS services
In A9155, UMTS objects are organized in folders. For this reason, A9155 allows the user to simultaneously display all
topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles, environment) in a table window.


To open the services table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Services folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Services folder,
The services table opens.
Click on to close the table.


The services table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste
functions are available.

Notes :
The advanced grouping/filtering/sorting feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the Services folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the services table. Use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any service by
simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 271/476


VII.5.2.b UMTS MOBILITY TYPES
VII.5.2.b.i Creating a UMTS mobility type
In UMTS, receiver mobility knowledge is important for efficient active set management: a mobile used by a speed driver
or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters. Ec/Io requirements and Eb/Nt targets per
service and per link (up and down) are largely dependent on mobile speed.


To create a UMTS mobility type, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Mobility type folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the currently created mobility,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Mobility parameters are pilot quality (Ec/Io) thresholds (in dB). For a given mobility type :
Ec/Io threshold is the minimum Ec/Io required from a transmitter to enter the active set. In A9155, this value is verified
for the best server.

VII.5.2.b.ii UMTS active set conditions
The transmitters taking part in the active set have to check the following conditions:
They must be using the same carrier (at the cell level).
The pilot quality (Ec/Io) of the best server has to exceed the Ec/Io threshold (defined for each mobility type).
The pilot quality difference between other cells and the best server must not exceed the AS-threshold value set per
cell.
Other cells have to belong to the neighbour list of the best server if you have selected the restricted to neighbours
option (in the definition of the Site equipment).
VII.5.2.b.iii Setting a UMTS mobility type
Like for the other A9155 object folders, UMTS mobility types are easily manageable. Creation steps and the display
management are standard.


To manage the mobility types parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Mobility type folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the mobility of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the mobility of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current mobility,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : When the Mobility type table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any
mobility by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VII.5.2.b.iv Managing globally UMTS mobility types
In A9155, UMTS objects are organized in folders. For this reason, A9155 allows the user to simultaneously display all
topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles, environment) in a table window.


WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


272/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


To open the mobility types table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Mobility types folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Mobility types folder,
The mobility types table opens.
Click on to close the table.


The mobility types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and
copy/paste functions are available.

Notes :
The advanced grouping/filtering/sorting feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the mobility types folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the mobility types
table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Mobility type table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any mobility
by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VII.5.2.c UMTS TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
VII.5.2.c.i Creating a UMTS terminal
In UMTS, terminals describe the terminal equipment that can be used in the network (cellular phone, multi-media
terminal, in-car navigation device,...). Each terminal is modelled by a minimum and maximum transmission power
(dynamic range for uplink power control), its antenna gain and reception loss, and an internal thermal noise. Active set
size is the maximum allowable number of transmitters in connection with the terminal (macro-diversity). Finally, you may
enter a Rake receiver efficiency factor. This factor enables A9155 to model macro-diversity efficiency on downlink.
A9155 uses it to calculate the downlink macro-diversity gains and downlink signal quality in simulations, point-to-point
analysis and coverage studies. This parameter is considered on downlink for any handover type; it is applied to the sum
of signal levels. The factor value can be between 0 and 1. It models losses due to the signal recombination imperfection.

To create a UMTS terminal, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Terminals folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the currently created terminal,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in uplink has to be set in site equipment.

VII.5.2.c.ii Setting UMTS terminal parameters
Like for the other A9155 object folders, UMTS terminals are easily manageable. Creation steps and the display
management are standard.


To manage the terminal parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Terminals folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the terminal of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the terminal of which you want to manage the properties,
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 273/476


Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current terminal,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : When the Terminal table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any terminal
by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VII.5.2.c.iii Managing globally UMTS terminals
In A9155, UMTS objects are organized in folders. For this reason, A9155 allows the user to simultaneously display all
topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles, environment) in a table window.


To open the terminals table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Terminals folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Terminals folder,
The terminals table opens.
Click on to close the table.


The terminals table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste
functions are available.

Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the Terminals folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the terminals table. Use
the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Terminal table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any terminal by
simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.
VII.5.2.d UMTS USER PROFILES
VII.5.2.d.i Creating a UMTS user profile
In UMTS, user profiles model the behaviour of the different subscriber categories. Each user profile is constituted by a
list of services and their associated usage parameters such as used terminal, call or session frequency (calls/hour) and
duration or data volume to be transferred.

Parameters for circuit switched services are:
Average number of calls per hour
Average duration of a call in seconds
Used terminal (equipment used for the service (from the Terminals table))

Parameters for packet switched services are:
Average number of sessions per hour
Volume in Kbytes which is transferred on the downlink during a session
Volume in Kbytes which is transferred on the uplink during a session
Used terminal (equipment used for the service (from the Terminals table))

Example: For a web-browsing service, a session starts when the user opens his browsing application and ends when he
quits the browsing application. Between these two events, sometimes the user may be downloading web pages and
other times he may not be using the application, or be browsing local files. A session is described by the volume
transferred both on the downlink and the uplink.


Those parameters are used in simulation to determine the probability (activity status) that a user is transmitting or
receiving communication for the given service and terminal when the snapshot is taken.


WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


274/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Notes :
For circuit switched services, entering a one-hour call during 1000s corresponds to define 2 calls per hour during
500sthe activity probability is the same in both cases.
For all the services defined for a user profile, in order to be taken into account during traffic scenario elaboration, the
sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1
You can model temporal variations of user behaviour by creating different profiles for different hours (busy hour, ...).


To create a UMTS user profile, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the User profiles folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the currently created user profile,
Validate by clicking on OK.


VII.5.2.d.ii Adjusting UMTS user profile properties
Like for the other A9155 object folders, UMTS user profiles are easily manageable. Creation steps and the display
management are standard.


To manage the user profile parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the User profiles folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the user profile of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the user profile of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current user profile,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any user
type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VII.5.2.d.iii Managing globally UMTS user profiles
In A9155, UMTS objects are organized in folders. For this reason, A9155 allows the user to display simultaneously all
topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles, environment) in a table window.


To open the user profiles table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the User profiles folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the User profiles folder,
The user profiles table opens.
Click on to close the table.


The user profiles table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste
functions are available.


C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 275/476


Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the User profiles folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the user profiles table.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any user
type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VII.5.2.e UMTS ENVIRONMENTS
VII.5.2.e.i Creating a type of UMTS environment
Environment classes may be used to describe subscriber spatial distribution on a map; they are the available classes for
traffic cartography design. Environment class represents an economic and social concept, which defines the
characteristics of user profiles. Each environment class contains a set of three data (user profile, mobility, density) where
density is a number of subscribers with the same profile per km. There is no restriction on the number of data sets
constituting an environment.

To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each environment class.


To create a UMTS environment type, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Environments folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the currently created environment,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Particular case: When no multi-service geo-marketing data are available, you may supply A9155 with usual traffic data
like user densities per service (for example, values coming from adapted GSM Erlang maps). In this case, user profile
definition and calculation of deduced activity probability are not necessary to create traffic scenario ; traffic distribution
will only depend on densities per service.


In UMTS, for instance, if you know user densities per service, just avoid handling user profile step by defining one-hour
full communication profile per service :
1. for circuit services:
in service properties: set UL and DL activity factors to 1
in user profile properties, define 1 call/hour with 3600s duration. Therefore, each user will be connected.
2. for packet services:
in service properties: set efficiency factor to 1 in UL and DL.
in user profile properties : define 1 session/hour and set volume to transmit during 3600s. Therefore, each
user will be connected.

Therefore, the activity probabilities calculated during simulation will be equal to 1 and density values defined in
Environments will be user densities (no more subscriber densities). Elaborated traffic scenario will fully respect the user
profile proportion (i.e. service) given in environments. You will fully master the number of users in simulation as well as
the service proportion which will drive random trials. Moreover, each user will be connected.

This method is not the usual nominal working mode for A9155.

VII.5.2.e.ii Setting UMTS environment parameters
Like for the other A9155 object folders, UMTS environments are easily manageable. Creation steps and the display
management are standard.


To manage the environments parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Environments folder by left clicking on the button,
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


276/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Either,
Right click on the environment type of which you want to manage the properties to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the environment type of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current environment,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Notes :
To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each environment class in the
Clutter weighting tab.
When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any
environment type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VII.5.2.e.iii Managing globally UMTS environment types
In A9155, UMTS objects are organized in folders. For this reason, A9155 allows the user to simultaneously display all
topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profile, environment) in a table window.


To open the environment types table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Environments folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Environments folder,
The Environment type table opens.


The environment types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and
copy/paste functions are available.

Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the Environments folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the environment types
table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any
environment type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VII.5.2.e.iv Displaying statistics per UMTS environment type
A9155 allows the user to perform a statistic study on each environment class.

These statistics provide the number of mobiles to be created in the traffic scenario for the given environment (based on a
raster traffic map, respecting the layer order). This number is given displayed per clutter class.

To display a statistic study on any environment type, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Environments folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the environment type you want to display a statistical study to open the associated context
menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Statistics...,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open window.


Note : The statistic study is limited to the focus zone, only the clutter and environment areas inside the focus zone are
taken into account in calculations.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 277/476


VII.5.2.e.v Subscriber clutter weighting in UMTS environment
Enter a weight for each clutter class in order to get an appropriate user distribution
The following formula is used for calculations:

=
j
j j
k k
class k
S w
S w
N N

where :
k
N

Number of users in the k clutter
class
N

Number of users in an environment class
k
w

k clutter weight at fixed surface
k
S

k clutter surface (stated in km)

This weighting method is used when displaying statistics per UMTS environment type.
VII.5.3 WCDMA/UMTS MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY
VII.5.3.a WCDMA/UMTS MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY : OVERVIEW
A9155 provides 3 types of traffic maps for WCDMA/UMTS projects :

Traffic raster maps based on environments: each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class.
Traffic vector maps based on user profiles: each polygon or line contains a density of subscribers with given user
profile and mobility type.
Traffic maps per transmitter and per service: live traffic is spread over a best pilot coverage plot. To each computed
area is assigned either rates or amount of users per service (uplink or downlink).

Whatever the type of map is, this one can be either created or modified manually, imported from an external file and
exported to an external file.
VII.5.3.b WCDMA/UMTS ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAPS
VII.5.3.b.i Creating a UMTS environment traffic map
There are two solutions to define an environment traffic map, either by creating environment polygons or by directly
importing a raster map in your project as an environment traffic map.

To create a WCDMA/UMTS environment traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on environments (raster) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the cartography editor (selecting one of the available environment classes as defined in the
environment folder) to draw environment polygons,
Click the button to close the editor.

Notes :
Like other raster maps, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.
You can only choose among existing environment classes in the cartography editor. To make available additional
classes, do it in the UMTS parameters.

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


278/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VII.5.3.b.ii Importing a UMTS environment traffic map
There are two solutions to define an environment traffic map, either by creating environment polygons or by directly
importing a raster map (with the appropriate format) in your project as an environment traffic map.

To import a WCDMA/UMTS environment traffic map from an external file, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on environments (raster) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the name column, left click cells in order to replace class (codes or clutter) names by existing
environment classes,
Press OK or Apply to validate.


Notes :
Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the environment traffic type
in the appropriate scrolling menu),
Clutter files can be imported as traffic files,
In order to manage traffic on the entire map, this operation must be carried out for all classes.
The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+V and Ctrl+C) in a new A9155 project after importing
the raster file. To select globally the environment class table, just left click on the top left angle of the environment
table.
Like other raster maps, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.

VII.5.3.b.iii Managing UMTS environment traffic maps
On an existing environment traffic map, you can access properties and it is possible to modify the class association and
its display settings.

To access the properties of an existing environment traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the related environment map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related environment map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the description tab to re-associate environment classes,
Click the display tab to set the transparency level, the visibility scale and to add the map information to the
legend,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

It is also possible to access the properties of a single file composing the resulting map (properties command in the
related context menu) to embed it into the atl project or to check the map geocoding.

Notes : Absolute and relative statistics can be provided for this type of map.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 279/476


VII.5.3.b.iv Exporting a UMTS environment traffic map
Like the other WCDMA/UMTS traffic map types (user profile or live traffic), it is possible to export a environment traffic
map in either a 8 bits/pixel raster tiff, bil or bmp format. It is possible to export a part or the complete environment traffic
map.

To export a part or the complete environment traffic map in WCDMA/UMTS projects, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the Environment map folder in order to get the related context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported,
Click the Save button when this is made,
In the Export dialog box, select one of the options and define the resolution (in metres) of file :
The whole covered region option allows you to save the whole traffic map in another file. As soon as
the file is saved, the properties (name,...) of the traffic maps listed in the Environment Traffic
subfolder are updated.
The only pending changes option allows just to save in the file the created traffic polygonal area. As
soon as the modifications are saved, an additional traffic item is created and listed in the
Environment Traffic subfolder.
The computation zone option allows you to save only traffic map region inside the computation zone
in another file. As soon as the file is saved, an additional traffic object is created and listed in the
Environment Traffic subfolder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone
beforehand.
A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for raster traffic from the following criteria :
If one traffic object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are modified, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of the
altered items.
If there is no initial traffic item, the resolution will equal the resolution of DTM object which the
modifications are made on or the smallest resolution of the merged DTM objects if the
modifications are performed on several DTM objects.
If you draw your own traffic data without initial DTM, clutter or traffic object, a 100 m default
resolution will be suggested.
The resolution value must be an integer.
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
Click OK to validate.

Comment: When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the same
folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain geocoding information and
resolution.

VII.5.3.b.v Displaying statistics on UMTS environment traffic maps
It is possible to display statistics on an existing WCDMA/UMTS environment traffic map. Statistics are given globally and
relatively as functions of environment traffic classes. Traffic density statistics indicates the proportion of each traffic class.
Traffic statistics refer to the focus zone is existing.


To display traffic statistics of the map in WCDMA/UMTS projects, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the Environment Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Statistics option from the scrolling menu
The surface (Si in km) of imported or edited traffic class (i) included in the focus (if existing) zone and its
percentage (% of i) are specified:

100 of % =

k
k
i
S
S
i


Notes :
If no focus zone is defined, statistics are given over the computation zone.
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


280/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Current statistics are printable by clicking the button.

VII.5.3.c WCDMA/UMTS USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAPS
VII.5.3.c.i Creating a UMTS user profile traffic map
In A9155, user profile traffic maps can be defined in any type of project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA2000). The vector data (points, lines, polygonal shapes) are expected to directly link a dedicated user
profile, mobility and traffic density. The way to get user profile traffic maps consists in either importing vector files
(MapInfo(MIF,MID), Arcview (SHP), Autocad(DXF)) and using them as traffic maps or creating vectors with the vector
editor and assign them some traffic information.

To create a WCDMA/UMTS user profile traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on user profiles (vector) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs,
Potentially define traffic information (user profile, mobility type, density) in the Table tab, assign them to
A9155 internal traffic fields in the Traffic tab, and use the vector editor to draw environment polygons, lines
or points,
Click the button to close the editor.

Notes :
Like other vector layers, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.
Points can be seen as traffic hotspots

See Examples of vector traffic data

VII.5.3.c.ii Importing a UMTS user profile traffic map
In A9155, user profile traffic maps can be defined in any type of project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA2000). The vector data (points, lines, polygonal shapes) are expected to directly link a dedicated user
profile, mobility and traffic density. The way to get user profile traffic maps consists in either importing vector files
(MapInfo(MIF,MID), Arcview (SHP), Autocad(DXF)) and using them as traffic maps or creating vectors with the vector
editor and assign them some traffic information.

To import a WCDMA/UMTS user profile traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on user profiles (vector) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Press the button to validate,

A dialog box is displayed in order to configure traffic vector data.
Click the Traffic tab,
In the Traffic fields part, specify the user profiles to be considered on the traffic vector map, their mobility
types (km/h) and their densities (number of users/km2 for polygons and number of user/km for lines). You
can decide the type of information that you want to use to define the traffic characteristics, either a field
described in the file (by field option in the Defined column) or a value directly user-definable in A9155 (by
value option in the Defined column).
The first method can be used only if the file you are importing contains attributes providing
information about the user profile, mobility or density. In this case, select in the Choice column a
suitable field for each data (user profile, mobility and density); A9155 lists all the attributes described
in the file. The attributes of the source file cannot be modified. Using this method, each traffic
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 281/476


polygon or linear is assigned specific characteristics (user profile, mobility or density).
Note : Take care to define in A9155 user profiles and mobility types described in traffic file with exact
spelling.

The second way is useful when traffic files contain no attribute. Therefore, you may assign manually
user profiles, mobility types and densities created in A9155. Select in the Choice column user profile
and mobility listed in UMTS Parameters folder and specify manually a global density for all the
polygons. Beforehand, just make sure to define in UMTS Parameters the internal data like user
profile and mobility you want to allocate. Here, all the polygons are described by global
characteristics (user profile, mobility or density).

In the Clutter weighting part, assign a weight to each clutter class. Thus, A9155 allows you to spread traffic
inside the polygons according to the clutter weighting defined for the whole subfolder. The spreading
operation (using a raster step) will be carried out during the simulation process.
Then, press OK to validate the properties setting.


Notes :
Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the Traffic type in the
appropriate scrolling menu),
During the import procedure, if the imported user profiles or mobility types are not currently part of the existing user
profiles or mobility types, A9155 warns you about the fact that these may not be correctly taken into account as traffic
data.
Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.

See Examples of vector traffic data

VII.5.3.c.iii Managing UMTS user profile traffic maps
To access the properties of an existing user profile traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the related user profile traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related user profile traffic map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of
the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organisation or filters on the vector
display,
Click on the Table tab to manage the content of the vector,
Click on the Traffic tab to re-associate vector fields and A9155 internal traffic fields, and to impose
subscriber clutter weighting using this map for the subscriber distribution during the monte-carlo simulation,
Click on the Display tab to open the A9155 generic display dialog,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

VII.5.3.c.iv Examples of UMTS user profile traffic data
Structure of two vector traffic files is described hereafter. Niceregion.mif consists of eleven polygons representing the
Nice region. Each polygon is characterised by a user profile, the services offered to subscribers, their mobility types and
densities. Densities are stated in number of subscribers per km
2
. Highway.mif represents a highway (linear) where
density corresponds to a number of subscribers per km.


Niceregion.mif

Name Userprofile Services used MobilityA DensityA MobilityB DensityB
Hinterland rural user Speech 90 km/h 8 pedestrian 2
Village rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 5
Corniche rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 20
Rural rural user Speech 90 km/h 8 pedestrian 2
Villages rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 10
Nice urban user Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video
conferencing
pedestrian 700 50 km/h 100
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


282/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Nice airport urban user Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video
conferencing
pedestrian 700 50 km/h 100
Nice
surroundings
rural user Speech 50 km/h 100 90 km/h 100
Rural rural user Speech 90 km/h 5 pedestrian 5
Villages rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 5
Nice center urban user Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video
conferencing
pedestrian 4000 pedestrian 0

Using the user profile traffic import procedure, it is possible to associate (Traffic tab of the properties dialog) :
To user profile : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Userprofile field of the vector (by field), with
a different definition for each polygon,
To mobility : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the MobilityA (resp. MobilityB) field of the vector
(by field), with a different detention for each polygon,
To density : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the DensityA (resp. Density B) field of the vector
(by field), with a different definition for each polygon.


Highway.mif

ID User_profile Service used Density Mobility
highway driver Speech 400 120 km/h


Using the user profile traffic import procedure, it is possible to associate (Traffic tab of the properties dialog) :
To user profile : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the User_profile field of the vector (by field),
with a different definition for each polygon,
To mobility : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Mobility field of the vector (by field), with a
different detention for each polygon,
To density : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Density field of the vector (by field), with a
different definition for each polygon.

VII.5.3.c.v Exporting a UMTS user profile traffic map
Like the other WCDMA/UMTS traffic map types (environment, live traffic), it is possible to export user profile traffic maps.

To export a WCDMA/UMTS user profile traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the user profile traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible formats are
Arcview (.shp), MapInfo (.mif) and the A9155 internal format (.agd),
Click the Save button to complete the export procedure.

VII.5.3.d WCDMA/UMTS LIVE TRAFFIC MAPS
VII.5.3.d.i Creating a UMTS live traffic map
This kind of traffic map requires a coverage by transmitter prediction study. Then, A9155 expects rate values (kbits/s) or
number of active users for each service and each transmitter.

Note : It is possible to define either one map per service or one map with all services.

Then, the traffic cartography is built without connection with the initial coverage prediction. This map consists of polygons
provided with the same features as the user profile traffic polygons.

The definition of WCDMA/UMTS live traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation on the basis of a coverage by
transmitter study previously calculated or by importing a file.

To create a WCDMA/UMTS live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 283/476


Choose the map based on transmitter and service (Throughput or Number of users) option in the Create a
traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Select the prediction study to be considered for traffic distribution. Only coverage per transmitter studies
can be used. A table where you can indicate the live traffic spread over the transmitter service areas is
available. It consists of a column dedicated to transmitters and several columns for the different services
previously defined in the UMTS parameters folder. In the TX_ID column, select each line, click on the arrow
and choose a transmitter in the list. You may also use the copy and paste commands (respectively Ctrl+C
and Ctrl+V) from an Excel file already containing the expected columns.
Enter rate values (kbits/s) (or Number of active users) on uplink and on downlink relating to different
services for each transmitter,
Press OK to continue the map creation.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs,
A9155 displays the property dialog of the map. Click the Traffic tab of the opened property dialog and
define terminal and mobility ratios by entering percentage values for each terminal and each mobility type
(they will be used in the traffic scenario). You may also specify a weight per clutter class to spread traffic
over each coverage area. The spreading operation will be performed during the traffic distribution.
Click OK to validate.


A9155 creates an object called Traffic map per transmitter in the Traffic folder of the Geo tab.

Notes
The map only contains the service areas of transmitters listed in the table. Then, the traffic map shape is fixed and
cannot be modified; it is not possible to add new transmitters.
On the other hand, it is possible to modify traffic values (throughputs or number of users) afterwards in the Table
related to the map.

VII.5.3.d.ii Importing a UMTS live traffic map
The definition of WCDMA/UMTS live traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation on the basis of a coverage by
transmitter study previously calculated or by importing a file.

You may import files with AGD format. This is the A9155 geographic data internal format. This kind of file must be
created from A9155 (export of a coverage by transmitter study in the AGD format).

To import a WCDMA/UMTS live traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on transmitter and service (Throughput or number of users per transmitter)
option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Select the option embed in the document to include the file in the .atl document. When this option is not
selected, A9155 just memorizes the file directory path.

In the coordinate systems part, A9155 summarises the projection coordinate system you have defined in
the .atl project. In the box just below, specify the coordinate system of the file you are importing (click on
Change to choose another coordinate system).
Press the button to validate,
A9155 displays the property dialog of the map. Click the Traffic tab of the opened property dialog and
define terminal and mobility ratios by entering percentage values for each terminal and each mobility type
(they will be used in the traffic scenario). You may also specify a weight per clutter class to spread traffic
over each coverage area. The spreading operation will be performed during the traffic distribution.
Click OK to validate.

Note : It is also possible to import a traffic map per transmitter using the standard import procedure (Import command in
the File menu). In this case, you must specify in the import dialog that you want to import the file in the Traffic folder.

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


284/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VII.5.3.d.iii Managing UMTS live traffic maps
Management features of vector maps are available for traffic maps per transmitter: standard graphical features are
available in the Display tab of the map property dialog and each map has a corresponding table. This table contains the
transmitters used to build the map and traffic information for each of them.


To access the properties of an existing live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the related live traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related live traffic map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of
the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organisation or filters on the vector
display,
Click on the Table tab to manage the content of the vector,
Click on the Traffic tab to re-define terminal and mobility ratios and to impose subscriber clutter weighting
using this map for the subscriber distribution during the monte-carlo simulation,
Click on the Display tab to open the A9155 generic display dialog,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

VII.5.3.d.iv Exporting a UMTS live traffic map
Like the other WCDMA/UMTS traffic map types (environment or user profile), it is possible to export live traffic maps.

To export a WCDMA/UMTS live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the live traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible format is the
A9155 internal format (.agd),
Click the Save button to complete the export procedure.

VII.6 UMTS SIMULATIONS
VII.6.1 UMTS SIMULATIONS : OVERVIEW
Power control simulation is a necessary step to obtain instantaneous network noise level and perform service area
prediction based on it. Furthermore, it is a first, quick and easy analysis tool to get information about network
dimensioning. Traffic data is a critical parameter for UMTS studies. Indeed, power control simulation is performed from
user distributions, which are obtained by random trials driven by traffic data. Its significance rests on traffic data
relevance.

A9155 provides a random user distribution generation, based on a Monte-Carlo algorithm complying with traffic
description and cartography.
Once realistic user distributions are available, power control simulation is automatically achieved to determine network
parameters (such as cells and terminal powers) and estimate interference level.

A9155 provides either actual network audit (taking into account your network constraints) or new dimensioning
information about how to handle available traffic. On the same traffic snapshot, you can check how your network works
and can be improved.

A9155 offers a wide range of tuneable parameters involved in UMTS simulations. Even from existing simulations, it is
possible to modify these parameters with the replay simulations features offered by A9155. You may also add
simulations to a group of existing simulations. Averaging a group of simulations is also possible. Once achieved,
simulations are available for specific UMTS coverage predictions.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 285/476


Indeed, for UMTS projects, A9155 provides four different groups of studies, listed in a natural planning order, from the
indispensable pilot study to the study of downlink total noise, with respect to the propagation model as defined :
Pilot-oriented studies to determine pilot coverage by transmitter, the pilot coverage by signal level, overlapping area
(like standard coverage studies), pilot quality (Ec/Io) and pilot pollution,
Service-oriented studies to determine service availability in uplink and downlink and effective service areas,
handover status study to analyse macro-diversity performance,
Downlink total noise study.

With the point analysis tool, it is also possible to build a UMTS scenario defining a probe mobile with a type of terminal,
mobility and service) and predict, on each point of the current map, its results. Except pilot coverage, coverage by signal
level and overlapping studies, which are similar to classical coverage studies, all other studies are specific to UMTS
network planning and closely related to a particular simulation.

A9155 provides powerful simulation outputs. Firstly, you can display requirements, results, initial conditions, and data
relative to clutter class data dealing with shadowing margins and gains due to multipath on any of these. Then, you may
choose to display the simulation results either per site, per transmitter, or per mobile for the currently studied simulation.
The results can also be displayed on the map as function of any topics dealt with the UMTS simulations (service,
terminal, user, mobility, activity, factors, connection and HO status, best server, active set parameters, geographic
coordinates, rates, carriers, powers, noise rise, path loss).
VII.6.2 MANAGING UMTS SIMULATIONS
VII.6.2.a CREATING UMTS POWER CONTROL SIMULATIONS
UMTS networks automatically regulate themselves by using traffic driven uplink and downlink power control in order to
minimize interference and maximize capacity.

A9155 simulates this network regulation mechanism with an iterative algorithm and calculates, for each user distribution,
network parameters such as base station power, mobile terminal power, active set and handover status for each
terminal.


To create a (group of) UMTS power control simulation(s), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Right click on the UMTS simulations folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New...,
The creation of simulations dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters for the current simulation study(ies),
Validate by clicking on OK.

Notes :
If you check the execute later box, computations will be started when using the Calculate command (F7 shortcut or
button),
When starting computations, a group of simulations (with the input number of simulations) is automatically created
under the UMTS simulation folder.

Once achieved, simulations are available for specific UMTS coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point
analysis tool.

VII.6.2.b MANAGING UMTS SIMULATION PROPERTIES
Like many other objects (Sites, Transmitters, Cells, Antennas, Predictions, measurements, etc...) within A9155,
simulations can be managed either individually or globally. Nevertheless, due to the fact that some of them have already
been started, you can only display their input parameters. Regarding the global properties of simulations, they are related
to the way simulation results are displayed on the map.

Global properties management
In A9155, you may manage globally the display properties of the existing simulations.
To do so, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the UMTS Simulations folder to open the context menu,
Left click the Properties command from the open scrolling menu,
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


286/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

Note : to manage the display of simulation results, the A9155 generic dialog window is used. So, it is possible to display
simulation results related to, for example, their connection status, handover status, any UMTS parameter, pilot quality,
etc... Furthermore, all simulation folders are then organised in threshold items that you can display or not in the
workspace.

Individual property management
If computations have already been started, the properties you can display on groups of simulations are related to the
input parameters.
To open the properties related to a group of UMTS simulations, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Simulations folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the group of UMTS Simulations you want to manage,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Or
Double click the group of UMTS Simulations you want to manage
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

Notes :
If computations have not been started (using the execute later command), you can access to the group properties in
order to modify them for coming computations.
You can access to the Properties of any single simulation. The open dialog is related to simulations requirements and
results, specific results per site, per mobile, per cell and simulation initial conditions.
VII.6.2.c UMTS POWER CONTROL SIMULATION INPUTS
Before running simulations, you must have a radio network with a satisfying pilot coverage. Then, it is necessary to
define traffic description and cartography.

Power control simulation needs propagation path loss for cells and mobiles. If these results are not available, A9155
achieves propagation calculation using the propagation model as defined from either the transmitter or the prediction
folders.

In A9155, the dialog allowing you to create simulations is made of three tabs : General, Traffic and Advanced described
below.

General tab
In this tab, you can enter a name to the group of simulations that A9155 is going to compute. Then, you may decide the
number of scenarios on which you want to simulate power control. It is possible to create several simulations at the same
time or just one by one if you prefer. Selecting the Detailed results option enables you to get additional simulation outputs
relating to mobiles (results available in the Mobiles and Mobiles (Shadowing values) tabs of the simulation Properties
window). Finally, the Execute later option can be used if you want to predefine simulation calculation settings and start
the computation subsequently. In case the option is selected, simulation calculation is not carried out when closing the
dialog; simulation will be worked out when clicking on the Calculate command (F7 shortcut or button).

Note : The Execute later feature enables you to automatically calculate UMTS coverage studies after simulations without
intermediary step.

In the Cell load constraint part, you must select constraints you want A9155 to respect during power control simulation. If
you wish to check your network, just select the constraints about maximum cell power, maximum number of channel
elements, maximum uplink cell load (the default value is set to 75%) and OVSF codes availability. The simulation
proceeds without exceeding these limits. Mobiles with the lowest service priority (user-defined in each service properties
dialog window) are first rejected. In order for the simulation to proceed freely, uncheck all the calculation options.


Traffic tab
The global scaling factor for traffic option enables you to increase subscriber density without changing traffic parameters
or cartography. For example, setting the global scaling factor for traffic to 2 means doubling the initial number of
subscribers (for traffic raster or user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for traffic maps per transmitter and per
service).

Then, you can perform simulations using several traffic cartographies. To do this, select them in the Traffic part. In this
case, A9155 takes into account the traffic information provided in all the selected maps. This feature must be carefully
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 287/476


used to avoid inconsistencies. Thus, make sure you do not mix several kinds of traffic maps (for example, raster traffic
map and transmitter coverage area traffic map) in a simulation study; rather, make several simulation studies, each one
based on a same sort of traffic map. On the other hand, you can fully carry out a simulation study using several traffic
maps belonging to the same kind.

Advanced tab
Generator initialisation enables you to obtain the same random distribution in two simulations just by giving the same
non-zero integer in this field. For example, you create a simulation with generator initialisation value of 1 (or whichever
integer different from 0). When you create another simulation, giving 1 as generator initialisation, you obtain the same
random distribution. To avoid getting similar distributions, just enter zero value in this field. A group of several
distributions created at the same time may be repeated with the same principle. This can be useful when one wants to
compare two simulations with just one parameter value difference; so to make a just comparison, it is better to have the
same user locations (same path loss values for users).

You can then specify the maximum number of iterations allowed during a simulation, UL and DL convergence thresholds.

The power control simulation is based on an iterative algorithm. In the Convergence part, you can define how many
iterations you want the simulation to run (maximum number of iterations) and specify your own uplink and downlink
convergence criteria (percentage power difference for downlink and percentage noise difference for uplink between two
successive iterations).


When clicking OK, simulation starts running and stops when the convergence criteria are met in two successive
iterations (when there is no network parameter evolution). Therefore, the simulation can finish before reaching the
maximum number of defined iterations.

When calculation is finished, A9155 has created the required number of simulations in the newly created group of
simulations.

A9155 makes easy the consistency management between radio data, simulations and predictions.

Average simulations and replays are reachable from each of these subfolders. Display properties are reachable form the
Simulations folder.

VII.6.2.d REPLAYING A UMTS SIMULATION
A9155 allows the user to replay existing simulations in order to keep the same radio configuration (including reference
maps, initialisation number) and to modify the convergence parameters and the constraints on the cell loads. The new
group of simulations is based on the same random user distribution (number of users who try to be connected, allocated
service, mobility and activity status, geographic position), just the power control is recalculated and the outputs updated.


To replay a group of UMTS simulations (one of several ones), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the UMTS simulation group subfolder you want to replay the simulations to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Replay...,
The replay simulation(s) dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters on the convergence parameters and the constraints on the cell loads for the current
group of simulations to replay,
Validate by clicking on OK.

Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point
analysis tool.

Note : giving several times the same integer number (different from 0) as initialisation number in the simulation creation
dialog box leads to replay simulations with identical user random distribution.

See Generator initialisation - Replay differences

Comment: as the generator initialisation function, this feature enables you to obtain the same user distribution in two
simulations. Nevertheless, the generator initialisation option is more powerful since it can be used to create several
simulations with the same distribution at the same time and several sets of different simulations with the same set of
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


288/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


distributions.
VII.6.2.e GENERATOR INITIALISATION - REPLAY DIFFERENCES (UMTS)
The main differences between two features are the inputs taken into account in simulations. Comparison is detailed
below.

Replay: A9155 reuses the same user distribution (user with a service, a mobility and an activity status) and traffic
parameters (such as maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt targets...) as in the initial
simulation. Just radio data (new transmitter, azimuth...) modifications are taken into account during power control
simulation.

Generator initialisation: If generator initialisation entered when creating both simulations is an integer different from 0,
A9155 finds the same user distribution (user with a service, a mobility and an activity status) in both simulations. On
the other hand, in this case, both traffic parameter (such as maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed,
Eb/Nt targets...) and radio data (new transmitter, azimuth...) modifications are taken into account during power control
simulation.
VII.6.2.f AVERAGING UMTS SIMULATIONS
With A9155, it is possible to average some available groups of simulations. This feature also allows the user to calculate
standard deviations on the averaged simulations. Results are automatically displayed per cell, identically than in a single
simulation.


To display average results per cell over a group of UMTS simulations, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the UMTS simulation group subfolder you want to average the simulations to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Average simulations...,
The average simulation dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the available tabs to display either the Statistics, Means or Standard deviation window,
Click OK to close the window.


Average simulations may be used in specific UMTS coverage predictions or in an AS analysis with the point analysis
tool.
VII.6.2.g ADDING A SIMULATION TO AN EXISTING GROUP OF UMTS SIMULATIONS
In A9155, It is possible to add a new simulation to an existing group of simulations. When creating the new simulation,
A9155 takes into account the same inputs (radio and traffic data, simulation parameters) as used for generating the
group of simulations and replays user distribution and power control simulation.


To add a simulation to an existing group of simulations, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS Simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the simulation group on which you want to add a simulation,
Choose the New... command from the open context menu,
A new simulation is being computed using the parameters of the current group,
After calculation, a new simulation is added to the group.

Note : The added simulation is then considered if you calculate an average simulation.
VII.6.3 UMTS SIMULATION PROCESS
VII.6.3.a POWER CONTROL UMTS SIMULATION CONCEPTS
Power control consists of two steps in A9155 :

1st step : obtaining realistic user distribution
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 289/476



To get user distribution, you need to have traffic cartography at your disposal.

Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law that
complies with the traffic database (and packet switched services as well as circuit switched services).

User activity status is an important output of random distribution, which will have direct consequences on simulation and
network noise level.

In UMTS, a circuit switched service user is either active or inactive:
Active means: a radio resource has been allocated to the user, and the user is speaking (i.e. he creates interference
both on the downlink and the uplink).
Inactive means: a radio resource has been allocated to the user, but he is not speaking (i.e. he does not create
interference).

A packet switched service user can be either inactive or active on the downlink or active on the uplink:
Inactive means: the user is currently not transmitting or receiving packets, so he does not use any radio resource and
does not create interference: he is neither taken into account in simulation, nor represented on map.
Active on the downlink: the user is receiving data, he has been assigned a radio resource and he creates interference
on the downlink.
Active on the uplink: the user is transmitting data, he has been assigned a radio resource and he creates interference
on the uplink

A second random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone.

2nd step : Power control simulation

Power control simulation needs propagation path loss for cells and mobiles. If these results are not available, A9155
achieves propagation calculation using the propagation model as defined from either the transmitter or the prediction
folders.

Based on CDMA air interface, network automatically regulates itself by using traffic driven uplink and downlink power
control in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. A9155 simulates this network regulation mechanism
with an iterative algorithm and calculates, for each user distribution, network parameters such as base station power,
mobile terminal power, active set and handover status for each terminal.

The power control simulation is based on an iterative algorithm. Each iteration, all the mobiles selected during the user
distribution generation (1
st
step) try to be connected one by one to network transmitters. The process is repeated from
iteration to iteration until convergence. The algorithm steps are detailed below.


Initialisation
2
nd
step : Mi active set determination
3
rd
step : Uplink power control
+
radio resource control
1
st
step : Mi best server determination
For each mobile Mi

4
th
step : Downlink power control
+
radio resource control
5
th
step : Uplink and downlink interference update
Congestion and radio resource control
Convergence study

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


290/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Schematic view of power control simulation algorithm


During simulation, mobiles penalizing too much the others are ejected. Different causes of ejection can be distinguished:

The signal quality is not sufficient:
- On the downlink, not enough pilot signal quality: Ec/I0 pilot < Ec/I0 min pilot
- On the downlink, not enough reception on traffic channel: Ptch > Ptch max
- On the uplink, not enough power to transmit: Pmob > Pmob max

When constraints above are respected, the network may be saturated:
- The maximum load factor is exceeded (at admission or congestion).
- Not enough channel elements on site: channel element saturation
- Not enough power for cells: Cell power saturation
- OVSF code saturation

When the network is saturated; mobile ejection may be due to different reasons described above: multiple causes.

VII.6.3.b UMTS SIMULATION CONVERGENCE METHOD
The convergence criteria is evaluated as follows:

Each iteration k, A9155 evaluates:

( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
( ) |
|
|
.
|

\
|
|
|
|
.
|

\
|

|
|
.
|

\
|

=
|
|
|
.
|

\
|
|
|
|
.
|

\
|

|
|
|
.
|

\
|

100
max
int , 100 max int max
100
max
int , 100
max
int max
1
1
1 1
ic N
ic N ic N
ic I
ic I ic I
ic N
ic N ic N
ic P
ic P ic P
k
UL
user
k
UL
user k
UL
user
Stations
k
UL
tot
k
UL
tot k
UL
tot
Stations
UL
k
DL
user
k
DL
user k
DL
user
Stations
k
tx
k tx k tx
Stations
DL


Where:
UL

is the UL convergence threshold,

DL

is the DL convergence threshold,

( ) ic P
tx
is the cell total transmitted power on the carrier ic,
( ) ic
I
UL
tot
is the total interference received by cell on the carrier ic,
( ) ic
N
UL
user
is the number of users connected on UL on the carrier ic,
( ) ic
N
DL
user
is the number of users connected on DL on the carrier ic,

A9155 stops the algorithm if:

1st case: Between two successive iterations,
UL

and
DL

are lower ( ) than their respective thresholds (defined

when creating a simulation).

The simulation has reached convergence.

Example: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds are 5. If
5
UL
and
5
DL
between the 4th and the 5th iteration, A9155 stops the algorithm after the 5th iteration.
Convergence is reached.

2nd case: After 30 iterations,
UL

or/and
DL

are still higher than their respective thresholds and from the 30th
iteration,
UL

or/and
DL

do not decrease during 15 successive iterations.

The simulation has not reached convergence (specific divergence symbol).

Examples: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds are 5.
- 1. After the 30th iteration,
UL

or/and
DL

equal 100 and do not decrease during 15 successive iterations: A9155 stops
the algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence is not reached.
- 2. After the 30th iteration,
UL

or/and
DL

equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without going
under the thresholds) and then, do not change during 15 successive iterations: A9155 stops the algorithm at the 56th
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 291/476


iteration without reaching convergence.

3rd case: After the last iteration.
If
UL

or/and
DL

are still strictly higher than their respective thresholds, the simulation has not reached convergence
(specific divergence symbol).
If
UL

and
DL

are lower than their respective thresholds, the simulation has reached convergence.

VII.6.3.c ADMISSION CONTROL IN UMTS SIMULATIONS
A9155 checks cell UL load during admission control (1st step: mobile best server determination) and congestion control
(after considering all the mobiles during an iteration). Therefore, a mobile can be rejected due to a higher UL load either
during admission control, or during congestion control. It is possible to distinguish both rejection causes.

A bit more information concerning the admission control is provided. During admission control, A9155 calculates the
uplink load factor of a considered cell assuming the handled mobile is connected to it. Here, activity status assigned to
users is not taken into account. So even if the mobile is not active on UL, it can be rejected due to cell load saturation.
To calculate the cell UL load factor, either A9155 takes into account mobile power determined during power control if
mobile was connected in previous iteration, or it estimates a load rise due to mobile and adds it to the current load. The
load rise (
UL
X ) is calculated as follows:

R Q
W
X
UL
b
UL
req
UL

+
=
1
1


Where
W is the chip rate (bit/s),
Q
UL
req
is the Eb/Nt target on uplink (defined in service properties for a given mobility),
R
UL
b
is the service uplink effective bit rate (bit/s).

VII.6.3.d CHANNEL ELEMENT MANAGEMENT IN UMTS SIMULATIONS
In A9155, the number of channel elements needed for a user with given service and link direction depends on site
equipment and channel element consumption defined for the equipment-service couple.

VII.6.3.e OVSF CODES MANAGEMENT
OVSF codes are now managed on the downlink during the simulation. A9155 performs OVSF code allocation during the
resource control step.

OVSF codes form a binary tree; codes with a longer length are generated from codes with a shorter length. Indeed,
length-k OVSF codes are generated from length-k/2 OVSF codes. Therefore, if one channel needs 1 length-k/2 OVSF
code; it is equivalent to use 2 length-k OVSF codes, or 4 length-2k OVSF codes,.



WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


292/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


512 codes per cell are available in UMTS projects.

During the resource control, A9155 determines, for each cell, the number of codes, which will be consumed. It allocates:
A code with the longest length per common channel, for each cell. The number of common channels corresponds to
the number of overhead DL channel elements per cell defined for the site equipment.
A code per cell-receiver link, for traffic channels. The length of code to be allocated, Code-Length, is determined as
follows:

W
R
Length Code
DL
b
=


Where,
-
R
DL
b
is the downlink service effective bit rate (bit/s),
- W is the spreading bandwidth (Hz).

Note :
G
length Code
DL
p
=
(
G
DL
p
is the service downlink processing gain).

When the calculated code length does not correspond to the code lengths available into the tree, A9155 takes the code
with the shorter length. For instance, A9155 will use a 128 bit OVSF code in case the calculated code length is 240.

The OVSF code allocation follows the Buddy algorithm, which guarantees that:
If a k-length OVSF code is used, all of its children with lengths 2k, 4k cannot be used because they are no longer
orthogonal.
If a k-length OVSF code is used, all of its ancestors with lengths k/2, k/4 cannot be used because they are no
longer orthogonal.

Example: Let a 16 kbit/s service user active on DL be connected to a cell. We assume that site equipment requires four
overhead downlink channel elements per cell. Therefore, A9155 will consume four 512 bit-length OVSF codes for
common channels and a 128 bit-length OVSF code for traffic channels, that is to say four additional 512 bit-length OVSF
codes.

Notes :
1. The OVSF code allocation follows the mobile connection order (mobile order in the Mobiles tab).
2. The OVSF code and channel element management is differently dealt with in case of softer handover. A9155
allocates OVSF codes for each cell-receiver link while it globally assigns channel elements to a site.

Constraint on the OVSF codes is available when creating simulation. Therefore, when selecting it, A9155 checks the
OVSF code availability and then:
Ejects the mobile if there is no OVSF code available (without considering the service priority).

When this constraint respect is not required, A9155 just checks the OVSF code availability without rejecting mobiles in
case of OVSF code unavailability.

VII.6.3.f OVSF CODES AVAILABILITY
An additional constraint on the OVSF codes, Number of codes, is available when creating simulation. Therefore, when
selecting the Number of codes option, A9155 checks the OVSF code availability and then ejects the mobile if there is no
OVSF code available (without considering the service priority).

See OVSF codes management

VII.6.3.g MODELLING SHADOWING IN UMTS SIMULATIONS
In order to take into account prediction errors along paths in UMTS simulations, A9155 keeps a neutral predicted path
loss for mobiles; a random shadowing value is computed and added to the average predicted path loss. Reliability level
and shadowing margin are then introduced in prediction studies and point analysis only.

From a user-defined model standard deviation associated to the receiver position, a random shadowing error is
computed and added to the model path loss (
Lpath
). This random vale is drawn during Monte-Carlo simulation; each
user is assigned a service, a mobility type, an activity status, a geographic position and a random shadowing value.

For each link, path loss (L) can be broken down:
L L
path
+ =

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 293/476

is a zero mean gaussian random variable

( )
dB
, G 0
representing variation due to shadowing. It can be expressed as
the sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables,
L

and
P

.
L

models error related to the receiver

local environment; it is the same whichever the link.
P

models error related to the path between transmitter and

receiver.

Therefore, in case of two links, we have:
1
1 P L
+ =
for the link 1
2
2 P L
+ =
for the link 2

From
i

, the model standard deviation

( )
and the correlation coefficient
( )
between
1

and
2

, we can calculate
standard deviations of
L

( )
L

and
i
P

( )
P

(assuming all
i
P

have the same standard deviations).

We have:
2 2 2
P L
+ =

2
2

L
=

Therefore,
( )
P
= 1
2 2


L
=
2 2


There is currently no agreed model for predicting correlation coefficient
( )
between
1

and
2

. Two key variables

influence correlation:
The angle between the two paths. If this angle is small, correlation is high.
The relative values of the two path lengths. If angle is 0 and path lengths are the same, correlation is zero. Correlation is
different from zero when path lengths differ.

A simple model has been found [1]:
2
1
D
D

T
|
|
.
|

\
|
=
when

T


T

is a function of the mean size of obstacles near the receiver and is also linked to the receiver environment.

In a normal handover state, assuming a hexagonal schema for sites,

is close to (+/- /3) and D1/D2 is close to 1.

We found in literature that = 0.5 when = 0.3 and t = /10.

In A9155, is set to 0.5. So, we have:

2

L
=

and
2

P
=


Therefore, to model shadowing error common with all signals arriving at mobile (
E
ceiver
Shadowing
Re
), values are randomly drawn
for each mobile; they follows a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation
|
|
.
|

\
|
2

where
( )
is the
standard deviation associated to the mobile clutter class. Then, for each mobile-transmitter couple, A9155 draws another
value representing shadowing part uncorrelated with the position of the mobile (
E
Path
Shadowing
); this value follows a zero-
mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation
|
|
.
|

\
|
2

.

Random shadowing error means are centred on zero. Hence, this shadowing modelling method has no impact on the
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


294/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


simulated network load. On the other hand, as shadowing errors on the receiver-transmitter links are uncorrelated, the
method will influence the evaluated SHO gain in case mobile is in SHO.

Random shadowing values used for each mobile and mobile-transmitter pair are detailed in simulation results.

VII.6.4 UMTS SIMULATION RESULTS SUMMARY
VII.6.4.a DISPLAYING UMTS SIMULATION REQUIREMENTS AND RESULTS
When a simulation study has been created, A9155 creates a statistical report on simulation results. A part is dedicated to
traffic request determined from the 1
st
step of simulation (traffic scenario elaboration) and another one refers to network
performance (results coming from 2
nd
step of simulation: power control).

If a focus zone has been defined in your project, only sites, transmitters and mobiles located inside the focus zone are
considered when accessing simulation results. The global output statistics are based on these mobiles.

Traffic request:
A9155 calculates the total number of users who try to be connected. It is a result of the first random trial, the power
control has not yet been achieved. This result depends on the traffic description and cartography.
During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service. Therefore, UL and DL rates that all the users could
theoretically generate are provided.
Breakdown (number of users, UL and DL rates) per service is given.

Results:
The number and the percentage of rejected users are calculated and detailed per rejection cause. These results are
determined after the power control and depend on network design.
A9155 supplies the total number and the percentage of connected users, UL and DL total rates that they generate.
These data are also detailed per service.


To display requirements and results on any simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the requests and
results by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the requests and results to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the requests and results,
Click on the Statistics tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.

Note : The traffic rates are calculated at the user level without taking into account handover. Once achieved, simulations
are available for specific UMTS coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.

VII.6.4.b DISPLAYING INPUT PARAMETERS OF AN EXISTING UMTS SIMULATION
After a UMTS simulation, A9155 can display the associated transmitter global parameters and the inputs defined during
the simulation creation


To display the input parameters of an existing simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the initial conditions by
left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the initial conditions to open the associated
context menu,
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 295/476


Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the initial conditions,
Click on the Initial conditions tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.


The initial condition tab window contains :
The transmitter global parameters as:
- The spreading width,
- The orthogonality factor,
- The default uplink soft handover gain,
- The MRC in softer/soft option: if it is defined or not,
- The method used to calculate Io

The inputs available when creating simulation:
- The maximum number of iterations,
- The uplink and downlink convergence thresholds,
- The simulation constraints such as the maximum power, the maximum number of channel elements, the uplink
load factor and the maximum load,
- The name of used traffic maps.

Then, if available, are displayed the values of orthogonality factor and standard deviation as defined per clutter type.

Note : When the simulation does not converge (UL and DL convergence criteria not reached at the end of the
simulation), A9155 displays a special warning icon in front of Simulation object.

VII.6.4.c SUMMARISING RESULTS PER SITE (UMTS PROJECTS)
After a UMTS simulation, A9155 can display the associated results per site.


To display the results on any simulation per site, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the requests and
results by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the results per site to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the results per site,
Click on the Sites tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.


In this window, A9155 displays the maximum number of channel elements previously defined for each site, the number
of required channel elements in uplink and downlink at the end of simulation, the number of extra channel elements due
to soft handover, the properties related to each site equipment (MUD factor, Rake receiver efficiency factor, carrier
selection mode, AS restricted to neighbours option and overhead channel elements on uplink and downlink), the uplink
and downlink throughputs (kbits/s) per service supported by site. The UL and DL throughputs are the number of kbits per
second supported by the site on uplink and downlink to supply (mobiles connected with the transmitters located on the
site) one kind of services. The throughput calculation takes into account the handover connections.

If the maximum channel element number is exceeded, sites are displayed with red colour.

Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. Once achieved,
simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


296/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VII.6.4.d SUMMARISING RESULTS PER CELL (UMTS PROJECTS)
After a UMTS simulation, A9155 can display the associated results per cell.


To display the results on any simulation per site, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the results per cell by
left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the results per cell to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the results per cell,
Click on the Transmitters tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.


In this window, A9155 provides the simulation input data like the maximum power, the pilot power, the SCH power, the
other CCH power, the AS threshold (which is a cell parameter since version V6.1), the gain, the reception and
transmission losses, the noise figure, and simulation output data regarding cells such as the total DL power used, the UL
total noise, the UL and DL load factors, the UL and DL noise rises, the percentage of used power, the UL reuse factor,
the number of UL and DL links, the number of used OVSF codes, the percentage of handover types, the UL and DL
throughputs, the minimum, maximum and average traffic channel powers, the number of users rejected for each cause,
for each cell.

See Simulation outputs on cell components

Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. The "Commit
loads" button permits to copy UL loads and total powers DL (or their average in the case of several carriers) in the cell
table in order to be taken potentially as reference for specific CDMA predictions (by selecting the None option from the
simulation scrolling box).

Average simulations are ordered by cells. Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage
predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.

VII.6.4.e COMMITTING SIMULATED LOADS TO CELLS (UMTS PROJECTS)
In A9155, to enable simulation result sharing, two fields, the UL load (UL load factor) and total power (total DL power
used), are available in cell properties. Both parameters can be results coming from a single or an average simulation or
inputs manually specified in the Cell table or in the Transmission/Reception tab of each cell Property window.


To assign any simulated UL load factor and total DL power to cells from a network, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to use the simulated results by
left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the UMTS simulation you want to use the simulated results to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulation you want to use the simulated results,
Click on the Cells tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the to assign calculated loads and total powers to cells,
Values are automatically copied in each cell properties window,
Click OK to close the window.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 297/476



When assigned to cells, these values can be used for coverages based on no simulation.

Note : this feature is also available from the mean tab window of any average simulation.


Reminder : the Commit load button is inactive as long as both fields, UL load and total power, do not exist.

VII.6.4.f SUMMARISING RESULTS PER MOBILE (UMTS PROJECTS)
After a UMTS simulation, A9155 can display the associated results per mobile.


To display the results on any simulation per site, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the requests and
results by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the results per mobile to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the results per mobile,
Click on the Mobiles tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.


In this window, A9155 gives information about calculated terminal parameters. First, A9155 mentions simulation input
data: X, Y, service, terminal, user profile, user mobility and activity obtained from random trial. A9155 displays simulation
output data for these users: carrier, DL and UL requested and obtained rates, mobile power, best server, connection
status, handover status, transmitters in active set and Ec/Io from cells in active set.

A9155 displays which carrier is used for connection and calculates the power transmitted by the terminal. A9155
identifies the best server among the cells taking part in mobile active set.
Connection status refers to mobile ejection causes previously defined. It gives the reasons why the mobile, even active,
is not connected to any transmitter at the end of the simulation.

A9155 allows to analyse what type of handover is possible for a mobile; providing the HO status information. HO status
represents the real number of sites compared to the number of cells in active set.

For example, when a mobile is in connection with three cells and among them two co-site cells (soft - softer handover),
its HO status is 2/3. When the mobile is connected with only one transmitter (no handover) its HO status is 1/1. When the
mobile is connected with three co-site transmitters (softer - softer handover), its HO status is 1/3.

Active set is the list of transmitters (or cells since on unique carrier) in connection with the mobile. The maximum number
of transmitters in active set is defined by the user in Terminal Properties and besides limited to 4 in A9155. Soft
handover can be enabled/disabled for every service. For each transmitter in active set, Ec/Io values are calculated and
may be compared to Ec/Io thresholds previously defined in Mobility Type Properties. Transmitters, which provide an
Ec/Io pilot quality that is lower than [ Best server Ec/Io - AS-threshold ], are rejected from the active set.

Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. Once achieved,
simulations are available for specific UMTS coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.


Checking the Detailed results box during the simulation creation enables you to get additional simulation outputs relating
to mobiles and shadowing values computed along paths between transmitters and mobiles.

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


298/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VII.6.4.g DISPLAYING SHADOWING VALUES OF A UMTS SIMULATION
This feature is available only when selecting the Detailed results option in the simulation creation dialog. Here, A9155
details for each mobile:
Its number Id,
The clutter class where the receiver is located,
The model standard deviation associated to the clutter class,
The random shadowing error (
E
ceiver
Shadowing
Re
) related to the receiver local environment (Value at receiver); this one is
the same whichever the link.
The random shadowing errors (
E
Path
Shadowing
) due to the transmitter-receiver path (Value). A9155 gives this error for a
maximum of ten paths; it considers the ten transmitters, which have the mobile in their calculation areas and the
lowest path losses (Lpath). Transmitters are sorted in an ascending path loss order.


To display shadowing values for each mobile in any simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display by left clicking on the
button,
Either
Right click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the clutter data to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the clutter data,
Click on the Mobile (Shadowing values) tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.


Notes
The values
E
ceiver
Shadowing
Re
computed for all the mobiles follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard
deviation
|
|
.
|

\
|
2

.
The values
E
Path
Shadowing
computed for a given mobile follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard
deviation
|
|
.
|

\
|
2

.

VII.6.4.h MANAGING UMTS SIMULATION RESULTS ON THE MAP
From any simulation, A9155 can, globally or individually, display the associated results on the map in several ways.
These can be managed globally for all the simulations.

To make available the display dialog window on all the simulations of the current project, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the UMTS simulations folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties...,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulations folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the display parameters for all the simulations of the current project,
Click OK to close the window.


Like for most of the other display dialog windows in A9155, you can choose the display type associated with the values
(unique, discrete, values interval) and some corresponding fields. Due to the complexity of UMTS technology
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 299/476


simulations, these fields are numerous and can be obtained as indicated in the following table.


Display type Field

Unique All the simulations

Discrete Values Service
Terminal
User
Mobility
Activity
Carrier
Connection status
Best server
HO status
Asi
Clutter

Value intervals X
Y
DL requested rate (kbits/s)
UL requested rate (kbits/s)
DL obtained rate (kbits/s)
UL obtained rate (kbits/s)
Mobile Total power
Ec/Io Asi
Cell power TCH Asi (DL)
Ntot DL ASi
Load factor Asi
Noise rise Asi
Reuse factor Asi
Iintra Asi
Iextra Asi
Total path loss Asi
Nb UL CEs
Nb DL CEs
Name
Orthogonality factor
Macro-diversity gain UL
Macro-diversity gain DL


Note : Existing simulations, in the explorer window contain sub-items which depend on results are displayed on the map.
The simulation display is managed with the standard display dialog in use under A9155. Once achieved, simulations are
available for specific UMTS coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.
VII.6.5 UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS
VII.6.5.a UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON SITES
Each site is characterised by its maximum number of channel elements previously defined in the site properties.

Results are detailed for :
The number of channel elements required on uplink and downlink at the end of simulation,
The number of channel elements due to soft handover overhead, for UL and DL (Nb CEs due to SHO overhead UL
and DL),
The properties related to the equipment associated to each site (parameters used during simulation) : MUD factor,
Rake receiver efficiency factor, carrier selection mode, AS restricted to neighbours option and overhead channel
elements on uplink and downlink
The uplink and downlink throughputs (kbits/s) per service supported by site. UL and DL throughputs are the number
of kbits per second supported by the site on uplink and downlink to supply (mobiles connected with the transmitters
located on the site) one kind of services. The throughput calculation takes into account the handover connections.

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


300/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VII.6.5.b UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS
Each cell is defined by its carrier, its maximum power, the pilot power, the SCH power, other CCH power, the AS
threshold, the gain, reception and transmission losses, the noise figure. Results are detailed for the total power used on
a carrier, the UL total noise, UL and DL load factors, UL and DL noise rises, the percentage of used power, the reuse
factor, the number of UL and DL radio links, the number of OVSF codes, the percentage of each handover type, the UL
and DL throughputs, minimum, average and maximum traffic channel powers, the number of users rejected for each
reason.

See UMTS Simulation outputs on cell components

VII.6.5.c UMTS AVERAGE SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS
Each cell is detailed by its carrier, by the UL total noise, UL and DL load factors, UL and DL noise rises, the total power
used, the Reuse factor, the number of UL and DL radio links, the number of OVSF codes, the percentage of each
handover type, the UL and DL throughputs, minimum, average and maximum traffic channel powers, the number of
users rejected for each reason.

See UMTS Simulation outputs on cell components

VII.6.5.d UMTS STANDARD DEVIATION OF SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS
Each cell is detailed by standard deviation on the UL total noise, UL and DL load factors, the total power used, the Reuse
factor, the number of UL and DL radio links, the number of OVSF codes, the percentage of each handover type, the UL
and DL throughputs, minimum, average and maximum traffic channel powers, the number of users rejected for each
reason.

VII.6.5.e UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELL COMPONENTS
The total DL power used is the total power transmitted by the transmitter on a carrier. When constraints are settled,
the calculated power cannot exceed the maximum power value previously defined in Transmitter Properties.
The uplink total noise takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on a carrier (from intracell and
extracell terminals) and the thermal noise.
From uplink total noise and uplink interference, A9155 calculates uplink load factor of transmitter on a carrier. If this
constraint has been selected, UL cell load factor is not allowed to exceed the user-defined value.
The uplink reuse factor is determined from uplink intra and extra-cellular interference (signals received by transmitter
respectively from intracell and extracell terminals).
The DL load factor of the cell i corresponds to the (DL average interference [due to transmitter signals on the same
carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i area) / (DL average total noise [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise
of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area) ratio.
The uplink and downlink noise rises are respectively calculated from uplink and downlink load factors. These data
point out the signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).
The percentage of used power is determined from the total DL power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). This
value also represents the cell load, as a percentage of the total capacity reached.

Reminder: the maximum power is an input data user-definable for each cell in the Properties window. On the other hand,
the power is a simulation output data calculated for each transmitter, carrier by carrier.

The number of radio links corresponds to the number of users-transmitters links on the same carrier. This data is
calculated on uplink and on downlink. A single user can use several radio links (handover).
A9155 estimates the percentages of handover types in which the transmitter takes part. A9155 only details the
results for the following handover status, no handover (1/1), softer (1/2), soft (2/2), softer-soft (2/3) and soft-soft (3/3)
handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are globally analysed.
The uplink and downlink throughputs represent respectively the numbers of kbits per second delivered by the
transmitter on uplink and on downlink.
Minimum traffic channel power is the lowest of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying services to
mobiles connected to the transmitter.
Maximum traffic channel power is the greatest of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying services to
mobiles connected to the transmitter.
Average traffic channel power is the average of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying services to
mobiles connected to the transmitter.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 301/476


VII.6.5.f UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON MOBILES
Each user is defined by his location, the service and the terminal used, his profile, his mobility and his potential activity.
Results are given on carriers, UL and DL requested and obtained rates, mobile powers, connection status, best servers,
HO status, active set transmitters and associated Ec/Io.

If the detailed results box has been checked for the current simulation, results are also given, for each (mobile -
transmitters in active set) link, on the Cell power used on the TCH (Traffic Channel), the downlink total noise, the
downlink load factor, the downlink noise rise, the downlink reuse factor, the total noise received at the terminal from the
transmitter area (Iintra (DL) and the total noise received at the terminal from other transmitter areas (Iextra (DL), the total
path loss on the link(s) and the number of uplink and downlink channel elements. Moreover, A9155 provides the name of
the clutter class where the probe receiver is located, the orthogonality factor, the UL and DL macro diversity gains
associated with the clutter class.

See UMTS Simulation outputs on mobiles
VII.6.5.g UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON MOBILE COMPONENTS
A9155 gathers power control simulation inputs and outputs, for all the users who try to be connected.

X and Y are the coordinates of users who try to be connected (geographic position determined by the 2
nd
random
trial). The power control is based on this order.

Note : Ejected users at the end of the power control are included in this list.

Service, user mobility and status activity are the 1
st
random trial results (user distribution generation).
Terminal and user profile are based on traffic description. According to the service and activity status assigned to a
user, A9155 determines his terminal and the corresponding user profile.
The carrier used for the mobile-transmitter connection.
DL and UL requested rates: they respectively correspond to the DL and UL effective bit rates of service.
DL and UL obtained rates: after power control simulation, the obtained rate equals the requested rate if the mobile is
connected. Else, the obtained rate is zero.
The total power transmitted by the terminal.
The best server among the transmitters entering mobile active set.
The Connection status refers to mobile ejection causes previously defined. It gives the reasons why the mobile, even
active, is not connected to any transmitter at the end of the simulation.
The HO status is represented by the number of sites compared to the number of transmitters in active set.

For example, when a mobile is in connection with three transmitters and among them two co-site transmitters (soft -
softer handover), its HO status is 2/3 (two sites and three transmitters). When the mobile is connected with only one
transmitter (no handover) its HO status is 1/1. When the mobile is connected with three co-site transmitters (softer -
softer handover), its HO status is 1/3.

The list of transmitters in connection with the mobile (Active set). The maximum number of transmitters in active set is
defined by the user in Terminal Properties and limited to 4 in A9155. Soft handover can be enabled/disabled for every
service.
Ec/Io values are calculated for each transmitter in active set and may be compared to Ec/Io thresholds defined in
Mobility Type Properties.

Note : Transmitters, which Ec/Io value is AS-threshold (handover margin) lower than the best one (Active Set link 1), are
rejected from the active set.

The cell power transmitted on traffic channel. This parameter is determined for each (mobile transmitters in active
set) link.
The DL total noise is calculated for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link. This parameter is calculated from
the transmitter thermal noise and the DL total interference at the terminal.
The DL load factor (determined for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link) corresponds to the downlink total
interference total noise at the terminal ratio.
The DL noise rise
4
(evaluated for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link) is deduced from the DL load factor.
The DL reuse factor (calculated for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link) is evaluated from the interference
received at the terminal from the intra transmitter area and the total interference received at the terminal from all the
transmitters (intra and extra areas).
DL intra-cellular interference for each cell (i) of the mobile active set:

4
The downlink noise rise Nr is calculated from the downlink total noise Ntot : Nr = -10log (Nterm/Ntot), Nterm being the thermal noise

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


302/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


( ) ( )
|
|
.
|

\
|
=
T
SCH
DL
tot
i
ortho
DL
tot
i
DL
ra
L
P
ic
P
F ic
P
Iint

DL extra-cellular interference for each cell (i) of the mobile active set
( ) ( )
|
|
.
|

\
|
=

T
SCH
DL
tot
ortho
Tx i Tx
DL
tot
DL
extra
L
P
ic
P
F ic
P
I
,

The total path loss (determined for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link) is calculated from transmitter and
terminal losses, path loss (propagation result), transmitter and terminal gains.
The number of uplink and downlink channel elements respectively refer to the number of channel elements
consumed by the user on UL and DL,
The orthogonality factor is user-defined in the clutter class Properties window.
The UL macro diversity gain is determined for mobile receivers connected either on UL or on UL and DL.
( ) ( )
Nt
Eb
Nt
Eb
Gain sity Macrodiver UL
UL
BS tch
UL

=

The DL macro diversity gain is evaluated in case mobile receivers are connected either on DL or on UL and DL.
( ) ( )
Nt
Eb
Nt
Eb
Gain sity Macrodiver DL
DL
BS tch
DL

=


VII.7 SPECIFIC WCDMA/UMTS PREDICTION STUDIES
VII.7.1 UMTS PREDICTION STUDIES : OVERVIEW
For UMTS projects, A9155 provides two kinds of predictions :
Point analysis which enables you to get prediction at a specific location within your network :
Standard studies on pilot reception (Profile, Reception and Results tab),
Active set analysis of a real time probe user in order to determine the UMTS pilot quality and connection
status at the receiver by using the AS analysis tab.

AS analysis is a radio reception diagnosis provided for:
a given simulation (determining network parameters)
a user-definable probe receiver with associated terminal, mobility and service. This receiver does not
create any interference.


Coverage studies where each map bin is considered as a probe user with associated terminal, mobility and service.
These are ordered in four different groups of studies, listed in a natural planning order, from the indispensable pilot
study to the study of downlink total noise, with respect to the propagation model as defined :
Pilot-oriented studies to determine pilot coverage by transmitter, the pilot coverage by signal level,
overlapping area, pilot quality (Ec/Io) and pilot pollution,
Service-oriented studies to determine service availability in uplink and downlink and effective service areas,
handover status study to analyse macro-diversity performance,
Downlink total noise study.

Except pilot coverage, coverage by signal level and overlapping studies, which are similar to classical coverage
studies, all other studies are specific to UMTS network planning and closely related to a particular UMTS
simulation.


Power control is achieved once only during simulation but never during prediction studies. Simulation outputs such as
uplink and downlink noise levels generated by the users may be used to evaluate the radio reception. Therefore,
prediction studies may be based on:
UL load and DL total power modelled during power control simulation for point analysis,
UL load and DL total power modelled during power control simulation for coverage studies,
User-definable UL load and DL total power for coverage studies :
Specific predictions can be based on either user defined load estimations (when filling manually the UL_load and
Total power cells from the cell table) or by using the "Commit loads" button (assigning to these columns the
calculated uplink loads and total powers from the current simulation) in the Cells tab window of a simulation result
window. To use these reported values, just select the None option from the Simulation scrolling box.


C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 303/476


Specific UMTS coverage studies may be performed with three different purposes:
Analyse in detail one particular simulation,
Globally analyse all simulations and evaluate network stability with regard to traffic fluctuations,
Analyse an average simulation,
Analyse user-definable parameters such as UL load and DL total power without simulation.



For these coverage studies, since study GUI is generic, the general rule is to choose :
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.
and to display the results as function of the attribute you want.

In this studies, each bin may be seen as a probe mobile, which does not create any interference

Caution : If you modify radio parameters, before recalculating predictions, do not forget to replay UMTS simulations first
in order to base predictions on up-to-date simulations. Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and
simulation displayed on map before further analysis. To help on that, A9155 provides a feature to automatically calculate
CDMA predictions after simulations without any intermediary step.

Important : Any of these specific UMTS studies requires propagation path loss on each bin.

VII.7.2 UMTS PREDICTION PROCESS
VII.7.2.a PREDICTING ON GIVEN UMTS CARRIERS
In A9155, specific UMTS studies can be based on given carriers.


To base your prediction on given carriers, proceed as follows :
Create a new prediction or access the properties of an existing coverage study you want to calculate again,
Click the Simulation tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Choose the carrier selection mode you want to consider in the Carrier scrolling menu,
Click OK or Apply to validate.


Note : when choosing a carrier, only cells using this carrier are taken into account in calculations. A9155 will display a
coverage by carrier. To get a coverage based on all the carriers, select the All option. In this case, A9155 displays a
multi-carrier coverage. It selects on each bin the best carrier according to the selection mode specified in the properties
of the transmitters from the current network.

VII.7.2.b MODELLING SHADOWING IN UMTS PREDICTIONS
Transmitted powers on downlink and uplink interference determined during simulation are used. In each analysed bin, a
probe mobile is placed. The path loss of the probe mobile is the computed path loss (Lpath) plus a margin
(MShadowing). This one depends on the required reliability level, model standard deviation associated to the clutter
class where the probe mobile is and the mobile handover status. In case of SHO, a gain is calculated depending on the
number of used links.

You can enter a reliability level (x%) when defining prediction properties (point analysis: Profile, Reception and AS
analysis tab and coverage studies). Therefore, the evaluated pilot quality, uplink and downlink traffic channel qualities
are reliable x% of time.

Formulas used to compute shadowing margin in case of no handover and SHO (2 and 3 links) and SHO gains are
detailed in the Technical reference guide.

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


304/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VII.7.3 MANAGING UMTS PREDICTIONS
VII.7.3.a CREATING PREDICTIONS FROM MODIFIED UMTS SIMULATIONS
This feature is provided to automatically calculate UMTS predictions after simulations without intermediary step. In fact,
you just need to define the UMTS prediction studies you want to perform and then, press the Calculate command: first,
A9155 calculates the simulations and then, the predictions based on simulations. Therefore, it is no more necessary to
wait for the simulations to be finished to create the UMTS prediction studies and start the calculations.

To do so, proceed as follows :
Create the UMTS prediction studies you want to perform and define their properties (colour, terminal,
mobility, service). As no simulation has been previously performed, you cannot base prediction studies on a
specific simulation,
Thus, choose either an average analysis (Average) or a statistical analysis based on a probability (All) on
all the future simulations.
Left click on the Calculate button (or F7),
The Creation of simulations window opens,
Specify the simulation inputs (number of simulations to be created, convergence criteria,
Press OK to start the calculations

A9155 performs the simulations and lists them in the UMTS simulation folder. Then, A9155 carries out the prediction
calculations based on the created simulations.

VII.7.3.b MANAGING UMTS PREDICTION DISPLAY
UMTS prediction dialogs include the A9155 generic display tab. It enables to display covered areas with graphic settings
depending on any attribute (from transmitter, site, etc...) and to easily manage legends, tips, thresholds, etc... Since
prediction study user interface is generic, many associations between selected items in the Simulation tab (a terminal, a
mobility - or all -, a service - or all -, a specific carrier - or all) and in the Display tab are available. So several calculation
and display settings are possible.

You can analyse different mobility and several services in a same study. For any UMTS study, in the Simulation tab, you
can choose All in the Service or/and Mobility scrolling menus. In this case, A9155 works out the coverage criterion for
each service or/and mobility type; a bin of the map will be covered if the studied coverage criterion is met for any service
or/and mobility. In addition, receiver definition and coverage display are not linked. Parameters set in the Simulation tab
are used in order to predetermine the coverage area (area where A9155 will display coverage) while graphical settings
(available in the Display tab) enable you to choose how to represent the coverage area. For example, it is possible to
perform multi-service or/and multi-mobility pilot reception analysis and to choose a coverage display per transmitter or
depending on any transmitter attribute.

The available display types (depending on the study to be carried out) are listed below :
Single colour : Coverage is mono colour; it displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied,
Colour per transmitter : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied. Moreover, the bin colour
corresponds to the colour of the first transmitter in active set (best server)
Colour per service : The receiver is not totally defined. Its service can take all existing service types. There are as
many graphical coverage layers as user-defined services. For each service, coverage layer displays areas where
radio conditions are satisfied
Colour per mobility : The receiver is not totally defined. Its mobility can take all existing mobility types. There are as
many graphical coverage layers as user-defined mobility types. For each mobility, coverage layer displays areas
where radio conditions are satisfied
Colour per probability : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied with different levels of
probability. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined probability thresholds (by default 0.5 and
0.9)
Colour per quality margin : Each coverage layer displays area where the quality margin is greater than the user-
defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined quality margins. The quality
margin is the difference between the quality level and the target quality level. There is intersection between layers
Colour per maximum quality level : Each coverage layer displays area where the maximum signal quality (even if not
reaching the quality target) exceeds the user-defined quality level. There are as many graphical coverage layers as
user-defined quality margins. There is intersection between layers
Colour per effective quality level : Each coverage layer displays area where the effective signal quality (min between
the maximum and the quality target) exceeds the user-defined quality level. There are as many graphical coverage
layers as user-defined quality margins. There is intersection between layers
Colour per handover status : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied for at least one transmitter
pilot quality. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined handover status. Each layer represents a
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 305/476


handover status. There is no intersection between layers
Colour per potential active transmitter number : Each coverage layer displays area where the number of potential
active transmitters is greater than the user-defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as
user-defined potential active transmitters. The potential active transmitter number corresponds to transmitters
checking all conditions to enter the active set. There is intersection between layers
Colour per required power level : Each coverage layer displays area where the required terminal power (in order for
transmitter to get a service) is greater than the user-defined required power thresholds. There are as many graphical
coverage layers as user-defined required power level. There is intersection between layers.
Colour per required power margin : Each coverage layer displays area where the required power margin exceeds the
user-defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined power margin. The
required power margin corresponds to the difference between the required terminal power and the maximum terminal
power. There is intersection between layers
Colour per minimum noise level: The displayed noise level is the lowest of the values calculated on all carriers.
Colour per average noise level: The displayed noise level is the average of calculated values on all carriers.
Colour per maximum noise level: The displayed noise level is the greatest of the values calculated on all carriers.
Colour per minimum noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the lowest of the values calculated from the downlink total
noise, on all carriers.
Colour per average noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the average of the values calculated from the downlink
total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per maximum noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the greatest of the values calculated from the downlink
total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per polluter number : The coverage displays areas where user is interfered by pilot signal from polluter
transmitters. A polluter transmitter is a transmitter that meets all the criteria to enter the active set but which is not
admitted due to the active set limit size..

VII.7.4 UMTS PREDICTION STUDIES
VII.7.4.a ANALYSING PILOT RECEPTION (UMTS)
This study displays areas where there is at least one transmitter which pilot quality at receiver (Ec/Io) is sufficient to be
admitted in the probe mobile active set [using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)]. Only
the pilot quality from best server is displayed.


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Pilot reception analysis (Ec/Io) option from
the study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional
Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or all), a service (or all),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


306/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VII.7.4.b STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT) DOWNLINK (UMTS)
This study displays areas where there is one transmitter (or several transmitters in macro-diversity) which traffic channel
quality at the receiver (Eb/Nt or combined Eb/Nt) is sufficient for the probe mobile to obtain a service [using the
propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)]. Downlink service area is limited by maximum
allowable traffic channel power.

Comment : Actually, for a circuit switched service, when there are several transmitters in active set, Eb/Nt from different
transmitters are combined in terminal and improve reception with a macro-diversity gain.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Service area (Eb/Nt) downlink option from the
study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional
Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or all), a service (or all),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 307/476


When choosing Max Eb/Nt, A9155 calculates the maximum downlink traffic channel quality you can get at terminal or
transmitter; it displays the areas where the downlink traffic channel quality calculated by considering the maximum
allowed traffic channel power of each transmitter in receiver active set, is higher than the user-defined thresholds.

The Effective Eb/Nt display is also offered. Here, A9155 considers required traffic channel quality instead of maximum
traffic channel quality; it colours bins of the map where the required DL traffic channel quality is higher than the user-
defined thresholds.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VII.7.4.c STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT) UPLINK (UMTS)
This study displays areas where the traffic channel quality of probe mobile at transmitter (Eb/Nt) is sufficient for the
transmitter to get a service [using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)]. Uplink service
area is limited by maximum terminal power.

Comment : The macro diversity concept is also dealt with on the uplink. Its value depends on the handover status.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Service area (Eb/Nt) uplink option from the
study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional
Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or all), a service (or all),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


308/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

When choosing Max Eb/Nt, A9155 calculates the maximum uplink traffic channel quality you can get at terminal or
transmitter; it displays the areas where the uplink traffic channel quality calculated by considering the maximum terminal
power, is higher than the user-defined thresholds.

The Effective Eb/Nt display is offered. Here, A9155 considers required traffic channel quality instead of maximum traffic
channel quality; it colours bins of the map where the required UL traffic channel quality is higher than the user-defined
thresholds.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VII.7.4.d STUDYING EFFECTIVE SERVICE AREA (UMTS)
Effective service area is the intersection zone between uplink and downlink service areas [using the propagation model
as defined before (with priority order respect)]. It is the area where a service is really available for the probe mobile.


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Effective service area option from the study
types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab
is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or all), a service (or all),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 309/476



Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VII.7.4.e DEFINING HANDOFF STATUS (UMTS)
This study displays areas [using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)] where the selected
service is available and where probe mobile has in its active set:
Only one transmitter : no handover (1/1)
Two non co-site transmitters : soft handover (2/2)
Two co-site transmitters : softer handover (1/2)
Three non co-site transmitters : soft-soft handover (3/3)
Three transmitters among them two co-site : softer-soft handover (merged with soft-softer handover) (2/3)
Three co-site transmitters : softer-softer handover (1/3)

Comment : In parenthesis is given equivalence between usual handover name and HO status notation sometimes used
in A9155, referring to number of sites/number of transmitters in the active set (See UMTS Simulations : Overview).

Caution : Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network.

In this study, handover is allowed on areas where the service chosen by the user is available.

For each study, a simulation tab enables to connect to one or all simulations. Furthermore, you can choose different
ways of displaying the same coverage to get a better analysis and dimensioning information on the network.


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the handover status option from the study types
window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab is
created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


310/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or all), a service (or all),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VII.7.4.f STUDYING DOWNLINK TOTAL NOISE (UMTS)
This study enables you to display areas where the total noise (Nt as it is defined in formulas) exceeds user-defined levels
[using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)].


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Downlink total noise option from the study
types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab
is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 311/476


The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or all), a service (or all),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Note : In case of given service and carrier, the calculated and displayed coverage is the same for any selected display
per noise level (average, minimum or maximum) or any display per noise rise (average, minimum or maximum).

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VII.7.4.g CALCULATING PILOT POLLUTION (UMTS)
This study displays the areas where user is interfered by pilot signal from polluter transmitters [using the propagation
model as defined before (with priority order respect)]. A polluter transmitter is a transmitter that meets all the criteria to
enter the active set but which is not admitted due to the active set limit size.


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Pilot pollution option from the study types
window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab is
created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


312/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or all), a service (or all),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Representation on map may are given regarding to the number of polluters. Each layer may be displayed independently
by selecting visibility flag in folder.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

VII.7.4.h ANALYSING A SCENARIO AT A POINT IN UMTS PROJECTS
To get reception information for a given point on the map, you may use A9155 point analysis window. Even in UMTS
projects, you may use the Profile, Reception and Results tab windows as for the other projects, on the signal received
from the cell pilot.

Concerning pilot quality given by (Ec/Io) (which is the main parameter to enter an active set) and connection status, with
the point analysis tool, A9155 is able to get information about the active set analysis of a UMTS scenario (for given
mobile, mobility and service) at the by using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect).

To make active the AS analysis window :
From the menupoint defined by the receiver on the map bar, check the Point analysis command in the View
menu,
The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment,
Left click on the AS analysis tab,
Click the from the toolbar,
Move over the current map to the places where you want to make your analysis.

Note : The Point analysis window is automatically displayed when clicking on the button from the toolbar,

Point analysis is a radio reception diagnosis provided for:
a given simulation (determining network parameters)
a user-definable probe receiver terminal, a mobility and a service

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 313/476


Pilot quality and connection status (Pilot, Uplink, Downlink) are displayed for previous conditions and without taking into
account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the receiver conditions can
check the point analysis diagnosis, simply because simulated network may be saturated.




















Bar graph shows pilot reception from all transmitters on the same carrier (with same colours as defined for each
transmitter), displaying limit values required to be in active set (Ec/Io threshold, (Ec/Io)best server-A-S threshold). Grey
background displays transmitters in active set.

You may modify receiver characteristics, A9155 will automatically check pilot quality and channel availability:
If you change terminal, it will modify maximum available transmitting power in uplink and the active set size.
If you change mobility, it will modify pilot quality thresholds and Eb/Nt target per service in downlink.
If you change service, it will modify the active set size and Eb/Nt target in downlink.

VII.8 WCDMA/UMTS RESOURCES ALLOCATION
VII.8.1 WCDMA/UMTS RESOURCES ALLOCATION : OVERVIEW
Once your UMTS network is built, A9155 provides you with some additional features in order to complete your network
planning by the allocation of neighbour cells and primary scrambling codes.

Like in GSM/GPRS/EDGE or CDMA/CDMA2000, it is possible to easily allocate neighbours within A9155. This can be
made either manually, or automatically, imposing several constraints on the potential cells that could be part of a
neighbourhood. Then, once allocated, neighbours can be easily managed (modification or deletion). Finally, A9155
makes easy the visualisation of neighbourhoods on the active map.

Downlink scrambling codes permit to separate cells from others. It is strongly recommended to assign different codes to
a given cell and to cells belonging to its neighbour list. Some additional separation constraints can be also defined. In
A9155, you can either allocate it manually for each cell or automatically for all cells or a group of cells in the network.
Depending on the allocation strategy, several constraints can be imposed on scrambling code groups and domains,
exceptional pairs, distance and neighbours. At any moment, it is possible to check the consistency of the current
scrambling code allocation in the studied network.

Displays the pilot reception of
transmitters out of the active set for
this scenario. Filled bars indicate the
transmitters which respect the
active set constraints. Even if more
transmitters respect the constraints,
the active set size is limited to the
number defined in the terminal
properties and is function of the
current service. Transmitters with
empty bars do not respect the active
set constraints
Displays the pilot reception in term of
active set components for this
scenario. Active set is represented in
grey. Filled bars indicate the
transmitters which respect the
active set constraints. Even if more
transmitters respect the constraints,
the active set size is limited to the
number defined in the terminal
properties and is function of the
current service
Vertical bar representing the lower boundary
to enter the active set (defined as the signal
value of the best server at the current point
minus the AS_Threshold - defined in the Global
properties from the transmitters folder)
Vertical bar representing
the Ec/Io threshold to
enter the active set
(defined in the mobility
type properties page)
Displays the connection
status (pilot, uplink and
downlink traffic) for the
current scenario.
: successful connection,
: failed connection
Choose from the scrolling list
the single simulation you
want this point analysis to
be based on
Choose from the scrolling
lists the parameters of a
probe user to be studied
among the selected
simulation
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


314/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VII.8.2 UMTS NEIGHBOURS
VII.8.2.a ALLOCATING UMTS CELL NEIGHBOURS MANUALLY
Cell neighbours list represents a way to optimise the search for possible cells aimed to perform handover from the
current coverage area. Allocating neighbours in a network is optional but makes the handover process easier. Defining
neighbours helps in the determination of appropriate scrambling codes.

Note : Neighbours have no impact on interference calculations : all cells in a network interfere with the others.
Neighbours of any linked project in co-planning can also be displayed and chosen manually.


Manual allocation of UMTS neighbours must be performed for each cell, one at a time. To do this, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Either,
Choose the [Cells:Open] command from the open menu
Once the cells table is open,
Either
Right click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Choose the record properties option from the context menu (or from the Records menu from
the menu bar),
Or
Double click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
Use the What's this help to get information about fields available in the current window,
In the displayed window, in the top table, click on cell to choose from the scrolling box the desired
cell as a neighbour for the current one. In the scrolling box are displayed all the transmitters located
within a radius of 30 km around the reference transmitter (cell),
Click either another table cell, or the button to validate and add a new line to the
table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Or
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the open menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, click on a table cell to determine either base cells or associated neighbours in
the network,
Click another table cell to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.

Notes :
You can also use manual allocation tools to check currently allocated neighbourhoods,
This feature only deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.

An automatic allocation tool is also available.

VII.8.2.b ALLOCATING UMTS CELL NEIGHBOURS AUTOMATICALLY
You can carry out neighbour allocation globally on all the cells or only on a group of cells. In this case, A9155 will
consider all the cells contained in the group of transmitters, the symmetric neighbours of these cells and all the other
ones, which have an intersection area with the cells of the group.

Allocating automatically permits to allocate neighbours globally in the current network by imposing constraints on cells of
active transmitters that must be satisfied. Force neighbour reciprocity, adjacency and within co-site is possible.


To allocate automatically UMTS neighbours in a network, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Automatic allocation...] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters for the current Auto Neighbours allocation study,
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 315/476



You can force neighbour adjacency. Therefore, when selecting the Force adjacent cells as neighbours option, adjacent
cells are top ranked in the neighbour list just after co-site cells. If there is not enough space in neighbour list, A9155
displays a warning in the Events viewer indicating that the adjacent cell constraint cannot be respected.

Click the button to start calculations,
Once calculations are achieved, click the button to attribute neighbours to transmitters as
displayed in the current table,

When clicking on the Commit button, A9155 assigns neighbours to cells. Neighbours are listed in the Neighbours tab of
each cell Properties window.

In the Results part, A9155 lists all the cells fulfilling the specified neighbourhood criteria. Then, it orders them so as to
eliminate some of them from the list if the maximum number of neighbours is exceeded. If transmitters have a current
allocation, they are noted existing.

When selecting the Reset option, A9155 deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour allocation. If
not selected, the existing neighbours are kept. Therefore, if you add a new cell i and start a new allocation without
selecting the Reset option:
A9155 determines the neighbour list of the cell i,
It examines the neighbour list of other cells. If there is space in neighbour list of another cell j:
- The cell i enters the cell j neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. The cell i will be the first one in the
neighbour list.
- The cell i does not enter the cell j neighbour list if allocation criteria are not satisfied.
If the cell j belongs to the cell i neighbour list and the force symmetry option is selected:
- The cell i will enter the cell j neighbour list if there is space in the cell j neighbour list.
- If the cell j neighbour list is full, A9155 removes the cell j from the cell i neighbour list in order to preserve the
link symmetry

Click the Close button to achieve the procedure.


Notes :
This feature only deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.
No prediction study is needed to perform the automatic neighbour allocation. When starting an automatic neighbour
allocation, A9155 automatically calculates the path loss matrices if it does not find them.

VII.8.2.c DISPLAYING CURRENT UMTS NEIGHBOUR LIST
A9155 provides the possibility to open an editable table referencing all the UMTS neighbours of the current network.

To access the UMTS neighbour table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the open menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, left column lists reference cells, right column, the related neighbours.

This table can be used to allocate neighbours manually.
VII.8.2.d DELETING ALLOCATED UMTS NEIGHBOURS
To do this, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Either,
Choose the [Cells:Open] command from the open menu
Once the cells table is open,
Either
Right click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Choose the record properties option from the context menu (or from the Records menu from
the menu bar),
Or
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


316/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Double click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
or
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the open menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, select the desired neighbour line,
Press the keyboard Del (or Suppr.) key
Click on OK to validate and close the dialog box.


Note : this can also be made for external neighbours from a linked project in co-planning.

VII.8.2.e DISPLAYING UMTS NEIGHBOURS ON THE MAP
Once the UMTS cell neighbours have been allocated, you can display a given neighbourhood (at the transmitter level) on
the map.

To display the neighbours of any transmitter (whatever the carrier is), proceed as follows :
Click on the visible neighbourhood icon from the toolbar,
Left click on the desired transmitter to select it on the map,
The neighbours are displayed (colour of the reference transmitter) on the map such as :



for the transmitter Site4_0 located on Site 4


Note : This feature only deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.
VII.8.3 SCRAMBLING CODES
VII.8.3.a SCRAMBLING CODES : OVERVIEW
512 scrambling codes are available. They are distributed in 64 clusters of 8 scrambling codes. Clusters are numbered
from 0 to 63. Scrambling codes are numbered from 0 to 511.

Available scrambling codes depend on the country and on the area; it is necessary to distinguish borders from other
zones. To model this, domain and group tables have been created.
A domain corresponds to a border or a zone of the country.
A group is a set of clusters.
Each group must be associated to one or several domains. Therefore, a domain consists of several groups.

Firstly, scrambling codes can be manually assigned to any cell of a UMTS network. Then, using the definition of groups
and domains, and imposing some constraints on them and on neighbours, second neighbours, minimum distance and
exceptional pairs, we can choose a strategy (clustered or distributed) in order to start the automatic tool.
C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 317/476



Once allocation is completed, a consistency checking tool is available.

VII.8.3.b CREATING SCRAMBLING CODE DOMAINS AND GROUPS
512 scrambling codes are available. They are distributed in 64 clusters of 8 scrambling codes. Clusters are numbered
from 0 to 63. Scrambling codes are now numbered from 0 to 511.

To define domains and groups of scrambling codes, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Primary scrambling codes: Domains] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Domains dialog, you can enter a domain per line. To validate a domain creation, select another line.
Either
Select a domain in the table and click on the Properties button.
Or
Select the line relating to a domain and double click on it.
In the domain properties dialog, specify the name of group(s) that you want to associate to this domain and
define for each of them:
- The lowest available primary scrambling code (Min),
- The highest available primary scrambling code (Max),
- The value interval between the primary scrambling codes (Step),
- The scrambling code(s) you do not want to use (Excluded). You can paste a list of codes; separator
must be a blank character,
- Additional scrambling code(s) you want to consider during allocation (Extra). You can paste a list of
codes; separator must be a blank character,

You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of primary scrambling codes window.

To do so, proceed as follows :
After defining all the domains, close the Domains dialog,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Primary scrambling codes: Groups] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Group of primary scrambling codes window, select a domain and associate one or several groups of
scrambling codes to each of them. Define the groups as explained above.


The defined domains can be now assigned to cells in order then to be used as constraints in the automatic allocation of
scrambling codes.

VII.8.3.c ASSIGNING A SCRAMBLING CODE DOMAIN TO A CELL
After having defined domains and groups, you can assign a domain to each cell. Therefore, A9155 will choose primary
scrambling codes of the associated domain during allocation.

To assign a domain to cells, you must access cell properties and fill the appropriate field. This can be made either from :
The transmitter property dialog (Cells tab),
The cell property dialog,
The cell table.

The domain association will then be used by the automatic allocation tool.
VII.8.3.d ALLOCATING SCRAMBLING CODES TO UMTS CELLS MANUALLY
A9155 allows you to manually force scrambling codes for cells of your network. Hence, these can be locked in order to
be kept unchanged by the automatic tool.

To give a primary scrambling code to a cell, you must access cell properties. This can be made either from :
The transmitter property dialog (Cells tab),
The cell property dialog,
The cell table.
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


318/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01




After allocation is completed (manually or automatically), constraints can be also checked also by an automatic tool.

VII.8.3.e DEFINING EXCEPTIONAL PAIRS FOR SCRAMBLING CODE ALLOCATION
In addition to standard constraints (reuse distance, neighbours and domains), it is possible to specify pairs of cells, which
cannot have the same primary scrambling code. You can enter these forbidden pairs in the Exceptional separation
constraints table.

To access the Exceptional pairs table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Primary scrambling codes: Exceptional pairs] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Exceptional separation constraints dialog, indicate the pairs of cells.


Standard features for managing table content (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter, Sort, Fields)
are available in context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and Records menus.

VII.8.3.f ALLOCATING SCRAMBLING CODES TO UMTS CELLS AUTOMATICALLY
You can carry out scrambling code allocation on all the cells or only on a group of cells. In this case, A9155 will consider
all the cells defined in the group of transmitters.

Scrambling code allocation is based on:
Neighbourhood and secondary neighbourhood if neighbour allocation has been performed beforehand,
Reuse distance,
Domains of scrambling codes,
Forbidden pairs.

Scrambling code automatic allocation can also be made on a specific carrier or on all. A9155 assigns scrambling codes
to transmitters using the selected carrier.


To automatically allocate primary scrambling codes to all the cells, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Primary scrambling codes: Automatic allocation] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,

In this dialog, you can impose to the algorithm to take into account :
The existing neighbours listed in the Neighbours table (option Existing neighbours) : A cell and its neighbours
cannot have the same scrambling code. The neighbours of the cell cannot have the same scrambling code.

The neighbours of listed neighbours (option Second neighbours) : A cell and the neighbours of its neighbours
cannot have the same scrambling code. In addition, all the neighbours (first neighbours and second neighbours)
cannot have the same scrambling code.

Note : A9155 automatically selects the option Existing neighbours when choosing the option Second neighbours.

A criterion on Ec/Io (option Additional Ec/Io conditions) : All the cells fulfilling Ec/Io condition will not have the same
scrambling code.

When this option is selected, you must specify a minimum threshold (minimum Ec/Io), a margin (Ec/Io margin) and a
reliability level. In this case, for a reference cell A, A9155 considers all the cells B that can enter active-set on the area
where the reference cell is the best server (area where (Ec/Io)A exceeds the minimum Ec/Io and is the highest one and
(Ec/Io)B is within a Ec/Io margin of (Ec/Io)A).

Note : A9155 takes into account the total downlink power used by the cell in order to evaluate Io. Io equals the sum of
total transmitted powers. In case this parameter is not specified in the cell properties, A9155 uses 50% of the maximum
power.

C H A P T E R 7


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 319/476


A reuse distance : radius within which two cells on the same carrier cannot have the same primary scrambling code

An allocation strategy. Two allocation strategies are now offered:
Clustered allocation: The purpose of this strategy is to choose scrambling codes among a minimum
number of clusters. A9155 will preferentially allocate all the codes from same cluster.
Distributed allocation: This strategy consists in using as many clusters as possible. A9155 will preferentially
allocate codes from different clusters.

Select one carrier or all on which you want to run the allocation,
Select the Reset all codes option to delete the existing codes and carry out a new scrambling code
allocation. If not selected, existing codes are kept.
Click on Run to start the automatic allocation; A9155 displays the automatic allocation results in the Results
part,
Then, click on Commit to assign primary scrambling codes to cells.


To automatically allocate primary scrambling codes to a group of cells, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the group of transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Primary scrambling codes: Automatic allocation] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Select calculation options (as defined above) in the dialog,
Click on Run to start the automatic allocation; A9155 displays the automatic allocation results in the Results
part,
Then, click on Commit to assign primary scrambling codes to the group of cells.

Note : A9155 will take into account both real distance and the azimuths of antennas to calculate the inter-transmitter
distance to be compared with the reuse distance.
VII.8.3.g SCRAMBLING CODE ALLOCATION PROCESS
Algorithm works as follows:
A9155 assigns different primary scrambling codes to a given cell i and to its neighbours,
For a cell j which is not neighbour of the cell i, A9155 gives it a different code:
- If the distance between both cells is lower than the reuse distance,
- If the cell i -cell j pair is forbidden.
When the Second neighbours option is checked, a cell and the neighbours of its neighbours cannot have the same
scrambling code. In addition, all the neighbours (first neighbours and second neighbours) cannot have the same
scrambling code.

A9155 allocates scrambling codes starting with the most constrained cell and ending with the lowest constrained one.
The cell constraint level depends on its number of neighbours and whether the cell is neighbour of other cells. Here, the
neighbour term includes both manually specified or automatically allocated neighbours and cells, which are within the
reuse distance of a studied cell. When cells have the same constraint level, cell processing is based on order of
transmitters in the Transmitters folder.

Note : In order to calculate the effective inter-transmitter distance (which will be compared to the reuse distance), A9155
takes into account both real distance and azimuths of antennas. For further information, please, refer to Technical
reference guide.

The scrambling code choice depends on domains associated to cells and on the selected allocation strategy. When no
domain is assigned to cells, A9155 uses the 512 primary scrambling codes. Several scenarios are detailed hereafter:

Let us consider 10 scrambling codes to be allocated.

1
st
case: We assume that any domain is assigned to cells. Here, A9155 will be able to use the 512 primary
scrambling codes.

If selected the Clustered option, A9155 will choose eight codes in the cluster 0 and two codes in the cluster 1. Therefore,
the allocated scrambling codes will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.
If you check the Distributed option, A9155 will take the first code of clusters 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. So, it will assign the
codes 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64 and 72.


2
nd
case: We assume that the domain 1 is associated to cells. Domain 1 contains two groups, the group 1 consisted
of cluster 0 (available codes: 0 to 7) and the group 2 including clusters 2 and 3 (available codes: 16 to 31).
WCDMA/UMTS Projects management


320/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



If selected the Clustered option, A9155 will choose eight codes in the group 1 and two other ones in the group 2 (the first
two codes of the cluster 2). So, allocation result will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 16, 17.
If you check the Distributed option, A9155 will select the first code of the group 1 (cluster 0), the first code of the cluster 2
(group 2), the first code of the cluster 3 (group 2), the second code of the group 1 (cluster 0), the second code of the
cluster 2 (group 2), the second code of the cluster 3 (group 2) and so on. Result of allocation will be 0, 16, 24, 1, 17,
25, 2, 18, 26, 3.


3
rd
case: We assume that the domain 1 is associated to cells. Domain 1 contains one group, the group 1 consisted of
cluster 1 (available codes: 8 to 15). As there are not enough scrambling codes available in the group 1, A9155 does
not allocate any scrambling code and displays an error message Primary scrambling code allocation failed.

VII.8.3.h CHECKING THE CONSISTENCY OF THE SCRAMBLING CODE ASSIGNMENTS
A checking algorithm is available. It enables you to examine if there are some inconsistencies after having manually
performed some changes.

To use the checking algorithm, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Primary scrambling codes: Check consistency] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Scrambling code checking window, select the allocation criteria that you want to check:
- Neighbourhood: checking is carried out on the neighbour cells (listed in the Neighbour tab); they
must not have the same scrambling codes,
- Second order neighbours. A9155 checks that :
- A cell and the neighbours of its neighbours do not have the same scrambling code,
- All the neighbours (first neighbours and second neighbours) do not have the same
scrambling code.
- Exceptional pairs: checking is performed on the forbidden pairs of cells; they must not have the same
scrambling codes,
- Reuse distance: checking concerns cells which inter-transmitter distance is lower than the reuse
distance you can define; they must not have the same scrambling codes,
- Domains: A9155 checks if the allocated scrambling codes belong to the domain assigned to the
cells.
Click on OK to start the checking algorithm.


A9155 details the checking results in a report. This report is a text file called CodeCheck.txt; it is stored in the temporary
folder on your workstation. For each selected criterion, A9155 gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details
each of them.

For criteria 1, 2, 3 and 4, it displays the name of cells and the common scrambling code. In case of criterion 5, it lists the
name of cells, which do not satisfy the criterion, the associated domains and the allocated scrambling codes.



C H A P T E R 8

























CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects Management
8
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


322/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 323/476


VIII CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
VIII.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS : OVERVIEW
1xRTT (1st eXpansion Radio Telephone Technology) and IS95 (Interim Standard 95) are radio technologies using
CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) principles. UMTS is based on Wideband CDMA air interface whereas
CDMA/CDMA2000 , like IS95, on Narrowband CDMA. CDMA/CDMA2000 is available in A9155 with the optional UMTS
module.

In CDMA/CDMA2000, everybody works at the same frequency, signals are spread over a band of 1.2288 MHz (on each
carrier) and distinguished by the use of OVSF codes. Nevertheless, this induces potentially high levels of noise which
can be defeated by sophisticated power controls on uplink (from terminals) and on downlink (from transmitters) traffic
channels.

Because of power control, there is not a single solution to model a CDMA network, and results totally depend totally on
network parameters such as traffic and user behaviours. Hence, these parameters have to be modelled before starting
calculations via user distributions. Simulation results provide a snapshot of the CDMA network at a certain time.

In order to simulate user distributions and associated behaviours, some parameters have to be tuned. These are
services, radio configurations, user profiles and environment types. Each of these is easy to manage like any other
folder-like objects within A9155. All these parameters go together with traffic maps, based on environments, on user
profiles (with no required definition for environment parameters) or on Transmitters and Services (in term of rates or
number of users - with required of definition for environment and user profile parameters).

CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations power control and specific CDMA coverage predictions need the definition of the previous
parameters. Classical coverage predictions are also available to study cell pilots. The point analysis tool allows a specific
analysis of any active set at a given point on the map, for a particular scenario (service and radio configuration of a probe
user which the current status is provided by network simulation results).

Geo data are easily manageable like for other projects. You may either create or import geographic objects. Sites,
antennas, station templates, transmitters, measurements, and propagation models work in the same way for
CDMA/CDMA2000 and the other technology projects. Nevertheless, due to an enhanced resource management to
consider at site level, site equipment and resource management per service have been introduced. Furthermore, since
CDMA support several carrier networks, a new item characterising each carrier per transmitter has been introduced :
CDMA cells. Hence, many properties are defined at the cell level (e.g. powers).

Like for the other types of technology, neighbours may be manually defined by the user or with the help of the neighbour
automatic allocation tool, but at the cell level.


The What's this context tool allows the user to understand the specific CDMA fields and features available in dialog
boxes.

VIII.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 SPECIFIC CONCEPTS
In a CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) network, a code is allocated to each link transmitter-terminal. This code
allows the terminal to identify the useful signal spread over the whole bandwidth as mobiles use the same frequency
band simultaneously. Consequently, each mobile is indirectly interfered by all the others. It is thus essential for IS95 or
CDMA/CDMA2000 to perform reliable power control especially on the uplink, in order to limit network interference level.

To achieve power control simulation and coverage calculation, CDMA planning requires traffic snapshots unlike GSM
planning, which only needs traffic data when dimensioning a network for a certain grade of service.

CDMA coverage directly depends on offered traffic : the more the traffic is, the smaller the coverage zones are. This
phenomenon is called cell breathing. As Traffic is dynamic, coverage calculation is necessarily statistical.

A9155 achieves coverage predictions in two steps :
First, it simulates power control for realistic user distributions to obtain network parameters and interference level
(simulation part).
Then, it generates bin-based coverage probability predictions (prediction part).

See CDMA projects protocol

CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


324/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



A9155 enables or CDMA/CDMA2000 network planning, 2 (2,5G) network based on Narrowband Code Division Multiple
Access technique (N-CDMA) and multi-service management. These major CDMA concepts and new technologies
require new network and data modelling, with appropriate needs for traffic modelling. A wide range of different
CDMA/CDMA2000 services available to consumers, generates a more complex traffic than standard voice
transmissions. Appropriate traffic data model and relevant localisation on a map, i.e. traffic cartography represents a
major input for CDMA/CDMA2000 planning. Specific CDMA objects are available when creating a new project with
A9155. The CDMA projects are designed to provide specific CDMA radio and traffic data structures, CDMA simulations
and predictions folders.

CDMA and CDMA2000 technologies are available in A9155 only if the optional UMTS module is installed.

VIII.3 CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS PROTOCOL
A classical CDMA/CDMA2000 project protocol, within A9155, is described below :

Network design : Setting radio data

Pilot studies based only on signal reception

Traffic input
Traffic description : activity probabilities
Traffic map design : number of subscribers or users (depending on the type of map)

Simulations (Evaluation of interference level)
Realistic user distribution generation
Power control simulation

CDMA/CDMA2000 oriented prediction studies
Point predictions
Coverage predictions

Network optimisation
Neighbour allocation
PN Offset allocation
Allocating_PN_offsets_to_CDMA_CDMA2000_c

VIII.4 MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 RADIO DATA
VIII.4.1 MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 RADIO DATA : OVERVIEW
Due to their complexity, CDMA networks, in A9155 have been modelled by the introduction of specific radio items.

Firstly, due to the fact that the number of channel elements is limited by site, these are set from the Site folder. Hence, in
A9155, you can model several pieces of equipment with different radio resource management parameters and describe
channel element consumption for each equipment type/service couple. Then, you can assign a piece of equipment to
each site.

Some features have been introduced in order to adjust the global specific parameters of CDMA/CDMA2000 networks.

CDMA supports multi-carrier networks, i.e. a transmitter can work on several carriers on the same time, each carrier
being set with different properties. Hence, to take it into account, a new level has been introduced in order to simulate the
carrier level on each transmitters : CDMA cells. Like many other objects in A9155, these are easily manageable and
provide several tools in order to make their use easy.

C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 325/476


VIII.4.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE EQUIPMENT
VIII.4.2.a CREATING CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE EQUIPMENT
In CDMA/CDMA2000, site equipment allows the user to define some equipment related to channel elements and some
other specific CDMA parameters and calculation options (MUD factor, Rake efficiency factor, Carrier selection, Overhead
CEs, AS restricted to neighbours) .

To create a CDMA/CDMA2000 site equipment, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Equipment : Open] command from the open scrolling menu,
In the Equipment window, describe a piece of equipment per line. Type its name, the manufacturer name
and define:

MUD factor
Multi-User Detection is a technology used to decrease intra-cellular interference on uplink. MUD is modelled by a
coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation. In case MUD is not supported by
equipment, enter 0 as value.

Rake receiver efficiency factor
This factor enables A9155 to model macro-diversity on uplink. A9155 uses it to calculate the uplink macro-diversity gains
and uplink signal quality in simulations, point-to-point analysis and coverage studies. This parameter is considered on
uplink for softer and softer-softer handovers; it is applied to the sum of signals received on the same site. The factor
value can be between 0 and 1. It models losses due to the signal recombination imperfection.

Carrier selection
It refers to carrier selection mode used during the transmitter admission control in mobile active set. Three methods are
available:
- UL min noise: The least loaded carrier (carrier with the lowest UL load factor) is selected,
- DL min power: The carrier with lowest used total DL power is selected,
- Random: The carrier is randomly chosen.

Overhead CEs uplink and downlink: number of channel elements that a cell uses for common channels on uplink and
downlink.

AS restricted to neighbours
This option is used to manage mobile active set. If you select this option, the other transmitters in active set must belong
to the neighbour list of the best server.

Click on to close the table.


Note : Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in downlink has to be set in terminal radio configurations.

VIII.4.2.b MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE EQUIPMENT
Site equipment are listed in a table in A9155. So, as many other objects, they are easy to manage both in term of
contents or handy tools.

To access to the CDMA/CDMA2000 site equipment table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Equipment : Open] command from the open scrolling menu,
The table displays each piece of equipment in each line.
Click on to close the table.


Notes :
Standard features for managing table content (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter, Sort,
Fields) are available in context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and
Records menus.
Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in downlink has to be set in terminal radio configurations.

CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


326/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VIII.4.2.c MANAGING CHANNEL ELEMENT CONSUMPTION PER CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE EQUIPMENT
UL and DL channel elements are independently dealt with in power control simulation. Furthermore, the number of
channel element required by a site depends on site equipment, user service and link direction (up or down).


To describe channel element consumption during CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Equipment : Channel Element consumption] command from the open scrolling menu,
In the CE consumption window, enter for each equipment-terminal(RC) pair the number of UL and DL
channel elements that A9155 will consume during power control simulation,
Click on to close the table.

VIII.4.2.d ASSIGNING CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE EQUIPMENT TO SITES
Once equipment related to channel element are defined, it is possible to assign a piece of equipment to each site.

To assign a piece of equipment to a site proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the Sites folder by clicking on the button in front of it
Right click on the site you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the site you want to manage by right clicking on it ( ),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Equipment tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.
Enter the maximum number of uplink and downlink channel elements available for the site; then, click on
the Equipment scrolling menu and choose a piece of equipment in the list,
Click on OK to validate.


Notes :
In case you have defined neither equipment nor channel element consumption, A9155 considers the following default
values, Rake efficiency factor = 1, MUD factor = 0, Carrier selection = UL minimum noise, Overhead CEs downlink
and uplink = 0, AS restricted to neighbours option not selected, and uses one channel element per link (up or down)
for any service, during power control simulation.
Equipment can be also assigned by accessing site table.

VIII.4.3 TRANSMITTER CDMA/CDMA2000 SPECIFIC PARAMETERS
VIII.4.3.a SETTING THE TRANSMITTER CDMA/CDMA2000 GLOBAL PARAMETERS
In A9155, some parameters which are globally related to the CDMA technology can be accessed easily and applied to all
the items of a network; these are called global parameters.

Some of them are used as global values, other as default values. All of these are essential in CDMA/CDMA2000 power
control simulations.

To access the global parameters of a CDMA/CDMA2000 network, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Global parameters tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window,
Click OK to close the dialog.

C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 327/476


VIII.4.4 CDMA/CDMA2000 CELLS
VIII.4.4.a CDMA/CDMA2000 CELLS : DEFINITION
Because A9155 supports multi-carriers networks, and also since it is possible to define some rules about carrier
selection for a mobile when creating its active set, a new level has been introduced, the cell level. A cell defines a carrier
on a transmitter. Data of interest like transmission powers (Pilot, Synchronisation, Paging, Maximum power), total power,
UL load percentage, PN Offsets, or active set thresholds are defined at the cell level. Hence, neighbours are also defined
at the cell level.

The number of cells per transmitter is limited by the number of carriers available for a network as defined in the global
parameter dialog. Cells can be listed either by transmitter, in a specific dialog, or in a table, as other radio data (sites and
transmitters). So, here again, the management of cells remains easy and comfortable.
VIII.4.4.b CREATING A CDMA/CDMA2000 CELL
The cell concept is fully supported in A9155. Cell is characterised by the transmitter-carrier couple. Therefore, you can
define several cells per transmitter (as many cells as carriers associated to transmitter).

To define CDMA/CDMA2000 transmitter cells, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Cells : Open] command from the open scrolling menu,

The Cells table contains all the identifiers of a cell, its name, transmitter and carrier which the cell refers to, cell PN
Offset, PN Offset domain to which the allocated PN Offset belongs, all the values defining transmitted signal level, pilot
power, synchronisation power, paging power, maximum power, total power used, information about the cell uplink load
and an active set management parameter, AS threshold.

Click on to close the table.


Notes :
Cells are automatically created and described in the table when you drag and drop a station. On the other hand, you
must define them manually after adding a new transmitter (New command when right clicking on the Transmitters
folder) or copying a list of transmitters in the Transmitters table.
Cell default name is: Transmitter name(carrier). If you change transmitter name or carrier, A9155 does not update the
cell name.
You cannot create two cells related to the same transmitter-carrier couple.
VIII.4.4.c MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 CELL PROPERTIES
In CDMA/CDMA2000, cells are defined per transmitter. Nevertheless, their associated properties can be reached by
several ways. Like many other objects (Sites, Transmitters, Antennas, Predictions, Simulations, measurements, etc...)
within A9155, cells can be managed either individually (per transmitter or in a single dialog) or globally.

Global properties management
In A9155, you may manage globally the cell properties your network by accessing the cell table :
To do so, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Cells : Open] command from the open scrolling menu,
Click on to close the table.


Individual property management
There are two ways to edit cell properties of each transmitter in the current network.
To do so,
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter which cell properties you want to access,
or
Select on the map the transmitter which cell properties you want to access by left clicking on the
appropriate Tx symbol (arrow),
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


328/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Cell tab from the open dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.


It is also possible to open a single dialog for each cell. To do so, proceed as follows :
Open the cell table (see above)
Either
Double click the record which property dialog you want to open,
Or
Right click on the record which property dialog you want to open to get its associated context menu,
Select the Record Properties command from the open scrolling menu (or the Record Properties
command from the Records menu),
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.


Notes :
Cell Properties dialog consists of three tabs: cell characteristics entered in the cells table are grouped in the General
and Transmission/Reception tabs, Internal and external neighbours may be allocated to the cell in the Neighbours
tab.
It is possible to define additional fields in the cell table by using the Fields command in its related context menu (or
from the Records menu). If it is the case, this new field will then be available in the Other properties tab of any cell
property dialog.
VIII.4.4.d POWER PARAMETERS IN CDMA/CDMA2000
Because powers can be defined differently within a same transmitter depending on carriers, these are defined at the cell
level in A9155.

To define the different powers related to CDMA/CDMA2000 technologies, access the cell properties (either from the
table or from dialogs) and fill the following fields (Transmission/Reception tab) :
Max power
Pilot power
Synchronisation power
Paging power

The total power used and UL load used in specific CDMA coverages are also defined in the cell properties. The active
set threshold (default value : 5dB) used for active set determination has also to be set there.

VIII.4.4.e ACTIVE SET PARAMETERS IN CDMA/CDMA2000
For a given terminal allowed to perform handover, the active set contains, the transmitters with which it is connected. The
main parameter to measure for transmitters potentially in the active set is the pilot quality (Ec/Io). Once the best server in
term of pilot quality is defined, other transmitters are selected such as their pilot quality has to be greater than a T-Drop
value defined in the mobility (radio configuration) part.

To define the T-Drop, access the properties of each mobility type (either from the table or from dialogs) and fill the field
T-Drop.
VIII.5 CDMA/CDMA2000 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
VIII.5.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT : OVERVIEW
The aim of CDMA/CDMA2000 network planning in A9155 is to provide some specific coverage predictions based on
power control simulations. These simulations use the data available from the current network. In CDMA/CDMA2000
projects, the multi-service ability allows the definition of specific traffic maps. Hence, you may use maps based on either
environment types, rates or number of users per service and per transmitter, or on user profiles.

To achieve power control simulation, A9155 use the other classical geo data (clutter class maps, DTM or DEM maps),
the radio configuration (sites, antennas, transmitters, cells) and the specific CDMA/CDMA2000 parameters. These topics
are organised in folders and are easily manageable. They deal with :
services,
Radio Configurations (RC) made of mobility type and terminal folders,
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 329/476


user profiles,
environment classes.


In CDMA/CDMA2000 , Radio Configuration (RC) is an important concept; different radio configurations can be described
in the Terminals folder. The mobility concept is not considered in CDMA/CDMA2000 technology. Nevertheless, the
Mobility type folder used for UMTS traffic management will be kept in the short term. The mobility will be considered as a
radio configuration; it will allow you to enter specific quality targets for each couple (service, RC).

The main data is the user profile, which describes a type of subscriber by listing his communication behaviours:
which radio configuration(s) does he use ?
for which service(s)?
with which usage characteristics (frequency, duration)?

The services are similar to circuit-switched UMTS services because the FCH channel is always on-air. The quality levels
on pilot and traffic channels, respectively Ec/I0 and Eb/Nt, strongly depend on the radio configuration and not on the
mobility type as in A9155 UMTS project. Therefore, when creating new services, in addition to standard characteristics
(nominal rate,), you have to provide Eb/Nt in uplink and downlink for each radio configuration previously defined. The
Ec/I0 requirements for each radio configuration must be entered in the Mobility type folder.

Environments just associate a list of user profiles with a specific mobility type (RC) to a subscriber density. Environment
classes or user profiles can be used to geographically define multi-traffic areas.

Practical advice: to keep consistency with the UMTS traffic structure, respect the following rules:
Define as many mobility types as radio configurations with their respective names.
Assign each user profile to a one or several services, using the same radio configuration.
When describing each environment, specify the mobility type corresponding to the radio configuration defined for the
user profile, otherwise, simulations could use inconsistent data.


As with any Data table in A9155, these tables are automatically stored in a database if the user works with a connected
document.

A9155 powerful data management features are available on traffic tables. For example, you may group terminals by their
active set size.

A9155 manages multi-carrier networks. It allows the user to choose the way carriers are selected by transmitters.
Moreover, any specific CDMA study may deal with several carriers depending on the user or on the radio configuration of
the network.
VIII.5.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC DATA
VIII.5.2.a CDMA/CDMA2000 SERVICES
VIII.5.2.a.i Creating CDMA/CDMA2000 Services
CDMA/CDMA2000 allows the user to carry not only voice but also data for web, or video conferencing for example.
Services are divided into two categories (type field): speech and data.

A9155 provides a function to enable or disable soft handover for a given service.


To create a service, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Services folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the created service,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Notes :
In the Eb/Nt tab window, (Eb/Nt)DL and (Eb/Nt)UL targets are the thresholds (in dB) that must be achieved to provide
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


330/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


users with the service. These parameters are linked with radio configurations, and must be defined with some
potentially different multiples of nominal rate (defined in the terminal properties in RC) for the SCH rate
Service nominal rates are defined within the services for UMTS. In CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, nominal rates for
FCH are defined within the terminal (RC) properties and the SCH rates are given as multiple of this in the Eb/Nt tab.
Maximum and minimum allowed powers allowable for any type of service are defined in General tab in UMTS
whereas they are defined on FCH and SCH in the Eb/Nt tab in CDMA/CDMA2000 , for each type of radio
configuration linked with the considered service (See Data service creation for CDMA/CDMA2000)

VIII.5.2.a.ii Data service creation CDMA/CDMA2000
The fundamental channel is a continuous nominal rate channel used for voice services. For data services, the
fundamental channel and an additional temporary channel, the supplemental channel, are required. The supplemental
channel is a short duration channel with a rate equal to two, four, eight, or sixteen times the nominal data rate. The rate
of high speed data services is variable and depends on the amount of data to be sent.

The user should enter 9.6kbps or 14.4kbps (according to the RC) in the nominal rate of the service. Plus, the user needs
to define the probability that an SCH will be required or requested with a multiple of the nominal rate. The user will enter
probabilities for each possible multiple (2, 4, 8 and 16). In a real system, the sum of probabilities should be less than 1
since the SCH is needed for only a fraction of the total connection time (the probability reflects the percentage of time
that the service will need an SCH with the given multiple of nominal rate).

VIII.5.2.a.iii Setting CDMA/CDMA2000 services parameters
Similar to the other A9155 object folders, CDMA/CDMA2000 services are easily manageable. Creation steps and the
display management are standard.


To manage the services parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Services folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the service of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated context
menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the service of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current service,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any service
by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

The coding factors, which penalize UL and DL service rates, may be supplied in two ways. For each service, you may :
Either enter high UL and DL coding factors and then, set a low enough UL and DL Eb/Nt threshold so that the
advantage of high coding can be simulated (higher error correction rate means smaller bit error rate and thus a
smaller required Eb/Nt),
Or enter low UL and DL coding factors value and take into account the coding to define the required UL and DL Eb/Nt
values, i.e. a high enough Eb/Nt threshold to simulate the disadvantage of little coding.

VIII.5.2.a.iv Managing globally CDMA/CDMA2000 services
In A9155, CDMA/CDMA2000 objects are organized in folders. For this reason, A9155 allows the user to simultaneously
display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles, environment) in a table window.


To open the services table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Services folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 331/476


Or,
Double click on the Services folder,
The services table opens.


The services table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste
functions are available.

Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the Services folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the services table. Use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any service by
simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.
VIII.5.2.b CDMA/CDMA2000 RADIO CONFIGURATIONS
VIII.5.2.b.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 Radio Configuration
In CDMA/CDMA2000 , Ec/I0 requirements and Eb/Nt targets per service and per link (up and down) knowledge, contrary
to UMTS, are not dependant on mobility. In order to keep the UMTS structure, mobility type and terminals folders are
used but deal with only one concept : Radio Configurations. Due to the fact that mobility type and terminals folders deal
with same topics, consistency has to be respected by setting the same RC in both folders.


To create a CDMA/CDMA2000 Radio Configuration, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Mobility type folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the currently created mobility,
Validate the RC mobility folder part by clicking on OK,
Right click on the Terminals folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the currently created terminal,
Validate the RC terminal folder part by clicking on OK.


Parameters which are located into the mobility type folder are pilot quality (Ec/Io) thresholds (in dB). For a given mobility
type :
Ec/Io (TAdd in CDMA/CDMA2000 projects) threshold is the minimum Ec/Io required from a transmitter to enter the
active set. In A9155, this value is verified for the best server.
T-Drop is the minimum Ec/Io required from a transmitter not to be ejected from the active set. This data is important
for CDMA/CDMA2000 . In A9155, this value is verified for transmitters other than the best server.

Terminals summarise the different radio configurations that can be used in the network. Each radio configuration is
described by a minimum and maximum transmission power (dynamic range for downlink power control), its antenna gain
and reception losses, and an internal thermal noise (calculated from the noise figure). Active set size is the maximum
allowable number of transmitters in connection with the terminal (macro-diversity). This parameter is settable for FCH as
well as for SCH. The maximum active set size can reach 6. The number of fingers represents the maximum number of
active set links the terminal (rake) can combine. This criterion is considered in simulations, point analysis and coverage
prediction. The number of fingers is the same for FCH and SCH. You can also define UL and DL nominal rates i.e. the
fundamental channel (FCH) rate. Finally, you may enter a percentage of the mobile total power dedicated to the UL pilot
channel.

The UL pilot power is than taken into account to calculate the total UL interference
VIII.5.2.b.ii CDMA/CDMA2000 active set conditions
The transmitters taking part in the active set have to check the following conditions:
They must be using the same carrier (at the cell level).
The pilot quality (Ec/Io) from the best server has to exceed the Ec/Io threshold (defined for each mobility type - radio
configuration).
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


332/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


The pilot quality from other transmitters has to be greater than the T-Drop value (defined for each mobility type - radio
configuration).
Other cells have to belong to the neighbour list of the best server if you have selected the restricted to neighbours
option (in the definition of the Site equipment).

VIII.5.2.b.iii Setting a CDMA/CDMA2000 Radio Configuration
Like for the other A9155 object folders, CDMA/CDMA2000 mobility types and terminals (composing Radio Configuration)
are easily manageable. Creation steps and the display management are standard.


To manage the Radio Configuration parameters dealing with Ec/I0 requirements, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Mobility type folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the mobility of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the mobility of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current mobility,
Validate by clicking on OK.


To manage the Radio Configuration parameters dealing with terminals, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Terminals folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the terminal of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the terminal of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current terminal,
Validate by clicking on OK.

VIII.5.2.b.iv Managing globally CDMA/CDMA2000 Radio Configurations
In A9155, CDMA/CDMA2000 objects are organized in folders. For this reason, A9155 allows the user to simultaneously
display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles, environment) in a table window.

Because Radio Configurations are made of mobility type and terminal folders, Radio Configuration parameters are
spread within the two related tables

To open the Radio Configuration table dealing with Ec/I0 requirements, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Mobility types folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Mobility types folder,
The mobility types table opens.


To open the Radio Configuration table dealing with terminals, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 333/476


Right click on the Terminals folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Terminals folder,
The terminals table opens.


The mobility types and terminal tables work exactly like the other tables. Their cells are editable, sorting and filtering
tools, and copy/paste functions are available.

Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the mobility types or terminals folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the
mobility types or terminals table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different
windows.
When the Mobility type or terminals table are displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of
any mobility or terminal by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.
VIII.5.2.c CDMA/CDMA2000 USER PROFILES

VIII.5.2.c.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile
In CDMA/CDMA2000 , user profiles describe the behaviour of different user categories. Each user profile is assigned a
service and its associated usage parameters such as used terminal, session frequency (calls/hour) and duration.

Parameters for speech services are:
Average number of calls per hour
Average duration of a call in seconds
Used terminal (equipment used for the service (from the Terminals table))

Parameters for data services are:
Average number of calls per hour
Average duration of a call in seconds
Used Radio Configuration

Those parameters are used in simulation to determine the probability (activity status) that a user is transmitting or
receiving communication for the given service and terminal when the snapshot is taken.

Notes :
For speech services, entering a one-hour call during 1000s corresponds to define 2 calls per hour during 500sthe
activity probabilities will be the same in both cases.
In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic scenario elaboration, the
sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1
You can model temporal variations of user behaviour by creating different profiles for different hours (busy hour, ...).


To create a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the User profiles folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the currently created user profile,
Validate by clicking on OK.

VIII.5.2.c.ii Adjusting CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile properties
Like for the other A9155 object folders, CDMA/CDMA2000 user profiles are easily manageable. Creation steps and the
display management are standard.


To manage the user profile parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


334/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the User profiles folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the user profile of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated
context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the user profile of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters of the current user profile,
Validate by clicking on OK.

VIII.5.2.c.iii Managing globally CDMA/CDMA2000 user profiles
In A9155, CDMA/CDMA2000 objects are organized in folders. For this reason, A9155 allows the user to simultaneously
display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles, environment) in a table window.


To open the user profiles table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the User profiles folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the User profiles folder,
The user profiles table opens.


The user profiles table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste
functions are available.

Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the User profiles folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the user profiles table.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any user
type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.
VIII.5.2.d CDMA/CDMA2000 ENVIRONMENTS
VIII.5.2.d.i Creating a type of CDMA/CDMA2000 environment
Environment classes may be used to describe subscriber spatial distribution on a map; they are the available classes for
traffic cartography design. Environment class represents an economic and social concept, which defines the
characteristics of user profiles. Each environment class contains a set of three data (user profile, mobility, density) where
density is a number of subscribers with the same profile per km, and where the mobility corresponds to the radio
configuration defined in the user profile folder. There is no restriction on the number of data sets constituting an
environment.

To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each environment class.


To create a CDMA/CDMA2000 environment type, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Environments folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the currently created environment,
Validate by clicking on OK.

Particular case: When no multi-service geo-marketing data are available, you may supply A9155 with usual traffic data
like user densities per service (for example, values coming from adapted GSM Erlang maps). In this case, user profile
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 335/476


definition and calculation of deduced activity probability are not necessary to create traffic scenario ; traffic distribution
will only depend on densities per service.


Therefore, the activity probabilities calculated during simulation will be equal to 1 and density values defined in
Environments will be user densities (no more subscriber densities). Elaborated traffic scenario will fully respect the user
profile proportion (i.e. service) given in environments. You will fully master the number of users in simulation as well as
the service proportion which will drive random trials. Moreover, each user will be connected.

This method is not the usual nominal working mode for A9155.

VIII.5.2.d.ii Setting CDMA/CDMA2000 environment parameters
Like for the other A9155 object folders, CDMA/CDMA2000 environments are easily manageable. Creation steps and the
display management are standard.


To manage the environments parameters, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Environments folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the environment type of which you want to manage the properties to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the environment type of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current environment,
Validate by clicking on OK.


Note : to get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights to clutter classes, for each environment class in
the Clutter weighting tab.

VIII.5.2.d.iii Managing globally CDMA/CDMA2000 environment types
In A9155, CDMA/CDMA2000 objects are organized in folders. For this reason, A9155 allows the user to simultaneously
display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profile, environment) in a table window.


To open the environment types table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Environments folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Environments folder,
The Environment type table opens.


The environment types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and
copy/paste functions are available.

Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu associated with
the Environments folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the environment types
table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any
environment type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


336/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VIII.5.2.d.iv Displaying statistics per CDMA/CDMA2000 environment type
A9155 allows the user to perform a statistic study on each environment class.

These statistics provide the number of mobiles to be created in the traffic scenario for the given environment (based on a
raster traffic map, respecting the layer order). This number is given displayed per clutter class.

To display a statistic study on any environment type, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Environments folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the environment type you want to display a statistical study to open the associated context
menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Statistics...,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open window.


Note : The statistic study is limited to the focus zone, only the clutter and environment areas inside the focus zone are
taken into account in calculations.

VIII.5.2.d.v Subscriber clutter weighting in CDMA/CDMA2000 environment
Enter a weight for each clutter class in order to get an appropriate user distribution
The following formula is used for calculations:

=
j
j j
k k
class k
S w
S w
N N

where :
k
N

Number of users in the k clutter
class
N

Number of users in an environment class
k
w

k clutter weight at fixed surface
k
S

k clutter surface (stated in km)

This weighting method is used when displaying statistics per CDMA/CDMA2000 environment type.

VIII.5.3 CDMA/CDMA2000 MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY
VIII.5.3.a CDMA/CDMA2000 MULTI-SERVICE TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY : OVERVIEW
A9155 provides 3 types of traffic maps for CDMA/CDMA2000 projects :

Traffic raster maps based on environments: each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class.
Traffic vector maps based on user profiles: each polygon or line contains a density of subscribers with given user
profile and mobility type.
Traffic maps per transmitter and per service: live traffic is spread over a best pilot coverage plot. To each computed
area is assigned either rates or amount of users per service (uplink or downlink).

Whatever the type of map is, this one can be either created or modified manually, imported from an external file and
exported to an external file.
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 337/476


VIII.5.3.b CDMA/CDMA2000 ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAPS
VIII.5.3.b.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic map
There are two solutions to define an environment traffic map, either by creating environment polygons or by directly
importing a raster map in your project as an environment traffic map.

To create a CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on environments (raster) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the cartography editor (selecting one of the available environment classes as defined in the
environment folder) to draw environment polygons,
Click the button to close the editor.

Notes :
Like other raster maps, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.
You can only choose among existing environment classes in the cartography editor. To make available additional
classes, do it in the CDMA/CDMA2000 parameters.
VIII.5.3.b.ii Importing a CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic map
There are two solutions to define an environment traffic map, either by creating environment polygons or by directly
importing a raster map (with the appropriate format) in your project as an environment traffic map.

To import a CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic map from an external file, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on environments (raster) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the name column, left click cells in order to replace class (codes or clutter) names by existing
environment classes,
Press OK or Apply to validate.


Notes :
Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the environment traffic type
in the appropriate scrolling menu),
Clutter files can be imported as traffic files,
In order to manage traffic on the entire map, this operation must be carried out for all classes.
The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+V and Ctrl+C) in a new A9155 project after importing
the raster file. To select globally the environment class table, just left click on the top left angle of the environment
table.
Like other raster maps, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.
VIII.5.3.b.iii Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic maps
On an existing environment traffic map, you can access properties and it is possible to modify the class association and
its display settings.

To access the properties of an existing environment traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


338/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Right click on the related environment map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related environment map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the description tab to re-associate environment classes,
Click the display tab to set the transparency level, the visibility scale and to add the map information to the
legend,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

It is also possible to access the properties of a single file composing the resulting map (properties command in the
related context menu) to embed it into the atl project or to check the map geocoding.

Notes : Absolute and relative statistics can be provided for this type of map.

VIII.5.3.b.iv Exporting a CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic map
Like the other CDMA/CDMA2000 traffic map types (user profile or live traffic), it is possible to export a environment traffic
map in either a 8 bits/pixel raster tiff, bil or bmp format. It is possible to export a part or the complete environment traffic
map.

To export a part or the complete environment traffic map in CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the Environment map folder in order to get the related context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported,
Click the Save button when this is made,
In the Export dialog box, select one of the options and define the resolution (in metres) of file :
The whole covered region option allows you to save the whole traffic map in another file. As soon as
the file is saved, the properties (name,...) of the traffic maps listed in the Environment Traffic
subfolder are updated.
The only pending changes option allows just to save in the file the created traffic polygonal area. As
soon as the modifications are saved, an additional traffic item is created and listed in the
Environment Traffic subfolder.
The computation zone option allows you to save only traffic map region inside the computation zone
in another file. As soon as the file is saved, an additional traffic object is created and listed in the
Environment Traffic subfolder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone
beforehand.
A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for raster traffic from the following criteria :
If one traffic object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are modified, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of the
altered items.
If there is no initial traffic item, the resolution will equal the resolution of DTM object which the
modifications are made on or the smallest resolution of the merged DTM objects if the
modifications are performed on several DTM objects.
If you draw your own traffic data without initial DTM, clutter or traffic object, a 100 m default
resolution will be suggested.
The resolution value must be an integer.
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
Click OK to validate.

Comment: When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the same
folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain geocoding information and
resolution.

C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 339/476


VIII.5.3.b.v Displaying statistics on CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic maps
It is possible to display statistics on an existing CDMA/CDMA2000 environment traffic map. Statistics are given globally
and relatively as functions of environment traffic classes. Traffic density statistics indicates the proportion of each traffic
class. Traffic statistics refer to the focus zone is existing.


To display traffic statistics of the map in CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the Environment Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Statistics option from the scrolling menu
The surface (Si in km) of imported or edited traffic class (i) included in the focus (if existing) zone and its
percentage (% of i) are specified:

100 of % =

k
k
i
S
S
i


Notes :
If no focus zone is defined, statistics are given over the computation zone.
Current statistics are printable by clicking the button.

VIII.5.3.c CDMA/CDMA2000 USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAPS
VIII.5.3.c.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic map
In A9155, user profile traffic maps can be defined in any type of project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA2000). The vector data (points, lines, polygonal shapes) are expected to directly link a dedicated user
profile, mobility and traffic density. The way to get user profile traffic maps consists in either importing vector files
(MapInfo(MIF,MID), Arcview (SHP), Autocad(DXF)) and using them as traffic maps or creating vectors with the vector
editor and assign them some traffic information.

To create a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on user profiles (vector) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs,
Potentially define traffic information (user profile, mobility type, density) in the Table tab, assign them to
A9155 internal traffic fields in the Traffic tab, and use the vector editor to draw environment polygons, lines
or points,
Click the button to close the editor.

Notes :
Like other vector layers, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.
Points can be seen as traffic hotspots

See Examples of vector traffic data

VIII.5.3.c.ii Importing a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic map
In A9155, user profile traffic maps can be defined in any type of project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA2000). The vector data (points, lines, polygonal shapes) are expected to directly link a dedicated user
profile, mobility and traffic density. The way to get user profile traffic maps consists in either importing vector files
(MapInfo(MIF,MID), Arcview (SHP), Autocad(DXF)) and using them as traffic maps or creating vectors with the vector
editor and assign them some traffic information.

To import a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


340/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on user profiles (vector) option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Press the button to validate,

A dialog box is displayed in order to configure traffic vector data.
Click the Traffic tab,
In the Traffic fields part, specify the user profiles to be considered on the traffic vector map, their mobility
types (km/h) and their densities (number of users/km2 for polygons and number of user/km for lines). You
can decide the type of information that you want to use to define the traffic characteristics, either a field
described in the file (by field option in the Defined column) or a value directly user-definable in A9155 (by
value option in the Defined column).
The first method can be used only if the file you are importing contains attributes providing
information about the user profile, mobility or density. In this case, select in the Choice column a
suitable field for each data (user profile, mobility and density); A9155 lists all the attributes described
in the file. The attributes of the source file cannot be modified. Using this method, each traffic
polygon or linear is assigned specific characteristics (user profile, mobility or density).
Note : Take care to define in A9155 user profiles and mobility types described in traffic file with exact
spelling.

The second way is useful when traffic files contain no attribute. Therefore, you may assign manually
user profiles, mobility types and densities created in A9155. Select in the Choice column user profile
and mobility listed in UMTS Parameters folder and specify manually a global density for all the
polygons. Beforehand, just make sure to define in UMTS Parameters the internal data like user
profile and mobility you want to allocate. Here, all the polygons are described by global
characteristics (user profile, mobility or density).

In the Clutter weighting part, assign a weight to each clutter class. Thus, A9155 allows you to spread traffic
inside the polygons according to the clutter weighting defined for the whole subfolder. The spreading
operation (using a raster step) will be carried out during the simulation process.
Then, press OK to validate the properties setting.


Notes :
Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the Traffic type in the
appropriate scrolling menu),
During the import procedure, if the imported user profiles or mobility types are not currently part of the existing user
profiles or mobility types, A9155 warns you about the fact that these may not be correctly taken into account as traffic
data.
Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.

See Examples of vector traffic data

VIII.5.3.c.iii Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic maps
To access the properties of an existing user profile traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the related user profile traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related user profile traffic map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of
the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organisation or filters on the vector
display,
Click on the Table tab to manage the content of the vector,
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 341/476


Click on the Traffic tab to re-associate vector fields and A9155 internal traffic fields, and to impose
subscriber clutter weighting using this map for the subscriber distribution during the monte-carlo simulation,
Click on the Display tab to open the A9155 generic display dialog,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

VIII.5.3.c.iv Examples of CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic data
Structure of two vector traffic files is described hereafter. Niceregion.mif consists of eleven polygons representing the
Nice region. Each polygon is characterised by a user profile, the services offered to subscribers, their mobility types and
densities. Densities are stated in number of subscribers per km
2
. Highway.mif represents a highway (linear) where
density corresponds to a number of subscribers per km.


Niceregion.mif

Name Userprofile Services used MobilityA DensityA MobilityB DensityB
Hinterland rural user Speech 90 km/h 8 pedestrian 2
Village rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 5
Corniche rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 20
Rural rural user Speech 90 km/h 8 pedestrian 2
Villages rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 10
Nice urban user Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video
conferencing
pedestrian 700 50 km/h 100
Nice airport urban user Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video
conferencing
pedestrian 700 50 km/h 100
Nice
surroundings
rural user Speech 50 km/h 100 90 km/h 100
Rural rural user Speech 90 km/h 5 pedestrian 5
Villages rural user Speech 50 km/h 10 pedestrian 5
Nice center urban user Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video
conferencing
pedestrian 4000 pedestrian 0

Using the user profile traffic import procedure, it is possible to associate (Traffic tab of the properties dialog) :
To user profile : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Userprofile field of the vector (by field), with
a different definition for each polygon,
To mobility : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the MobilityA (resp. MobilityB) field of the vector
(by field), with a different detention for each polygon,
To density : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the DensityA (resp. Density B) field of the vector
(by field), with a different definition for each polygon.


Highway.mif

ID User_profile Service used Density Mobility
highway driver Speech 400 120 km/h


Using the user profile traffic import procedure, it is possible to associate (Traffic tab of the properties dialog) :
To user profile : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the User_profile field of the vector (by field),
with a different definition for each polygon,
To mobility : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Mobility field of the vector (by field), with a
different detention for each polygon,
To density : either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Density field of the vector (by field), with a
different definition for each polygon.
VIII.5.3.c.v Exporting a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic map
Like the other CDMA/CDMA2000 traffic map types (environment or live traffic), it is possible to export user profile traffic
maps.

To export a CDMA/CDMA2000 user profile traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the user profile traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible formats are
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


342/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Arcview (.shp), MapInfo (.mif) and the A9155 internal format (.agd),
Click the Save button to complete the export procedure.
VIII.5.3.d CDMA/CDMA2000 LIVE TRAFFIC MAPS
VIII.5.3.d.i Creating a CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic map
This kind of traffic map requires a coverage by transmitter prediction study. Then, A9155 expects rate values (kbits/s) or
number of active users for each service and each transmitter.

Note : It is possible to define either one map per service or one map with all services.

Then, the traffic cartography is built without connection with the initial coverage prediction. This map consists of polygons
provided with the same features as the user profile traffic polygons.

The definition of CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation on the basis of a coverage
by transmitter study previously calculated or by importing a file.

To create a CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on transmitter and service (Throughput or Number of users) option in the Create a
traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Select the prediction study to be considered for traffic distribution. Only coverage per transmitter studies
can be used. A table where you can indicate the live traffic spread over the transmitter service areas is
available. It consists of a column dedicated to transmitters and several columns for the different services
previously defined in the UMTS parameters folder. In the TX_ID column, select each line, click on the arrow
and choose a transmitter in the list. You may also use the copy and paste commands (respectively Ctrl+C
and Ctrl+V) from an Excel file already containing the expected columns.
Enter rate values (kbits/s) (or Number of active users) on uplink and on downlink relating to different
services for each transmitter,
Press OK to continue the map creation.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs,
A9155 displays the property dialog of the map. Click the Traffic tab of the opened property dialog and
define terminal and mobility ratios by entering percentage values for each terminal and each mobility type
(they will be used in the traffic scenario). You may also specify a weight per clutter class to spread traffic
over each coverage area. The spreading operation will be performed during the traffic distribution.
Click OK to validate.

A9155 creates an object called Traffic map per transmitter in the Traffic folder of the Geo tab.

Notes
The map only contains the service areas of transmitters listed in the table. Then, the traffic map shape is fixed and
cannot be modified; it is not possible to add new transmitters.
On the other hand, it is possible to modify traffic values (throughputs or number of users) afterwards in the Table
related to the map.
In CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, it is necessary to define one map per radio configuration. Thus, enter a percentage
value different from 0 for a given radio configuration (choose the same radio configuration, for terminal and mobility),
and 0 for the other ones.
VIII.5.3.d.ii Importing a CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic map
The definition of CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation on the basis of a coverage
by transmitter study previously calculated or by importing a file.

You may import files with AGD format. This is the A9155 geographic data internal format. This kind of file must be
created from A9155 (export of a coverage by transmitter study in the AGD format).

To import a CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic map by drawing, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on transmitter and service (Throughput or number of users per transmitter)
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 343/476


option in the Create a traffic map open window,
Press the button to validate,
Locate the file to be imported and click the button to validate,
Choose the Traffic option from the scrolling menu in the open File import window,
Select the option embed in the document to include the file in the .atl document. When this option is not
selected, A9155 just memorizes the file directory path.

In the coordinate systems part, A9155 summarises the projection coordinate system you have defined in
the .atl project. In the box just below, specify the coordinate system of the file you are importing (click on
Change to choose another coordinate system).
Press the button to validate,
A9155 displays the property dialog of the map. Click the Traffic tab of the opened property dialog and
define terminal and mobility ratios by entering percentage values for each terminal and each mobility type
(they will be used in the traffic scenario). You may also specify a weight per clutter class to spread traffic
over each coverage area. The spreading operation will be performed during the traffic distribution.
Click OK to validate.

Note : It is also possible to import a traffic map per transmitter using the standard import procedure (Import command in
the File menu). In this case, you must specify in the import dialog that you want to import the file in the Traffic folder.

VIII.5.3.d.iii Managing CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic maps
Management features of vector maps are available for traffic maps per transmitter: standard graphical features are
available in the Display tab of the map property dialog and each map has a corresponding table. This table contains the
transmitters used to build the map and traffic information for each of them.


To access the properties of an existing live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the related live traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the related live traffic map folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of
the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organisation or filters on the vector
display,
Click on the Table tab to manage the content of the vector,
Click on the Traffic tab to re-define terminal and mobility ratios and to impose subscriber clutter weighting
using this map for the subscriber distribution during the monte-carlo simulation,
Click on the Display tab to open the A9155 generic display dialog,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

VIII.5.3.d.iv Exporting a CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic map
Like the other CDMA/CDMA2000 traffic map types (environment or user profile), it is possible to export live traffic maps.

To export a CDMA/CDMA2000 live traffic map, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Traffic folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the live traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the open scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible format is the
A9155 internal format (.agd),
Click the Save button to complete the export procedure.

CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


344/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VIII.6 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
VIII.6.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS : OVERVIEW
Power control simulation is a necessary step to obtain instantaneous network noise level and perform service area
prediction based on it. Furthermore, it is a first, quick and easy analysis tool to get information about network
dimensioning. Traffic data is a critical parameter for CDMA studies. Indeed, power control simulation is performed from
user distributions, which are obtained by random trials driven by traffic data. Its significance rests on traffic data
relevance.

A9155 provides a random user distribution generation, based on a Monte-Carlo algorithm complying with traffic
description and cartography.
Once realistic user distributions are available, power control simulation is automatically achieved to determine network
parameters (such as cells and terminal - radio configuration - powers) and estimate interference level.

A9155 provides either actual network audit (taking into account your network constraints) or new dimensioning
information about how to handle available traffic. On the same traffic snapshot, you can check how your network works
and can be improved.

A9155 offers a wide range of tuneable parameters involved in CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations. Even from existing
simulations, it is possible to modify these parameters with the replay simulations features offered by A9155. You may
also add simulations to a group of existing simulations. Averaging a group of simulations is also possible. Once
achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA/CDMA2000 coverage predictions.

Indeed, for CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, A9155 provides four different groups of studies, listed in a natural planning
order, from the indispensable pilot study to the study of downlink total noise, with respect to the propagation model as
defined :
Pilot-oriented studies to determine pilot coverage by transmitter, the pilot coverage by signal level, overlapping area
(like standard coverage studies), pilot quality (Ec/Io) and pilot pollution,
Service-oriented studies to determine service availability in uplink and downlink and effective service areas,
handover status study to analyse macro-diversity performance,
Downlink total noise study.

A specific 1xEV-DO coverage is also available for CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, but this is not relative to any simulation.

With the point analysis tool, it is also possible to build a CDMA scenario defining a probe mobile with a type of terminal,
SCH multiple rate and service and predict, on each point of the current map, its results. Except pilot coverage, coverage
by signal level and overlapping studies, which are similar to classical coverage studies, all other studies are specific to
CDMA/CDMA2000 network planning and closely related to a particular simulation.

A9155 provides powerful simulation outputs. Firstly, you can display requirements, results, initial conditions, and data
relative to clutter data dealing with shadowing margins and gains due to multipath on any of these. Then, you may
choose to display the simulation results either per site, per transmitter, or per mobile for the currently studied simulation.
The results can also be displayed on the map as function of any topics dealt with the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations
(service, terminal, user, mobility, activity, factors, connection and HO status, best server, active set parameters,
geographic coordinates, rates, carriers, powers, noise rise, path loss).

VIII.6.2 MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
VIII.6.2.a CREATING CDMA/CDMA2000 POWER CONTROL SIMULATIONS
CDMA/CDMA2000 networks automatically regulate themselves by using traffic driven uplink and downlink power control
in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity.

A9155 simulates this network regulation mechanism with an iterative algorithm and calculates, for each user distribution,
network parameters such as base station power, mobile terminal (RC) power, active set and handover status for each
terminal.


To create a (group of) CDMA/CDMA2000 power control simulation(s), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New...,
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 345/476


The creation of simulations dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters for the current simulation study(ies),
Validate by clicking on OK.


Notes :
If you check the execute later box, computations will be started when using the Calculate command (F7 shortcut or
button),
When starting computations, a group of simulations (with the input number of simulations) is automatically created
under the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation folder.

Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA/CDMA2000 coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with
the point analysis tool.

VIII.6.2.b MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION PROPERTIES
Like many other objects (Sites, Transmitters, Cells, Antennas, Predictions, measurements, etc...) within A9155,
simulations can be managed either individually or globally. Nevertheless, due to the fact that some of them have already
been started, you can only display their input parameters. Regarding the global properties of simulations, they are related
to the way simulation results are displayed on the map.

Global properties management
In A9155, you may manage globally the display properties of the existing simulations.
To do so, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder to open the context menu,
Left click the Properties command from the open scrolling menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

Note : to manage the display of simulation results, the A9155 generic dialog window is used. So, it is possible to display
simulation results related to, for example, their connection status, handover status, any CDMA/CDMA2000 parameter,
pilot quality, etc... Furthermore, all simulation folders are then organised in threshold items that you can display or not in
the workspace.


Individual property management
If computations have already been started, the properties you can display on groups of simulations are related to the
input parameters.
To open the properties related to a group of CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either
Right click on the group of CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations you want to manage,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Or
Double click the group of CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations you want to manage
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

Notes :
If computations have not been started (using the execute later command), you can access to the group properties in
order to modify them for coming computations.
You can access to the Properties of any single simulation. The open dialog is related to simulations requirements and
results, specific results per site, per mobile, per cell and simulation initial conditions.

VIII.6.2.c CDMA/CDMA2000 POWER CONTROL SIMULATION INPUTS
Before running simulations, you must have a radio network with a satisfying pilot coverage. Then, it is necessary to
define traffic description and cartography.

Power control simulation needs propagation path loss for cells and mobiles. If these results are not available, A9155
achieves propagation calculation using the propagation model as defined from either the transmitter or the prediction
folders.
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


346/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



In A9155, the dialog allowing you to create simulations is made of three tabs : General, Traffic and Advanced described
below.

General tab
In this tab, you can enter a name to the group of simulations that A9155 is going to compute. Then, you may decide the
number of scenarios on which you want to simulate power control. It is possible to create several simulations at the same
time or just one by one if you prefer. Selecting the Detailed results option enables you to get additional simulation outputs
relating to mobiles (results available in the Mobiles and Mobiles (Shadowing values) tabs of the simulation Properties
window). Finally, the Execute later option can be used if you want to predefine simulation calculation settings and start
the computation subsequently. In case the option is selected, simulation calculation is not carried out when closing the
dialog; simulation will be worked out when clicking on the Calculate command (F7 shortcut or button),

Note : The Execute later feature enables you to automatically calculate CDMA/CDMA2000 coverage studies after
simulations without intermediary step.

In the Cell load constraint part, you must select constraints you want A9155 to respect during power control simulation. If
you wish to check your network, just select the constraints about maximum cell power, maximum number of channel
elements, maximum uplink cell load (the default value is set to 75%) and Walsh codes availability. The simulation
proceeds without exceeding these limits. Mobiles with the lowest service priority (user-defined in each service properties
dialog window) are first rejected. In order for the simulation to proceed freely, uncheck all the calculation options.


Traffic tab
The global scaling factor for traffic option enables you to increase subscriber density without changing traffic parameters
or cartography. For example, setting the global scaling factor for traffic to 2 means doubling the initial number of
subscribers (for traffic raster or user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for traffic maps per transmitter and per
service).

Then, you can perform simulations using several traffic cartographies. To do this, select them in the Traffic part. In this
case, A9155 takes into account the traffic information provided in all the selected maps. This feature must be carefully
used to avoid inconsistencies. Thus, make sure you do not mix several kinds of traffic maps (for example, raster traffic
map and transmitter coverage area traffic map) in a simulation study; rather, make several simulation studies, each one
based on a same sort of traffic map. On the other hand, you can fully carry out a simulation study using several traffic
maps belonging to the same kind.


Advanced tab
Generator initialisation enables you to obtain the same random distribution in two simulations just by giving the same
non-zero integer in this field. For example, you create a simulation with generator initialisation value of 1 (or whichever
integer different from 0). When you create another simulation, giving 1 as generator initialisation, you obtain the same
random distribution. To avoid getting similar distributions, just enter zero value in this field. A group of several
distributions created at the same time may be repeated with the same principle. This can be useful when one wants to
compare two simulations with just one parameter value difference; so to make a just comparison, it is better to have the
same user locations (same path loss values for users).

You can then specify the maximum number of iterations allowed during a simulation, UL and DL convergence thresholds.

The power control simulation is based on an iterative algorithm. In the Convergence part, you can define how many
iterations you want the simulation to run (maximum number of iterations) and specify your own uplink and downlink
convergence criteria (percentage power difference for downlink and percentage noise difference for uplink between two
successive iterations).


When clicking OK, simulation starts running and stops when the convergence criteria are met in two successive
iterations (when there is no network parameter evolution). Therefore, the simulation can finish before reaching the
maximum number of defined iterations.

When calculation is finished, A9155 has created the required number of simulations in the newly created group of
simulations.

A9155 makes easy the consistency management between radio data, simulations and predictions.

Average simulations and replays are reachable from each of these subfolders. Display properties are reachable form the
Simulations folder.

C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 347/476


VIII.6.2.d REPLAYING A CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
A9155 allows the user to replay existing simulations in order to keep the same radio configuration (including reference
maps, initialisation number) and to modify the convergence parameters and the constraints on the cell loads. The new
group of simulations is based on the same random user distribution (number of users who try to be connected, allocated
service, mobility and activity status, geographic position), just the power control is recalculated and the outputs updated.


To replay a group of CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations (one of several ones), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation group subfolder you want to replay the simulations to open
the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Replay...,
The replay simulation(s) dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters on the convergence parameters and the constraints on the cell loads for the current
group of simulations to replay,
Validate by clicking on OK.

Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point
analysis tool.


Note : giving several times the same integer number (different from 0) as initialisation number in the simulation creation
dialog box leads to replay simulations with identical user random distribution.

See Generator initialisation - Replay differences

Comment: as the generator initialisation function, this feature enables you to obtain the same user distribution in two
simulations. Nevertheless, the generator initialisation option is more powerful since it can be used to create several
simulations with the same distribution at the same time and several sets of different simulations with the same set of
distributions.
VIII.6.2.e GENERATOR INITIALISATION - REPLAY DIFFERENCES (CDMA/CDMA2000)
The main differences between two features are the inputs taken into account in simulations. Comparison is detailed
below.

Replay: A9155 reuses the same user distribution (user with a service, a mobility and an activity status) and traffic
parameters (such as maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt targets...) as in the initial
simulation. Just radio data (new transmitter, azimuth...) modifications are taken into account during power control
simulation.

Generator initialisation: If generator initialisation entered when creating both simulations is an integer different from 0,
A9155 finds the same user distribution (user with a service, a mobility and an activity status) in both simulations. On
the other hand, in this case, both traffic parameter (such as maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed,
Eb/Nt targets...) and radio data (new transmitter, azimuth...) modifications are taken into account during power control
simulation.
VIII.6.2.f AVERAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
With A9155, it is possible to average some available groups of simulations. This feature also allows the user to calculate
standard deviations on the averaged simulations. Results are automatically displayed per cell, as in a single simulation.


To display average results per cell over a group of CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation group subfolder you want to average the simulations to
open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Average simulations...,
The average simulation dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click on the available tabs to display either the Statistics, Means or Standard deviation window,
Click OK to close the window.
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


348/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Average simulations may be used in specific CDMA coverage predictions or in an AS analysis with the point analysis
tool.

VIII.6.2.g ADDING A SIMULATION TO AN EXISTING GROUP OF CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
In A9155, It is possible to add a new simulation to an existing group of simulations. When creating the new simulation,
A9155 takes into account the same inputs (radio and traffic data, simulation parameters) as used for generating the
group of simulations and replays user distribution and power control simulation.


To add a simulation to an existing group of simulations, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the simulation group on which you want to add a simulation,
Choose the New... command from the open context menu,
A new simulation is being computed using the parameters of the current group,
After calculation, a new simulation is added to the group.

Note : The added simulation is then considered if you calculate an average simulation.

VIII.6.3 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION PROCESS
VIII.6.3.a POWER CONTROL CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION CONCEPTS
Power control consists of two steps in A9155 :

1st step : obtaining realistic user distribution

To get user distribution, you need to have traffic cartography at your disposal.

Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type (RC) and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law
that complies with the traffic database.

User activity status is an important output of random distribution, which will have direct consequences on simulation and
network noise level.

A user is either active or inactive:
Active means: a radio resource has been allocated to the user, and the user is speaking (i.e. he creates interference
both on the downlink and the uplink).
Inactive means: a radio resource has been allocated to the user, but he is not speaking (i.e. he does not create any
interference).


A second random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone.


2nd step : Power control simulation

Power control simulation needs propagation path loss for transmitters and mobiles. If these results are not available,
A9155 achieves propagation calculation using the propagation model as defined from either the transmitter or the
prediction folders.


Based on CDMA air interface, network automatically regulates itself by using traffic driven uplink and downlink power
control in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. A9155 simulates this network regulation mechanism
with an iterative algorithm and calculates, for each user distribution, network parameters such as base station power,
mobile terminal power, active set and handover status for each terminal.

The power control simulation is based on an iterative algorithm. Each iteration, all the mobiles selected during the user
distribution generation (1
st
step) try to be connected one by one to network transmitters. The process is repeated from
iteration to iteration until convergence. The algorithm steps are detailed below.

C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 349/476



Initialisation
2
nd
step : Mi active set determination
3
rd
step : Uplink power control
+
radio resource control
1
st
step : Mi best server determination
For each mobile Mi

4
th
step : Downlink power control
+
radio resource control
5
th
step : Uplink and downlink interference update
Congestion and radio resource control
Convergence study

Schematic view of power control simulation algorithm


In CDMA/CDMA2000 , downlink power control simulation is independently carried out on fundamental channel and on
supplemental channel. Point analysis (Downlink availability) and prediction study (Service area Downlink) are based on
the same principle.

During power control simulation, the DL rate on SCH is downgraded until the DL quality level on SCH is reached. SCH is
not used when the downgraded rate is twice lower than the rate on FCH. Practically, the DL rate on SCH is multiplied by
a downgrading factor which is 2(-k) multiple. Therefore, the number of rejections due to an insufficient reception on traffic
channel (Ptch > PtchMax) should decrease.

Moreover, during power control simulation, the UL rate on SCH is downgraded until the required power on UL is lower
than the mobile maximum power. SCH is not used when the downgraded rate is lower than twice the FCH rate.
Practically, the UL rate on SCH is multiplied by a downgrading factor, which is a multiple of 2(-k) (every downgrading
step is halving). Therefore, the number of rejections due to an insufficient power to transmit (Pmob > PmobMax) should
decrease.

SCH downgrading is also modelled during power control simulation when there is not enough channel elements on UL
and DL to enable the link. Therefore, mobile will be rejected only if site lacks of channel elements to support FCH. As in
case of DL downgrading due to an insufficient reception on traffic channel, the downgrading is driven by the best server
of active set. Therefore, no downgrading occurs if there is not enough channel elements on sites where other
transmitters of active set are located; mobile is directly rejected.

Notes : Power control on SCH will be carried out just for data service users.

During simulation, mobiles penalizing too much the others are ejected. Different causes of ejection can be distinguished:

The signal quality is not sufficient:
- On the downlink, not enough pilot signal quality: Ec/I0 pilot < Ec/I0 min pilot
- On the downlink, not enough reception on traffic channel: Ptch > Ptch max (FCH or SCH)
- On the uplink, not enough power to transmit: Pmob > Pmob max

When constraints above are respected, the network may be saturated:
- The maximum load factor is exceeded (at admission or congestion).
- Not enough channel elements on site: channel element saturation
- Not enough power for cells: Cell power saturation
- OVSF code saturation

When the network is saturated; mobile ejection may be due to different reasons described above: multiple causes.
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


350/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VIII.6.3.b CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION CONVERGENCE METHOD
The convergence criteria is evaluated as follows:

Each iteration k, A9155 evaluates:

( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
( ) |
|
|
.
|

\
|
|
|
|
.
|

\
|

|
|
.
|

\
|

=
|
|
|
.
|

\
|
|
|
|
.
|

\
|

|
|
|
.
|

\
|

100
max
int , 100 max int max
100
max
int , 100
max
int max
1
1
1 1
ic N
ic N ic N
ic I
ic I ic I
ic N
ic N ic N
ic P
ic P ic P
k
UL
user
k
UL
user k
UL
user
Stations
k
UL
tot
k
UL
tot k
UL
tot
Stations
UL
k
DL
user
k
DL
user k
DL
user
Stations
k
tx
k tx k tx
Stations
DL


Where:
UL

is the UL convergence threshold,

DL

is the DL convergence threshold,

( ) ic P
tx
is the cell total transmitted power on the carrier ic,
( ) ic
I
UL
tot
is the total interference received by cell on the carrier ic,
( ) ic
N
UL
user
is the number of users connected on UL on the carrier ic,
( ) ic
N
DL
user
is the number of users connected on DL on the carrier ic,

A9155 stops the algorithm if:

1st case: Between two successive iterations,
UL

and
DL

are lower ( ) than their respective thresholds (defined

when creating a simulation).

The simulation has reached convergence.

Example: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds are 5. If
5
UL
and
5
DL
between the 4th and the 5th iteration, A9155 stops the algorithm after the 5th iteration.
Convergence is reached.


2nd case: After 30 iterations,
UL

or/and
DL

are still higher than their respective thresholds and from the 30th
iteration,
UL

or/and
DL

do not decrease during 15 successive iterations.

The simulation has not reached convergence (specific divergence symbol).

Examples: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds are 5.
- 1. After the 30th iteration,
UL

or/and
DL

equal 100 and do not decrease during 15 successive iterations: A9155 stops
the algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence is not reached.
- 2. After the 30th iteration,
UL

or/and
DL

equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without going
under the thresholds) and then, do not change during 15 successive iterations: A9155 stops the algorithm at the 56th
iteration without reaching convergence.


3rd case: After the last iteration.
If
UL

or/and
DL

are still strictly higher than their respective thresholds, the simulation has not reached convergence
(specific divergence symbol).
If
UL

and
DL

are lower than their respective thresholds, the simulation has reached convergence.

VIII.6.3.c ADMISSION CONTROL IN CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
A9155 checks cell UL load during admission control (1st step: mobile best server determination) and congestion control
(after considering all the mobiles during an iteration). Therefore, a mobile can be rejected due to a higher UL load either
during admission control, or during congestion control. It is possible to distinguish both rejection causes.

A bit more information concerning the admission control is provided. During admission control, A9155 calculates the
uplink load factor of a considered cell assuming the handled mobile is connected to it. Here, activity status assigned to
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 351/476


users is not taken into account. So even if the mobile is not active on UL, it can be rejected due to cell load saturation.
To calculate the cell UL load factor, either A9155 takes into account mobile power determined during power control if
mobile was connected in previous iteration, or it estimates a load rise due to mobile and adds it to the current load. The
load rise (
UL
X ) is calculated as follows:

R Q
W
X
UL
b
UL
req
UL

+
=
1
1


Where
W is the chip rate (bit/s),
Q
UL
req
is the Eb/Nt target on uplink (defined in service properties for a given mobility),
R
UL
b
is the service uplink effective bit rate (bit/s).

VIII.6.3.d CHANNEL ELEMENT MANAGEMENT IN CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
In A9155, the number of channel elements needed for a user with given service and link direction depends on site
equipment and channel element consumption defined for the equipment-service couple.

VIII.6.3.e WALSH CODES MANAGEMENT
Walsh codes can be managed on the downlink during the simulation. A9155 performs Walsh code allocation during the
resource control step.

Walsh codes form a binary tree; codes with a longer length are generated from codes with a shorter length. Indeed,
length-k Walsh codes are generated from length-k/2 Walsh codes. Therefore, if one channel needs 1 length-k/2 Walsh
code; it is equivalent to use 2 length-k Walsh codes, or 4 length-2k Walsh codes,.



128 Walsh codes per transmitter and per carrier are available in CDMA/CDMA2000 projects while 512 codes are
available in UMTS projects.

During the resource control, A9155 determines, for each transmitter and each carrier, the number of codes, which will be
consumed. Therefore, it allocates:
A code with the longest length per common channel, for each transmitter end each carrier,
A code per transmitter-receiver link, for FCH. The length of code to be allocated, Code-Length, is determined as
follows:

W
R
Length Code
FCH DL
b
=

A code per transmitter-receiver link, for SCH, in case SCH is supported by the user radio configuration. The length of
code to be allocated, Code-Length, is determined as follows:

W
R
Length Code
SCH DL
b
=

where,
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


352/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


R
FCH DL
b

is the service downlink bit rate on FCH,

R
SCH DL
b

is the service downlink bit rate on SCH,

W is the spreading bandwidth.


Note :
G
length Code
DL
p
=
(
G
DL
p
is the service downlink processing gain).


The Walsh code allocation follows the Buddy algorithm, which guarantees that:
If a k-length Walsh code is used, all of its children with lengths 2k, 4k cannot be used because they are no longer
orthogonal.
If a k-length Walsh code is used, all of its ancestors with lengths k/2, k/4 cannot be used because they are no longer
orthogonal.


Notes :
1. The Walsh code allocation follows the mobile connection order (mobile order in the Mobiles tab).
2. The Walsh code and channel element management is differently dealt with in case of softer handover. A9155
allocates Walsh codes for each transmitter-receiver link while it globally assigns channel elements to a site.

Example: In CDMA/CDMA2000 , let a voice user with a RC1 be in softer handover. Therefore, A9155 will allocate two
Walsh codes (one for each transmitter-receiver link) and only one channel element to the site.

VIII.6.3.f WALSH CODES AVAILABILITY
An additional constraint on the Walsh codes, Number of codes, is available when creating simulation. Therefore, when
selecting the Number of codes option, A9155 checks the Walsh code availability and then:
Ejects the mobile if there is no Walsh code to support FCH rate.
Downgrades the DL SCH rate if there is no Walsh code free to support the requested SCH rate and enable the link.

Therefore, a mobile will be rejected for code saturation cause only if there is no Walsh code to support FCH rate. The
unavailability of Walsh code to support SCH rate leads to a DL SCH rate downgrading.

Note : When the Number of codes option is not selected, A9155 just checks the Walsh code availability. No DL SCH rate
downgrading is performed in case of Walsh code unavailability.

See Walsh codes management

VIII.6.3.g MODELLING SHADOWING IN CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
In order to take into account prediction errors along paths in CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations, A9155 keeps a neutral
predicted path loss for mobiles; a random shadowing value is computed and added to the average predicted path loss.
Reliability level and shadowing margin are then introduced in prediction studies and point analysis only.

From a user-defined model standard deviation associated to the receiver position, a random shadowing error is
computed and added to the model path loss (
Lpath
). This random vale is drawn during Monte-Carlo simulation; each
user is assigned a service, a mobility type (RC), an activity status, a geographic position and a random shadowing value.

For each link, path loss (L) can be broken down:
L L
path
+ =

is a zero mean gaussian random variable

( )
dB
, G 0
representing variation due to shadowing. It can be expressed as
the sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables,
L

and
P

.
L

models error related to the receiver

local environment; it is the same whichever the link.
P

models error related to the path between transmitter and

receiver.

Therefore, in case of two links, we have:
1
1 P L
+ =
for the link 1
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 353/476


2
2 P L
+ =
for the link 2

From
i

, the model standard deviation

( )
and the correlation coefficient
( )
between
1

and
2

, we can calculate
standard deviations of
L

( )
L

and
i
P

( )
P

(assuming all
i
P

have the same standard deviations).

We have:
2 2 2
P L
+ =

2
2

L
=

Therefore,
( )
P
= 1
2 2


L
=
2 2


There is currently no agreed model for predicting correlation coefficient
( )
between
1

and
2

. Two key variables

influence correlation:
The angle between the two paths. If this angle is small, correlation is high.
The relative values of the two path lengths. If angle is 0 and path lengths are the same, correlation is zero. Correlation is
different from zero when path lengths differ.

A simple model has been found [1]:
2
1
D
D

T
|
|
.
|

\
|
=
when

T


T

is a function of the mean size of obstacles near the receiver and is also linked to the receiver environment.

In a normal handover state, assuming a hexagonal schema for sites,

is close to (+/- /3) and D1/D2 is close to 1.

We found in literature that = 0.5 when = 0.3 and t = /10.

In A9155, is set to 0.5. So, we have:

2

L
=

and
2

P
=


Therefore, to model shadowing error common with all signals arriving at mobile (
E
ceiver
Shadowing
Re
), values are randomly drawn
for each mobile; they follows a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation
|
|
.
|

\
|
2

where
( )
is the
standard deviation associated to the mobile clutter class. Then, for each mobile-transmitter couple, A9155 draws another
value representing shadowing part uncorrelated with the position of the mobile (
E
Path
Shadowing
); this value follows a zero-
mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation
|
|
.
|

\
|
2

.

Random shadowing error means are centred on zero. Hence, this shadowing modelling method has no impact on the
simulated network load. On the other hand, as shadowing errors on the receiver-transmitter links are uncorrelated, the
method will influence the evaluated SHO gain in case mobile is in SHO.

Random shadowing values used for each mobile and mobile-transmitter pair are detailed in simulation results.

CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


354/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


VIII.6.4 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION RESULTS SUMMARY
VIII.6.4.a DISPLAYING CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION REQUIREMENTS AND RESULTS
When a simulation study has been created, A9155 creates a statistical report on simulation results. A part is dedicated to
traffic request determined from the 1
st
step of simulation (traffic scenario elaboration) and another one refers to network
performance (results coming from 2
nd
step of simulation: power control).

If a focus zone has been defined in your project, only sites, transmitters and mobiles located inside the focus zone are
considered when accessing simulation results. The global output statistics are based on these mobiles.

Traffic request:
A9155 calculates the total number of users who try to be connected. It is a result of the first random trial, the power
control has not yet been achieved. This result depends on the traffic description and cartography.
During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service. Therefore, UL and DL rates that all the users could
theoretically generate are provided.
Breakdown (number of users, UL and DL rates) per service is given.

Results:
The number and the percentage of rejected users are calculated and detailed per rejection cause. These results are
determined after the power control and depend on network design.
A9155 supplies the total number and the percentage of connected users, UL and DL total rates that they generate.
These data are also detailed per service.


To display requirements and results on any simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the requests and
results by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the requests and results to open
the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the requests and results,
Click on the Statistics tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.

Note : The traffic rates are calculated at the user level without taking into account handover. Once achieved, simulations
are available for specific CDMA/CDMA2000 coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.

VIII.6.4.b DISPLAYING INPUT PARAMETERS OF AN EXISTING CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
After a CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation, A9155 can display the associated transmitter global parameters and the inputs
defined during the simulation creation


To display the input parameters of an existing simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the initial conditions by
left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the initial conditions to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the initial conditions,
Click on the Initial conditions tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 355/476




The initial condition tab window contains :
The transmitter global parameters as:
- The spreading width,
- The orthogonality factor,
- The default uplink soft handover gain,
- The MRC in softer/soft option: if it is defined or not,
- The method used to calculate Io

The inputs available when creating simulation:
- The maximum number of iterations,
- The uplink and downlink convergence thresholds,
- The simulation constraints such as the maximum power, the maximum number of channel elements, the uplink
load factor and the maximum load,
- The name of used traffic maps.

Then, if available, are displayed the values of orthogonality factor and standard deviation as defined per clutter type.

Note : When the simulation does not converge (UL and DL convergence criteria not reached at the end of the
simulation), A9155 displays a special warning icon in front of Simulation object.

VIII.6.4.c SUMMARISING RESULTS PER SITE (CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS)
After a CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation, A9155 can display the associated results per site.


To display the results on any simulation per site, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the requests and
results by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the results per site to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the results per site,
Click on the Sites tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.


In this window, A9155 displays the maximum number of channel elements previously defined for each site, the number
of required channel elements in uplink and downlink at the end of simulation, the number of extra channel elements due
to soft handover, the properties related to each site equipment (MUD factor, Rake receiver efficiency factor, carrier
selection mode, AS restricted to neighbours option and overhead channel elements on uplink and downlink), the uplink
and downlink throughputs (kbits/s) per service supported by site. The UL and DL throughputs are the number of kbits per
second supported by the site on uplink and downlink to supply (mobiles connected with the transmitters located on the
site) one kind of services. The throughput calculation takes into account the handover connections.

If the maximum channel element number is exceeded, sites are displayed with red colour.

Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. Once achieved,
simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.
VIII.6.4.d SUMMARISING RESULTS PER CELL (CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS)
After a CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation, A9155 can display the associated results per cell.


To display the results on any simulation per site, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


356/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the results per cell by
left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the results per cell to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the results per cell,
Click on the Transmitters tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.


In this window, A9155 provides the simulation input data like the maximum power, the pilot power, the synchro power,
the paging power, the AS threshold (which is a cell parameter since version V6.1), the gain, the reception and
transmission losses, the noise figure, and simulation output data regarding cells such as the total DL power used (on the
fundamental and on the supplemental channel), the UL total noise, the UL and DL load factors, the UL and DL noise
rises, the percentage of used power, the UL reuse factor, the number of UL and DL links, the number of used Walsh
codes, the percentage of handover types (on FCH and SCH), the UL and DL throughputs (on FCH and SCH), the
minimum, maximum and average traffic channel powers, the number of users rejected for each cause for each cell.

See Simulation outputs on cell components

Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. The "Commit
loads" button permits to copy UL loads and total powers DL (or their average in the case of several carriers) in the cell
table in order to be taken potentially as reference for specific CDMA predictions (by selecting the None option from the
simulation scrolling box).

Average simulations are ordered by cells. Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage
predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.
VIII.6.4.e COMMITTING SIMULATED LOADS TO CELLS (CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS)
In A9155, to enable simulation result sharing, two fields, the UL load (UL load factor) and total power (total DL power
used), are available in cell properties. Both parameters can be results coming from a single or an average simulation or
inputs manually specified in the Cell table or in the Transmission/Reception tab of each cell Property window.


To assign any simulated UL load factor and total DL power to cells from a network, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to use the simulated results by
left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to use the simulated results to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to use the simulated results,
Click on the Cells tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the to assign calculated loads and total powers to cells,
Values are automatically copied in each cell properties window,
Click OK to close the window.


When assigned to cells, these values can be used for coverages based on no simulation.

Note : this feature is also available from the mean tab window of any average simulation.


Reminder : the Commit load button is inactive as long as both fields, UL load and total power, do not exist.

C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 357/476


VIII.6.4.f SUMMARISING RESULTS PER MOBILE (CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS)
After a CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation, A9155 can display the associated results per mobile.


To display the results on any simulation per site, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display the requests and
results by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the results per mobile to open
the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the results per mobile,
Click on the Mobiles tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.


In this window, A9155 gives information about calculated terminal parameters. First, A9155 mentions simulation input
data: X, Y, service, terminal, user profile, user mobility and activity obtained from random trial. A9155 displays simulation
output data for these users: carrier, DL and UL requested and obtained rates, mobile power (on the fundamental channel
and on the supplemental channel), best server, connection status, handover status, transmitters in active set and Ec/Io
from cells in active set.

A9155 displays which carrier is used for connection and calculates the power transmitted by the terminal (on FCH and
SCH) . A9155 identifies the best server among the cells taking part in mobile active set.
Connection status refers to mobile ejection causes previously defined. It gives the reasons why the mobile, even active,
is not connected to any transmitter at the end of the simulation.

A9155 allows to analyse what type of handover is possible for a mobile; providing the HO status information. HO status
represents the real number of sites compared to the number of cells in active set.

For example, when a mobile is in connection with three cells and among them two co-site cells (soft - softer handover),
its HO status is 2/3. When the mobile is connected with only one transmitter (no handover) its HO status is 1/1. When the
mobile is connected with three co-site transmitters (softer - softer handover), its HO status is 1/3.

Active set is the list of transmitters (or cells since on unique carrier) in connection with the mobile. The maximum number
of transmitters in active set is defined by the user in Terminal Properties and besides limited to 4 in A9155. Soft
handover can be enabled/disabled for every service. For each transmitter in active set, Ec/Io values are calculated and
may be compared to Ec/Io thresholds and T-Drop previously defined in Mobility Type Properties. Transmitters, which
provide an Ec/Io pilot quality that is lower than [ Best server Ec/Io - AS-threshold ], are rejected from the active set.

Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. Once achieved,
simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.


Checking the Detailed results box during the simulation creation enables you to get additional simulation outputs relating
to mobiles and shadowing values computed along paths between transmitters and mobiles.

VIII.6.4.g DISPLAYING SHADOWING VALUES OF A CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
This feature is available only when selecting the Detailed results option in the simulation creation dialog. Here, A9155
details for each mobile:
Its number Id,
The clutter class where the receiver is located,
The model standard deviation associated to the clutter class,
The random shadowing error (
E
ceiver
Shadowing
Re
) related to the receiver local environment (Value at receiver); this one is
the same whichever the link.
The random shadowing errors (
E
Path
Shadowing
) due to the transmitter-receiver path (Value). A9155 gives this error for a
maximum of ten paths; it considers the ten transmitters, which have the mobile in their calculation areas and the
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


358/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


lowest path losses (Lpath). Transmitters are sorted in an ascending path loss order.


To display shadowing values for each mobile in any simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display by left clicking on the
button,
Either
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the clutter data to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation you want to display the clutter data,
Click on the Mobile (Shadowing values) tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click OK to close the window.


Notes
The values
E
ceiver
Shadowing
Re
computed for all the mobiles follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard
deviation
|
|
.
|

\
|
2

.
The values
E
Path
Shadowing
computed for a given mobile follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard
deviation
|
|
.
|

\
|
2

.

VIII.6.4.h MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION RESULTS ON THE MAP
From any simulation, A9155 can, globally or individually, display the associated results on the map in several ways.
These can be managed globally for all the simulations.

To make available the display dialog window on all the simulations of the current project, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties...,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the display parameters for all the simulations of the current project,
Click OK to close the window.


Like for most of the other display dialog windows in A9155, you can choose the display type associated with the values
(unique, discrete, values interval) and some corresponding fields. Due to the complexity of CDMA/CDMA2000
technology simulations, these fields are numerous and can be obtained as indicated in the following table.


Display type Field

Unique All the simulations

Discrete Values Service
Terminal
User
Mobility
Activity
Carrier
Connection status
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 359/476


Best server
HO status
Asi
Clutter

Value intervals X
Y
DL requested rate (kbits/s)
UL requested rate (kbits/s)
DL obtained rate (kbits/s)
UL obtained rate (kbits/s)
Mobile FCH power
Mobile SCH power
Ec/Io Asi
Cell power FCH Asi (DL)
Cell power SCH Asi (DL)
Ntot DL ASi
Load factor Asi
Noise rise Asi
Reuse factor Asi
Iintra Asi
Iextra Asi
Total path loss Asi
Nb UL CEs
Nb DL CEs
Name
Orthogonality factor
Macro-diversity gain UL
Macro-diversity gain DL


Note : Existing simulations, in the explorer window contain sub-items which depend on results are displayed on the map.
The simulation display is managed with the standard display dialog in use under A9155. Once achieved, simulations are
available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.

VIII.6.5 CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION OUTPUTS
VIII.6.5.a CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON SITES
Each site is characterised by its maximum number of channel elements previously defined.

Results are detailed for :
The number of channel elements required on uplink and downlink on FCH and SCH channels at the end of
simulation,
The number of channel elements due to soft handover overhead, for UL and DL (Nb CEs due to SHO overhead UL
and DL),
The properties related to the equipment associated to each site (parameters used during simulation) : MUD factor,
Rake receiver efficiency factor, carrier selection mode, AS restricted to neighbours option and overhead channel
elements on uplink and downlink
The uplink and downlink throughputs (kbits/s) per service supported by site on FCH and SCH channels. UL and DL
throughputs are the number of kbits per second supported by the site on uplink and downlink to supply (mobiles
connected with the transmitters located on the site) a particular service. The throughput calculation takes into account
the handover connections.

VIII.6.5.b CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS
Each cell is defined by its carrier, its maximum power, the pilot power, the sync power, the paging power, the AS
threshold, the gain, reception and transmission losses, the noise figure. Results are detailed for the total power used on
a carrier (DL), DL FCH and SCH powers, the UL total noise, UL and DL load factors, UL and DL noise rises, the
percentage of used power, the reuse factor, the number of UL and DL radio links, the number of Walsh codes allocated
to a transmitter, the number of Walsh codes dedicated to FCH, then to SCH, the percentage of each handover type, the
UL and DL number of channel elements used on FCH and on SCH, the UL and DL throughputs on FCH and SCH,
minimum, average and maximum traffic channel powers, the number of users rejected for each reason.
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


360/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



See CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulation outputs on cell components

VIII.6.5.c CDMA/CDMA2000 AVERAGE SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS
Each cell is detailed by its carrier and the average on the UL total noise, UL and DL load factors, UL and DL noise rises,
the total power used, the percentage of used power, the number of UL and DL radio links, the number of Walsh codes,
the percentage of each handover type, the UL and DL throughputs, minimum, average and maximum traffic channel
powers, the number of users rejected for each reason.

See CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulation outputs on cell components

VIII.6.5.d CDMA/CDMA2000 STANDARD DEVIATION OF SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS
Each cell is detailed by its cell and the standard deviation of the UL total noise, UL and DL load factors, the total power
used, the percentage of used power, the number of UL and DL radio links, the number of Walsh codes, the percentage
of each handover type, the UL and DL throughputs, minimum, average and maximum traffic channel powers, the number
of users rejected for each reason.

VIII.6.5.e CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELL COMPONENTS
The total power used is the total power that the transmitter transmits on a carrier. When constraints are settled, the
calculated power cannot exceed the maximum power value previously defined in Transmitter Properties.
The total FCH Power used is the power transmitted on FCH.
The total SCH Power used is the power transmitted on SCH.
The uplink total noise takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on a carrier (from intracell and
extracell terminals) and the thermal noise.
From uplink total noise and uplink interference, A9155 calculates uplink transmitter load factor on a carrier. If this
constraint has been selected, UL cell load factor is not allowed to exceed the user-defined value.
The uplink reuse factor is determined from uplink intra and extra-cellular interference (signals received by the
transmitter respectively from intracell and extracell terminals).
The DL load factor of the cell i corresponds to the (DL average interference [due to transmitter signals on the same
carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i area) / (DL average total noise [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise
of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area) ratio.
The uplink and downlink noise rises are respectively calculated from uplink and downlink load factors. These data
point out the signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).
The percentage of used power is determined from the total DL power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). This
value also represents of the cell DL loading (percentage of DL capacity reached).

Reminder: the maximum power is an input data user-definable for each cell in the Properties window. On the other hand,
the power is a simulation output data calculated for each transmitter, carrier by carrier.

A9155 estimates the percentages of handover status which the transmitter takes part in. HO status represents the
number of sites compared to the number of transmitters in active set size. Active set is the list of transmitters in
connection with mobiles. The maximum number of transmitters in the active set is defined by the user in Terminal
Properties and limited to 6 for CDMA/CDMA2000 projects. For example, when a mobile is in connection with three
transmitters and among them two co-site transmitters (soft - softer handover), its HO status is 2/3. When the mobile is
connected with only one transmitter (no handover), its HO status is 1/1. When the mobile is connected with three co-site
transmitters (softer-softer handover), its HO status is 1/3.

Note : A9155 details only the results for the following handover status, no handover (1/1), softer (1/2), soft (2/2), softer-
soft (2/3) and soft-soft (3/3) handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are globally analysed.

The number of radio links corresponds to the number of users-transmitters links on the same carrier. This data is
calculated on uplink and on downlink. A single user can use several radio links (handover).
The number of channel elements required by FCH and SCH to provide connected mobiles with the service is
estimated on UL and DL. These data are given without taking into account handover status. Therefore, the sum of
channel elements requested by transmitters on the same site may exceed the number of channel element required by
the site (result provided in the Sites tab).
The uplink and downlink throughputs represent respectively the numbers of Kbits per second delivered by the
transmitter on FCH and on SCH. These data are calculated on uplink and on downlink.
Minimum traffic channel power is the lowest one of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying services to
mobiles connected to the transmitter.
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 361/476


Maximum traffic channel power is the greatest of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying services to
mobiles connected to the transmitter.
Average traffic channel power is the average of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying services to
mobiles connected to the transmitter.

VIII.6.5.f CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON MOBILES
Each user is defined by his location, the service and the terminal used, his profile, his mobility and his potential activity.
Results are given on carriers, UL and DL requested and obtained rates, mobile total, FCH and SCH powers, connection
status, best servers, HO status, active set transmitters and associated Ec/Io.

If the detailed results box has been checked for the current simulation, results are also given, for each (mobile -
transmitters in active set) link, on the UL and DL downgrading factors applied on the SCH, the downlink total noise, Cell
powers transmitted on the FCH and the SCH, the downlink load factor, the downlink noise rise, the downlink reuse factor,
the total noise received at the terminal from the transmitter area (Iintra (DL) and the total noise received at the terminal
from other transmitter areas (Iextra (DL), and the total loss on the link(s). Moreover, A9155 provides the name of the
clutter class where the probe receiver is located, the orthogonality factor, the UL and DL macro diversity gains (on FCH
and SCH) associated with the clutter class.

See CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulation outputs on mobile components

VIII.6.5.g CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON MOBILE COMPONENTS
A9155 sums up power control simulation inputs and outputs, for all the users who try to be connected.

X and Y are the coordinates of users who try to be connected (geographic position determined by the 2
nd
random
trial). The power control is based on this order.

Note : Ejected users at the end of the power control are included in this list.

Service, user mobility and status activity are the 1
st
random trial results (user distribution generation).
Terminal and user profile are based on traffic description. According to the service and activity status assigned to a
user, A9155 determines his terminal and the corresponding user profile.
The carrier used for the mobile-transmitter connection.
DL and UL requested rates: they respectively correspond to the DL and UL effective bit rates of service.
DL and UL obtained rates: after power control simulation, the obtained rate equals the requested rate if the mobile is
connected. Else, the obtained rate is zero.
The total power transmitted by the terminal.
The best server among the transmitters entering mobile active set.
The Connection status refers to mobile ejection causes previously defined. It gives the reasons why the mobile, even
active, is not connected to any transmitter at the end of the simulation.
The HO status HO status represents the real number of sites used compared to the number of fingers.

For example, if the terminal active set size is 6 and if its number of fingers is 3, the mobile will be able to be connected
with none, one, two or three transmitters. A9155 will consider in simulations and in predictions (HO status study) the
following handover status, no handover (1/1), softer (1/2), soft (2/2), softer-soft (2/3), soft-soft (3/3), or softer-softer (1/3)
handovers.

The list of transmitters in connection with the mobile (Active set). The maximum number of transmitters in active set is
defined by the user in Terminal Properties and limited to 6 in A9155. Soft handover can be enabled/disabled for every
service.
Ec/Io values are calculated for each transmitter in active set and may be compared to Ec/Io thresholds and T-Drop
previously defined in Mobility Type Properties.

Note : Transmitters, which the Ec/Io value is AS-threshold value lower than the best one (Active Set 1), are rejected from
the active set.

The Downgrading factor for SCH: means the rate on the SCH was halved to remain within the maximum SCH
power, and the maximum cell power. It results in better signal quality because reducing the SCH rate increases the
processing gain, thus reduces the required C/I ratio for successful decoding.
The cell power transmitted on traffic channel. This parameter is determined for each (mobile transmitters in active
set) link.
The DL total noise is calculated for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link (FCH and SCH). This parameter is
calculated from the transmitter thermal noise and the DL total interference at the terminal.
The DL load factor (determined for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link) corresponds to the downlink total
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


362/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


interference total noise at the terminal ratio.
The DL noise rise (evaluated for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link) is deduced from the DL load factor.
The DL reuse factor (calculated for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link) is evaluated from the interference
received at the terminal from the intra transmitter area and the total interference received at the terminal from all the
transmitters (intra and extra cells).
DL intra-cellular interference for each cell (i) of the mobile active set:
( ) ( )
|
|
.
|

\
|
=
T
SCH
DL
tot
i
ortho
DL
tot
i
DL
ra
L
P
ic
P
F ic
P
Iint

DL extra-cellular interference for each cell (i) of the mobile active set
( ) ( )
|
|
.
|

\
|
=

T
SCH
DL
tot
ortho
Tx i Tx
DL
tot
DL
extra
L
P
ic
P
F ic
P
I
,

The total path loss (determined for each (mobile transmitters in active set) link) is calculated from transmitter and
terminal losses, path loss (propagation result), transmitter and terminal gains.
The number of uplink and downlink channel elements respectively refer to the number of channel elements
consumed by the user on UL and DL,
The orthogonality factor is user-defined in the clutter Properties window.
The shadowing margin is calculated from the reliability level specified when creating simulation and the model
standard deviation assigned to the corresponding clutter class in the clutter Properties window.
The UL macro diversity gain is determined for mobile receivers connected either on UL or on UL and DL.
( ) ( )
Nt
Eb
Nt
Eb
Gain sity Macrodiver UL
UL
BS tch
UL

=

The DL macro diversity gain is evaluated in case mobile receivers are connected either on DL or on UL and DL.
( ) ( )
Nt
Eb
Nt
Eb
Gain sity Macrodiver DL
DL
BS tch
DL

=


VIII.7 SPECIFIC CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION STUDIES
VIII.7.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION STUDIES : OVERVIEW
For CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) projects, A9155 provides two kinds of predictions :
Point analysis which enables you to get prediction at a specific location within your network :
Standard studies on pilot reception (Profile, Reception and Results tab),
Active set analysis of a real time probe user in order to determine CDMA pilot quality and connection status
at the receiver by using the AS analysis tab.

AS analysis is a radio reception diagnosis provided for:
a given simulation (determining network parameters)
a user-definable probe receiver with associated terminal, mobility and service. This receiver does not
create any interference.


Coverage studies where each map bin is considered as a probe user with associated terminal, mobility and service.
These are ordered in four different groups of studies, listed in a natural planning order, from the indispensable pilot
study to the study of downlink total noise, with respect to the propagation model as defined :
Pilot-oriented studies to determine pilot coverage by transmitter, the pilot coverage by signal level,
overlapping area, pilot quality (Ec/Io) and pilot pollution,
Service-oriented studies to determine service availability in uplink and downlink and effective service areas,
handover status study to analyse macro-diversity performance,
Downlink total noise study.

Except pilot coverage, coverage by signal level and overlapping studies, which are similar to classical coverage
studies, all other studies are specific to CDMA/CDMA2000 network planning and closely related to a particular
CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation.


Power control is achieved once only during simulation but never during prediction studies. Simulation outputs such as
uplink and downlink noise levels generated by the users may be used to evaluate the radio reception. Therefore,
prediction studies may be based on:
UL load and DL total power modelled during power control simulation for point analysis,
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 363/476


UL load and DL total power modelled during power control simulation for coverage studies,
User-definable UL load and DL total power for coverage studies :
Specific predictions can be based on either user defined load estimations (when filling manually the UL_load and
Total power cells from the cell table) or by using the "Commit loads" button (assigning to these columns the
calculated uplink loads and total powers from the current simulation) in the Cells tab window of a simulation result
window. To use these reported values, just select the None option from the Simulation scrolling box.


Specific CDMA coverage studies may be performed with four different purposes:
Analyse in detail one particular simulation,
Globally analyse all simulations and evaluate network stability with regard to traffic fluctuations,
Analyse an average simulation.,
Analyse user-definable parameters such as UL load and DL total power without simulation.



For these coverage studies, since study GUI is generic, the general rule is to choose :
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.
and to display the results as function of the attribute you want.

In this studies, each bin may be seen as a probe mobile, which does not create any interference

Caution : If you modify radio parameters, before recalculating predictions, do not forget to replay CDMA simulations first
in order to base predictions on up-to-date simulations. Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and
simulation displayed on map before further analysis. To help on that, A9155 provides a feature to automatically calculate
CDMA predictions after simulations without any intermediary step.

Important : Any of these specific CDMA studies requires propagation path loss on each bin.
VIII.7.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION PROCESS
VIII.7.2.a PREDICTING ON GIVEN CDMA/CDMA2000 CARRIERS
In A9155, specific CDMA studies can be based on given carriers.


To base your prediction on given carriers, proceed as follows :
Create a new prediction or access the properties of an existing coverage study you want to calculate again,
Click the Simulation tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Choose the carrier selection mode you want to consider in the Carrier scrolling menu,
Click OK or Apply to validate.


Note : when choosing a carrier, only cells using this carrier are taken into account in calculations. A9155 will display a
coverage by carrier. To get a coverage based on all the carriers, select the All option. In this case, A9155 displays a
multi-carrier coverage. It selects on each bin the best carrier according to the selection mode specified in the properties
of the transmitters from the current network.

VIII.7.2.b MODELLING SHADOWING IN CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTIONS
Transmitted powers on downlink and uplink interference determined during simulation are used. In each analysed bin, a
probe mobile is placed. The path loss of the probe mobile is the computed path loss (Lpath) plus a margin
(MShadowing). This one depends on the required reliability level, model standard deviation associated to the clutter
class where the probe mobile is and the mobile handover status. In case of SHO, a gain is calculated depending on the
number of used links.

You can enter a reliability level (x%) when defining prediction properties (point analysis: Profile, Reception and AS
analysis tab and coverage studies). Therefore, the evaluated pilot quality, uplink and downlink traffic channel qualities
are reliable x% of time.

CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


364/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Formulas used to compute shadowing margin in case of no handover and SHO (2 and 3 links) and SHO gains are
detailed in the Technical reference guide.
VIII.7.3 MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTIONS
VIII.7.3.a CREATING PREDICTIONS FROM MODIFIED CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
This feature is provided to automatically calculate CDMA/CDMA2000 predictions after simulations without intermediary
step. In fact, you just need to define the CDMA/CDMA2000 prediction studies you want to perform and then, press the
Calculate command: first, A9155 calculates the simulations and then, the predictions based on simulations. Therefore, it
is no more necessary to wait for the simulations to be finished to create the CDMA/CDMA2000 prediction studies and
start the calculations.

To do so, proceed as follows :
Create the CDMA prediction studies you want to perform and define their properties (colour, terminal,
mobility, service). As no simulation has been previously performed, you cannot base prediction studies on a
specific simulation,
Thus, choose either an average analysis (Average) or a statistical analysis based on a probability (All) on
all the future simulations.
Left click on the Calculate button (or F7),
The Creation of simulations window opens,
Specify the simulation inputs (number of simulations to be created, convergence criteria,
Press OK to start the calculations

A9155 performs the simulations and lists them in the CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation folder. Then, A9155 carries out the
prediction calculations based on the created simulations.
VIII.7.3.b MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION DISPLAY
CDMA/CDMA2000 prediction dialogs include the A9155 generic display tab. It enables to display covered areas with
graphic settings depending on any attribute (from transmitter, site, etc...) and to easily manage legends, tips, thresholds,
etc... Since prediction study user interface is generic, many associations between selected items in the Simulation tab (a
terminal, a mobility type - or all -, a service - or all -, a specific carrier - or all) and in the Display tab are available. So
several calculation and display settings are possible.

You can analyse different mobility and several services in a same study. For any CDMA/CDMA2000 study, in the
Simulation tab, you can choose All in the Service or/and SCH scrolling menus. In this case, A9155 works out the
coverage criterion for each service or/and SCH rates; a bin of the map will be covered if the studied coverage criterion is
met for any service or/and SCH rate. In addition, receiver definition and coverage display are not linked. Parameters set
in the Simulation tab are used in order to predetermine the coverage area (area where A9155 will display coverage)
while graphical settings (available in the Display tab) enable you to choose how to represent the coverage area. For
example, it is possible to perform multi-service or/and multi-SCH rate pilot reception analysis and to choose a coverage
display per transmitter or depending on any transmitter attribute.

The available display types (depending on the study to be carried out) are listed below :
Single colour : Coverage is mono colour; it displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied,
Colour per transmitter : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied. Moreover, the bin colour
corresponds to the colour of the first transmitter in active set (best server)
Colour per service : The receiver is not totally defined. Its service can take all existing service types. There are as
many graphical coverage layers as user-defined services. For each service, coverage layer displays areas where
radio conditions are satisfied
Colour per mobility : The receiver is not totally defined. Its mobility can take all existing mobility types. There are as
many graphical coverage layers as user-defined mobility types. For each mobility, coverage layer displays areas
where radio conditions are satisfied
Colour per probability : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied with different levels of
probability. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined probability thresholds (by default 0.5 and
0.9)
Colour per quality margin : Each coverage layer displays area where the quality margin is greater than the user-
defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined quality margins. The quality
margin is the difference between the quality level and the target quality level. There is intersection between layers
Colour per maximum quality level : Each coverage layer displays area where the maximum signal quality (even if not
reaching the quality target) exceeds the user-defined quality level. There are as many graphical coverage layers as
user-defined quality margins. There is intersection between layers
Colour per effective quality level : Each coverage layer displays area where the effective signal quality (min between
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 365/476


the maximum and the quality target) exceeds the user-defined quality level. There are as many graphical coverage
layers as user-defined quality margins. There is intersection between layers
Colour per handover status : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied for at least one transmitter
pilot quality. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined handover status. Each layer represents a
handover status. There is no intersection between layers
Colour per potential active transmitter number : Each coverage layer displays area where the number of potential
active transmitters is greater than the user-defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as
user-defined potential active transmitters. The potential active transmitter number corresponds to transmitters
checking all conditions to enter the active set. There is intersection between layers
Colour per required power level : Each coverage layer displays area where the required terminal power (in order for
transmitter to get a service) is greater than the user-defined required power thresholds. There are as many graphical
coverage layers as user-defined required power level. There is intersection between layers.
Colour per required power margin : Each coverage layer displays area where the required power margin exceeds the
user-defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined power margin. The
required power margin corresponds to the difference between the required terminal power and the maximum terminal
power. There is intersection between layers
Colour per minimum noise level: The displayed noise level is the lowest of the values calculated on all carriers.
Colour per average noise level: The displayed noise level is the average of calculated values on all carriers.
Colour per maximum noise level: The displayed noise level is the greatest of the values calculated on all carriers.
Colour per minimum noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the lowest of the values calculated from the downlink total
noise, on all carriers.
Colour per average noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the average of the values calculated from the downlink
total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per maximum noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the greatest of the values calculated from the downlink
total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per polluter number : The coverage displays areas where user is interfered by pilot signal from polluter
transmitters. A polluter transmitter is a transmitter that meets all the criteria to enter the active set but which is not
admitted due to the active set limit size..

VIII.7.4 CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION STUDIES
VIII.7.4.a ANALYSING PILOT RECEPTION (CDMA/CDMA2000)
This study displays areas where there is at least one transmitter which pilot quality at receiver (Ec/Io) is sufficient to be
admitted in the probe mobile active set [using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)]. Only
the pilot quality from best server is displayed.


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Pilot reception analysis (Ec/Io) option from
the study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional
Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice none refers to a null SCH rate.
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


366/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For example, take
care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or 16 in the scrolling list).

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VIII.7.4.b STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT) DOWNLINK (CDMA/CDMA2000)
This study displays areas where there is one transmitter (or several transmitters in macro-diversity) which traffic channel
quality at the receiver (Eb/Nt or combined Eb/Nt) is sufficient for the probe mobile to obtain a service [using the
propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)]. Downlink service area is limited by maximum
allowable traffic channel power.

Comment : Actually, for a circuit switched service, when there are several transmitters in active set, Eb/Nt from different
transmitters are combined in terminal and improve reception with a macro-diversity gain.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Service area (Eb/Nt) downlink option from the
study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional
Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 367/476


a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice none refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For example, take
care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or 16 in the scrolling list).

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VIII.7.4.c STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT) UPLINK (CDMA/CDMA2000)
This study displays areas where the traffic channel quality of probe mobile at transmitter (Eb/Nt) is sufficient for the
transmitter to get a service [using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)]. Uplink service
area is limited by maximum terminal power.

Comment : The macro diversity concept is also dealt with on the uplink. Its value depends on the handover status.

To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Service area (Eb/Nt) downlink option from the
study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional
Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


368/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice none refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For example, take
care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or 16 in the scrolling list).

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VIII.7.4.d STUDYING EFFECTIVE SERVICE AREA (CDMA/CDMA2000)
Effective service area is the intersection zone between uplink and downlink service areas [using the propagation model
as defined before (with priority order respect)]. It is the area where a service is really available for the probe mobile.


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Effective service area option from the study
types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab
is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 369/476


a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice none refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For example, take
care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or 16 in the scrolling list).

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VIII.7.4.e DEFINING HANDOFF STATUS (CDMA/CDMA2000)
This study displays areas [using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)] where the selected
service is available and where probe mobile has in its active set:
Only one transmitter : no handover (1/1)
Two non co-site transmitters : soft handover (2/2)
Two co-site transmitters : softer handover (1/2)
Three non co-site transmitters : soft-soft handover (3/3)
Three transmitters among them two co-site : softer-soft handover (merged with soft-softer handover) (2/3)
Three co-site transmitters : softer-softer handover (1/3)

Comment : In parenthesis is given equivalence between usual handover name and HO status notation sometimes used
in A9155, referring to number of sites/number of transmitters in the active set (See CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations :
Overview).

Caution : Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network.

In this study, handover is allowed on areas where the service chosen by the user is available.

For each study, a simulation tab enables to connect to one or all simulations. Furthermore, you can choose different
ways of displaying the same coverage to get a better analysis and dimensioning information on the network.


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the handover status option from the study types
window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab is
created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


370/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice none refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For example, take
care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or 16 in the scrolling list).

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VIII.7.4.f STUDYING DOWNLINK TOTAL NOISE (CDMA/CDMA2000)
This study enables you to display areas where the total noise (Nt as it is defined in formulas) exceeds user-defined levels
[using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect)].


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Downlink total noise option from the study
types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab
is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 371/476


windows.


The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice none refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For example, take
care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or 16 in the scrolling list).

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Note : In case of given service and carrier, the calculated and displayed coverage is the same for any selected display
per noise level (average, minimum or maximum) or any display per noise rise (average, minimum or maximum).

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must have been
replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no
guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply because simulated network may
be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis.

VIII.7.4.g CALCULATING PILOT POLLUTION (CDMA/CDMA2000)
This study displays the areas where user is interfered by pilot signal from polluter transmitters [using the propagation
model as defined before (with priority order respect)]. A polluter transmitter is a transmitter that meets all the criteria to
enter the active set but which is not admitted due to the active set limit size.

CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


372/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Pilot pollution option from the study types
window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab is
created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
windows.

The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria


In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of simulations and prefer
either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a statistical analysis of all simulations based on
a user-definable probability (probability must be a value between 0 and 1).

Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, A9155 takes into account UL load and DL
total power defined in the Cells properties.

The general rule is to choose:
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of simulations and
average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a reliability level (in %)
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.

Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice none refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For example, take
care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or 16 in the scrolling list).

Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, A9155 takes into account UL load percentage and DL total
transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, A9155 considers default values, 50% for UL
load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

Representation on map may are given regarding to the number of polluters. Each layer may be displayed independently
by selecting visibility flag in folder.

Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality margin). Each
layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.


Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of displayed
layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered stated in km
2
) where the
prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data are calculated in relation to the whole
computation zone and each environment class, when environments are used to describe the traffic cartography.

For an environment class i,

% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total

(Si)covered is the surface where the prediction criterion is met.
(Si)total is the total surface of the computation zone (or an environment class).

VIII.7.4.h ANALYSING A SCENARIO AT A POINT IN CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS
To get reception information for a given point on the map, you may use A9155 point analysis window. Even in CDMA
projects, you may use the Profile, Reception and Results tab windows as for the other projects, on the signal received
from the cell pilot.

Concerning pilot quality given by (Ec/Io) (which is the main parameter to enter an active set) and connection status, with
the point analysis tool, A9155 is able to get information about the active set analysis of a CDMA scenario (for given
mobile, mobility and service) at the receiver location on the map by using the propagation model as defined before (with
priority order respect).

C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 373/476


To make active the AS analysis window :
From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu,
The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment,
Left click on the AS analysis tab,
Click the from the toolbar,
Move over the current map to the places where you want to make your analysis.

Note : The Point analysis window is automatically displayed when clicking on the button from the toolbar,

Point analysis is a radio reception diagnosis provided for:
a given simulation (determining network parameters)
a user-definable probe receiver terminal, a SCH rate and a service

Pilot quality and connection status (Pilot, Uplink, Downlink) are displayed for previous conditions and without taking into
account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the receiver conditions can
check the point analysis diagnosis, simply because simulated network may be saturated.

A description of the AS analysis window is given below.






















Bar graph shows pilot reception from all transmitters on the same carrier (with the same colours as the one defined for
each transmitter), displaying limit values required to be in active set (Ec/Io threshold, T-drop). Grey background displays
transmitters in active set. A third vertical bar indicating T-Drop defined in the mobility properties boxes may be displayed
on the AS analysis window.

Reminder: The transmitters taking part in the active set have to check the following conditions:
They must be using the same carrier.
The pilot quality (Ec/Io) from the best server has to exceed the Ec/Io threshold (defined for each mobility type).
The pilot quality from other transmitters has to be greater than the T-Drop value (defined for each mobility type).
Other transmitters have to belong to the neighbour list of the best server if you have selected the restricted to
neighbours option (in Global parameters tab).

You may modify receiver characteristics, A9155 will automatically check pilot quality and channel availability:
If you change terminal, it will modify maximum available transmitting power in uplink and the active set size.
If you change mobility, it will modify pilot quality thresholds and Eb/Nt target per service in downlink.
If you change service, it will modify the active set size and Eb/Nt target in downlink.

Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice none refers to a null SCH rate.
Displays the pilot reception of
transmitters out of the active set for
this scenario. Filled bars indicate the
transmitters which respect the
active set constraints. Even if more
transmitters respect the constraints,
the active set size is limited to the
number defined in the terminal
properties and is function of the
current service. Transmitters with
empty bars do not respect the active
set constraints
Displays the pilot reception in term of
active set components for this
scenario. Active set is represented in
grey. Filled bars indicate the
transmitters which respect the
active set constraints. Even if more
transmitters respect the constraints,
the active set size is limited to the
number defined in the terminal
properties and is function of the
current service
Vertical bar representing the lower boundary
to enter the active set (defined by the T-Drop
given per mobility type)
Vertical bar representing
the Ec/Io threshold to
enter the active set
(defined in the mobility
type properties page)
Displays the connection
status (pilot, uplink and
downlink traffic) for the
current scenario.
: successful connection,
: failed connection
Choose from the scrolling list
the single simulation you
want this point analysis to
be based on
Choose from the scrolling
lists the parameters of a
probe user to be studied
among the selected
simulation
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


374/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For example, take
care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or 16 in the scrolling list).

VIII.8 SPECIFIC 1XEV-DO FEATURES
VIII.8.1 DEFINING A (EB/NT <-> MAX RATE) LOOK-UP TABLE
A default (Eb/NtMax rate) look-up table is implemented in the tool. Nevertheless, if there is an Atoll.ini file stored in the
A9155 installation directory, A9155 considers values contained in the file; else, it takes into account default values. So, it
is possible to define a user-defined look-up table giving the relationship between rate and Eb/Nt in an Atoll.ini file. These
values will be used in order to predict 1xEV-DO coverages. You must create this file and place it in the A9155 installation
directory.

The file must have the following syntax:

[RatesEbNt]
Values="Rate1 value EbNt1 value Rate2 value EbNt2 value.

Example: Information described below

[RatesEbNt]
Values="38.4 4.5 76.8 4.5 102.6 4.3 153.6 4.5 204.8 4.1 307.2 4 614 4 921.6 4.7 1228.8 5 1843 7.4 2457 8.5"

Corresponds to this look-up table

Rate Eb/Nt
38.4 4.5
76.8 4.5
102.6 4.3
153.6 4.5
204.8 4.1
307.2 4
614 4
921.6 4.7
1228 8.5
1843 7.4
2457 8.5

Note : This file is read only when A9155 is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the A9155 session and to restart it
in order to take into account any modification performed in Atoll.ini.

From rate and Eb/Nt, it is easy to calculate the corresponding C/I using the following relation:
R
W
I
C
N
E
t
b
=
(in W)

Hence, we get:

Rate Eb/Nt Corresponding C/I
38.4 4.5 -10.6
76.8 4.5 -7.5
102.6 4.3 -6.5
153.6 4.5 -4.5
204.8 4.1 -3.7
307.2 4 -2.0
614 4 1
921.6 4.7 3.5
1228 8.5 5
1843 7.4 9.2
2457 8.5 11.5

C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 375/476


VIII.8.2 CREATING 1XEV-DO SPECIFIC PREDICTIONS
This study displays areas according to the C/I level (C/I) or the maximum downlink rate that can be supported. This study
is linked with the definition of a look-up table linking required (Eb/Nt)and defined rates.


To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the 1xEV-DO coverage option from the study
types window. The open window is made of three tab windows : General, Receiver, and Display. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.

The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria

In this study, each bin of the map corresponds to a probe user with associated terminal and service. Hence, in the
receiver tab, you have to define choose a reliability level (in %), a Radio configuration, a service (or all) and a carrier (or
all).

The Display tab is the A9155 generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as function of any
compatible attribute.

On each bin, A9155 calculates the C/I level. If you have selected a colour per C/I threshold, it just compares the
calculated value to the defined thresholds. In case of a colour per maximum data rate, A9155 uses the look-up table to
determine the supported maximum data rate. It considers the C/I interval around the calculated C/I and takes the rate
associated to the lower C/I limit. Finally, when choosing a display per Ec/Io, it works out Ec/Io value on each bin and
compares it to the defined thresholds. Different display types are detailed hereafter.

Display per C/I level
In the Receiver tab, choose one terminal, the service and one carrier or all of them. Then, in the Display tab, select Value
intervals as display type and C/I as field.

On each bin inside the computation zone, A9155 calculates the C/I level.

+
=
i j Txj
term Txj
M
Txi
M
N P
P
I
C
,
0

where
P
Tx
M
is the maximum signal level received from Tx (
L
P
P
Tx
T
Tx
Tx
M
max
=
),
P
Tx
max
is the transmitter maximum power,
L
Tx
T
is the transmitter-terminal total loss.

A bin of the map is coloured if the C/I level exceeds (=) entered thresholds (the bin colour depends on the C/I level).
Coverage consists of several independent layers which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the C/I level exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.

Display per Ec/Io level
In the Receiver tab, choose one terminal, the service and one carrier or all of them. Then, in the Display tab, select Value
intervals as display type and Ec/Io as field.

On each bin inside the computation zone, A9155 calculates the Ec/Io level.

+
=
+
=
j i Txj
term Txj
M
Txi
M
N P
P
I C
C
Io
Ec
,
0


A bin of the map is coloured if the Ec/Io level exceeds (=) entered thresholds (the bin colour depends on the Ec/Io level).
Coverage consists of several independent layers which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the Ec/Io level exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.

Display per maximum rate
In the Receiver tab, choose one terminal, the service and one carrier or all of them. Then, in the Display tab, select Value
intervals as display type and Max rate as field.

CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


376/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


On each bin inside the computation zone, A9155 calculates the C/I level. To determine the supported maximum data
rate, A9155 uses the look-up table defined in the Atoll.ini file if it exists or the default table. It considers the C/I interval
around the calculated C/I and takes the rate associated to the lower C/I limit.

A bin of the map is coloured if the rate equals or exceeds entered thresholds (the bin colour depends on the rate).
Coverage consists of several independent layers which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where a maximum rate (threshold value) is supported.

Other displays
On each bin inside the computation zone, A9155 calculates the C/I level and determines the corresponding data rate as
explained above.

A bin of the map is coloured if the calculated rate equals or exceeds the lowest rate defined in the Atoll.ini file or the
default look-up table (38.4 kbps). Coverage consists of several independent layers which you may manage visibility in
the workspace.

VIII.9 CDMA/CDMA2000 RESOURCES ALLOCATION
VIII.9.1 CDMA/CDMA2000 RESOURCES ALLOCATION : OVERVIEW
Once your CDMA/CDMA2000 network is built, A9155 provides you some additional features in order to complete your
network planning by the allocation of neighbour cells and PN Offsets.

Like in GSM/GPRS/EDGE or UMTS, it is possible to easily allocate neighbours within A9155. This can be made either
manually, or automatically, imposing several constraints on the potential cells that could be part of a neighbourhood.
Then, once allocated, neighbours can be easily managed (modification or deletion). Finally, A9155 makes easy the
visualisation of neighbourhoods on the active map.

PN Offsets permit to separate cells from others. It is strongly recommended to assign different codes to a given cell and
to cells belonging to its neighbour list. Some additional separation constraints can be also defined. In A9155, you can
either allocate it manually for each cell or automatically for all cells or a group of cells in the network. Depending on the
allocation strategy, several constraints can be imposed on PN Offsets groups and domains, exceptional pairs, distance
and neighbours. At any moment, it is possible to check the consistency of the current PN Offset allocation in the studied
network.

VIII.9.2 CDMA/CDMA2000 NEIGHBOURS
VIII.9.2.a ALLOCATING CDMA/CDMA2000 CELL NEIGHBOURS MANUALLY
Cell neighbours list represents a way to optimise the search for possible cells aimed to perform handover from the
current coverage area. Allocating neighbours in a network is optional but makes the handover process easier. Defining
neighbours helps in the determination of appropriate PN Offsets.

Note : Neighbours have impact on interference calculation : all cells in a network interfere with the others. Neighbours of
any linked project in co-planning can also be displayed and chosen manually.


Manual allocation of CDMA/CDMA2000 neighbours must be performed for each cell, one at a time. To do this, proceed
as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Either,
Choose the [Cells:Open] command from the open menu
Once the cells table is open,
Either
Right click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Choose the record properties option from the context menu (or from the Records menu from
the menu bar),
Or
Double click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 377/476


Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
Use the What's this help to get information about fields available in the current window,
In the displayed window, in the top table, click on cell to choose from the scrolling box the desired
cell as a neighbour for the current one. In the scrolling box are displayed all the transmitters located
within a radius of 30 km around the reference transmitter (cell),
Click either another table cell, or the button to validate and add a new line to the
table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Or
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the open menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, click on a table cell to determine either base cells or associated neighbours in
the network,
Click another table cell to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.

Notes :
You can also use manual allocation tools to check currently allocated neighbourhoods,
This feature only deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.

An automatic allocation tool is also available.

VIII.9.2.b ALLOCATING CDMA/CDMA2000 CELL NEIGHBOURS AUTOMATICALLY
You can carry out neighbour allocation globally on all the cells or only on a group of cells. In this case, A9155 will
consider all the cells contained in the group of transmitters, the symmetric neighbours of these cells and all the other
ones, which have an intersection area with the cells of the group.

Allocating automatically permits to allocate neighbours globally in the current network by imposing constraints on cells of
active transmitters that must be satisfied. Force neighbour reciprocity, adjacency and within co-site is possible.


To allocate automatically CDMA/CDMA2000 neighbours in a network, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Automatic allocation...] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the parameters for the current Auto Neighbours allocation study,

You can force neighbour adjacency. Therefore, when selecting the Force adjacent cells as neighbours option, adjacent
cells are top ranked in the neighbour list just after co-site cells. If there is not enough space in neighbour list, A9155
displays a warning in the Events viewer indicating that the adjacent cell constraint cannot be respected.

Click the button to start calculations,
Once calculations are achieved, click the button to attribute neighbours to transmitters as
displayed in the current table,

When clicking on the Commit button, A9155 assigns neighbours to cells. Neighbours are listed in the Neighbours tab of
each cell Properties window.

In the Results part, A9155 lists all the cells fulfilling the specified neighbourhood criteria. Then, it orders them so as to
eliminate some of them from the list if the maximum number of neighbours is exceeded. If transmitters have a current
allocation, they are noted existing.

When selecting the Reset option, A9155 deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour allocation. If
not selected, the existing neighbours are kept. Therefore, if you add a new cell i and start a new allocation without
selecting the Reset option:
A9155 determines the neighbour list of the cell i,
It examines the neighbour list of other cells. If there is space in neighbour list of another cell j:
- The cell i enters the cell j neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. The cell i will be the first one in the
neighbour list.
- The cell i does not enter the cell j neighbour list if allocation criteria are not satisfied.
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


378/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


If the cell j belongs to the cell i neighbour list and the force symmetry option is selected:
- The cell i will enter the cell j neighbour list if there is space in the cell j neighbour list.
- If the cell j neighbour list is full, A9155 removes the cell j from the cell i neighbour list in order to preserve the
link symmetry

Click the Close button to achieve the procedure.


Notes :
This feature only deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.
No prediction study is needed to perform the automatic neighbour allocation. When starting an automatic neighbour
allocation, A9155 automatically calculates the path loss matrices if it does not find them.

VIII.9.2.c DISPLAYING CURRENT CDMA/CDMA2000 NEIGHBOUR LIST
A9155 provides the possibility to open an editable table referencing all the CDMA/CDMA2000 neighbours of the current
network.

To access the CDMA/CDMA2000 neighbour table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the open menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, left column lists reference cells, right column, the related neighbours.

This table can be used to allocate neighbours manually.

VIII.9.2.d DELETING ALLOCATED CDMA/CDMA2000 NEIGHBOURS
To do this, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Either,
Choose the [Cells:Open] command from the open menu
Once the cells table is open,
Either
Right click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Choose the record properties option from the context menu (or from the Records menu from
the menu bar),
Or
Double click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
or
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the open menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, select the desired neighbour line,
Press the keyboard Del (or Suppr.) key
Click on OK to validate and close the dialog box.


Note : this can also be made for external neighbours from a linked project in co-planning.

VIII.9.2.e DISPLAYING CDMA/CDMA2000 NEIGHBOURS ON THE MAP
Once the CDMA cell neighbours have been allocated, you can display a given neighbourhood (at the transmitter level)
on the map.

To display the neighbours of any transmitter (whatever the carrier is), proceed as follows :
Click on the visible neighbourhood icon from the toolbar,
Left click on the desired transmitter to select it on the map,
The neighbours are displayed (colour of the reference transmitter) on the map such as :
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 379/476





for the transmitter Site4_0 located on Site 4


Note : This feature only deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.

VIII.9.3 PN OFFSETS
VIII.9.3.a PN OFFSETS : OVERVIEW
In IS95-CDMA and CDMA2000 documents, it is possible to allocate a PN offset to each cell. PN offset is used to identify
a cell. PN offset is a time offset used by a cell to shift a Pseudo Noise sequence. Mobile identifies the strongest received
PN sequence and gets its phase, which identifies the cell.

Different problems (adjacent PN offset confusion, co-PN offset confusion or composite neighbours list alias confusion)
can appear due to bad PN offset allocation. In order to avoid these problems, two parameters have to be managed by
PN offset allocation: the PILOT_INC (separation between two available PN offsets) and the PN offset reuse distance. By
increasing the first one, we avoid adjacent problems in areas with large cells (rural areas). By increasing the second one,
we avoid Co-PN and alias problems in areas with small cells (urban areas).

512 PN Offsets are available. They are distributed in 64 clusters of 8 PN Offsets. Clusters are numbered from 0 to 63.
PN Offsets are numbered from 0 to 511.

Available PN Offsets depend on the country and on the area; it is necessary to distinguish borders from other zones. To
model this, domain and group tables have been created.
A domain corresponds to a border or a zone of the country.
A group is a set of clusters.
Each group must be associated to one or several domains. Therefore, a domain consists of several groups.

Firstly, PN Offsets can be manually assigned to any cell of a CDMA/CDMA2000 network. Then, using the definition of
groups and domains, it is possible to impose some constraints on them and on neighbours, second neighbours,
minimum distance and exceptional pairs to start the automatic tool.

Once allocation is completed, a consistency checking tool is available.

VIII.9.3.b CREATING PN OFFSETS DOMAINS AND GROUPS
512 PN Offsets are available. They are distributed in 64 clusters of 8 PN Offsets. Clusters are numbered from 0 to 63.
PN Offsets are now numbered from 0 to 511.

To define domains and groups of PN Offsets, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


380/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Choose the [Cells:PN Offsets codes: Domains] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Domains dialog, you can enter a domain per line. To validate a domain creation, select another line.
Either
Select a domain in the table and click on the Properties button.
Or
Select the line relating to a domain and double click on it.
In the domain properties dialog, specify the name of group(s) that you want to associate to this domain and
define for each of them:
- The lowest available PN Offsets (Min),
- The highest available PN Offsets (Max),
- The value interval between the PN Offsets (Step),
- The PN Offset(s) you do not want to use (Excluded). You can paste a list of PN Offsets; separator
must be a blank character,
- Additional PN Offset(s) you want to consider during allocation (Extra). You can paste a list of PN
Offsets; separator must be a blank character,

You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of PN Offsets window.

To do so, proceed as follows :
After defining all the domains, close the Domains dialog,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:PN Offsets: Groups] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Group of PN Offsets window, select a domain and associate one or several groups of PN Offsets to
each of them. Define the groups as explained above.


The defined domains can be now assigned to cells in order then to be used as constraints in the automatic allocation of
PN Offsets.

VIII.9.3.c ASSIGNING A PN OFFSET DOMAIN TO A CELL
After having defined domains and groups, you can assign a domain to each cell. Therefore, A9155 will choose PN
Offsets of the associated domain during allocation.

To assign a domain to cells, you must access cell properties and fill the appropriate field. This can be made either from :
The transmitter property dialog (Cells tab),
The cell property dialog,
The cell table.


The domain association will then be used by the automatic allocation tool.

VIII.9.3.d ALLOCATING PN OFFSETS TO CDMA/CDMA2000 CELLS MANUALLY
A9155 allows you to manually force PN Offsets for cells of your network. Hence, these can be locked in order to be kept
unchanged by the automatic tool.

To give a PN Offset to a cell, you must access cell properties. This can be made either from :
The transmitter property dialog (Cells tab),
The cell property dialog,
The cell table.


After allocation is completed (manually or automatically), constraints can be also checked also by an automatic tool.

VIII.9.3.e DEFINING EXCEPTIONAL PAIRS FOR PN OFFSET ALLOCATION
In addition to standard constraints (reuse distance, neighbours and domains), it is possible to specify pairs of cells, which
cannot have the same PN Offset. You can enter these forbidden pairs in the Exceptional separation constraints table.

C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 381/476


To access the Exceptional pairs table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:PN Offsets: Exceptional pairs] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
In the Exceptional separation constraints dialog, indicate the pairs of cells.


Standard features for managing table content (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter, Sort, Fields)
are available in context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and Records menus.

VIII.9.3.f ALLOCATING PN OFFSETS TO CDMA/CDMA2000 CELLS AUTOMATICALLY
You can carry out PN Offsets allocation on all the cells or only on a group of cells. In this case, A9155 will consider all
the cells defined in the group of transmitters.

PN Offset allocation is based on:
Neighbourhood and secondary neighbourhood if neighbour allocation has been performed beforehand,
Reuse distance,
Domains of PN Offsets,
Forbidden pairs.

PN Offset automatic allocation can also be made on a specific carrier or on all. A9155 assigns PN Offsets to transmitters
using the selected carrier.


To automatically allocate PN Offsets to all the cells, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:PN Offsets: Automatic allocation] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,

In this dialog, you can impose to the algorithm to take into account :
The existing neighbours listed in the Neighbours table (option Existing neighbours) : A cell and its neighbours
cannot have the same PN Offset. The neighbours of the cell cannot have the same PN Offset.

The neighbours of listed neighbours (option Second neighbours) : A cell and the neighbours of its neighbours
cannot have the same PN Offset. In addition, all the neighbours (first neighbours and second neighbours) cannot
have the same PN Offset.

Note : A9155 automatically selects the option Existing neighbours when choosing the option Second neighbours.

A criterion on Ec/Io (option Additional Ec/Io conditions) : All the cells fulfilling Ec/Io condition will not have the same
PN Offset.

When this option is selected, you must specify a minimum threshold (minimum Ec/Io), a margin (Ec/Io margin) and a
reliability level. In this case, for a reference cell A, A9155 considers all the cells B that can enter active-set on the area
where the reference cell is the best server (area where (Ec/Io)A exceeds the minimum Ec/Io and is the highest one and
(Ec/Io)B is within a Ec/Io margin of (Ec/Io)A).

Note : A9155 takes into account the total downlink power used by the cell in order to evaluate Io. Io equals the sum of
total transmitted powers. In case this parameter is not specified in the cell properties, A9155 uses 50% of the maximum
power.

A reuse distance : radius within which two cells on the same carrier cannot have the same PN Offset.

Select one carrier or all on which you want to run the allocation,
Select the Reset all PN Offsets option to delete the existing PN Offsets and carry out a new PN Offset
allocation. If not selected, existing PN Offsets are kept.
Click on Run to start the automatic allocation; A9155 displays the automatic allocation results in the Results
part,
Then, click on Commit to assign PN Offsets to cells.


To automatically allocate PN Offsets to a group of cells, proceed as follows :
CDMA/CDMA2000 Projects management


382/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the group of transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:PN Offsets: Automatic allocation] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Select calculation options (as defined above) in the dialog,
Click on Run to start the automatic allocation; A9155 displays the automatic allocation results in the Results
part,
Then, click on Commit to assign PN Offsets to the group of cells.

Note : A9155 will take into account both real distance and the azimuths of antennas to calculate the inter-transmitter
distance to be compared with the reuse distance.

VIII.9.3.g PN OFFSET ALLOCATION PROCESS
Algorithm works as follows:
A9155 assigns different PN Offsets to a given cell i and to its neighbours,
For a cell j which is not neighbour of the cell i, A9155 gives it a different PN Offset:
- If the distance between both cells is lower than the reuse distance,
- If the cell i -cell j pair is forbidden.
When the Second neighbours option is checked, a cell and the neighbours of its neighbours cannot have the same
PN Offset. In addition, all the neighbours (first neighbours and second neighbours) cannot have the same PN Offset.

A9155 allocates PN Offsets starting with the most constrained cell and ending with the lowest constrained one. The cell
constraint level depends on its number of neighbours and whether the cell is neighbour of other cells. Here, the
neighbour term includes both manually specified or automatically allocated neighbours and cells, which are within the
reuse distance of a studied cell. When cells have the same constraint level, cell processing is based on order of
transmitters in the Transmitters folder.

Note : In order to calculate the effective inter-transmitter distance (which will be compared to the reuse distance), A9155
takes into account both real distance and azimuths of antennas. For further information, please, refer to Technical
reference guide.

The PN Offset choice depends on domains associated to cells and on the selected allocation strategy. When no domain
is assigned to cells, A9155 uses the 512 PN Offsets. Several scenarios are detailed hereafter:

Let us consider 10 PN Offsets to be allocated.

1
st
case: We assume that any domain is assigned to cells. Here, A9155 will be able to use the 512 PN Offsets.

A9155 will choose eight codes in the cluster 0 and two PN Offsets in the cluster 1. Therefore, the allocated PN
Offsets will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.


2
nd
case: We assume that the domain 1 is associated to cells. Domain 1 contains two groups, the group 1 consisted
of cluster 0 (available PN Offsets: 0 to 7) and the group 2 including clusters 2 and 3 (available PN Offsets: 16 to 31).

A9155 will choose eight PN Offsets in the group 1 and two other ones in the group 2 (the first two PN Offsets of
the cluster 2). So, allocation result will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 16, 17.


3
rd
case: We assume that the domain 1 is associated to cells. Domain 1 contains one group, the group 1 consisted of
cluster 1 (available PN Offsets: 8 to 15). As there are not enough PN Offsets available in the group 1, A9155 does not
allocate any PN Offsets and displays an error message PN Offsets allocation failed.

VIII.9.3.h CHECKING THE CONSISTENCY OF THE PN OFFSET ASSIGNMENTS
A checking algorithm is available. It enables you to examine if there are some inconsistencies after having manually
performed some changes.

To use the checking algorithm, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:PN Offsets: Check consistency] command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
C H A P T E R 8


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 383/476


In the PN Offset checking window, select the allocation criteria that you want to check:
- Neighbourhood: checking is carried out on the neighbour cells (listed in the Neighbour tab); they
must not have the same PN Offset,
- Second order neighbours. A9155 checks that :
- A cell and the neighbours of its neighbours do not have the same PN Offset,
- All the neighbours (first neighbours and second neighbours) do not have the same PN
Offset.
- Exceptional pairs: checking is performed on the forbidden pairs of cells; they must not have the same
PN Offset,
- Reuse distance: checking concerns cells which inter-transmitter distance is lower than the reuse
distance you can define; they must not have the same PN Offset,
- Domains: A9155 checks if the allocated PN Offsets belong to the domain assigned to the cells.
Click on OK to start the checking algorithm.


A9155 details the checking results in a report. This report is a text file called CodeCheck.txt; it is stored in the temporary
folder on your workstation. For each selected criterion, A9155 gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details
each of them.

For criteria 1, 2, 3 and 4, it displays the name of cells and the common PN Offset. In case of criterion 5, it lists the name
of cells, which do not satisfy the criterion, the associated domains and the allocated PN Offsets.



C H A P T E R 9

























Management measurements
9
Managing measurements


386/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 387/476


IX MANAGING MEASUREMENTS
IX.1 MANAGING MEASUREMENTS : OVERVIEW
in A9155, the measurement module provides two types of drive tests : CW measurements and Test mobile data.

The aim of CW measurements is to analyse measurements made on the real field referring to only one transmitter (at a
given frequency - Continuous Wave) in order to calibrate propagation models. Test mobile data refer to measurements
related to several servers, each point referring to a serving cell and to a list of neighbours. The goal of test mobile data is
to check and to improve the quality of an existing network.

The creation of CW measurements in A9155 is very easy and can be made either by importing measurements or general
data samples (even from PlaNET data) or by pasting measurement results. The way CW measurements are imported
can be managed in configurations which permits the user to make easier import procedures. In addition, the multiple
import of CW measurement files is supported. It is also possible to create paths to define a set of points where a
prediction calculation can be performed.

The management of any CW measurement path is very complete and provide several features concerning, for example,
the update of geo data, user-defined additional fields, the display of any path in a generic way.

By using the features which compares imported measurements values and A9155 prediction calculation results, you can
apply measurements import either to select the best suited model or, more accurately, to refine the parameters of the
selected model. Furthermore, it is possible to add predictions from other transmitters on any CW measurement path.

The CW Measurements window allows you to analyse both measurement and prediction fields very precisely using the
point analysis tool. It is also possible to synchronise the analysis of a CW measurement path both in the table, on the
map and on the specific CW measurement window.

It is possible the export path and measurement results in order to make them available in other application.

The creation of Test mobile data path is possible by importing ASCII text or TEMS files for any type of technology. All the
information contained along the considered path can be listed in a manageable table and be used for analysis in a
specific test mobile data window.

Like for the CW measurements, import configuration and multiple import is supported on test mobile data files. In
addition, all other classical features concerning the properties of any test mobile data path have been implemented
(filters, display, export in a vector file, management at the folder level, synchronisation between the specific test mobile
data window, the map and the related data table).

IX.2 CW MEASUREMENT DATA PATHS
IX.2.1 CREATION OF A CW MEASUREMENT PATH
IX.2.1.a CREATING A CW MEASUREMENT SESSION
In A9155, CW measurements sessions are sorted as sites or transmitters, i.e., in folders in the Data tab explorer window.
Because a CW measurement session refers to a main transmitter, A9155 groups the imported or created CW
measurement paths by transmitter. Like other objects organized in folders in A9155, these are easily manageable. So, to
reach a specific CW measurement session, expand both CW measurements and reference transmitter folders by clicking
the buttons (or contract with the buttons).

CW Measurements folder global properties are reachable from the associated context menu (right click on the CW
measurements folder).

To create a CW measurement session, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the CW Measurements folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New...,
A CW measurement session properties box is open,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window :
Managing measurements


388/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Give a name to the CW measurement path,
Specify the transmitter name which the CW measurements have been performed around,
Indicate the transmitter frequency, the receiver height and the gain of receiver antenna.
Define the reception unit compatible with CW measurements.

When this is made, you may either edit the open CW measurement table, paste values in it, or create a CW
measurement path.

Notes :
To establish the CW measurement session, you must link it with a transmitter for the measures to be based on.
Features available in the CW Measurement folder context menu are also offered in each group context menu.
Therefore, you can add a new CW measurement path in a group using New and Import commands and define unique
prediction, statistics and display settings for all the paths available in a group thanks to the Properties command.

IX.2.1.b PASTING A CW MEASUREMENT PATH
During a CW measurement session creation, you may paste the coordinates of a path and, eventually, its associated CW
measurement values. This procedure is useful if your CW measurements are stored in a spreadsheet (Excel, Word).
Coordinates to be pasted refer to the display coordinate system currently defined.

To do this, proceed as follows :
Make displayed the New CW measurement session window,
Use the What's this help to get description about available fields in the open dialog window,
Open the spreadsheet where your CW measurement file is stored,
Select X and Y coordinates and CW measurements to be imported and copy them with either the Ctrl+V
command or the Copy command from the Edit menu,
Switch to the open New CW measurement session window,
Precise the paste data reception unit,
Click on the button
Click OK to validate.

Note : if you paste only the X and Y coordinates, CW measurement values are set to 0 along the associated path. If CW
measurements are not included at this time, you will not be able to do it next.

IX.2.1.c DRAWING A CW MEASUREMENT PATH
When a CW measurement session has been defined, you can create a CW measurement path on the current map by
simply using the mouse. You can either put CW measurement points one by one, or draw a path with equal distance
separating each CW measurement point.

To add points in a CW measurement session, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CW Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CW measurement session you want to add CW measurement points,
Choose the add points... option from the context menu,
Left click on the map with the pointer where to put the appropriate location for the CW measurement
points,
Press the 'Esc' button on your keyboard or double click to finish the current points adding.


To add a path in a CW measurement session, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CW Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CW measurement session you want to add CW measurement points,
Choose the add path... option from the context menu,
Precise the length step separating two consecutive CW measurement points,
Left click on the map with the pointer for each CW measurement path corner,
C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 389/476


Press the 'Esc' button on your keyboard or double click to finish the current path building.


Note : adding points or adding a path is available only when no measures values have been imported in the current CW
measurement session. Nevertheless, you may add points to any other CW measurement session.

Caution : these functions cannot be used to modify the imported CW measurement.

IX.2.1.d IMPORTING A CW MEASUREMENT PATH
In A9155, you may import CW measurement text files with .dat, .txt and .csv extensions.

To do this, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the CW Measurements folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Import...,
Specify the path, name and the format of the file to be imported in the open window,
Click to validate your choice,
A CW measurement import window is open,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window :
Click on the Setup tab :
Check that you have chosen the right configuration. You may change it: click on the Configuration
scrolling menu and select another one,
Check also the import setting automatically provided by the configuration,
You can change some parameters in the File part such as the number of the first CW measurement
line, the list separator ( , tab, ;) and decimal symbol (, or .) used in the file to be imported,
Give a correlation between the displayed columns and A9155 internal CW measurement fields by
either clicking on each cell in the Field line and then, selecting a field in the list or by clicking on the
Setup button. In the last case, the CW Measurement setup window, where three A9155 internal
fields, X, Y and CW measurements, are listed, is displayed. The X and Y fields have to be assigned
unlike the CW Measurements field which is optional.
In order to go on the import, open the General tab :
Indicate the CW measurement name,
Specify the name of transmitter on which the CW measurements refer to
Enter the transmitter frequency, the receiver height, the gain and losses of the receiver antenna,
Define the unit of CW measurement and the coordinate system of CW measurement points,
Click on the button to achieve the import CW measurement procedure.


Using this procedure, you may also import general data (location names, field characteristics, etc...) along the imported
CW measurement path, if the extra data has the same format as the imported coordinates and CW measurement data.
To achieve this, you just have to select the appropriate format in the cell type in each column. When this is done, data
are available to be displayed on the map with the CW measurement points.


Notes :
To establish the CW measurement session, you must link it with a transmitter for the measures to be based on.
When the CW measurement file to be imported contains fields, which the name corresponds to name of an A9155
internal field (e.g. field Distance), A9155 imports the field but changes its name to differentiate it. In fact, A9155
ends the imported field name with (file) (e.g. field Distance(File)).
When the imported file contains fewer lines than the defined number of the first CW measurement line, A9155 warns
you the current configuration will be applied with a reinitialisation of the first CW measurement line number to 1.
With configuration, it is possible to import several CW measurement at the same time.
You can optionally import a CW measurement path to existing reference transmitter folders. To do that, follow the
procedure above, but reach the reference transmitter folder (instead of the CW Measurement folder only) by expand
the CW Measurements folder by left clicking on the button.

Managing measurements


390/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IX.2.1.e IMPORTING SEVERAL CW MEASUREMENT PATHS
There are two solutions in order to import several CW measurement files at once.

The first way is the file multi-selection. To do this, proceed as follows :
Follow the standard steps of the import CW measurements procedure, select several files in the Open
window,
Either,
In the Open window, optionally specify an import configuration in the "Files of type" scrolling box" in
order to filter only files respecting the format defined in the considered configuration,
Select the files you want to import simultaneously (multi-selection is possible by using the 'Shift' key,
Click the button,

Or,
Select the files you want to import simultaneously (multi-selection is possible by using the 'Shift' key,
Click the button,
The import CW measurements window opens,
Optionally specify an import configuration (Configuration part) that will be consistent with the format
of the files being imported,
In that case, you may import several CW measurement files based on the same transmitter and with the
same associated configuration. In this case, you just need to indicate the transmitter and the configuration
once,
Click on the all button: all the paths will be imported at the same time.


Notes
If the selected CW measurement files are based on several transmitters and/or have different configurations, you
cannot use the button. For each file, indicate a transmitter and/or a configuration and then, click the
button.
When using the Import all button, A9155 does not import files for which the configuration does not correspond to the
selected one. It displays an error message and goes on the import with next file.


It is also possible to import in one shot surveys related to different transmitters and/or different configurations by the
mean of an index file containing information usually entered through the GUI:

Column
name
Description
File File name
Transmitter Transmitter name (must be in the Transmitters folder of the .atl document)
Freq (MHz) Transmitter frequency (default is the central frequency of the main frequency band associated to the
transmitter, if not found it is 1000 MHz)
Units Reception unit (default is the global reception unit available in the Option dialog (dBm, dBV, dBV/m)
Coordinates Coordinate system code (default is the code of the coordinate system selected as the Display system in
the Options dialog, the code is available in the system properties)
Height(m) Receiver height (m) (default is the receiver height defined in the Predictions folder properties).
Gain(dB) Receiver gain (dB) (default is 1 dB)
Losses(dB) Receiver losses (dB) (default is 0 dB)
Configuration Configuration name (must already exist in the A9155 document)

Important
The index file must be named xxx.ami (A9155 Measurement Index).
The first line must contain the titles of the columns, with the exact column names listed above. Information in bold is
mandatory.

Both examples show the content of an AMI file.

Example 1:

File Transmitter Configuration
Railways.txt Site0_0 conf_1
C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 391/476


Highway1.txt Site1_1 conf_2
Highway2.txt Site2_0 conf_3


Example 2:

File Transmitter Freq(MHz) Units Coordinates Height(m) Gain(dB) Losses(dB) Configuration
Railways.txt Site0_0 935 dBm 27595 2 2 1 conf_1
Highay1.txt Site1_1 935 dBm 27595 2 3 2 conf_2
Highway2.txt Site2_0 935 dBm 27595 1.5 3 3 conf_3


When importing the AMI file, A9155 displays its content and highlights errors (file not found, transmitter not found,
configuration not found). Yellow lines contain erroneous information; wrong information is displayed in red. It is possible
to correct the errors and apply in the import dialog, to take into account new information without modifying the AMI file.



Import of an AMI file: the transmitter Site6_3 is not available in the A9155 document. By clicking in the red cell, the user
can correct the error. When the import is successful, A9155 automatically creates one CW Measurement subfolder for
each imported transmitter.

IX.2.1.f ADDING PREDICTIONS ON EXISTING CW MEASUREMENT PATHS
Since a CW measurement path is mainly related to a given transmitter, only the signal measured from this transmitter
can be studied and compared with predictions along the path. Nevertheless, it is possible, in A9155 to get predictions of
signal received from other transmitters along the path.

To add a prediction from another transmitter, proceed as follows :
Access the CW measurement path you want to add a transmitter,
Right click on the CW measurement path in order to open the associated context menu,
Select the Properties command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current dialog,
In the Properties dialog, open the Parameters tab, Click the button and choose the Add a
prediction... command from the open menu,
In the New prediction dialog, click on the Transmitter scrolling menu and choose a new transmitter, which
the prediction will refer to,
Click OK to achieve the transmitter addition


The new transmitter becomes available in the CW measurement session table as a new column. Computations using
this transmitter are made in the same way as computations on classical reference transmitter for a CW measurement
path.

Notes :
Like for classical single transmitter CW measurement sessions, computations along the CW measurement paths are
possible with several transmitters.
To delete columns related to additional transmitters, delete the related field in the table management dialog (Table
tab) of the considered CW measurement session.

Managing measurements


392/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IX.2.1.g CREATING AN IMPORT CW MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION
In A9155, import CW measurement configurations can be defined in order to make easier some future import procedures
based on the same model as a reference one. Moreover, configurations may be useful to import several CW
measurement data set at once.


To create an import CW measurement configuration, you must use the generic import feature. When the import CW
measurements windows is open, proceed as follows :
Define configuration characteristics in the Setup tab :
You can change some parameters in the File part such as the number of the first CW measurement
line, the list separator ( , tab, ;) and decimal symbol (, or .) used in the file to be imported,
Give a correlation between the displayed columns and A9155 internal CW measurement fields by
either clicking on each cell in the Field line and then, selecting a field in the list or by clicking on the
Setup button. In the last case, the CW Measurement setup window, where three A9155 internal
fields, X, Y and CW measurements, are listed, is displayed. The X and Y fields have to be assigned
unlike the CW Measurements field which is optional.
In the Configuration part, enter the extension (e.g. *.txt) for the files that will be considered (and
filtered) with this configuration
Click the button and enter a name for the current configuration. Click OK to save the
import configuration.
In order to go on the import, open the General tab :
Indicate the CW measurement path name,
Specify the name of transmitter on which the CW measurements refer to
Enter the transmitter frequency, the receiver height, the gain and losses of the receiver antenna,
Define the unit of CW measurement and the coordinate system of CW measurement point
Click on the button to achieve the import CW measurement procedure.


Notes :
Configuration is saved as soon as you click on the Save button. It is not necessary to complete the import procedure
(by pressing the Import button).
When importing a CW measurement file, the existing configurations are available in the Files of type scrolling menu
(Open window). They are sorted according to their creation order. During import, if A9155 recognises the extension, it
automatically proposes the corresponding configuration. In case several configurations are associated with an
extension, A9155 chooses the first configuration in the list.
When importing a CW measurement file, of course, the existing configurations are also available in the Configuration
scrolling box of the Setup tab of the import CW measurement data file dialog. When selecting the appropriate
configuration, correspondences are automatically set.
The defined configurations are stored in the file MeasImport.ini. This file is located in the directory where A9155 is
installed. You can copy it on other workstations (in the directory where A9155 is installed) in order to make available
the configurations.


Caution :
It is no longer necessary to define a projection coordinate system to be able to import a CW measurement path.
However, in order to avoid some inconsistencies, you must specify it in case the CW measurement points are stated
in a geographic coordinate system.
In order to avoid some inconsistencies, do not assign the *.* extension to a configuration.

IX.2.1.h DELETING AN IMPORT CW MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION
In A9155, Import CW measurements configurations can be defined in order to make easier some future import
procedures based on the same model as a reference one. Moreover, configurations may be useful to import several CW
measurement data set at once.


To delete an import CW measurement configuration, you must use the generic import feature. When the import CW
measurements windows is open, proceed as follows :
Click on the Setup tab,
In the Configuration part, click on the Configuration scrolling list,
Choose the configuration you want to remove
C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 393/476


Click on the button.


Another solution is to open the file MeasImport.ini (located in the directory where A9155 is installed), select and erase
the configurations that you want to remove.

IX.2.2 MANAGEMENT OF A CW MEASUREMENT PATH
IX.2.2.a DEFINING CW MEASUREMENT PATH PROPERTIES
In A9155, CW measurements sessions are organized in items located in reference transmitter folders.

CW Measurements folder global properties are reachable from the associated context menu (left click on the CW
measurements folder).

Measure sessions properties are reachable from CW measurements folders associated context menus (left click on the
CW measurements folders).

To manage the properties of an existing CW measurement path, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CW Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CW measurement session you want to manage properties,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window.


The dialog is made of 4 tabs (General, Parameters, Table, and Display) in which you can respectively manage :

The CW measurement conditions,
The General tab contains information on the receiver and the header of the imported file.

Predictions and related filters over the CW measurement path,
Predictions are used for comparison between real CW measurement and prediction using the propagation model to be
calibrated. Filter features enable you to limit the CW measurement data points listed in the table and displayed on the
map.

The CW measurement table content,
The table tab works like all the other ones, with the standard features on how to manage the contents of any table. It is
possible to add new attribute in the table.

The display of the CW measurement points composing the path.

Note : In the parameters tab, when clicking the button, the Refresh geo data command enables you to
update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of CW measurement points after adding new
geographic maps or modifying existing ones

IX.2.2.b OPENING A CW MEASUREMENT TABLE
All the CW measurement points of a path, attributes, predictions and the error are listed in related table.

To open this table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CW Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the CW measurement session you want to open the related table,
Choose the Open command from the context menu,
Or,
Double click on the CW measurement session you want to open the related table.
Managing measurements


394/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01




Standard features for managing table contents (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter, Sort, Fields)
are available in a context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and Records
menus. You can also access the table content management from the Table tab of the CW measurement session
property dialog.

IX.2.2.c PREDICTING SIGNAL LEVELS ON A CW MEASUREMENT PATH
In A9155, it is possible to make predictions along a CW measurement path, using the reference transmitter for the
current CW measurement session, and potentially added one. This feature is possible using any prediction model along
an existing CW measurement path, either created from a spreadsheet, from a drawing of points or paths, or from a data
import. The goal of this feature will be to play on the propagation model parameters with a view to calibrate it.

To open the prediction window associated with the current CW measurement session, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CW Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CW measurement session you want to predict coverage on CW measurement path,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the Parameters tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
When prediction parameters are set (filter + selection of a propagation model), Click the
button and choose the Calculate predictions command from the open menu to start calculation,
Statistics between CW measurement and predictions are automatically displayed in a new window,
Results are then available in the CW measurement session table.


Notes :
This feature allows you also to predict signal level of added transmitters in an existing CW measurement path.
It is also possible to use the path loss stored in the path loss matrices if they have been previously calculated for
prediction studies (select Path loss matrices instead of a propagation model). In this case, the prediction values on
the CW measurement path are just extracted from path loss matrices.
When a transmitter is made of several elements for which it is possible to define several powers (TRX types in
GSM/GPRS/EDGE, cells in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000), A9155 computes using the highest power level (e.g.
BCCH in GSM/GPRS/EDGE)
When using the button, The Refresh geo data command update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height,
Clutter+DTM) and clutter class of CW measurement points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing
ones, and recalculates predictions to take into account modifications (Calculate predictions command).

IX.2.2.d FILTERING POINTS ALONG CW MEASUREMENT PATHS
When predicting along CW measurement paths, it is possible to impose some filter. This can be made in the Filter part of
the Parameters tab of any CW measurement session property dialog, you may specify filter criteria on:
Distance between CW measurement point and reference transmitter : enter minimum and maximum distances (Min
distance and Max distance) in respective boxes. A9155 will keep only CW measurement points which distance from
reference transmitter is between minimum and maximum distances.
Measured signal (CW measurement value) : enter low and high limits for CW measurement values in respective
boxes (Min meas. and Max meas.). A9155 will keep only CW measurement points which CW measurement value is
between low and high limits.
Azimuth between the filtered points and the reference transmitter. Hence, it is possible to keep CW measurement
points, which angle with the reference transmitter azimuth is between user-defined negative and positive angle
values.

Example: If you enter 90 as negative angle and +90 as positive angle, A9155 will only keep CW measurement points
which have an angle between 90 and +90 with the reference transmitter azimuth.

Clutter class where CW measurement point is located : check boxes of clutter classes you want to keep in table and
map. It is possible to select several values at once. To do this, click one or several clutter classes using shift and/or
Ctrl button at the same time and then, check/uncheck one of boxes. A9155 will keep only CW measurement points
located on the selected clutter classes.

C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 395/476


Filters are applied to CW measurement points in the table and on the map; only these points are taken into account for
statistics calculations.

Selecting the Delete points outside from the filter option enables you to definitively remove CW measurement points,
which do not fulfil filter criteria, from table and map.

It is possible to define advanced filters on other fields by clicking the More button. A9155 opens the classical Filter
dialog available for any table.


Notes :
Error corresponds to difference between CW measurement value and predicted signal level from reference
transmitter.
A9155 calculates signal level predictions for all the CW measurement points even the filtered ones.

IX.2.2.e DISPLAYING STATISTICS BETWEEN CW MEASUREMENTS AND PREDICTIONS
Since A9155 allows users to make predictions along a CW measurement path, it is possible to compare field results in
order either to calibrate the currently used propagation model, or to determine the best suited one for the current project.

To display comparative results on CW measurements and prediction along a path, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CW Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CW measurement session you already realized some comparative predictions,
Click the button and choose the Display statistics command from the open menu,
Results are displayed on the in a Statistics window (per clutter class).

The Display tab window allows you to manage comparative results directly on the map.

Notes :
Even it is possible to add other transmitters in an existing CW measurement path, and start predictions on them,
comparison is possible only with the reference transmitter.
We remind you that model calibration and its result (standard deviation) strongly depend on the CW measurement
samples you use. A calibrated model must restore the behaviour of CW measurements depending on their
configuration on a large scale, not totally check to a few number of CW measurements. The calibrated model has to
give correct results for every new CW measurement point performed in the same geographical zone, without having
been calibrated on these CW measurements.

IX.2.2.f MANAGING DISPLAY ON A CW MEASUREMENT PATH
In A9155, since CW measurement sessions are organized in item folders, these are managed in the same way than in
other folder items, i.e. sites, transmitters, etc... Hence, the generic A9155 display dialog is available in order to manage
each CW measurement path, and works exactly as in the other cases.


To access the display dialog of any CW measurement session, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CW Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CW measurement session you want to manage the data display,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the Display tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window.


Thresholds, legend, tips and other handy display tools are available as classically.


Notes :
When selecting Discrete values, you can choose Best server. A9155 will give the measurement points the colour of
transmitter, from which the predicted signal level is the best one.
When using Value intervals, you can choose Best prediction. A9155 will colour the measurement points depending
Managing measurements


396/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


on the best predicted signal level.

IX.2.2.g EXPORTING CW MEASUREMENT PATHS
in A9155, CW measurement path may be exported in ArcView (.shp) and MapInfo (*.mif) file formats as well as A9155
internal format (*.agd).

If the first case, When exporting, two other files with .dbf and .shx are created. The .dbf file may be read with a
spreadsheet word processor and contains all fields available in the table associated with the CW measurement session
that data are currently being exported.

In the second case, in addition to the Mif file, a text file is created and contains necessary text information in order to
define path attributes.


To export data from a CW measurement sessions (path included) :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CW Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CW measurement session you want to export data,
Choose the Export... option from the context menu,
Enter name and path for the files to export (for both .shp, .dbf and .shx files),
Click Save when this is made,
A dialog window opens in which you must precise the coordinate system to use in the exported file
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click to confirm the export.


Note : Under A9155, shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.

IX.2.3 USING THE CW MEASUREMENT WINDOW
IX.2.3.a CW MEASUREMENT WINDOW : ACTIVATION
In A9155, the CW Measurements window allows users to display curves for CW measurements, predictions and any
other parameters on each point of an existing CW measurement path.

To open the CW Measurements window, proceed as follows :
Either
Left click on the View menu from the menu bar,
Check the CW Measurements option from the scrolled menu.,
Or
Access the CW measurement path you want to study,
Right click on it in order to open the related context menu,
Select the Analyse... command from the open menu.


The CW Measurements window is manageable by right clicking on it. From the open scrolling menu, you may either
zoom, copy the displayed window (in order to use it in another application), print it, manage display parameters, and add
a second ordinary axis in order to study in parallel several parameters.

To use efficiently the CW measurement window, move the mouse pointer inside it, and you will be able to follow the
analysis along a complete selected CW measurement path.

C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 397/476


IX.2.3.b DEFINING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF THE CW MEASUREMENT WINDOW
A9155 provides several tools to manage the display of the CW measurement window, in order to make complete and
easy a complete analysis of CW measurement paths.

To access the CW measurement window display dialog, proceed as follows :
Make active the CW measurement window,
Right click in it in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the Display command from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about available fields in the open dialog,
In this dialog, you can specify Y-axis scale by entering minimum and maximum values, choose style and
colour of CW measurement, prediction (from transmitter which the CW measurement path is related to) and
attribute curves and select a unique style for prediction (from other transmitters) curves. Colours of
prediction (from other transmitters) curves correspond to transmitter colours,
Click OK to close the dialog.

Note : The X-axis represents the distance (in m) between the point CW measurement and the transmitter, according to
the CW measurement path refers to. The X-axis scale can be changed. The Y-axis (left vertical axis) is dedicated to CW
measurement and prediction values; its scale is user-definable. When using a second ordinary axis, the Y-axis (right
vertical axis) is related to attribute values; its scale is fixed.

IX.2.3.c SYNCHRONISING DISPLAY IN TABLE/MAP/CW MEASUREMENT WINDOW
It is possible to simultaneously visualise information and predictions about a CW measurement point in the table, on the
map and in the CW measurement window thanks to display synchronisation. This synchronisation is also possible on
vector data.

To do this, proceed as follows :
Open the table related to the studied CW measurement data path, check the CW measurement path is
displayed on the map and select the test mobile data path in the CW measurement window,
Arrange the table, the map and the CW measurement window on the screen so as to display everything
and click on the map window to make it active,
Set the display options of the CW measurement window.
Then, in the CW measurement window, click to display a cursor and move it along the path ; A9155
simultaneously selects both in the table and on the map the corresponding CW measurement point.

IX.2.3.d ANALYSING ADDITIONAL FIELDS ALONG CW MEASUREMENT PATHS
In A9155, It is possible to compare one CW measurement path with predictions from different transmitters. In the CW
Measurements window, you can visualise variations of CW measurements, predictions from different transmitters and
any CW measurement path attribute (distance, clutter class, altitude) along the path using a second ordinary axis.

Attributes and their definitions are listed in the table below.
X : CW Measurement point abscissa (stated in the display coordinate system)
Y : CW Measurement point ordinate (stated in the display coordinate system)
Z : CW Measurement point altitude above sea level (m)
M : CW Measurement values (if available),
P : Prediction values (if completed),
Difference between measured and predicted values (M P)
D : Distance between transmitter and CW measurement point (m)
CLUTTER : Clutter class at the CW measurement point
H : Clutter height at the CW measurement point (m)
P (Tx) :Signal level received from Tx (dBm)
DTM + CLUTTER : Clutter height + ground altitude at the CW measurement point (m)

When the CW Measurements window is displayed, all of these data are available in the Field scrolling list (CW
measurement and prediction values always stay visible). Once a field is selected, a second ordinary axis opens at
extreme right and associated value is given just right to it.

To analyse data at along a path in the CW measurement window, proceed as follows :
Make the CW Measurements window active,
Left click in the CW Measurements window,
Managing measurements


398/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


A cursor (vertical line) appears in the CW Measurement window positioned on the closest CW
measurement point. This cursor can be moved over the curves from one point to another.
Simultaneously, a receiver-like cursor appears on the map on the associated CW measurement point.
As for point-to-point calculations and interference, this cursor symbolizes a receiver placed on the CW
measurement point to be studied. This receiver will be synchronized such as two pointing modes on the
CW measurement points are available : on the map and on the curves,
Choose from the Field scrolling box the value to display on each point, and the curve to display in parallel
with the ones referring to the main ordinary axis.


Note : to come back to the initial state (no second ordinary axis), select the blank field from the field scrolling box.

IX.2.3.e ZOOMING IN THE CW MEASUREMENT WINDOW
A9155 provides some zoom tools in order to be able to analyse with precision data contained in the CW measurement
window.

To access a zoom command in the CW measurement window, proceed as follows :
Make active the CW measurement window,
Right click in it in order to get the related context menu,
Choose either the Zoom in, Zoom out, 1st zoom point or last zoom point command from the open menu,
The CW measurement window adapt itself according to your choice.

By using the 1st zoom point or last zoom point commands, it is possible to define a zoom range for the current CW
measurement window. In the CW Measurement window, place the cursor where you want to start the zoom, right click
and select the 1st zoom point command. Then, place the cursor where you want to end the zoom, right click and select
the last zoom point command. A9155 will display the path between the first and the last selected CW measurement
points.

Clicking on Zoom out enables you to undo the zoom area and to display the whole path.

IX.2.3.f EXPORTING THE CW MEASUREMENT WINDOW
In A9155, like for many other objects displayed in a window form (point analysis , antenna patterns, etc...), it is possible
to export the contents of the CW measurement window to another application.

To export the CW measurement window to another application, proceed as follows :
Make active the CW measurement window,
Right click in it in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the Copy command from the open menu,
Switch to another application (e.g. Word), then paste the content of the clipboard.


Note : additional data related to the second ordinary axis are kept during export.

IX.2.3.g PRINTING THE CW MEASUREMENT WINDOW
In A9155, like for many other objects displayed in a window form (point analysis , antenna patterns, etc...), it is possible
to print the contents of the CW measurement window to another application.

To export the CW measurement window to another application, proceed as follows :
Make active the CW measurement window,
Right click in it in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the Print command from the open menu,
The print dialog opens.


Note : additional data related to the second ordinary axis are kept during print.

C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 399/476


IX.2.3.h COMBINING CW MEASUREMENT AND POINT ANALYSIS WINDOWS
The combined use of the CW measurements window and the point analysis window may help the user to interpret some
results that could be difficult to understand. Nevertheless, some prediction differences may happen between the two
windows.

Differences can be explained as follows :
In the point analysis window, prediction results are given for each bin from the calculation grid (defined in the
prediction properties). There is uniqueness in prediction results for each picture element from the calculation grid in
the point analysis window.
In the CW Measurements window, prediction results are given for the exact geographic location where have been
taken CW measurements. No computation (or prediction) resolution is not taken in account in this part.

IX.3 TEST MOBILE DATA PATHS
IX.3.1 CREATION OF A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH
IX.3.1.a IMPORTING A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH
In A9155, you may import any ASCII text file (with tab, semi-colon or blank character as separator) as well as TEMS
FICS-Planet export (*.pln) and TEMS text export (*fmt) to create a test mobile data path.

To do this, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Test mobile data folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Import...,
Specify the path, name and the format of the file to be imported in the open window,

The Test mobile data import dialog is open. It is similar to the one available when importing CW measurement data:
In the General tab, give a name and indicate the receiver height, gain and losses of the receiver antenna, the units
and the coordinate system used in the file.
In the Setup tab, select an import configuration if defined or specify import settings such as the first test mobile data
line, the separator and the decimal symbol.

Click on the Setup button to set correspondence between the file columns and the A9155 internal fields.

Mandatory information that A9155 needs to succeed in importing a file is:
The position of test mobile data points: indicate abscissa and ordinate columns in the file,
ID of serving cells and their neighbours. For each point, A9155 is capable of importing the measurements from a
serving cell and six neighbour cells.

In UMTS networks, a cell is identified thanks to its scrambling code. Therefore, you must indicate the columns relating to
the scrambling code of cells, the scrambling code format (decimal or hexadecimal) used in the file and the scrambling
code group if needed. As a scrambling code can belong to several groups, it is useful to know the group, from which it
has been selected. If the scrambling code group information is not contained in the file, do not specify anything.

In CDMA/CDMA2000 networks, a cell is identified thanks to its PN Offset. Therefore, you must indicate the columns
relating to the PN Offset of cells, the PN Offset format (decimal or hexadecimal) used in the file and the PN Offset group
if needed. As a PN Offset can belong to several groups, it is useful to know the group, from which it has been selected. If
the PN Offset group information is not contained in the file, do not specify anything.

In case of GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks, a cell is identified thanks to its pair BCCH-BSIC. Thus, you must specify the
fields corresponding to BCCH and BSIC of cells, and the BSIC format (decimal or octal) used in the file.

For scrambling code, scrambling code group, PN Offset code, PN Offset code group, BCCH and BSIC information, it is
not required to associate a column of the file for the serving cell and each neighbour cell; this operation was considered
too long. Here, you must enter a unique character string for the serving and neighbour cells; this character string is a
substring that must be contained in the column names relating to the serving and neighbour cells.

Important: A9155 is case sensitive. So, be careful when defining column titles.

Example: If you enter the character string SC for the scrambling code information, A9155 will search for the scrambling
codes of serving and neighbour cells in the columns which name contains SC.
Managing measurements


400/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



In the Setup tab, specify the data type of columns to be imported. The default type of columns is <Ignore>.
If you do not change it, columns will not be recovered in A9155.

In order to go on the import, click on .


Notes:
Some files like *.pln and some *.fnt files (created with previous TEMS versions) have a well-known fixed structure. In
this case, import is automatic and direct.
Multiple imports are supported.
In the Import dialog, it is important to specify the right data type (Integer, Real, Text) of each column in order for
data to be correctly displayed (only numerical fields will be able to be displayed in the Test mobile data window).
Columns with <Ignore> type will not recovered.
The import settings may be saved in a configuration (test mobile data import configuration) that you will be able to
reuse for next file imports.

IX.3.1.b IMPORTING SEVERAL TEST MOBILE DATA PATHS
It is possible to import several test mobile data files at once.

To do this, proceed as follows :
Follow the standard steps of the import test mobile data procedure, select several files in the Open window,
Either,
In the Open window, optionally specify an import configuration in the "Files of type" scrolling box" in
order to filter only files respecting the format defined in the considered configuration,
Select the files you want to import simultaneously (multi-selection is possible by using the 'Shift' key,
Click the button,

Or,
Select the files you want to import simultaneously (multi-selection is possible by using the 'Shift' key,
Click the button,
The import CW measurements window opens,
Optionally specify an import configuration (Configuration part) that will be consistent with the format
of the files being imported,
In that case, you may import several test mobile data files based on the same transmitter and with the
same associated configuration. In this case, you just need to indicate the configuration once,
Click on the all button: all the paths will be imported at the same time.


Notes
If the selected test mobile data files are based on different configurations, you cannot use the button.
For each file, indicate a configuration and then, click the button.
When using the Import all button, A9155 does not import files for which the configuration does not correspond to the
selected one. It displays an error message and goes on the import with next file.

IX.3.1.c CREATING AN IMPORT TEST MOBILE DATA PATH CONFIGURATION
In A9155, import test mobile data configurations can be defined in order to make easier some future import procedures
based on the same model as a reference one. Moreover, configurations may be useful to import several test mobile data
set at once.


To create an import test mobile data configuration, you must use the generic import feature. When the import test mobile
data windows is open, proceed as follows :
Define configuration characteristics in the Setup tab :
You can change some parameters in the File part such as the number of the first CW measurement
line, the list separator ( , tab, ;) and decimal symbol (, or .) used in the file to be imported,
Click on the Setup button to set correspondence between the file columns and the A9155 internal
C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 401/476


fields.

Mandatory information that A9155 needs to succeed in importing a file is:
The position of test mobile data points: indicate abscissa and ordinate columns in the file,
ID of serving cells and their neighbours. For each point, A9155 is capable of importing the measurements from a
serving cell and six neighbour cells.

In UMTS networks, a cell is identified thanks to its scrambling code. Therefore, you must indicate the columns relating to
the scrambling code of cells, the scrambling code format (decimal or hexadecimal) used in the file and the scrambling
code group if needed. As a scrambling code can belong to several groups, it is useful to know the group, from which it
has been selected. If the scrambling code group information is not contained in the file, do not specify anything.

In case of GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks, a cell is identified thanks to its pair BCCH-BSIC. Thus, you must specify the
fields corresponding to BCCH and BSIC of cells, and the BSIC format (decimal or octal) used in the file.

For scrambling code, scrambling code group, BCCH and BSIC information, it is not required to associate a column of the
file for the serving cell and each neighbour cell; this operation was considered too long. Here, you must enter a unique
character string for the serving and neighbour cells; this character string is a substring that must be contained in the
column names relating to the serving and neighbour cells.

Important: A9155 is case sensitive. So, be careful when defining column titles.

Example: If you enter the character string SC for the scrambling code information, A9155 will search for the scrambling
codes of serving and neighbour cells in the columns which name contains SC.

Click the OK button when the correspondence is complete,
In the Setup tab, specify the data type of columns to be imported. The default type of columns is <Ignore>.
If you do not change it, columns will not be recovered in A9155.
In the Configuration part, enter the extension (e.g. *.txt) for the files that will be considered (and filtered)
with this configuration
Click the button and enter a name for the current configuration. Click OK to save the import
configuration.
In order to go on the import, open the General tab :
Indicate the test mobile path name,
Enter the transmitter frequency, the receiver height, the gain and losses of the receiver antenna,
Define the unit and the coordinate system of the current test mobile data,
Click on the button to achieve the import test mobile data procedure.


Notes :
Configuration is saved as soon as you click on the Save button. It is not necessary to complete the import procedure
(by pressing the Import button).
When importing a test mobile data file, the existing configurations are available in the Files of type scrolling menu
(Open window). They are sorted according to their creation order. During import, if A9155 recognises the extension, it
automatically proposes the corresponding configuration. In case several configurations are associated with an
extension, A9155 chooses the first configuration in the list.
When importing a test mobile data file, of course, the existing configurations are also available in the Configuration
scrolling box of the Setup tab of the import test mobile data file dialog. When selecting the appropriate configuration,
correspondences are automatically set.
The defined configurations are stored in the file MeasImport.ini. This file is located in the directory where A9155 is
installed. You can copy it on other workstations (in the directory where A9155 is installed) in order to make available
the configurations.


Caution :
It is not necessary to define a projection coordinate system to be able to import a test mobile data path. However, in
order to avoid some inconsistencies, you must specify it in case the test mobile data points are stated in a geographic
coordinate system.
In order to avoid some inconsistencies, do not assign the *.* extension to a configuration.

Managing measurements


402/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IX.3.1.d DELETING AN IMPORT TEST MOBILE DATA PATH CONFIGURATION
In A9155, Import test mobile data configurations can be defined in order to make easier some future import procedures
based on the same model as a reference one. Moreover, configurations may be useful to import several test mobile data
set at once.


To delete an import test mobile data configuration, you must use the generic import feature. When the import test mobile
data windows is open, proceed as follows :
Click on the Setup tab,
In the Configuration part, click on the Configuration scrolling list,
Choose the configuration you want to remove
Click on the button.


Another solution is to open the file MeasImport.ini (located in the directory where A9155 is installed), select and erase
the configurations that you want to remove.

IX.3.2 MANAGEMENT OF A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH
IX.3.2.a DEFINING TEST MOBILE DATA PATH PROPERTIES
In A9155, test mobile data sessions are organized in items located under the Test mobile data folder.

Test mobile data folder global properties are reachable from the associated context menu (left click on the Test mobile
data folder).

Measure sessions properties are reachable from Test mobile data subfolders associated context menus (left click on the
Test mobile data subfolders).

To manage the properties of an existing Test mobile data path, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Test mobile data folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Test mobile data session you want to manage properties,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window.


The dialog is made of 4 tabs (General, Parameters, Table and Display) in which you can respectively manage :

The Test mobile data conditions,
The General tab contains information on the receiver and the header of the imported file.

Filters over the Test mobile data path,
Filter features enable you to limit the test mobile data points listed in the table and displayed on the map.

Predictions along the test mobile data path for each involved server or neighbour

The analysis of a specific field (e.g. RXLEV of a specific transmitter when this one is neighbour #3) along the path

The Test mobile data table content,
The table tab works like all the other ones, with the standard features on how to manage the contents of any table. It is
possible to add new attribute in the table.

The display of the Test mobile data points composing the path.

Note : In the parameters tab, when clicking the button, the Refresh geo data command enables you to
update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of test mobile data points after adding new
geographic maps or modifying existing ones.

C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 403/476


IX.3.2.b OPENING A TEST MOBILE DATA TABLE
All the test mobile data points of a path, serving cells, neighbours and related attributes are listed in a table.

To open this table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the test mobile data folder by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the test mobile data session you want to open the related table,
Choose the Open command from the context menu,
Or,
Double click on the test mobile data session you want to open the related table.


Standard features for managing table contents (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter, Sort, Fields)
are available in a context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and Records
menus. You can also access the table content management from the Table tab of the test mobile data session property
dialog.

All the test mobile data points from the imported file are listed in a related table. For each test mobile data point, A9155
provides the file attributes and other information such as the ground altitude above the sea level (Alt. DTM), the distance
from its serving cell (Dist), the clutter class (Clutter), the clutter height (Clutter Height) and the total height including the
clutter height and the ground altitude (DTM+Clutter).

Note : It is possible to display either the BCCH-BSIC pair, the scrambling code group-scrambling code pair or the PN
Offset group-PN Offset pair, in the columns of the serving and neighbour cells. To display this information in the table
when importing a file, add these lines in the Atoll.ini file.

[TestMobileData]
ShowCoupleInfo=1

To be taken into account, the file must be located in the A9155 installation directory. This file is read only when A9155 is
started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the A9155 session and to restart it in order to take into account any
modification performed in Atoll.ini.

IX.3.2.c PREDICTING SIGNAL LEVELS ON A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH
For any existing test mobile data, it is possible to predict the signal level of any involved transmitter, on each point of the
path.

To do this, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Test mobile data folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Test mobile data session you want to manage properties,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Parameters tab,
Click the button and choose the Calculate predictions command from the open menu to start
calculation.

Calculate Predictions adds in the table, for each transmitter (serving and neighbours), a column ("Pred serving cell",
"Pred neighbour1",) which contains the predicted field (in dBm) received from the transmitter. The propagation model
used is the one assigned to the transmitter (in the Propagation tab of the Transmitter properties for the main matrix
calculation). Standard graphic display is available for these new columns, for example, you can obtain charts with
predicted signal(s) in the Test mobile data window.

Managing measurements


404/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IX.3.2.d FILTERING POINTS ALONG TEST MOBILE DATA PATHS
When working on a test mobile data path, it is possible to impose some filter in order to exclude inappropriate points from
the study. This can be made in the Filter part of the Parameters tab of any test mobile data session property dialog, you
may specify filter criteria on :
Clutter class where test mobile data point is located : check boxes of clutter classes you want to keep in table and
map. It is possible to select several values at once. To do this, click one or several clutter classes using shift and/or
Ctrl button at the same time and then, check/uncheck one of boxes. A9155 will keep only test mobile data points
located on the selected clutter classes.

It is possible to define advanced filters on other fields by clicking the More button. A9155 opens the standard Filter
dialog available for any table.

The Refresh geo data feature, available when clicking on the Actions button, enables you to update heights (Alt DTM,
Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of test mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or
modifying existing ones.

Selecting the Delete points outside from the filter option enables you to definitively remove test mobile data points, which
do not fulfil filter criteria, from table and map.

Filters are applied to test mobile data points in the table and on the map.

IX.3.2.e FOCUSING ON A SPECIFIC FIELD ALONG A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH
For any existing test mobile data, it is possible to focus on a specific field linked of any involved transmitter, on each point
of the path.

This feature allows the user to choose a transmitter and a field and to generate a new column in the table, containing the
value of the given field for the selected transmitter when it is either the serving cell or one of the neighbours. For
example, the column can contain the RXLEV for the selected transmitter whether it is the serving cell or a neighbour.

To do this, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Test mobile data folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Test mobile data session you want to manage properties,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click the Parameters tab,
Click the button and choose the Focus on a transmitter command from the open menu,
In the Focus on specific fields of a given transmitter dialog, select a transmitter in the first scrolling menu,
Then, open the second scrolling menu and select for the serving cell and each neighbour the fields, which
you want to collect values. Only one field per serving cell and neighbour may be chosen.,
Click OK to confirm the selection,
A display with colour shading is automatically proposed on the created field in the table,
Click OK to close the dialog.

IX.3.2.f MANAGING DISPLAY ON A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH
In A9155, since test mobile data sessions are organized in item folders, these are managed in the same way than in
other folder items, i.e. sites, transmitters, etc... Hence, the generic A9155 display dialog is available in order to manage
each test mobile data path, and works exactly as in the other cases.


To access the display dialog of any test mobile data session, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Test mobile data folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Test mobile data session you want to manage properties,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the Display tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window.


C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 405/476


Thresholds, legend, tips and other handy display tools are available as classically.


Important : When the number of test mobile data points is very high, it is possible to improve the speed of test mobile
data display by checking the 'Quick display' box in the Display tab of the dialog box. In this case, the symbol of test
mobile data points is fixed ; it is just possible to change size and colour.

To be taken into account, the file must be located in the A9155 installation directory. This file is read only when A9155 is
started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the A9155 session and to restart it in order to take into account any
modification performed in Atoll.ini.

Note : Display of test mobile data paths can be globally managed from the property dialog of the Test mobile data folder.


It is possible to display on the map the serving and neighbour cells of a test mobile data point.

To visualise the serving and neighbour cells of a test mobile data point, proceed as follows :
On the map, click on a point,
A9155 displays the link(s).

A9155 graphically displays link(s) from the test mobile data point to its serving cell (solid line - S as symbol) and
neighbours (dotted line and N as symbol). The link colour corresponds to the transmitter colour.

IX.3.2.g EXPORTING TEST MOBILE DATA PATHS
in A9155, Each test mobile data path may be exported in ArcView (.shp) and MapInfo (*.mif) file formats as well as
A9155 internal format (*.agd).

If the first case, When exporting, two other files with .dbf and .shx are created. The .dbf file may be read with a
spreadsheet word processor and contains all fields available in the table associated with the test mobile data session
that data are currently being exported.

In the second case, in addition to the Mif file, a text file is created and contains necessary text information in order to
define path attributes.


To export data from a test mobile data session (path included) :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Test mobile data folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the Test mobile data session you want to export data,
Choose the Export... option from the context menu,
Enter name and path for the files to export,
Click Save when this is made,
A dialog window opens in which you must precise the coordinate system to use in the exported file
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click to confirm the export.


Note : Under A9155, shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.

Managing measurements


406/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


IX.3.3 USING THE TEST MOBILE DATA WINDOW
IX.3.3.a TEST MOBILE DATA WINDOW : ACTIVATION
In A9155, the Test mobile data window allows users to display the variation of any selected numeric field along the path.

To open the Test mobile data window, proceed as follows :
Either
Left click on the View menu from the menu bar,
Check the Test mobile data option from the scrolled menu.,
Or
Access the test mobile data path you want to study,
Right click on it in order to open the related context menu,
Select the Analyse... command from the open menu.


The Test mobile data window is manageable by right clicking on it. From the open scrolling menu, you may either zoom,
copy the displayed window (in order to use it in another application), print it, manage display parameters to make easy
the analysis of the several parameters.

To use efficiently the CW measurement window, move the mouse pointer inside it, and you will be able to follow the
analysis along a complete selected CW measurement path.

IX.3.3.b DEFINING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF THE TEST MOBILE DATA WINDOW
A9155 provides several tools to manage the display of the Test mobile data window, in order to make complete and easy
a complete analysis of Test mobile data paths.

To access the CW measurement window display dialog, proceed as follows :
Make active the Test mobile data window,
Either,
Click the button to choose information you want to visualise. In the Display dialog,
A9155 lists all the test mobile data path attributes. Only values from numerical fields can be
displayed in the Test mobile data window; discrete fields are made grey.
Or,
Right click in it in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the Display command from the open menu,
Check the boxes of fields which you want to visualise variation and choose a colour for each of them. A
context menu is available when right clicking anywhere in the table. It contains following commands:
Select all: Selects all the attributes listed in the table,
Display: Checks boxes of all the selected attributes,
Hide: Unchecks boxes of all the selected attributes,
Colour: Assigns the chosen colour to all the selected attributes,

It is possible to select several attributes at once. To do this, click one or several attributes using shift and/or Ctrl button at
the same time, and then use the Display, Hide and Colour commands of the context menu.

Click on OK to validate the display settings.

IX.3.3.c SYNCHRONISING DISPLAY IN TABLE/MAP/TEST MOBILE DATA WINDOW
It is possible to simultaneously visualise information about a test mobile data point in the table, on the map and in the
Test mobile data window thanks to display synchronisation. This synchronisation is also possible on vector data.

To do this, proceed as follows :
Open the table related to the studied test mobile data path, check the test mobile data path is displayed on
the map and select the test mobile data path in the Test mobile data window,
Arrange the table, the map and the Test mobile data window on the screen so as to display everything and
click on the map window to make it active,
Set the display options of the Test mobile data window. After selecting and validating attributes you want to
C H A P T E R 9


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 407/476


visualise in the Test mobile data window, A9155 regroups and colours columns relating to the displayed
attributes in the table. The column colour corresponds to the colour associated to the attribute in the
Display dialog of the Test mobile data window.
Then, in the Test mobile data window, click to display a cursor and move it along the path ; A9155
simultaneously displays in the table and on the map the corresponding test mobile data point and its links
to serving and neighbour cells (only on the map).

Note : To remove the colour of columns in the table and to display all of them again, use the Column format and the
Display columns commands available in the Format menu.

IX.3.3.d ZOOMING IN THE TEST MOBILE DATA WINDOW
A9155 provides some zoom tools in order to be able to analyse with precision data contained in the Test mobile data
window.

To access a zoom command in the Test mobile data window, proceed as follows :
Make active the Test mobile data window,
Right click in it in order to get the related context menu,
Choose either the Zoom in, Zoom out, 1st zoom point or last zoom point command from the open menu,
The Test mobile data window adapt itself according to your choice.

By using the 1st zoom point or last zoom point commands, it is possible to define a zoom range for the current Test
mobile data window. In the Test mobile data window, place the cursor where you want to start the zoom, right click and
select the 1st zoom point command. Then, place the cursor where you want to end the zoom, right click and select the
last zoom point command. A9155 will display the path between the first and the last selected CW measurement points.

Clicking on Zoom out enables you to undo the zoom area and to display the whole path.

IX.3.3.e EXPORTING THE TEST MOBILE DATA WINDOW
In A9155, like for many other objects displayed in a window form (point analysis , antenna patterns, etc...), it is possible
to export the contents of the Test mobile data window to another application.

To export the Test mobile data window to another application, proceed as follows :
Make active the Test mobile data window,
Right click in it in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the Copy command from the open menu,
Switch to another application (e.g. Word), then paste the content of the clipboard.

IX.3.3.f PRINTING THE TEST MOBILE DATA WINDOW
In A9155, like for many other objects displayed in a window form (point analysis , antenna patterns, etc...), it is possible
to print the contents of the Test mobile data window to another application.

To export the Test mobile data window to another application, proceed as follows :
Make active the Test mobile data window,
Right click in it in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the Print command from the open menu,
The print dialog opens.



C H A P T E R 10

























Co-Planning features
10
Co-Planning features


410/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 10


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 411/476


X CO-PLANNING FEATURES
X.1 CO-PLANNING FEATURES : OVERVIEW
Since A9155 is a complete multi-technology planning tool, the possibility to work on several networks on the same
environment has been developed. Hence, it is possible to display in parallel any object (sites, transmitters, geo data,
etc...) of a project in another external project. You can choose, for example, to display simultaneously transmitter
coverages from both GSM/GPRS/EDGE and WCDMA/UMTS technologies.

Moreover, it is also possible to study inter-technology handover by allocating external neighbours, either manually or
automatically (from CDMA to GSM or from GSM to CDMA) using a method based on coverage overlapping.

Because A9155 is able to work connected to a database, working in co-planning in such a context is also possible,
whatever is the database in use (MS Access, SQL server, Oracle, Sybase).

X.2 CO-PLANNING USING A9155
X.2.1 DISPLAYING EXTERNAL OBJECTS IN A CURRENT A9155 PROJECT
In A9155, the co-planning feature enables you to compare networks based on different technologies in the same
document .atl. Therefore, you can visualise GSM sites, transmitters, coverage and measurement paths in a UMTS
project.

This feature is enabled for any technology (UMTS, GSM, CDMA/CDMA2000 ). More than two networks can be
compared in the same document. You can visualise sites, transmitters, prediction studies, measurement paths and
geographic maps (DTM, clutter, traffic).


To visualise any object from a project A in a project B, proceed as follows :
Open both projects A.atl and B.atl,
In the document A.atl, right click on the folder(s) (Sites, Transmitters, Predictions, Measurements, Clutter
classes, Traffic, DTM) you want to visualise in the project B in order to display the associated context
menu,
Choose the Creating a link in: document B.atl command from the open scrolling menu,
The selected objects are displayed in the document B workspace window. Moreover, additional folders
relating to project A data are created in the document B Explorer window. The projects A and B are linked.


You can change project A object properties in document A or B. In any case, the modifications will be taken into account
both in the project A (source document) and in the project B (in the workspace and Explorer windows).

Note : When closing the project A, A9155 displays special warning icon in the document B Explorer window and objects
relating to the document A disappear in the project B workspace window.

Co-Planning in A9155 also allows you to define neighbours between linked projects (from CDMA to GSM or from GSM to
CDMA) using a method based on coverage overlapping.

This co-planning feature is available even when using database connections (Oracle, Sybase, SQL Server, MS Access).

X.2.2 ALLOCATING EXTERNAL NEIGHBOURS MANUALLY (CO-PLANNING)
In A9155, the co-planning feature allows you to compare networks based on different technologies in a same document
.atl. Therefore, you can visualise GSM/GPRS/EDGE sites, transmitters, coverage studies and measurement paths in a
UMTS project.

From this, an external neighbours feature has been integrated to each transmitter in a network. This permits you to
choose manually, for any transmitter, neighbours from a linked project. An automatic tool (from CDMA to GSM or from
GSM to CDMA) using a method based on coverage overlapping is also available.


Co-Planning features


412/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


To make active the external neighbours (from a project A.atl) window for any transmitter (from a network B), proceed as
follows :
Open both projects A.atl and B.atl,
In the document A.atl, left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder in order to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Creating a link in : document B.atl command from the open menu,
Transmitters from A are displayed in the network B,
In the document B.atl, left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Either,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either,
Right click on the transmitter from which you want to define the external neighbourhood,
Choose the properties option from the context menu,
Or
Double click on the transmitter from which you want to define the external neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
In the displayed window, in the bottom table, click on a cell to choose from the scrolling box the
desired transmitter as an external neighbour for the current one. In the scrolling box are displayed all
the transmitters located within a radius of 30 km around the reference transmitter in the linked
network,
Click either on the button or on Apply to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Or
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Neighbours : Neighbour lists... (Cells : Neighbours : Neighbour lists... for UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA2000 projects ) command from the scrolling list,
Click the External neighbours tab from the open window,
In the displayed table, click on a cell to determine either reference transmitters (in the network B) or
associated neighbours (in the network A),
Click on the button to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.


Note : Only external transmitters located within 30 km from the reference internal transmitter are listed in the scrolling
lists of the Neighbours dialog.

X.2.3 ALLOCATING CDMA NEIGHBOURS TO GSM TRANSMITTERS
In addition to the manual allocation of external neighbours, it is possible to study the handover from a GSM network to a
CDMA one (CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS). This feature enables you to establish a list of external neighbours in an .atl
document; external neighbours are also stored in database.

To manage co-planning of networks GSM and UMTS, it is necessary to open both documents, and to create a link of
transmitters in UMTS into document GSM.

If you want to allocate neighbours from document UMTS to transmitters in document GSM, you have to create a link from
transmitters in UMTS into document GSM (using the context menu of Transmitters folder in document UMTS). Neighbour
allocation dialog then offers two tabs, the one labelled "External neighbours" enables you to define the coverage
conditions for external neighbour allocation.

The dialog offers two neighbour allocation strategies; either a simple strategy based on distance, respecting the
maximum number of neighbours, or a more sophisticated allocation algorithm using overlapping of GSM and CDMA cell
coverage.

The coverage criterion for the GSM network is a condition on minimum received signal from BCCH. The coverage criteria
for the CDMA network are a condition on minimum received signal from the pilot and a condition on minimum Ec/Io.

The constraints "Max inter-site distance", "Max number of neighbours" and the option to reset neighbours are available
as for any neighbour allocation.

The dialog offers either a distance-based allocation (CDMA transmitters close to a GSM transmitter are its CDMA
neighbours) or an allocation according to the overlap of GSM and CDMA cell coverages (sorting CDMA transmitters
according to their overlapping surfaces to determine the neighbours of each GSM transmitter).
C H A P T E R 10


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 413/476



The coverage criteria are summarised in a read-only text. The button opens a dialog allowing to change
the coverage criteria and to manage advanced parameters. Advanced parameters are the reliability level (used to model
shadowing) and, for CDMA networks, the option to model downlink interference (either total downlink power from "Cells"
table or an estimation based on a percentage of the maximum powers).

Click on Run to start algorithm. In the Results part, A9155 provides for each transmitter a list of neighbours
the related overlapping surface.
Click on Commit to allocate neighbours.

Notes :
Checking the co-site option enables you to force co-site transmitters to be considered as neighbours. Co-site cells will
be first neighbours in the list.
When selecting the Reset neighbours option, A9155 deletes all current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.

X.2.4 ALLOCATING GSM NEIGHBOURS TO CDMA TRANSMITTERS
In addition to the manual allocation of external neighbours, it is possible to study the handover from a CDMA
(CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS) network to a GSM one. This feature enables you to establish a list of external
neighbours in an .atl document; external neighbours are also stored in database.

To manage co-planning of networks UMTS and GSM, it is necessary to open both documents, and to create a link of
transmitters in GSM into document UMTS.

If you want to allocate neighbours from document GSM to transmitters in document UMTS, you have to create a link from
transmitters in UMTS into document GSM (using the context menu of Transmitters folder in document GSM). Neighbour
allocation dialog then offers two tabs, the one labelled "External neighbours" enables you to define the coverage
conditions for external neighbour allocation.

The dialog offers two neighbour allocation strategies; either a simple strategy based on distance, respecting the
maximum number of neighbours, or a more sophisticated allocation algorithm using overlapping of CDMA and GSM cell
coverage.

The coverage criterion for the GSM network is a condition on minimum received signal from BCCH. The coverage criteria
for the CDMA network are a condition on minimum received signal from the pilot and a condition on minimum Ec/Io.

The constraints "Max inter-site distance", "Max number of neighbours" and the option to reset neighbours are available
as for any neighbour allocation.

The dialog offers either distance-based allocation (GSM transmitters close to a CDMA transmitter are its GSM
neighbours) or an allocation according to the overlap of CDMA and GSM cell coverages (sorting GSM transmitters
according to their overlapping surfaces to determine the neighbours of each CDMA transmitter).

The coverage criteria are summarised in a read-only text. The button opens a dialog allowing to change
the coverage criteria and to manage advanced parameters. Advanced parameters are the reliability level (used to model
shadowing) and, for CDMA networks, the option to model downlink interference (either total downlink power from "Cells"
table or an estimation based on a percentage of the maximum powers).

Click on Run to start algorithm. In the Results part, A9155 provides for each transmitter a list of neighbours
the related overlapping surface.
Click on Commit to allocate neighbours.

Notes :
Checking the co-site option enables you to force co-site transmitters to be considered as neighbours. Co-site
transmitters will be first neighbours in the list.
When selecting the Reset neighbours option, A9155 deletes all current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.

Co-Planning features


414/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


X.3 CO-PLANNING USING DATABASES
X.3.1 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A MS ACCESS DATABASE
Unlike Oracle, Sybase and SQL server, MS Access users can store only one .atl project in the same database.
Nevertheless, you can create a link between the databases and manage simultaneously tables which have the same
structure as Sites, Antennas, Links or Link equipment tables.


To manage a single table (e.g., Sites table) in an MS Access database, proceed as follows :
Open the project B.atl in A9155,
Remove the transmitters from the Transmitters table and sites from the Sites table,
Export the project B.atl in the database B.mdb,
In the database, open the document B.mdb and delete the Sites table,
In A9155, open the project A.atl and export it in the database A.mdb,
In the Access database, open the document B.mdb,
Select the Get External Data: Link Tables command from the File menu,
Select A.mdb from the Link window,
Click on the Link button,
Choose the Sites table in the Link tables window,
Press OK to create a Sites table linked to the A.mdb Sites table in B.mdb. Both tables contain the same
objects.

X.3.2 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A SQL SERVER DATABASE
Oracle, Sybase and SQL server users can store several projects .atl in the same database. When connecting A9155 to
the database (exporting a document .atl in the database or opening a document .atl from the database), you can
visualize all the environments .atl stored in the database in the Choosing a project window and select one of them. Then,
by creating synonyms, you can share tables which have the same structure as Sites, Antennas, Links or Link equipment
tables. This procedure can be carried out only by the database administrator.


To manage a single table (e.g., Sites table) in an SQL server database, proceed as follows :
Let the sites of both projects A.atl and B.atl be identical,
Lets assume two users, user A and user B, have been created in the database,
Open the project B.atl in A9155, remove the transmitters from the Transmitters table and sites from the
Sites table,
Export the project B.atl in the database by logging on to user B,
In the database, log on to user B and delete the Sites table,
In A9155, open the project A.atl and export it in the database by logging on to user A,
In the database, log on to user A,
Click on the Sites table and select the Create a synonym on command from the associated context menu.
The Create synonym window is displayed,
Specify the synonym name (Sites), the name of the schema containing the synonym (User B), the object
type (table), the name of the schema you want to use (User A), the object which will be the synonym model
(Sites),
Click on Create to validate the synonym creation in the schema B (user B),
Therefore, the user B Sites table is the same than the user A Sites table. Both tables are linked.

X.3.3 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH AN ORACLE DATABASE
Oracle, Sybase and SQL server users can store several projects .atl in the same database. When connecting A9155 to
the database (exporting a document .atl in the database or opening a document .atl from the database), you can
visualize all the environments .atl stored in the database in the Choosing a project window and select one of them. Then,
by creating synonyms, you can share tables which have the same structure as Sites, Antennas, Links or Link equipment
tables. This procedure can be carried out only by the database administrator.


To manage a single table (e.g., Sites table) in an Oracle database, proceed as follows :
Let the sites of both projects A.atl and B.atl be identical,
Lets assume two users, user A and user B, have been created in the database,
C H A P T E R 10


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 415/476


Open the project B.atl in A9155, remove the transmitters from the Transmitters table and sites from the
Sites table,
Export the project B.atl in the database by logging on to user B,
In the database, log on to user B and delete the Sites table,
In A9155, open the project A.atl and export it in the database by logging on to user A,
In the database, log on to user A,
Click on the Sites table and select the Create a synonym on command from the associated context menu.
The Create synonym window is displayed,
Specify the synonym name (Sites), the name of the schema containing the synonym (User B), the object
type (table), the name of the schema you want to use (User A), the object which will be the synonym model
(Sites),
Click on Create to validate the synonym creation in the schema B (user B),
Therefore, the user B Sites table is the same than the user A Sites table. Both tables are linked.

X.3.4 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A SYBASE DATABASE
Oracle, Sybase and SQL server users can store several projects .atl in the same database. When connecting A9155 to
the database (exporting a document .atl in the database or opening a document .atl from the database), you can
visualize all the environments .atl stored in the database in the Choosing a project window and select one of them. Then,
by creating synonyms, you can share tables which have the same structure as Sites, Antennas, Links or Link equipment
tables. This procedure can be carried out only by the database administrator.


To manage a single table (e.g., Sites table) in an Sybase database, proceed as follows :
Let the sites of both projects A.atl and B.atl be identical,
Lets assume two users, user A and user B, have been created in the database,
Open the project B.atl in A9155, remove the transmitters from the Transmitters table and sites from the
Sites table,
Export the project B.atl in the database by logging on to user B,
In the database, log on to user B and delete the Sites table,
In A9155, open the project A.atl and export it in the database by logging on to user A,
In the database, log on to user A,
Click on the Sites table and select the Create a synonym on command from the associated context menu.
The Create synonym window is displayed,
Specify the synonym name (Sites), the name of the schema containing the synonym (User B), the object
type (table), the name of the schema you want to use (User A), the object which will be the synonym model
(Sites),
Click on Create to validate the synonym creation in the schema B (user B),
Therefore, the user B Sites table is the same than the user A Sites table. Both tables are linked.



C H A P T E R 11

























Import/Export Specific ALCATEL Data
11
Import/Export Specific ALCATEL data


418/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 11


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 419/476


XI IMPORT/EXPORT SPECIFIC ALCATEL DATA
XI.1 IMPORT/EXPORT SPECIFIC ALCATEL DATA : OVERVIEW
A9155 provides different interfaces in order to import or export specific Alcatel data. 3 types of data can be
managed : measurement files, antennas, and CAE data.

Two types of measurement types can be imported in A9155. You may choose to import either sessions
bases on analog or digital measurements.

In an existing project, you may import Alcatel antenna if your current project does not already contain the
needed necessary antennas to build your transmitters.

It is also possible to both import and export data contained in GSM and/or UMTS projects in CAE data.

XI.2 MEASUREMENT FILES
XI.2.1 IMPORTING ANALOGUE MEASUREMENT FILES
Unlike in digital measurement files, analogue measurement data refer to measured signal levels along a
measurement path for a unique reference transmitter. A9155 provides different types of dialog windows
depending on the format (automatically detected) of the measurement file being currently imported. For
specific Alcatel format, a specific measurement import dialog box is available. Nevertheless, the procedure to
import measured signal levels from a transmitter stays identical for all formats.


To import analogue measurement files, proceed as follows :
Click the data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the CW Measurements folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Import...,
Specify the path, name and the format of the file to be imported in the opened window,
Click to validate your choice,
A specific analogue measurement import window is opened,
Use the What's this to get description about fields available in the opened window,
Click the button to achieve the import procedure.

A new measurement object is created in the CW Measurement folder and can be managed as other
measurement items.

Notes :
The coordinate system must be defined before the import procedure is executed,
Measurement files can only be imported into an existing network.

XI.2.2 IMPORTING DIGITAL MEASUREMENT FILES
Unlike in analogue measurement files, digital measurement data refer to measured signal levels along a
measurement path for various transmitters which are identified by (BSIC,BCCH) couples. A9155 identifies
automatically the type of measurement file being imported (digital or analogue).


To import analogue measurement files in Alcatel format, proceed as follows :
Click the data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the CW Measurements folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Import...,
Import/Export Specific ALCATEL data


420/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Specify the path, name and the format of the file to be imported in the opened window,
Click to validate your choice,
Click the button to achieve the import procedure.


New measurement objects linked with each involved transmitter are created in the Measurement folder and
can be managed as other measurement items.


Notes :
The coordinate system must be defined before the import procedure is executed,
Importing measurement files can be made only in an existing network.
(BSIC,BCCH) couples dealing with reference transmitters must be affected before the import procedure in order to be
effectively taken into account,
In each measurement table, a new column named celltype is available. For any measurement point, the associated
value is :
0 when the considered transmitter is the reference one for the current cell,
Another number which is the neighbour number for the current cell.

XI.3 ANTENNA DATA
XI.3.1 IMPORTING NEW ALCATEL ANTENNAS IN AN EXISTING NETWORK
To import a new antenna in an existing network with specific Alcatel format (.ant extension), proceed as
follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Specify the directory where the file to be imported is located and the file name in the opened dialog box,
Press OK to validate,
The name, the gain, horizontal and vertical patterns are imported. Other data are imported in the comments
box.


Use the What's this to get description about fields available in the dialog windows associated with antennas.


Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer software to A9155,
A9155 detects already existing antennas and allows you to either keep the previous version or to replace it with the
new one,
A9155 provides an easy management of imported Alcatel antennas like any other items.

XI.4 CAE DATA
XI.4.1 CAE DATA : OVERVIEW
In A9155, it is possible to import or export CAE (Customer Application Engineering) data files working in
either GSM or UMTS projects.

In GSM/TDMA, supported BSS releases are B6.2, B7.2 and B8.

The different data of interest in GSM projects are :
RNO data : These files contain all physical cell data for GSM cells under evaluation in the planning for which the data
production has to be performed
Interference matrix in RNO format : this file is only exported. In order to export this file, the user should previously
have generated interference matrix files in A9155 format (.clc and .dct)
Experience matrix coming from RNO : this file is only imported and is used to update the Exceptional pairs table
C H A P T E R 11


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 421/476


GSM cell design : These files contain all logical cell data for GSM cells under evaluation in the planning for which the
data production has to be performed
GSM-like neighbourhoods, which define the handover between the GSM cells
Frequency lists, which are the frequencies to assign globally to transmitters.
PDCH groups, describing the number of timeslots dedicated to packet services per TRX. (only relevant in B6)
Frequency Hopping Sequences, containing sequence lists and HSNs associated to each transmitter
HOP data, which contains information about the association of data contained in the FHS file with transmitter TRXs of
the current network.
TRX-List file which gives the configuration of each timeslot of each TRX.


In UMTS, supported releases are 3GR1, 3GR2 step 1 and 2 and 3GR3

The different data of interest in UMTS projects are :
UMTS cell design. These files contain all logical (powers, scrambling code, ...) and physical (coordinates, antenna
information) cell data for UMTS cells under evaluation in the planning for which the data production has to be
performed
UMTS-UMTS neighbourhoods which define the handover between the UMTS cells
GSM cell design. Some GSM cells will be target of neighbour cell relationships of UMTS cell. For these external cells,
some basic information have to be provided to the system to allow the establishing of neighbourhoods. Cells that are
not target for outgoing handovers from UMTS cells are not considered.
UMTS-GSM like neighbourhoods. This defines the outgoing handovers between the UMTS cell and the external GSM
cells.


Warning : Any modifications of CAE parameters during project life is checked (range and type), based on all
releases possible values (union of ranges) :
GSM/TDMA : Cell Identity and LAC
UMTS : LocalcellID
Uniqueness is checked but not Null value. (null value will be tested when an export is done)

XI.4.2 IMPORTING CAE DATA IN AN EXISTING PROJECT
Importing CAE (Customer Application Engineering) data allows the user to import CAE data either in GSM
like projects or in UMTS projects. These files are .rnp extended.

A9155 allows the user to import:
from GSM projects, RNO data, experience matrix, cell data, GSM-like neighbourhoods, frequency lists, PDCH
groups, FHS (Frequency Hopping Sequences) and HOP data, TRX-List
from UMTS, the UMTS cell design, UMTS-UMTS and UMTS-GSM like neighbourhoods,
to empty or existing .atl projects.


To import CAE data in any opened .atl project, proceed as follows :
Select the CAE data Import command in the Tools menu from the menu bar,
Specify the directory containing the CAE data files and,
Either,
For GSM-like projects,
either the considered RNO data (prefix RNO_) or Cell data (prefix CEL_) or GSM-like
neighbourhoods (prefix ADJ_) or frequency list (prefix FRQ_) or PDCH group (prefix PDC_) or FHS
data (prefix FHS_) or HOP data (prefix HOP_) files in the opened dialog box,
Or,
For UMTS projects,
either the considered cell design (prefix U_cel) or neighbourhood (prefix UU_Adj and UG_Adj) files
in the opened dialog box,
Press the button to validate,
A dialog window opens in which you can choose or not the files to import,
Use the What's this to get information about fields available in the opened dialog window,
Press the button to achieve the import procedure.


Import/Export Specific ALCATEL data


422/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer software to A9155,
This import procedure can either create new objects or update existing objects,
In GSM-like projects, RNO files are .RNO extended. Other files are .COF extended and are located together in the
same directory.
In GSM-like projects FHS and HOP files must be imported together.
After import, in order to check the validity of the existing frequency plan with the Frequency plan consistency
checking.

XI.4.3 EXPORTING CAE DATA FROM THE CURRENT PROJECT
Exporting CAE (Customer Application Engineering) data allows the user to export :
from GSM-like projects, RNO data, interference matrix, cell data, GSM-like neighbourhoods, frequency lists, PDCH
groups, FHS and HOP data, TRX-List,
from UMTS, the UMTS cell design, GSM cell design (for handover purpose), UMTS-UMTS and UMTS-GSM like
neighbourhoods,
to CAE data format (.rnp extended files).


To export CAE data from the current project, proceed as follows :
Select the CAE data Export command in the Tools menu from the menu bar,
A dialog window opens in which you can choose or not the type of files to export,
Use the What's this to get information about fields available in the opened dialog window,
Press the button to achieve the export procedure.


Notes :
Be sure to respect consistency of data on both pilot, SCH, other CCH powers, and associated offsets in UMTS
projects.
Before export, in order to check the validity of the existing frequency plan with the Frequency plan consistency
checking.






C H A P T E R 12

























Import MSI PlaNET Data
12
Import MSI PlaNET Data


424/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 12


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 425/476


XII IMPORT MSI PLANET DATA
XII.1 IMPORT MSI PLANET DATA : OVERVIEW
Geographic data, radio data (antennas, network data - sites and transmitters -, carriers ), neighbours, propagation
models (possibly path loss matrices), text data files, and CW measurement previously created with PlaNET project
(version 2.8) can be imported. This feature is available in any type of project.

A9155 imports PlaNET database even if there are errors or inconsistencies in files to be imported. Indeed, A9155
imports all the objects, except these which description syntax is incorrect and data which depend on nonexistent objects
(ex: station located on a site which does not exist). Errors occurred during import are listed and described in the Events
tab of the Event viewer window.

Note : Each import deletes and recreates all the objects to be imported.

XII.2 PLANET GEO DATA FILES
XII.2.1 PLANET GEO DATA FORMAT
The PlaNET geographic data are described by a set of files regrouped in a PlaNET directory. The directory structure
depends on the geographic data type. A9155 supports the following objects in PlaNET format:
Digital Terrain Model (16 bits)
Clutter classes maps (16 bits)
Raster images (1, 4, 8 and 24 bits)
Vector data
Text data


DTM :

The DTM directory consists on three files, the height file and two others:

The index file structure is simple, it is an ASCII text file which holds positional information about file. It contains five
columns. You can open an index file using any ASCII text editor. The format of the index file is as follows:

Field File name East min East max
Acceptable
values
Float Float Float
Description File name: name of file
referenced by the index file
x-axis map coordinate of the
centre of the upper-left pixel in
metres
x-axis map coordinate of the
centre of the upper-right pixel in
metres

Field North min North max Square size
Acceptable
values
Float Float Float
Description y-axis map coordinate of the centre of
the upper-left pixel in metres
y-axis map coordinate of the centre of
the upper-right pixel in metres
dimension of a
pixel in metres

Example: Index file associated with height file (DTM data).

sydney1 303900 343900 6227900 6267900 50

The projection file provides information about used projection system. This file is optional, it is an ASCII text file with up
to four lines.

Line Description

Spheroid
Zone
Projection
Central
meridian
Latitude and longitude of projection central meridian and equivalent x and y coordinates in metres
(optional)
Import MSI PlaNET Data


426/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Example: Projection file associated with height file (DTM data).

Australian-1965
56
UTM
0 153 500000 10000000


Clutter classes :

The Clutter classes directory consists on three files, the clutter file and two others:

The menu file, an ASCII text file, defines the feature codes for each type of clutter. It consists of as many lines (with the
following format) as there are clutter codes in the clutter data files.

Field Type Description

Clutter-code Integer (>1) Identification code for clutter class
Feature-name String Name associated with the clutter-code. It may contain spaces

Example: Menu file associated with the clutter file

1 open
2 sea
3 inlandwater
4 residential
5 meanurban
6 denseurban
7 buildings
8 village
9 industrial
10 openinurban
11 forest
12 parks
13 denseurbanhigh
14 blockbuildings
15 denseblockbuild
16 rural
17 mixedsuburban

The index file gives clutter spatial references. The structure of clutter index file is the same as the structure of the DTM
index file.


Vector :

Vector data contains features such as coastlines, road, etc. Each of these features is stored in a separate vector file.
Four types of file are used, the vector file ,where x and y coordinates of vector paths are stored, and three other files:

The menu file, an ASCII text file, lists the vector types stored in the database. The menu file is composed of one or more
records with the following structure:

Field Type Description

Vector type code Integer > 0 Identification code for the vector type
Vector type name String (up to 32 characters in length) Name of the vector type

The fields are separated by space characters.

The index file, an ASCII text file, lists the vector files and associates each vector file with one vector type and optionally,
one attribute file. The index file consists of one or more records with the following structure:

Field Type Description

Vector file
name
String (up to 32
characters in length)
Filename of the vector file
Attribute file
name
String (up to 32
characters in length)
Filename of attribute file associated with the vector file (optional)
Dimensions Real Consist of four fields as follows
- vector file eastmin: minimum x-axis coordinate of all vector path points in
the vector file
- vector file eastmax: maximum x-axis coordinate of all vector path points in
the vector file
- vector file northmin: minimum y-axis coordinate of all vector path points in
the vector file
- vector file northmax: maximum y-axis coordinate of all vector path points in
the vector file
C H A P T E R 12


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 427/476


Vector type
name
String (up to 32
characters in length)
Name of the vector type which the vector file is associated with. This one
must match exactly a vector type name field in the menu file.

The fields are separated by space characters.

Example: Index file associated with the vector files

sydney1.airport 313440 333021 6239426 6244784 airport
sydney1.riverlake 303900 342704 6227900 6267900 riverlake
sydney1.coastline 322837 343900 6227900 6267900 coastline
sydney1.railways 303900 336113 6227900 6267900 railways
sydney1.highways 303900 325155 6240936 6267900 highways
sydney1.majstreets 303900 342770 6227900 6267900 majstreets
sydney1.majorroads 303900 342615 6227900 6267900 majorroads

The attribute file stores the height and description properties of vector paths. This file is optional.


Image :

The Image directory consists of two files, the image file with .tif extension and an index file with the same structure as the
DTM index file structure.


Text file :

The text data directory consists of:
- The text data files, ASCII text files with the following format:

Airport
637111.188 3094774.00
Airport
628642.688 3081806.25

Each file contains a line of text followed by easting and northing of that text, etc.

- The index file, an ASCII text file, stores the position of each text file. It consists of one or more records with the following
structure:

Field Type Description
File name Text (up to 32 characters in length) Filename of the text data file
East Min Real Minimum x-axis coordinate of all points listed in the text data file
East Max Real Maximum x-axis coordinate of all points listed in the text data file
North Min Real Minimum y-axis coordinate of all points listed in the text data file
North Max Real Maximum y-axis coordinate of all points listed in the text data file
Text feature Text (up to 32 characters in length) This field is omitted in case no menu file is available

Separator is a blank character.

railwayp.txt -260079 693937 2709348 3528665 Railway_Station
airport.txt -307727 771663 2547275 3554675 Airport
ferryport.txt 303922 493521 2667405 3241297 Ferryport


- The menu file, an ASCII text file, which contains the text features. This file is optional.

1 Airport
2 Ferryport
3 Railway_Station

Import MSI PlaNET Data


428/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XII.2.2 IMPORTING MSI PLANET GEOGRAPHIC DATA
Several types of geographic data coming from PlaNET (version 2.8) can be imported into A9155 : clutter, DTM, vectors
or image. Whatever data, the procedure always consists in importing an index file either from the File menu, or with drag
and drop from any file explorer application to A9155.


To import any PlaNET geographic database, proceed as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Choose from the File of types scrolling box either :
The PlaNET Geo data (index) option,
Give the path of the index file,
Click the Open button,
Choose from the open window the type of geo data to be imported and if you want to embed it or not
in the current .atl A9155 project,
Press OK to achieve the geographic database procedure import,
The PlaNET database option,
A specific PlaNET data import dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the box(es) associated with the data to be imported and locate the index file(s) with the
browser,
Check or modify the projection coordinate system attached to the geographic data to be imported,
Press OK to achieve the geographic database procedure import.


Notes :
The button helps you to locate any file by accessing an Open file dialog window.
Selecting the PlaNET Geo data (index) option from the File of types scrolling box is not compulsory. This option is
taken by default when importing an index file.
A9155 also supports as index file all the files which name begins with the string of character index . A9155 is not
case sensitive. Examples: index, Index2, INDEX.new...


Other PlaNET imports : antennas, CW measurement, network, text data files, carriers, neighbours, propagation model
parameters, path loss matrices

XII.2.3 IMPORTING MSI PLANET TEXT DATA FILES
In A9155, you can import text data coming from PlaNET (version 2.8). The procedure consists in locating an index file.


To import any PlaNET text data files, proceed as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Choose from the File of types scrolling box the PlaNET Geo data (index) option,
Give the path of the index file,
Click the Open button,
In the Data type dialog, select Text data,
Press OK to achieve the text data procedure import.


A9155 creates a folder called Text data in the Geo tab; this folder contains all the objects listed in the index file.

Notes :
Selecting the PlaNET Geo data (index) option from the File of types scrolling box is not compulsory. This option is
taken by default when importing an index file.
A9155 also supports as index file all the files which name begins with the string of character index . A9155 is not
case sensitive. Examples: index, Index2, INDEX.new...


Other PlaNET imports : antennas, CW measurement, network, carriers, neighbours, propagation models parameters,
path loss matrices

C H A P T E R 12


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 429/476


XII.3 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET DATABASE
XII.3.1 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET ANTENNA DATABASE
In A9155, you can import antennas coming from PlaNET (version 2.8). The procedure consists in locating an index file
containing the name of the antennas to import from the current folder. Standard fields defined in A9155 data structure
are directly imported. Depending on the type of data, other PlaNET fields are imported and considered as information
fields (Other properties tab of the imported data).

If the database system does not allow the creation of fields by program (e.g. Oracle), it is necessary to create the new
fields in database before importing.

For antennas, the information fields to be created are :
FREQUENCY The design frequency of the antenna
H_WIDTH The azimuth beamwidth
V_WIDTH The elevation beamwidth
FRONT_TO_BACK The ratio of forward antenna gain at 0 and 180 degree elevation
TILT Indicates whether the antenna is to be electrically or mechanically tilted


To import a PlaNET antenna database, proceed as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Choose from the File of types scrolling box the PlaNET database option,
A specific PlaNET data import dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the box associated with the data to import and locate the linked index file in the appropriate box,
Press OK to achieve the antenna database procedure import.


Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file dialog window.


Other PlaNET imports : CW measurement, network, geographic data, text data files, carriers, neighbours, propagation
models parameters, path loss matrices

XII.3.2 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET NETWORK
Network data (only sites or sites and transmitters) from PlaNET (version 2.8) can be imported into an A9155 document.
The procedure consists in selecting an ASCII site database file and a Flag type file (optional). PlaNET Site database
contains 5 flags. Selecting the Flag type file imports flag names instead of flag values. Take car to ensure consistency
between the imported database and data from the Flag type file. Standard fields defined in A9155 data structure are
directly imported. Depending on the type of data, other PlaNET fields are imported and considered as information fields
(Other properties tab of the imported data).

If the database system does not allow the creation of fields by program (e.g. Oracle), it is necessary to create the new
fields in database before importing.

For sites, the information fields to be created are :
FLAG_1 to FLAG5 Site status flags (number or flag name if flag types file also imported)
LAYER MACRO for macrocell or MICRO for microcell (or empty)


To import a PlaNET network database, proceed as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Choose from the File of types scrolling box the PlaNET database option,
A specific PlaNET data import dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the box(es) associated with the data to import and locate the linked file(s) in the appropriate boxes,
Press OK to achieve the network database procedure import.


Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file dialog window.
Import MSI PlaNET Data


430/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



Comment: transmitters cannot be created without antenna data. When importing a network, you must make sure that
antenna types referenced by sites already exist in the current project. If not, you must import the appropriate antennas
database. Therefore, select antenna import and ensure a suitable directory path for antennas.


Important : in PlaNET projects, transmitters are characterized by the EIRP (2G). In A9155 3G projects, this field is not
available, instead the pilot power has to be defined. Thus, when importing PlaNET network data, the pilot power is
calculated from the EIRP value as follows : Pilot power = EIRP - antenna gain + emission losses.


Other PlaNET imports : antennas, CW measurement, geographic data, text data files, carriers, neighbours, propagation
models parameters, path loss matrices

XII.3.3 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET CARRIER DATABASE
Carrier data from PlaNET (version 2.8) can be imported in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. Standard fields defined in
A9155 data structure are directly imported. Depending on the type of data, other PlaNET fields are imported and
considered as information fields (Other properties tab of the imported data).

If the database system does not allow the creation of fields by program (e.g. Oracle), it is necessary to create the new
fields in database before importing.

For the carrier import, the information fields to be created are :
LAC Location area code
CELLID Alphanumeric cell identity
MOB_COUNTRY_CODE Mobile Country Code
BSC Base Station Controller
MSC Mobile services Switching Centre
related to a consistent transmitter network.

Note : the transmitters are supposed either to exist in the A9155 document or to be imported first.

To import a PlaNET carrier database, proceed as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Choose from the File of types scrolling box the PlaNET database option,
A specific PlaNET data import dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the box(es) associated with the data to import and locate the linked file(s) in the appropriate boxes,
Press OK to achieve the carrier database procedure import.


Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file dialog window.


Other PlaNET imports : antennas, CW measurement, geographic data, text data files, network, neighbours,
propagation models parameters, path loss matrices

XII.3.4 IMPORTING A MSI PLANET NEIGHBOUR DATABASE
Neighbour data coming from PlaNET (version 2.8), related to a consistent transmitter network, can be imported in
GSM/GPRS/EDGE or UMTS/CDMA projects.


To import a PlaNET neighbour database, proceed as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Choose from the File of types scrolling box the PlaNET database option,
A specific PlaNET data import dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the box(es) associated with the data to import and locate the linked file(s) in the appropriate boxes,
Press OK to achieve the neighbour database procedure import.

C H A P T E R 12


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 431/476



Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file dialog window.


Other PlaNET imports : antennas, CW measurement, geographic data, text data files, carriers, network, propagation
model parameters, path loss matrices

XII.3.5 IMPORTING MSI PLANET PROPAGATION MODEL PARAMETERS
A9155 provides an automatic import of PlaNET models. Standard propagation K1 to K6 values as well as calculation
methods and clutter management parameters are imported. The procedure consists in selecting an index file containing
the name of the models to be imported.


To import a PlaNET propagation model database, proceed as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Choose from the File of types scrolling box the PlaNET database option,
A specific PlaNET data import dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the box associated with the data to import and locate the linked index file in the appropriate box,
Press OK to achieve the propagation models database procedure import.


Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file dialog window.


Note : It is necessary to know that PlaNET deals with gains contrary to A9155 which deals with losses. Indeed, for
PlaNET a loss is a negative value. Hence, clutter parameters are the opposite between PlaNET and A9155. In the
same way and for the same reason, K1 to K6 values are the opposite between PlaNET and A9155, except K4
(diffraction parameter) which is considered as a loss.

The automatic import of PlaNET models is supposed to avoid that the user have to manage any conversion.

Examples : :
Let's imagine a clutter class in a PlaNET project for which is assigned a -10 dB gain. It is assigned a 10 dB loss
(positive value) within the A9155 document.
If a clutter class generates an increase of signal (i.e. 5dB in a PlaNET project), then A9155 considers a negative
loss (-5dB).


Other PlaNET imports : antennas, CW measurement, network, text data files, carriers, neighbours, geographic data,
path loss matrices

XII.3.6 IMPORTING MSI PLANET PATH LOSS MATRICES
Imported path loss matrices are listed in the Result storage window from the context menu of the Predictions folder.
They are locked; thus, new prediction studies performed in A9155 will just be based on the imported results without
recalculating path loss matrices. When importing PlaNET predictions, A9155 uses signal level and EIRP available in
each binary .sig file to calculate the path loss (EIRP-signal level). This path loss is then used by A9155 as any path loss
result coming from a propagation model.


To import a PlaNET path loss matrices, proceed as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Choose from the File of types scrolling box the PlaNET database option,
A specific PlaNET data import dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the box associated with the data to import and locate the linked .sig directory in the appropriate box,
Press OK to achieve the path loss matrices database procedure import.


Import MSI PlaNET Data


432/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file dialog window.


Comment: If you change some parameters like grid resolution, a dialog will warn you about the fact that calculations
will be unlocked. In this case, to perform prediction studies, A9155 will recalculate the path loss matrices using the
default model.


Other PlaNET imports : antennas, CW measurement, network, geographic data, text data files, carriers, neighbours,
propagation model parameters

XII.4 IMPORTING MSI PLANET CW MEASUREMENT DATA
XII.4.1 IMPORTING MSI PLANET CW MEASUREMENT
CW Measurement from PlaNET (version 2.8) may be imported into A9155. This feature is available in any type of
project. To make the PlaNET survey import easier, the drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer
application to A9155.


To import a PlaNET CW measurement file in A9155, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the CW Measurements folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Import...,
In the open window, in the type of file box, specify the survey files PlaNET (*.hd) format,
Precise the path and the name of the file to be imported,
Click to validate your choice,
The CW measurement is directly imported in the A9155 environment. PlaNET data are included in A9155
internal fields of the properties window,
Press OK to validate.

Note : Importing PlaNET CW measurement in a UMTS project requires that the measured transmitter already exists in
the project (site + antenna + transmitter - cell). Ensure the consistency between the cell pilot power in A9155 UMTS
project and the EIRP value defined in the PlaNET document (Pilot power = EIRP transmitter antenna gain + emission
losses).


Other PlaNET imports : antennas, network, geographic data, text data files, carriers, neighbours, propagation models,
path loss matrices



C H A P T E R 13

























Multi-User Features
13
Multi-User features


434/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 13


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 435/476


XIII MULTI-USER FEATURES
XIII.1 MULTI-USER PROJECTS : OVERVIEW
A9155 is able to store and to exchange (load or refresh) project data in a standard database.

Working with a database allows several users to share the same data without risking hidden data consistency loss.
Database do not integrate all radio and geo parameters of a network. Nevertheless, it is also possible to create user
configuration files (containing geo file paths and description (including vector or raster traffic data), computation zone
definition, prediction definitions, folder configurations, macro file paths) that can be exchanged between users working on
the same project. Once the database is created, it is easily possible for each user to make modifications and either
reload modified data from the database or refresh database with pending changes. Moreover, potential data conflicts
(e.g. on modified or deleted records), due to other users actions are detected and the user is assisted in resolving them.

An A9155 document, once connected to a database, keeps memory of the connection and allows the user to manage
data consistency in deferred processing.

Furthermore, to open an A9155 session, connected or not to a project in a database, the tool can be started from a
command line, including several management options.

Since neither databases nor user configurations store calculation results, A9155 features the possibility to share
externalised path loss matrices between users. So, you can work using a central .losses folder containing matrices
related to a database project shared by several users.

XIII.2 CREATING/STARTING DATABASE PROJECTS
XIII.2.1 OPERATING PRINCIPLES
At the beginning of a session, you can connect (either creating a new database or a new atl document from a database)
to an existing database and load its data in your own A9155 new file. At any time during the session, you are able to
archive your work into the connected database, or refresh your document with radio data coming from the database.

You can perform the following operations:

Connection between an existing base and an A9155 new document :

A9155
connect ion



Export of a current A9155 document data to a database

A9155
Create,
Connect and
Add



Multi-User features


436/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Archive in the database:

A9155
updat e
add



Refresh from the database :

A9155
updat e
add


XIII.2.2 CREATING A NEW DATABASE FROM A DOCUMENT
This procedure permits the user to create the reference database that can either be used by several users or handled
easily.

To create a new database from the currently open .atl A9155 document, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, select the Database command in the File menu,
Then click on the Export... option from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open export window,
Click on the button after giving the appropriate name and format (MS Access, SQL Server,
Oracle, Sybase) to the exported file.


The data which are stored in database deal with radio data (sites, transmitters, antennas, station templates, microwave
links, etc...), radio parameters (such as propagation models, frequency bands, etc...), UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000
parameters, Neighbours (internal and external), custom fields, units, coordinate systems.

The data which are not saved in database are Geo data files (or paths) related parameters, folder configurations, study
definitions, computation and focus zones, traffic maps, measurements, path loss results (matrices) and coverage areas.

The user configuration feature allows the user to save Geo data paths and related parameters, folder configurations,
study definitions, and the computation zone. Traffic maps, measurements and coverage areas can be easily exported.
Path loss results can be shared between users using a central matrix private folder. Matrices can be also exported in
external files to be used in other applications.

XIII.2.3 CREATING A NEW DOCUMENT FROM A DATABASE
This connection must be established when creating a new document. Once connected, A9155 loads the entire base in
your new document. Then connection is interrupted. A new connection with reference database will be activated only
when necessary in order to enable other users access.

To create a new A9155 document based on data from an existing database, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, right click on the File menu, then
Either
Choose the open from a database... option from the current menu (if no project is already open)
Or
Select the Database option, then Choose the open from a database... option (if a project is already
open),
Select the database file format (including databases via a Microsoft Data link file (.UDL)) and name (Use
the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialog window),
C H A P T E R 13


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 437/476


Left click on the button to open the selected database. Connection procedure is specific to
each database type.


Note : you will have to check the accuracy of the geo data paths (clutter, traffic, etc...) that may not be valid on your
computer.

XIII.2.4 STARTING A9155 FROM THE COMMAND LINE
It is possible to start A9155 from the command line and open a project stored in an Access or Oracle database by
entering the database connection parameters (user/password/server).

In the command dialog, type the following instruction :

In case of Oracle database:
C:\Program Files\Alcatel\A9155\Atoll.exe -Provider <Provider name> -Password <User password > -UserId <User
account > -DataSource <server> -Project <Project account>

In case of Access database:
C:\Program Files\Alcatel\A9155\Atoll.exe -Provider <Provider name> -DataSource C:\\database.mdb

Note : To identify the provider name, check the Connection properties command from the Database menu in A9155
when the associated database is currently open (the Access and Oracle provider names are respectively
Microsoft.Jet.OLEDB.4.0 and MSDAORA.1).

Caution: note that Provider, Password, UserId, DataSource and Project parameters are case sensitive in the instructions
above.


In addition to this syntax, some other options are also available. For instance, you can load a user configuration by
entering the full path of the configuration file. Therefore, you can open a project from database and load the configuration
file by entering the following syntax:
C:\Program Files\Alcatel\A9155\Atoll.exe -Provider <provider_name> -UserId <login_account> -Password <password>
-DataSource <server> -Project <project_account> -Cfg C:\.\configuration.cfg

Since A9155 works from a command line with options, you can use this feature to start A9155 entering the following
syntax:
C:\Program Files\Alcatel\A9155\Atoll.exe -Cfg C:\.\configuration.cfg

In this case, A9155 is automatically started and the configuration file is loaded when creating a new project.

Note : These options can be configured in the A9155 desktop shortcut.

Finally, messages listed in the Events tab can be saved in a .log file, typing the following syntax in the command line:
C:\Program Files\Alcatel\A9155\Atoll.exe -log C:\.\events.log

XIII.2.5 EXPORTING USER CONFIGURATION TO AN EXTERNAL FILE
In A9155, user configurations can be saved and shared between users. Hence, you can define some settings in an .atl
project and store them in an external file. This file has a XML (eXtensible Markup Language) international format and .cfg
or .geo extension.

A user configuration file may contain the following information:
Geographic data set: Paths of imported geographic maps, map display settings (visibility scale, transparency, tips
text), clutter description (code, name, colour, height, model standard deviation and orthogonality factor of each
clutter class) and raster or user profile traffic map description
Computation zone,
Folder configurations: Sort/group/filter configurations and display settings of radio data folders,
Definition of prediction studies: general information (name, comments, group, sort and filters), study conditions and
display settings,
The paths of macros.

All these parameters are not stored in a relational database, as they were in versions previous to V6.1. Therefore, the
Multi-User features


438/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


only way to share these settings is to create a user configuration file. Then, by importing it, users are able to work on the
same geographic data, have the same data organisation and representation and work out the same prediction studies on
a common computation zone. Moreover, they are able to carry out any modification in their .atl documents without
changing reference for the others.

To export a user configuration in an external file, proceed as follows :
In the Tools menu, select the [User configuration:Save as] command,
In the User configuration window, select the options you want to export in the file and then,
Click OK,
In the Save as dialog, browse to find the directory where you want to save the file and specify its name,
Press OK to validate.

When importing a user configuration file including a geographic data set or a study list, A9155 checks if geographic maps
or prediction studies are already available in the .atl document. If it finds a map or a study in the .atl document, it offers
two options in the import dialog, Reset existing geo data and Reset existing studies. Select these options in order to
remove existing geographic maps or studies from the .atl document before loading the geographic data set or study list
described in the user configuration file

Notes :
A9155 can store path of any imported geographic data with any of the supported formats except traffic maps. Be
careful, vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps.
Projection and display coordinate systems are not stored (they are stored in the database)
The different settings (geographic data set, computation zone, folder configurations and prediction study definition)
can be stored independently. The default extension of user configuration file is .geo when saving either geographic
data set, or computation zone, or both of them.
Since a macro is linked to an A9155 session (and not to an .atl project), the export in user configurations can be
made when an .atl project is open or not.
User configuration files have an international format; they can be used on workstations with different regional
parameters.
A9155 does not store any simulation settings such as parameters entered when creating simulation or simulation
display properties.
Since user configuration files are in standard XML format, they can be open by XML viewers (and modified and/or
improved).

User configuration files can be created by A9155, imported into an existing .atl document (into an A9155 session for
macros) and easily exchanged between users.

XIII.2.6 IMPORTING USER CONFIGURATION FROM AN EXTERNAL FILE
User configuration files are one of the tools in A9155 to share data between users.

To import a user configuration from an external file, proceed as follows:
In the Tools menu, select the [User configuration:Import] command,
In the Open window, click on the Files of type scrolling menu and select Configuration files (*.cfg),
Specify the directory where the file to be imported is located and its name,
Press OK to validate,
In the User configuration window, check the items you want to import in your .atl document,
Click OK to validate the import procedure


When importing a user configuration file including a geographic data set or a study list, A9155 checks if geographic maps
or prediction studies are available in the .atl document. If it finds a map or a study in the .atl document, it offers new
options in the import dialog, Reset existing geo data and Reset existing studies. Select these options in order to
remove existing geographic maps or studies from the .atl document before loading the geographic data set or study list
described in the user configuration file.

If you choose to import a user configuration file, the syntax of the A9155 desktop shortcut must not contain -Cfg
<configuration_file>. If a configuration file called Atoll.cfg is located in the A9155 installation directory, this configuration
file is automatically loaded when creating a new project (from template or database).

Notes :
Since a macro is linked to an A9155 session (and not to an .atl project), the macros contained in the files referenced
by user configurations can be imported only when no .atl project is open
If the user tries to import a user configuration containing a macro in an open .atl project, only the other items will be
imported (geo data set, study list, computation zone, folder configurations).
C H A P T E R 13


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 439/476


If the user tries to import a user configuration containing only macro information in an open .atl project, configuration
data will not be taken into account.

XIII.3 SUPPORTED DATABASES
XIII.3.1 SUPPORTED DATABASES : OVERVIEW
Four standard databases are presently supported: MS SQL Server, MS Access, Oracle via the OLE-DB interface and
Sybase using the ODBC interface.

Note : In addition to the above databases, all the databases that accept .udl files and support ODBC interface can be
accessed (see below).

When possible, A9155 allows you to interactively create your database. Some databases, MS SQL Server for example,
cannot be created by application and need administrator intervention. It is why A9155 just suggests to create a new MS
Access database. Each database carries its own connection dialog.

XIII.3.2 EXPORTING A PROJECT IN A MS ACCESS DATABASE
To export a currently open A9155 project in a MS Access database, proceed as follows :
Choose the Database command from the File menu,
Click Export.. from the open menu,
An export dialog box is open,
Choose name and path associated with the database to export,
Select the database format :



Click Save to validate your choice.

Note : opening a project from a database use the same syntax.

Multi-User features


440/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XIII.3.3 EXPORTING A PROJECT IN A MS SQL SERVER DATABASE
To export a currently open A9155 project in a MS SQL server database, proceed as follows :
Choose the Database command from the File menu,
Click Export... from the open menu,
An export dialog box opens,
Select the SQL Server Database file format in the appropriate scrolling box,



In the open dialog, enter information about with the base to connect to as system account, server, user
name, password.



Click OK to complete the export procedure.

Note : opening a project from a database use the same syntax.

C H A P T E R 13


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 441/476


XIII.3.4 EXPORTING A PROJECT IN AN ORACLE DATABASE
To export a currently open A9155 project in an Oracle database, proceed as follows :
Choose the Database command from the File menu,
Click Export... from the open menu,
An export dialog box opens,
Select the Oracle Database file format in the appropriate scrolling box,



In the open dialog, enter the name, password and server name (as defined in the tnsnames.ora file) relative
to the system account,



Click OK to complete the export procedure.

Note : opening a project from a database use the same syntax.

Multi-User features


442/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XIII.3.5 EXPORTING A PROJECT IN A SYBASE DATABASE
To export a currently open A9155 project in a Sybase database, proceed as follows :
Choose the Database command from the File menu,
Click Export... from the open menu,
An export dialog box opens,
Select the ODBC data source type in the appropriate scrolling box,



In the open dialog, enter information related to the base to connect with as system account,



Click OK to complete the export procedure.

Notes :
By selecting the previous format, all the databases that support OD-BC interface can be accessed
Opening a project from a database use the same syntax.

C H A P T E R 13


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 443/476


XIII.4 DATA EXCHANGE
XIII.4.1 CHECKING DATABASE CONNECTION PROPERTIES
To check the connection between the currently open project and the reference database, proceed as follows :
Left click on the File tool from the toolbar,
Choose the Database command,
Click Connection properties... from the open menu,
A dialog informing you about the current connection is then open.

A specific message box warns you if you are not currently connected to a database.

Note : you can use this feature to switch from a user/project account to another. When this made, do not forget to use
the refresh command to update your project regarding to privileges and rules related to the current connection.

XIII.4.2 LOADING DATA FROM A DATABASE
When a database connection is already established, A9155 offers you the possibility to refresh data in several ways.

To refresh data, proceed as follows :
Left click on the File tool from the toolbar,
Choose the Database command,
Click the Refresh option from the open menu,
In the open dialog window, you may
Either :
Modify A9155 pending changes in your linked database,
Refresh only data you did not modify,
or
Cancel your changes and reload database as it is.

In case you forgot to archive, you are still able to do it.
XIII.4.3 ARCHIVING DATA IN A DATABASE
When a database connection is already established, A9155 offers you to check precisely the data you want to transfer
into the database.

To open the Archive dialog window, proceed as follows :
Left click on the File tool from the toolbar,
Choose the Database command,
Click the Archive... option from the open menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialog window.

Each table may be checked independently. Inside a table, data are sorted by the kind of action you realized : update an
existing data or add a new one. You can actually check each data.

You can request a global archive of pending changes to the database using Run all or prefer to run through differences
between previous and current data values.

To detail differences, just select the record you want to check and ask A9155 to show differences.

If you prefer to archive step by step, you can select the desired record and archive it with the Run command. A9155 also
allows you to cancel any of the changes that have been made to your document with respect to the initial state of the
database when you connected to it (without taking into account any changes that have been made to the database since
you connected to it) by using the Undo command.

When your changes have been archived, you get either a dialog window indicating that all modifications have been
successfully archived, or a warning dialog about data conflict. A9155 helps you to manage it (either when modifying or
deleting records).

Note : The Archive dialog window is available only when some changes have been made and not already archived.
Multi-User features


444/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XIII.5 DATA CONFLICTS MANAGEMENT
XIII.5.1 SOLVING A CONFLICT ON A MODIFIED RECORD
The record field you modified and you try to archive has already been modified in the linked database by another user.

For example, you are connected to a MS Access database whose transmitters table has been modified since your initial
load. Indeed, the altitude of transmitter Tx34 has been increased from 30 to 35 metres (See below in the database).

MS Access database modified by another user

In your current project, you also increased this altitude, but from 30 to 33 metres only (See the transmitters table from
A9155 current project below).

Transmitters table you modified in A9155

Ignoring that someone already modified this value, you try to archive. Trying to archive, A9155 detects the conflict and
warns you about it with the following window :


In the open Archive dialog window, if you select the conflicting data, A9155 offers you to see differences between the
current document and the linked database (Show Differences command) :

C H A P T E R 13


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 445/476



In the Archive dialog window, select the conflicting data and click on the Resolve command :



A dialog box summarizing the associated conflict opens. Line(s) in grey represent(s) the conflict location(s). By checking
the box on the left, database will be updated with current A9155 data. If you let the box unchecked, A9155 data are
loaded from the linked database.



You can then check the database. You check that Tx34 altitude is 33 metres, like in the current A9155 project.


Updated MS Access database after conflict resolving

Note : Only differences between database and current project on the same field of the same record can cause a conflict.

Multi-User features


446/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XIII.5.2 SOLVING A CONFLICT ON A DELETED RECORD
The record you modified and you try to archive has been deleted from the linked database by another user.

Somebody deleted the transmitter Tx34 on Site 29. You have modified its altitude on the current A9155 project and you
try to archive.

When trying to archive, A9155 detects the conflict and warns you about. When using the Resolve command, A9155 will
display the following message :



If you choose Yes, you recreate the deleted record in the database. Choosing No, you delete the record in your
document as well as in the linked database.

XIII.5.3 MANAGEMENT OF MULTI-USERS MATRICES
XIII.5.4 SHARING PATH LOSS MATRICES BETWEEN USERS
In A9155, some path loss results can be shared by several users. This feature enables the users both to optimise
calculation times and to minimize disk occupation on their computer by limiting the .atl environment and the externalised
calculation matrix sizes.

To use shared calculation matrices, proceed as follows :
In the File menu, select the Database: Refresh command to update your .atl environment or the Database:
Open from a database command to create your .atl environment. Then, save your environment.
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Properties... option from the scrolling menu,
Or
Double click on the Predictions folder,
In order to specify the shared directory to be used, you may either directly edit the path to access the
shared directory, or click on the button and choose in the Save as dialog the file Pathloss.dbf included
in the shared directory to be used,
Click OK to validate.

Note : It is not mandatory to store private path loss matrices in an external folder in order to access public path loss
matrices. Therefore, you may specify a shared directory to be used even if private path loss matrices are embedded in
your .atl document.

The feature use requires a specific work configuration. Indeed, all the users must be connected with a central database
and the project must be managed by a calculation administrator (somebody centralizing the calculation result database)
also connected with the database which will provide the calculation matrices by externalising its results. The private
external path loss matrix folder of the calculation administrator will be the shared folder which will be used by the other
users.

A9155 performs prediction studies using the shared path loss matrices only when it does not find the matrices in the user
private external folder (or embedded in the atl project). Therefore, to base the prediction studies exclusively on the
shared matrices, you need to delete the matrices stored in the private external folder (or embedded in the .atl document)
using the Delete command in the Results window.

A9155 accesses the shared path loss matrices using a read only mode. it directly reads matrices it needs in the shared
directory (these matrices cannot be locked due to consistency with read only mode). If a user modifies in its environment
some parameters, A9155 detects which matrices are invalid and recalculates them. Then, after saving and closing the
.atl environment, A9155 keeps only the recalculated matrices either embedded or in the user private external folder.
C H A P T E R 13


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 447/476


Therefore, if you change the height of a transmitter and if you carry out predictions, A9155 will recalculate only the path
loss matrix related to this transmitter and will save it in the private external folder associated with the .atl environment.
The prediction studies will be based on the recalculated matrix and on the other matrices coming from shared directory.

This feature is very useful when several users working on a same project want to perform predictions on different areas.
They can plan the network on their area and store in their private folder the associated path loss matrices.

Note : Only the calculation administrator is able to update the shared matrices by refreshing its .atl environment and
then, restarting calculations. The calculation administrator must feed the calculation matrices only when they are no
longer used by the users.

XIII.5.5 COMPUTING PATH LOSS MATRICES ONLY
Path loss matrices can be calculated independently of prediction studies. It is mandatory to have defined a study to
obtain path loss matrices calculation.

From any group of transmitters in the Transmitters folder, you may select Calculations and then Calculate path loss
matrices in the context menu.

It allows you to work out path loss matrices calculation of all the active transmitters in the group; only invalid matrices or
nonexistent matrices are computed. The computation zone does not influence the calculated transmitters and path loss
matrices size; computation is performed on the whole transmitter calculation radius. It is possible to recalculate all the
matrices of the group by choosing the option "Force the calculation of path loss matrices".

This feature can be used by a calculation administrator in order to fill the directory containing the shared path loss
matrices.

These features are also available in context menus of a transmitter and the Transmitters folder.



C H A P T E R 14

























Microwave Links
14
Microwave Links


450/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



C H A P T E R 14


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 451/476


XIV MICROWAVE LINKS
XIV.1 MICROWAVE LINKS : OVERVIEW
The optional Microwave Links module allows you to define microwave link network, to display these links on the map, to
perform engineering calculations (margin, availability) and analyse interference globally on the network or for a particular
link.


Since several links can share their extremities (either start or end), the description of a network in A9155 is divided into
two folders located in the explorer window :
A Sites folder which contains the set of points that can be used as link extremities. This folder can also contain sites
for 2G/3G networks.
A Links folder which contains the description of the links. Each link refers to two items in the Sites folder.


Each folder works as the other objects from the explorer window as far as data visibility, data priority or data display are
concerned. Furthermore, each item in the Stations folder can also be used as a link extremity.

XIV.2 CREATING AND MANAGING A MICROWAVE LINK
XIV.2.1 CREATING A MICROWAVE LINK : OVERVIEW
In A9155, a microwave link can be managed in the same way as sites and transmitters for example. There are two ways
to create a link, either using the mouse or using the creation wizard. These can also been made directly from the
microwave link table.

Microwave links are easy to manage, for display as well as for parameter setup. The settings are available either in the
link itself or in the radio equipment.

XIV.2.2 CREATING A LINK USING THE MOUSE
To create a new microwave link using the mouse, proceed as follows :
Click on the button from the tool bar,
The pointer shape changes to ,
Left click a first time on the map to locate the start of the new link,
The pointer shape changes to
Left click a second time on the map where to define the link end.

You can create a new link directly on the map, either on existing sites or on new sites automatically created. During the
link creation, when placing the pointer near to an existing site highlights it, indicating that it is a potential extremity for the
link. Otherwise, a new site will be created.

When the link is created, its parameters can be defined in its properties dialog box.

XIV.2.3 CREATING A LINK USING THE WIZARD
To create a new microwave link with creation wizard, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Microwave links folder to open the context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on New to start the link creation wizard,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the wizard dialog windows,
Click the button to validate the new microwave link.


Microwave Links


452/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Note : Radio equipment must be defined before creating links. The step 3 of the creation wizard does not allow to create
a new equipment.

XIV.2.4 LISTING ALL MICROWAVE LINKS OF A NETWORK
Like other objects listed in folders (sites, transmitters, coverage studies, etc...), it is possible to list all the existing
microwave links of a network (and its associate properties) in a table form.

To open the microwave link table, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Either
Double click on the Microwave links folder
Or
Right click on the Microwave links folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Open command in the scrolling menu.

Due to this organisation, microwave links table benefits from all the features usually available in tables (content
management, filtering, sorting, etc...).

XIV.2.5 SETTING MICROWAVE LINK PROPERTIES
Like for all objects organised in folders (Sites, Transmitters, Antennas, Predictions, Simulations, measurements, etc...)
within A9155, microwave links can be managed either individually or globally.

Global properties management
In A9155, you may manage globally the properties associated with all existing microwave links of your network :
To do so, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Microwave links folder,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

The 3 standard tab windows are : General, Table, Display.
- The General tab deals with folder organisation and list of configurations.
- The Table tab helps you to manage contents in the Microwave links table.
- The Display tab allows you to manage the display of links depending on their attributes, to manage the legend, labels
on the map, and the contents of help popups using the tip tool .


Notes :
- Since version V6.1, the microwave links folder benefits from the generic A9155 display dialog in order to make its
display management easier through, for example, labels, legends, threshold definition and the tip tool.
- If you create a new microwave link, the apply current configuration (or F5 : Refresh - icon) command gives the
colour to new links according to the display properties of the microwave links folder.


Individual property management
There are two ways to edit properties of each microwave link in the current network.
To do so,
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the Microwave links folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the microwave link you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the microwave link you want to manage by left clicking on the appropriate link,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

The displayed window contains at least 4 tabs (General, Link, Parameters, Display). The Other Properties tab is
available if some user defined fields have been added to the Microwave links table :
- The General tab deals with the name, the length, an the cluster name of the current link.
C H A P T E R 14


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 453/476


- The Link tab contains the names of antennas, equipment, power and losses related to each extremity of the current
link,
- The Parameters assign to the link an environment type, a rain zone and a climate type,
- The Display tab allows you to manage the colour and the style of the current link.

Note :
You can open the property dialog of the Antennas used at extremities by clicking the buttons on the right of the
antenna selection boxes in the Link tab.
Some parameters are linked with environmental behaviours. In the Parameters tab, rain zones (America, Europe and
Africa, Asia), Vapour density and atmospheric refraction (February, May, August, November) are based on map
following ITU recommendations.

XIV.2.6 MANAGING RADIO EQUIPMENT IN MICROWAVE LINKS
The radio equipment is a device with specific power, reception threshold and FKTB (equipment noise power).

To manage the radio equipment available in the current network, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the microwave links folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Radio equipment...,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Precise the names of each piece of equipment and the associated power, reception threshold, FKTB, and
other parameters related to interference studies and total and fading outage probabilities computations,
Press the Close button to validate.


In addition to power, reception threshold and thermal noise (FKTB), you may specify the following parameters in the
Equipment window:

The first of them is taken into account to determine interferer and interfered sites in interference study:

Spectrum width (MHz): It corresponds to the signal spreading around the central frequency. Spectrum width depends
on the type of modulation supported by equipment.


The other ones are considered to calculate total and fading outage probabilities in link analysis:

Saturation (dBm): This parameter enables A9155 to predict signal level enhancement (paragraph 2.3.3 in ITUR 530-
8 recommendation).

Saturation = E + Received signal

where E is the enhancement (dB) not exceeded for p% of the time.

Signature width (MHz) and depth (dB): they are used to model signal distortion due to frequency selective fading and
delay during multipath propagation (paragraph 5.1 in ITUR 530-8 recommendation).

Correction factor discrimination: This term is considered to predict reduction of cross-polar polarization (XPD) in
multipath or precipitation conditions (paragraph 4 in ITUR 530-8 recommendation).

Corr. Fact. Discrimination = (Co/I) without XPIC (Cross-polar interference canceller),
or
Corr. Fact. Discrimination = (Co/I) - XPIF with XPIC (Cross-polar interference canceller),

where (Co/I) is the carrier-to-interference ratio for a reference BER and XPIF is a laboratory-measured cross-
polarisation improvement factor.


Note : The XPDg parameter is used during the first step of the prediction. XPDg is the minimum of the
transmitting and receiving antenna boresight XPDs. A9155 determines XPDg from cross-polar antenna pattern in
case of az = 0 and el = 0 (az and el are respectively the calculated azimuth and tilt angles).


Caution: These parameters are taken into account only when the analysis is based on the ITUR 530-8
Microwave Links


454/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


recommendation.

Notes :
From this dialog, you can access the IRF dialog by clicking the button.
Transmission powers and reception thresholds of a link are automatically initialised with the equipment values when
choosing equipment in the Link tab of the link Properties window.
When no equipment is specified in the link properties, A9155 considers the following default values : Spectrum width
= 100MHz, Saturation = 0 dBm, Signature width = 0 MHz, Signature depth = 0 dB and Corr. Fact. Discrimination = 0
You can add customised fields in the equipment table by clicking on the Fields button.

XIV.3 ANALYSIS OF A MICROWAVE LINK
XIV.3.1 PATH PROFILE AND LINK RELIABILITY ANALYSIS
XIV.3.1.a ADJUSTING COMPUTATION PARAMETERS IN LINK ANALYSIS
Once a microwave link has been correctly build, A9155 can interactively analyse the signal level profile along it. Path
loss attenuations are calculated from recommendations :
ITU-R PN 525-6 for the losses due to diffraction (with or without corrective term on Deygout method),
ITU-R PN 525-2 for the free space propagation loss,
ITU-R PN 676-3 for the atmospheric Path losses.

Link analysis, considering the application of these recommendations, is made using either ITUR 530-3 recommendation
(P.530-3) or the ITUR 530-8 one (P.530-8) in order to calculate total and fading outage probabilities of the link.

Recommendations ITU-R PN 525-6 and ITUR 530-3 or ITUR 530-8 can be set.

To choose parameters used in computations of link analysis, proceed as follows :
Select a link in the Explorer or in the workspace,
Right click on it to open the associate context menu,
Choose the Analysis command from the context menu,
Click the Parameters tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window
Specify longitude and latitude, choose the recommendation and the diffraction evaluation method you want
to use in analysis,
Click OK to close the dialog.


Notes :
A9155 automatically updates analysis report when changing any parameter.
New properties of equipment (signature width and depth, saturation, correction factor discrimination) are considered
in the link analysis only if it is based on ITUR 530-8 recommendation. In this case, A9155 takes into account these
parameters to calculate total and fading outage probabilities of the link.
Computations are related to environmental behaviours. In the Parameters tab of any link property dialog, rain zones
(America, Europe and Africa, Asia), Vapour density and atmospheric refraction (February, May, August, November)
are based on maps following ITU recommendations.

XIV.3.1.b DISPLAYING PROFILE ALONG A MICROWAVE LINK
In A9155, it is possible to carry out a link analysis in a specific window which displays the Fresnel ellipsoid along the
profile and allows to adjust corrective terms.


To display the propagation analysis window, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Microwave links folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the microwave link you want to display the signal level profile to open the associated context
menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Analysis...,
Click on the Profile tab from the open window.
C H A P T E R 14


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 455/476


Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Set the current microwave link radio parameters,
Press OK to validate.


Notes :
Antenna heights are generally set up using one or several Fresnel zone clearance criteria. For example, the ITU
recommends a clearance of 60% of the first Fresnel zone for standard refractivity conditions, and LOS (line of sight)
for the worst conditions.
The Profile tab of the analysis window allows interactive settings of antennas heights, with real time display of the two
different clearance criteria.

Additional information is available in the Profile tab. A vertical red line indicates the position of the main edge along the
link,
A9155 displays, above the main edge, the diffraction loss (dB) due to this obstacle (
( )
p
J
) in case of the first k value and
the distance (m) between the obstacle and the starting of the link extremity.

Furthermore, you may move cursor along the link and visualise its position on the map. To do this, click anywhere on the
profile to display the cursor; then, click on it without releasing the mouse and shift it along the link. A9155 indicates at the
top of the dialog:
The distance (m) between cursor and the starting site of the link,
The penetration (h in m) of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first entered k values (1.33 by default):

Penetration = h(axis) - h(obstacle)

h(axis) and h(obstacle) are respectively height of the Fresnel ellipsoid axis and the height of the obstacle.

The ellipsoid radius at the cursor position (F1 in m).

XIV.3.1.c DISPLAYING ANALYSIS RESULTS ON A MICROWAVE LINK
A9155 provides a report for the analysis of each link. The report window contains the radio parameters used as well as
the signal profile along, for the worth month and mean year, the percentage of time during which link is not interrupted by
fading (Quality), and the percentage of time during which the link is not interrupted by rain (Availability).

To open the statistical report window for any microwave link, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Microwave links folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the microwave link for which you want to display the statistical report,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Analysis...,
Click on the Report tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Press OK to close the window.


Notes :
Parameters cannot be edited in the Report tab window. You can set only them in the Parameters tab window,
When using receiver antenna diversity, A9155 takes into account an improvement coefficient to work out link outage
probabilities. This coefficient value is provided in the Report tab.

XIV.3.1.d MANAGING THE DISPLAY OF A MICROWAVE LINK PROFILE
A9155 allows the user to adjust several parameters in order to manage path profile display along a microwave link.

To open the signal level propagation display dialog window, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Make active the signal profile window,
Right click on signal display zone to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Display...,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Adjust the current display parameters on graduations, Fresnel representation and earth curvature,
Press OK or Apply to validate.

Microwave Links


456/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XIV.3.1.e EDITING PROFILE VALUES (MICROWAVE LINKS)
This feature provides a table of values containing the points of the current profile. The values are displayed over a grid
with the best resolution of the current geo data. Each point is defined with:
Distance, in metres, from the link start,
Altitude,
Clutter class,
Clutter height.


To open the parameter settings window for any microwave link, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Microwave links folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the microwave link you want to edit the profile values,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Analysis...,
Click on the Profile values tab from the open window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Displayed data can be accessed and modified (values, clutter class, etc...),
Press OK to validate.


In the table, it is possible to create an entire profile either by entering data manually in the cells, or by using the copy and
paste tool with values taken from other applications (SIG) button. Moreover, it is also possible to copy
values defining the profile into other applications (SIG) by selecting line(s), and using the button.


Reminder : to select the whole table, left click in the top left-hand corner of the table.

XIV.3.2 INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS
XIV.3.2.a INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS IN MICROWAVE LINKS : DEFINITIONS
This function allows you to measure the level of interference generated by the network on a receiver, or the level of
interference generated by a transmitter on all the receivers in the network. With or without IRF, A9155 checks if there is
overlapping between frequency spectra of links. To do this, A9155 takes into account spectrum width around each link
central frequency.

Note : If no equipment is defined in the link properties, A9155 considers a 100 MHz spectrum width.

When studying interference or when preparing a budget, A9155 offers you to compute diffraction losses with Deygout
model, with or without diffraction correction method.

When calculating interference level and the propagation fading, the path loss due to the directivity of both antennas is
taken into account, as well as the path loss due to the equipment (polarization discrimination, frequency filtering, etc.).
The results can be copied and pasted into a spread sheet to allow you to make further analysis.

Note : in order to carry out an interference analysis the radio equipment must be associated to the links (equipment for
which IRF curves have been defined).

Interference analysis can be carried out either on a particular link or on all the links.

XIV.3.2.b FINDING INTERFERERS OF A GIVEN RECEIVER (MICROWAVE LINKS)
To identify the transmitters causing interferences on a given receiver, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Microwave links folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the microwave link you want to identify interferers of one of its extremities,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Interferences...,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the Find interferers of option from the open window,
Select from the scrolling list the transmitter with which you want to create your study,
C H A P T E R 14


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 457/476


Enter the maximum distance at which the potential interferers must be located in order to be taken into
account,
Select the diffraction computation method (Deygout or modified Deygout method),
Click the button to run calculations,
If some interferers meet the criteria above, they are displayed in the Results list,
Total interference and margin reduction are displayed at the bottom,
Press CLOSE to finish.

XIV.3.2.c FINDING RECEIVERS INTERFERED BY A TRANSMITTER (MICROWAVE LINKS)
To identify the receivers interfered by a given transmitter, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Microwave links folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the microwave link you want to identify interferers of one of its extremities,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Interferences...,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Check the Find interferences victims of option from the open window,
Select from the scrolling list the transmitter you want to study,
Enter the maximum distance at which the potential interfered transmitters must be located in order to be
taken into account,
Select the diffraction computation method (Deygout or modified Deygout method),
Click the button to run calculations,
If some transmitters meet the criteria above, they are displayed in the Results list,
Total interference and margin reduction are displayed at the bottom,
Press CLOSE to finish.

XIV.3.2.d CALCULATING INTERFERENCES IN A GLOBAL MICROWAVE NETWORK
A9155 provides a tool allowing the user to find out all the interferences in a network.


To perform a global interference analysis in the current network, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Microwave links folder in order to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Interferences... command from the open scrolling menu,
Enter the maximum distance for potentially interfering sites,
Select the diffraction computation method (Deygout or modified Deygout method),
Click OK to validate,
A summary table on interferences opens.


The results obtained in this case correspond to the interference analysis on each link. Following data are displayed :
Link name,
Receiver site name,
Signal received;
Flat margin,
Accumulated interferences (Interferences column),
Accumulated margin reduction (Margin reduction column),
Effective margin.

XIV.3.2.e INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS ON MICROWAVE LINKS
This function allows you to measure the level of interference generated by all the network transmitters on a receiver, or
the level of interference generated by a transmitter on all the receivers in the network.

Definitions
Interferences of B (interfering link transmitter) on A (interfered link receiver) = Signal received from B at A - IRF
where :
Signal received from B at A = Transmitted power(B) + Weighted gain(B) - Losses(B)
Free Space Fading
Microwave Links


458/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


Atmospheric Fading
Diffraction Fading + Weighted Gain(A) Losses(A)

Weighted Gain(A), (resp. B) = value of A gain (resp. B) weighted by the fading values given in the radiation pattern of A
(resp. B) according to the direction of station B (resp. A). The polarization difference of the two signals is taken into
account: if the polarisations are different, the Weighted Gain(A) depends on A crosspolar radiation pattern.


IRF
IRF (Interference Reduction Factor) = Receiver filtering protection as a function of the difference that exists between the
central frequencies of the disturbed signal and of the disturbing signal (which is user-definable).


FKTB
FKTB : equipment noise power
where F : noise figure
K : Boltzmann constant=1.38 10e(-23) J / K
T : noise temperature ~ 290 K
B : passband width (Hz)


Margin reduction and accumulated margin reduction
Margin reduction = 10 log(1+10e
(interferences - FKTB)/10
)
Accumulated margin reduction = 10 log(1+10e
(Total interferences - FKTB)/10
)


Effective margin
Effective margin = Flat margin Accumulated margin reduction
where
Flat margin = Signal received Reception threshold

XIV.3.2.f USING IRF IN MICROWAVE LINKS
IRF (Interference Reduction Factor) is a receiver filtering protection as a function of the difference that exists between the
central frequencies of the disturbed signal and of the disturbing signal (which is user-definable).

To access the IRF dialog, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Either,
Open the Radio equipment table,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
Click the button,
Or,
Right click on the Microwave links folder in order to get the associated context menu,
Choose the IRF option from the context menu.


The open window offers a list of all the possible equipment pairs. Each piece of equipment paired with other pieces of
equipment can be either interfered with or interferer.

For each pair, you will have to enter, in table form, the values for the deltaF(MHz) and for the Protection(dB).

Notes :
When clicking on the IRF button, A9155 now opens IRF dialog associated to the selected interfered equipment.
Transmission powers and reception thresholds of a link are automatically initialised with the equipment values when
choosing equipment in the Link tab of the link Properties window.
When no equipment is specified in the link properties, A9155 considers the following default values : Spectrum width
= 100MHz, Saturation = 0dBm, Signature width = 0 MHz, Signature depth = 0 dB and Corr. Fact. Discrimination = 0
You can add customised fields in the equipment table by clicking on the Fields button.
When no IRF value has been defined for interfering-interferer equipment pairs, there is no protection and interference
are higher.

C H A P T E R 14


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 459/476


XIV.3.2.g DISPLAYING MICROWAVE LINK BUDGETS
This function provides a report on the analysis results for all the links in the current project.


To obtain the link budgets table, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Microwave links folder in order to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Budgets... command from the open scrolling menu,
Choose the diffraction method to use for link budget computation.


For each link, the following data is displayed:
Name of the link,
Length,
Transmitter site name,
Azimuth of the transmitter,
Downtilt of the transmitter,
Receiver site name,
Azimuth of the receiver,
Downtilt of the receiver,
Signal received,
Margin value.

XIV.4 ITU MAPS
XIV.4.1 ITU VAPOUR DENSITY ON EARTH

Annual vapour density on Earth (g/m3)

Microwave Links


460/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XIV.4.2 ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION : FEBRUARY

ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km : February

XIV.4.3 ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION : MAY

ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km : May

C H A P T E R 14


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 461/476


XIV.4.4 ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION : AUGUST

ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km : August

XIV.4.5 ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION : NOVEMBER

ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km : November

Microwave Links


462/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XIV.4.6 ITU RAIN ZONES : AMERICA

Rain Zones : America

C H A P T E R 14


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 463/476


XIV.4.7 ITU RAIN ZONES : EUROPE AND AFRICA

Rain Zones : Europe and Africa

Microwave Links


464/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


XIV.4.8 ITU RAIN ZONES : ASIA

Rain Asia





























INDEX
I
INDEX


466/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01



INDEX


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 467/476


INDEX


A
A9155 FEATURES FOR COMPUTING
........................................... 193
ACCESSING COVERAGE PREDICTION
PROPERTIES ......................... 176
ACCESSING DATA TABLE .............. 44
ACCESSING STANDARD
PROPAGATION MODEL
PROPERTIES ......................... 149
ACTIVE SET PARAMETERS IN UMTS
........................................... 268
ADDING A CLUTTER CLASS............ 82
ADDING A POINT IN THE
COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE.... 139
ADDING A SIMULATION TO AN
EXISTING GROUP OF
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
........................................... 348
ADDING A SIMULATION TO AN
EXISTING GROUP OF UMTS
SIMULATIONS ........................ 288
ADDING PREDICTIONS ON EXISTING
CW MEASUREMENT PATHS..... 391
ADJUSTING AFP PARAMETERS FROM
THE DATA MODEL................... 245
ADJUSTING CDMA/CDMA2000
USER PROFILE PROPERTIES .... 333
ADJUSTING COMPUTATION
PARAMETERS IN LINK ANALYSIS454
ADJUSTING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER PROFILE PROPERTIES .... 221
ADJUSTING RELIABILITY LEVEL IN A
POINT ANALYSIS .................... 190
ADJUSTING STANDARD
PROPAGATION MODEL
PARAMETERS ........................ 149
ADJUSTING TRANSMITTER AZIMUTHS
........................................... 120
ADJUSTING UMTS USER PROFILE
PROPERTIES ......................... 274
ADMISSION CONTROL IN
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
........................................... 350
ADMISSION CONTROL IN UMTS
SIMULATIONS ........................ 291
ADVANCED FILTERING COUNTER
EXAMPLE 1 ............................. 52
ADVANCED FILTERING COUNTER
EXAMPLE 2 ............................. 52
ADVANCED FILTERING EXAMPLE.. 51
AFP STEP 1 GENERIC INPUTS.. 247
AFP STEP 2 LOADING AND
CHECKING THE NETWORK ....... 248
AFP STEP 3 GENERIC AFP
SETTINGS ............................. 248
AFP STEP 4 GENERIC OUTPUTS250
ALLOCATING CDMA NEIGHBOURS TO
GSM TRANSMITTERS............. 412
ALLOCATING CDMA/CDMA2000
CELL NEIGHBOURS AUTOMATICALLY
............................................377
ALLOCATING CDMA/CDMA2000
CELL NEIGHBOURS MANUALLY..376
ALLOCATING EXTERNAL NEIGHBOURS
MANUALLY (CO-PLANNING) .....411
ALLOCATING GSM NEIGHBOURS TO
CDMA TRANSMITTERS...........413
ALLOCATING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
TRANSMITTER NEIGHBOURS
AUTOMATICALLY.....................239
ALLOCATING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
TRANSMITTER NEIGHBOURS
MANUALLY.............................239
ALLOCATING MANUALLY A BCCH TO
TRANSMITTERS ......................243
ALLOCATING PN OFFSETS TO
CDMA/CDMA2000 CELLS
AUTOMATICALLY.....................381
ALLOCATING PN OFFSETS TO
CDMA/CDMA2000 CELLS
MANUALLY.............................380
ALLOCATING SCRAMBLING CODES TO
UMTS CELLS AUTOMATICALLY318
ALLOCATING SCRAMBLING CODES TO
UMTS CELLS MANUALLY........317
ALLOCATING UMTS CELL
NEIGHBOURS AUTOMATICALLY .314
ALLOCATING UMTS CELL
NEIGHBOURS MANUALLY .........314
ANALYSING A SCENARIO AT A POINT IN
CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS
............................................372
ANALYSING A SCENARIO AT A POINT IN
UMTS PROJECTS..................312
ANALYSING ADDITIONAL FIELDS
ALONG CW MEASUREMENT PATHS
............................................397
ANALYSING PILOT RECEPTION
(CDMA/CDMA2000) ...........365
ANALYSING PILOT RECEPTION
(UMTS) ...............................305
ARCHIVING DATA IN A DATABASE..443
ARRANGE ITEMS IN GROUPS..........53
ASSIGNING A PN OFFSET DOMAIN TO
A CELL ..................................380
ASSIGNING A SCRAMBLING CODE
DOMAIN TO A CELL..................317
ASSIGNING BSIC DOMAINS TO
TRANSMITTERS ......................242
ASSIGNING CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE
EQUIPMENT TO SITES..............326
ASSIGNING CELL TYPES TO
TRANSMITTERS ......................210
ASSIGNING ENVIRONMENT FORMULAS
TO CLUTTER TYPES (COST-HATA)
............................................147
ASSIGNING ENVIRONMENT FORMULAS
TO CLUTTER TYPES (OKUMURA-
HATA)...................................146
ASSIGNING HCS LAYERS TO
TRANSMITTERS...................... 204
ASSIGNING MANUALLY BSICS TO
TRANSMITTERS...................... 242
ASSIGNING RADIO EQUIPMENT TO
TRANSMITTER ....................... 129
ASSIGNING UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT
TO SITES............................... 266
AVERAGING CDMA/CDMA2000
SIMULATIONS ........................ 347
AVERAGING UMTS SIMULATIONS288
B
BIL DATA FORMAT....................... 77
BSICS OVERVIEW................... 202
BUILDING A PROJECT STEP BY STEP
............................................. 31
C
CAE DATA OVERVIEW ............. 420
CALCULATING A COVERAGE BY
SIGNAL LEVEL........................ 181
CALCULATING A COVERAGE BY
TRANSMITTER ....................... 180
CALCULATING INTERFERENCES IN A
GLOBAL MICROWAVE NETWORK457
CALCULATING OVERLAPPING AREAS
........................................... 181
CALCULATING PILOT POLLUTION
(CDMA/CDMA2000)........... 371
CALCULATING PILOT POLLUTION
(UMTS)............................... 311
CALIBRATING THE STANDARD
PROPAGATION MODEL ........... 161
CDMA/CDMA2000 ACTIVE SET
CONDITIONS.......................... 331
CDMA/CDMA2000 AVERAGE
SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS
........................................... 360
CDMA/CDMA2000 CELLS
DEFINITION ........................... 327
CDMA/CDMA2000 MULTI-SERVICE
TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY
OVERVIEW............................ 336
CDMA/CDMA2000 POWER
CONTROL SIMULATION INPUTS. 345
CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTION
STUDIES OVERVIEW ............. 362
CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS
OVERVIEW............................ 323
CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS
PROTOCOL............................ 324
CDMA/CDMA2000 RESOURCES
ALLOCATION OVERVIEW........ 376
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
CONVERGENCE METHOD......... 350
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
OUTPUTS ON CELL COMPONENTS
........................................... 360
INDEX


468/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
OUTPUTS ON CELLS ............... 359
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
OUTPUTS ON MOBILE COMPONENTS
........................................... 361
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
OUTPUTS ON MOBILES............ 361
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
OUTPUTS ON SITES ................ 359
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
OVERVIEW............................ 344
CDMA/CDMA2000 SPECIFIC
CONCEPTS............................ 323
CDMA/CDMA2000 STANDARD
DEVIATION OF SIMULATION
OUTPUTS ON CELLS ............... 360
CDMA/CDMA2000 TRAFFIC
MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW ..... 328
CELL TYPE PARAMETERS............ 206
CELL TYPES OVERVIEW............ 205
CENTRING THE MAP..................... 37
CHANGING A SITE POSITION........ 109
CHANNEL ELEMENT MANAGEMENT IN
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
........................................... 351
CHANNEL ELEMENT MANAGEMENT IN
UMTS SIMULATIONS ............. 291
CHECKING CONSISTENCY BETWEEN
TRANSMITTERS AND SUBCELLS 252
CHECKING DATABASE CONNECTION
PROPERTIES ......................... 443
CHECKING PATH LOSS RESULTS
VALIDITY............................... 184
CHECKING THE CONSISTENCY OF THE
PN OFFSET ASSIGNMENTS..... 382
CHECKING THE CONSISTENCY OF THE
SCRAMBLING CODE ASSIGNMENTS
........................................... 320
CHECKING THE FREQUENCY PLAN
CONSISTENCY ....................... 251
CHECKING THE MAP GEOCODING... 93
CHOOSING A SCALE..................... 38
CHOOSING THE APPROPRIATE
PROPAGATION MODEL ............ 142
COMBINING CW MEASUREMENT AND
POINT ANALYSIS WINDOWS...... 399
COMMITING DIMENSIONING OUTPUTS
IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE ......... 237
COMMITTING SIMULATED LOADS TO
CELLS (CDMA/CDMA2000
PROJECTS) ........................... 356
COMMITTING SIMULATED LOADS TO
CELLS (UMTS PROJECTS) ..... 296
COMPUTATION AND FOCUS ZONES
EFFECTS............................... 136
COMPUTATION AND FOCUS ZONES
OVERVIEW............................ 135
COMPUTATIONS IN A9155
OVERVIEW............................ 135
COMPUTING A COVERAGE BY
GPRS/EDGE RATE PER
TIMESLOT ............................. 259
COMPUTING A COVERAGE STUDY BY
C/I LEVEL ............................. 257
COMPUTING PATH LOSS MATRICES
ONLY.................................... 447
COMPUTING SHADOWING MARGINS
PER CLUTTER CLASS...............171
COMPUTIONG KPIS IN
GSM/GPRS/EDGE .............253
CONSIDERING LOSSES DUE TO
DIFFRACTION (COST-HATA) ....147
CONSIDERING LOSSES DUE TO
DIFFRACTION (OKUMURA-HATA)
............................................145
COORDINATE SYSTEMS BASIC
CONCEPTS ..............................73
CO-PLANNING FEATURES OVERVIEW
............................................411
COPYING AND PASTING IN TABLES..47
COPYING ANTENNA PATTERNS TO THE
CLIPBOARD............................116
CORRECTION FOR HILLY REGIONS158
COVERAGE PREDICTION AVAILABLE
EXPORTS ..............................187
COVERAGE STUDIES OVERVIEW 173
CREATE AN ADVANCED GEO DATA
FOLDER ..................................89
CREATING 1XEV-DO SPECIFIC
PREDICTIONS.........................375
CREATING A CDMA/CDMA2000
CELL ....................................327
CREATING A CDMA/CDMA2000
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAP....337
CREATING A CDMA/CDMA2000
LIVE TRAFFIC MAP ..................342
CREATING A CDMA/CDMA2000
RADIO CONFIGURATION..........331
CREATING A CDMA/CDMA2000
USER PROFILE .......................333
CREATING A CDMA/CDMA2000
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAP ....339
CREATING A CLUTTER OR TRAFFIC
RASTER POLYGON....................95
CREATING A COMPUTATION/FOCUS
ZONE FROM POLYGONS...........137
CREATING A COVERAGE BY
GPRS/EDGE CODING SCHEMES
............................................259
CREATING A COVERAGE STUDY
TEMPLATE .............................182
CREATING A CW MEASUREMENT
SESSION ...............................387
CREATING A GPRS/EDGE
EQUIPMENT ...........................214
CREATING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAP....224
CREATING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
LIVE TRAFFIC MAP ..................229
CREATING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
MOBILITY TYPE.......................218
CREATING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
TERMINAL..............................219
CREATING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
TRAFFIC CAPTURE..................234
CREATING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER DENSITY TRAFFIC MAP....231
CREATING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER PROFILE .......................220
CREATING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAP ....226
CREATING A LINK USING THE MOUSE
............................................451
CREATING A LINK USING THE WIZARD
........................................... 451
CREATING A MICROWAVE LINK
OVERVIEW............................ 451
CREATING A NEW DATABASE FROM A
DOCUMENT ........................... 436
CREATING A NEW DOCUMENT FROM A
DATABASE ............................ 436
CREATING A REPEATER.............. 125
CREATING A SITE....................... 107
CREATING A SITE LIST................ 112
CREATING A STATION TEMPLATE . 122
CREATING A TRANSMITTER......... 118
CREATING A TYPE OF
CDMA/CDMA2000
ENVIRONMENT....................... 334
CREATING A TYPE OF
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
ENVIRONMENT....................... 222
CREATING A TYPE OF UMTS
ENVIRONMENT....................... 275
CREATING A UMTS CELL .......... 267
CREATING A UMTS ENVIRONMENT
TRAFFIC MAP......................... 277
CREATING A UMTS LIVE TRAFFIC
MAP ..................................... 282
CREATING A UMTS MOBILITY TYPE
........................................... 271
CREATING A UMTS TERMINAL.... 272
CREATING A UMTS USER PROFILE
........................................... 273
CREATING A UMTS USER PROFILE
TRAFFIC MAP......................... 280
CREATING A VECTOR LAYER ......... 97
CREATING AN ANTENNA ............. 114
CREATING AN IMPORT CW
MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION
........................................... 392
CREATING AN IMPORT TEST MOBILE
DATA PATH CONFIGURATION.... 400
CREATING CDMA/CDMA2000
POWER CONTROL SIMULATIONS
........................................... 344
CREATING CDMA/CDMA2000
SERVICES............................. 329
CREATING CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE
EQUIPMENT........................... 325
CREATING COVERAGE CALCULATIONS
........................................... 175
CREATING COVERAGE STUDIES PER
GROUP OF TRANSMITTER........ 175
CREATING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
SERVICES ............................. 216
CREATING PN OFFSETS DOMAINS
AND GROUPS......................... 379
CREATING PREDICTIONS FROM
MODIFIED CDMA/CDMA2000
SIMULATIONS ........................ 364
CREATING PREDICTIONS FROM
MODIFIED UMTS SIMULATIONS304
CREATING SCRAMBLING CODE
DOMAINS AND GROUPS........... 317
CREATING SUBFOLDERS............... 55
CREATING TRXS IN TRANSMITTERS
........................................... 243
CREATING UMTS POWER CONTROL
SIMULATIONS ........................ 285
CREATING UMTS SERVICES ...... 269
INDEX


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 469/476


CREATING UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT
........................................... 264
CREATING YOUR OWN COORDINATE
SYSTEM.................................. 75
CREATING YOUR OWN TEMPLATE .. 30
CREATING/MODIFYING ENVIRONMENT
FORMULAS............................ 146
CREATING/MODIFYING ENVIRONMENT
FORMULAS (COST-HATA) ....... 148
CW MEASUREMENT WINDOW
ACTIVATION........................... 396
D
DATA SERVICE CREATION
CDMA/CDMA2000 ............. 330
DEFINING A (EB/NT <-> MAX RATE)
LOOK-UP TABLE..................... 374
DEFINING AN ENVIRONMENT DEFAULT
FORMULA (COST-HATA) ......... 147
DEFINING AN ENVIRONMENT DEFAULT
FORMULA (OKUMURA-HATA)... 145
DEFINING BSIC FORMAT ........... 202
DEFINING CW MEASUREMENT PATH
PROPERTIES ......................... 393
DEFINING EXCEPTIONAL PAIRS FOR
PN OFFSET ALLOCATION ....... 380
DEFINING EXCEPTIONAL PAIRS FOR
SCRAMBLING CODE ALLOCATION
........................................... 318
DEFINING EXCEPTIONAL
SEPARATIONS FOR FREQUENCY
ALLOCATION.......................... 245
DEFINING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
RESOURCES OVERVIEW........ 199
DEFINING HANDOFF STATUS
(CDMA/CDMA2000)........... 369
DEFINING HANDOFF STATUS (UMTS)
........................................... 309
DEFINING STATION TEMPLATE
PROPERTIES ......................... 122
DEFINING TEST MOBILE DATA PATH
PROPERTIES ......................... 402
DEFINING THE COVERAGE
CONDITIONS.......................... 177
DEFINING THE DISPLAY COORDINATE
SYSTEM.................................. 74
DEFINING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES
OF ANY ITEM FOLDER ............... 56
DEFINING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES
OF THE CW MEASUREMENT
WINDOW............................... 397
DEFINING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES
OF THE TEST MOBILE DATA
WINDOW............................... 406
DEFINING THE PROJECTION
COORDINATE SYSTEM............... 74
DEFINING THE TRANSMITTER UMTS
GLOBAL PARAMETERS ............ 266
DEFINING VISIBILITY RANGES ON
OBJECTS ................................ 38
DELETING A COVERAGE STUDY
TEMPLATE............................. 182
DELETING A STATION TEMPLATE.. 123
DELETING A TRANSMITTER ......... 121
DELETING ALLOCATED
CDMA/CDMA2000 NEIGHBOURS
............................................378
DELETING ALLOCATED
GSM/GPRS/EDGE NEIGHBOURS
............................................241
DELETING ALLOCATED UMTS
NEIGHBOURS .........................315
DELETING AN IMPORT CW
MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION
............................................392
DELETING AN IMPORT TEST MOBILE
DATA PATH CONFIGURATION....402
DELETING AN OBJECT...................42
DELETING BUILT SITES................111
DELETING CLUTTER OR TRAFFIC
RASTER POLYGONS ..................96
DELETING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS
ZONE....................................138
DESCRIPTION OF MNU FILES........80
DIFFRACTION
DEYGOUT..............................155
DEYGOUT WITH CORRECTION ..156
EPSTEIN-PETERSON...............156
MILLINGTON ..........................157
DIFFRACTION COMPUTATION IN SPM
............................................154
DIMENSIONING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
TRANSMITTERS ......................236
DISPLAY THE LINE OF SIGHT AREA111
DISPLAYED CURSORS...................39
DISPLAYING ANALYSIS RESULTS ON A
MICROWAVE LINK ...................455
DISPLAYING CALCULATION EVENTS IN
A LOG WINDOW ......................194
DISPLAYING CDMA/CDMA2000
NEIGHBOURS ON THE MAP.......378
DISPLAYING CDMA/CDMA2000
SIMULATION REQUIREMENTS AND
RESULTS...............................354
DISPLAYING CURRENT
CDMA/CDMA2000 NEIGHBOUR
LIST......................................378
DISPLAYING CURRENT
GSM/GPRS/EDGE NEIGHBOUR
LIST......................................241
DISPLAYING CURRENT UMTS
NEIGHBOUR LIST ....................315
DISPLAYING EXTERNAL OBJECTS IN A
CURRENT A9155 PROJECT .....411
DISPLAYING GENERAL INFORMATION
ON PROPAGATION MODEL........142
DISPLAYING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
NEIGHBOURS ON THE MAP.......241
DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT
RASTER POLYGONS ..................96
DISPLAYING INPUT PARAMETERS OF
AN EXISTING CDMA/CDMA2000
SIMULATION...........................354
DISPLAYING INPUT PARAMETERS OF
AN EXISTING UMTS SIMULATION
............................................294
DISPLAYING LINK BUDGET AT A
RECEIVER..............................191
DISPLAYING MICROWAVE LINK
BUDGETS ..............................459
DISPLAYING OBJECT LABELS ON THE
MAP........................................58
DISPLAYING PREDICTED SIGNAL
LEVELS AT A POINT................. 189
DISPLAYING PREDICTION REPORTS
........................................... 186
DISPLAYING PROFILE ALONG A
MICROWAVE LINK................... 454
DISPLAYING RATE GRAPHS ......... 215
DISPLAYING RULERS AROUND THE
MAP ....................................... 38
DISPLAYING SHADOWING VALUES OF
A CDMA/CDMA2000
SIMULATION .......................... 357
DISPLAYING SHADOWING VALUES OF
A UMTS SIMULATION............. 298
DISPLAYING SIGNAL LEVELS OR
LOSSES IN POINT ANALYSIS..... 191
DISPLAYING SITE LISTS .............. 113
DISPLAYING SPM PARAMETERS
OVER A PROFILE ANALYSIS...... 191
DISPLAYING STATISTICS BEFORE
CALIBRATION (SPM).............. 160
DISPLAYING STATISTICS BETWEEN
CW MEASUREMENTS AND
PREDICTIONS ........................ 395
DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON
CDMA/CDMA2000
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAPS.. 339
DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON CLUTTER
CLASSES ................................ 82
DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON GENERIC
DATA...................................... 90
DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAPS.. 226
DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON
POPULATION ........................... 88
DISPLAYING STATISTICS ON UMTS
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAPS.. 279
DISPLAYING STATISTICS PER
CDMA/CDMA2000
ENVIRONMENT TYPE............... 336
DISPLAYING STATISTICS PER UMTS
ENVIRONMENT TYPE............... 276
DISPLAYING THE
COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE
COORDINATES....................... 139
DISPLAYING THE
COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE SIZE
........................................... 139
DISPLAYING THE
GSM/GPRS/EDGE CUMULATED
TRAFFIC................................ 233
DISPLAYING THE OBJECT PROPERTIES
............................................. 42
DISPLAYING THE SUBCELL LIST ... 211
DISPLAYING THE TRX LIST......... 244
DISPLAYING UMTS NEIGHBOURS ON
THE MAP............................... 316
DISPLAYING UMTS SIMULATION
REQUIREMENTS AND RESULTS. 294
DISPLAYING VECTOR LAYERS OVER
PREDICTIONS .......................... 85
DISTRIBUTING CALCULATIONS ON
SEVERAL PCS ....................... 193
DRAWING A COMPUTATION/FOCUS
ZONE.................................... 137
DRAWING A CW MEASUREMENT PATH
........................................... 388
INDEX


470/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


DROPPING A STATION FROM A
TEMPLATE............................. 123
DROPPING A STATION ON AN EXISTING
SITE ..................................... 124
DXF DATA FORMAT ..................... 78
E
EDITING A VECTOR OBJECT........... 97
EDITING CLUTTER OR TRAFFIC
RASTER POLYGONS.................. 95
EDITING CONTENTS IN TABLES ...... 45
EDITING PROFILE VALUES
(MICROWAVE LINKS)............... 456
EMBEDDING - LINKING COMPARISON
............................................. 91
EMBEDDING GEOGRAPHIC DATA.... 91
ERDAS IMAGINE DATA FORMAT...... 79
EXAMPLES OF CDMA/CDMA2000
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC DATA .. 341
EXAMPLES OF CELL TYPES ......... 208
EXAMPLES OF FILTER IN TABLES.... 50
EXAMPLES OF GROUPING BY......... 54
EXAMPLES OF GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC DATA .. 228
EXAMPLES OF UMTS USER PROFILE
TRAFFIC DATA ....................... 281
EXPORTING A CDMA/CDMA2000
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAP ... 338
EXPORTING A CDMA/CDMA2000
LIVE TRAFFIC MAP.................. 343
EXPORTING A CDMA/CDMA2000
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAP.... 341
EXPORTING A CLUTTER CLASS MAP
........................................... 100
EXPORTING A CLUTTER HEIGHT MAP
........................................... 102
EXPORTING A DTM MAP............ 102
EXPORTING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAP ... 225
EXPORTING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
LIVE TRAFFIC MAP.................. 231
EXPORTING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER DENSITY TRAFFIC MAP ... 233
EXPORTING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAP.... 229
EXPORTING A POINT ANALYSIS STUDY
........................................... 192
EXPORTING A PROJECT IN A MS
ACCESS DATABASE................ 439
EXPORTING A PROJECT IN A MS SQL
SERVER DATABASE ................ 440
EXPORTING A PROJECT IN A SYBASE
DATABASE ............................ 442
EXPORTING A PROJECT IN AN
ORACLE DATABASE................ 441
EXPORTING A SITE LIST.............. 112
EXPORTING A UMTS ENVIRONMENT
TRAFFIC MAP......................... 279
EXPORTING A UMTS LIVE TRAFFIC
MAP ..................................... 284
EXPORTING A UMTS USER PROFILE
TRAFFIC MAP......................... 282
EXPORTING A VECTOR OBJECT ... 103
EXPORTING CAE DATA FROM THE
CURRENT PROJECT................ 422
EXPORTING CALCULATION EVENTS IN
A LOG FILE.............................194
EXPORTING CW MEASUREMENT
PATHS ..................................396
EXPORTING MAIN PATH LOSS
MATRICES .............................184
EXPORTING MAPS TO EXTERNAL FILES
..............................................40
EXPORTING MAPS TO OTHER
APPLICATIONS .........................41
EXPORTING PREDICTION COVERAGES
............................................186
EXPORTING PREDICTION REPORTS
............................................186
EXPORTING TEST MOBILE DATA
PATHS ..................................405
EXPORTING THE
COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE TO A
FILE......................................138
EXPORTING THE CW MEASUREMENT
WINDOW................................398
EXPORTING THE
GSM/GPRS/EDGE CUMULATED
TRAFFIC................................233
EXPORTING THE TEST MOBILE DATA
WINDOW................................407
EXPORTING USER CONFIGURATION TO
AN EXTERNAL FILE..................437
F
FILTERING DATA IN A POLYGON......56
FILTERING POINTS ALONG CW
MEASUREMENT PATHS ............394
FILTERING POINTS ALONG TEST
MOBILE DATA PATHS...............404
FILTERING RADIO DATA.................50
FILTERING SITE LISTS .................113
FINDING INTERFERERS OF A GIVEN
RECEIVER (MICROWAVE LINKS) 456
FINDING RECEIVERS INTERFERED BY
A TRANSMITTER (MICROWAVE
LINKS) ..................................457
FOCUSING ON A SPECIFIC FIELD
ALONG A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH
............................................404
FREQUENCIES OVERVIEW.........199
G
GENERAL PRESENTATION .............23
GENERATOR INITIALISATION - REPLAY
DIFFERENCES
(CDMA/CDMA2000) ...........347
GENERATOR INITIALISATION - REPLAY
DIFFERENCES (UMTS) ...........288
GENERIC MAPS OVERVIEW..........88
GEO DATA TYPE SUPPORTED ........71
GETTING DISTANCES AROUND SITES
............................................110
GETTING DISTANCES ON THE MAP..38
GROUPING GEO DATA FILES IN
DISPLAY FOLDER......................93
GSM/GPRS/EDGE MULTI-SERVICE
TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY
OVERVIEW............................223
GSM/GPRS/EDGE PROJECTS
OVERVIEW............................197
GSM/GPRS/EDGE PROJECTS
PROTOCOL............................ 198
GSM/GPRS/EDGE RESOURCES
ALLOCATION OVERVIEW........ 238
GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC
ANALYSIS OVERVIEW............ 234
GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC
CAPTURE OUTPUTS................ 235
GSM/GPRS/EDGE TRAFFIC
MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW ..... 216
H
HIERARCHICAL CELLS OVERVIEW
........................................... 204
HOW TO ACCESS THE PROPERTIES OF
ANY OBJECT OR GROUP OF
OBJECTS ................................ 64
HOW TO BE AUTOMATICALLY PLACED
IN THE FIND SITE BOX............... 64
HOW TO CHANGE GLOBALLY A VALUE
FOR ALL THE TRANSMITTER....... 64
HOW TO CHANGE GLOBALLY DISPLAY
PROPERTIES OF OBJECTS ......... 66
HOW TO CHANGE GLOBALLY THE
NAMES OF ALL THE SITES.......... 65
HOW TO CUSTOMISE THE COLUMNS
DISPLAYED IN A TABLE.............. 66
HOW TO CUSTOMISE THE TABLE
STYLE .................................... 66
HOW TO DEFINE THE DEFAULT
SERVER FOR DISTRIBUTED
COMPUTING ............................ 67
HOW TO DELETE ALL SITES AND THEIR
TRANSMITTERS IN ONE SHOT..... 64
HOW TO DISPLAY CITY POINTS AND
THEIR NAMES ON THE MAP ........ 67
HOW TO DISPLAY SCRAMBLING
CODES ON THE MAP ................. 67
HOW TO FILTER DATA RAPIDLY...... 65
HOW TO FIND EASILY A SITE ON THE
MAP ....................................... 64
HOW TO FIND EASILY AN OBJECT BY
ITS NAME IN A FOLDER.............. 65
HOW TO FIND EASILY AN OBJECT IN A
TABLE .................................... 66
HOW TO FIND EASILY AN OBJECT ON
THE MAP................................. 66
HOW TO IMPORT GEO DATA EASILY 64
HOW TO OBTAIN A LINK BUDGET .... 67
HOW TO OPEN OR CLOSE RAPIDLY A
FOLDER.................................. 65
HOW TO PREDICT SIGNAL LEVEL ON A
ROAD ..................................... 66
HOW TO USE WILDCARD CHARACTERS
TO FILTER TEXT-FORMAT FIELDS 65
HOW TO WORK ON A SET OF SITES
SELECTED BY A POLYGON......... 66
HOW TO WORK ONLY ON "LIVE" SITES
............................................. 65
HSNS OVERVIEW.................... 201
I
IMPORT MSI PLANET DATA
OVERVIEW............................ 425
IMPORT/EXPORT SPECIFIC ALCATEL
DATA OVERVIEW.................. 419
IMPORTING A CDMA/CDMA2000
INDEX


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 471/476


ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAP ... 337
IMPORTING A CDMA/CDMA2000
LIVE TRAFFIC MAP.................. 342
IMPORTING A CDMA/CDMA2000
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAP.... 339
IMPORTING A CLUTTER CLASS FILE 80
IMPORTING A CLUTTER HEIGHT FILE82
IMPORTING A CW MEASUREMENT
PATH.................................... 389
IMPORTING A DTM MAP............... 83
IMPORTING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAP ... 224
IMPORTING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
LIVE TRAFFIC MAP.................. 230
IMPORTING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER DENSITY TRAFFIC MAP ... 232
IMPORTING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAP.... 226
IMPORTING A MSI PLANET
ANTENNA DATABASE .............. 429
IMPORTING A MSI PLANET
CARRIER DATABASE ............... 430
IMPORTING A MSI PLANET
NEIGHBOUR DATABASE........... 430
IMPORTING A MSI PLANET
NETWORK............................. 429
IMPORTING A POPULATION MAP..... 86
IMPORTING A SITE LIST............... 113
IMPORTING A TEST MOBILE DATA PATH
........................................... 399
IMPORTING A UMTS ENVIRONMENT
TRAFFIC MAP......................... 278
IMPORTING A UMTS LIVE TRAFFIC
MAP ..................................... 283
IMPORTING A UMTS USER PROFILE
TRAFFIC MAP......................... 280
IMPORTING A VECTOR FILE ........... 84
IMPORTING ANALOGUE
MEASUREMENT FILES ............. 419
IMPORTING ANTENNA PATTERNS . 116
IMPORTING CAE DATA IN AN
EXISTING PROJECT................. 421
IMPORTING DIGITAL MEASUREMENT
FILES.................................... 419
IMPORTING MSI PLANET CW
MEASUREMENT...................... 432
IMPORTING MSI PLANET
GEOGRAPHIC DATA ................ 428
IMPORTING MSI PLANET PATH
LOSS MATRICES..................... 431
IMPORTING MSI PLANET
PROPAGATION MODELS .......... 431
IMPORTING MSI PLANET TEXT
DATA FILES ........................... 428
IMPORTING NEW ALCATEL ANTENNAS
IN AN EXISTING NETWORK ....... 420
IMPORTING SCANNED IMAGES ....... 85
IMPORTING SEVERAL CW
MEASUREMENT PATHS............ 390
IMPORTING SEVERAL TEST MOBILE
DATA PATHS.......................... 400
IMPORTING THE
COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE FROM
A FILE................................... 138
IMPORTING USER CONFIGURATION
FROM AN EXTERNAL FILE ........ 438
INSTALLING DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING
SERVER ..................................27
INSTALLING SEVERAL ANTENNAS ON A
TRANSMITTER........................121
INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS IN
MICROWAVE LINKS DEFINITIONS
............................................456
INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS ON
MICROWAVE LINKS .................457
ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION
AUGUST................................461
ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION
FEBRUARY ............................460
ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION
MAY.....................................460
ITU ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION
NOVEMBER ...........................461
ITU RAIN ZONES AMERICA........462
ITU RAIN ZONES ASIA ..............464
ITU RAIN ZONES EUROPE AND
AFRICA.................................463
ITU VAPOUR DENSITY ON EARTH.459
L
LISTING ALL MICROWAVE LINKS OF A
NETWORK..............................452
LISTING ALL SIGNAL AND C/I LEVELS
AT A POINT ............................189
LOADING DATA FROM A DATABASE
............................................443
LOCATING ANY POINT ON THE MAP .60
LOCATING ANY SITE ON THE MAP ...60
LOCATING ANY VECTOR ON THE MAP
..............................................61
LOCKING COVERAGE STUDIES .....180
LOCKING PATH LOSS RESULTS.....183
M
MANAGING A MULTI-SECTORED
STATION................................124
MANAGING A SITE LIST................112
MANAGING AND DISPLAYING LEGENDS
..............................................57
MANAGING BSIC DOMAINS AND
GROUPS................................203
MANAGING BTS EQUIPMENT.......129
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000
CELL PROPERTIES..................327
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAPS ..337
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 LIVE
TRAFFIC MAPS .......................343
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000
PREDICTION DISPLAY ..............364
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000
RADIO DATA OVERVIEW.........324
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000
SIMULATION PROPERTIES ........345
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000
SIMULATION RESULTS ON THE MAP
............................................358
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE
EQUIPMENT ...........................325
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA2000
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAPS ..340
MANAGING CELL TYPES ..............206
MANAGING CHANNEL ELEMENT
CONSUMPTION PER
CDMA/CDMA2000 SITE
EQUIPMENT........................... 326
MANAGING CHANNEL ELEMENT
CONSUMPTION PER UMTS SITE
EQUIPMENT........................... 265
MANAGING CLUTTER HEIGHT MAPS 83
MANAGING CONTENTS IN TABLES .. 44
MANAGING DISPLAY ON A CW
MEASUREMENT PATH ............. 395
MANAGING DISPLAY ON A TEST
MOBILE DATA PATH ................ 404
MANAGING DTM MAPS................ 84
MANAGING FEEDER EQUIPMENT.. 128
MANAGING FREQUENCY BANDS... 199
MANAGING FREQUENCY DOMAINS
AND GROUPS......................... 200
MANAGING GENERIC MAPS ........... 90
MANAGING GEOGRAPHIC DATA
OVERVIEW.............................. 71
MANAGING GLOBALLY
CDMA/CDMA2000
ENVIRONMENT TYPES............. 335
MANAGING GLOBALLY
CDMA/CDMA2000 RADIO
CONFIGURATIONS.................. 332
MANAGING GLOBALLY
CDMA/CDMA2000 SERVICES
........................................... 330
MANAGING GLOBALLY
CDMA/CDMA2000 USER
PROFILES ............................. 334
MANAGING GLOBALLY
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
ENVIRONMENT TYPES............. 223
MANAGING GLOBALLY
GSM/GPRS/EDGE MOBILITY
TYPES .................................. 219
MANAGING GLOBALLY
GSM/GPRS/EDGE SERVICES
........................................... 217
MANAGING GLOBALLY
GSM/GPRS/EDGE TERMINALS
........................................... 220
MANAGING GLOBALLY
GSM/GPRS/EDGE USER
PROFILES ............................. 221
MANAGING GLOBALLY UMTS
ENVIRONMENT TYPES............. 276
MANAGING GLOBALLY UMTS
MOBILITY TYPES .................... 271
MANAGING GLOBALLY UMTS
SERVICES ............................. 270
MANAGING GLOBALLY UMTS
TERMINALS ........................... 273
MANAGING GLOBALLY UMTS USER
PROFILES ............................. 274
MANAGING GPRS/EDGE
EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES ........ 214
MANAGING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAPS.. 224
MANAGING GSM/GPRS/EDGE LIVE
TRAFFIC MAPS....................... 230
MANAGING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
RADIO DATA OVERVIEW ........ 203
MANAGING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER DENSITY TRAFFIC MAPS.. 232
INDEX


472/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


MANAGING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
USER PROFILE TRAFFIC MAPS.. 227
MANAGING HCS LAYERS........... 204
MANAGING HSN DOMAINS AND
GROUPS ............................... 201
MANAGING MEASUREMENTS
OVERVIEW............................ 387
MANAGING OBJECT VISIBILITY....... 43
MANAGING POPULATION MAPS...... 87
MANAGING PREDICTION DISPLAY. 178
MANAGING PREDICTION RESULTS
OVERVIEW............................ 185
MANAGING PROPAGATION MODEL
FOLDERS .............................. 143
MANAGING RADIO EQUIPMENT IN A
DATABASE STRUCTURE........... 130
MANAGING RADIO EQUIPMENT IN
MICROWAVE LINKS................. 453
MANAGING RADIO NETWORK DATA
OVERVIEW............................ 107
MANAGING REPEATER PROPERTIES
........................................... 125
MANAGING SCANNED IMAGES ....... 86
MANAGING SITE ALTITUDES ........ 109
MANAGING SITE PROPERTIES...... 108
MANAGING SUBCELLS IN
TRANSMITTERS...................... 210
MANAGING TABLE DISPLAY ........... 46
MANAGING THE ANTENNA
PROPERTIES ......................... 114
MANAGING THE CLUTTER CLASSES 80
MANAGING THE DISPLAY OF A
MICROWAVE LINK PROFILE ...... 455
MANAGING TIMESLOT
CONFIGURATIONS .................. 205
MANAGING TMA EQUIPMENT ..... 128
MANAGING TRANSMITTER
PROPERTIES ......................... 119
MANAGING TRXS IN TRANSMITTERS
........................................... 243
MANAGING UMTS CELL PROPERTIES
........................................... 267
MANAGING UMTS ENVIRONMENT
TRAFFIC MAPS....................... 278
MANAGING UMTS LIVE TRAFFIC
MAPS ................................... 284
MANAGING UMTS PREDICTION
DISPLAY................................ 304
MANAGING UMTS RADIO DATA
OVERVIEW............................ 264
MANAGING UMTS SIMULATION
PROPERTIES ......................... 285
MANAGING UMTS SIMULATION
RESULTS ON THE MAP ............ 298
MANAGING UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT
........................................... 265
MANAGING UMTS USER PROFILE
TRAFFIC MAPS....................... 281
MANAGING VECTOR OBJECT
PROPERTIES ........................... 99
MANAGING VECTOR OBJECT SHAPES
............................................. 98
MANAGING VECTOR OBJECTS ....... 85
MERGING HEXAGONAL GROUPS OF
BASE STATIONS ..................... 124
MICROWAVE LINKS OVERVIEW .. 451
MIF DATA FORMAT ...................... 79
MODELLING SHADOWING IN
CDMA/CDMA2000 PREDICTIONS
............................................363
MODELLING SHADOWING IN
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATIONS
............................................352
MODELLING SHADOWING IN UMTS
PREDICTIONS.........................303
MODELLING SHADOWING IN UMTS
SIMULATIONS.........................292
MODIFYING ANTENNA PARAMETERS IN
TABLES.................................115
MODIFYING CLUTTER OR TRAFFIC
RASTER POLYGONS ..................96
MOVING A POINT OF THE
COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE....139
MOVING A TRANSMITTER ON THE MAP
............................................120
MULTI-USER PROJECTS OVERVIEW
............................................435
N
NAMING AUTOMATICALLY SITES ...108
NAMING AUTOMATICALLY
TRANSMITTERS ......................118
O
OPENING A CW MEASUREMENT
TABLE...................................393
OPENING A TEST MOBILE DATA TABLE
............................................403
OPENING DIALOGS FROM TABLES...45
OPERATING PRINCIPLES .............435
OPTIMISING THE LOADING OF
CLUTTER CLASS FILES...............80
ORGANISING RESULT OUTPUTS OF A
COVERAGE STUDY..................177
OTHER SUPPORTED FORMATS.......79
OVSF CODES AVAILABILITY........292
OVSF CODES MANAGEMENT ......291
P
PASTING A CW MEASUREMENT PATH
............................................388
PLANET GEO DATA FORMAT ....425
PN OFFSET ALLOCATION PROCESS
............................................382
PN OFFSETS OVERVIEW ..........379
POINT ANALYSIS PREDICTIONS
OVERVIEW............................187
POWER CONTROL
CDMA/CDMA2000 SIMULATION
CONCEPTS ............................348
POWER CONTROL UMTS
SIMULATION CONCEPTS...........288
POWER PARAMETERS IN
CDMA/CDMA2000..............328
POWER PARAMETERS IN UMTS..268
PREDICTING ON GIVEN
CDMA/CDMA2000 CARRIERS
............................................363
PREDICTING ON GIVEN UMTS
CARRIERS .............................303
PREDICTING SIGNAL LEVELS ON A CW
MEASUREMENT PATH..............394
PREDICTING SIGNAL LEVELS ON A
TEST MOBILE DATA PATH......... 403
PRINTING A MAP.......................... 40
PRINTING A POINT ANALYSIS STUDY
........................................... 192
PRINTING ANTENNA PATTERNS.... 117
PRINTING DATA TABLES................ 48
PRINTING PREDICTION REPORTS . 186
PRINTING THE ACTIVE WINDOW..... 36
PRINTING THE CW MEASUREMENT
WINDOW............................... 398
PRINTING THE TEST MOBILE DATA
WINDOW............................... 407
PROPAGATION MODELS OVERVIEW
........................................... 140
R
RADIO EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW .. 128
REFRESHING MAPS AND FOLDERS . 59
REMOVING A POINT IN THE
COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE.... 139
REMOVING A9155 ...................... 26
REMOVING DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING
SERVER.................................. 27
REMOVING THE POLYGON FILTER .. 56
RENAMING AN OBJECT ................. 42
REORGANIZE DATA AFTER
MODIFICATIONS ....................... 55
REPAIRING A BROKEN LINK ........... 92
REPEATERS OVERVIEW............ 125
REPLAYING A CDMA/CDMA2000
SIMULATION .......................... 347
REPLAYING A UMTS SIMULATION287
RESIZING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS
ZONE.................................... 139
RUNNING COVERAGE CALCULATIONS
........................................... 179
S
SAMPLE VALUES FOR SPM FORMULA
PARAMETERS ........................ 157
SAVING THE EDITED RASTER
POLYGONS............................ 101
SCRAMBLING CODE ALLOCATION
PROCESS.............................. 319
SCRAMBLING CODES OVERVIEW316
SELECTING A TRANSMITTER IN POINT
ANALYSIS.............................. 190
SELECTING PROPAGATION MODELS
........................................... 140
SELECTING THE POWER DEFINITION
ITEM IN POINT ANALYSIS ......... 190
SETTING A CDMA/CDMA2000
RADIO CONFIGURATION ......... 332
SETTING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
MOBILITY TYPE ...................... 218
SETTING A UMTS MOBILITY TYPE271
SETTING CALCULATION AREAS .... 173
SETTING CALCULATION RESOLUTIONS
........................................... 174
SETTING CDMA/CDMA2000
ENVIRONMENT PARAMETERS... 335
SETTING CDMA/CDMA2000
SERVICES PARAMETERS ......... 330
SETTING CODING SCHEMES
PARAMETERS ........................ 214
INDEX


3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01 473/476


SETTING COVERAGE PROPERTIES OF
A REPEATER.......................... 126
SETTING COVERAGE RESOLUTIONS
........................................... 176
SETTING DEFAULT
LENGTH/HEIGHT/OFFSET UNITS . 73
SETTING DEFAULT RADIO UNITS .. 107
SETTING DOCUMENT PRINTS......... 59
SETTING DONOR PROPERTIES OF A
REPEATER ............................ 126
SETTING GEO DATA PRIORITY ....... 94
SETTING GPRS/EDGE
TRANSMITTERS...................... 215
SETTING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
DIMENSIONING MODELS .......... 235
SETTING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
ENVIRONMENT PARAMETERS... 222
SETTING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
SERVICE PARAMETERS ........... 217
SETTING GSM/GPRS/EDGE
TERMINAL PARAMETERS ......... 220
SETTING MICROWAVE LINK
PROPERTIES ......................... 452
SETTING PROPAGATION MODEL
PRIORITY .............................. 141
SETTING SPECIFIC COVERAGE
CONDITIONS IN
GSM/GPRS/EDGE STUDIES 254
SETTING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES
OF A SITE.............................. 111
SETTING THE RECEIVER PROPERTIES
........................................... 170
SETTING THE TRANSMITTER
CDMA/CDMA2000 GLOBAL
PARAMETERS ........................ 326
SETTING TRANSMITTER ACTIVITY. 121
SETTING UMTS ENVIRONMENT
PARAMETERS ........................ 275
SETTING UMTS SERVICE
PARAMETERS ........................ 270
SETTING UMTS TERMINAL
PARAMETERS ........................ 272
SHARING PATH LOSS MATRICES
BETWEEN USERS ................... 446
SHP DATA FORMAT..................... 79
SOLVING A CONFLICT ON A DELETED
RECORD ............................... 446
SOLVING A CONFLICT ON A MODIFIED
RECORD ............................... 444
SORTING A FOLDER ..................... 53
SORTING AND FILTERING IN TABLES48
SPM CALIBRATION TAB WINDOW 160
SPM CLUTTER TAB WINDOW...... 158
SPM GENERAL TAB WINDOW ..... 149
SPM PARAMETERS TAB WINDOW150
STARTING A NEW PROJECT........... 29
STARTING A9155 FROM THE
COMMAND LINE...................... 437
STORAGE OF PATH LOSS MATRICES
........................................... 182
STUDYING DOWNLINK TOTAL NOISE
(CDMA/CDMA2000)........... 370
STUDYING DOWNLINK TOTAL NOISE
(UMTS)............................... 310
STUDYING EFFECTIVE SERVICE AREA
(CDMA/CDMA2000)........... 368
STUDYING EFFECTIVE SERVICE AREA
(UMTS) ...............................308
STUDYING INTERFERED ZONE
PREDICTIONS.........................256
STUDYING INTERFERENCES WITH THE
POINT ANALYSIS.....................257
STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT)
DOWNLINK (CDMA/CDMA2000)
............................................366
STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT)
DOWNLINK (UMTS) ...............306
STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT)
UPLINK (CDMA/CDMA2000).367
STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT)
UPLINK (UMTS) ....................307
STUDYING THE PROFILE FROM A
TRANSMITTER........................188
SUBCELL PROPERTY DETAILS......211
SUBSCRIBER CLUTTER WEIGHTING IN
CDMA/CDMA2000
ENVIRONMENT .......................336
SUBSCRIBER CLUTTER WEIGHTING IN
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
ENVIRONMENTS .....................223
SUBSCRIBER CLUTTER WEIGHTING IN
UMTS ENVIRONMENT ............277
SUMMARISING RESULTS PER CELL
(CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS)
............................................355
SUMMARISING RESULTS PER CELL
(UMTS PROJECTS) ...............296
SUMMARISING RESULTS PER MOBILE
(CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS)
............................................357
SUMMARISING RESULTS PER MOBILE
(UMTS PROJECTS) ...............297
SUMMARISING RESULTS PER SITE
(CDMA/CDMA2000 PROJECTS)
............................................355
SUMMARISING RESULTS PER SITE
(UMTS PROJECTS) ...............295
SUPPORTED DATABASES OVERVIEW
............................................439
SUPPORTED GEO DATA FORMATS
OVERVIEW..............................76
SYNCHRONISING DISPLAY IN
TABLE/MAP/CW MEASUREMENT
WINDOW................................397
SYNCHRONISING DISPLAY IN
TABLE/MAP/TEST MOBILE DATA
WINDOW................................406
SYNCHRONIZING VECTOR SELECTION
AND DATA TABLE ......................61
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ..............26
T
TECHNICAL SUPPORT ...................29
TEMPLATES PROVIDED .................29
TEST MOBILE DATA WINDOW
ACTIVATION...........................406
THRESHOLDS COLOURS AND
LEGENDS ................................57
TIFF DATA FORMAT .....................77
TIMESLOT CONFIGURATIONS
OVERVIEW............................205
TO CALIBRATE ONE VARIABLE......162
TRANSMITTER EFFECTIVE ANTENNA
HEIGHT SPM........................ 151
TRANSMITTERS OVERVIEW....... 117
TROUBLESHOOTINGS AFTER
INSTALLATION ......................... 28
TRX PROPERTY DETAILS ........... 244
TRX TYPES DEFINITION............ 205
TYPICAL VALUES OR LOSSES PER
CLUTTER CLASS (SPM).......... 159
U
UMTS ACTIVE SET CONDITIONS.. 271
UMTS AVERAGE SIMULATION
OUTPUTS ON CELLS ............... 300
UMTS CELLS DEFINITION......... 267
UMTS POWER CONTROL SIMULATION
INPUTS ................................. 286
UMTS PREDICTION STUDIES
OVERVIEW............................ 302
UMTS PROJECTS OVERVIEW... 263
UMTS PROJECTS PROTOCOL..... 264
UMTS SIMULATION CONVERGENCE
METHOD ............................... 290
UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON
CELL COMPONENTS................ 300
UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON
CELLS .................................. 300
UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON
MOBILE COMPONENTS ............ 301
UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON
MOBILES............................... 301
UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON
SITES ................................... 299
UMTS SIMULATIONS OVERVIEW284
UMTS SPECIFIC CONCEPTS....... 263
UMTS STANDARD DEVIATION OF
SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS
........................................... 300
UPDATING REPEATER PARAMETERS
........................................... 127
USER INTERFACE BASICS OVERVIEW
............................................. 35
USING A GROUP BY/SORT/FILTER
CONFIGURATION...................... 55
USING A GSM/GPRS/EDGE
TRAFFIC ANALYSIS ................. 235
USING A SITE AS A TARGET FOR POINT
ANALYSIS.............................. 191
USING EQUIPMENT TO COMPUTE
TRANSMITTER LOSSES............ 130
USING GENERIC MAP DATA IN
PREDICTION REPORTS.............. 90
USING ICONS FROM THE TOOL BAR 62
USING IRF IN MICROWAVE LINKS 458
USING POPULATION DATA IN
PREDICTION REPORTS.............. 88
USING RELIABILITY LEVEL IN
PREDICTIONS ........................ 172
USING REPEATERS IN CALCULATIONS
........................................... 127
USING SHORTCUTS IN A9155....... 63
USING THE CHANNEL SEARCH TOOL IN
GSM/GPRS/EDGE............. 253
USING THE GENERIC AFP INTERFACE
........................................... 246
USING THE PANORAMIC WINDOW... 37
USING THE RECEIVER ................ 188
INDEX


474/476 3DF 01955 6283 PCZZA Ed. 01


USING THE STATUS BAR TO GET
INFORMATION.......................... 61
USING THE TIPS TOOL TO GET
INFORMATION.......................... 58
USING THE UNDO/REDO COMMAND
............................................. 59
W
WALSH CODES AVAILABILITY....... 352
WALSH CODES MANAGEMENT ..... 351
WAYS TO GET ASSISTANCE........... 28
WCDMA/UMTS MULTI-SERVICE
TRAFFIC CARTOGRAPHY
OVERVIEW............................ 277
WCDMA/UMTS RESOURCES
ALLOCATION OVERVIEW........ 313
WCDMA/UMTS TRAFFIC
MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW ..... 268
WHAT'S INSTALLED WITH A9155... 26
WHAT'S NEW IN A9155 V6.2.1.....23
WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A
MS ACCESS DATABASE..........414
WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A
SQL SERVER DATABASE.........414
WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A
SYBASE DATABASE ................415
WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH AN
ORACLE DATABASE ................414
WORKING WITH COST-HATA MODEL
OVERVIEW............................146
WORKING WITH DOCKING OR
FLOATING WINDOW...................35
WORKING WITH DOCUMENT WINDOW
..............................................35
WORKING WITH ITU 370-7 MODEL
(VIENNA 93)..........................144
WORKING WITH ITU 526-5 MODEL
............................................143
WORKING WITH LONGLEY-RICE
MODEL ................................. 143
WORKING WITH OKUMURA-HATA
MODEL OVERVIEW ............... 145
WORKING WITH STANDARD
PROPAGATION MODEL OVERVIEW
........................................... 148
WORKING WITH THE EXPLORER
OVERVIEW.............................. 41
WORKING WITH WLL (WIRELESS
LOCAL LOOP) MODEL............. 144
Z
ZOOMING AND PANNING ............... 36
ZOOMING IN THE CW MEASUREMENT
WINDOW............................... 398
ZOOMING IN THE TEST MOBILE DATA
WINDOW............................... 407





























ALCATEL SEL AG
Lorenzstrasse 10
D-70435 Stuttgart, Germany
USER MANUAL
A9155

RELEASE V6.2.1

AUGUST 2004
















A9155 User Support:

We are always interested in meeting our customers needs, in continuously improving our software and giving you the support you need in
order to successfully master your network planning.

If you encounter any problems with the A9155-software, please contact the ALCATEL hotline support
(available at German working days from 9:00 a.m. to 5 p.m. CET):

Tel.: +49 (0) 711 821 37234
FAX: +49 (0) 711 821 37281
e-mail: A9155.support@alcatel.de

Please help us in helping you in being as precise in describing your specific problem as possible. Thank you.